Sharp mx-m623 mx-m753 PDF

TopPage
SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMXM753/S1E
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL
SYSTEM
MX-M623 N/U
MODEL MX-M753 N/U
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
[6] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[8] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[9] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
[11] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
[13] SERVICE WEB PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
This document has been published to be used

SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING [9] MAINTENANCE

1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 1. Necessary execution items
2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i (Before and after maintenance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
3. Note for installation site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 2. Contents of the maintenance codes and
4. Note for handling PWB and electronic parts . . . . ii countermeasures
5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU . . . . . . . . . . iii (Relationship between various counter values
and display messages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
6. Note for handling the drum unit,
the transfer unit, the developing unit, 3. Maintenance system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
and the fusing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii [10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
7. Screw tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii 1. Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE 2. Operation panel section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
1. System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1 3. Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
2. Machine configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1 4. Manual paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
3. Combination of options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 5. Tray paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
6. Paper transport and duplex section . . . . . . . . 10-23
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
7. LSU section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
8. Photo-conductor section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
2. Functional specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
9. Toner supply section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS 10. Developing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
1. Supply system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
11. Transfer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
12. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
3. Definition of Developer and Drum life end . . . . .3-3
13. Paper exit section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
4. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 14. Drive section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 15. PWB section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
1. Identification of each section and functions . . . .4-1 16. Fan section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 17. Filter section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
1. General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1 18. Automatic document feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
2. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1 19. Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-107
3. Details of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2 [11] FIRMWARE UPDATE
[6] SIMULATION 1. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
1. General (Including basic operations) . . . . . . . . .6-1 2. Update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
2. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3 [12] ELECTRICAL SECTION
3. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7 1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
[7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 2. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
1. Self diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1 3. Signal list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
2. Trouble code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4 [13] SERVICE WEB PAGE
3. Details of trouble code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
4. Paper JAM code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-26 2. Details and operation procedures . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
5. Necessary works when replacing
the PWB and the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-30
[8] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
1. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
2. Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
3. Manual paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
4. Tray paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
5. Paper transport section, Duplex section. . . . . .8-14
6. LSU section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
7. Photo-conductor section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
8. Toner supply section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
9. Developing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
10. Transfer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
11. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33
12. Paper exit section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36
13. Automatic document feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38
NOTE
MX-M753N
FOR SERVICING 4) When connecting
Service Manualthe grounding wire, never connect it to the
following points.
It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.
1. Precautions for servicing
• Gas tube
1) When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, • Lightning conductor
the network cable, and the telephone line from the machine,
• A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
except when performing the communication test, etc.
grounding object by the authorities.
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
• Grounding wire for telephone line
2) There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use an
5) Do not damage, break, or work the power cord.
extreme care when servicing.
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not bend it
It may cause a burn.
forcibly or do not pull it extremely.
3) There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing.
6) Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
4) Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective
material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path. Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
5) When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to 7) Do not put a receptacle with water in it or a metal piece which
squeeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other may drop inside the machine.
driving sections. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
6) Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled. 8) With wet or oily hands, do not touch the power plug, do not
insert the telephone line jack, do not operate the machine, or
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch
inside the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or do not perform servicing.
an injury. It may cause an electric shock.
7) When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink
excessively. Do not get them in the eyes. 3. Note for installation site
If toner, developer, or ink enters your eyes, wash it away with Do not install the machine at the following sites.
water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary. 1) Place of high temperature, high humidity, low tempera-
8) The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to ture, low humidity, place under an extreme change in tem-
damage fingers when servicing. perature and humidity.
9) Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, Paper may get damp and form dews inside the machine, caus-
toner may pop and burn you. ing paper jam or copy dirt.
10) When replacing the lithium battery of the PWB, use a specified For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
one only. described later.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may be broken,
causing breakdown or malfunction of the machine.
11) When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to
it, be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may cause a breakdown or malfunctions.
CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING
2) Place of much vibrations
(200V series only)
It may cause a breakdown.
12) When the machine is moved over a bump, hold the grip on the
right side of the machine to lift and cross the bump over.
This is because the casters may be broken for a big bump.
2. Warning for servicing

1) Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that
meets the specified voltage and current requirements.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric
shock.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
3) Poorly ventilated place
2) If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal
An electrostatic type copier will produce ozone inside it.
smell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so
It may cause a fire or an electric shock. as not to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of
3) Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage such a machine may produce a smell of ozone. Install the
occurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may machine in a well ventilated place, and ventilate occasionally.
result.
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening,
grounding must be made.
MX-M753N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

4) Place of direct sunlight. 4. Note for handling PWB and electronic
Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may parts
undergo qualitative change.
When handling the PWB and the electronic parts, be sure to
It may cause a breakdown or copy dirt.
observe the following precautions in order to prevent against dam-
age by static electricity.
1) When in transit or storing, put the parts in an anti-static bag or
an anti-static case and do not touch them with bare hands.
5) Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

The organic photo-conductor (OPC) drum used in the machine
may undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as
ammonium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier may result
in dirt copy.
2) When and after removing the parts from an anti-static bag

(case), use an earth band as shown below:
• Put an earth band to your arm, and connect it to the
machine.
6) Place of much dust

When dusts enter the machine, it may cause a breakdown or
copy dirt.
7) Place near a wall

Some machine require intake and exhaust of air.
If intake and exhaust of air are not properly performed, copy
dirt or a breakdown may be resulted.
11-13/16"
(30cm) • When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform the
procedure on an anti-static mat.
11-13/16" 17-23/32"
(30cm) (45cm)
8) Unstable or slant surface

If the machine drops or fall down, it may cause an injury or a
breakdown.
If there are optional paper desk and the copier desk specified,
it is recommendable to use them.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and
lock the casters.
MX-M753N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU 7. Screw tightening torque
When repairing or replacing, be sure to observe the following The screws used in this machine are largely classified into three
items. kinds.
1) When repairing or replacing the LSU, be sure to disconnect These kinds are classified according to the shape of the screw
the power plug from the power outlet. grooves and use positions.
2) When repairing or replacing the LSU, follow the procedures The table below shows the kinds of the screws and the tightening
described in this Service Manual. torques depending on the use position.
3) When checking the operations after repairing the LSU, keep all When tightening the screws for repair or maintenance, refer to the
the parts including the cover installed and perform the operatable.
tion check. However, for the other conditions of tightening screws than speci-
4) Do not modify the LSU. fied on this table, or when a special care is required, the details are
5) When visually checking the inside of the machine for the oper- described on the separate page. Refer to the descriptions on such
ation check, be careful not to allow laser beams to enter the a case.
eyes. NOTE: Especially for the screw fixing positions where there is an
If the above precaution is neglected or an undesignated work is electrode or a current flows, use enough care to tighten
performed, safety may not be assured. securely to avoid loosening.
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the Screw kinds and tightening torques
transfer unit, the developing unit, and the Normal screws, set screws (including step screws)
fusing unit Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
When handling the OPC drum unit, the transfer unit, and the devel- torque torque torque
diameter fixed
oping unit, strictly observe the following items. (Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
M2.6 Steel plate 0.8 - 1.0 8 - 10 0.6 - 0.7
If these items are neglected, a trouble may be generated in the
M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
copy and print image quality.
M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
(Drum unit)
1) Avoid working at a place with strong lights. Tapping screws (for iron)
2) Do not expose the OPC drum to lights including interior lights Tightening Tightening Tightening
for a long time. Screw Material to be
torque torque torque
diameter fixed
3) When the OPC drum is removed from the machine, cover it (Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
with light blocking material. (When using paper, use about 10 M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
sheets of paper to cover it.) (Plate thickness
0.8mm or above)
4) Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other for-
M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
eign material on the OPC drum surface. (Plate thickness
(Transfer unit) 0.8mm or above)
1) Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other for- M3 Steel plate 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
eign material on the transfer roller. (Plate thickness
less than 0.8mm)
(Developing unit)
M4 Steel plate 1.2 - 1.4 12 - 14 0.9 - 1.0
1) Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other for- (Plate thickness
eign material on the developing unit. less than 0.8mm)
(Fusing unit)
Tapping screw (for plastic)
1) Be careful not to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign
material on the fusing roller and the external heating belt. Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
torque torque torque
2) Do not leave the fusing roller in contact state for a long time. diameter fixed
(Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
M3 Plastic resin 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
M4 Plastic resin 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
MX-M753N NOTE FOR SERVICING - iii

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
MX-M753N
Service Manual
1. System configuration
MX-FN15
FINISHER
AR-PN4A/B/C/D
PUNCH MODULE
SF-SC11 MX-M623N/M753N
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
MX-M623U/M753U
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL
MX-FN16 SYSTEM MX-LC10
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
AR-SC3
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
MX-FN14
FINISHER
MX-LCX3N
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
MX-PN10A/B/C/D
PUNCH MODULE
MX-SC10
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
MX-CF10
INSERTER
2. Machine configuration
MX-M623N/M753N MX-M623U/M753U
Copier STD STD
PCL printer STD OPT*1
PS printer OPT*1 OPT*1
Main body LCD COLOR WVGA 8.5" COLOR WVGA 8.5"
FAX OPT OPT
Scanner STD OPT*1
Filing (Print hold function) STD STD
HDD STD STD
DSPF STD STD
Automatic duplex STD STD
Security OPT*1 OPT*1
Internet Fax OPT*1 OPT*1
STD: Standard provision. OPT: Option

OPT*1: Product key target.
MX-M753N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

3. Combination of options
MX-M623N MX-M623U Product
Section Name Model name Remarks
MX-M753N MX-M753U key target
Paper feed LARGE CAPACITY TRAY MX-LC10  
system LARGE CAPACITY TRAY MX-LCX3N  
Paper exit INSERTER MX-CF10  
system FINISHER MX-FN15  
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER MX-FN16  
FINISHER MX-FN14   100 sheets staple
PUNCH MODULE AR-PN4A/B/C/D   For finisher and saddle stitch
finisher
PUNCH MODULE MX-PN10A/B/C/D   For 100 sheets staple finisher
STAPLE CARTRIDGE SF-SC11   For Finisher and
Saddle Finisher
STAPLE CARTRIDGE AR-SC3   For saddle
STAPLE CARTRIDGE MX-SC10   For 100 sheets staple finisher
Printer PRINTER EXPANSION KIT MX-PB13 STD  
expansion PS3 EXPANSION KIT MX-PKX1   
XPS EXPANSION KIT MX-PUX1  *1  The expansion memory board
is required.
EXPANSION MEMORY BOARD MX-SMX3   1GB
Required when the XPS
expansion kit is used.
BARCODE FONT KIT AR-PF1  
Image send FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT MX-FXX2 *2 *2
expansion STAMP UNIT AR-SU1 *2 *2
STAMP CARTRIDGE AR-SV1 *2 *2
INTERNET FAX EXPANSION KIT MX-FWX1   
NETWORK SCANNER EXPANSION KIT MX-NSX1 STD  
ENHANCED COMPRESSION KIT MX-EBX3  
Authentication/ DATA SECURITY KIT MX-FR22U    Commercial version
Security DATA SECURITY KIT MX-FR22    Authentication version
Application/ SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE KIT MX-USX1  
Solution SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE KIT MX-USX5  
SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE KIT MX-US10  
SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE KIT MX-US50  
SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE KIT MX-USA0  
APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE MX-AMX1   
APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE MX-AMX2 STD*3/  
EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE MX-AMX3 STD*3/  
KEYBOARD MX-KBX2 STD/*4 
STD: Standard provision. : Installable. *1: The printer expansion kit is required. *2: No support for some destinations.
*3: The SharpOSA Utility CD-ROM is not provided. *4: Standard for North America.
MX-M753N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 2

[2] SPECIFICATIONS
MX-M753N (8) EngineManual
Service speed (ppm)
a. Tray (1-4, LCC)
1. Basic specifications Paper 62 CPM 75 CPM
Paper size
type model model
A. Base engine
Plain A3, 11" x 17", 8K 34 39
(1) Type paper B4, 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 13.4", 39 45
8.5" x 13.5"
Type Desktop A4R, 8.5" x 11"R, 16KR 45 48
B5R, 7.25" x 10.5"R
(2) Engine composition A5R, 5.5" x 8.5"R 45 48
A4, B5, 8.5" x 11", 16K 62 75
Photo-conductor kind OPC (Drum diameter: 80mm)
Extra 34 39
Copying method Electronic photo (Laser)
Heavy A4, B5, 8.5" x 11", 16K (Tray 3, 4) 43 43
Developing system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush development paper Extra (Tray 4) 22 22
Charging system Charged saw-tooth method
Transfer system Transfer belt b. Manual paper feed tray
Cleaning system Counter blade
Fusing system Heat roller Paper 62 CPM 75 CPM
Paper size
type model model
(3) Dimension / Weight Plain A3, 11" x 17", 8K 34 39
paper B4, 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 13.4", 39 45
Outer dimension (W x D x H) 728 x 683 x 1213mm 8.5" x 13.5"
Machine dimension with the 1026 x 683mm A4, 8.5" x 11", 16K, B5 62 75
bypass tray extended B5R, 7.25" x 10.5"R 45 48
(W x D). A4R, 16KR, 8.5" x 11"R
Weight Main unit Approx. 190kg A5R, 5.5" x 8.5"R 45 48
Extra 34 39
(4) Warm-up
Heavy A4, 8.5" x 11", 16K, B5 43 43
paper Extra 22 22
Warm-up time 30 seconds or less
Pre-heat Yes Postcard HIGH *1 32 32
Postcard LOW *2 21 21
* It may differ depending on the machine conditions. OHP A4, 8.5" x 11" 43 43
A4R, 8.5" x 11"R 31 31
(5) First copy time
*1: Switched by the service simulation setting. Postcard is set Low
Engine 62 CPM model 75 CPM model
before shipment.
Platen 4.0 second 3.5 second
*2: After completion of discharge of paper outside of the machine,
DSPF 6.4 second 5.9 second
the next paper is fed. (The values are reference values.)
* It may differ depending on the environment. (9) Power source
* Measuring conditions: A4 (8.5" x 11")
NOTE: Check the shape of the power plug of the machine, and
(6) Engine resolution insert it into a power outlet of the acceptable shape.
Resolution Writing 100V series 200V series

Copy: 600 x 600dpi Voltage / Current 100 - 127V 16A USA:20A 220 - 240V 8A
Print: 600 x 600dpi Frequency 50/60Hz
1200 x 1200dpi
Power source code Fixed type Inlet
Gradation Equivalent to 256 gradation (Direct connection)
Power switch 2 switches
(7) Printable area
(Primary switch: in the front cover; Secondary
switch: the operation panel)
A3 289 x 412mm 11" x "17 271 x 424mm
B4 242 x 356mm 8.5" x "14 208 x 348mm (10) Power consumption
A4 202 x 289mm 8.5" x "13.5 208 x 335mm
B5 174 x 249mm 8.5" x "13.4 208 x 332mm 100V series 200V series
A5 140 x 202mm 8.5" x "13 208 x 322mm Max. Rated Power 1.8kW 1.84kW
Postcard 92 x 140mm 8.5" x "11 208 x 271mm Consumption *1
8K 262 x 382mm Executive 183 x 259mm Moving time to Pre-heat mode 1 minutes (default)
(7.25" x "10.5) Moving time to Sleep mode 1 minutes (default)
16K 187 x 262mm 5.5" x "8.5 132 x 208mm
*1: When the power supply is turned on, when the dehumidification
heater is OFF.
Void area Image loss Lead edge: 4mm or less
Rear edge: 4 mm or less
FR total: 8mm or less
MX-M753N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 1
B. Controller board C. Operation panel
(1) Controller board (1) Display device
CPU Power QUICC III-MPC8533E (800MHz) Size/resolution 8.5inch WVGA

Interface Type Dot matrix LCD, touch panel
Ethernet 1 port Display dot number 800 x 480 (WVGA)
Interface 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, Color Color
1000Base-T LCD drive display area (W x D) 184.8 x 110.88mm
Support TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/ LCD back-light Fluorescent lamp back-light system
Protocol SPX, NetBEUI, EtherTalk LCD brightness adjustment Yes
USB 2.0 (Host) The ports on the front and on the side of
* Simultaneous connection the rear section cannot be used
is inhibited. The total simultaneously. (Exclusive use)
current consumption must D. Scanner section
not exceed 500mA.
(1) Resolution/Gradation
USB 2.0 (high speed) Device 1 port
Scanner expansion I/F Yes Scanning Platen600 x 600 dpi
Memory Refer to the section on “(2) Memory, hard Resolution 600 x 400 dpi
disk”. (dpi) 600 x 300 dpi (Default)
Memory slot 2 slots (one is empty slot) DSPF 600 x 600 dpi
600 x 400 dpi
(2) Memory, hard disk 600 x 300 dpi (Default)
Memory capacity, HDD capacity In sending Internet Fax /
Scanner Fax
Resolution Direct SMTP
Copier memory Standard Memory 512MB (dpi) Standard
200dpi x 100dpi
(Local Memory) Expansion Memory No (203.2 x 97.8 dpi)
100dpi x 100dpi (halftone not
Max. 512MB (halftone not
allowed)
Printer memory Standard Memory 1GB allowed)
(System Memory) Expansion Memory 1GB Fine
200dpi x 200dpi 200dpi x 200dpi
Max. 2GB (203.2 x 195.6 dpi)
Codec memory 256MB Super Fine
(203.2 x 391 dpi)
HDD *4 80GB *1
Ultra Fine
*1: The HDD capacity may vary depending on the production date. (406.4 x 391 dpi)
600dpi x 600dpi 600dpi x 600dpi ---
Exposure lamp Xenon
Reading gradation 10bits
Output gradation B/W: 1bit
Grayscale: 8bit
Full color: RGB colors are 8bit each
(2) Document table
Type Document table fixed system (Flat bed)

Scanning area 297 x 432mm
Original standard position Left bottom reference
Detection Yes
Detection size Automatic detection
Dehumidifying heater Supplied as a service part
(Scanner section)
(3) Automatic document feeder
Type DSPF (Duplex single pass feeder)

Scan speed Monochrome (A4 / 8.5" x 11") Color (A4 / 8.5" x 11") only
Copy Single: 75-sheet/min. (600 x 300 dpi)
53-sheet/min. (600 x 400 dpi)
41-sheet/min. (600 x 600 dpi)
N/A
Duplex: 75-page/min. (600 x 300 dpi)
53-page/min. (600 x 400 dpi)
41-page/min. (600 x 600 dpi)
Fax / Internet Fax Single: 75-sheet/min. (200 x 200 dpi)
N/A
Duplex: 75-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi)
Scanner Single: 75-sheet/min. (200 x 200 dpi) Single: 75-sheet/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 8 bit)
Duplex: 75-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi) Duplex: 75-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 8 bit)
Original setup direction Upward standard (1 to N feeding standard)
Original standard Center standard (Rear one-side standard for random feeding)
position Face Up (1 to N Feeding standard)
Original transport Sheet-through method
method
Original size Standard size: (Refer to the "paper detection size")
Long paper: 1000 mm (Monochrome binary only)
Internet Fax 600 x 600 dpi: Max. 800 mm. When scan 400 dpi or more, long paper is not available.
Mix paper feed (Same series, same width paper) enabled
Random paper feed combination
Mix feeding available. (same system, same width)
Random feeding (feeding of different types / different widths)
Only the following combinations of 2 size types are allowed:
either A3 or A4 and either B4 or B5; either B4 or B5 and either A4R or A5 and 11-inch and 8.5-inch. AMS available.
Original copy weight Single: (Thin paper) 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2), (plain paper) 13 - 34 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
* Thin paper mode (36 pages/minute (A4, 8.5" x 11", 600dpi)) is set up for the thin paper.
Duplex: 13 - 28 lb bond (50 - 34 g/m2)
Max. loading capacity of Max. 150 sheets (21lbs Bond, 80g/m2), or Max. height: 1/2 inch, 19.5mm or less
documents
Un-acceptable originals OHP, second original paper, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper, paper with wrinkles, folds, or breakage, pasted paper, cutout
for feeding. document, document printed with ink ribbon, documents with perforation other than 2- or 3-holes (Perforated document by punch unit
is allowed.)
Detection Yes
Paper detection size Auto detection (Switching one type of detection unit)
(DSPF) Inch-1 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
Inch-2 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
Inch-3 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
AB-1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11"
AB-2 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11"
AB-3 8K, 16K, 16KR, A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11"
AB-4 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11"
AB-5 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 11"
* 5.5" x 8.5"R, A5R cannot be detected.
Paper feeding direction Right hand feeding
Finish stamp Option
Power source Provided from main unit
E. Paper feed section

(1) Type (4) Tray 3 (Main unit: multi-purpose tray)
Type 4-stage paper feed tray Paper capacity Plain paper: 500 sheets (80 g/m2)
(Parallel LCC + 2 tray + Multi manual paper feed) Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R
Dehumidifying heater Service parts (Supported by kit) 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14" (216 x 356),
8.5" x 13.5 (216 x 343), 8.5" x 13.4" (216 x 340),
(2) Tray 1 (Main unit: LCC left tray) 8.5" x 13" (216 x 330), 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
7.25" x 10.5"R, 5.5" x 8.5"R, 8K, 16K, 16KR
Paper capacity Plain paper: 800 sheets (80 g/m2) Paper type Plain paper, printed paper, recycled paper,
Paper size 8.5" x 11", A4 letter head, punched paper, colored paper,
Paper type Plain paper, printed paper, recycled paper, heavy paper*1, OHP, label sheet*1, tab paper*2
letter head, punched paper, colored paper Feedable paper weight Plain paper:
Feedable paper weight Plain paper: 16 - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) 16 - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
Paper size setting AB series: A4 Heavy paper:
when shipping Inch series: 8.5" x 11" 28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209g/m2)
Paper remaining Yes (Paper empty and 3 levels) Paper size setting AB series: A3
detection when shipping Inch series: 11" x 17"
Paper remaining Yes (Paper empty and 3 levels)
(3) Tray 2 (Main unit: LCC right tray) detection
Paper capacity Plain paper: 1200 sheets (80 g/m2) *1: 8.5" x 11", A4, B5 only
Paper size A4, 8.5" x 11", B5 (Setting by parts) *2: 8.5" x 11", A4 only
Paper type Plain paper, printed paper, recycled paper,
letter head, punched paper, colored paper
Feedable paper weight Plain paper: 16 - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
Paper size setting AB series; A4
when shipping Inch series; 8.5" x 11"
Paper remaining Yes (Paper empty and 3 levels)
detection
(5) Tray 4 (Main unit: 500 sheets paper feed tray) (3) Duplex
Paper capacity Plain paper: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) System Non stack system
Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R Paper size 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14" (216 x 356),
11" x 17", 8.5" x 14" (216 x 356), 8.5" x 13.5" (216 x 343),
8.5" x 13.5" (216 x 343), 8.5" x 13.4" (216 x 340), 8.5" x 13" (216 x 330),
8.5" x 13.4" (216 x 340), 8.5" x 13" (216 x 330), 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 7.25" x 10.5"R, 5.5" x 8.5"R, A3, B4, A4, A4R,
7.25" x 10.5"R, 8K, 16K, 16KR B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K, 16KR
Paper type Plain paper, printed paper, recycled paper, Type and weight of Plain paper:
letter head, punched paper, colored paper, paper which can be 16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
heavy paper*1 passed Heavy paper:
Feedable paper weight Plain paper: 28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209 g/m2)
16 - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) Paper type Plain paper, recycled paper, colored paper,
Heavy paper: letter head, printed paper, punched paper,
28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209g/m2) heavy paper*1
Paper size setting AB series: A3
when shipping Inch series: 11" x 17" *1: 8.5" x 11", A4, B5 only
Paper remaining Yes (Paper empty and 3 levels) (4) Paper exit
detection
Paper exit section Center section of the main unit
*1: 8.5" x 11", A4, B5 only
Paper exit system Face-down paper exit system
(6) Manual paper feed tray (main unit) Paper exit capacity 250 sheets (80 g/m2)
Paper exit paper size/ Thin paper:
Paper capacity Plain paper: 100 sheets (80 g/m2) weight 13 lb bond -16 lb bond (56 - 59g/m2)
postcard/OHP: 20 sheets Plain paper:
Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13.5", Heavy paper:
8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209g/m2)
7.25" x 10.5"R, 5.5" x 8.5"R, 8K, 16K, 16KR Shifter function No
Paper type Plain paper, printed paper, recycled paper, Paper exit detection No
letter head, punched paper, colored paper, Paper exit full detection Yes
heavy paper*1, thin paper, OHP*1,
label sheet*1, tab paper*2 (5) Copy functions
Feedable Paper Weight Thin paper:
13 lb bond -16 lb bond (56 - 59g/m2) Functions
Plain paper: Automatic paper selection Program call / registration
16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) Automatic magnification ratio Program name registration
Heavy paper: selection Document paper size input
28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209g/m2)
Paper type selection Document paper size registration
*1: 8.5" x 11", A4, B5 only Paper type setting Indeterminate paper size input
Auto tray switching Indeterminate paper size
*2: 8.5" x 11", A4 only
Rotation copy registration
Large rotated copy over A4 width 2-sided copy direction switch
2. Functional specifications Electronic sort Preview function
Job reservation Finish  Paper folding
A. Copy functions
Tray installation priority (Inside folding / Outside folding)
(1) Copy magnification ratio
Special functions
Copy magnification ratio Normal ratio 1: 1 0.8%
Binding margin (Left and Right/Top) Stamp
AB series 25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%,
Erase (Edge/Center/center + edge/ Page print
100%, 115%, 122%, 141%,
side erase) Watermark
200%, 400%
Inch series 25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%, Dual Page Copy (1 set 2 copy) Image edit
121%, 129%, 200%, 400% Center binding Photo repeat
Zoom 25-400% (DSPF: 25-200%) Large volume document mode Multi-page enlargement
Preset magnification 4 (Reduction 2/Enlargement 2) Setting change for each bunch Mirror image
ratio Tandem copy Centering
XY zoom Yes Cover paper insertion B/W reverse (B/W copy)
Tab paper insertion (UK not supported)
(2) Density * Tab Paper Insertion only. No Sharpness
copying on tabs allowed Quick file
Exposure mode Automatic, Text, Text/Printed Photo, Map OHP insertion (Inserted paper is Filing
(600 dpi) automatically selected.) Proof copy
Printed Photo, Text/Photograph, Photograph
Multi shot (2 in 1 / 4 in 1) Original count
(600 dpi)
Boundary line print Mixed original
Number of manual steps 9 steps
Layout Random
Toner save mode Yes
Page printing per original page MIX
* Automatic (AE), Text/Printed Photo
Book copy Combination with APS
Tab copy Combination with AMS
Card shot Slow scan
Stamp Document control (When the Data
Date print Security Kit is installed)
Text print Identification card copy (Limited to
Stamp the destination)
B. Printer function C. Image send function
(1) Platform (1) Mode
• IBM PC/AT Scanner • Scan to e-mail

• Macintosh • Scan to Desktop
• Scan to FTP
(2) Support OS • Scan to Folder (SMB)
• Scan to USB memory
Custom Custom • Scan to e-mail with Meta
OS PPD
PCL6 PS • Scan to Desktop with Meta
Windows 2000 • Scan to FTP with Meta
Yes Yes Yes • Scan to SMB with Meta
XP
XP x 64 Yes Yes Yes • Scan to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB
(Document Admin)
Server 2003 Yes Yes Yes
Fax • Fax to Fax (Manual)
Server 2003 x 64
• Fax to e-mail/Internet Fax/Fax (Relay transfer)
Server 2008 Yes Yes Yes
• Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB (Inbound routing)
Server 2008 x 64 • Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB (Document Admin)
Vista Yes Yes Yes Internet Fax • Internet Fax to Internet Fax (Manual)
Vista x 64 • Internet Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB
Windows 7 Yes Yes Yes (Inbound routing)
Windows 7 x 64 • Internet Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB
Mac 9.0 - 9.2.2 (Document Admin)
X 10.2.8
X 10.3.9
(2) Support system
No No Yes
10.4.11
Internet Fax
X 10.5 - 10.5.8 Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
X10.6-10.6.1
Corresponding SMTP POP server
server/protocol FTP (TCP / IP) SMTP server
(3) PDL emulation N/A
SMB ESMTP server
HTTP/HTTPS
PCL5e compatibility Compatible with PCL of Hewlett-Packard.
PCL XL compatibility Compatible with PCL of Hewlett-Packard. Network environment in SMB
PostScript 3 compatibility Compatible with PS3 of Adobe Systems.
Windows:
(4) Font Windows 2000, XP, XP x 64, Server 2003, Server 2003 x 64,
Vista, Vista 64, Server 2008, Server 2008 x 64, Windows 7,
Emulation Built-in fonts Option font Windows 7 x 64
PCL5e Roman outline fonts = 80 fonts Font for bar code Mac:
compatibility, PCL6 Line printer font (BMP) = 1 font = 28 fonts OS X10.2.8, X10.3.9, X10.4.11, X10.5-10.5.8, X10.6-10.6.1
compatibility
PostScript 3 Roman outline fonts –
(3) Support image
compatibility = 136 fonts
(Option) Mode Support image
Scanner File format TIFF
(5) Print channel (Monochrome) PDF
Encrypted PDF
USB USB.1.1: Windows 2000/Server 2003/XP/ XPS
Vista/Server 2008/Windows 7 only File format Color TIFF
USB2.0 (High Speed): Window 2000/XP/Vista/ (Color/ JPEG
Server 2003/Server 2008/Windows 7 only Grayscale) PDF
PSERVER / RPRINT for Print channel in PSERVER/PRINT mode to be
Encrypted PDF
NetWare environment used in netware environment
XPS
LPR UNIX LPR/LPD command-compatible print
Compression Non-compression
channel
system G3 (1-dimensional) =
IPP Print channel in compliance with IPP1.0
(Monochrome) MH (Modified Huffman)
PAP: EtherTalk Print channel to be used for Macintosh
G4 = MMR (Modified MR)
(AppleTalk) environment
Compression JPEG (High/Middle/Low)
FTP Equipped with the function to print data
system High compression PDF
received via built-in FTP server
(Color/ (When MX-EBX3 is installed)
NetBEUI Microsoft NetBEUI compatible print channel
Grayscale)
Raw Port (Port9100) 9100 TCP port (Raw Port) supported
Internet Fax File format TIFF-FX (TIFF-F, TIFF-S)
HTTP Direct SMTP Compression G3 (1-dimensional) =
(Web Submit Print)
system MH (Modified Huffman)
POP3 (E-Mail To Print)
G4 = MMR (Modified MR)
IPP, HTTP and POP3 support SSL. Fax File format N/A
Compression MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
(6) Environment setting system
Setting item General

Default setting Basic settings for using the printer such as the number
of copies and the print direction
PCL Setting of the PCL symbol and fonts
PS Setting of enabling/disabling of print in case of a PS
error, setting of binary data outputting
(4) Item number of registration items (2) Data operation by each function
Item No. of registration items Each folder in the

One-touch/Group 1000 items standard folder Temporary folder
Max. number of registration items for one Job /user folder
group (500 items) Sharing Confidential Sharing Confidential
Program 48 items storage storage storage storage
Memory box Total of bulletin board / confidential letter / Copy
Yes Yes
relay and broadcast: 100 items (Fax) Printer
Sender registration Fax, Internet Fax: 1 item Direct print
User list (Return address list) Scanner: 1,000 items (FTP pull)
Transfer table list Fax, Internet Fax: 1 item Direct print
No No
Sender selection 18 items (FTP push)
Item name list 30 items Direct print
File name list 30 items (USB pull)
Polling allow number Fax: 10 items Direct print Yes No
Yes No
(e-mail push)
Direct print
(Web push)
D. Document filing function/Print hold function No No
Direct print
(SMB pull)
(1) Basic function
Scan to e-mail/FTP
Document filing Scan to Desktop Yes No
Number of files that can be saved in 38GB Scan to SMB
the standard folder/user folder • 20,000 pages or 3,000 files (*1) Scan to USB
No No
Number of files that can be saved in 12GB memory
temporary file folders. • 10,000 pages or 1,000 files (*2) Scan to HDD Yes Yes No No
Number of folders that can be made Max. 1,000 folders Internet Fax
No No
as user folders. reception
Number of users which can be Same as that of account users of Internet Fax send Yes No Yes No
registered the main unit (1,000) Fax reception No No No No
Fax send Yes No
(*1): When the standard document (binary) is used. PC Fax / Yes Yes
(*2): When the standard document (gray) is used. PC-Internet Fax Yes No
send
Data input Yes No
Color Gray Monochrome Remote PC Scan No No No No
(N model only) (Binary mode)
Original gregfruit test sheet C test sheet C (3) Data operation contents
Operation
Operation content WEB
panel
Reprint Yes
Resend Yes
Delete Yes
Move Yes
Attribute change Yes
(Common/Confidential/Protection)
38GB 2,500 5,500 20,000 Confidential file setting Yes
12GB 800 1,700 10,000 (Password: max. of 8 digit numbers)
Confidential folder setting Yes
(Password: max. of 8 digit numbers)
File name change Yes
Creation of a folder Yes
File transfer to Local PC, FTP server Yes No
(Data backup)
Machine HDD occupying rate display Yes
Preview Preview before storing in Scan to N/A Yes
HDD
Checking stored image data Yes*1
Retrieval Yes
Changing file format Yes
Batch print Yes
Delete with the time specified Yes
Multi file selection (print only) Yes
* During the above setting on the operation panel, web access is

disabled.
*1: The print data displays only the first page.
(4) Reprint / resend limitation items for each job
User’s selection section

Reprint
Mode Job kind Selected color mode
Printer Printer No selection available Yes
Copy Copy No selection available Yes
Image Scan send Full color Yes
send Grayscale
Binary B/W
Internet Fax No selection available Yes
send
Fax send No selection available Yes
Document Scan to HDD • Full color Yes
filing • Grayscale
• Binary B/W
(Send allowed
mode)
• Binary B/W
(High capacity
mode)
Functional Basic function Number of copies, finishing, selecting

settings paper, duplex
for reprint Special modes Saddle stitch, 2 in 1/4 in1, margin shift,
stamp, document control (when data
security kit is installed), tandem print
User’s selection section

Resend
Mode Job kind Selected color mode
Printer Printer No selection available N/A
Copy Copy No selection available Yes
Image Scan send Full color Yes: Full color/
send Binary B/W
Grayscale Yes: Grayscale
Binary B/W Yes:
Binary B/W
Internet Fax send No selection available Yes
Fax send No selection available Yes
Document Scan to HDD Full color Yes: Full color/
filing Binary B/W
Grayscale Yes: Grayscale
Binary B/W Yes
(Send allowed mode)
Binary B/W No
(High capacity mode)
Functional Basic Format, resolution, image quality, transmission

settings function details settings, meta-data input
for resend Special Time specification, sender print, sender
modes selection, communication result table
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
MX-M753N
Service Manual
1. Supply system table

A. USA/Canada/South and Central America
No. Item Model Name Content Life Remarks
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) MX-753NT Toner Cartridge with IC Chip x1 83K Life: A4/Letter 6% document
(Toner: Net 1,700g)
2 Developer (Black) MX-753NV Developer x1 300K
(Developer: Net 1,050g)
3 Drum AR-620DR OPC Drum x1 300K
B. Europe/Australia/New Zealand
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) MX-753GT Toner Cartridge with IC Chip x1 83K Life: A4/Letter 6% document
(Toner: Net 1,700g)
2 Developer (Black) MX-753GV Developer x1 300K
3 Drum AR-620DM OPC Drum x1 300K
C. Asia
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) MX-753AT Toner Cartridge with IC Chip x1 83K Life: A4/Letter 6% document
(Toner: Net 1,700g)
2 Developer (Black) MX-753AV Developer x1 300K
D. Middle East/Agency
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) MX-753FT Toner Cartridge with IC Chip x1 83K Life: A4/Letter 6% document
(Toner: Net 1,700g)
2 Developer (Black) MX-753AV Developer x1 300K
2. Maintenance parts list

A. USA/Canada/South and Central America
Part name Model name Content Life Remark
Maintenance kit 1 MX-753KA Cleaner blade x1 300K
Drum separation pawl x4
Screen grid x1
Toner reception seal x1
Charging plate x1
Paper dust removal unit x1
Doctor cover unit x1
DV side seal F x1
DV side seal R x1
Toner filter x1
Side seal F x1
Side seal R x1
MC cleaner unit x1
Maintenance kit 2 MX-753KB Transfer belt x1 300K
Transfer roller x1
Transfer gear x1
Transfer CL roller x1
Upper heat roller kit MX-753UH Upper heat roller x1 300K
Fusing separation pawl (Upper) x6
Insulation spacer x4
Insulation bush x2
Lower heat roller kit MX-753LH Lower heat roller x1 300K
Fusing separation pawl (Lower) x4
Cleaner blade AR-620CB Cleaner blade x 10 300K
MX-M753N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 1

Cleaning kit MX-753CR Web rollers x1 300K
Pressure roller x1
Web bearing x2
Pressure bearing x2
Pressure SP (long) x2
Lower web rollers x1
Lower web pressure roller x1
Lower web pressure bearing x2
Lower web pressure SP (short) x2
Fusing unit MX-753FU1 Fusing UN (Heater lamp 120V) x1 —
MX-753FU Fusing UN (Heater lamp 230V) x1 —
DSPF roller kit MX-753DF DSPF paper feed roller x1 100K
DSPF pickup roller x1
DSPF reverse roller x1
Paper feed roller kit AR-620RT Main unit paper feed roller x1 100K
Main unit paper feed pickup roller x1
Main unit paper feed reverse roller x1
Staple cartridge MX-SC10 100 sheets finisher staple x3 5,000 times x 3 For MX-FN14
Staple cartridge SF-SC11 Finisher staple x3 5,000 times x 3 For MX-FN15/FN16
Staple cartridge AR-SC3 Saddle finisher staple x3 2,000 times x 3 For MX-FN16 (Saddle stitch)
B. Europe/Australia/New Zealand/Asia/Middle East/Agency

Maintenance kit 1 MX-753KA Cleaner blade x1 300K
Drum separation pawl x4
Screen grid x1
Toner reception seal x1
Charging plate x1
Paper dust removal unit x1
Doctor cover unit x1
DV side seal F x1
DV side seal R x1
Toner filter x1
Side seal F x1
Side seal R x1
MC cleaner unit x1
Maintenance kit 2 MX-753KB Transfer belt x1 300K
Transfer roller x1
Transfer gear x1
Transfer CL roller x1
Maintenance kit 3 MX-753KC Upper heat roller x1 300K
Crimping roller EX x1
Insulation spacer x4
Insulation bush x2
Upper separation pawl x6
Lower separation pawl x4
Web rollers x1
Pressure roller x1
Web bearing x2
Pressure bearing x2
Pressure SP (long) x2
Lower web rollers x1
Lower web pressure roller x1
Lower web pressure bearing x2
Lower web pressure SP (short) x2
Fusing unit MX-753FU Fusing UN (Heater lamp 230V) x1 —
DSPF roller kit MX-753DF DSPF paper feed roller x1 100K
DSPF pickup roller x1
DSPF reverse roller x1
Paper feed roller kit AR-620RT Main unit paper feed roller x1 100K
Main unit paper feed pickup roller x1
Main unit paper feed reverse roller x1
Staple cartridge MX-SC10 100 sheets finisher staple x3 5,000 times x 3 For MX-FN14
Staple cartridge SF-SC11 Finisher staple x3 5,000 times x 3 For MX-FN15/FN16
Staple cartridge AR-SC3 Saddle finisher staple x3 2,000 times x 3 For MX-FN16 (Saddle stitch)

3. Definition of Developer and Drum life B. Developer
end
When the developer/drum counter reaches the specified level.
When the developer/drum rpm reaches the specified level.
When either of the above reached the specified level, it is judged
as life end.
In an actual case, when correction or warm-up operation is per-
formed as well as output operation, the developer and the drum
rotates. Therefore, the developer/drum consuming level cannot be
determined only by the copy/print quantity. When, therefore, the
rpm reaches the specified level, it is judged as life end. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
To check the drum life, use SIM22-1/22-13.
The lot number is of 8 digits. Each digit indicates the content as fol-
lows.
Developer/drum counter Developer/drum rpm
Developer/drum 300K 840K rotations The number is printed on the right under side of the back surface of
the developer bag.
4. Production number identification 1: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
A. Drum cartridge 2: Number
Indicates the production year.
3/4: Number
Indicates the production month.
5/6: Number
Indicates the production day.
7: Hyphen
8: Number
Indicates the production lot.
C. Toner cartridge
A label with the management number on it is attached to the top of
the toner cartridge.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
The lot number is of 10 digits. Each digit indicates the content as

follows.
The number is printed on the flange on the front side.
1: Number
For this model, this digit is 2.
Destination No.
2: Alphabet Product name Color Incompatibility
Indicates the model conformity code.
3: Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
4: Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the production month. Production Production Serial No. Version
place year/month/day in production day
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
5/6: Number
Indicates the day of the production date. D. Environmental conditions
7: Number
(Humidity)
Indicates the day of the month of packing.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December. 85%
8/9: Number
60%
Indicates the day of the packing date.
10: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
20%
10 30 35
(Temperature)
Standard environmental Temperature 20 – 25 °C

conditions Humidity 65  5 %RH
Usage environmental Temperature 10 – 35 °C
conditions Humidity 20 – 85 %RH
Storage period Toner/Developer: 24 months from the
manufactured month (Production lot) under
unsealed state
Drum: 36 months from the manufactured month
under unsealed state

[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
MX-M753N
Service Manual
1. Identification of each section and functions

A. External view
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(14) (13) (12) (11)
No. Name Function/Operation

1 Saddle stitch finisher (MX-FN16)* Output device that enables the use of the staple function and offset function.
To install the finisher (large stacker), a stand/1 x 500 sheet paper drawer or stand/2 x 500 sheet paper
drawer is required.
Finisher (MX-FN15)* Output device that enables use of the staple function, offset function and pamphlet copy function.
To install the saddle stitch finisher, a stand/1 x 500 sheet paper drawer or stand/2 x 500 sheet paper
drawer is required.
2 Punch module (AR-PN4A/B/C/D)* Punches holes in copies and other output.
Requires finisher (MX-FN15) or saddle stitch finisher (MX-FN16).
3 Inserter (MX-CF10)* Paper set in an inserter can be inserted into output as covers or inserts. The inserter can be used to
staple output and punch holes manually.
4 Automatic document feeder This automatically feeds and scans multiple sheet originals. Both sides of two-sided originals can be
scanned at once.
5 Front cover Open to replace toner cartridge.
6 Operation panel This is used to select functions and enter the number of copies.
7 Power switch Turns the power on and off.
If the power does not come on when the power switch is turned on, check the main power switch to see
if it is turned on.
8 Center tray Finished sheets are deposited here.
9 Bypass tray Special papers (including transparency film) and copy paper can be fed from the bypass tray.
10 Tray 5 (when A4 large capacity tray is installed) This holds paper.
(MX-LC10)*
11 Tray 5 (when A3 large capacity tray is installed) This tray stores max. 3,000 sheets of 8-1/2" x 11" - 11" x 17" (B5 - A3) paper (80g/m2), eliminating the
(MX-LCX3N)* need for frequent supply of paper.
12 Tray 1-Tray 2 The trays hold paper. Approximately 800 sheets of standard 8-1/2" x 11" or A4 size paper (20 lbs. (80 g/
m2)) can be loaded in tray 1, and approximately 1200 sheets of standard 8-1/2" x 11" or A4 size paper
(20 lbs. (80 g/m2)) can be loaded in tray 2.
13 Tray 3 Tray 3 holds paper. Approximately 500 sheets of standard (20 lbs. (80 g/m2)) paper can be loaded in
this tray. Tabbed paper and transparencies can also be loaded.
14 Tray 4 Tray 4 holds paper. Approximately 500 sheets of standard (20 lbs. (80 g/m2)) paper can be loaded in
this tray.
*1: 1, 2, 3, 10 and 11 are peripheral devices. For information on these devices, see the explanations of the devices in the manual.
MX-M753N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 1

B. Internal operation parts
1 2 3 4 5
10
9 8
No. Name Function/Operation NOTE

1 Duplex unit Open this cover to remove a misfeed from the fusing unit area.
2 Fusing unit Toner images are fused here. The fusing unit is hot. Take care
in removing misfed paper.
3 Cover of the duplex unit Open when a misfeed has occurred in duplex unit.
4 Toner cartridge* This holds toner for printing. The toner cartridge must be replaced when
indicated on the operation panel.
5 Main power switch Keep this switch turned on when the fax option or Internet fax option is
installed.
6 Right side cover Open when a misfeed has occurred in the bypass tray or large capacity tray.
7 Upper cover of large capacity tray Open when a misfeed has occurred in the large capacity tray.
8 Left side cover release Push this knob up to open the left side cover.
9 Left cover of paper drawer Open this cover to remove paper misfed in tray 3 or tray 4.
10 Photoconductive drum Images are formed on the photoconductive drum. Do not touch or damage the
photoconductive drum.

C. Automatic document feeder and document glass
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
(9)
(8)

1 Paper feed roller This roller rotates to automatically feed the original.
2 Document feeding area cover Open this cover to remove an original misfeed or clean the paper feed roller.
3 Original guides These help ensure that the original is scanned correctly.
Adjust the guides to the width of the original.
4 Document feeder tray Place originals in this tray. 1-sided originals must be placed face up.
5 Original exit tray Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning.
6 Scanning area Originals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned here.
7 Original size detector This detects the size of an original placed on the document glass.
8 Reversing tray During scanning of a 2-sided original, the original is temporarily output to this tray in order to be turned over for scanning
of the reverse side.
9 Document glass Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder.
D. Connectors
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

1 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine.
2 LAN connector Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network.
For the LAN cable, use a shielded type cable.
3 USB connector (B type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
A computer can be connected to this connector to use the machine as a printer.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
4 Service-only connector
5 Power plug

E. Operation panel
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (9)
JOB STATUS PRINT

READY
DATA
SYSTEM
SETTINGS IMAGE SEND
LINE
DATA
HOME
LOGOUT
(7) (8) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)

1 Touch panel Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display. Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of
operations. When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. This provides
confirmation as you perform an operation.
2 [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key Press this key to display the system settings menu screen. The system settings are used to configure paper tray
settings, store addresses for transmission operations, and adjust parameters to make the machine easier to use.
3 [JOB STATUS] key Press this key to display the job status screen. The job status screen is used to check information on jobs and to
cancel jobs.
4 PRINT mode indicators • READY indicator
Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
• DATA indicator
This blinks while print data is being received and lights steadily while printing is taking place.
5 Numeric keys These are used to enter the number of copies, fax numbers, and other numerical values. These keys are also
used to enter numeric value settings (except for the system settings).
6 [CLEAR] key ( ) Press this key to return the number of copies to "0".
7 [HOME] key Touch this key to display the home screen. Frequently used settings can be registered in the home screen to
enable quick and easy operation of the machine.
8 IMAGE SEND mode indicators • LINE indicator
This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax or Internet fax. This also lights during transmission of an
image in scan mode.
• DATA indicator
This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot be printed because of a problem such as out of paper.
This lights up when there is a transmission job that has not been sent.
9 [START] key Press this key to copy or scan an original. This key is also used to send a fax in fax mode.
10 [LOGOUT] key ( ) Press this key to log out after you have logged in and used the machine. When using the fax function, this key
can also be pressed to send tone signals on a pulse dial line.
11 [#/P] key ( ) When using the copy function, press this key to use a job program. When using the fax function, this key can be
used when dialing.
12 [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) Press this key to return to the initial operation state. Use this key when you wish to cancel all settings that have
been selected and start operation from the initial state.
13 [STOP] key ( ) Press this key to stop a copy job or scanning of an original.
14 [POWER SAVE] key ( ) / indicator Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy. The [POWER SAVE] key ( )
blinks when the machine is in auto power shut-off mode.
15 [POWER] key ( ) Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
16 Main power indicator This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.

F. DSPF
(1) Internal structure
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No. Name Function/ Operation

1 Pickup roller Picks up a document and feeds it to the document feed roller.
2 Document feed roller Performs the document feed operation of documents.
3 Separation roller Separate a document to prevent against double-feed.
4 No. 1 resist roller (Drive) Performs resist of document transport.
5 No. 1 resist roller (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the resist roller, and provides transport power of the resist roller to document.
6 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports document from No. 1 resist roller to No. 2 resist roller.
7 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the transport roller, and provides the transport power of the transport roller to
document.
8 No. 2 resist roller (Drive) Make synchronization between the lead edge of a document and the scan start position.
9 No. 2 resist roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the resist roller, and provides transport power of the resist roller to document.
10 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports document from the platen roller to the transport roller 3.
11 Transport roller 2 (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the transport roller and provides transport power of the transport roller to document.
12 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports document from the transport roller 2 to the document exit roller.
13 Transport roller 3 (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the transport roller and provides transport power of the transport roller to document.
14 Document exit roller (Drive) Discharges document.
15 Document exit roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the document exit roller and provides transport power of the document exit roller to
document.
(2) Sensors, switches
SCOV
SPED1
SPPD1
SPPD2 SPRDMD STUD
SPLS2
SPLS1
STLD
SPWS
SPOD
SPPD3 SPED2
SOCD SPPD5
SLCOV
SPPD4
Signal name Name Function/Operation Type

SCOV DSPF upper door open/close sensor Detects open/close of the upper door. Transmission type
SLCOV DSPF lower door open/close sensor Detects open/close of the lower door. Micro switch
SOCD DSPF open/close sensor Detects open/close of the DSPF unit. Transmission type
SPED1 DSPF document upper limit sensor Detects the upper limit of the DSPF document. Transmission type
SPED2 DSPF document empty sensor Detects document empty in the document feed tray. Transmission type
SPLS1 DSPF document length detection short sensor Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper. Transmission type
SPLS2 DSPF document length detection long sensor Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper. Transmission type
SPOD DSPF document exit sensor Detects document exit of the document. Transmission type
SPPD1 DSPF document pass sensor 1 Detects pass of the document. Transmission type
SPRDMD DSPF document random sensor Detects the document size in random document feed. Transmission type
SPWS DSPF document width sensor Detects the document width of the document feed tray upper. Volume resistor
STLD DSPF document feed tray lower limit sensor Detects the lower limit of the document feed tray. Transmission type
STUD DSPF document feed tray upper limit sensor Detects the upper limit of the document feed tray. Transmission type

(3) Motors, clutches, solenoids, PWB and lamps
SPFFAN
SPFM
STRC
SPFC SPUM
STRRC SPOM
SRRC SLUM
4 2
1
3
DSPF COPY LAMP
LUMP
Signal name Name Type Function/Operation

DSPF COPY LAMP DSPF copy lamp Xenon lamp Radiates light onto a document to allow the CCD to scan document
images.
SLUM DSPF lift-up motor PM step motor Lifts up or moves down the document feed tray.
SPFC DSPF document feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the rollers in the document feed section.
SPFFAN DSPF cooling fan motor DC brush-less motor Cools the motors and the clutches.
SPFM DSPF transport motor Hybrid step motor Drives the transport roller.
SPOM DSPF document exit motor PM step motor Drives the document exit roller.
SPUM DSPF document feed motor Hybrid step motor Drives the rollers and transport rollers in the document feed section.
SRRC DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of No. 2 resist roller.
STRC DSPF transport roller clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller 1.
STRRC DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of No. 1 resist roller.

1 DSPF control PWB Control PWB for DSPF
2 DSPF flash PWB Program ROM PWB for DSPF
3 DSPF driver PWB Driver PWB for DSPF
4 DSPF CCD PWB Scans document images.
5 DSPF CL inverter PWB Drives the copy lamp.

G. Sensor/detector
POD2 POD3
AINPD POD1
APPD1
MPED
MPLD2
MPFD1 MPLD1
PPD MPFPWS
MPFD2 MTOP1
APPD2 MPRD1 MTOP2
MPRD2
PFD2 LPPD
T2LUD
T1LUD
T1PPD T2PED
T1PED
M1PFD M1LUD
M1PED
M2PFD M2LUD
M2PED
Connector level
Signal name Name Function/Operation Type NOTE
“L” “H”
AINPD Duplex (ADU) paper entry detector Duplex (ADU) paper entry detection, Transmission Paper pass – Paper transport
detection of paper exit to finisher type system sensor
APPD1 Duplex (ADU) paper pass detector 1 Duplex (ADU) upstream paper pass Transmission Paper pass – Paper transport
detection type system sensor
APPD2 Duplex (ADU) paper pass detector 2 Duplex (ADU) midstream paper pass Transmission Paper pass – Paper transport
LPPD LCC paper pass detector Detection of paper entry from LCC Transmission Paper pass – Paper transport
type system sensor
M1LUD Paper tray upper limit detector Paper tray upper limit detection Transmission – Upper limit Paper feed tray
(Paper feed tray 3) (Paper feed tray 3) type detection system sensor
M1PED Paper empty detector Paper empty detection Transmission Paper Paper Paper feed tray
(Paper feed tray 3) (Paper feed tray 3) type empty present system sensor

Connector level
“L” “H”
M1PFD Paper pass detector Paper feed tray 3 paper pass detection Transmission Paper pass – Paper transport
(Paper feed tray 3) type system sensor
M2LUD Paper tray upper limit detector Paper tray upper limit detection Transmission – Upper limit Paper feed tray
(Paper feed tray 4) (Paper feed tray 4) type detection system sensor
M2PED Paper tray upper limit detector Paper empty detection Transmission Paper Paper Paper feed tray
M2PFD Paper pass detector Paper feed tray 4 paper pass detection Transmission Paper pass – Paper transport
(Paper feed tray 4) type system sensor
MPED Manual feed paper empty detector Manual paper feed tray paper empty Transmission Paper Paper Manual paper
detection type present empty feed unit
MPFD1 Manual feed paper pass detector 1 Manual tray paper pass detection Transmission Paper pass – Paper transport
type system sensor
MPFD2 Manual feed paper pass detector 2 Manual tray and LCC paper pass Transmission Paper pass – Paper transport
MPFPWS Manual feed paper width detector Manual feed paper width detection Volume – – Analog detector
resistor
MPLD1 Manual feed paper length detector 1 Manual paper feed tray paper length Transmission – Paper Manual paper
detection (Paper feed side) type present feed unit
MPLD2 Manual feed paper length detector 2 Manual paper feed tray paper length Transmission – Paper Manual paper
detection (Outside) type present feed unit
MPRD1 Paper feed tray 2 paper pass Manual feed/paper feed tray 2/ Transmission Paper pass – Paper transport
detector 1 LCC paper pass detection type system sensor
MPRD2 Paper feed tray 2 paper pass Manual feed/paper feed tray 2/ Transmission Paper pass – Paper transport
detector 2 LCC paper pass detection type system sensor
MTOP1 Manual tray pull-out position Manual paper feed tray pull-out position Contact type Storage – Manual paper
detector 1 detection (Storing position) feed unit
MTOP2 Manual tray pull-out position Manual paper feed tray pull-out position Contact type Pull-out – Manual paper
detector 2 detection (Pull-out position) feed unit
PFD2 Paper pass detector 2 Paper pass detection (Left door unit) from Transmission Paper pass – Paper transport
duplex (ADU)/ type system sensor
No.1, 3, 4 paper feed
POD1 Paper exit detector 1 Paper exit detection from fusing Transmission Paper pass – Paper transport
type system sensor
POD2 Paper exit detector 2 Paper pass detection from paper exit Transmission Paper pass – Paper transport
type system sensor
POD3 Paper exit detector 3 Paper exit detection to upper section Transmission – Paper pass Paper transport
paper exit tray (Full detection) type (Full system sensor
detection)
PPD Resist roller front paper pass Paper pass detection in front of resist Reflection Paper pass – Paper transport
detector roller type system sensor
T1LUD Paper feed tray upper limit detector Paper feed tray upper limit Transmission Upper limit – Paper feed tray
(Paper feed tray 1) (Paper feed tray 1) type system sensor
T1PED Paper empty detector Paper presence detection Transmission Paper Paper Paper feed tray
T1PPD Paper pass detector Paper pass detection from paper feed Reflection Paper pass – Paper transport
(Paper feed tray 1) tray 1 type system sensor
T2LUD Paper feed tray upper limit detector Paper feed tray upper limit Transmission Upper limit – Paper feed tray
(Paper feed tray 2) (Paper feed tray 2) type system sensor
T2PED Paper empty detector Paper presence detection Transmission Paper Paper Paper feed tray

LEDX
OCSW
MHPS
WEBEND1
TH_UM
TH_US
WEBEND2 TH-CL
HUD-RA
DSW-ADU PCS TH-RA
DSW-L DSW-F
TLS DSW-R
TNFS
TFSD
TNCA
TCS
HUD-DV
THPS2 TH-DV
T2SPD
T1SPD
DSW-DSK
TANSET
M1SS1
M1SS2
M1PWS M1SPD M1SS3

M1SS4
M2SS1
M2SS2
M2SPD
M2SS3
M2SS4
Connector level
“L” “H”
DSW-ADU Duplex (ADU) cover open/ Duplex (ADU) cover open/close Transmission Duplex Duplex Door switch
close detector detection type (ADU) door (ADU) door
open open close
DSW-DSK Left door open/close Left door open/close detection Transmission Desk left Desk left Door switch
detector (Desk section) (Desk section) type door open door close
DSW-F Front door open/close Front door open/close detection Micro switch Front door or Front door or Door switch
detector left door left door
open close
DSW-L Left door open/close Left door open/close detection Micro switch Left door, Left door, Door switch
detector front door front door
open, close manual
manual paper feed
paper feed unit close
unit pullout

Connector level
“L” “H”
DSW-R Manual feed open/close Manual feed open/close detection Micro switch Left door Manual unit Door switch
detector (NC) open or insertion
manual unit
pulled out
HUD-DV Developing humidity sensor Developing section peripheral Humidity – – Analog detector
humidity detection sensor
HUD-RA Room humidity sensor Room humidity detection Humidity – – Analog detector
sensor
M1PWS Paper feed tray paper width Multi paper feed tray paper width Slide resistor – – Analog detector
detector detection (Paper feed tray 3)
(Paper feed tray 3)
M1SPD Paper remaining quantity Paper remaining quantity detection Transmission – Remaining Paper feed tray
detector (Paper feed tray 3) (Paper feed tray 3) type paper remaining quantity
quantity 66% sensor
or less
M1SS1 Paper size detector Paper size detection by combination Contact Multi paper feed tray
(Paper feed tray 3) of ON/OFF of MISS 1 – 4 switch vertical size detection
(Refer to the separate
table in the “[11] SIGNAL
NAME LIST” (*1).)
M1SS2 Paper size detector Paper size detection by combination Multi paper feed tray
(Paper feed tray 3) of ON/OFF of MISS 1 – 4 vertical size detection
NAME LIST” (*1).)
NAME LIST” (*1).)
NAME LIST” (*1).)
M2SPD Paper remaining quantity Paper remaining quantity detection Transmission – Remaining Paper feed tray
quantity 66% sensor
or less
M2SS1 Paper size detector Paper size detection by combination Contact Multi paper feed tray
(Paper feed tray 4) of ON/OFF of MISS 1 – 4 switch vertical size detection
NAME LIST” (*1).)
NAME LIST” (*1).)
NAME LIST” (*1).)
NAME LIST” (*1).)
MHPS Scanner home position Scanner home position detection Transmission Home Sensor
sensor detector type position
OCSW DSPF open/close detector Trigger for document size detection. Transmission Close Sensor
type
PCS Image density sensor Detection of density of toner patch on Reflection – – Analog detector
the OPC drum type
T1SPD Paper remaining quantity Paper remaining quantity detection Transmission – Remaining Paper feed tray
quantity 50% sensor
or less
T2SPD Paper remaining quantity Paper remaining quantity detection Transmission – Remaining Paper feed tray
quantity 33% sensor
or less
TANSET Paper feed tray 1/2 Paper feed tray 1, 2 (Tandem tray) Transmission Pull-out Insertion Paper feed tray system
detection signal insertion detection type sensor

Connector level
“L” “H”
TCS Toner density sensor Toner density detection Magnetic – – Analog detector
sensor
TFSD Toner remaining quantity Toner hopper toner remaining Magnetic – – Other sensor, switch
sensor quantity detection sensor
TH-CL OPC drum temperature OPC drum peripheral temperature Thermistor – – Analog detector
sensor detection
TH-DV Developing temperature Developing section temperature Thermistor/ – – Analog detector
sensor detection humidity
TH-RA Room temperature sensor Room temperature detection Thermistor – – Analog detector
TH_UM Heat roller temperature Heat roller temperature detection Thermistor – – Analog detector
sensor (Center section) (Center section)
TH_US Heat roller temperature Heat roller temperature detection Thermistor – – Analog detector
sensor (Edge section) (Edge section)
THPS2 Transfer belt contact/ Transfer belt separation home Transmission – Contact Other sensor, switch
separation home position position detection 2 type
sensor 2
TLS Waste toner pipe lock Waste toner pipe lock detection Lead type – Lock (Tilt) Other sensor, switch
detector
TNFS Waste toner full sensor Waste toner full detection Magnetic Toner empty Toner
sensor presence
WEBEND1 Web end sensor Detects the upper web paper end Transmission – End
(replacement) type detection
WEBEND2 Web end sensor Detects the lower web paper end Transmission – End
(replacement) type detection
H. Switch
DSW-L
PWRSW
MPSW
DSW-F
DSW-R
Signal name Name Type Function/Operation

DSW-F Front door open/close switch Micro switch Front door open/close detection, Main charger power source, Developing bias
power line open/close
DSW-L Left door open/close switch Micro switch Left door open/close detection, Main charger power source, Developing bias
power line open/close
DSW-R Manual paper feed unit open/ Micro switch Manual paper feed unit open/close detection, Main charger power source,
close switch Developing bias power line open/close
MPSW Main power switch Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF all the power sources.
PWRSW Operation panel power switch Push switch Turns ON/OFF the main DC power source.

I. Clutch/solenoid
DGS
PSPS
MFPUS
HPLS
MPFGS
T1PFC
DSKPFC2
MPFC T1PUS
HPFC M1PUS
T2PFC
M1PFC
T2PUS
DSKPFC1
M2PFC
M2PUS
Signal name Name Function/Operation Type

DGS Paper exit gate solenoid Paper exit gate drive Electromagnetic solenoid
DSKPFC1 Paper feed tray 3/4 paper transport clutch 1 Paper feed tray 3/4 section paper transport roller ON/OFF control Electromagnetic clutch
DSKPFC2 Paper feed tray 3/4 paper transport clutch 2 Paper feed tray 3/4 section paper transport roller ON/OFF control Electromagnetic clutch
HPFC Horizontal paper transport clutch Manual paper feed, paper feed tray 2 section, LCC paper transport Electromagnetic clutch
roller ON/OFF control
HPLS Paper guide lock solenoid Lock the horizontal transport paper guide Electromagnetic solenoid
M1PFC Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 3) Paper freed tray 3 section roller ON/OFF control Electromagnetic clutch
M1PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Paper feed tray 3) Presses the paper pickup roller onto paper Electromagnetic solenoid
M2PFC Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 4) Paper freed tray 4 section roller ON/OFF control Electromagnetic clutch
M2PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Paper feed tray 4) Presses the paper pickup roller onto paper Electromagnetic solenoid
MFPUS Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed) Presses the paper pickup roller onto paper Electromagnetic solenoid
MPFC Paper feed clutch (Manual paper feed) Manual paper feed section paper feed roller ON/OFF control Electromagnetic clutch
MPFGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Manual feed gate solenoid open/close control. Electromagnetic solenoid
PSPS Separation solenoid OPC drum separation pawl drive Electromagnetic solenoid
T1PFC Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Paper freed tray 1 section roller ON/OFF control Electromagnetic clutch
T1PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Paper feed tray 1) Presses the paper pickup roller onto paper. Electromagnetic solenoid
T2PFC Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2) Paper feed tray 2 section roller ON/OFF control Electromagnetic clutch
T2PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Paper feed tray 2) Presses the paper pickup roller onto paper. Electromagnetic solenoid

J. Drive motor
POM1
POM2
ADM1
DVM
FUM
MIM WEBM2
WEBM1
PGM DM
TM1 RRM
ADM2
TM2 MM
TURM
T1LUM
TRM
M1LUM
VPM
M2LUM
T2LUM
Signal name Name Type Function/Operation NOTE

ADM1 Duplex (ADU) motor 1 Stepping motor Drives the paper transport roller 2 and the paper High speed
transport roller 19.
ADM2 Duplex (ADU) motor 2 Stepping motor Drives the paper exit rollers 20 and 21. Selection of Normal speed/High
speed
DM OPC drum motor DC brush-less motor Drives the OPC drum and the transfer section.
DVM Developing system DC brush-less motor Drives the developing section.
FUM Fusing motor DC brush-less motor Drives the fusing section.
M1LUM Paper feed tray lift-up motor DC brush motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray. Selection of Rotation mode/
(Paper feed tray 3) Brake mode
M2LUM Paper feed tray lift-up motor DC brush motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray. Selection of Rotation mode/
MIM Scanner (reading) motor Stepping motor Drives the scanner (reading) section.
MM Main motor DC brush-less motor Drives the paper feed trays 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the
manual paper feed section.
PGM Polygon motor DC brush-less motor Drives the scanner (writing) (LSU) unit mirror.
POM1 Paper exit motor 1 Stepping motor Drives the paper transport roller 16. Selection of Normal speed/High
speed
POM2 Paper exit motor 2 Stepping motor Drives the paper exit roller 1. Selection of Normal speed/High
speed
RRM Resist roller motor Stepping motor Drives the resist roller.
T1LUM Paper feed tray lift-up motor DC brush motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray. Selection of Rotation mode/
T2LUM Paper feed tray lift-up motor DC brush motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray. Selection of Rotation mode/
TM1 Toner motor 1 Stepping motor Transports toner in the toner hopper to the
developing unit./ Transports waste toner to the
waste toner section.
TM2 Toner motor 2 Synchronous motor Transports toner in the toner bottle to the toner
hopper.
TRM Resist roller front drive motor Stepping motor Drives the paper transport roller 15. Normal speed mode/ Resist roller
front paper transport timing
control (Warp amount control)
TURM Transfer separation motor DC brush motor Drives and separates the transfer belt. When executing the process
correction and detecting a jam,
the transfer belt is separated
from the OPC drum.
VPM Vertical paper transport motor Stepping motor Drives the paper transport rollers 4 and 13. Normal speed mode
WEBM1 Web motor Synchronous motor Drives the upper web roller
WEBM2 Web motor Synchronous motor Drives the lower web roller

K. Lamp/heater/gate
CL1
2
1
CCFT
HL
DL
WH1 DESK
WH2 DESK

CCFT LCD backlight Cold Cathode Backlight for LCD
Fluorescent Tube
CL1 Scanner lamp Xenon lamp Radiates lights onto a document for the CCD to scan the
document image.
DL Discharge lamp Lamp Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
HL Heater lamp Halogen lamp Heats the upper fusing roller.
WH1 DESK Dry heater Nichrome wire (18W) Dehumidifies paper on the paper feed tray 1 and 2. Service parts
(Paper feed tray 1, 2)
WH2 DESK Dry heater Nichrome wire (10W) Dehumidifies paper on the paper feed tray 3 and 4.
No. Name Function/Operation NOTE

1 Switchback gate Selects the paper route when discharging paper to the inner Switched not by the
tray and when switching back to the exit or finisher. solenoid drive but by the
automatic procedure.
2 Paper exit gate Selects the paper route to transport paper to the duplex (ADU) Driven by the solenoid
section or to discharge paper. (DGS).
3 Manual feed gate Specifies the lead edge position of paper when setting paper.
(Prevention against double feed and multifeed of paper into the
paper feed roller)

L. Fan motor
CFM-U1
CFM-U3
VFM-EX1 CFM-U4
VFM-EX2 CFM-U2
VFM-EX3
VFM-BKU
VFM-BKR
CFM-R1
VFM-BKL
CFM-R2
MFPCFAN
CFM-R3
CFM-DV
CFM-DC1
CFM-DC2

CFM-DC1 Power cooling fan motor DC brush-less motor Cools the DC power unit. PWM control
CFM-DC2 Power cooling fan motor DC brush-less motor Cools the DC power unit. PWM control
CFM-DV Developing section cooling fan motor DC brush-less motor Cools the developing section. PWM control
CFM-R1 Process cooling fan motor 1 (LSU/process section) DC brush-less motor Cools the LSU/ process section. PWM control
CFM-U1 Fusing section cooling fan motor 1 DC brush-less motor Exhaust heat from the fusing section. PWM control
(Paper exit/duplex (ADU) section) (Top surface)
(Paper exit/duplex (ADU) section) (Paper exit rear side)
(Paper exit/duplex (ADU) section) (Top surface)
CFM-U4 Fusing section cooling fan motor 4 DC brush-less motor Cools paper which is discharged to the PWM control
(Paper exit/duplex (ADU) section) (Paper cooling fan motor) inner tray.
MFPCFAN Controller cooling fan motor DC brush-less motor Cools the controller. PWM control
VFM-BKL Process exhaust fan motor 4 Exhaust ozone and heat from the process PWM control
DC brush-less motor
section.
VFM-BKR Fusing exhaust fan motor DC brush-less motor Exhaust heat from the fusing section. PWM control
VFM-BKU Paper cooling fan motor DC brush-less motor Cools the paper and the paper exit PWM control
section.
VFM-EX1 Process exhaust fan motor 1 (Front side) DC brush-less motor Exhaust ozone and heat from the process PWM control
section.
VFM-EX2 Process exhaust fan motor 2 (Center) DC brush-less motor Exhaust ozone and heat from the process PWM control
section.
VFM-EX3 Process exhaust fan motor 3 (Rear side) Exhaust ozone and heat from the process PWM control
DC brush-less motor
section.

M. Filter

1 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.
2 Toner filter Filters dispersed toner in the process section.

N. PWB
25
13
7
14
3
18
17
20
2 15
22
30
16 23
24
10
11
9 12
29
26
27
8
19 5
28
4
1
21
No Name Function/Operation
1 AC power PWB Controls the AC power.
2 CCD PWB Scans document images to converts analog signal to digital signal.
3 CL inverter PWB Drives the xenon lamp.
4 DC main power PWB Generates the DC power.
5 DC sub power PWB Energy-saving mode / Generates the DC power for the controller.
6 LVDS PWB Generates the LCD display signal.
7 LCD INV PWB Generates a high voltage for backlight.
8 MFP FLASH ROM PWB Stores the MFP control program.
9 MFP controller PWB Controls the image-related items and controls all over the machine.
10 Mother PWB Interfaces the MFP control PWB and the PCU PWB.
11 PCU FLASH ROM PWB Stores the PCU control program.
12 PCU PWB Controls the engine section.
13 Power SW PWB Outputs the ON/OFF control signal of the DC power source.
14 USB connector PWB For USB connecting.
15 Image density sensor PWB Detects the toner patch density in the image density correction.
16 HL PWB Controls the heater lamp.
17 Document size detection light reception PWB Generates the document size detection signal.
18 Document size detection light emitting PWB Generates lights to detect the document size.
19 High voltage power PWB (MC/DV/TC) Generates the main charger voltage, the developing bias voltage, the transfer voltage and the transfer
belt cleaning voltage.
20 Transfer bias high voltage PWB (TD CL) Provides the bias voltage for the transfer cleaning roller and the print mode.
21 Dehumidifier heater relay PWB Controls ON/OFF of the dehumidifier heater.
22 Discharge lamp PWB Generates light for discharging.
23 Scanner Flash PWB Stores the scanner control program.
24 Scanner control PWB Controls the scanner section.
25 Operation control PWB Controls the display operation panel.
26 Manual feed paper width detection PWB Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width.
27 Driver PWB Drives the motors.
28 Paper size detection PWB Detects the paper size.
29 Detector PWB (Paper feed tray 1, 2) Detects the paper empty and upper limit tray.
30 Photo-conductor temperature sensor PWB Temperature detection around the photo-conductor

O. Fuse/thermostat
18
13
19
12
10
11
7
5
6
1
2
3
4
14,15
16,17
8,9
No. Code Name Type Specifications Function/Operation Section NOTE

1 F201 Fuse Time lag 250V 6.3A PCU PWB protection (24V1) DC main 100V series/
power PWB 200V series
2 F202 Fuse Time lag 250V 6.3A Driver PWB protection (24V2) DC main 100V series/
3 F203 Fuse Time lag 250V 6.3A Scanner control PWB protection (24V3) DC main 100V series/
4 F204 Fuse Time lag 250V 6.3A LCC control PWB protection (24V4) DC main 100V series/
5 F205 Fuse Time lag 250V 6.3A Finisher protection (24V5) DC main 100V series/
6 F206 Fuse Time lag 250V 6.3A Inserter protection (24V6) DC main 100V series/
7 F208 Fuse Time lag 250V 6.3A Motor protection (38V) DC main 100V series/
8 F1 Fuse Time lag 250V 15A DC power source over-current protection DC main 100V series
(Main source) power PWB
9 F1 Fuse Time lag 250V 8A DC power source over-current protection DC main 200V series
(Main source) power PWB
10 F101 Fuse Time lag 250V 5A (100V series) DC power source over-current protection DC sub power 100V series/
250V 3.15A (200V series) (Main source) PWB 200V series
11 F201 Fuse Time lag 250V 2A DC power source over-current protection DC sub power 100V series/
(Main source) PWB 200V series
12 F103 Fuse Time lag 250V 2A DC power source over-current protection DC sub power 100V series/
(Main source) PWB 200V series
13 F1 Fuse Immediate 250V 200mA LCD inverter circuit over-current protection LCD INV PWB Common
decision type LVDS/INV
14 F1 Fuse Time lag 250V 20A AC power source over-current protection AC power 100V system
(Main source) PWB
15 F2 Fuse Time lag 250V 10A AC power source over-current protection AC power 200V system
(Main source) PWB
16 F3 Fuse Time lag 250V 2.0A Dry heater over-current protection AC power 100V system
PWB
17 F4 Fuse Time lag 250V 2.0A Dry heater over-current protection AC power 200V system
PWB
18 HLTS_M Thermostat 125VAC 15A Fusing roller overheat protection Fusing unit
240VAC 10A
19 HLTS_S Thermostat 125VAC 15A Fusing roller overheat protection Fusing unit
240VAC 10A

P. Roller
55
63
57
58 64
46 56
47
44 24
45 25
48 22
49 23
20
59 21
60 61
62
17 1
16 2
50 3
51
42
43
53 18
52 19
54 9
41 7
40 8
39 5
38
37 4
36 6
34
35
33 12
31
32 10
29 11
30
28 15
26
27 13
14

1 Paper feed roller Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
(Manual paper feed tray)
2 Separation roller Separates paper to prevent double-feed.
3 Paper pickup roller Sends paper to the paper transport section.
(No. 1 paper feed tray)
(No. 1 paper feed roller)

14 Separation roller Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
16 Resist roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. / Controls the paper transport timing and adjusts the relative relationship
between the image and paper.
17 Resist roller (Idle) Applies pressure to paper and the resist roller to transport the paper.
18 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the large capacity tray (LCC) to the transport roller 2.
19 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applies pressure to paper and the resist roller to transport the paper.
20 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the manual paper feed and the transport roller 1 to the transport roller 3.
21 Transport roller 2 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport power of the transport roller to paper.
22 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the paper teed tray 2 and the transport roller 2 to the transport roller 3.
24 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the transport roller 3 to the transport roller 15.
26 Transport roller 5 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed tray 4 to the transport rollers 6 and 7.
28 Transport roller 6 (Idle) Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide.
31 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the paper feed tray 3 to the transport rollers 9 and 10.
34 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the transport rollers 7 and 8 to the transport roller 11.
39 Transport roller 13 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed trays 1, 3, and 4 to transport roller 15.
42 Transport roller 15 (Drive) Transports paper to the transport resist roller.
44 Transport roller 16 (Drive) Transports paper from the fusing roller to the paper exit roller 1.
48 Transport roller 19 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport from the paper exit roller 2 to the transport roller 20.
55 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Discharges paper to the paper exit tray. / Switches back paper.
56 Paper exit roller 1 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to provide a transport power of the paper exit roller to paper.
57 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Discharges paper. / Transports paper to the duplex (ADU) section.
58 Paper exit roller 2 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport power of the paper exit roller to paper.
59 Fusing roller (Pressing) Applies a pressure to the fusing roller (heating).
60 Fusing roller (Heating) Heat and press toner onto paper to fuse images.
61 Transfer roller 1A (Drive) Transports paper (which is fed from the manual paper feed tray) to the transport roller.
62 Transfer roller 1A (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport power of the transport roller to paper.
63 Paper exit roller 3 (Drive) Discharges paper to the paper exit tray. /Switches back paper.
64 Paper exit roller 3 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport power of the transport roller to paper.

[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS
MX-M753N
Service Manual
1. General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, how-
a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the ever, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest. must be observed.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Per- If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would
form only the necessary adjustments according to the need. not complete normally or trouble may occur.
2. Adjustment item list

Job No Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 1 Adjusting the developing unit 1A Adjust the developing doctor gap
1B Adjust the developing roller main pole position
1C Toner density control reference value setting 25-2
ADJ 2 Adjusting high voltage values 2A Adjust the main charger grid voltage 8-2
2B Adjust the developing bias voltage 8-1
2C Transfer current adjustment 8-6
2D Transfer belt cleaning voltage adjustment 8-17
2E Transfer cleaning roller voltage adjustment 8-18
ADJ 3 Print engine image skew adjustment (LSU parallelism adjustment) 64-2
ADJ 4 Scan image distortion adjustment (OC 4A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment
mode) 4B Scan image sub scanning direction distortion adjustment
4C Scan image main scanning direction distortion adjustment
ADJ 5 Scanner image skew adjustment (DSPF 5A DSPF parallelism adjustment
mode) 5B DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode) 64-2
5C DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode) 64-2
ADJ 6 Scan image focus adjustment 6A Image focus adjustment (Document table mode/DSPF front surface mode) 48-1
6B Image focus adjustment (DSPF back surface mode)
ADJ 7 Image lead edge position, image loss, 7A Print image main scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment 50-28
void area, image off-center, and image (Print engine)
magnification ratio adjustment 7B Print image off-center automatic adjustment (Print engine) (Each paper feed tray) 50-28
(automatic adjustment) 7C Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image loss, void area, scanner 50-28
image off-center, and scanner sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
automatic adjustment (document table mode)
7D Copy image off-center, image loss, void area, image lead edge position, and DSPF 50-28
sub scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment
(DSPF mode)
ADJ 8 Print lead edge image position, void area adjustment (Printer mode) 50-5
ADJ 9 CCD calibration 9A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) (Document table mode) 63-3/63-5
9B CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) (DSPF mode) 63-3
9C Shading adjustment (Calibration) (DSPF mode) 63-2
ADJ 10 Automatic adjustment of copy/printer density and gradation 46-74
ADJ 11 Copy density and gradation adjustment 11A Automatic adjustment of copy density and gradation 46-24
11B Manual copy density and gradation adjustment 46-16
11C Copy density and gradation adjustment (Each copy mode) (Whole adjustment) 46-2
(Normally unnecessary to adjust)
11D Manual copy density and gradation adjustment for each copy mode 46-10
11E Document background density reproducibility adjustment in the auto copy mode 46-32
11F Color document reproducibility adjustment in the copy mode 46-37
11G Manual copy density and gradation adjustment (DSPF mode) 46-9
(Individual adjustment of the low density area and the high density area)
11H Automatic copy density and gradation adjustment by the user 26-53
(ENABLE/DISABLE setting and adjustment of the automatic copy density and
gradation adjustment)
ADJ 12 Printer density and gradation adjustment 12A Automatic adjustment of printer density and gradation 67-24
12B Manual printer density and gradation adjustment 67-25
12C Automatic printer density and gradation adjustment by the user 26-54
(ENABLE/DISABLE setting and adjustment of the automatic printer density and
gradation adjustment)
ADJ 13 Setting of the operating conditions for the automatic exposure mode in copy, scan, and FAX mode 46-19
ADJ 14 Paper size detection adjustment 14A Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment 40-2
14B DSPF tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment 53-6
14C Adjust the paper width sensor for paper feed tray 3 40-12
ADJ 15 Adjusting the original size detection 15A Adjust the detection point of the original size sensor (in original table mode) 41-1
(in original table mode) 15B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size sensor 41-2
ADJ 16 Touch panel coordinate setting 65-1
MX-M753N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 1

Job No Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 17 Fusing paper guide position adjustment
ADJ 18 Print engine image position, image 18A Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning direction) 50-10
magnification ratio, void area, off-center 18B Print engine image position adjustment 50-10/50-1
adjustment (manual adjustment) 18C Print engine print area (void area) adjustment 50-10
ADJ 19 Scan image magnification ratio 19A Main scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment 48-1
adjustment (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode)
19B Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode) 48-1/48-5
19C Main scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF mode) 48-1
19D Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF mode) 48-1
ADJ 20 Scan image off-center adjustment 20A Scan image off-center adjustment (Document table mode) 50-12
(Manual adjustment) 20B Scan image off-center adjustment (DSPF mode) 50-12/50-6
ADJ 21 Copy image position, image loss, and 21A Copy image position, image loss, void area adjustment (Document table mode) 50-1
void area adjustment 21B Document scan position adjustment (DSPF mode scanner scan position adjustment) 53-8
(Manual adjustment) 21C Copy mode image loss adjustment (DSPF mode) 50-6
ADJ 22 Finisher and punch unit adjustments 22A MX-FN15/MX-PN4 3-10
(alignment, punch hole position, staple 22B MX-FN16/MX-PN4
position, folding position) 22C MX-FN14/MX-PN10
*1: ADJ7 is the automatic adjustment of ADJ18, 19, 20, and 21.
When ADJ7 is executed, there is no need to execute ADJ18, 19, 20, and 21.
ADJ18, 19, 20, and 21 are executed only when a manual adjustment is required.
3. Details of adjustment
3) Loosen the DV doctor fixing screws.
ADJ 1 Adjusting the developing unit
NOTE: Be careful not to put a fingerprint or a foreign material on
the DV roller surface. If a fingerprints or a foreign material
is put on the surface, the picture quality may be degraded.
1-A Adjust the developing doctor gap

a. This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* The developing unit has been disassembled.
* The print density is low.
* The toner is excessively dispersed.
b. Adjustment procedures
1) Remove the developing unit of the machine.
2) Remove the developing unit cover and doctor cover.
4) Manually turn the DV roller to align the marking on the DV

roller surface with the DV doctor position.

5) Insert a 0.43mm clearance gauge in between the DV roller and
DV doctor so that the gauge is positioned at a distance of 40 1-B Adjust the developing roller main pole
mm to 70 mm from the DV doctor end face. position
a. This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
50mm
20mm * The developing unit has been disassembled.
* The print density is low.
* The toner is excessively dispersed.
b. Adjustment procedures
1) Remove the developing unit.
2) Remove the developing unit cover and blade cover, and then
50mm place the developing unit on a level surface.
20mm 3) Attach a piece of string to a sewing needle or pin.
4) With the string in hand, bring the needle closer to the DV roller
while keeping the needle parallel with the roller. (Do not use a
clip, which does not accurately indicate the position.)
6) Tighten the DV doctor fixing screws while pressing the DV doc-

tor in the arrow direction.
(This should be done for both front and rear frames.)
5) Keeping the needle 2 to 3 mm off the DV roller surface, mark

the DV roller surface at an extension of the needle tip. (Do not
let the needle tip contact the DV roller.)
6) Measure the distance between the marking on the DV roller
and leading edge of the DV doctor, and make sure that it is
190.5mm.
7) On both sides of the DV doctor and at its center, make sure

that the DV doctor gap is 0.430.03mm.
19 0.5mm
If this requirement is not met, do the following steps.

7) Remove the front cover.
* When inserting a clearance gauge, take care not to damage the

DV doctor or MG roller.
Repeat steps 2 to 6 until the DV doctor gap meets the requirement.

8) Loosen the fixing screws of the developing roller main pole
Error display Content Details of content
adjusting plate, and make adjustments by moving the adjust-
EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level less than 26, or
ing plate in the arrow direction.
sensor control voltage level over 197
EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level over 200, or sensor
control voltage level less than 49
EE-EC EC abnormality Sensor output level: Out of 108  5
6) Cancel SIM25-2, and install the toner cartridge.
ADJ 2 Adjusting high voltage values

NOTE: For adjusting the output voltage, use a tool which can mea-
sure the effective value of 1000M internal impedance.
Also use a high voltage probe together.
Repeat steps 3 to 6 until the developing roller main pole meets the (FLUKE87FLUKE80K-40 is recommendable.)
positional requirement.
2-A Adjust the main charger grid voltage
1-C Toner density control reference value This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
setting * When the high voltage PWB is replaced.
a. This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: * U2 trouble has occurred.
* When developer is replaced. * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
NOTE:
* When the picture quality is abnormal.
• Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer is
replaced. Never execute it in the other cases. 1) Remove the rear cover of the machine.
• When setting the toner density control reference value, pull out 2) Enter the SIM 8-2 mode.
the toner cartridge in advance.

• When not replacing the developer, do not execute SIM25-2. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387
b. Adjustment procedures $˖ ˖0,''/(63(('*%B.
$˖
1) Remove the toner cartridge from the machine. ˷̚˹
2) Turn ON the power with the front cabinet open.

3) Enter the SIM 25-2 mode.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
$872'9/
$872'90
$872'992/ 0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.

$872'9920
3) Select the middle speed mode.

When the adjustment value in the middle speed mode is set,
the adjustment values of the other modes are automatically set
accordingly in correlation.
To adjust an each mode individually, first adjust the middle
. & 0 < (;(&87( speed mode, then adjust the other modes.
If the middle speed mode adjustment is executed after adjust-
4) Close the front cabinet. ment of the other mode, the adjustment value of the other
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. mode is automatically set. Be careful of that.
The key is highlighted. The developing roller rotates and the 4) Apply a digital multi-meter between the high voltage PWB con-
toner density sensor detects the toner density, and the output nector CN2 pin (3) and the chassis GND.
value displayed.
After execution of the above operation for 3 minutes, the aver- CN2
age value of toner density sensor detection levels is set
(stored) as the reference toner density control value.
When the reference toner density control adjustment operation
is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to normal from highlight. 3
This makes known about whether the adjustment operation is
completed or not.
NOTE:
If the operation is interrupted within 3 minutes, the adjustment
result is not reflected.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during rotation, the opera-
tion is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal dis-
play.
If [EE-EU], [EE-EL] or [EE-EC] is displayed, setting of the ref-
erence toner density control value is not completed normally.

5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The main charger grid voltage is outputted for 30sec.
If this operation is executed for a long time, the OPC drum may be damaged. Therefore, this operation must be completed in a short time.
It is recommended to install an unnecessary OPC drum to the machine and execute this operation.
6) Check the output voltage with a digital multi-meter.
If the output voltage is not within the specified range listed in the table below, change the adjustment value.
(Enter the adjustment value with 10 key, and press [OK] key or [EXECUTE] key.)
Default value High voltage PWB (MC/DV/TC)

Adjustment Output voltage
Mode Item/Display Content 62 CPM 75 CPM Pin
range Connector 62 CPM 75 CPM
model model No.
model model
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED GB_K Middle speed mode main 230 - 850 525 535 CN2 3 -540V  5 -550V  5
charger grid voltage adjustment
value
LOW A LOW SPEED GB_K Low speed mode main charger 230 - 850 525 525 CN2 3 -540V  5V
grid voltage adjustment value
If the specified output cannot be obtained by changing the adjust-

ment value, it is presumed that some parts listed below are defec- 3) Select the middle speed mode.
tive.
When the adjustment value in the middle speed mode is set,
• High voltage PWB (MC/DV/TC) the adjustment values of the other modes are automatically set
• PCU PWB accordingly in correlation.
• MC unit To adjust an each mode individually, first adjust the middle
• OPC drum unit speed mode, then adjust the other modes.
• High voltage circuit electrode If the middle speed mode adjustment is executed after adjust-
ment of the other mode, the adjustment value of the other
mode is automatically set. Be careful of that.
2-B Adjust the developing bias voltage
4) Apply a digital multi-meter between the high voltage PWB con-
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
nector CN2 pin (7) and the chassis GND.
* When the high voltage PWB is replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
CN2
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
1) Remove the rear cover of the machine.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( 7
'96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B.
$˖
˷̚˹

The main charger voltage is outputted for 30sec.
If this operation is executed for a long time, the OPC drum may
be damaged. Therefore, this operation must be completed in a
short time.
It is recommended to install an unnecessary OPC drum to the
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
machine and execute this operation.
6) Check the output voltage with a digital multi-meter.

If the output voltage is not within the specified range listed in the table below, change the adjustment value.
(Enter the adjustment value with 10 key, and press [OK] key or [EXECUTE] key.)
Default value High voltage PWB (MC/DV/TC)

Adjustment
Mode Item/Display Content 62 CPM 75 CPM Pin Output
range Connector
model model No. voltage
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K Middle speed mode developing bias 0 - 700 395 395 CN2 7 -400V  5V
voltage adjustment value
LOW A LOW SPEED DVB_K Low speed mode developing bias voltage 0 - 700 395 395 CN2 7 -400V  5V
adjustment value
If the specified output cannot be obtained by changing the adjustment value, it is presumed that some parts listed below are defective.
• High voltage PWB (MC/DV/TC)
• PCU PWB
• MC unit
• OPC drum unit
• Developing unit
• High voltage circuit electrode

2-C Transfer current adjustment
* When the high voltage PWB (MC/DV/TC) is replaced.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7+96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖7&3/$,1%:63;
$˖ %˖ ˖7&3/$,1%:'3;
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7&+($9<%:63;
'˖ ˖7&+($9<%:'3;
(˖ ˖7&2+3%:
)˖ ˖7&(19(/23(%:
*˖ ˖7&,17(59$/%,$6
+˖ ˖7&$'62537,21%,$6
,˖ ˖7&)5217('*(%,$6
(;(&87( 2.
2) Select a mode to be adjusted.

3) Enter an adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK] key.
By setting the default value (initial value), the specified current will be outputted.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the transfer current is outputted for 30 sec.
High voltage PWB

Default value (MC/DV/TC) output
Adjustment
Item/Display Content current
range
62 CPM 75 CPM 62 CPM 75 CPM
model model model model
A TC PLAIN BW SPX Transfer Plain paper Front surface transfer mode 0 - 255 97 129 30A 40A
B TC PLAIN BW DPX current transfer mode Back surface transfer mode 0 - 255 97 129 30A 40A
C TC HEAVY BW SPX Heavy paper Front surface transfer mode 0 - 255 113 113 35A 35A
D TC HEAVY BW DPX transfer mode Back surface mode 0 - 255 113 113 35A 35A
E TC OHP BW OHP transfer mode 0 - 255 97 113 30A 35A
F TC INTERVAL BIAS Non-transfer mode between papers 0 - 255 97 129 30A 40A
G TC ADSORPTION BIAS Toner retaining mode 0 - 255 97 129 30A 40A
H TC FRONT EDGE BIAS Paper lead edge transfer mode 0 - 255 97 113 30A 35A
NOTE: The transfer current cannot be checked. If the output is presumed to be abnormal even though the adjustment value is set to the
default value, replace the high voltage PWB (MC/DV/TC).
If the specified output cannot be obtained by changing the adjustment value, it is presumed that some parts listed below are defective.
• High voltage PWB (MC/DV/TC)
• PCU PWB
• MC unit
• OPC drum unit
• High voltage circuit electrode

2-D Transfer belt cleaning voltage adjustment
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
7+9$&6(77,1*$1'287387
* U2 trouble has occurred. $˖

$˖ ˖7&&/($1,1*$&
%˖ ˖7&&/($1,1*'&

* The PCU PWB has been replaced. ˷̚˹

(;(&87( 2.

2) Select a mode to be adjusted. 2) Select a mode to be adjusted.
3) Enter an adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK] 3) Enter an adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK]
key. key.
By setting the default value, the specified voltage is outputted. By setting the default value, the specified voltage is outputted.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the transfer belt cleaning When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the transfer cleaning bias
voltage is outputted for 30 sec. voltage is outputted for 30 sec.
High voltage TC
PWB (MC/ Adjustment Default cleaning
Adjustment Default Item/Display Content
Item/Display Content DV/TC) range value Check pin
range value
output voltage
voltage A TC Transfer 0 - 255 211 +2.0V 
A TC Transfer belt 0 - 255 191 AC 4.5KV CLEANING cleaning roller 0.1V
CLEANING cleaning AC (p-p) ROLLER + plus bias voltage
AC output voltage (+) (Transfer belt
B TC Transfer belt 0 - 255 36 DC -100V  cleaning voltage)
CLEANING cleaning DC 10V B TC Transfer 0 - 255 205 -2.0V 
DC bias voltage CLEANING cleaning roller 0.1V
ROLLER - minus bias
NOTE: There is normally no need to check the output. To check voltage (-)
the output, however, perform the following procedures. (Transfer
4) Apply a digital multi-meter between the high voltage PWB con- cleaning roller
cleaning voltage)
nector CN2 pin (1) and the chassis GND.
(1) NOTE: There is normally no need to check the output. To check

the output, however, perform the following procedures.
CN2
4) Connect the transfer section to the main body side using the
transfer extension harness (DHAI-3629FCZZ).
NOTE: The transfer current cannot be checked. If the output is

presumed to be abnormal even though the adjustment
value is set to the default value, replace the high voltage
PWB (MC/DV/TC).
5) Remove the front frame side cover in the paper transport sec-
tion, and remove the front frame side cover in the transfer sec-
2-E Transfer cleaning roller voltage adjustment tion.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When the EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7+9&/6(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖7&&/($1,1*52//(5
$˖ %˖ ˖7&&/($1,1*52//(5
˷̚˹
(;(&87( 2.

6) Apply a digital multi-meter to the check pin of the high voltage (NOTE)
PWB (TC cleaning) and the chassis GND. In the case of Method 2, the right angle of paper to be used
may not be exact. Be sure to check the right angle of paper to
be used in advance.
(Method 1)
a) Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle
print pattern.
Diagonal line C Diagonal line D
ADJ 3 Print engine image skew

adjustment
(LSU parallelism adjustment) b) Calculate the difference between the measured lengths C
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: and D of the diagonal lines.
* When the LSU unit is replaced. c) Check to insure that the difference between C and D is in
the following range. C – D =  0.8mm
* When the LSU unit is removed from the main unit.
If the difference between C and D is in the above range, there
is no need to adjust.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(Method 2)
6(/)35,17%:6(59,&(
$˖ ˖35,173$77(51̚̚̚ a) Fit the side of A3 or 11" x 17" paper to the long side of the
$˖ %˖ ˖'27'27˚˙,)$
rectangle print pattern.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖'27'27˚˙,)$
'˖ ˖'(16,7<),;('āā,)$

(˖ ˖08/7,ǂ&2817
)˖ ˖(;32685(̚,)$̚̚67$1'$5'',7+(5
*˖ ˖3$3(5&6 Comparison line

+˖ ˖'83/(;12
,˖ ˖3$3(5ǂ7<3(3/$,1
0.5mm or less
(;(&87( 2.
Direction A Direction B
2) Set the set items to the values shown below.
Item Setting value

A 1
B 1
C 254
D 255
3) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11" x 17") paper in it by

changing the value of G. b) Measure the shift distance between vertical side of paper
and side of the rectangle print pattern.
If the above distance is 0.5mm or less, there is no need to
The check pattern is printed out.
adjust.
5) Check the printed image for any skew.
If not, execute the following procedures.
Measure the right angle level by using the printed cross pat-
tern.
There are following two methods of checking the image for any
skew (right angle).
Method 1:
Measure the maximum length of the diagonal lines of the rect-
angle print pattern. Check the difference in the length of the
diagonal lines for judgment of good or no good.
Method 2:
Compare the right angle of vertical side and the horizontal side
of the rectangle print pattern with the right angle of A3 or 11" x
8.5" paper for judgment of good or no good.

6) Draw out the manual paper feed tray, and remove the front
frame side, side cover, fan cover cabinet, and fan unit. ADJ 4 Scan image distortion
7) Turn OFF the power and remove the fan unit. adjustment (OC mode)
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the copy image is distorted.
4-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism

adjustment
Before execution of this adjustment, remove the document table
glass.
1) Loosen the fixing screws of the scanner unit A and the drive
wire, and remove the scanner unit A from the drive wire.
8) Loosen the LSU fixing plate screw, and change the LSU fixing
angle. (Move the LSU front frame side up and down to adjust.)
(When Method 1 is used to check the image for any skew
(right angle) in procedure 5 in advance)
When C > D (the lengths of the diagonal lines), the LSU is
shifted upward.
When C < D (the lengths of the diagonal lines), the LSU is
shifted downward.
(When Method 2 is used to check the image for any skew
(right angle) in procedure 5 in advance)
When the image is skewed in the arrow direction a, shift down
the LSU (in direction a in the figure below). When the image is
skewed in direction b, shift up the LSU (in direction b in the fig-
ure below).
2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner
unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper.
When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on
the front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is
proper.
If this requirement is not met, do the following steps.

b 3) Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame
side of the scanner unit B.
a

4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers 4-B Scan image sub scanning direction
on the front and the rear frames simultaneously. distortion adjustment
5) Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit 1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
B. (Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above proce-
dures, perform the following procedures. L
Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which
is not in contact.
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, turn the scanner
unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B L
L
is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear
frame simultaneously. (Change the relative position of the
scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Fix the scanner
unit drive pulley fixing screw.
L = 10mm
2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-

ment table. (Shift the test chart edge 30mm from the reference
position as shown below.) With the document cover open,
make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
6) With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the
edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and
fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.
3) Check for distortion in the sub scanning direction.

If La = Lb, there is no distortion.
La Lb
If there is any distortion in the sub scanning direction, perform

the following procedures.

4) Loosen either one of the fixing screws of the scanner unit drive 4) Check the difference (distortion balance) between left-hand
pulley. (Either one on the front frame or on the rear frame will and right-hand side images distortions.
do.)
Lc Lc
Copy A Copy B
Ld Ld
There is no difference There is some difference
between the distortion on between the distortion on
the right and that on the left. the right and that on the left.
Lc Ld Lc Ld
If Lc = Ld, the distortion on the left is equal to that on the right.

(The distortions are balanced.)
If the above condition is satisfied, go to the procedure 6).
If not, perform the following procedures.
5) Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn the
scanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of the scan- 5) Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front
ner unit A and B. (Change the relative position of the scanner frame side.
unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.)
6) Tighten the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw.
Repeat the procedures 2) - 6) until the condition of the procedure 3)

is satisfied.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted with
the above procedures, perform "ADJ 11D Scan image distortion
adjustment (whole scanner unit).
4-C Scan image main scanning direction

distortion adjustment
1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
L Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen the

scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the
right and the left heights of the scanner rail.
Repeat the procedures 2) - 5) until the difference between the
L L image distortions (distortion balance) is deleted.
6) Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front
frame side, change the overall height.
ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check
L = 10mm that the distortion in the main scanning direction is within the
specified range.
L
Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the distortion in the main
scanning direction is in the specified range.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted
ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11"x 17") paper.
with the above procedures, perform ADJ 11D Scan image dis-
3) Check for distortion in the main scanning direction. tortion adjustment (whole scanner unit).
If the four angles of the rectangle on the copy are right angles,
there is no distortion and therefore no further steps are
needed.
If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, perform

the following procedure.

3) Turn the height adjustment screw to adjust the DSPF front/rear
ADJ 5 Scanner image skew frame horizontal level.
adjustment (DSPF mode)
5-A DSPF parallelism adjustment L
* The DSPF section has been disassembled.
* The DSPF unit has been replaced.
* When a DSPF JAM is generated.
* When a skew is generated in the document feed operation. R
* When there is a distortion (skew) in the scan image in the DSPF
unit.
1) Close the DSPF unit and check the clearance between the
projections in the front side and the rear side and the SPF
glass holding resin surface.
When the front frame side is higher (there is a clearance in B):

Turn the height adjustment screw R of the DSPF rear frame
clockwise.
When the rear frame side is higher (clearance A is more than
1mm): Turn the height adjustment screw L of the DSPF rear
frame counterclockwise.
Repeat steps 2 to 3 until an acceptable result is obtained.
4) After adjustments of A and B, check to insure that the projec-
tion on the front right side is in contact with the glass surface of
the main unit.
2) Visually check to insure that the clearance A is 1mm or less

and the clearance B is 0mm (in contact).
1mm
5-B DSPF skew adjustment

A (Front surface mode)
B * When replacing the DSPF unit.
* The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Make an adjustment chart.
Print the self print pattern (grid pattern) of SIM64-2 in the
0mm
duplex print mode.
SIM64-2 set value
If the above requirement is not met, do step 3.
A=1, B=1, C=254, D=255
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to
the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and
back sides of the paper.
A Paper pass direction

2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17") 4) Open the DSPF and loosen the screw.
paper in DSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for
skews (Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
adjustment chart is at the edge).
• Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1]
(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| ± 1 mm
A B
5) Adjust by turning the DSPF skew adjusting screw on the right
side of the DSPF rear frame.
a b
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| ± 1 mm
C D
c d
[Check Method 2]
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction
print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within
1.0mm.
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
left]
0 - 1.0mm If a < b, then turn counterclockwise the DSPF skew
adjusting screw.
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
right]
A If a > b, then turn clockwise the DSPF skew adjusting screw.
5-C DSPF skew adjustment

(Back surface mode)
* When replacing the DSPF unit.
If the front surface copy image is as shown above and the
* The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
back surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3)
of "3. Skew adjustment (Back surface mode)." 1) Make an adjustment chart.
If the above requirement is not met for the paper's front side, Print the self print pattern (grid pattern) of SIM64-2 in the
then do step 3. duplex print mode.
3) Loosen the hinge screws and lower the two attachments. SIM64-2 set value
A=1, B=1, C=254, D=255
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
2 the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to
the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and
back sides of the paper.
1
A Paper pass direction

2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17") 4) Turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw on the CCD unit to
paper in DSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for adjust.
skews (Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
adjustment chart is at the edge).
• Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1]
(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| ± 1 mm
A B
a b
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| ± 1 mm B
A
C D
c d [When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the

left]
[Check Method 2] If c < d, turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw A
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction counterclockwise, or turn the adjustment screw B clockwise.
print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within [When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
1.0mm. right]
If c > d, turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw A clockwise,
or turn the adjustment screw B counterclockwise.
0 - 1.0mm
* The adjustment screws A and B must be turned in proper
balance. For example, if the trouble is not removed by turn-
ing the adjustment screw A 180 degrees clockwise, do not
A turn the adjustment screw A furthermore, but turn the adjust-
ment screw B 180 degrees counterclockwise.
ADJ 6 Scan image focus adjustment

6-A Image focus adjustment (Document table
If the back surface copy image is as shown above and the
mode/DSPF front surface mode)
front surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3)
of "2. Skew adjustment (Front surface mode)." This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
If the back surface copy is not as shown above, perform the * The CCD unit has been removed from the machine.
procedures of step 3) or later. * The CCD unit has been replaced.
3) Open the upper door, and remove the adjustment cover. * When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted.
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan-
ning direction is not properly adjusted.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&&'0$,1
$˖ %˖ ˖&&'68%
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1
'˖ ˖63)68%
(˖ ˖63)%0$,1
2.
2) Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value).

Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.

3) Place a scale on the original table as illustrated below. 10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
* Never loosen the screws marked with X.

4) Make a normal copy on A4 paper. If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and the
Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to cause a
copy mode, and make a copy. problem, which cannot be adjusted in the market. In that
5) Compare the copied image of the scale and the actual scale case, the whole scanner unit must be replaced.
length in terms of length. 11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
6) Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main direction) to change the installing position.
scanning direction from the following formula. When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
ratio = (Original size - Copy image size) / Original size x 100% than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
(Example) One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
Compare the scale of 10mm with the scale of 10mm on the At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
copy image. scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction * Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
ratio = (100 - 99) / 100 x 100 = 1 in procedure 9).
B
100mm scale
(Orignal)
10 20 90 100 110
1.0mm
Copy image
(1mm (1%)
10 20 90 100 110
shorter than
the original)
If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the 12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
following procedures.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100  1%,
7) Remove the document table glass.
repeat the procedures of 9) - 11) until the condition is satisfied.
8) Remove the dark box cover.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
9) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
CCD unit base as shown below. ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100  1.0%)
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti-
cal system structure.
* This procedure must be executed also when the CCD unit is

replaced.

6) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
6-B Image focus adjustment direction) to change the installing position.
(DSPF back surface mode) When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
This adjustment is required in the following cases: CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
* When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced. than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
* When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced. One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
* When the focus of the back surface image is improper in the At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
copy DSPF mode. scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
* When the DSPF unit is removed. * Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
* When the DSPF unit is replaced. in procedure 4).
1) Make a duplex copy in DSPF mode.
2) Make sure that the copied image on the back side of the paper
is satisfactorily focused.
If the image is not satisfactorily focused, do the following
steps.
3) Open the door. Remove the screws, and remove the transport
PG upper.
7) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.

If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100  1%,
repeat the procedures of 4) – 6) until the condition is satisfied.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
4) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100  1.0%)
CCD unit base as shown below. and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti-
cal system structure.
ADJ 7 Image lead edge position,

image loss, void area, image
off-center, and image
magnification ratio adjustment
5) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws (4 pcs.). (automatic adjustment)
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with
SIM 50-28. It takes less time to use this adjustment than to use the
following manual adjustments.
* ADJ18 Print engine image position, image magnification ratio,
void area, off-center adjustment (manual adjustment)
* ADJ 19 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Manual
adjustment)
* ADJ 20 Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment)
* ADJ 21 Copy image position, image loss, and void area adjust-
ment (Manual adjustment)
(Menu in SIM 50-28 mode)
* Never loosen the screws marked with ✕.
Loosening these screws could possibly change the CCD Item/Display Content
OC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
unit base optical axis. Once the optical axis has been
magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode)
changed, it cannot be corrected through on-site adjust-
BK-MAG ADJ Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
ments. Solving such a problem requires the replacement of
adjustment
the entire scanner unit.
SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF mode)
SETUP/PRINT Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each
ADJ paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
RESULT Adjustment result display
DATA Display of data used when an adjustment is executed

7-A Print image main scanning direction image
magnification ratio automatic adjustment
(Print engine)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: 3/($6(6(77+(35,17(53$77(513$3(5217+(2&
7+(135(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
* When the PCU CONTROL PWB is replaced.
* When the LSU is replaced.
* When the DSPF unit is replaced.
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
5(35,17 (;(&87(

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( 7) Press [OK] key.
2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-
The adjustment result becomes valid.
63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'-
5(68/7 '$7$

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
%.0$*

2) Select [BK-MAG ADJ] with the key.

3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key. (Any
paper size will do.) 5(35,17 5(6&$1 5(75< '$7$ 2.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
0)7 &6 &6 &6
7-B Print image off-center automatic
&6
adjustment (Print engine)
(Each paper feed tray)
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
* When a paper tray is replaced.
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
* When the manual feed tray is replaced.
(;(&87( * When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
* When the duplex section is disassembled.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. * When the duplex section is installed or replaced.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. * When the large capacity tray is installed or replaced.
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direc- * When the large capacity tray section is disassembled.
tion)
* When the registration roller section is disassembled.
NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document * U2 trouble has occurred.
guide.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-
63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'-
5(68/7 '$7$

2) Select [SETUP/PRINT] ADJ with the key.

3) Select [ALL] with the key. 7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
8) Press [OK] key.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
/($' 2))6(7

$// ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
35,17/($'0)7 &$6&$6 $'8
&$6&$6 /&&
35,172))6(7ǂ0)7 &$6 &$6 $'8
&$6 &$6 /&&

(Note)
5(35,17 5(6&$1 5(75< '$7$ 2.
By pressing [LEAD] or [OFFSET] key, the following items can
be executed individually. Perform procedures 4) to 7) for each paper feed tray.
* [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment 7-C Copy lead edge image reference position
When [ALL] is selected, both of the above two items are adjustment, image loss, void area, scanner
executed simultaneously. image off-center, and scanner sub scanning
4) Select a paper feed tray to be adjusted. direction image magnification ratio

automatic adjustment (document table
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( mode)
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
0)7 &6 &6 $'8 This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
&6 &6 /&& * When the LSU is replaced.
* When the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
* The scanner section has been disassembled.
* When the scanner unit is replaced.
(;(&87( * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
6) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direc-
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
tion) 7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document

2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-
63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'-
guide. 5(68/7 '$7$

2) Select [OC ADJ] with the key.

3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key. (Any
paper size will do.)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
0)7 &6 &6 &6
&6
(;(&87(

4) Press [EXECUTE] key. * The DSPF section has been disassembled.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. * When the DSPF unit is replaced.
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direc- * When the LSU is replaced.
tion) This adjustment is used to adjust the document lead edge, the
NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document image loss, the void area, and the off-center sub operation magnifi-
guide. cation ratio of the DSPF (front and back).
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode, and select [SPF ADJ].

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-
63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'-
5(68/7 '$7$

2) Select the adjustment items, ALL (front, back, both).

<List of adjustment items>
Menu display item Content
SIDE1 DSPF adjustment front surface
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
SIDE2 DSPF adjustment back surface
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
3/($6(6(77+(35,17(53$77(513$3(5217+(2& ALL DSPF adjustment front/back surface
7+(135(66>(;(&87(@7267$57

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
6,'( 6,'(
$//
5(35,17 (;(&87(
7) Press [OK] key.


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( 3) The display shows the tray select screen for printing the DSPF
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
6,08/$7,21&203/(7(
adjustment pattern.
3/($6(386+&$.(< Select a tray for DSPF adjustment printing.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
0)7 &6 &6 &6
&6

7-D Copy image off-center, image loss, void

area, image lead edge position, and DSPF (;(&87(
sub scanning direction image

magnification ratio automatic adjustment 4) Self-print of the DSPF adjustment pattern is performed.
(DSPF mode)
* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.

5) After completion of printing, the DSPF adjustment start screen
is displayed. ADJ 8 Print lead edge image position,

void area adjustment
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
&/26(
(Printer mode)
3/($6(6(77+(35,17(53$77(513$3(5217+(63)
7+(135(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
NOTE: This adjustment is performed by the user to increase the
lead edge void area to greater than the standard value
5(35,17 (;(&87(
(3mm) in the printer mode.
6) Load the DSPF adjustment pattern on the DSPF.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5
$˖ ˖'(1&
$˖ %˖ ˖'(1%
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)52175($5
'˖ ˖'(1%0)7
(˖ ˖'(1%&6
)˖ ˖'(1%&6
*˖ ˖'(1%&6
+˖ ˖'(1%&6
,˖ ˖'(1%/&&
-˖ ˖'(1%$'8
.˖ ˖08/7,&2817
/˖ ˖3$3(5&6
(;(&87( 2.
2) Select the set item L with the scroll key, and enter the value
corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11" x 8.5") paper
in it.
Scanning of the DSPF adjustment pattern selected in the pro- Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
cedure 2) is started.
A DEN-C Used to adjust the print 1 - 99 30
When [All] is selected in the procedure 2), load the DSPF lead edge image position.
adjustment pattern on the DSPF again and adjust the back (PRINTER MODE)
surface in the same procedures. B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
When the adjustment is completed, the adjustment result is adjustment
displayed. C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area 1 - 99 30
adjustment
This screen shows the current values along with the previous
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge void 1 - 99 50
values in parentheses.
area adjustment correction
value

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( adjustment correction value
63)6,'(/($' 2))6(7 68%
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
63)6,'(/($' 2))6(7 68%
adjustment correction value
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
J DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
5(35,17 5(6&$1 5(75< '$7$ 2.
K MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
L PAPER MFT Tray Manual 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
* When [REPRINT] key is pressed, the display returns to the
selection paper feed
cassette select screen to allow self-print of the DSPF adjust-
CS1 Tray 1 2
ment pattern (front, back) again.
CS2 Tray 2 3
* When [RESCAN] key is pressed, the DSPF adjustment pat- CS3 Tray 3 4
tern (front, back) is scanned again. CS4 Tray 4 5
* When [RETRY] key is pressed, the adjustment value is not LCC LCC 6
saved in EEPROM and RAM and shifted to the top menu M DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
screen. NO selection No 1
* When [DATA] key is pressed, the data used in execution of
the adjustment are displayed.
The adjustment pattern is printed.
8) Press [OK] key.

4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
in the standard adjustment value range.
Standard adjustment value: 3.0  2.0mm
3.0 2.0mm
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust-
ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
method using the SIT chart.
NOTE: Check to insure that the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps. UKOG-0280FCZ1) is in close contact with the document
5) Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjust- table.
ment item DENC with the scroll key. NOTE: UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.
6) Change the adjustment value. 2) Enter the SIM 63-3 mode.
Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the Select [OC] key, and press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key. The automatic operation is started. During the adjustment,
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is [EXECUTE] is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment,
printed. [EXECUTE] returns to the normal display.
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
the adjustment value is decreased, the distance is decreased. 7(67
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
&/26(
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed 6(77+(&+$5721'63)$1'728&+>(;(&87(@
by about 0.1mm.
Repeat the procedures 4) - 6) until the condition of 4) is satisfied.
NOTE: To adjust the void area, change the adjustment values of
items B and C.
ADJ 9 CCD calibration

(;(&87(
9-A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration)

(Document table mode) NOTE: Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FC
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: Z1) is easily discolored by sunlight (especially ultraviolet
rays) and humidity and temperature, put it in a bag (such
* When the CCD unit is replaced.
as a dark file) and store in a dark place of low temperature
* When a U2 trouble is occurred. and low humidity.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced. 9-B CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration)
(1) Note before adjustment (DSPF mode)
1) Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens This adjustment is required in the following cases:
surface are free from dirt and dust.
* When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced.
(If there is some dust and dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.)
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
2) Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of
* When the DSPF control PWB is replaced.
the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are
* When the EEPROM on the DSPF control PWB is replaced.
free from dirt and scratches.
If they are dirty, clean them. (1) Note before adjustment
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one. 1) Check to insure that there is no dirt or dust on the DSPF scan-
(2) Adjustment procedures ning glass, the mirror, and the lens surface. (If there is, clean it
with alcohol.)
1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to
the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu- 2) Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of
ment table. the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are
free from dirt and scratches.
Set the chart so that the lighter density side of the patch is on
the left side. If they are dirty, clean them.
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.

NOTE: If there is a page under [], an active display is shown and
Since the SIT chart is easily discolored by sunlight (especially the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
ultraviolet rays) and humidity and temperature, put it in a bag display grays out and the operation is invalid.
such as a clear file) and store in a dark place of low tempera-
ture and low humidity.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
2&

&&&555
000***
<<<%%%
% * 5 '63) 2&
4) When [DSPF] key is pressed, it is highlighted, and the color

(2) Adjustment procedures automatic adjustment execution screen is displayed.
1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1)

face-down in the DSPF paper feed tray. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
6(77+(&+$57213/$7(1$1'728&+>(;(&87(@
(;(&87(
5) Press [EXECUTE] key and it is highlighted and the color auto

adjustment is executed.
* When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during the automatic
adjustment, the automatic adjustment is interrupted.
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust- ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment 12:&+$573$7&+5($',1*
method using the SIT chart.

NOTE: UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
2&

(;(&87(
&&&555
000***
6) After normal completion, the result of calculation is displayed
<<<%%% in the initial screen.
* When an error occurs in execution, the following screen is dis-
played.
% * 5 '63) (;(&87(
2&
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
3) When a color key is selected, the adjustment value of the 6&$11(502725,61275($'<
selected color is displayed.

* When [B] (Blue), [G] (Green), or [R] (Red) key is selected,
the selected key is highlighted and the adjustment value of
the selected color is displayed.
* Only one color key can be selected, and the selected key is
highlighted. In the initial state, [B] is selected.
* If there is a page over [], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid. (;(&87(

* When an error occurs in the automatic adjustment, all the error * When inserting the shading adjustment sheet, insert it along
patch numbers are displayed. the rear edge frame so that the rear edge of the shading
When [RESULT] key is pressed, the display returns to the initial adjustment sheet comes to the root of the actuator.
screen. (The previous value is displayed)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
6$035,1*'$7$81),7

3/($6(&+(&.7+(&+$57$1'3/$7(1*/$66
% * 5 (;(&87(
5(68/7
* When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis- 3) Enter the SIM 63-2 mode.
played. When [RESULT] key is pressed, the display returns to 4) Select [DSPF SHADING].
the initial screen. (The calculation result of normal completion is
displayed.)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6+$',1*(;(&87,21
6(/(&72&6+$',1*'63)6+$',1*$1'35(66(;(&87(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
&203/(7(
2&6+$',1* '63)6+$',1* (;(&87(
% * 5 (;(&87(
5(68/7 5) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The shading adjustment process is
started.)
* The shading adjustment sheet is transported by about
9-C Shading adjustment (Calibration) 25mm, and shading data are obtained during transport.
(DSPF mode) * During shading adjustment, "SHADING EXECUTING..." is
displayed.
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during shading adjust-
* When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced.
ment, the operation is interrupted.
* When shading adjustment is completed normally, [EXE-
* When the DSPF control PWB is replaced. CUTE] key returns to the normal display and "COMPLETE"
* When the EEPROM on the DSPF control PWB is replaced. is displayed.
(1) Note before adjustment <Descriptions of keys>
1) Check to insure that there is no dirt or dust on the DSPF scan- Display Content
ning glass, the mirror, and the lens surface. (If there is, clean it OC OC analog correction level correction, and shading
with alcohol.) SHADING correction data making (Document table mode)
2) Open the DSPF document scanning section, insert the shad- DSPF Analog correction level correction, and shading correction
SHADING data making (DSPF mode)
ing adjustment sheet (UKOG-0333FCZZ), and close the DSPF
document scanning section.
<Result display>
Display Content
COMPLETE Normal completion
ERROR Abnormal completion
INCOMPLETE Incomplete, interruption

A. ADJ 10/11/12 Automatic adjustment of copy/ [Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)]
printer density and gradation In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure
the following conditions.
(1) Precautions for execution of the copy/printer
density and gradation adjustment Patch 2 is
slightly copied.
SHARP gray chart
* Requisite conditions before execution of the copy/printer density SHARP GRAY CHART
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
and gradation adjustment
The following items related to the picture quality must have been
properly adjusted.
Job Patch 3 is copied.

Adjustment item list Simulation
No Patch 1 is not copied.
ADJ Adjusting 1A Adjust the developing doctor gap

1 the 1B Adjust the developing roller main (Method 2)
developing pole position
[Check with the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/
unit 1C Toner density control reference 25-2
UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11)]
value setting
ADJ Adjusting 2A Adjust the main charger grid 8-2 Check to confirm that it is in the conditions shown below.
2 high voltage
voltage 2B Adjust the developing bias 8-1 Serviceman chart (Color patch section)
values voltage
2C Transfer current adjustment 8-6
2D Transfer belt cleaning voltage 8-17
adjustment
2E Transfer cleaning roller voltage 8-18
adjustment
ADJ CCD 9A CCD gamma adjustment 63-3/63-5
9 calibration (CCD calibration) Patch 7 is slightly
(Document table mode) copied or not copied.
9B CCD gamma adjustment 63-3

(CCD calibration) (DSPF mode) (Method 3)
9C Shading adjustment (Calibration) 63-2 Execute SIM 46-16 to print the adjustment check pattern.
(DSPF mode)
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.

The patch density is changed gradually.
(2) Copy/printer density and gradation check
Patch A is not copied.
(Note)
Patch C or D is slightly copied.
Before checking the copy/printer density and gradation, be sure to
execute the following jobs.
A B C D E F G H I J K L MN O P
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction)
forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
Q (Max)
* Execute the half-tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26) Low density High density
(Copy density and gradation check procedures)

(Method 1)
Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ), and check
that it is proper.
Note for checking the copy mode density and gradation. The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
To check the density and gradation, set the copy density level to to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
"Manual 3" in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) and make a reversed.
copy to check. Patch C or D is slightly copied.
In addition, all the picture quality adjustment settings in the user Patch A must not be copied.
adjustment mode must be set to the default (center). When, however, the color balance is adjusted on the request from
the user, there is no need to set to the standard color balance
stated above.

(Printer density and gradation check procedures)
(Method 1) ADJ 10 Automatic adjustment of copy/
Execute SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern. printer density and gradation
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The
print test pattern is printed.
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
replaced.
* The CCD unit has been replaced.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
* When installing (as needed)
* When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.
a. General
There are following two modes in the auto copy/printer density and
gradation adjustment.
1) Auto copy density and gradation adjustment, and auto printer
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level density and gradation adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 46-
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be 74 is used.)
reversed.
SIM 46-74 allows simultaneous execution of the automatic
(Method 2) copy density and gradation adjustment, and the automatic
Execute SIM 67-25 to print the adjustment check pattern. printer density and gradation adjustment.
2) Auto copy/printer density and gradation adjustment by the user
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. (The user program mode is used.)
P R INT E R C A L IB RAT ION
The auto copy/printer density and gradation adjustment by the
user is provided to reduce the number of service calls.
Patch A or B is slightly copied. If the balance of the copy density or gradation is lost for some
reason, the user can use this adjustment to recover the image
A B C D E F G H I J K L MN O P quality.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
Q (Max) machine condition is greatly changed, this function does not
Low density High density work effectively.
On the other hand, the automatic copy density and gradation
adjustment by the serviceman can be used to obtain normal
picture quality even though the machine environment is greatly
changed.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be b. Note for execution of the auto copy density and gradation
reversed. adjustment
Patch A or B is slightly copied. 1) The print engine section must have been adjusted properly.
When, however, the color balance is adjusted on the request from 2) The CCD gamma adjustment must have been adjusted prop-
the user, there is no need to set to the standard color balance erly.
stated above. 3) Set the adjustment pattern sheet on the document table, and
place 5 sheet of white paper on the adjustment pattern sheet.

c. Adjustment procedure
(Auto copy density and gradation adjustment, and auto printer density and gradation adjustment by the serviceman)
Copy/printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)

procedure flowchart (SIM46-74)
Start
Execute ADJ10A copy/printer density and gradation adjustment (automatic adjustment).

(SIM46-74)
(Copy color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment))
Enter the SIM46-74 mode.

A4R (11 x 8.5R) or A3 (11 x 17) paper is automatically selected.
Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned and the adjustment is performed
automatically to print the check pattern.)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks, blurs, or other problems. (*2)
Is the
printer function
provided?
(Printer density adjustment (Automatic adjustment))
Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned and the adjustment is performed
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks, blurs, or other problems. (*2)
Press [OK] key.

(The initial setting of the half-tone image correction is automatically performed.)
Press [EXECUTE] key to execute the half-tone correction (process control).
When the half-tone correction (process control) operation is completed,

the message (COMPLETED) is displayed and the operation is terminated.
"OK" is displayed to conform that the half-tone correction is normally completed.
Cancel SIM46-74. *1: If satisfactory density and gradation cannot be

obtained by the manual adjustment, check the
print engine for any troubles.
Check the result of the copy density and gradation adjustment.
*2: If there is any streak or blur on the printed check
pattern, check the print engine for any troubles.
Use the test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) or
Use SIM46-16 to print the check (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11 or
pattern, and check the density and UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11) to
gradation. make a copy in the Test/Printed Photo mode,
and check the color balance and the density.
Are the
copy density and Adjust with ADJ11B copy density and
the gradation at the gradation adjustment
satisfactory (Manual adjustment). (SIM46-16) (*1)
levels?
Is the
printer function
provided?
Check the result of the printer density and gradation adjustment.
Use SIM64-5 to print the self print check Use SIM67-25 to print the check
pattern, and check the printer density pattern, and check the density and the
and the gradation. (*2) gradation. (*2)
Are the
density and the Adjust with ADJ12B printer density and
gradation at the gradation adjustment (Manual adjustment).
satisfactory (SIM67-25) (*1)
levels?
Completed

1) Enter the SIM46-74 mode. The copy density and gradation adjustment is automatically
executed and prints the check patch image.
If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pat-
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(17˄6(59,&(˅ tern, check the print engine for any problems.
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'7+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$525h56,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
(;(&87( A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P

Q (Max)
The high density process control is performed, and the copy
patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. (A4R (11" x
8.5"R) or A3 (11" x 17") paper is automatically selected.)
If the printer function is not provided, skip procedure 5) to 7).

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(17˄6(59,&(˅ 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
352&21(;(&87,1*
The printer patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
(A4R (11" x 8.5"R) or A3 (11" x 17") paper is automatically
selected.)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(17˄6(59,&(˅
&21),507+($'-3$7&+$1'35(66>(;(&87(@72$'-2)5(*,675$7,21(;(
$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$525h56,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
(;(&87(
3) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in pro-

cedure 2) on the document table.
Set the printed patch image (adjustment pattern) on the docu-
ment table so that the fine lines are on the left side. At that
time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch image (;(&87(
(adjustment pattern).
6) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in pro-
cedure 5) on the document table.
time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch image
PRINTER CALIBRATION

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(17˄6(59,&(˅
3/($6(3/$&(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@

/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
(;(&87(

7) Press [EXECUTE] key. 9) When the initial setting of the half-tone image correction is
completed, [EXECUTE] key is displayed. Press the key, and
the half-tone correction (process control) is executed.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(17˄6(59,&(˅
3/($6(3/$&(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(

/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66 (1*,1($872$'-8670(17˄6(59,&(˅
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,2167$57
253/($6(386+&$.(<72),1,6+
(;(&87(
The adjustment (step 1) is automatically performed and the (;(&87(
check patch image is printed out.

If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pat- 10) When "COMPLETE THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the
tern, check the print engine for any problems. adjustment operation is completed. Cancel SIM46-74.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(17˄6(59,&(˅
&203/(7(7+,6352&('85(
3/($6(48,77+,602'(
2.RU1*
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
Q (Max)
5(68/7 5(75<
NOTE: If the printer function is provided, the adjustment result

becomes valid only when the both adjustments in the copy
8) The initial setting menu of the half tone image correction is dis- mode and in the printer mode are completed.
played. Press [OK] key. If, for example, only the copy density and gradation adjust-
The initial setting of the half tone image correction is per- ment (auto adjustment) is performed and the simulation is
formed. canceled, the adjustment result is invalid.
11) Check the copy/printer density and gradation.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
The copy density and gradation check must be performed in
(1*,1($872$'-8670(17˄6(59,&(˅ the Text/Printed Photo mode.
&21),507+($'-867('3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*,67(57+,63$7&+'$7$

If the printer function is not provided, check only the copy den-
sity and gradation. (For details of the density and gradation
check procedures, refer to page 5-24, 25.)
If a satisfactory result on the copy/print density and gradation is not
obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute ADJ11B (SIM46-
16) (manual adjustment) and ADJ12B (SIM67-25).
2.

ADJ 11 Copy density and gradation (Auto copy density and gradation adjustment by the serviceman)
adjustment Copy density and gradation adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
procedures flowchart (SIM46-24)
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is Start
replaced.
* The CCD unit has been replaced.
Execute ADJ11A copy density and gradation
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. adjustment (Automatic adjustment).
Enter the SIM46-24 mode.
* U2 trouble has occurred. A4R (11 x 8.5R) or A3 (11 x 17) paper is
automatically selected.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. Press [EXECUTE] key.
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)

Set the adjustment pattern on the document table,
* When installing (as needed) and press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern
is scanned and the adjustment is performed
* When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed. automatically to print the check pattern.)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks,

blurs, or other problems. (*2)
11-A Automatic adjustment of copy density and
gradation Press [OK] key.
a. General (The initial setting of the half-tone image correction
is automatically performed.)
The copy density and gradation adjustment (auto adjustment) is
used to adjust the copy density and gradation automatically by
Cancel SIM46-24.
SIM46-24 or the user program.
(When this adjustment is executed, the density and gradation
adjustments of all the copy modes are revised.) Check the result of the copy density and gradation adjustment.
There are following two modes in the automatic copy density and
gradation adjustment.
1) Automatic copy density and gradation adjustment by the ser- Use the test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) or
Use SIM46-16 to print the
viceman (SIM 46-24 is used.) check pattern, and check the
(UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11 or
UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11) to
2) Automatic copy density and gradation adjustment by the user density and gradation. make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode,
and check the density and the gradation.
(The user program mode is used.)
The auto adjustment by the user is provided to reduce the
number of service calls.
It is used by the user to reset the copy density and gradation to
the normal levels when any trouble occurs in the copy density Are the copy
NO
and gradation. density and the gradation
at the satisfactory
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the levels?
machine environment is greatly changed, this function does
not work effectively. YES
On the other hand, the auto adjustment by the serviceman
functions to recover the normal copy density and gradation
Adjust with ADJ11B copy
though the machine environment is greatly changed. If the density and gradation
machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining manual adjustment.
(SIM46-16) (*1)
the normal copy density and gradation.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood. Completed
b. Note for execution of the copy density and gradation

adjustment (Auto adjustment) *1: If satisfactory color balance and
density cannot obtained with
1) The print engine section must have been adjusted properly. ADJ11B copy density and gradation
manual adjustment, check the print
2) The CCD gamma adjustment must have been adjusted prop- engine for any troubles.
erly. *2: If there is any streak or blur on the
printed check pattern, check the
3) When setting the adjustment pattern on the document table in print engine for any troubles.
the copy density and gradation automatic adjustment proce-
dures, place 5 sheets of white paper on the adjustment pattern
in order to prevent back copying and adverse effects of paper
wrinkles as far as possible.


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$525h56,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
Q (Max)
(;(&87(
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4R (11" x 8.5"R) or A3 (11" x 17")

paper is automatically selected.) If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pat-
The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. tern, check the print engine for any problems.
3) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in pro- 5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.
cedure 2) on the document table. According to data of this adjustment, the initial setting of the
half tone image correction is performed.

time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch image ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(adjustment pattern). (1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
&21),507+($'-867('3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*,67(57+,63$7&+'$7$
2.
Remark:
After pressing [OK] key on the operation panel, the initial set-
ting of the half tone image correction is started. During the
operation, "NOW REGISTERING THE NEW TARGET OF
HALFTONE PROCON." is displayed.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
MODE" is displayed.
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
3/($6(3/$&(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@

/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
&203/(7('7+,6352&('85(
3/($6(48,77+,602'(
(;(&87(
The copy density and gradation adjustment is automatically

executed to print the check patch image. Wait until the opera-
tion panel shown in procedure 5) is displayed.
6) Cancel SIM 46-24.
7) Check the copy density and gradation.
the Text/Printed Photo mode. (For details of the density and
gradation check procedures, refer to page 5-24, 25.)
If a satisfactory result is not obtained by the automatic copy density
and gradation adjustment, use ADJ11B manual adjustment
(SIM46-16) to adjust.

11-B Manual copy density and gradation
adjustment
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
a. General
7(67
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$//%:@3*
The copy density and gradation adjustment (manual adjustment) is $˖

$˖ ˖32,17
%˖ ˖32,17

executed when the above automatic adjustment cannot obtain the ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17
specified range, when a fine adjustment is required, or when a '˖ ˖32,17
request for customization is made by the user. (˖ ˖32,17

)˖ ˖32,17
b. Note for the copy density and gradation adjustment *˖ ˖32,17
(Manual adjustment) +˖ ˖32,17
,˖ ˖32,17
1) The print engine section must have been properly adjusted.
-˖ ˖32,17
c. Adjustment procedure .˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
Copy density and gradation adjustment (Manual adjustment) (;(&87( 2.

2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4R (11" x 8.5"R) or A3 (11" x 17")
Start paper is automatically selected.)
The adjustment check pattern is printed.
3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the density
and gradation is satisfactory
Execute ADJ11B copy density and gradation adjustment (Manual adjustment).
(*1)
Enter the SIM46-16 mode. The max density patch is not blurred
A4R (11 x 8.5R) or A3 (11 x 17) paper is
automatically selected.
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
Press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment check pattern is printed.) Patch A must not be copied.
Patch C or D slightly copied.
Check the printed adjustment check pattern.
Enter the adjustment
value with 10-key.
Q (Max)
Select the adjustment Low density High density
target density level
with the scroll key.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter

Are the density
and the gradation at the
NO level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
satisfactory levels? not be reversed
Patch B may not be printed.
YES
Patch A must not be copied.
Cancel SIM46-16. If the above conditions are not satisfied, execute the following
procedures.
4) Select the point to be adjusted with the scroll key
Check the result of the copy density and gradation adjustment. (*1)
Density level Adjustment
Item/Display Default
Use the test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) or (Point) value range
(UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11 or A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500
UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11) to make a
copy in the Test/Printed Photo mode, and check the B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500
color balance and the density. C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500
D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500
E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500
F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500
Are the density NO
G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500
and the gradation at the H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500
satisfactory levels?
I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500
J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500
YES K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500
L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500
M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500
Completed N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500
O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500
P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500
1: If satisfactory density and gradation cannot be obtained Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500
by this adjustment, check the print engine for any troubles.

5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set in the range of 245 - 755 (1 - 999). When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select
When SIM 46-24 is used to adjust the copy density and grada- "LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust-
tion automatically, all the set values of this simulation are set to ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH"
500. mode and change the adjustment value.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value. increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy
density is decreased.
Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
fied. 4) Cancel SIM 46-2.
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high 5) Check the copy density and gradation.
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the The copy density and gradation check must be performed in
adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively. the Text/Printed Photo mode. (For details of the density and
Then, adjust each patch density and gradation individually. gradation check procedures, refer to page 5-24, 25.)
This is an efficient way of adjustment.
6) Cancel SIM 46-16. 11-D Manual copy density and gradation
7) Check the copy density and gradation. adjustment for each copy mode
The copy density and gradation check must be performed in (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
the Text/Printed Photo mode. (For details of the density and This is to adjust the density in each copy mode. Normally individual
gradation check procedures, refer to page 5-24, 25.) adjustments are not required. This adjustment is executed when
As needed, copy a user document and check the adjustment result. there is a request from the user.
If the copy density and gradation are not adjusted to the specified 1) Enter the SIM 46-10 mode.
level, there may be another cause.

Troubleshoot the cause, and repair or perform proper treatments, ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment from the (1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17
beginning. $872$872 7(;7 7(;73573+272 7(;73+272
35,17('3+272 3+272 0$3
11-C Copy density and gradation adjustment

(Each copy mode) (Whole adjustment)
The density and gradation are adjusted in each copy mode individ-
ually.
Normally individual adjustments are not required. When there is a
request from the user, execute this adjustment. (;(&87(

2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the mode key.
3) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@ key.
$˖ ˖$872
$˖ %˖ ˖$872
Adjustment
&˖ ˖7(;7 Item/Display Density level (Point) Default value
˷̚˹
value range
'˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+272
(˖ ˖7(;73+272
A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500
)˖ ˖35,17('3+272 B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500
*˖ ˖3+272*5$3+
C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500
+˖ ˖0$3
D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500
E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500
F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500
G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500
/2: +,*+ 2.
H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500
I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500
K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500
Setting Default
Item/Display Content L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500
range value
M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500
A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500
HIGH 1 - 99 50
O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500
B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500
HIGH 1 - 99 50
Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500
C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
PHOTO HIGH 1 - 99 50
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
sity is decreased.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 When the arrow key is pressed, the densities are collectively
HIGH 1 - 99 50 adjusted.
G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point
HIGH 1 - 99 50 to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
HIGH 1 - 99 50 printed out.

A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper is selected by priority. If there is no
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected. 11-F Color document reproducibility adjustment
The density at each density level (point) can be checked by in the copy mode
referring to this adjustment pattern. However, it is more practi- (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
cally to make a copy and check it. Use to adjust the reproducibility of the red image and the yellow
5) Cancel SIM 46-10. image when copying a color document that includes the red/yellow
6) Check the copy density and gradation. images.
The copy density and gradation check must be performed in 1) Enter the SIM 46-37 mode.

gradation check procedures, refer to page 5-24, 25.) ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17%5DWLR
11-E Document background density $˖ ˖55DWLR

$˖ %˖ ˖*5DWLR
reproducibility adjustment in the auto copy ˷̚˹
mode (Normally unnecessary to adjust)

Use for the reproducibility adjustment of document background
density in auto copy mode.
When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the doc-
ument. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density image
of the document.
1) Enter the SIM 46-32 mode. '()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*
$˖ ˖&23<˖2& Item/Display Content Setting range Default value
$˖ %˖ ˖&23<˖'63)˄6,'( A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 172
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&23<˖'63)˄6,'(
B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 828
'˖ ˖6&$1˖2&
(B-Ratio: 0)
(˖ ˖6&$1˖'63)˄6,'(
)˖ ˖6&$1˖'63)˄6,'(
*˖ ˖)$;˖2&
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
+˖ ˖)$;˖'63)˄6,'( When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, the values are set to the ini-
,˖ ˖)$;˖'63)˄6,'(
tial values (Default).
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item A is
increased, the copy density of red images is decreased. When
2.
the adjustment value is decreased, the density is increased.
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B is
2) Select the adjustment mode with the scroll key.
increased, the copy density of yellow images is increased.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. When the adjustment value is decreased, the density in also
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the decreased.
background and the low density image is increased. When the 4) Cancel SIM 46-37.
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back-
ground and the low density image is decreased.
(DSPF) the Text/Printed Photo mode. (For details of the density and
Setting Default gradation check procedures, refer to page 5-24, 25.)
range value
A COPY: OC Copy mode (OC mode) 1 - 250 196 11-G Manual copy density and gradation
B COPY: DSPF Copy mode 1 - 250 196 adjustment (DSPF mode)
(SIDE1) (DSPF front surface mode)
C COPY: DSPF Copy mode 1 - 250 196
(Individual adjustment of the low density
(SIDE2) (DSPF back surface mode) area and the high density area)
D SCAN: OC Scanner mode (OC mode) 1 - 250 196 It is normally not necessary to perform this adjustment. In the fol-
E SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196 lowing cases, however, this adjustment must be performed.
(SIDE1) (DSPF front surface mode)
* When the copy density differs in the DSPF mode and in the doc-
F SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
ument table mode.
(SIDE2) (DSPF back surface mode)
G FAX: OC FAX mode (OC mode) 1 - 250 196 * When the copy density differs on the front surface and on the
H FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196 back surface in the DSPF mode.
(SIDE1) (DSPF front surface mode) * When the copy density in the DSPF mode is too low or too high.
I FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196 * When the DSPF unit is replaced.
(SIDE2) (DSPF back surface mode)
* When the DSPF unit is disassembled.
4) Cancel SIM 46-32. * When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced.

a. Adjustment procedures 6) Check the copy density and gradation.
(Front surface copy density adjustment) The copy density and gradation check must be performed in
1) Enter the SIM 46-9 mode. the Text/Printed Photo mode. (For details of the density and
(Back surface copy density adjustment)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763) 1) Enter the SIM46-9 mode.
$˖ ˖&23<6,'($˖/2:
$˖ %˖ ˖6&$16,'($˖/2:
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)$;6,'($˖/2:

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'˖ ˖&23<6,'($˖+,*+
(;32685($'-8670(1763)
(˖ ˖6&$16,'($˖+,*+
$˖ ˖&23<6,'(%˖/2:
)˖ ˖)$;6,'($˖+,*+ $˖ %˖ ˖6&$16,'(%˖/2:
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)$;6,'(%˖/2:
'˖ ˖&23<6,'(%˖+,*+
(˖ ˖6&$16,'(%˖+,*+
)˖ ˖)$;6,'(%˖+,*+
*˖ ˖%$/$1&(6,'(%˖5
+˖ ˖%$/$1&(6,'(%˖*
2& '63) 2. ,˖ ˖%$/$1&(6,'(%˖%
2) Press [OC] key to select the front surface copy density adjust-
ment mode. 2& '63) 2.
Setting Default
Item Key Display Content 2) Press [DSPF] key to select the back surface copy density
range value
A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47 adjustment mode.
SIDEA: exposure adjustment
LOW (Low density side) Setting Default
Item Key Display Content
range value
B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47
SIDEA: exposure adjustment A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
LOW (Low density side) SIDEA: exposure adjustment
C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47 LOW (Low density side)
LOW exposure adjustment B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47
(Low density side) SIDEA: exposure adjustment
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 52 LOW (Low density side)
SIDEA: exposure adjustment C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
HIGH (High density side) LOW exposure adjustment
(Low density side)
E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 52
SIDEA: exposure adjustment D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 52
HIGH (High density side) SIDEA: exposure adjustment
F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 52 HIGH (High density side)
HIGH exposure adjustment E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 52
(High density) SIDEA: exposure adjustment
A DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47 HIGH (High density side)
SIDEB: exposure adjustment F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 52
LOW (Low density side) HIGH exposure adjustment
(High density)
B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47
SIDEB: exposure adjustment A DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
LOW (Low density side) SIDEB: exposure adjustment
C FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47 LOW (Low density side)
LOW exposure adjustment B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47
(Low density side) SIDEB: exposure adjustment
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 50 LOW (Low density side)
SIDEB: exposure adjustment C FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
HIGH (High density side) LOW exposure adjustment
E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 50 (Low density side)
SIDEB: exposure adjustment D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 50
HIGH (High density side) SIDEB: exposure adjustment
F FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 50 HIGH (High density side)
HIGH exposure adjustment E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 50
(High density) SIDEB: exposure adjustment
G BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50 HIGH (High density side)
SIDEB: R R F FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 50
H BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50 HIGH exposure adjustment
SIDEB: G G (High density)
I BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50 G BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: B B SIDEB: R R
H BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
3) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key. SIDEB: G G
To adjust the density in the low density area, select "COPY I BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: B B
SIDE A LOW." To adjust the density in the high density area,
select "COPY SIDE A HIGH." 3) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key.
4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. To adjust the density in the low density area, select "COPY
To increase the density, enter a greater number. To decrease SIDE B LOW." To adjust the density in the high density area,
the density, enter a smaller number. select "COPY SIDE B HIGH."
5) Cancel SIM 46-9.

4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
To increase the density, enter a greater number. To decrease Thin line
the density, enter a smaller number.
5) Cancel SIM 46-9.
11-H Automatic copy density and gradation 6) Press [EXECUTE] key.

adjustment by the user (ENABLE/DISABLE The copy and the printer density and gradation adjustment is
automatically executed. After completion of the adjustment,
setting and adjustment of the automatic
the display returns to the original operation screen.
copy density and gradation adjustment)
a. General
In the user program mode, the user can execute the automatic ADJ 12 Printer density and gradation
adjustment of the copy density and gradation.
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera-
adjustment
tion with SIM 26-53. This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's * When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
understanding on the automatic adjustment of the copy replaced.
density and gradation as well as the user's operational abil- * The CCD unit has been replaced.
ity is judged enough to execute the adjustment. * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
When set to enable, operation procedures must be fully * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
explained to the user.
b. Setting procedure
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When installing (as needed)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( * When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&*5$<&$/,%5$7,21
$˖ ˖<(612
$˖ 12-A Automatic adjustment of printer density
and gradation
˷̚˹
a. General
The automatic printer density and gradation adjustment is used to
adjust the printer density and gradation automatically by SIM67-24
or the user program.
(When this adjustment is executed, all the printer densities and gra-
dation adjustments of all the print modes are revised.)
2.
There are following two modes in the automatic adjustment.
1) Automatic adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 67-24 is used.)
2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.
2) Automatic adjustment by the user (The user program mode is
When disabling, set to "0" (NO). When enabling, set to "1"
used.)
(Yes).
The automatic adjustment by the user is provided to reduce
3) Press [OK] key.
the number of service calls.
It is used by the user to reset the printer density and gradation
When this is set to DISABLE, the menu of the automatic adjust-
to the normal levels when any trouble occurs in the printer den-
ment of the user copy density and gradation is not displayed in the
sity and gradation for some reasons.
user program mode.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
(Automatic adjustment of the copy density and gradation) machine environment is greatly changed, this function does
1) Enter the system setting mode. not work effectively.
2) Enter the copy setting mode. On the other hand, the automatic adjustment by the service-
3) Press the auto calibration key. man functions to recover the normal printer density and grada-
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. tion though the machine environment is greatly changed.
The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. If the machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for
obtaining the normal printer density and gradation.
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected. To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.
5) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in procedure
4) on the document table.
Set the patch image so that the light density area is on the left
side.
Place the adjustment pattern on the document table so that the
adjustment pattern patch faces in the sub scanning direction.
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above patch
image (adjustment pattern).

b. Note for execution of the adjustment 1) Enter the SIM 67-24 mode.
(Automatic adjustment)
1) The copy density and gradation adjustment must have been
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
completed properly. 35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
2) The print engine section must have been adjusted properly.
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$525h56,=(3$3(5
3) When setting the adjustment pattern on the document table in )257+,6$'-8670(17
the automatic adjustment procedures, place 5 sheets of white

paper on the adjustment pattern in order to prevent back copy-
ing and adverse effects of paper wrinkles as far as possible.
(Auto printer density and gradation adjustment by the serviceman)
Printer density and gradation adjustment (Automatic adjustment)

procedures flowchart (SIM67-24) (;(&87(
Start 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4R (11" x 8.5"R) or A3 (11" x 17")

paper is automatically selected.)
Execute ADJ12A printer density and gradation adjustment The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
(Automatic adjustment). 3) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in pro-
Enter the SIM67-24 mode. A4R (11 x 8.5R) or cedure 2) on the document table.
A3 (11 x 17) paper is automatically selected.
Press [EXECUTE] key. time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch image
(The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table, PRINTER CALIBRATION
and press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern

is scanned and the adjustment is performed
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks,

blurs, or other problems. (*2)
Press [OK] key.

(The initial setting of the half-tone image correction
is automatically performed.)
Cancel SIM67-24.
Check the result of the printer density and gradation adjustment.
Use SIM67-25 to print the check Use SIM64-5 to print the self print 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
pattern, and check the density check pattern, and check the printer
and the gradation. (*2) color balance and the density.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
3/($6(:$,7
Are the color

balance and the density NO 12:5($',1*7+(35,17('7(673$7&+
at the satisfactory
levels?
YES
Execute ADJ12B printer density and

gradation adjustment
(Manual adjustment). (SIM67-25) (*1)
(;(&87(
*1: If satisfactory color balance and

density cannot be obtained by
ADJ12B printer density and gradation
adjustment (Manual adjustment)
(SIM67-25), check the print engine for
any troubles.
*2: If there is any streak or blur on the
printed check pattern, check the print
engine for any troubles.
Completed

The printer density and gradation adjustment is automatically
executed and prints the check patch image. 12-B Manual printer density and gradation
Wait until the operation panel shown in the procedure 5) is dis- adjustment
played. a. General
When the printer density and gradation are not within the specified
range in the previous automatic adjustment of ADJ 10 or ADJ 12A,
or when a fine adjustment is required, or when a requests for cus-
tomization is made by the user, this adjustment is executed manu-
ally.
Execute the automatic adjustment of ADJ 12A in advance, and
then execute this adjustment for better efficiency.
b. Note for the printer density and gradation adjustment
(Manual adjustment)
The print engine section must have been properly adjusted.
Q (Max)
Copy density and gradation adjustment (Manual adjustment)
Start
If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pat-
tern, check the print engine for any problems.
5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.
Execute ADJ12B printer density and gradation adjustment (Manual adjustment).
(*1)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( Enter the SIM67-25 mode. A4R (11 x 8.5R) or
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5 A3 (11 x 17) paper is automatically selected.
&21),507+($'-867('3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*,67(57+,63$7&+'$7$

(The adjustment check pattern is printed.)
Check the printed adjustment check pattern.
Enter the adjustment

value with 10-key.
2.
Select the adjustment
target density level with
the scroll key.
NOTE:
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the half tone image
Are the density
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER- and the gradation at the
NO
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE" is displayed. satisfactory levels?
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS

YES
MODE" is displayed.
Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS Cancel SIM67-25.
MODE" is displayed.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Check the result of the printer density and gradation adjustment (*1)
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
&203/(7('7+,6352&('85(
3/($6(48,77+,602'(
Use SIM67-25 to print the check Use SIM64-5 to print the self print
pattern, and check the density check pattern, and check the printer
and the gradation. (*2) color balance and the density.
Are the density and NO

the gradation at the
6) Cancel SIM 67-24. satisfactory levels?
7) Check the printer density and gradation.

(For details of the density and gradation check procedures, YES
refer to page 5-24, 25.)
*1: If satisfactory density and gradation
cannot be obtained by this adjustment,
check the print engine for any troubles.
Completed

12-C Automatic printer density and gradation
adjustment by the user (ENABLE/DISABLE
setting and adjustment of the automatic
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
$˖
$˖ ˖32,17 printer density and gradation adjustment)
%˖ ˖32,17
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17 a. General

'˖ ˖32,17
In the user program mode, the user can execute the automatic
(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17
adjustment of the printer density and gradation.
*˖ ˖32,17 This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera-
+˖ ˖32,17
tion with SIM 26-54.
,˖ ˖32,17
-˖ ˖32,17
NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
understanding on the automatic adjustment of the printer
(;(&87( 2.
density and gradation as well as the user's operational abil-
ity is judged enough to execute the adjustment.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4R (11" x 8.5"R) or A3 (11" x 17") When set to enable, operation procedures must be fully
paper is automatically selected.) explained to the user.
The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. b. Setting procedure
3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the density 1) Enter the SIM 26-54 mode.
and the gradation are satisfactory.

If not, execute the following procedures. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&*5$<&$/,%5$7,212)35,17(5
$˖ ˖<(612
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. $˖
˷̚˹
P R INT E R C A L IB RAT ION
Patch A or B is slightly copied.
A B C D E F G H I J K L MN O P
Q (Max)
Low density High density
2.
2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.

When disabling, set to "0" (NO). When enabling, set to "1"
(Yes).
3) Press [OK] key.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
When this is set to DISABLE, the menu of the automatic adjust-
not be reversed.
ment of the user printer density is not displayed in the user program
Patch A or B is slightly copied. mode.
When, however, the density and the gradation are adjusted on (Automatic adjustment of the printer density and gradation)
the request by the user, there is no need to set to the standard
1) Enter the system setting mode.
density and gradation stated above.
2) Enter the copy setting mode.
4) Select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
3) Press the auto calibration key.
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set in the range of 0 - 255 (1 - 99).
When SIM 46-24 is used to adjust the automatic density, all the The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
set values of this simulation are set to 50. A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper is selected by priority. If there is no
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected.
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value. 5) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in procedure
Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis- 4) on the document table.
fied. Set the patch image so that the light density area is on the left
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high side.
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the Place the adjustment pattern on the document table so that the
adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively. adjustment pattern patch faces in the sub scanning direction.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above patch
way of adjustment. image (adjustment pattern).
6) Cancel SIM 67-25.
7) Check the printer density and gradation. Thin line
(For details of the density and gradation check procedures,
refer to page 5-24, 25.)

6) Press [EXECUTE] key. AE WIDTH PART:
The copy and the printer density and gradation adjustment is Document density reading area in auto mode is 3 - 7 mm
automatically executed. After completion of the adjustment, (leading edge of document) x 100 mm (width). No relation-
the display returns to the original operation screen. ship to PRESCAN MODE
Operation in auto copy mode:
When the density of the document of the read area is light,
ADJ 13 Setting of the operating output image density is increased by control. When the
density of the document of the read area is dark, output
conditions for the automatic image density is decreased by control.
exposure mode in copy, scan,
Document table/DSPF mode
and FAX mode
This is used to set the operating conditions of density scanning 3 to 7mm
(exposure operation) of a document in the automatic copy mode,
the san mode, and the FAX mode.
When a copy with correct density is not obtained by type of docu-
ment, change the setting.
AE WIDTH = FULL

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685(02'(6(783%:$(
$(B02'( ˖ 02'( 02'(
$(B6723B&23< ˖ 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
$(B6723B)$; ˖ 2)) 21
$(B6723B6&$1 ˖ 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
$(B),/7(5 ˖ 62)7 1250$/ 6+$53
$(B:,'7+ ˖ )8// 3$57
Document table mode
3 to 7mm

100mm
2) Set REALTIME or STOP to adjustment item AE STOP COPY.
For contents of each setting item, refer to below. Change the
setting value of "AE WIDTH" item to "FULL" or "PART", in AE WIDTH = PART
some cases.
Default
Item/Display Content Set value
value
AE_MODE Auto exposure MODE1, MODE2 MODE2
mode
AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/STOP STOP
Stop (for copy)
DSPF mode
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON/OFF ON
Stop (for FAX)
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/STOP STOP 3 to 7mm
Stop (for scanner)
AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
setting NORMAL
SHARP
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL FULL
PART
100mm AE WIDTH = PART
NOTE: MODE1: High gamma (Improves the image contrast)
MODE2: Normal gamma
STOP:
Reads the density of 3 - 7 mm area from leading edge of
document, decides the output image density according to
the density of that part. (The output image density is con-
stant at whole area.) Document density detection area
REALTIME:
Reads the density of width of the document one by one,
decides the output image density according to the density
of each part of the document. (The output image density
may be not constant at whole area.)
AE WIDTH FULL:
Document density reading area in auto mode is 3 - 7 mm
(leading edge of document) x Document width. No relation-
ship to PRESCAN MODE

2) Open the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
ADJ 14 Paper size detection tion.
adjustment
14-A Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor
adjustment
* The manual paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
* The manual paper feed tray unit has been replaced.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
The maximum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
4) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4R size.
(;(&87(
display.
EXECUTE The A4R size width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
&/26(
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
(;(&87,1*
display.
Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.
8) Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.
(;(&87(

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
11
81 2
71 2
51 2
A4
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
A3
B4
B5
A4
B5
A5
3$5326,7,21$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57

(;(&87(
display.
EXECUTE
The minimum width position detection level of the manual
Repeat the above procedure to adjust paper feed guide is recognized.
the A5R width MIN POSITION. If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR" is
displayed.
When the operation is completed normally, the above data are
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
&203/(7(
(;(&87(

14-B DSPF tray paper size (width) sensor 14-C Adjust the paper width sensor for paper
adjustment feed tray 3
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* The DSPF paper feed tray section has been disassembled. * The paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
* The DSPF paper feed tray unit has been replaced. * The paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs. * U2 trouble has occurred.
* The DSPF control PWB has been replaced. * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the DSPF control PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
1) Enter the SIM 53-6 mode. 1) Enter the SIM 40-12 mode.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
75$<$'-8670(17
63)75$<$'-8670(17 0,1326,7,21$'-8670(17
75$<92/0$;75$<$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
(;(&87(
EXECUTE
(;(&87(

2) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width posi- ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
tion. 75$<$'-8670(17
0,1326,7,21$'-8670(17
(;(&87,1*
(;(&87(

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
75$<$'-8670(17
0,1326,7,21$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57

The maximum width detection level is recognized.
4) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
The A4R width detection level is recognized. (;(&87(
6) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.
EXECUTE
The A5R width detection level is recognized.

8) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width posi- ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
75$<$'-8670(17
&/26(
tion. 0,1326,7,21$'-8670(17
(;(&87,1*
(;(&87(

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
75$<$'-8670(17
&203/(7(

The minimum width detection level is recognized.
* When each of the above operations has been completed, the
"COMPLETE" message appears; when any of the operations
has failed, the "ERROR" message appears. (;(&87(

2) Open the paper feed guide to the maximum width position. 1) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 41-1.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3'6(1625&+(&.
2&6: 3' 3' 3'
3' 3' 3' 3'

2) Gradually turn over the original detection arm unit in the arrow
direction, and loosen the original cover switch actuator adjust-
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. ing screw so that the OCSW indicator changes from inverse
video to normal video when the arm unit top reaches a height
The maximum width detection level is recognized.
of 320.5mm from the table glass. Then move the actuator to
4) Open the paper feed guide to the minimum width position. adjust its position. (If the original cover switch turns on in
improper timing, the original detection mechanism mail fail to
operate correctly.)
32+
-0.5mm
* When each of the above operations has been completed, the
"COMPLETE" message appears; when any of the operations
has failed, the "ERROR" message appears.
ADJ 15 Adjusting the original size

detection (in original table 15-B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size
mode) sensor
15-A Adjust the detection point of the original * The original size sensor section has been disassembled.
size sensor (in original table mode) * The original size sensor section has been replaced.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * U2 trouble has occurred.
* The original size sensor section has been disassembled. * The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
* The original size sensor section has been replaced. * The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced.

1) Enter the SIM 41-2 mode. 1) Enter the SIM 65-1 mode.
2) Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions).

EXECUTE
When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds
and the display is reversed. When all the four points are
pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the dis-
play returns to the simulation sub number entry screen.
In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen
again.
Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display
frame and the detection position when the touch panel is
pressed.
Adjustment
failed
* When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such
as a needle or a pin).
Adjustment completed EXECUTE
ADJ 17 Fusing paper guide position

adjustment
Normally there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the follow-
ing cases, perform this adjustment.
* When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section.
* When wrinkles are made on paper in the fusing section.
* When an image deflection or an image blur is generated in the
paper rear edge section.
1) Loosen the fusing paper guide fixing screws which are on two
position in the front/rear frame direction.
2) Use the fusing paper guide position scale as the reference to
shift the paper guide in the arrow direction A or B.
2) Execute the sensor adjustment without document.

With the document cover open, without placing a document on B
the table glass, press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press
[EXECUTE] key. A
If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT PHOTO
SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUSTED" is displayed.
ADJ 16 Touch panel coordinate setting

* The operation panel has been replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred. Though the standard installing position is one scale under the
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced. center position of the marking, change the position depending
on the situation.
* When wrinkles are generated on paper, change the position
in the arrow direction B.
* When an image deflection or an image blur is generated in
the paper rear edge section, change the position in the
arrow direction A.

6) Change the set value of set item A.
ADJ 18 Print engine image position, When the set value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed
image magnification ratio, void by 0.1mm.
When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification
area, off-center adjustment ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set
(manual adjustment) value is decreased, the BK image magnification ratio in the
main scanning direction is decreased.
18-A Print engine image magnification ratio Repeat procedures 2) - 6) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
adjustment (Main scanning direction)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: 18-B Print engine image position adjustment
* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced. This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* U2 trouble has occurred. * When the LSU is replaced or removed.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. * When a paper tray is replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. * When the paper tray section is disassembled.
1) Enter the SIM 50-10 mode. * When “Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (Main
scanning direction)” is performed.
* When the manual feed tray is replaced.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783 * When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
$˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
* When the duplex section is installed or replaced.
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6 * When the large capacity tray is installed or replaced.
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
*˖ ˖0$,1/&&
* When the large capacity tray section is disassembled.
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
,˖ ˖68%0)7
-˖ ˖68%&6 * U2 trouble has occurred.

.˖ ˖68%&6
/˖ ˖68%/&&
(;(&87( 2.
(Note)
EXECUTE EXECUTE Before execution of this adjustment, check to insure the following
End of print item.
* Check that the “Print engine image magnification ratio adjust-
7(67
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
ment (Main scanning direction)” has been properly adjusted.
&/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783 1) Enter SIM 50-10 mode.
$˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
$˖ ˖%.0$*
)˖ ˖0$,1&6 $˖
*˖ ˖0$,1/&& %˖ ˖0$,10)7
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
,˖ ˖68%0)7 '˖ ˖0$,1&6

-˖ ˖68%&6 (˖ ˖0$,1&6
.˖ ˖68%&6 )˖ ˖0$,1&6
/˖ ˖68%/&& *˖ ˖0$,1/&&
(;(&87( 2. +˖ ˖0$,1$'8
,˖ ˖68%0)7
-˖ ˖68%&6
2) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray. .˖ ˖68%&6
3) Select the paper feed tray set in procedure 2) with the scroll /˖ ˖68%/&&
key. (;(&87( 2.

The check pattern is printed out. EXECUTE EXECUTE
5) Check that the inside dimension of the printed half tone is 240 End of print
 0.5mm.

7(67
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
*˖ ˖0$,1/&&
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
240 0.5mm
,˖ ˖68%0)7
-˖ ˖68%&6
.˖ ˖68%&6
/˖ ˖68%/&&
(;(&87( 2.
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.

2) Use the scroll key to select a paper feed tray which is to be (When the off-center is adjusted)
adjusted. (Items B - M) 6) Change the adjustment value. (Items I - M)
Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the
Setting Default
Item/Display Content [EXECUTE] key.
range value
A BK-MAG Main scan print 60 - 140 100 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
magnification ratio BK printed.
B MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50 When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pat-
value (Manual paper feed) tern is shifted to the front frame side. When it is decreased, the
C MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50 adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side.
value (Tray 1)
When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance is
D MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value (Tray 2) changed by about 0.1mm.
E MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50 In case a satisfactory result cannot be obtained by repeating
value (Tray 3) the above procedures, perform the following procedure.
F MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50 7) Loosen the paper feed tray off-center adjustment screws (2
value (Tray 4) pcs.) at the center section of the lift plate of the paper feed tray,
G MAIN-LCC Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50 and change the gear unit position in the front/rear frame direc-
value (LCC)
tion. Repeat the adjustment procedures from 4).
H MAIN-ADU Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value (ADU)
NOTE:
Before execution of this
adjustment check to
insure that the adjustment
items A - G have been
properly adjusted. If not,
this adjustment cannot be
made properly.
I SUB-MFT Paper Manual 1 - 99 50
transport paper feed
J SUB-CS12 direction Standard 1 - 99 50
image tray
K SUB-CS34 position DESK 1 - 99 50
L SUB-LCC adjustment LCC 1 - 99 50
M SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
N MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
O PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual 1-6 1 2
paper feed (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
P DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO selection No 1
3) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray selected in pro-
cedure 2).
(When the paper transport direction image position is
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. adjusted)
The adjustment pattern is printed. 8) Change the adjustment value. (Items B - H)
5) Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that it is as shown Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the
below. [EXECUTE] key.
Content Standard adjustment value When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
X Lead edge void area 3.0  1.0mm printed.
Y Rear edge void area 2.0 - 5.0mm When the adjustment value is increased, it is shifted to the
Z1/Z2 FRONT/REAR void area 2.0  2.0mm right. (It is shifted so that the image is delayed for the paper.)
When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance is
Z1 changed by about 0.1mm.
2.0 2.0mm
X
3.0 1.0mm Y
2.0 - 5.0mm
Z2
2.0 2.0mm

4) Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below
18-C Print engine print area (void area) are in the range of the standard values.
adjustment
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: Content Standard adjustment value
X Lead edge void area 3.0  1.0mm
Y Rear edge void area 2.0 - 5.0mm
* When a paper tray is replaced. Z1/Z2 FRONT/REAR void area 2.0  2.0mm
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
* When the manual feed tray is replaced. Z1
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled. 2.0 2.0mm
* When the duplex section is installed or replaced.
* When the large capacity tray is installed or replaced.
* When the large capacity tray section is disassembled.
X
* U2 trouble has occurred. 3.0 1.0mm Y
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. 2.0 - 5.0mm
* When “Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (Main
scanning direction)” is performed.
* When the print engine image position adjustment is performed.
(Note)
Before executing this adjustment, be sure to execute ADJ 3B print
engine image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning direc-
tion) in advance. Z2
1) Enter the SIM 50-10 mode. 2.0 2.0mm
If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired

condition, execute the simulation 50-1.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
(Note) Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm.
$˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7 5) Enter the SIM 50-1 mode.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)˖ ˖0$,1&6 /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
*˖ ˖0$,1/&& $˖ ˖55&$
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
$˖ %˖ ˖55&%&6
,˖ ˖68%0)7 ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6
-˖ ˖68%&6 '˖ ˖55&%/&&
.˖ ˖68%&6 (˖ ˖55&%0)7
/˖ ˖68%/&& )˖ ˖55&%$'8
(;(&87( 2. *˖ ˖/($'
+˖ ˖6,'(
,˖ ˖'(1$
EXECUTE EXECUTE -˖ ˖'(1%

.˖ ˖)52175($5
/˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
End of print
2.

7(67
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26( 10-key
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖%.0$* OK
$˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)˖ ˖0$,1&6 /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
*˖ ˖0$,1/&& $˖ ˖55&$

$˖
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8 %˖ ˖55&%&6
,˖ ˖68%0)7 ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6
-˖ ˖68%&6 '˖ ˖55&%/&&
.˖ ˖68%&6 (˖ ˖55&%0)7
/˖ ˖68%/&& )˖ ˖55&%$'8
2. *˖ ˖/($'
(;(&87(
+˖ ˖6,'(
,˖ ˖'(1$
2) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper to all the trays, and select the set -˖ ˖'(1%
item J with the scroll key. Enter the value corresponding to the .˖ ˖)52175($5
adjustment target paper feed tray. /˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
2.
The adjustment pattern is printed.

6) Select the adjustment item I, J, K with the scroll key, and enter
the adjustment value and press [OK] key. ADJ 19 Scan image magnification ratio
Setting Default adjustment
range value (Manual adjustment)
A Lead RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
edge reference position This manual adjustment is used when the automatic adjustment of
adjust- (OC) SIM 50-28 cannot obtain a satisfactory result.
B ment RRCB-CS12 Resist Standard 1 - 99 50 This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
value motor ON Tray
* When the copy image magnification ratio in the sub scanning
C RRCB-CS34 timing Desk 1 - 99 50
adjust-
direction is not properly adjusted.
D RRCB-LCC LCC 1 - 99 50
E RRCB-MFT ment Manual 1 - 99 50
* When the scanner motor is replaced.
paper * When a U2 trouble occurs.
feed * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
G Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 30
loss area loss area setting Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing
H setting SIDE Side image loss area 0 - 99 20 position adjustment) must have been completed.
value adjustment
I Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 30 19-A Main scanning direction image
adjust- adjustment
J ment DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjustment (Document table mode)
K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 30 1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
REAR area adjustment below.
L Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50
adjust- OC center adjustment
ment
M Magnifi- SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150

cation SPEED_OC magnification ratio
ratio adjustment (CCD)
correction
N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
scanning correction value
O direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
print area value
P correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
value value
Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
value
R DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
value
S DENB-LCC LCC correction value 1 - 99 50
T DENB-ADU ADU correction value 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is increased, the void area is

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the void ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
area is decreased. 0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&&'0$,1
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is $˖ %˖ ˖&&'68%
changed by 0.1mm. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1
'˖ ˖63)68%
NOTE: The adjustment value and the actual void area are related (˖ ˖63)%0$,1
as follows:
Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area
NOTE: When the amount of the rear edge void is different between
each paper feed tray, change the adjustment value of item
N, O, P, Q, R, S, T (DENB-XXX) in SIM50-1 and adjust.
The adjustment item J (DENB) have a effect on the paper 2.
of all paper feed tray.

3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
That is, adjustment value of item N, O, P, Q, R, S, T
(DENB-XXX) fine adjusts to adjustment item J (DENB) for Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
each paper tray. copy mode, and make a copy.
After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) - 4) to check 4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
that the void area is within the specified range. range (100  1.0%).
Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if the If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
lead edge void area is not within the specified range, change the  1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
adjustment value of RRCB-XXX (item B, C, D, E, F) of SIM 50-1. ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
procedure.
5) Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
tion ratio is increased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
cation ratio is changed by about 0.02%.

19-B Sub scanning direction image 19-C Main scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment magnification ratio adjustment
(Document table mode) (DSPF mode)
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
below. * When the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When U2 trouble occurs.
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
* When the copy magnification ratio is not matched.

* When the DSPF is disassembled.
a. Adjustment procedures
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu-
ment tray of the DSPF.
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures.
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and
both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge.
Paper pass direction

A4 size

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&&'0$,1
$˖ %˖ ˖&&'68%
(Both the front surface
and the back surface)
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1
10mm 10mm
'˖ ˖63)68%
(˖ ˖63)%0$,1
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.

3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original
images.
2.
original
3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode, and make a copy. copy
Copy magnifi- (Original dimension - Copy dimension)
cation ratio 100% 10 50 100 150 200 250
Original dimension
(Example 1)
10 50 100 150 200 250
Copy A
10 20 90 100 110
(Shorter than
the original)
4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following
formula:
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
(%)
Scale Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
(Original) 10 20 90 100 110
If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
(100  0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
cedures.
(Example 2) 5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
Copy B
10 20 90 100 110
(Longer than
the original)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&&'0$,1
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified $˖ %˖ ˖&&'68%
range (100  1.0%). ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1

'˖ ˖63)68%
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100 (˖ ˖63)%0$,1
 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification

ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
procedure.
5) Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased. 2.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-

cation ratio is changed by about 0.1%.

3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original
Setting Default
Item Display Content images.
range value
A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio
10
adjustment (CCD)
50
B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio
100
adjustment (CCD)
10
C SPF(MAIN) DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
original
150
50
surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Main scan)
200
100
D SPF(SUB) DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
copy
150
adjustment (Sub scan)
E SPFB(MAIN) DSPF document back 1 - 99 50
200
4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following
* Items A, C, E: When the set value is increased by 1, the formula:
magnification ratio is increased by 0.02%.
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
* Items B, D: When the set value is increased by 1, the magni- (%)
fication ratio is increased by 0.1%. Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
* It affects scanning (PC scanning, etc.) as well as copying. If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
6) Select an adjustment item of SPF (MAIN)/SPFB (MAIN) with (100  0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
the scroll key. If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
SPF (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio cedures.
(Front surface) 5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
SPFB (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
(Back surface)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
7(67
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica- $˖

$˖ ˖&&'0$,1
%˖ ˖&&'68%

tion ratio is increased. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the image magni- '˖ ˖63)68%
fication ratio is changed by 0.02%. (˖ ˖63)%0$,1
NOTE: When [CLOSE] key is pressed in this simulation mode, the

machine goes into the normal operation mode. Under this
state, copy check can be normally performed. When the
system key is pressed, the machine returns to the simula-
tion mode.
2.
19-D Sub scanning direction image

Setting Default
magnification ratio adjustment Item Display Content
range value
(DSPF mode) A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
* When the scan control PWB is replaced. B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. magnification ratio
* When U2 trouble occurs. adjustment (CCD)
C SPF(MAIN) DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
* When the copy magnification ratio is not matched.
* When the DSPF is disassembled. adjustment (Main scan)
a. Adjustment procedures D SPF(SUB) DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu- adjustment (Sub scan)
ment tray of the DSPF. E SPFB(MAIN) DSPF document back 1 - 99 50
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures. surface magnification ratio
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and
both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge. * Items A, C, E: When the set value is increased by 1, the
magnification ratio is increased by 0.02%.
10mm
* Items B, D: When the set value is increased by 1, the
Paper pass direction magnification ratio is increased by 0.1%.
A4 size 6)
* It affects scanning (PC scanning, etc.) as well as copying.
Select an adjustment item with the scroll key.
SPF (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio

(Front surface/Back surface)
10mm
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.

7) Enter an image magnification ratio adjustment value with 10- 3) Enter the SIM 50-12 mode.
key, and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
tion ratio is increased. 25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖2&
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the image magni- $˖ %˖ ˖63)6,'(
fication ratio is changed by 0.01%. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)6,'(

tion mode.
ADJ 20 Scan image off-center

2.
adjustment 4) Select the adjustment mode OC with the scroll key.

(Manual adjustment) 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
The entered value is set.
This manual adjustment is used when the automatic adjustment of
SIM 50-28 cannot obtain a satisfactory result. When the set value is increased, the main scanning print posi-
tion is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm.
20-A Scan image off-center adjustment 6) Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode and make a copy.
(Document table mode)
20-B Scan image off-center adjustment
(DSPF mode)
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
1) Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by yourself) in the
adjustment mode (document table).
* When U2 trouble occurs.
* When the DSPF section is disassembled.
* When the DSPF unit is replaced.
NOTE: To execute this adjustment, it is required that the Scan
A
image off-center adjustment (Document table mode) must
have been properly adjusted.
a. Adjustment procedures
A=B 1) Prepare the adjustment chart.
Draw a line at the center of the front surface and the back sur-
face of A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in parallel with the paper transport
B direction.
Paper transport direction
Front surface Back surface
2) Check the copy image center position.

If A' - B' = 1.0mm, the adjustment is not required.
A'
Draw a line at the center of the

A' - B' = 1.0mm front surface and the back surface
(100%) of paper in parallel with the paper
transport direction.
B'
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following

procedures.

SIM50-6
2) Set the adjustment chart to the DSPF.
3) Make a duplex copy in the normal magnification ratio from the Setting Default
manual paper feed tray, and check the image position on the range value
front surface and the back surface of the copy paper. A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
position adjustment
original copy B SIDE2
(CCD)
Back surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
a position adjustment
(CIS)
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
loss (SIDE1) edge image loss
amount amount setting
b D setting FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20
SIDE1 (SIDE1) image loss amount
setting
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 30
(SIDE1) edge image loss
If the difference is within the range of 0  2.7mmm there is no amount setting
need to perform the adjustment. F LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 30
If the adjustment is required, perform the following procedures. (SIDE2) edge image loss
4) Enter the SIM 50-12 or 50-6 mode. amount setting
G Image FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20

loss (SIDE2) image loss amount
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
amount setting
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783 H setting TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 20
$˖ ˖2&
SIDE2 (SIDE2) edge image loss
$˖ %˖ ˖63)6,'(
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)6,'(

amount setting
I OFFSET_SPF1 DSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
document off-center
adjustment
J OFFSET_SPF2 DSPF back surface 1 - 99 50
document off-center
adjustment
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF image 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio
2.
adjustment (sub
scanning)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
* Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63) timing is delayed.
$˖ ˖6,'(
$˖
%˖ ˖6,'(
* Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'( image loss is increased.
'˖ ˖)5217B5($56,'(
(˖ ˖75$,/B('*(6,'(

* Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
)˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'( * The DSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for
*˖ ˖)5217B5($56,'(
countermeasures against the case when shades are
+˖ ˖75$,/B('*(6,'(
,˖ ˖2))6(7B63)
produced.
-˖ ˖2))6(7B63) 5) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key.
.˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B63)
(SIM50-12)
2.
SPF(SIDE1) Front surface mode
SIM50-12 SPF(SIDE2) Back surface mode
Setting Default
(SIM50-6)
Item Display Content
range value OFFSET SPF1 Front surface mode
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50 OFFSET SPF2 Back surface mode
center adjustment
B SPF(SIDE1) DSPF front surface image 1 - 99 50
6) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
off-center adjustment (Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
C SPF(SIDE2) DSPF back surface image 1 - 99 50 (When the adjustment value is increased, the print image is
off-center adjustment shifted to the rear.)
A - C: When the adjustment value is increased, the image NOTE: When [CLOSE] key is pressed in this simulation mode, the
position is shifted to the rear frame side. machine goes into the normal operation mode. Under this
1step = 0.1mm state, copy check can be normally performed. When the
tion mode.

ADJ 21 Copy image position, image

loss, and void area adjustment ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(Manual adjustment)
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$˖ ˖55&$
$˖ %˖ ˖55&%&6
This manual adjustment is used when the automatic adjustment of ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6
SIM 50-28 cannot obtain a satisfactory result. '˖ ˖55&%/&&

(˖ ˖55&%0)7
)˖ ˖55&%$'8
21-A Copy image position, image loss, void area *˖ ˖/($'
adjustment (Document table mode) +˖ ˖6,'(
,˖ ˖'(1$
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: -˖ ˖'(1%

.˖ ˖)52175($5
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. /˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. 2.

10-key
* U2 trouble has occurred. OK

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced. /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$˖ ˖55&$
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced. $˖ %˖ ˖55&%&6
NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to confirm that ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6
'˖ ˖55&%/&&
the “Print engine image skew, image position, image mag- (˖ ˖55&%0)7
nification ratio, void area adjustments” has been completed )˖ ˖55&%$'8
normally. *˖ ˖/($'
+˖ ˖6,'(
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure ,˖ ˖'(1$
below. -˖ ˖'(1%

.˖ ˖)52175($5
Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction /˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
and that its lead edge is in contact with the document guide 2.
plate.
Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead 3) Set RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values.
edge can be seen.
Setting Default
range value
A Lead RRCA Document lead 0 - 99 50
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
edge edge reference
adjust- position (OC)
B ment RRCB-CS12 Resist Standard 1 - 99 50
value motor Tray
C RRCB-CS34 ON Desk 1 - 99 50
D RRCB-LCC timing LCC 1 - 99 50
E RRCB-MFT adjust- Manual 1 - 99 50
ment paper feed
G Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 30
loss area loss area setting
H setting SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20
value area adjustment
I Void area DENA Lead edge void 1 - 99 30
adjust- area adjustment
J ment DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjustment
K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 30
REAR area adjustment
L Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50
adjust- OC center adjustment
ment
M Magnifi- SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
cation SPEED_OC magnification ratio
ratio adjustment (CCD)
correction
N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
scanning correction value
O direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
print area value
P correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
value value
Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
value

Setting Default
Item/Display Content 21-B Document scan position adjustment
range value
R Sub DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50 (DSPF mode scanner scan position
scanning value adjustment)
S direction DENB-LCC LCC correction 1 - 99 50 This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
print area value
correction * When the scan control PWB is replaced.
T DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 50
value value * When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
4) Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment.
Press [CLOSE] key, and shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode and make a copy in 100% mode and in 200% * When U2 trouble occurs.
mode. * When the DSPF section is disassembled.
When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead edge * When the DSPF unit is replaced.
image from 3.0mm is not copied in either of 100% and 200% This simulation is to adjust the scanner reading position when
copy scale. scanning the front surface in the DSPF mode.
If not, change and adjust the RRCA value. If this adjustment is made improperly, the scanner stop position is
(Adjust so that the lead edge image from 3.0mm is not copied shifted to the specified position and a shade of the document table
in either of different copy magnification ratios.) may be reflected on the lead edge section of the scan image in the
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is DSPF (front surface) mode.
obtained. a. Adjustment procedures
Scale image 3.0mm position 1) Make a copy in the DSPF (front surface) mode, and check for
Paper lead any shade on the lead edge section of the copy image.
edge
Papar lead edge

100%
5mm 10mm
Image area
200%
5mm 10mm
Shadow image of DSPF
5) Image loss adjustment If there is any shade of the document table on the lead edge
When the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to the section of the copy image, perform the following procedures.
default value, it is adjusted to the standard state. If it is not in 2) Enter the SIM 53-8 mode, and press [MANUAL] key.
the below standard state, or when it is set to a desired value,
change these adjustment items.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Paper lead edge 63)6&$11,1*326,7,21$'-8670(17

$872 0$18$/
Copy area
Maginification ratio : 400%
1 2 3 4
5mm 10mm

Void area: 3.0mm, Image loss: 3.0mm 3) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
De- Standard When the set value is increased, the distance from the home
Item/ Adjustment position to the DSPF scanning position is increased. When the
Content fault adjustment
Display range
value value set value is changed by 1, the scanning position is changed by
LEAD Image loss Lead edge 0 - 99 30 3.0 0.1mm.
adjustment image loss  1.0mm Perform the procedures of 1) - 3) until a satisfactory result is
adjustment obtained.
SIDE Side image 0 - 99 20 2.0
loss  1.0mm NOTE: After execution of this adjustment, be sure to execute
adjustment “Copy mode image loss adjustment (DSPF mode)”.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
image loss is decreased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is
changed by 0.1mm.

21-C Copy mode image loss adjustment
(DSPF mode)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)
* When the scan control PWB is replaced. $˖

$˖ ˖6,'(
%˖ ˖6,'(
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'(
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. '˖ ˖)5217B5($56,'(
(˖ ˖75$,/B('*(6,'(

* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. )˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'(
* When U2 trouble occurs. *˖ ˖)5217B5($56,'(
+˖ ˖75$,/B('*(6,'(
* When the DSPF section is disassembled. ,˖ ˖2))6(7B63)
-˖ ˖2))6(7B63)
* When the DSPF unit is replaced. .˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B63)
NOTE: To execute this adjustment, the following items must have

2.
been properly adjusted.
* Print engine image position adjustment
* Print engine print area (void area) adjustment Setting Default
range value
* Main scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
(DSPF mode)
document scan
* Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment position
(DSPF mode) adjustment
* Scan image off-center adjustment (DSPF mode) (CCD)
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
* Document scan position adjustment (DSPF mode scanner scan
document scan
position adjustment) position
a. Adjustment procedures adjustment (CIS)
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface 0 - 99 20
1) Prepare the adjustment chart. loss (SIDE1) lead edge image
The adjustment chart can be made by the following proce- amount loss amount
dures. setting setting
D SIDE1 FRONT_REAR Front surface 0 - 99 20
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper and draw arrow marks vertically and
(SIDE1) side image loss
horizontally on the front and the back surfaces.
amount setting
At the same time, put marks of the lead edge, the trail edge, E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 30
the front end, and the rear end as well as the identification (SIDE1) edge image loss
marks of the front surface and the back surface. amount setting
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 30
R Front surface loss (SIDE2) edge image loss
FACE
G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss
L T amount setting
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 20
amount setting
Put the position I OFFSET_SPF1 DSPF front 1 - 99 50
marks.
surface document
off-center
F
adjustment
Draw arrows. J OFFSET_SPF2 DSPF back 1 - 99 50
surface document
off-center
R Back surface adjustment
BACK
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF image 1 - 99 50
magnification
ratio adjustment
L T (Sub scan)
* Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan

timing is delayed.
Put the position
marks. * Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image
loss is increased.
F * Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
* The DSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for counter-
Draw arrows.
measures against the case when shades are produced.
tion mode.

(Lead edge image loss adjustment) 2) Enter the adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE (SIDE1/SIDE2)
1) Set the lead edge image loss adjustment values (LEAD EDGE with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
(SIDE1/SIDE2)) on the front surface and the back surface to TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 1):
the following values. Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Front surface)
(Standard set value) TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 2):
LEAD EDGE(SIDE 1): Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Back surface)
20 Lead edge image loss set value (Front surface) (When the adjustment value is increased, the rear edge image
LEAD EDGE(SIDE 2): loss is increased.)
30 Lead edge image loss set value (Back surface) (Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
(When the set value is increased, the lead edge image loss is (Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment)
increased.)
1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF mode. Check to
(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step) confirm that the image losses on the front frame side and the
2) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF mode. Check to rear frame side are 2.02.0mm on the front surface and the
confirm that the lead edge image loss is within 3.0  1.0mm on back surface.
the front surface and the back surface. The paper lead edge
must be aligned with the presumed image lead edge. Paper F Image loss
side edge 2.0 2.0mm
Paper lead edge The paper lead edge must be aligned with
the image lead edge. Copy image
Copy image
Copy image
Paper R Image loss

side edge 2.0 2.0mm

Image loss procedure.
3.0 1.0mm
2) Enter the adjustment value of FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1) /
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2), and press [OK] key.
procedure. FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1):
3) Enter the adjustment value of SIDE1/SIDE2 with 10-key, and Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Front surface)
press [OK] key. FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2):
Adjust so that the paper lead edge is aligned with the pre- Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Back surface)
sumed image lead edge. (When the adjustment value is increased, the front/rear image
SIDE1: Front surface lead edge scan position adjustment loss is increased.)
SIDE2: Back surface lead edge scan position adjustment (Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
(When the adjustment value is increased, the print image posi-
tion is shifted to the delaying direction for the paper.)
(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
(Rear edge image loss adjustment)
1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF mode. Check to
confirm that the rear edge image loss is 2.0 - 5.0mm on the
front surface and the back surface.
Paper rear edge
Copy image
Image loss 2.0 - 5.0mm

procedure.

ADJ 22 Finisher and punch unit

adjustments (alignment, punch ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
hole position, staple position,

),1,6+(5$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖$/,*10(17326,7,21
$˖
folding position) ˷̚˹
%˖ ˖67$3/(326,7,21
&˖ ˖381&+&(17(5
'˖ ˖381&++2/(
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: (˖ ˖75$<:$,7,1*326,7,2166,=(
* When the finisher is replaced. )˖ ˖75$<:$,7,1*326,7,21/6,=(
* When the finisher control PWB is replaced.

* When the punch unit is disassembled.
* When the punch control PWB is replaced.
* When the alignment is improper.
2.
* When the punch hole position is shifted.
* When the paper holding position is shifted. 2) Select an adjustment target item with the scroll key.
3) Enter an adjustment value and press [OK] key.
4) Cancel the simulation, make a copy in the mode including the
adjustment target, and check the adjustment result.
22-A MX-FN15/AR-PN4
Change
when the
Setting Default Purpose (Case where the Change when the adjustment value is
Item/Display Content adjustment
range value adjustment is required) increased or decreased
value is
changed by 1
A ALIGNMENT Alignment adjustment 2 - 18 10 This adjustment is used to Alignment The alignment width is 0.35mm
POSITION adjust the paper alignment plate position decreased when the
width when the paper (width) on the adjustment value is
alignment is improper. staple tray increased.
The alignment width is
increased when the
adjustment value is
decreased.
B STAPLE Staple position 68 - 132 100 This adjustment is used to Staple The staple position is 0.152mm
POSITION adjustment adjust the staple position position shifted to the rear when the
when the staple position is (Stapler stop adjustment value is
improper. position) increased.
(F/R direction) The staple position is
shifted to the front when
the adjustment value is
decreased.
C PUNCH Punch hole position 37 - 63 50 This adjustment is used to Punch The punch position is 0.15mm
CENTER adjustment adjust the punch position position shifted to the front when
(F/R direction) when the punch hole (F/R direction) the adjustment value is
position is shifted in the F/R increased.
direction. The punch position is
shifted to the rear when the
adjustment value is
decreased.
D PUNCH Punch hole position 35 - 57 50 This adjustment is used to Punch The punch position is 0.26mm
HOLE adjustment adjust the punch hole position shifted to the paper lead
(Paper transport position when the punch (Paper edge when the adjustment
direction) hole position is shifted in transport value is increased.
the paper transport direction) The punch position is
direction. shifted to the paper rear
edge when the adjustment
value is decreased.
E TRAY Stack tray alignment 5 - 35 15 This adjustment is used to Stack tray The stack tray standby 1mm
WAITING adjustment adjust alignment by standby position is shifted to the
POSITION (Small size) changing the stack tray position downside when the
(S-SIZE) standby position when the (Up/down adjustment value is
paper alignment on the direction) increased.
stack tray is improper. The stack tray standby
position is shifted to the
upside when the
adjustment value is
decreased.

Change
when the
value is
changed by 1
F TRAY Stack tray alignment 5 - 35 15 This adjustment is used to Stack tray The stack tray standby 1mm
POSITION (Large size) changing the stack tray position downside when the
(L-SIZE) standby position when the (Up/down adjustment value is
upside when the
adjustment value is
decreased.
22-B MX-FN16/AR-PN4
Change
when the
value is
changed by 1
A SADDLE Saddle binding/ 192 - 208 200 This adjustment is used to Paper folding The binding/folding position 0.25mm
POSITION folding position set the binding/folding position is shifted to the upside
adjustment position to the paper center positioning when the adjustment value
when it is shifted from the plate stop is increased by 1.
paper center. position The binding/folding position
is shifted to the downside
when the adjustment value
is decreased by 1.
B ALIGNMENT Alignment adjustment 2 - 18 10 This adjustment is used to Alignment The alignment width is 0.35mm
POSITION adjust the paper alignment plate position decreased when the
width when the paper (width) on the adjustment value is
alignment on the staple tray staple tray increased.
is improper. The alignment width is
increased when the
adjustment value is
decreased.
C STAPLE Staple position 68 - 132 100 This adjustment is used to Staple The staple position is 0.152mm
POSITION adjustment adjust the binding position position shifted to the rear when the
when the staple position is (Stapler stop adjustment value is
shifted. position) increased.
(F/R direction) The staple position is
shifted to the front when
the adjustment value is
decreased.
D PUNCH Punch hole position 37 - 63 50 This adjustment is used to Punch The punch position is 0.15mm
CENTER adjustment adjust the punch position position shifted to the front when
(F/R direction) when the punch hole (F/R direction) the adjustment value is
position is shifted in the F/R increased.
direction. The punch position is
shifted to the rear when the
adjustment value is
decreased.
E PUNCH Punch hole position 35 - 57 50 This adjustment is used to Punch The punch position is 0.26mm
HOLE adjustment (Paper adjust the punch hole position shifted to the paper lead
transport direction) position when the punch (Paper edge when the adjustment
hole position is shifted in transport value is increased.
the paper transport direction) The punch position is
direction. shifted to the paper rear
edge when the adjustment
value is decreased.
F TRAY Stack tray alignment 5 - 35 15 This adjustment is used to Stack tray The stack tray standby 1mm
WAITING adjustment (Small adjust alignment by standby position is shifted to the
POSITION size) changing the stack tray position downside when the
(S-SIZE) standby position when the (Up/down adjustment value is
upside when the
adjustment value is
decreased.

Change
when the
value is
changed by 1
G TRAY Stack tray alignment 5 - 35 15 This adjustment is used to Stack tray The stack tray standby 1mm
POSITION (Large size) changing the stack tray position downside when the
(L-SIZE) standby position when the (Up/down adjustment value is
upside when the
adjustment value is
decreased.
22-C MX-FN14/MX-PN10
Change
when the
value is
changed by 1
A BUFFER Staple mode paper 50 - 150 100 This adjustment is used to Paper shift The following paper is 0.1mm
SHIFT 1 alignment adjustment adjust the paper shift amount in the shifted to the advancing
1 (adjustment of the amount in the buffer section buffer section direction when the
shift amount of the when the paper alignment adjustment value is
first and the second in the paper transport increased.
sheet in the staple direction in the staple mode The following paper is
mode 2-sheet buffer is improper. (When there is shifted to the delaying
3-sheet discharge) a paper shift (1st - 3rd direction when the
sheet) in the second set or adjustment value is
later of the staple bundles decreased.
of paper (A4, LT, B5, 16K) in
the buffer section, adjust so
that the shift is decreased.)
B BUFFER Staple mode paper 50 - 150 100 This adjustment is used to Paper shift The following paper is 0.1mm
SHIFT 2 alignment adjustment adjust the paper shift amount in the shifted to the advancing
2 (adjustment of the amount in the buffer section buffer section direction when the
shift amount of the when the paper alignment adjustment value is
second and the third in the paper transport increased.
sheet in the staple direction in the staple mode The following paper is
mode 2-sheet buffer is improper. (When there is shifted to the delaying
3-sheet discharge, a paper shift (1st - 3rd direction when the
and the shift amount sheet) in the second set or adjustment value is
of the first and the later of the staple bundles decreased.
second sheet in of paper (A4, LT, B5, 16K) in
1-sheet buffer and the buffer section, adjust so
2-sheet discharge) that the shift is decreased.)
C ALIGNMENT Alignment adjustment 50 - 150 100 This adjustment is used to Indentation The distance between the 0.1mm
adjust the paper alignment amount of the paper edge and the
width when the paper alignment alignment plate is
alignment is improper. plate on the increased when the
front side of adjustment value is
the process increased.
tray The distance between the
paper edge and the
alignment plate is
decreased when the
adjustment value is
decreased.
D STAPLE Front side staple 70 - 130 100 This adjustment is used to Front side The staple position is 0.1mm
FRONT position adjustment adjust the staple position staple position shifted to the rear side
(S-width) (Paper width, 245mm when the front side staple adjustment when the adjustment value
or less) position is shifted. (Paper (stapler stop is increased.
width, 245mm or less) position) The staple position is
(F/R direction) shifted to the front side
is decreased.

Change
when the
value is
changed by 1
E STAPLE Front side staple 70 - 130 100 This adjustment is used to Front side The staple position is 0.1mm
FRONT position adjustment adjust the staple position staple position shifted to the rear side
(W-width) (Paper width, over when the front side staple adjustment when the adjustment value
245mm) position is shifted. (stapler stop is increased.
(Paper width, over 245mm) position) The staple position is
(F/R direction) shifted to the front side
is decreased.
F STAPLE Rear side staple 70 - 130 100 This adjustment is used to Rear side The staple position is 0.1mm
REAR position adjustment adjust the staple position staple position shifted to the rear side
(S-width) (Paper width, 245mm when the rear side staple (stapler stop when the adjustment value
or less) position is shifted. (Paper position) is increased.
width, 245mm or less) (F/R direction) The staple position is
shifted to the front side
is decreased.
G STAPLE Rear side staple 70 - 130 100 This adjustment is used to Rear side The staple position is 0.1mm
REAR position adjustment adjust the staple position staple position shifted to the rear side
(W-width) (Paper width, over when the rear side staple (stapler stop when the adjustment value
245mm) position is shifted. (Paper position) is increased.
width, over 245mm) (F/R direction) The staple position is
shifted to the front side
is decreased.
H STAPLE Staple center position 85 - 115 100 This adjustment is used Rear side The staple position (on the 0.1mm
CENTER adjustment when the staple center staple position rear side only) is shifted to
(2-position staple position is shifted in the (stapler stop the rear side when the
mode) 2-position staple mode. position) adjustment value is
(F/R direction) increased.
The staple position (on the
rear side only) is shifted to
the front side when the
adjustment value is
decreased.
I PUNCH Y Punch hole position 85 - 115 100 This adjustment is used to Punch The punch hole position is 0.1mm
adjustment adjust the punch position position shifted to the front side
(F/R direction) when the punch hole (F/R direction) when the adjustment value
position is shifted in the F/R is increased.
direction. The punch hole position is
shifted to the rear side
is decreased.
J PUNCH X Punch hole position 50 - 150 100 This adjustment is used to Punch The punch hole position is 0.1mm
adjustment (Paper adjust the punch hole position shifted to the lead edge
transport direction) position when the punch (Paper when the adjustment value
hole position is shifted in transport is increased.
the paper transport direction) The punch hole position is
direction. shifted to the rear edge
is decreased.
K PUNCH Not used 100 - 102 100
SKEW

[6] SIMULATION
MX-M753N
Service Manual
1. General (Including basic operations)

The simulation mode has the following functions, to display the
machine operating status, identify the trouble position and causes
in an earlier stage, and make various setups and adjustments
speedily for improving the serviceability of the machine.
1) Various adjustments
2) Setting of the specifications and functions
3) Canceling troubles
4) Operation check
5) Counters check, setting, clear
6) Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis), data
check, clear.
7) Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc.) data
transport.
The operating procedures and displays depend on the design of
the operation panel of the machine.
A. Basic operation
(1) Starting the simulation
* Entering the simulation mode
1) Copy mode key ON  Program key ON  Asterisk (*) key ON
 CLEAR key ON  Asterisk (*) key ON  Ready for input of
a main code of simulation
2) Entering a main code with the 10-key  START key ON.
Or select a main code with the SIM key on the touch panel.
3) Entering a sub code with the 10-key  START key ON.
4) Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
5) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected
item. Press [START] key or [EXECUTE] key to start the simu-
lation operation.
When canceling the current simulation mode to change the
main code and the sub code, press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
* Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode

1) Press [CA] key.
(Note for the simulation mode)

Do not turn OFF the power switch on the operation panel when the
machine is in the simulation mode. If the power switch should be
turned OFF in the simulation mode, a malfunction may be resulted.
In this case, turn OFF/ON the main power source.
MX-M753N SIMULATION 6 – 1
START (Copy mode)
Press the Program key.
Press the asterisk (*) key.
Press the clear key.
Press the asterisk (*) key.
Standby for entry of Press the SYSTEM

SIM code. SETTINGS key
Enter the main code of

SIM with the 10-key.
The main code of SIM

is displayed.
NO
Press the START button.

YES Is it the same
simulation main
code?
YES
In the power OFF/ON type
Standby for entry of SIM <Exclusion type> simulation, OFF/ON
Is there a sub code ?
sub code You have to exit messages is
simulation mode Press the SYSTEM displayed by the
NO before entering into SETTINGS key SYSTEM
Enter SIM sub code with
this mode for self YES
SETTINGS key.
the 10-key. printing type.
Select the mode and the Do you want
NO
Press the START button. item with the scroll key to perform another
and the item key. simulation ? The simulation mode
is canceled.
NO
If there is no item. YES Press the EXECUTE button
Operation check ?
and OK button.
NO Do you YES
Operation is made according want to end the Press the clear all key.
to the selected mode and item. simulation ?
YES Press the EXECUTE button

Operating conditions
check ? and OK button.
NO
The display is made according to
the selected some and the item.
YES Press the EXECUTE button

Data clear ?
and OK button.
NO
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.
YES Adjustments NO Operation is made according

or setting (counter data to the selected mode and the item.
change) ? (Other modes)
The display is made according

to the selected mode and the item.
Do you NO
want to change the
content ?
The changed content
YES
is stored.
Enter the new setting and Press the EXECUTE button

adjustment values. and OK button.
2. List of simulation codes
Main Sub Functions Section
1 1 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 Used to check the sensors in the scanner (reading) section and the related circuits. Scanner (reading)
5 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 1 Used to check the operations of the automatic document feed unit and the control circuit. Automatic document feeder
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the document feed unit section and Automatic document feeder
the control circuits.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feed unit and the control circuit. Automatic document feeder
3 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
3 Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
10 Used to adjust the finisher. Finisher
30 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the inserter and the control circuits. Inserter
31 Used to check the operations of the loads in the inserter and the control circuit. Inserter
32 Used to enter the adjustment value of the inserter paper width detection level. Inserter
4 2 Used to check the large capacity tray (LCC) sensors and detectors and their control circuits. Large capacity tray (LCC)
3 Used to check the large capacity tray (LCC) loads and their control circuits. Large capacity tray (LCC)
5 Used to check the operations of the LCC paper transport clutch (LTRC). Large capacity tray (LCC)
5 1 Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit. Operation panel
2 Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. Fusing
3 Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
4 Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the control circuit. Process
6 1 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper transport system (clutches and solenoids) and Paper transport/paper exit
2 Used to check the operations of each fan and its control circuit. Other
3 Used to check the operations of the transfer unit and the control circuit. Process (Transfer)
7 1 Used to set the operating conditions of aging. Other
6 Used to set the operating intermittent aging cycle.
8 Used to display the warm-up time.
12 The document reading number of sheets setting (for aging operation) Automatic document feeder
8 1 Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each print mode and the control Process (Developing)
circuit.
2 Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the Process (Charging)
control circuit.
6 Used to check and adjust the operation of the transport voltage and the control circuit. Process (Transfer)
17 Used to check and adjust the transfer electric cleaning output and the control circuit operations. Process (Transfer)
18 Used to check and adjust the transfer cleaning roller output and the control circuit operations. Process (Transfer)
20 Used to check and adjust the output between transfer papers and the control circuit operations. Process (Transfer)
9 2 Used to check the operation of the sensors and detectors in the switchback section (duplex section) Duplex
and the control circuit.
3 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its control Duplex
circuit.
10 1 Used to check the operations of the toner supply mechanism (toner clutch) and the related circuit. Process (Developing)
2 Used to check the operations of the toner remaining quantity sensor and the related circuits. Process (Developing)
13 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
14 - Used to cancel the self-diag "H3, H4, H5" trouble.
15 - Used to cancel the self-diag "F3-12, F3-22, U6-09" trouble. LCC
16 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble. MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
17 - Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble.
21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle.
22 1 Used to display the print count value of each section and the operation mode.
2 Used to display the number of total mis-feed and the number of troubles.
3 Used to display the mis-feed position and the number of mis-feed at the position.
4 Used to display the trouble (self diag) history.
5 Used to display the ROM version of each unit (section). Firmware
6 Used to print information on various settings, adjustments, counters, controls, and versions.
8 Used to display the number of operations (the counter value) of the finisher, the DSPF, and scanning
(reading).
9 Used to display the print quantity of each paper feed section.
10 Used to display the system configuration (options and internal hardware).
11 Used to display the use frequency of send/receive of FAX. (Only when FAX is installed.) FAX
12 Used to display the mis-feed position of the DSPF and the number of mis-feed at the position. Automatic document feeder
13 Used to display the use quantity of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge). Process
19 Used to display various counter values related to scan - image send.
90 Used to output the various set data lists.
23 2 Used to output the trouble history list of paper jam and mis-feed.
80 Used to output the operation data of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed/transport Paper feed, Paper transport
section.
24 1 Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter.
2 Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
3 Used to clear the finisher, DSPF, and the scan (reading) unit counter.
4 Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transfer unit and the fusing unit.
5 Used to clear the developer counter.
6 Used to clear the copy counter.
7 Used to clear the OPC drum counter.
9 Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter.
10 Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed)
15 Used to clear the counters related to the scan mode and the image send.
30 Used to initialize the administrator password.
31 Used to initialize the service mode (Web page) password.
25 1 Used to check the operations of the developing section, and to display the toner density detection Process (Developing section)
level.
2 Used to make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. (Automatic adjustment) Process (Photoconductor/Developing/
Transfer/Cleaning)
26 2 Used to set the paper type and the weight type. Paper feed
3 Used to set the specifications of the auditor. (Japan only) Auditor
5 Used to set the count mode in A3 (11" x 17") print.
6 Used to set the specifications of the destination.
10 Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner.
18 Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK versions.)
30 Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards).
35 Used to set the trouble history display mode.
38 Used to set "Print continue" or "Print stop" when the maintenance timing is reached or the consumable
part life is over.
41 Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification ratio automatic select function (AMS) in the center
binding mode.
49 Used to set the print speed of postcards mode.
50 Used to set the operation specifications and functions.
52 Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up or not.
53 Used to set Inhibit/Allow of the user auto calibration (gradation, density adjustment) in the copy mode.
54 Used to set Inhibit/Allow of the user auto calibration (gradation, density adjustment) in the print mode.
65 Used to set the limit of the staple process.
69 Used to set the operating conditions for toner near end.
73 Used to adjust the image loss (shade removal amount) in the poster, the continuous enlargement copy,
the card scan, and the A3 wide copy mode.
74 Used to set the OSA trial mode.
78 Used to set the password of the remote operation panel mode.
27 1 Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
2 Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number. (FSS function)
4 Used to set the initial call and toner order auto send. (FSS function)
5 Used to set the machine tag No. (FSS function) Communication (RIC/MODEM)
6 Used to set of the manual service call. (FSS function)
7 Used to set of the enable, alert call out. (FSS function)
9 Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading gain adjustment
retry number. (FSS function)
10 Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS function)
11 Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number
history. (FSS function)
12 Used to check the high-density and the half-tone process control error history. (FSS Function)
13 Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors. (FSS function)
14 Used to set the FSS function connection test mode.
30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the paper feed section and
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and the control
circuits.
33 1 Used to check the operations of the card reader sensor and the control circuit.
2 Used to delete the ID (IDM) information of card.
40 2 Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment. Paper feed
7 Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. Paper feed
12 Used to adjust the multi-purpose tray width detection level. Paper feed
41 1 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
2 Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level.
3 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
43 1 Used to make the fusing reference temperature setting 1 in each operation mode.
4 Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in each operation mode.
20 Used to set the environmental correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
21 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing
22 Used to set the environment correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the fusing
23 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing
24 Used to set the correction of the temperature adjustment value of SIM 43-1 and 43-4.
31 Used to check the operation of the fusing web cleaning motor. Fusing
32 Used to set various items related to the forcible operation of web cleaning when job end. Fusing
34 Used to check the operation of the fusing lower web cleaning motor. Fusing
44 1 Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section. Process (Photo-conductor/Developing/
Transfer/Cleaning)
2 Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image density sensor. Process
4 Used to set the conditions of the high density process control operation. Process
6 Used to execute the high density process control forcibly. Process
9 Used to display the result data of the high density process control operation. Process (Photo-conductor/Developing/
Transfer/Cleaning)
12 Used to display the operation data of the high density process control and the image density sensor. Process (Photo-conductor/Developing)
14 Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor. Process (Photo-conductor/Developing)/
Fusing
16 Used to display the toner density control data.
21 Used to register the target value of the half-tone process control. Process
22 Used to display the toner patch density level in the half tone process control operation. Process
24 Used to display the correction target and the correction level in the half tone process control operation. Process
25 Used to set the calculating conditions of the correction value for the half tone process control. Process
26 Used to execute the half tone process control compulsory. Process
27 Used to clear the correction data of the half tone process control. Process
28 Used to set the process control execution conditions. Process
29 Used to set the operating conditions of the process control during a job. Process
37 Used to set the development bias correction level in the continuous printing operation.
46 2 Used to adjust the copy density in each monochrome copy mode.
4 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.
5 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.
8 Used to adjust the image send mode color balance RGB.
9 Used to adjust the SPF mode scan image density (copy, image send mode)
10 Used to adjust the copy density (in each copy mode).
16 Used to adjust the copy density manually.
19 Used to set the operating conditions of document density scanning (copy, image send mode).
23 Used to set the density correction of copy high density section (High density tone gap supported).
24 Copy density adjustment (Auto adjustment)
32 Used to adjust the reproducibility of the document background density in the automatic copy mode.
37 Used to adjust the reproducibility of the scan image color document (copy, image send mode).
39 Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send images.
40 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Collective adjustment of all the modes)
41 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Normal)
42 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Fine)
43 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Super Fine)
44 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Ultra fine)
45 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (600dpi).
47 Used to set the compression rate of copy and scan images (JPEG).
51 Used to adjust the gamma for the copy mode heavy paper mode and the image process mode (manual
adjustment).
52 Used to set the gamma default for the copy mode heavy paper and the image process mode. (The set
values of SIM46-51 are set to the default values.)
60 Used to adjust the automatic copy mode sharpness.
61 Used to adjust the area separation recognition level in the image send mode (color, gray, auto
exposure mode).
62 Used to set the operating conditions of the ACS, the area separation, the background image process,
and the automatic exposure mode.
63 Used to adjust the density in the low density area of a scan image. Scan mode
74 Used to adjust the copy density and the printer density. (Automatic adjustment)
90 Used to set the process operation of high-compression PDF images.
48 1 Used to adjust the scan image magnification ratio (in the main scanning direction and the sub scanning
direction).
5 Used to correction the scan image magnification ratio (in the sub scanning direction).
6 Used to adjust the rotation speed of each motor.
49 1 Used to perform the firmware update.
3 Used to install and update the Operation Manual data stored in the HDD.
5 Used to install and update the watermark data stored in the HDD.
50 1 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
2 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss (simple adjustment).
5 Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE)
6 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss (DSPF mode). Automatic document feeder
7 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss (DSPF mode) (simple adjustment). Automatic document feeder
10 Used to adjust the image off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for each paper feed section.)
12 Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment.
(The adjustment is made separately for each scan mode.)
27 Used to perform the image loss adjustment of scanned images in the FAX or image send mode.
28 Used to automatically adjust the image loss, void area, image off-center, and image magnification ratio.
51 2 Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and the DSPF resist
roller.
53 6 Used to adjust the detection level of the DSPF document width.
7 Used to adjust the DSPF document size width sensor. Automatic document feeder
8 Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the DSPF mode document scan position. Automatic document feeder
55 1 Used to set the specifications of the engine control operations. (SOFT SW)
2 Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW)
3 Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW)
10 Used to set the stamp text.
56 1 Used to transport data between HDD - MFP PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the PWB.)
2 Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. SRAM, and HDD (including user authentication data and
address data) to the USB memory.
3 Used to backup the document filing data to the USB memory.
4 Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB memory.
60 1 Used to check the operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB memory.
2 Used to set the specifications of the MFP PWB on-board SDRAM.
61 1 Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection. LSU
3 Used to set the laser power
62 1 Used to execute the hard disk format (except operation manual area).
* If no HDD is installed, the MFP Flash memory is formatted.
2 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial).
3 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas).
6 Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk.
7 Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log.
8 Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding the system area and the operation manual area)
10 Used to delete the job log data.
11 Used to delete the document filing data.
12 Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble.
13 Used to format the hard disk. (only the operation manual and watermark area)
63 1 Used to display the shading correction result. Scanner
2 Used to perform shading.
3 Used to perform scanner (CCD/CIS) color balance and gamma auto adjustment. Scanner
4 Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
5 Used to perform the scanner (CCD/CIS) color balance and gamma default setting.
64 2 Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
4 Printer test print. (Self print) (256 gradation)
* This simulation functions only for the machines which are provided with the printer function.
5 Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
6 Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
7 Test print. (Self print) (Used to print the adjustment pattern of SIM46-16.)
65 1 Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. Operation panel section
2 Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates.
5 Used to check the operation panel key input.
67 17 Printer controller reset Printer
24 Used to adjust the printer density. (Automatic adjustment) Printer
25 Printer density adjustment (manual adjustment) (this simulation functions only for the machines which Printer
are provided with the printer function).
31 Used to clear the printer calibration data (this simulation functions only for the machines which are Printer
provided with the printer function).
33 Used to adjust the gamma and the density in each printer screen (this simulation functions only for the Printer
machines which are provided with the printer function).
34 Used to set the density correction in the printer high density section. (Support for the high density Printer
section tone gap)
70 MFP PWB SRAM data clear MFP PWB
3. Details of simulation
2
1
2-1
1-1 Purpose Operation test/check
Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto-
matic document feed unit and the control
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner circuit.
(reading) unit and the control circuit.
Section Automatic document feeder
Section Scanner (reading)
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the operation mode and the speed with the touch panel
1) Select the operation resolution (scan speed) with the touch key.
panel key.
The DSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit oper-
Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to the ations at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution (oper-
scan resolution (operation speed). ation speed).
Item/Display Operation mode Default value When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI (372.0mm/s) 300DPI
(372.0mm/s) Item/Display Operation mode Default value
400DPI 400DPI (279.0mm/s)
(SINGLE) 300DPI 300DPI (372.0mm/s) 300DPI
600DPI 600DPI (186.0mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI (279.0mm/s) (372.0mm/s)
1200DPI 1200DPI (93.0mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI (186.0mm/s)
(DOUBLE) 300DPI 300DPI (372.0mm/s) 300DPI
400DPI 400DPI (279.0mm/s) (372.0mm/s)
1-2 600DPI 600DPI (186.0mm/s)
Purpose Operation test/check

Function (Purpose) Used to check the sensors in the scanner
(reading) section and the related circuits. 2-2
Section Scanner (reading) Purpose Operation test/check
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
The operating status of the sensor is displayed. sors and the detectors in the document
When "MHPS" is highlighted, the scanner unit is in the home posi- feed unit section and the control circuits.
tion. Section Automatic document feeder
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
1-5 played.
Purpose Operation test/check The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
are highlighted.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
(reading) unit and the control circuit.
SSET DSPF installation detector
Section Scanner (reading) SOCD DSPF open/close detector
Operation/Procedure SCOV DSPF cover open/close detector
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key. SLCOV DSPF lower door open/close detector
SPED1 DSPF document detector 1
SPED2 DSPF document detector 2
Scanning is repeated at the speed corresponding to the scan SPPD1 DSPF document pass detector 1
resolution (operation speed). (Paper entry detection)
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. SPPD2 DSPF document pass detector 2
(Resist roller front document transport detection)
Item/Display Operation mode Default value SPPD3 DSPF document pass detector 3
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI (372.0mm/s) 300DPI (Document scanning front document transport detection)
400DPI 400DPI (279.0mm/s) (372.0mm/s) SPPD4 DSPF document pass detector 4
600DPI 600DPI (186.0mm/s) SPPD5 DSPF document pass detector 5
1200DPI 1200DPI (93.0mm/s) (DSPF: Document transport detection)
SPOD DSPF paper exit detector
SPRDMD DSPF random feed paper size detector
SPLS1 DSPF document length detector 1 (Short)
SPLS2 DSPF document length detector (Long)
STLD DSPF document tray lower limit detector
STUD DSPF document tray upper limit detector
STMPU DSPF stamp unit installation detector
SWD_LEN DSPF guide plate position (Unit: 0.1mm)
SWD_AD DSPF document detection volume output AD value
FPAPHS_F Paper alignment plate home position sensor F
2-3
FPAPHS_R Paper alignment plate home position sensor R
Purpose Operation test/check FSOS Shutter open sensor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads FDRLHS Delivery roller lift home position sensor
in the automatic document feed unit and FCD Connection detector
the control circuit. FCD1 Cover detector 1
Section Automatic document feeder PDCD Paper delivery unit cover open/close detector
FSSW2 Safety switch 2
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of the operation check with the touch panel FSCS Shutter close sensor
key. FSSW3 Safety switch 3
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. FTPS21 Lower tray position sensor 1
The selected load performs the operation. FTPS22 Lower tray position sensor 2
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. FTPS23 Lower tray position sensor 3
FTPDHS Paper tail push down home position sensor
SPUM DSPF paper feed motor FDPHHS_R Delivery paper hold home position sensor R
SPFM DSPF transport motor FDPHHS_F Delivery paper hold home position sensor F
SPOM DSPF paper exit motor FPGHS_R Paper guide home position sensor R
SLUM DSPF lift-up motor FPGHS_F Paper guide home position sensor F
SPFFAN DSPF fan motor FGHPS Gripper home position sensor
SPFC DSPF paper feed clutch FGPS Gripper position sensor
SRRC DSPF resist roller clutch FGAPS1 Gripper arm position sensor 1
STRRC DSPF No. 1 resist roller clutch FGAPS2 Gripper arm position sensor 2
STRC DSPF transport clutch
<Saddle stitch finisher>
STMPS Stamp solenoid (
Displayed only when the finish stamp is installed.) FSMRS Saddle motor rotation sensor
FCD2 Cover detector 2
FSPTMRS Saddle paper transport motor rotation sensor
FSAPHS Saddle alignment plate home position sensor
3 FSTPD Saddle paper delivery tray paper detector
FSPGHS Saddle paper guide home position sensor
FSATPD Saddle paper alignment tray paper detector
3-2
Purpose Operation test/check FSPDD Saddle paper delivery detector
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- FSRPS Semilunar roller phase sensor
sors and the detectors in the finisher and FSRGHS Saddle roller guide home position sensor
the control circuit. FSPHS Saddle plate home position sensor
Section Finisher FSPS Saddle plate position sensor
FSPPD Saddle paper pass detector
Operation/Procedure
FSPJD1 Saddle paper JAM detector 1
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- FSPJD2 Saddle paper JAM detector 2
played. FSPJD3 Saddle paper JAM detector 3
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active FSRHS Saddle roller home position sensor
are highlighted. FSSW3 Safety switch 3
<100 sheets binding finisher> FSSW4 Safety switch 4
FATPS Paper alignment tray paper sensor FSSESW2 Saddle staple empty switch 2
FTPS11 Upper tray position sensor 1 FSSHSW2 Saddle staple home position switch 2
FTPS12 Upper tray position sensor 2 FSSESW1 Saddle staple empty switch 1
FTPS13 Upper tray position sensor 3 FSSHSW1 Saddle staple home position switch 1
FPLS Paper level sensor
FPLD Paper level detector <4K finisher>
FATPLD Paper alignment tray paper level detector
FPED Paper enter detector
FTPLD2 Lower tray paper level detector
FPPD Paper pass detector
FDPHHS_C Delivery paper hold home position sensor C
FSOS Shutter open sensor
FARLHS Paper alignment roller lift home position sensor
FPAPHS Paper alignment plate home position sensor
FPTHHS Paper tail hold home position sensor
FSSHPS Stapler shift home position sensor
FTRLHS Paper transport roller lift home position sensor
FTPS1 Upper tray position sensor 1
FBFHPS Buffer flapper home position sensor
FTLMRS11 Upper tray lift motor rotation sensor 1
FPJD Paper JAM detector
FDMRS Delivery motor rotation sensor
FPED Paper enter detector
FDTPD1 Paper delivery upper tray paper detector
FSHS Staple home position sensor
FDTPD2 Paper delivery lower tray paper detector
FSAD Staple area detector
FBPPD Buffer paper pass detector
FPJD_T Paper JAM detector (Transport section)
FCD Connection detector
FTPSW Tray proximity switch
FSLD Staple lead detector
FBPED Buffer paper enter detector
FSED Staple empty detector
FDRLUS Delivery roller lift up sensor
FDTPD1 Paper delivery upper tray paper detector
FTLMRS12 Upper tray lift motor rotation sensor 2
FDTPD2 Paper delivery lower tray paper detector
FPDMRS Paper delivery motor rotation sensor
FDTPD3 Paper delivery middle tray paper detector
FSLD Staple lead detector
FSSHPS Stapler shift home position sensor
FSHS Staple home position sensor
<4K finisher>
FTLMRS21 Lower tray lift motor rotation sensor 1
FTLMRS22 Lower tray lift motor rotation sensor 2 FBS1 Buffer solenoid 1
FTPS2 Lower tray position sensor 1 FBS2 Buffer solenoid 2
FSSW1 Safety switch 1 FDRLM Delivery roller lift motor
FDRLDD Delivery roller lift down sensor FFS1 Flappper solenoid 1
FTPSW1 Upper tray position switch FPABS Paper alignment belt solenoid
FSCSW Shutter close switch FPAM Paper alignment motor
FSCDSW Staple cartridge detect switch FPDM Paper delivery motor
FSED Staple empty detector FPOS Paper offset solenoid
FTPD Tray proximity detector FPS Paddle solenoid
FATPD Paper alignment tray paper detector FPTM1 Paper transport motor 1
FPTM2 Paper transport motor 2
FSM Staple motor
3-3 FSSM Stapler shift motor
Purpose Operation test/check FTLM1 Upper tray lift motor
FTLM2 Lower tray lift motor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in
the finisher and the control circuit.
Section Finisher
Operation/Procedure 3-10
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel Purpose Adjustment
key. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher.
Section Finisher
The selected load performs the operation.
Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch
<100 sheets binding finisher> panel.
FARLM Paper alignment roller lift motor 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
FDPHM Delivery paper holding motor 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
FDRLM Delivery roller lift motor
<100 sheets binding finisher>
FGAM Gripper arm motor
FGM Gripper motor Setting Default
FPAM_F Paper alignment motor F range value
FPAM_R Paper alignment motor R A BUFFER SHIFT 1 Buffer paper adjustment 1 50 - 150 100
FPDM1 Paper delivery motor 1 B BUFFER SHIFT 2 Buffer paper adjustment 2 50 - 150 100
FPDM2 Paper delivery motor 2 C ALIGNMENT Alignment width 50 - 150 100
FPGM Paper guide motor adjustment
FPTAM Paper transport alignment motor D STAPLE FRONT Staple binding position 70 - 130 100
(S-width) adjustment
FPTHM Paper tail holding motor
(one position in front)
E STAPLE FRONT Staple binding position 70 - 130 100
(W-width) adjustment
FPTPDM Paper tail push down motor (one position in front)
FPTRLM Paper transport roller lift motor F STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 70 - 130 100
FSC Shutter clutch (S-width) adjustment
FSM Staple motor (one position at the rear)
FSSM Stapler shift motor G STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 70 - 130 100
FSSWS Safety swithch 2 solenoid (W-width) adjustment
FTLM1 Upper tray lift motor (one position at the rear)
FTLM2 Lower tray lift motor H STAPLE CENTER Staple binding position 85 - 115 100
PDCF1 Paper delivery unit cooling fan 1 adjustment
PDCF2 Paper delivery unit cooling fan 2 (2 positions at the center)
PDPTM Paper delivery unit paper transport motor I PUNCH Y Punch hole position 85 - 115 100
adjustment
<Saddle stitch finisher> (main scanning direction)
J PUNCH X Punch hole position 50 - 150 100
FFS2 Flappper solenoid 2 adjustment
FFS3 Flappper solenoid 3 (sub scanning direction)
FPTM4 Paper transport motor 4 K PUNCH SKEW Punch mode skew 100 - 102 100
FPTS Paper transport solenoid adjustment
FSDM Saddle motor
FSDSM_F Saddle staple motor F <Saddle stitch finisher>
FSDSM_R Saddle staple motor R Setting Default
FSPAM Saddle paper alignment motor Item/Display Content
range value
FSRGM Saddle roller guide motor A SADDLE Saddle binding/folding 192 - 208 200
FSPM Saddle positioning motor POSITION position adjustment
FSPTM Saddle paper transport motor B ALIGNMENT Alignment position 2 - 18 10
POSITION adjustment
C STAPLE Staple binding position 68 - 132 100
POSITION adjustment
D PUNCH CENTER Punch center position 37 - 63 50
adjustment
Setting Default
Item/Display Content 3-31
range value
E PUNCH HOLE Punch hole position 35 - 57 50 Purpose Adjustment
adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
F TRAY WAITING Stack tray waiting position 5 - 35 15 in the inserter and the control circuit.
POSITION adjustment (Small size)
(S-SIZE)
Section Inserter
G TRAY WAITING Stack tray waiting position 5 - 35 15 Operation/Procedure
POSITION adjustment (Large size) 1) Select a target item of the operation check with the touch panel
(L-SIZE) key.
NOTE: "A: SADDLE POSITION (Saddle binding position adjust- 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
ment)" and "B: FOLDING POSITION (Saddle folding posi- The selected load performs the operation.
tion adjustment" When [EXECUTE] is pressed, the operation is stopped.
The saddle binding position adjustment and the saddle
folding position adjustment can be executed in the system K_MOT Paper feed motor
setting menu. However, the adjustments in the system set- Y_MOT Horizontal transport motor
ting are based on the adjustment value of this simulation. H_MOT Reverse motor
If, therefore, the adjustment value of this simulation is set F_SOL Flapper solenoid
to an extreme level, the adjustment range in the system R_CL Resist clutch
setting may be narrowed. (Adjustment range in the system P_LED Operation panel upper LED
setting 5.0mm)
In general, when the saddle binding position and the sad-
dle folding positions are adjusted to the center by this simu-
3-32
lation, the above trouble will not occur.
Purpose Adjustment
<4K finisher>
Function (Purpose) Used to enter the adjustment value of the
Setting Default inserter paper width detection level.
range value
A ALIGNMENT Alignment position 2 - 18 10 Section Inserter
POSITION adjustment Operation/Procedure
B STAPLE POSITION Staple binding position 68 - 132 100 1) Select the set item with [] [] keys on the touch panel.
adjustment
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
C PUNCH CENTER Punch center 37 - 63 50
adjustment 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
D PUNCH HOLE Punch hole position 35 - 70 50
adjustment Setting
E TRAY WAITING Stack tray waiting 5 - 35 15 range
POSITION (S-SIZE) position adjustment A MAX POSITION Tray width detection adjustment 0 - 1023
(Small size) value (Max. width)
F TRAY WAITING Stack tray waiting 5 - 35 15 B POSITION1 Tray width detection adjustment 0 - 1023
POSITION (L-SIZE) position adjustment value (Adjustment position 1)
(Large size) C POSITION2 Tray width detection adjustment 0 - 1023
value (Adjustment position 2)
D MIN POSITION Tray width detection adjustment 0 - 1023
value (Min. width)
3-30
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
sors and detectors in the inserter and the 4
control circuits.
Section Inserter 4-2
Operation/Procedure Purpose Operation test/check
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors in the
Function (Purpose) Used to check the large capacity tray (LCC)
inserter are displayed.
sensors and detectors and their control cir-
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active cuits.
are highlighted.
Section Large capacity tray (LCC)
T_SEN Tray paper size sensor Operation/Procedure
EMP_SEN Tray empty sensor The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
REG_SEN Resist sensor played.
TIM_SEN Timing sensor
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
JCK_SW Cover open/close switch
are highlighted.
H_SEN Reverse sensor
HI_SEN Paper exit sensor <A4 LCC>
HYK_SEN Reverse unit open/close sensor LPFD LCC transport detector
S_SEN Set sensor LUD LCC tray upper limit detector
KC_SEN Mount cover open/close sensor LDD LCC tray lower limit detector
P_ST_SW Start switch LPED LCC tray paper empty detector
P_MO_SW Staple mode select switch LCD LCC tray insertion detector
P_PN_SW Punch selection switch LDSW LCC upper open/close detection switch
LRE LCC lift motor encoder sensor
L24VM LCC24V power monitor When the operation is normal, the highlighted button on the display
LLSW LCC upper limit switch returns to the normal display. When it is abnormal, the highlighted
LTOD LCC main unit connection detector display is maintained.
<A3 LCC> button Content

LTRC LCC transport clutch
LPFD LCC transport detector
LUD LCC tray upper limit detector
LDD LCC tray lower limit detector
LPED LCC tray paper empty detector
LCD
LDSW
LCC tray insertion detector
LCC upper open/close detection switch
5
LRE LCC lift motor encoder sensor
L24VM LCC24V power monitor 5-1
LLSW LCC upper limit switch
LPUSW LCC paper upper surface detection switch
LRRSW LCC reverse winding detection switch Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display,
LTLSW LCC tray lift switch LCD in the operation panel, and control cir-
LTLD LCC tray lock detector cuit.
LIPSW LCC illegal paper detection switch Section Operation panel
LTOD LCC main unit connection detector Operation/Procedure
The LCD is changed as shown below.
The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX 
4-3 MIN  the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted.
The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status are
checked.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the large capacity tray (LCC)
loads and their control circuits.
Section Large capacity tray (LCC) 5-2
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the load item that is required to operation check with the
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater
touch panel key.
lamp and the control circuit.
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
<A4 LCC> key.
LPFM LCC transport motor 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
LLM LCC lift motor The selected heater lamp repeats ON/OFF operations 10
LPFC LCC paper feed clutch times at the interval of 500ms.
LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid
Heater lamp operation check method:
<A3 LCC> Remove the rear cabinet, the heater lamp lighting status can be
checked from the clearance between the frames.
LPFM LCC transport motor
LLM LCC lift motor HL_UM Main heater lamp (HL MAIN)
LPFC LCC paper feed clutch HL_US Sub heater lamp (HL SUB)
LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid HL UA Assist heater lamp (HL UA)
LTLED LCC tray LED lamp
LTLC LCC tray lock clutch
LFAN LCC separation auxiliary fan 5-3
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
4-5 lamp and the control circuit.
Purpose Operation test/check Section Scanner (reading)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the LCC Operation/Procedure

paper transport clutch (LTRC). 1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.
Section Large capacity tray (LCC)
Operation/Procedure
The scanner lamp lights up for 10 sec.
[Check the ON operation]
Press the clutch button of the target of the ON operation check.
Checking is started. When the operation is normal, the button on Display Content
the display is highlighted. When it is abnormal, the button is not OC COPY LAMP OC scanner lamp
highlighted. DSPF COPY LAMP DSPF scanner lamp
[Check the OFF operation]
Press the highlighted button which is ON.
5-4 6-2
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the dis- Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan
charge lamp and the control circuit. and its control circuit.
Section Process Section Other
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel 1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key. key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The scanner lamp lights up for 30 sec. The selected load performs the operation.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Press [ALL] key to select all the fans collectively.
Display Content
Load operation check method:
DL Discharge lamp
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
sound.
6 CFM_R
Process cooling fan motor 1, 2, 3
VFM_EX Process exhaust fan motor 1, 2, 3
6-1 Process exhaust fan motor BKL
Paper cooling fan motor BKU
CFM_UP Paper exhaust fan motor BKR
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in Fusing fan cooling motor 1,2,3
the paper transport system (clutches and CFM_UP4 Fusing fan cooling motor 4
solenoids) and the control circuits. CFM_DC Power cooling fan motor 1,2
Section Paper transport/paper exit CFM_DV Developing fan cooling motor
MFPFAN Controller fan motor
Operation/Procedure
key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 6-3
The selected load performs the operation. Purpose Operation test/check
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the transfer
Load operation check method: unit and the control circuit.
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However, Section Process (Transfer)
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
Operation/Procedure
sound.
Section Item/Display Content key.
Transport/ VPM Vertical transport motor 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
process TRM PS front motor The selected load performs the operation.
POM1 Paper exit motor 1
POM2F Paper exit motor normal rotation
POM2R Paper exit motor reverse rotation NOTE: Before disassembling the transfer unit, be sure to use this
MM Main motor simulation to separate the transfer unit from the OPC drum.
FUM Fusing motor
RRM Resist roller motor Item/Display Content
JOINT Transfer unit in contact
PSPS Separation solenoid
RELEASE Transfer unit separated
FRS Lower pawl separation solenoid
Paper T1LUM Tray 1 lift-up motor
feed T2LUM Tray 2 lift-up motor
M1LUM Tray 3 lift-up motor
M2LUM Tray 4 lift-up motor
T1PUS Tray 1 pickup solenoid
T2PUS Tray 2 pickup solenoid
M1PUS Tray 3 pickup solenoid
M2PUS Tray 4 pickup solenoid
HPLS Interface path lock solenoid
MPFGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid
MPFPUS Manual paper feed pickup solenoid
T1PFC Tray 1 paper feed clutch
T2PFC Tray 2 paper feed clutch
M1PFC Tray 3 paper feed clutch
M2PFC Tray 4 paper feed clutch
DSKPFC1 Desk transport clutch 1
DSKPFC2 Desk transport clutch 2
MPFC Manual paper feed clutch
HPFC Horizontal transport clutch
7 8
7-1 8-1
Purpose Setting Purpose Operation test/Check/Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of
aging. the developing voltage in each print mode
Section Other and the control circuit.
Operation/Procedure Section Process (Developing)
1) Select the target to be set with the touch panel key. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Enter the setting value with 10-key.
The machine is rebooted in the aging mode. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here- The entered voltage is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed. saved.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during outputting, the opera-
AGING Aging operation setup tion is terminated.
INTERVAL Intermittent setup
MISFEED DISABLE JAM detection enable/disable setup Item/ Setting Default
Content
FUSING DISABLE Fusing operation enable/disable setup Display range value
WARMUP DISABLE Warm-up skip setup MIDDLE K color developing bias set value at the 0 - 700 395
DV CHECK DISABLE DV unit detection enable/disable setup middle speed
SHADING DISABLE Shading disable setup LOW K color developing bias set value at the 0 - 700 395
CCD GAIN FREE No setting of the CCD gain adjustment low speed
7-6 8-2
Purpose Setting Purpose Operation test/Check/Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating intermittent aging Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
cycle. the main charger grid voltage in each
printer mode and the control circuit.
Section
Section Process (Charging)
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the intermittent aging operation cycle (unit: sec) with 10-
key. 1) Enter the setting value with 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The time entered in procedure 1) is set. The entered voltage is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is
saved.
* The interval time that can be set is 1 to 900 (sec).
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
tion is terminated.
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
Default value
Item/ Setting
Content 62 CPM 75 CPM
Display range
7-8 model model
MIDDLE K color charging/grid bias set 230 - 850 525 535
Purpose Operation display
value at the middle speed
Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time. LOW K color charging/grid bias set 230 - 850 525 525
Section value at the low speed
Operation/Procedure
Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required for 8-6
warm-up is displayed Purpose Operation test/Check/Adjustment
* Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited. Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the transport voltage and the control circuit.
Section Process (Transfer)
7-12
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] key.
Function (Purpose) The document reading number of sheets 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
setting (for aging operation) Enter the default value specified on the following list.
Section Automatic document feeder 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Operation/Procedure The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
1) Set document reading quantity with 10-key. set value is output for 30 sec.
(Setting range: 0 - 255) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during outputting, the opera-
2) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved. tion is terminated.
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
Setting Default value
range 62 CPM model 75 CPM model
A TC PLAIN BW SPX Transfer current Black/White Standard Front surface 0 - 255 97 129
B TC PLAIN BW DPX paper mode Back surface 0 - 255 97 129
C TC HEAVY BW SPX Heavy paper Front surface 0 - 255 113 113
D TC HEAVY BW DPX mode Back surface 0 - 255 113 113
E TC OHP BW OHP mode 0 - 255 97 113
F TC INTERVAL BIAS Current value between papers 0 - 255 97 129
G TC ADSORPTION BIAS Transfer current value at adsorption 0 - 255 97 129
H TC FRONT EDGE BIAS Current value at the paper front edge 0 - 255 97 113
8-17 8-20
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the transfer elec- Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the output
tric cleaning output and the control circuit between transfer papers and the control cir-
operations. cuit operations.
Section Process (Transfer) Section Process (Transfer)
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] key. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) When [OK] key is pressed, the currently entered data are
Enter the default value specified on the following list. saved in the EEPROM and the RAM.
Setting Default
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the Item/Display Content
range value
set value is output for 30 sec. A FRONT EDGE Paper front edge current 0 - 100 1
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during outputting, the opera- BIAS TERM time adjustment value
tion is terminated.
Setting Default
range value
A TC CLEANING
AC
Transfer cleaning output
value AC
0 - 255 191 9
B TC CLEANING Transfer cleaning output 0 - 255 36
DC value DC 9-2
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the sensors
8-18 and detectors in the switchback section
(duplex section) and the control circuit.
Purpose Adjustment
Section Duplex
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the transfer
cleaning roller output and the control circuit Operation/Procedure
operations. The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
played.
Section Process (Transfer)
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
Operation/Procedure
are highlighted.
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection
Enter the default value specified on the following list. AINPD ADU paper entry detector
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. APPD1 ADU paper pass detector 1
APPD2 ADU paper pass detector 2
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
set value is output for 30 sec.
tion is terminated. 9-3
Setting Default Purpose Operation test/check

range value Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
A TC CLEANING Transfer Print 0 - 255 211 the paper reverse section (duplex section)
ROLLER + cleaning roller mode and its control circuit.
B TC CLEANING output Cleaning 0 - 255 205
Section Duplex
ROLLER - mode
Operation/Procedure
key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during operation, the opera-
tion is terminated.
ADM1
ADM2
ADU motor 1
ADU motor 2
14
DGS ADU gate solenoid
14--
Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "H3, H4, H5"
10 trouble.
Section
Operation/Procedure
10-1
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
supply mechanism (toner clutch) and the
related circuit.
Section Process (Developing)
Operation/Procedure
15
15--
The selected load operation is performed for 10 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during operation, the opera- Purpose Cancel
tion is terminated. Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "F3-12, F3-22,
U6-09" trouble.
NOTE: This simulation must be executed without installing the
toner cartridge and the toner hopper. Section LCC
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridge and Operation/Procedure
the toner hopper installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
the developing unit, resulting in over toner. 2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
If this simulation is erroneously executed with the toner car-
tridge installed, the over toner state may be canceled by
making several background copies.
TNM1 Toner motor 1 16

TNM2 Toner motor 2
16--
10-2 Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner Section MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
remaining quantity sensor and the related
Operation/Procedure
circuits.
Section Process (Developing)
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the toner motor 1 is driven for 10
sec.
* During execution of the simulation, each sensor name is
highlighted. Only at the moment when a sensor is turned
17
ON, the sensor name is highlighted.
17--
NOTE: The TNFS check must be performed with the toner car-
tridge installed. Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
When this simulation is executed, toner is forcibly supplied Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble.
to the developer unit, resulting in an overtoner. Therefore, Section
do not execute this simulation continuously.
Operation/Procedure
TFSD Toner remaining quantity sensor 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
TNFS Waste toner full sensor 2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
13 21
21-1
13--
Purpose Setting
Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle.
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of setting with [] [] key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Display
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Target
Display Content
Default range/
counter value No. of
Default digits
Item/Display Content Setting range
value Drum life DRUM LIFE (K) Accumulated 0 0 - 100
A MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0 : Default 300K meter number of drum (%) (1%
COUNTER counter 1 - 300: 1K - 300K rotations (K) unit)
(TOTAL) (Total) 999 : Free Developer DEVE LIFE (K) Accumulated 0 0 - 100
life meter number of (%) (1%
developer unit)
rotations (K)
22
22-2
22-1 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output/ Function (Purpose) Used to display the number of total mis-
Check feed and the number of troubles.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the print count value of Section
each section and the operation mode.
Operation/Procedure
Section The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed.
Operation/Procedure
Display MACHINE JAM Machine JAM counter
Target Default range/ RSPF/DSPF JAM SPFJAM counter
Display Content
counter value No. of
TROUBLE Trouble counter
digits
Total output TOTAL OUT Total output 0 Max. 8
quantity (BW) quantity of black
and white
22-3
Total use TOTAL (BW) Total use 0 Max. 8
quantity quantity of black Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
and white Function (Purpose) Used to display the mis-feed position and
TOTAL (COL) Total use 0 Max. 8 the number of mis-feed at the position.
quantity of full
color Section
Copy COPY (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8 Operation/Procedure
copy counter The paper jam and mis-feed history is displayed from the latest one
Print PRINT (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8 up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
print counter
Document DOC FIL (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8
filing document filing
print counter 22-4
Other OTHER (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
other counter
Maintenance MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0 Max. 8 Function (Purpose) Used to display the trouble (self diag) his-
counter ALL counter (Total) tory.
Fuser unit FUSER UNIT Fusing unit print 0 Max. 8 Section
(U) counter (Heat
Operation/Procedure
roller upper)
FUSER UNIT(L) Fusing unit print 0 Max. 8 The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items.
counter (Heat (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
roller lower)
FUSER DAY(U) Use day of 0 0 - 740
fusing unit (Heat
22-5
roller upper)
FUSER DAY(L) Use day of 0 0 - 740 Purpose Other
fusing unit (Heat Function (Purpose) Used to display the ROM version of each
roller lower) unit (section).
FUSER WEB Fuser web 0 Max. 8
SEND (U) cleaning send Section Firmware
counter Operation/Procedure
FUSER WEB Fuser web print 0 Max. 8 The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed.
UNIT (U) counter When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to
FUSER WEB Use day of fuser 0 0 - 740 check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary.
DAY (U) web unit
FUSER WEB Fuser lower web 0 Max. 8 Item/Display Content
SEND (L) cleaning feed S/N Serial No. (The codes for November and December
counter are "X" and "Y" respectively.)
FUSER WEB Fuser lower web 0 Max. 8 ICU (MAIN) ICU (Main section)
UNIT (L) print counter
ICU (BOOT) ICU (Boot section)
FUSER WEB Use day of fuser 0 0 - 740
LANGUAGE Language support data version
DAY (L) lower web unit
GRAPHIC Graphic data for LCD
IMG DATA ROM ImageASIC ROM data
PCU PCU
22-9
SCU SCU
SPF DSPF
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
FAX1 (MAIN) FAX 1-Line (Main section) Function (Purpose) Used to display the print quantity of each
LCC Side LCC paper feed section.
FINISHER Finisher Section
SADDLE Saddle unit
Operation/Procedure
INSERTER Inserter
NIC NIC
The counter values related to paper feed are displayed.
POWER-CON Power controller
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter
E-MANUAL Operation manual (HDD storage)
WATER MARK Watermark (HDD storage)
ESCP ESCP font ROM
PDL PDL font ROM
MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)
ACRE (MAIN) ACRE (Main section)
MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
ACRE (DATA) ACRE (Data section)
MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (LCC)
ADU ADU paper feed counter (Paper reverse section)
22-6
Function (Purpose) Used to print information on various set- 22-10
tings, adjustments, counters, controls, and Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
versions.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the system configuration
Section (options and internal hardware).
Operation/Procedure Section
* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print Operation/Procedure
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing.
The system configuration is displayed.
(Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.)
(The model names of the installed devices and options are dis-
1) Select the print list mode with 10-key.
played.)
Print list
Item/Display Print content Device Model name Content
mode
A DATA PATTERN 1 Firmware version, counter data, etc. MACHINE MX-M753N Main unit
2 — MX-M753U
3 Data related to the process control MX-M753
MX-M623N
2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step MX-M623U
1). MX-M623
SPF STANDARD Auto document feeder
STAMP AR-SU1 Finish stamp
LCC MX-LC10 Large capacity tray (side LCC)
22-8
MX-LCX3
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check PUNCHER AR-PN4A Punch module
Function (Purpose) Used to display the number of operations AR-PN4B
(the counter value) of the finisher, the AR-PN4C
DSPF, and scanning (reading). AR-PN4D
Section MX-PNX10A
MX-PNX10B
Operation/Procedure
MX-PNX10C
The counter values of the finisher, the DSPF, and the scanner MX-PNX10D
related counters are displayed. FINISHER MX-FN15 Finisher (4K)
MX-FN16 Saddle stitch finisher (4K)
SPF Document feed quantity
MX-FN14 100 sheets staple finisher (4K)
SCAN Number of times of scan
INSERTER MX-CF10 Inserter
STAPLER Staple counter
FAX1 MX-FXX2 Facsimile expansion kit
PUNCHER Puncher counter
NETWORK MX-NSX1/ Network scanner expansion kit
STAMP Stamp counter
SCANNER STANDARD
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
PRINTER MX-PB13/ Printer expansion kit
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter STANDARD
COVER Cover open/close counter PS MX-PKX1 PS expansion kit
HP_ON Number of scanner HP detection XPS MX-PUX1 XPS expansion kit
INSERTER Inserter counter SECURITY MX-FR22U Data security kit
INSERTER OFFLINE Inserter offline counter (commercial version)
OC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the lamp in OC section MX-FR22 Data security kit
(* hour * minutes) (Authentication version)
DSPF LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the lamp in DSPF section AIM MX-AMX1 Application integration module
(* hour * minutes) SDRAM (SYS) *****MB SDRAM capacity
SDRAM (ICU) *****MB SDRAM capacity
HDD *****MB Hard disk capacity
NIC STANDARD NIC
BARCODE AR-PF1 Bar code font
Device Model name Content
22-19
INTERNET-FAX MX-FWX1 Internet Fax expansion kit
ACM MX-AMX2 Application communication
("STANDARD" for module Function (Purpose) Used to display various counter values
North America) related to scan - image send.
EAM MX-AMX3 External account module
Section
("STANDARD" for
North America) Operation/Procedure
ACRE MX-EBX3 Enhanced compression kit (ACRE) Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner
Change the display with [] [] key.
NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity

22-11 counter (B/W scan job)
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity
counter (Color scan job)
Function (Purpose) Used to display the use frequency of send/
INTERNET FAX OUTPUT Number of internet FAX output
receive of FAX.
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX sending page
(Only when FAX is installed.)
OUTPUT
Section FAX INTERNET FAX RECEIVE Number of internet FAX receive
Operation/Procedure INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX send
The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send
are displayed. FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send
SMB SEND Number of SMB send
FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter (for line 1) USB CNT Number of times of USB storage
FAX SEND FAX send counter TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job)
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1) SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR)
SEND TIME FAX send time
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
ACR SEND Number of carrier prefix adding communications
22-90
Function (Purpose) Used to output the various set data lists.
22-12
Section
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to display the mis-feed position of the
1) Change the display with [] [] key.
DSPF and the number of mis-feed at the
position. 2) Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel.
Section Automatic document feeder 3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self print of the list.
Operation/Procedure All setting list ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST
The paper jam and mis-feed history is displayed from the latest one Printer test page PCL SYMBOL SET LIST
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.) PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST
* For the list of the jam codes, Refer to "Paper JAM code list" in PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST
[6] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE. PS FONT LIST
PS KANJI FONT LIST
PS EXTENDED FONT LIST
NIC PAGE
22-13
Address registration list (*) INDIVIDUAL LIST
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check GROUP LIST
Function (Purpose) Used to display the use quantity of the pro- PROGRAM LIST
cess section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner MEMORY BOX LIST
cartridge). ALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST
Section Process Document filing list DOCUMENT FILING FOLDER LIST
System setting list ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COPY)
Operation/Procedure
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (PRINT)
The rotating time and the print quantity of the process section are ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (IMAGE SEND)
displayed. ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (DOC FILING)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (SECURITY)
DRUM CTRG K Drum cartridge print counter (K)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COMMON)
DRUM RANGE K Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm)
ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST
(K)
Receive YES/NO number ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST
DRUM TURN K Drum cartridge accumulated rotation time (K)
table
DRUM DAY K Number of day that used drum (Day) K
Receive rejection/allow ANTI JUNK MAIL/DOMAIN NAME LIST
DEVE CTRG K Developer cartridge print counter (K) address domain table
DEVE RANGE K Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance To network Transfer table list INBOUND ROUTING LIST
(cm) (K)
To administrator Transfer list DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST
DEVE TURN K Developer cartridge accumulated rotation time (K)
Web setting list WEB SETTING LIST
DEVE DAY K Number of day that used developer (Day) K
Meta data set list METADATA SET LIST
TONER MOTOR K Toner motor print counter (K)
TONER TURN K Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (K) * When the data list print of system setting is inhibition in DSK
model, this setting is invalid.
24-2
23
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the num-
23-2
ber of prints) of each paper feed section.
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of
Operation/Procedure
paper jam and mis-feed.
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key.
Press [EXECUTE] key to execute print.
The target counter is cleared.
The trouble history of paper jams and mis-feed is printed.
23-80 TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter
MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)
Function (Purpose) Used to output the operation data of paper MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
feed and paper transport in the paper feed/ MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
transport section. LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (LCC)
Section Paper feed, Paper transport ADU ADU paper feed counter
Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the timing list of paper feed and
paper transport is outputted. 24-3
Used to print the operations timing list of the sensors and detectors
Purpose Data clea
in the paper feed and transport section.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the finisher, DSPF, and the
The timing list of paper feed and paper transport operations of the
scan (reading) unit counter.
latest job (copy or print) on the final paper is printed.
Since the paper feed and paper transport routes differ depending Section
on the used paper feed tray and the print operation mode, the sen- Operation/Procedure
sor and the detectors and the operation timing also differ. 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
SECTION Operation content (Trigger name - Detection
operation or load operation name) 3) Press [YES] key.
STANDARD Standard value (ms) The target counter is cleared.
CURRENT (*1) Operation timing (ms) of the latest job on the
final paper SPF DSPF document feed counter
PREVIOUS (*1) Operation timing (ms) of the second latest job SCAN Scan counter
on the final paper STAPLER Staple counter
MAXIMUM (*1) Max. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs PUNCHER Puncher counter
MINIMUM (*1) Min. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs STAMP Stamp counter
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
*1: The value without unit on the left side of each item on the list SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter
has no relation to the operation timing. It is not used in the market. INSERTER Inserter counter
INSERTER OFFLINE Inserter offline counter
COVER Cover open/close counter
HP_ON HP detection count
24 OC LAMP TIME OC section lamp total lighting time
DSPF LAMP TIME DSPF section lamp total lighting time
24-1
Purpose Data clear
24-4
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter, and the trou-
ble counter. Purpose Data clear
Section Function (Purpose) Used to clear the maintenance counter, the
Operation/Procedure printer counters of the transfer unit and the
fusing unit.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key.
MACHINE Machine JAM counter 3) Press [YES] key.
SPF DSPF JAM counter The target counter is cleared.
TROUBLE Trouble counter
MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total)
FUSER UNIT(U) Fusing unit print counter (Heat roller upper)
FUSER UNIT(L) Fusing unit print counter (Heat roller lower)
FUSER DAY(U) Use day of fusing unit (Heat roller upper)
FUSER DAY(L) Use day of fusing unit (Heat roller lower)
FUS WEB SEND(U) Fuser web send counter
24-9
FUS WEB UNIT(U) Fuser web print counter
FUS WEB DAY(U) Fuser web unit use day
Purpose Data clear
FUS WEB SEND(L) Fuser lower web send counter Function (Purpose) Used clear the printer mode print counter
FUS WEB UNIT(L) Fuser lower web print counter and the self print mode print counter.
FUS WEB DAY(L) Fuser lower web unit use day Section
Operation/Procedure
24-5 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Purpose Data clear 3) Press [YES] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter. The target counter is cleared.
Section
PRINT BW Print counter
Operation/Procedure OTHER BW Other counter
3) Press [YES] key.
24-10
Purpose Data clear
NOTE: When SIM25-2 is executed, this counter is also cleared
automatically. Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX counter.
(Only when FAX is installed)
Developer cartridge print counter (K) Section
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
Operation/Procedure
Number of day that used developer (Day) K
3) Press [YES] key.
24-6 The target counter is cleared.
Purpose Data clear
FAX OUTPUT FAX Print quantity counter (for line 1)
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the copy counter.
FAX SEND FAX send counter
Section FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
Operation/Procedure SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1)
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. SEND TIME FAX send time
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
ACR SEND Number of carrier prefix adding communications
3) Press [YES] key.
COPY BW Copy counter 24-15

Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the counters related to the
24-7 scan mode and the image send.
Purpose Data clear Section
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the OPC drum counter. Operation/Procedure
Section 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Operation/Procedure 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. 3) Press [YES] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. The target counter is cleared.
3) Press [YES] key.
NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity
The target counter is cleared. counter (B/W scan job)
NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity
Drum cartridge print counter (K) counter (COLOR scan job)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K) INTERNET FAX OUTPUT Number of internet FAX output
Number of day that used drum (Day) K INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX sending page
SEND OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive
RECEIVE
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX send
MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send
FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send
SMB SEND Number of SMB send
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage
TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job)
SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)
SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR)
24-30 25-2
Purpose Data clear Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the administrator pass- Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner
word. density when replacing developer. (Auto-
Section matic adjustment)
Operation/Procedure Section Process (Photoconductor/Developing/
Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The administrator password is initialized.
The developing motor rotates for 3 minutes, and the toner density
If the administrator password of system setting and Web page is
sensor makes sampling of the toner density. The detected level is
forgotten, execute this simulation to set the password to "admin"
displayed.
(default).
After stopping the developing motor, the average value of the toner
density sampling results is set as the reference toner density con-
trol level.
24-31
NOTE: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the
Purpose Data clear
reference toner concentration level is not set. Also when
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the service mode (Web error code of EE-EC, EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the ref-
page) password. erence toner density level is not set normally.
Section Do not execute this simulation unless new Developer material has
Operation/Procedure been installed. If it is executed in other cases, under toner or over-
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. tone may occur, causing a trouble.
2) Press [YES] key. Adjustment result data display
The service mode password is initialized. Item/Display Content
If the password of Web page is forgotten, execute this simulation to AUTO DV(L) Toner density adjustment value at the low speed
set the password to "service" (default). AUTO DV(M) Toner density adjustment value at the middle speed
AUTO DV VO(L) Toner density sensor control voltage level at the low
speed
AUTO DV VO(M) Toner density sensor control voltage level at the
middle speed
25
Data display during execution
25-1 Item/Display Content
Purpose Operation test/check TCS Toner density sensor detection level
TCV Toner density sensor control voltage level
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the devel-
oping section, and to display the toner den- Display in case of an error
sity detection level.
Error display Content Details of content
Section Process (Developing section) EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level less than 26, or
Operation/Procedure sensor control voltage level over 197
1) Select the process speed with the touch panel key. EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level over 200, or sensor
control voltage level less than 49
LOW Process speed: Low speed EE-EC EC abnormality The sampling level in the automatic
MIDDLE Process speed: Medium speed toner density adjustment is outside of
108  5.
The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3
minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is dis-
played.
26
TCS Toner density detection level
TCV_K Toner density sensor output voltage level
26-2
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper type and the weight
type.
Section Paper feed
Operation/Procedure
Select a paper size to be changed with the touch panel.
TRAY2 0 8.5 x 11
1 A4
2 B5
A4 LCC 0 8.5 x 11
1 A4
2 B5
G/LBS SET 0 GRAM
1 LBS
Default
value
Purpose Setting PRINTER MODE1 PRINTER CONTROL MODE
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the auditor. CONTROL MODE1 (All the items of 1
(Japan only) OUTSIDE AUDITOR can be
selected.)
Section Auditor MODE2 PRINTER CONTROL
Operation/Procedure MODE2 (The item of
Select an item to be set with the touch panel. OUTSIDE AUDITOR must
be the value of "P VENDOR
Default 1" and the other buttons are
Item/Display Content gray out.)
value
BUILT-IN P10 Built-in auditor mode P10 MODE3 PRINTER CONTROL
AUDITOR (standard mode) operation. MODE3 (The item of
OUTSIDE AUDITOR must
EC1 EC1 mode operation
be the value of "P OTHER"
OUTSIDE NONE No external connection NONE
and the other buttons are
AUDITOR vendor is used.
gray out.)
P VENDOR1 Coin vendor mode
(Only the copy mode can be (*1) Displayed only when EQUITRAC.
controlled.)
(*2) Details of the vendor mode
P VENDOR2 Vendor mode communicating
with the parallel I/F (for Completion of Insufficient Completion of
DocuLyzer) (Japan only) the specified money during the specified
VENDOR-EX Vendor I/F for EQUITRAC VENDER quantity. copy job quantity.
(*1) MODE (Money No money (No money
VENDOR-EX VENDOR-EX + Multi job remaining) remaining remaining)
(MULTI) (*1) cueing Enable mode Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3
P OTHER NOT USED MODE1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 1
S_VENDOR Serial vendor mode MODE2 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 1
DOC ADJ ON Support for the auditor in OFF MODE3 Operation 1 Operation 3 Operation 3
document filing print
OFF No support for the auditor in Operation 1:
document filing print Standby during setting time of auto clear. Default is 60 seconds,
PF ADJ ON Continuous printing is OFF which can be changed in the system setting.
performed in the duplex print
Operation 2:
mode.
Auto clear is not made.
If the remaining money
expires during continuous Operation 3:
printing, the sheets in the The display is shifted to the initial screen.
machine are discharged
without being printed on the
back surfaces.
OFF Continuous printing is not 26-5
performed in the duplex print Purpose Setting
mode. (The remaining
Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode in A3 (11" x
amount is checked for
printing every surface in all 17") print.
the printing process.) Section
If the remaining money
Operation/Procedure
expires during printing, the
sheet is discharged without 1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
printing on the back surface. 2) Enter the setting value with 10-key
VENDOR MODE1 Vendor mode 1 MODE 1 = Count up by 1, 2 = Count up by 2
MODE (*2) MODE2 Vendor mode 2 3
3) Press [OK] key.
MODE3 Vendor mode 3
The set value in step 2) is saved.
COUNTUP FUSER_IN When the paper lead edge EXIT_
TIMING passes the fusing rear OUT
Item/Display Content Default value
sensor.
A TOTAL (B/W) Total counter (B/W) 2
FUSER_OUT When the paper rear edge
B MAINTE (B/W) Maintenance counter (B/W) 2
passes the fusing rear
sensor. C DEV (B/W) Developer counter (B/W)
EXIT_OUT When the paper rear edge
passes the paper exit sensor
in the main unit, the right tray,
and the after process unit. 26-6
IMS ON There is some restriction in OFF Purpose Setting
CONTROL the image send mode.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the desti-
OFF There is no restriction in the
image send mode. nation.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
The selected set content is saved.
U.S.A. United States of America U.S.A 1 (CE not supported) EUROPE 0 (CE supported)
CANADA Canada CANADA 1 (CE not supported) U.K. 0 (CE supported)
INCH Inch series, other destinations INCH 1 (CE not supported) AUS. 0 (CE supported)
JAPAN Japan JAPAN 1 (CE not supported) AB_A 0 (CE supported)
AB_B AB series (B5 detection), other destinations AB_B 1 (CE not supported) CHINA 0 (CE supported)
EUROPE Europe
U.K. United Kingdom
AUS. Australia
AB_A AB series (A5 detection), other destinations 26-35
CHINA China Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the trouble history display
mode.
26-10 Section
Purpose Setting Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the network 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
scanner.
0 Only once display.
Section 1 Any time display.
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [OK] key.
2) Press [OK] key.
TRIAL MODE 0 Trial mode setting 26-38

(0: YES 1: NO) 1 Trial mode cancel (Default) Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set "Print continue" or "Print stop"
when the maintenance timing is reached or
the consumable part life is over.
26-18
Section
Purpose Setting
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner
save mode operation. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
(For the Japan and the UK versions.) 2) Press [OK] key.
Section The set value in step 1) is saved.
Operation/Procedure
Default
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. Item/Display Content
value
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. A MAINTENANCE 0 Print continue 0
LIFE OVER 1 Print stop
3) Press [OK] key.
B FUSER WEB END 0 Continue/Stop setting of print 0
(0: CONTINUE when the fusing web is end
1: STOP) (Print Continue)
Default
Item Display Content 1 Continue/Stop setting of print
value
when the fusing web is end
A COPY 0 Copy toner save mode is inhibited.
0 (Print Stop)
1 Copy toner save mode is allowed
B PRINTER 0 Printer toner save mode is inhibited.
0
1 Printer toner save mode is allowed.
26-41
Purpose Setting
26-30 Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnifi-
Purpose Setting cation ratio automatic select function (AMS)
in the center binding mode.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corre-
sponding to the CE mark (Europe safety Section
standards). Operation/Procedure
Section 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure
0 AMS Disable
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. 1 AMS Enable
0 Control allowed 2) Press [OK] key.

1 Control inhibited The set value in step 1) is saved.
2) Press [OK] key. <Default value of each destination>
The set value in step 1) is saved. U.S.A 0 (Disable) EUROPE 1 (Enable)
* Even in Enable state, the control may not be executed due CANADA 0 (Disable) U.K. 1 (Enable)
to the power frequency, etc. INCH 0 (Disable) AUS. 0 (Disable)
JAPAN 0 (Disable) AB_A 0 (Disable)
AB_B 0 (Disable) CHINA 0 (Disable)
26-49 Destination Default
Purpose Setting U.S.A 0 (Counted)
CANADA 0 (Counted)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the print speed of postcards
INCH 0 (Counted)
mode.
JAPAN 1 (Not counted)
Section AB_B 0 (Counted)
Operation/Procedure EUROPE 0 (Counted)
Select the copy speed mode with the touch panel. (Default: LOW) U.K. 0 (Counted)
AUS. 1 (Not counted)
When the setting is changed, the paper feed interval in print or
AB_A 0 (Counted)
copy in the postcard mode is changed and the job speed is
CHINA 0 (Counted)
changed accordingly.
LOW: The paper feed interval is long. (Normal mode)
HIGH: The paper feed interval is short. (when a paper jam occurs,
the number of sheets of jam paper is greater than that in the LOW 26-53
mode.) Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Inhibit/Allow of the user auto
calibration (gradation, density adjustment)
26-50 in the copy mode.
Purpose Setting Section
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation specifications Operation/Procedure
and functions. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Section
Operation/Procedure 0 Inhibit (Default)
1 Allow
panel. 2) Press [OK] key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. The set value in step 1) is saved.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Default
value
A BW REVERSE 0 BW reverse copy Disable Refer Purpose Setting
1 BW reverse copy Enable to *1 Function (Purpose) Used to set Inhibit/Allow of the user auto
B FEED TRAY 0 Paper feed tray color display 0 calibration (gradation, density adjustment)
COLOR ON during paper feed in the print mode.
1 Paper feed tray color display
OFF during paper feed Section
Operation/Procedure
(*1) Default values for each destination of item A 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Destination Item A
USA 1 0 Inhibit (Default)
CANADA 1 1 Allow
INCH 1
2) Press [OK] key.
JAPAN 1
AB_B 1 The set value in step 1) is saved.
EUROPE 1
UK 0
AUS 1 26-65
AB_A 1
Purpose Setting
CHINA 1
Function (Purpose) Used to set the limit of the staple process.
Section
Operation/Procedure
26-52
Use the touch key to set.
Purpose Setting [Target paper size]
Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-printed paper <LIMIT SHEETS>
(insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up
A4, B5, 8.5 x 11, 16K
or not.
<LIMIT SHEETS(L)>
Section
(A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 13, 8K, A4R,
Operation/Procedure 8.5 x 11R)
0 Count up
1 No count up
2) Press [OK] key.

<List of Default values and set values for each destination>
100 sheets
4K saddle Set value
binding 4K finisher
finisher
finisher Destination Toner preparation
Toner near end message
message
Default value
Default value
Default value
Item Content U.S.A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
Set value
Set value
Set value
CANADA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
INCH 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
JAPAN 1 (Not Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
30 30 30 AB_B 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
LIMIT Staple limit
100 50 50 EUROPE 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
SHEETS sheets 100 50 50
Staple limit U.K. 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
ON ON ON AUS. 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
LIMIT copies ON
ON ON ON AB_A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
COPIES Staple limit
OFF OFF OFF CHINA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
copies OFF
LIMIT Staple limit 30 25 25
50 30 30 (Contents of set items)
SHEETS (L) sheets 50 30 30
Saddle staple A: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display
load quantity ON when the toner remaining quantity reaches 25%.
SADDLE limited B: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display
— — ON
COPIES Saddle staple when the toner near end status is reached.
load quantity OFF
not limited C: Enable/Disable setting of the machine operation when the toner
end status is reached.
*1: 1-5sheets (20 sets) / 6-10 sheets (15 sets) / For except Japan, performs operation of set value "3" regardless of
11-15 sheets (10 sets) the setting value.
D: Setting of the toner supply enable time (sec) to the developer
unit after toner near end. (Range of 180 - 380 sec)
26-69 When the set time is exceeded, it is judged as toner end.
Purpose Setting The number of output print allowed in item D is based on the
assumption that the sheets are of A4 size with print ratio of 6%.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for
(The number of outputs allowed differs depending on the paper
toner near end.
size and the print ratio.)
Section
Operation/Procedure Set value of item D and toner supply enable time
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. 1: 180 sec, equivalent to 2.0K sheets
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2: 230 sec, equivalent to 2.5K sheets
3) Press [OK] key. 3: 280 sec, equivalent to 3.0K sheets
The set value in step 2 is saved. 4: 330 sec, equivalent to 3.5K sheets
Setting Default 5: 380 sec, equivalent to 4.0K sheets
range value * Reference value based on 6% documents
A TONER 0 The toner preparation 0-1
PREPARATION message is displayed.
(0: YES 1: NO) 1 The toner preparation
26-73
message is not
displayed. Purpose Setting
B TONER NEAR 0 The toner near end 0-1 0 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image loss (shade
END message is displayed.
removal amount) in the poster, the continu-
(0: YES 1: NO) 1 The toner near end
ous enlargement copy, the card scan, and
message is not
the A3 wide copy mode.
displayed.
C TONER END 1 Operation Enable in 1-3 2 Section
TONER END Operation/Procedure
2 Operation STOP in
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
TONER END
3 Operation STOP in 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
TONER END 3) Press [OK] key.
D TONER END Setting of Enable/Disable of 1-5 3 When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
COUNT toner supply to the (shade delete quantity) is increased.
developer unit after toner
near end Setting
E TONER E-MAIL 0 Condition for Low 0-1 1 Item/Display Content Default value
range
ALART status send of E-mail A DELETING Rear frame side 0 - 50 0
alert SHADOW ADJ image loss quantity (Adjustment
When the toner (M) (shade delete amount:
preparation message quantity) adjustment 0.1mm/step)
is displayed (in near B DELETING Lead edge image 0 - 50 0
near toner end) SHADOW ADJ loss quantity (shade (Adjustment
1 Condition for Low (S) delete quantity) amount:
status send of E-mail adjustment 0.1mm/step)
alert
When near toner end
26-74
27
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the OSA trial mode.
27-1
Section
Purpose Setting
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to set non-detection of communica-
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. tion error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
2) Press [OK] key.
Section
Setting Default Operation/Procedure
range value 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
A OSA TRIAL 0 Used to set the OSA 0-1 1
MODE trial mode. 0 Not detection
(0: YES 1: NO) 1 OSA trial mode is 1 Detection
canceled.
2) Press [OK] key.
26-78
Purpose Setting 27-2
Function (Purpose) Used to set the password of the remote Purpose Setting
operation panel mode.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the sender's registration num-
Section ber and the HOST server telephone num-
Operation/Procedure ber. (FSS function)
1) Enter a password with 10-key. (5 - 8 digits) Section
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW”. Operation/Procedure
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key 1) Select an item to be set with touch panel.
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit. [USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO]
2) Press [SET] key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [SET] key.
USER FAX_NO. Sender registration number (Max. 16 digits)

SERVA TEL_NO. Host server telephone number (Max. 16 digits)
• If the connection process is not completed
normally when registering the FSS, calling to the
HOST may be continuously made every time when
the power is turned ON (from OFF) or rebooted.
In this case, enter "********" to inhibit calling to the
HOST.
27-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the initial call and toner order
auto send. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. 3) Press [OK] key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. The set value in step 2) is saved.
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value Remarks

A FSS MODE NEB1 Set the FSS MODE Exclusive for send 0-3 0 1
in NE-B mode
NEB2 Send/Receive in 1
NE-B mode
NFB1 Exclusive for send 2
in NE-F mode
NFB2 Send/Receive in 3
NE-F mode
B RETRY_BUSY Resend number setting when busy 0 - 15 2 * 0: No retry
C TIMER (MINUTE) _BUSY Resend timer setting (minute) when busy 1 - 15 3
D RETRY_ERROR Resend number setting when error 0 - 15 1 * 0: No retry
E TIMER (MINUTE) _ERROR Resend timer setting (minute) when error 1 - 15 1
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value Remarks
F TONER ORDER 100% - 75% Toner order auto send 100% - 75% 0-5 5 3 (49%-25%)
TIMING (K) 74% - 50% timing setting (K) 74% - 50% 4
49% - 25% 49% - 25% 3
LOWER 25 25% or less 2
NEAREND NEAREND 1
EMPTY EMPTY 0
27-5 27-9
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine tag No. Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper transport time record-
(FSS function) ing YES/NO threshold value and shading
Section Communication (RIC/MODEM) gain adjustment retry number.
(FSS function)
Operation/Procedure
Section
1) Enter the password (max. 8 digits) with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW”.
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [SET] key. 3) Press [OK] key.
A FEED TIME 1 0 - 100 Threshold value of the paper

27-6
transport time between sensors
Purpose Setting (Main unit) (50: Default)
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the manual service call. B FEED TIME 2 0 - 100 Threshold value of the paper
(FSS function) transport time between sensors
(DSPF) (50: Default)
Section C GAIN ADJUSTMENT 0 - 20 Threshold value of the gain
Operation/Procedure RETRY adjustment retry number
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. (11: Default)
D JAM ALERT 1 - 100 Alert judgment threshold value for
0 Allow (Default) occurrence of continuous jams
1 Inhibit Alert judgment threshold value for
occurrence of continuous jams
2) Press [OK] key. (Setting of the number of times of
continuous jams as the alert for
continuous jams) (Default: 10
times)
27-7 * Items A, B: 0%, standard passing time between sheets of paper;

100%, time for judgment as a jam between sheets of paper.
Purpose Setting
* Item C: Because of a trouble in shading operation, the number of
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the enable, alert call out.
retry is actually not registered.
(FSS function)
Section
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the trouble prediction history
3) Press [OK] key. information. (FSS function)
Section
A FSS 0 FSS function enable Operation/Procedure
FUNCTION 1 FSS function disable (*1) (Default) 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
B ALERT 0 Alert call enable (*2) (Default) 2) Press [YES] key.
1 Alert call disable
The history information of trouble prediction is cleared.
C CONNECTION 0 FAX connection enable
1 E-MAIL connection enable Target history Serial communication retry number history
High density process control error history
*1 The FSS function setting can be changed only from Disable to
Half tone process control error history
Enable. (Cannot be changed from Enable to Disable.)
Scanner gain adjustment retry history
*2 Alert send timing DSPF gain adjustment retry history
Paper transport time between sensors
No alert cause Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alert
Maintenance When the maintenance timing is reached.
Service call When pressing Service call.
Toner send request When the toner order automatic send setting is
reached.
Toner collection request Revision of the toner installation date (only for
a new product)
Alert resend
27-11 27-12
Purpose Other Purpose Other
Function (Purpose) Used to check the serial communication Function (Purpose) Used to check the high-density and the
retry number and the scanner gain adjust- half-tone process control error history. (FSS
ment retry number history. (FSS function) Function)
Section Section
The serial communication retry number history and the scanner The high density and the half-tone process control error history are
gain adjustment retry number history are displayed. displayed.
Display Item HV_ERR1 High density error history 1

Occurrence date Retry Content HV_ERR2 High density error history 2
Item name
(Display) number HV_ERR3 High density error history 3
LSU1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Serial HV_ERR4 High density error history 4
LSU2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits communication retry HV_ERR5 High density error history 5
INSERTER1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits number history H_TONE ERR1 Half tone error history 1
INSERTER2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits display
H_TONE ERR2 Half tone error history 2
FINISHER1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits H_TONE ERR3 Half tone error history 3
FINISHER2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits H_TONE ERR4 Half tone error history 4
SCAN GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Scanner gain H_TONE ERR5 Half tone error history 5
SCAN GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits adjustment retry
SCAN GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history
SCAN GAIN ADJ4 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
SCAN GAIN ADJ5 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
DSPF GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits DSPF gain
DSPF GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits adjustment retry
DSPF GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history
DSPF GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
27-13
Purpose Other
Function (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport
time between sensors. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Change the display with [] [] key.
Code Reference
Item/Display Content Occurrence date between Passing time passing
sensors time
Main FEED TIME1 History of paper transport time between sensors 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
unit FEED TIME2 History of paper transport time between sensors 2 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME3 History of paper transport time between sensors 3 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
DSPF FEED TIME1(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME2(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 2 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
MPRD1 Manual paper feed interface paper detection 1
27-14
MPRD2 Manual paper feed interface paper detection 2
Purpose Setting T2LUD Tray 2 paper upper limit detection
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function connection T2PED Tray 2 paper empty detection
test mode. T2SPD Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection
Section M1SS1 Tray 3 rear edge detection 1
M1SS2 Tray 3 rear edge detection 2
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. M1SS4 Tray 3 rear edge detection 4
0 Disable (Default)
1 Enable
2) Press [OK] key. M2SS4 Tray 4 rear edge detection 4
The set value in step 1) is saved. M1PFD Tray 3 paper pass detection
M1LUD Tray 3 paper upper limit detection
* For setting the FSS function connection test mode, only DIS-
M1PED Tray 3 paper empty detection
ABLE to ENABLE can be made. (ENABLE to DISABLE cannot
M1SPD Tray 3 paper remaining quantity detection
be made.)
M2PFD Tray 4 paper pass detection
M2LUD Tray 4 paper upper limit detection
M2PED Tray 4 paper empty detection
M2SPD Tray 4 paper remaining quantity detection
30 MPFD1 Paper pass detection 1 from manual paper feed tray
MPFD2 Paper pass detection 2 from manual paper feed tray
MPED Manual paper feed paper empty detection
30-1
MPLD1 Manual paper feed length detection 1
Purpose Operation test/check MPLD2 Manual paper feed length detection 2
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- MTOP1 Manual paper feed pulling detection 1
sors and the detectors in other than the MTOP2 Manual paper feed pulling detection 2
paper feed section and the control circuits. DSW_R Manual paper feed open/close detection
Section
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
played. 33
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
lighted. 33-1
PPD Resist detection Purpose Operation test/check
PFD2 Paper feed transport detection Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the card
POD1 Fusing rear detection reader sensor and the control circuit.
POD2 Main unit paper exit detection
Section
POD3 Main unit paper exit full detection
Operation/Procedure
LPPD LCC paper pass detection
WEBEND1 Web end detection 1 The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
WEBEND2 Web end detection 2 played.
DSW_L Left door open/close detection The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
DSW_F Front door open/close detection lighted.
DSW_DSK Desk left door open/close detection
TNFS Waste toner full detection CARD Card Yes/No detection
TLS Waste toner lock detection DATA Card number signal detection
THPS Transfer belt home position detection CLOCK Reference clock signal detection
30-2 33-2
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- Function (Purpose) Used to delete the ID (IDM) information of
sors and the detectors in the paper feed card.
section and the control circuits. Section
Section Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- 2) Press [YES] key.
played. The ID (IDM) information of Felica card in the HDD is deleted.
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
lighted.
TANSET Tray 1, 2 insertion detection

T1PPD Tray 1 paper pass detection
T1LUD Tray 1 paper upper limit detection
T1PED Tray 1 paper empty detection
T1SPD Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
40 41
40-2 41-1
Purpose Adjustment/Setting Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
adjustment. ment size sensor and the control circuit.
Section Paper feed Section
1) Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX). The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. played.
The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized. The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
lighted.
3) Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4R).
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. OCSW Document cover status Open: Normal display
The P1 width (A4R) detection level is recognized. Close: Highlighted
5) Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A5R). PD1 - 7 Document detection No document: Normal display
sensor status Document present: Highlighted
The P2 width (A5R) detection level is recognized.
7) Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN).
The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized. Purpose Adjustment
When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor
displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. detection level.
Section
MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width
Operation/Procedure
P1(A4R)POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4R)
P2(A5R)POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A5R) 1) Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without
MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width place a document on the document table.
The sensor level without document is recognized.
2) Set A3 (11” x 17") paper on the document table, and press
[EXECUTE] key.
40-7
The sensor level when detecting the document is displayed.
Purpose Adjustment/Setting
When the above operation is normally completed, it is displayed.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the
manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. 41-3
Section Paper feed Purpose Operation test/check
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] buttons. ment size sensor and the control circuit.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Section
3) Press [OK] key. Operation/Procedure
The set value in step 2) is saved. The detection output level (A/D value) of OCSW and the document
sensor (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time.
Default
Item/Display Content The light receiving range of PD1 - PD7 is 1 - 255. (Default: 128)
value
A MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width 193
Item/Display Content Detection level range
B P1 POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4R) 183
OCSW Original cover SW 0-1 ("1" to Close)
C P2 POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A5R) 133
PD1 - PD7 Document detection 1 - 0 - 255
D MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width 84
Document detection 7
40-12
Purpose Adjustment/Setting 43
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the multi-purpose tray width
detection level.
43-1
Section Paper feed
Purpose Setting
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to make the fusing reference temper-
1) Open the multi-purpose tray guide to the maximum width, and
ature setting 1 in each operation mode.
press [EXECUTE] key.
Section
The maximum detection level is recognized.
Operation/Procedure
2) When the minimum width adjustment start is displayed, open
the guide to the minimum width and press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
The minimum detection level is recognized. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, however, the set value
must not be changed. If it is changed, a trouble may be occur.
Default value
Setting
Item Display Content Group A Group B Group C
range
SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B
A HL_UM READY TH_UM set value when ready standby 70 - 240 200 205 200 205 200 205
B HL_US READY TH_US set value when ready standby 70 - 240 200 205 200 205 200 205
C HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW Black and white plain paper TH_UM set value 70 - 240 200 205 210 210
D HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW Black and white plain paper TH_US set value 70 - 240 200 205 210 210
E WARMUP FUMON HL_UM T Fusing motor previous rotation start TH_UM set value 30 - 240 190 50 50
F WARMUP FUMOFF HL_UM T Fusing motor previous rotation complete time 0 - 200 5
G WARM UP END TIME Warm-up complete time 0 - 200 28 50 28 50 28 50
H HL_UM HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_UM set value 70 - 240 220
I HL_US HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_US set value 70 - 240 220
J HL_UM OHP PAPER OHP-TH_UM set value 70 - 240 210
K HL_US OHP PAPER OHP-TH_US set value 70 - 240 210
L HL_UM E-STAR Preheating TH_UM set value 30 - 200 165
M HL_US E-STAR Preheating TH_US set value 30 - 200 165
N PRE-JOB Resetting from preheating TH_UM set value 30 - 240 180 190 190
O HL_UM WARMUP_120L TH_UM set value when warming up of 120C or less 70 - 240 200 210 215 215
P HL_US WARMUP_120L TH_US set value when warming up of 120C or less 70 - 240 200 210 215 215
Q LO_WARMUP_TIME O - P applying time (Timer from completion of Ready) 0 - 255 5
R HL_UM WARMUP_120H TH_UM set value when warming up of 120C or above 70 - 240 200 210 215 215
S HL_US WARMUP_120H TH_US set value when warming up of 120C or above 70 - 240 200 210 215 215
T HI_WARMUP_TIME R - S applying time (Timer from completion of Ready) 0 - 255 5
U HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP FM previous rotation start TH_US set value when 30 - 240 130
warming up of alpha C or above
V HI _WU_END_TIME Warm-Up complete time when warming up of alpha C 0 - 200 28 50 28 50 28 50
or above
W HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP1 Job enable TH UM temperature 1 when warming up of 70 - 240 190 200 210 210
alpha C or above
X HI_WARMUP_BORDER U - W applying set value 1 - 119 70
Y LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP1 Job enable TH UM temperature 1 when warming up of 70 - 240 190 200 210 210
alpha C or less
Z JOBEND_FUMON_TIME After rotation time when Job end 0 - 200 10
AA HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP2 Job enable TH UM temperature 2 when warming up of 70 - 240 195 205 210 210
alpha C or above
AB LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP2 Job enable TH UM temperature 2 when warming up of 70 - 240 195 205 210 210
alpha C or less
<Code descriptions>
TH_UM Fusing upper thermistor main HL_UM Heater lamp upper main
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor sub HL_US Heater lamp upper sub
SW-A Setting value when 60 - 89g/m2 is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
SW-B Set value when 90 - 105g/m2 is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on
60 - 89g/m 2 or 90 - 105g/m2 which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
(Example) When 60 - 89g/m2 is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.
<List of destination groups>
Group Destination
Group A Japan China AB_B
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch
Group C Europe U.K. AUS AB_A
43-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in
each operation mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
3) Press [OK] key. trouble may be occur.
Default value
Setting
range
A HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black and white plain paper duplex TH_UM set 70 - 240 200 205 210 210
value
B HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black and white plain paper duplex TH_US set 70 - 240 200 205 210 210
value
C PLAIN PAPER BW DUP APP CNT Black and white plain paper duplex applying 0 - 60 0
number of sheets
D HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black and white heavy paper duplex TH_UM set 70 - 240 220
value
E HL_US HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black and white heavy paper duplex TH_US set 70 - 240 220
value
F HEAVY PAPER BW DUP APP CNT Black and white heavy paper duplex applying 0 - 60 0
number of sheets
<Code descriptions>
Group Destination
43-20
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environmental correction
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-1) in each paper mode.
Section NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
Operation/Procedure individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
trouble may be occur.
Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1C change/1sec change
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
Default value
Setting
range
A HL_UM READY LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in ready 1 - 99 55 60 60
standby under LL environment
B HL_US READY LL Correction value for TH_US set value in ready 1 - 99 55 60 60
standby under LL environment
C HL_UM PLAIN BW LL Correction value for black and white plain paper 1 - 99 55
TH_UM set value under LL environment
D HL_US PLAIN BW LL Correction value for black and white plain paper 1 - 99 55
TH_US set value under LL environment
E WARMUP FUMON HL_US T LL Correction value for fusing motor previous rotation 1 - 99 5 50 50
start TH_UM set value under LL environment
F WARMUP FUMOFF T LL Correction value for fusing motor previous rotation 1 - 99 50
completion time under LL environment
G WARMUP END TIME LL Correction value for warm-up complete time under 1 - 99 80
LL environment
H HL_UM HEAVY LL Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value 1 - 99 55
under LL environment
I HL_US HEAVY LL Correction value for heavy paper TH_US set value 1 - 99 55
Default value
Setting
range
J HL_UM OHP LL Correction value for OHP TH_UM set value under 1 - 99 55
LL environment
K HL_US OHP LL Correction value for OHP TH_UM set value under 1 - 99 55
LL environment
L HL_UM E-STAR LL Correction value for TH_UM set value when 1 - 99 55
preheating under LL environment
M HL_US E-STAR LL Correction value for TH_US set value when 1 - 99 55
preheating under LL environment
N PRE-JOB LL Correction value for TH_UM set value when 1 - 99 55
restoring from preheating under LL environment
O HL_UM WARMUP_120L LL Correction value for TH_UM set value when 1 - 99 55 60 60
warming up of 120C or less under LL environment
P HL_US WARMUP_120L LL Correction value for TH_US set value when warming 1 - 99 55 60 60
up of 120C or less under LL environment
Q LO_WARMUP_TIME_LL Correction value for O - P applying time (Timer from 1 - 99 50
Ready Complete) under LL environment
R HL_UM WARMUP 120H LL Correction value for TH_UM set value when 1 - 99 55 60 60
warming up of 120C or above under LL
environment
S HL_US WARMUP_120H LL Correction value for TH_US set value when warming 1 - 99 55 60 60
up of 120C or above under LL environment
T HI_WU_TIME_LL Correction value for R - S applying time (Timer from 1 - 99 50
Ready Complete) under LL environment
U HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP_LL Correction value for FM previous rotation start 1 - 99 45
TH_UM when warming up of alpha C or above
V HI_WU_END_TIME_LL Correction value for Warm-Up complete time when 1 - 99 50
warming up of alpha C or above under LL
environment
W HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_1LL Correction value for Job enable time when warming 1 - 99 60
up of alpha C or above under LL environment
X HI_WARMUP_BORDER_LL Correction value for the value applying U - W under 1 - 99 50
LL environment
Y LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_1LL Correction value for Job enable TH_UM temperature 1 - 99 55 60 60
when warming up of alpha C or less under LL
environment
Z JOBEND_FUMON_TIME_LL Correction value for after rotation time at Job end 1 - 99 50
AA HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_2LL Correction value for Job enable TH_UM temperature 1 - 99 60
when warming up of alpha C or above under LL
environment
AB LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_2LL Correction value for Job enable TH_UM temperature 1 - 99 60
when warming up of alpha C or less under LL
environment
<Code descriptions>
Group Destination
43-21
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2 is saved.
Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1C change/1sec change
Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49

Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
Default value
Setting
range
A HL_UM READY HH Correction value for TH_UM set value in ready 1 - 99 50
standby under HH environment
B HL_US READY HH Correction value for TH_US set value in ready 1 - 99 50
standby under HH environment
C HL_UM PLAIN BW HH Correction value for black and white plain paper 1 - 99 50
TH_UM set value under HH environment
D HL_US PLAIN BW HH Correction value for black and white plain paper 1 - 99 50
TH_US set value under HH environment
E WARMUP FUMON HL_UM T HH Correction value for fusing motor previous rotation 1 - 99 50
start TH_UM set value under HH environment
F WARMUP FUMOFF T HH Correction value for fusing motor previous rotation 1 - 99 50
completion time under HH environment
G WARMUP END TIME HH Correction value for warm-up complete time under 1 - 99 50
HH environment
H HL_UM HEAVY HH Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50
under HH environment
I HL_US HEAVY HH Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50
J HL_UM OHP HH Correction value for OHP TH_UM set value under 1 - 99 50
HH environment
K HL_US OHP HH Correction value for OHP TH_US set value under 1 - 99 50
HH environment
L HL_UM E-STAR HH Correction value for TH_UM set value when 1 - 99 50
preheating under HH environment
M HL_US E-STAR HH Correction value for TH_US set value when 1 - 99 50
preheating under HH environment
N PRE-JOB HH Correction value for TH_UM set value when 1 - 99 50
restoring from preheating under HH environment
O HL UM WARMUP 120L HH Correction value for TH_UM set value when 1 - 99 50
warming up of 120C or less under HH
environment
P HL US WARMUP 120L HH Correction value for TH_US set value when 1 - 99 50
warming up of 120C or less under HH
environment
Q LO_WARMUP_TIME_HH Correction value for O - P applying time (Timer 1 - 99 50
from Ready Complete) under HH environment
R HL UM WARMUP 120H HH Correction value for TH_UM set value when 1 - 99 50
warming up of 120C or above under HH
environment
S HL US WARMUP 120H HH Correction value for TH_US set value when 1 - 99 50
warming up of 120C or above under HH
environment
T HI_WU_TIME_HH Correction value for R - S applying time (Timer from 1 - 99 50
Ready Complete) under HH environment
U HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP_HH Correction value for FM previous rotation start 1 - 99 50
TH_UM when warming up of alpha C or above
V HI_WU_END_TIME_HH Correction value for Warm-Up complete time when 1 - 99 50
warming up of alpha C or above under HH
environment
Default value
Setting
range
W HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_1HH Correction value for Job enable TH_UM 1 - 99 50
temperature when warming up of alpha C or
above under HH environment
X HI_WARMUP_BORDER_HH Correction value for the value applying U - W under 1 - 99 50
HH environment
Y LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_1HH Correction value for Job enable TH_UM 1 - 99 50
Z JOBEND_FUMON_TIME_HH Correction value for after rotation time at Job end 1 - 99 50
AA HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_2HH Correction value for Job enable TH_UM 1 - 99 50
AB LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_2HH Correction value for Job enable TH_UM 1 - 99 50
temperature when warming up of alpha C or less
<Code descriptions>
Group Destination
43-22
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-4) in each paper mode.
Section NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
Operation/Procedure individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
3) Press [OK] key.
Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1C change
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
Default value
Setting
range
A HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in black and 1 - 99 55
white plain paper duplex under LL environment
B HL_US PLAIN BW DUP LL Correction value for TH_US set value in black and 1 - 99 55
white plain paper duplex under LL environment
C PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in 1 - 99 50
black and white plain paper duplex under LL
environment
D HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in black and 1 - 99 55
white heavy paper duplex under LL environment
E HL_US HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for TH_US set value in black and 1 - 99 55
white heavy paper duplex under LL environment
F HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in 1 - 99 50
black and white heavy paper duplex under LL
environment
<Code descriptions>
Group Destination
43-23
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-4) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
3) Press [OK] key.
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
Default value
Setting
range
A HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_UM set value in black and 1 - 99 50
white plain paper duplex under HH environment
B HL_US PLAIN BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_US set value in black and 1 - 99 50
white plain paper duplex under HH environment
C PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT HH Correction value for applying number of sheets in 1 - 99 50
black and white plain paper duplex under HH
environment
D HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_UM set value in black and 1 - 99 50
white heavy paper duplex under HH environment
E HL_US HEAVY BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_US set value in black and 1 - 99 50
white heavy paper duplex under HH environment
F HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT HH Correction value for applying number of sheets in 1 - 99 50
black and white heavy paper duplex under HH
environment
<Code descriptions>
Group Destination
Setting Default
43-24 Item Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setting K HH_120_FUS_DUP Fusing temperature 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to set the correction of the tempera- _HL_US correction value
ture adjustment value of SIM 43-1 and 43- (SIM43-23 item B at
Warm-Up 120C or
4.
less under HH
Section environment) (when
Operation/Procedure in duplex mode)
L FUS_MOTOR(U) Fusing web motor 1 - 20 8
operation interval
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. M FUS_MOTOR(L) Fusing lower web 1 - 20 7
3) Press [OK] key. motor operation
The set value in step 2 is saved. interval
N POWER_ 100V Power 100V 1-3 1 *
NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an SET 110- voltage 110- 2
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how- 120V setting 120V
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a 220- 220- 3
trouble may be occur. 240V 240V

Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49 Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
* Each paper exit count: 1 count = 1 sheet change
Setting Default * Time setting: 1 count = 1sec change
range value
<Code descriptions>
A NN_120_FUS_DUP Fusing temperature 1 - 99 50
_HL_UM correction value HL_UM Heater lamp upper main
(SIM43-4 item A at HL_US Heater lamp upper sub
Warm-Up 120C or
less under NN * Item N initial value
environment) (when
Default value Destination
in duplex mode)
1 JAPAN
B LL_120_FUS_DUP Fusing temperature 1 - 99 50
_HL_UM correction value 2 U.S.A/CANADA/INCH/AB_B
(SIM43-22 item A at 3 EUROPE/UK/AUS/AB_A
Warm-Up 120C or
less under LL
environment) (when
in duplex mode) 43-31
C HH_120_FUS_DUP Fusing temperature 1 - 99 50
_HL_UM correction value
(SIM43-23 item A at Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the fusing
Warm-Up 120C or web cleaning motor.
less under HH
Section Fusing
environment) (when
in duplex mode) Operation/Procedure
D NN_120_FUS_DUP Fusing duplex paper 1 - 60 5 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
_CNT exit count under NN
Perform the fusing web cleaning motor drive.
environment
E LL_120_FUS_DUP Fusing duplex paper 1 - 60 10 2) When driving the fusing web cleaning motor is completed,
_CNT exit count under LL "COMPLETE" is displayed.
environment NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
F HH_120_FUS_DUP Fusing duplex paper 1 - 60 5 individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
_CNT exit count under HH
environment
G COOL_DOWN Cool down time 1 - 60 15
_HEAVY (heavy paper mode)
Fusing web unit
H COOL_DOWN Cool down time 1 - 60 30 installation detection Operation Remark
_OHP (OHP mode) state
I NN_120_FUS_DUP Fusing temperature 1 - 99 50 Fusing web unit not Not operate * During this operation,
_HL_US correction value installed the fusing web cleaning
(SIM43-4 item B at feed counter is counted
Fusing web unit Specified pulse
Warm-Up 120C or up.
installed number drive
less under NN
environment) (when
in duplex mode)
J LL_120_FUS_DUP Fusing temperature 1 - 99 50
_HL_US correction value
(SIM43-22 item B at
Warm-Up 120C or
less under LL
environment) (when
in duplex mode)
43-32
44
Function (Purpose) Used to set various items related to the
44-1
forcible operation of web cleaning when job
end. Purpose Setting
Section Fusing Function (Purpose) Used to set each correction operation func-
tion in the image forming (process) section.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. Section Process (Photo-conductor/Developing/
Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
(The selected item is highlighted.)
NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
trouble may be occur. individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
Setting Default trouble may be occur.
Item Display Item
range value Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe-
A JOB END Fusing web Enable 0-1 0 1 cially required.
COMP ACT motor forcible Disable 1
CHECK operation Setting Default
condition when Item/Display Content
range value
job end HV Enable/Disable setting of Normal Enable
B JOB END Interval of the print quantity 1 - 255 110 the high density process (Disable:
COMP ACT of compulsory action of the control in normal 0: NO)
INTERVAL fusing web motor at job end operation Reverse
C JOB END Number of forcible 1 - 10 6 HT Enable/Disable setting of (Enable: Enable
COMP ACT operations of the fusing the medium density 1: YES)
CNT web motor when job end process control in normal
operation
TC Enable/Disable setting of Enable
the transfer output
43-34 correction
Purpose Adjustment/Setting MD VG Enable/Disable setting of Enable
the membrane decrease
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the fusing grid voltage correction
lower web cleaning motor. MD LD Enable/Disable setting of Enable
Section Fusing the membrane decrease
laser power voltage
Operation/Procedure correction
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. MD EV Enable/Disable setting of Enable
Perform the fusing lower web cleaning motor drive. the membrane decrease
environment grid voltage
2) When driving the fusing lower web cleaning motor is com-
correction
pleted, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
MD_DL_EV Enable/Disable setting of Enable
NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an the membrane decrease
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how- environment discharge
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a quantity correction
trouble may be occur. TN_HUM Enable/Disable setting of Enable
the toner density
Fusing lower web unit humidity correction
installation detection Operation Remark TN_AREA Enable/Disable setting of Enable
state the toner density area
Fusing lower web unit Not operate * During this operation, correction
not installed the fusing web cleaning TN_LIFE Enable/Disable setting of Enable
Fusing lower web unit Specified pulse feed counter is counted the toner density life
installed number drive up. correction
TN_COV Enable/Disable setting of Enable
the toner density print
ratio correction
TN_PROCON Enable/Disable setting of Enable
the toner density process
control correction
TN_ENV Enable/Disable setting of Enable
the toner density
environment correction
TN_DRIP Enable/Disable setting of Enable
the toner density
correction unconditional
supply
TN_SPEND Enable/Disable setting of Enable
toner compulsory
consumption mode
Setting Default
range value
PRT_HT Enable/Disable setting of Normal Enable Purpose Setting
the half-tone process (Disable: Function (Purpose) Used to set the conditions of the high den-
control printer correction 0: NO) sity process control operation.
feedback Reverse
TN_INTERMITTENT Enable/Disable setting of (Enable: Enable
Section Process
the intermittent supply 1: YES) Operation/Procedure
TN_ABSOLUTE Enable/Disable setting of Enable 1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
the unconditional supply
TN_PROFIT_RETURN Enable/Disable setting of Enable
the differential return 3) Press [OK] key.
correction NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
MD LD EV Enable/Disable setting of Enable individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
the environment laser
power correction for the
OPC drum membrane
decrease correction
Setting Default
MD LD HV Enable/Disable setting of Enable Item/Display Content
range value
the process control laser
A PCS_K TARGET Image density sensor 1 - 255 210
power correction
sensitivity adjustment
target value
B LED_K OUTPUT Initial current level black 1 - 255 40
sensor LED light emitting
44-2
quantity set value in the
Purpose Adjustment/Setting image density sensor
adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image
C PCS ADJSTMENT Adjustment error 1 - 255 10
density sensor.
LIMIT allowance level in the
Section Process sensor sensitivity
Operation/Procedure adjustment
D DRUM GROUND The difference between 0 - 255 0
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment is executed auto-
DIF the max. value and the
matically.
min. value of the OPC
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is dis- drum surface detection
played. level is in the allowable
If the adjustment is not executed normally, "ERROR" is displayed. range in detection of one
circle of the OPC drum
Setting Default surface.
Item/Display Content E BIAS_BK Developing bias 0 - 255 0
range value
A PCS_K LED ADJ Image density sensor 1 - 255 40 STANDARD DIF reference value in the
sensitivity (light quantity) high density process
adjustment value control
B PCS_K DARK Image density sensor 0 - 255 0 F BIAS PATCH Patch-forming developing 1 - 255 45
dark voltage INTERVAL bias voltage interval
(voltage difference) in the
C PCS_K GRND Belt surface detection 0 - 255 0
high density process
level when the
control
adjustment of item A is
completed G K_PAT TARGET Toner patch density target 1 - 255 45
ID value (black) in the high
D PCS_K DRUM OPC drum surface 0 - 255 0
density process control
MAX detection level Max.
value H HV BK_GROUND Error judgment criterion 1 - 255 29
LIMIT for the difference between
E PCS_K DRUM MIN OPC drum surface 0 - 255 0
the max. level and the
detection level Min. value
min. level of the OPC
F PCS_K DRUM DIF OPC drum surface 0 - 255 0
drum surface detection
detection level differential
(Item D - Item E)
Error name Error content 44-6

Sensor adjustment PCS_K LED ADJ error
Purpose Adjustment
abnormality The adjustment target level is not reached by
three times of retry operations. Function (Purpose) Used to execute the high density process
Surface scanning PCS_K GRND error control forcibly.
abnormality The difference between the max. value and Section Process
the min. value of the OPC drum surface
detection level is out of the specified range in Operation/Procedure
detection of one circle of the OPC drum Press [EXECUTE] key.
surface. In case of a normal completion, the result is saved.
In case of an abnormal completion, "ERROR" is displayed.
(Refer to the table below.)
In case of an ERROR, the previous correction data are saved.
Result display Content description
COMPLETE Normal complete
ERROR Abnormal end
INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption
Details of error display Content description

BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Image density sensor sensitivity adjustment
error
K_HV_ERR Density process control operation error
TIMEOUT_ERR Density process control operation time-out
44-9
Purpose Operation data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the result data of the high
density process control operation.
Section Process (Photo-conductor/Developing/
Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
Select a target display mode with [CPY/PRN],[OTHER] keys.
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content Display range Default value
CPY/ P (PROCON) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density process control mode GB: 230 - 850 GB: 535
PRN GB/DV data (K) (Actual output voltage level / Base voltage level) DV: 0 - 700 DV: 395
N (NORMAL) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** Actual operation mode GB: 230 - 850 GB: 535
M (MIDDLE) GB/DV data (K) (Actual output voltage level / Base voltage level) DV: 0 - 700 DV: 395
N (NORMAL) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** Actual operation mode GB: 230 - 850 GB: 525
L (LOW) GB/DV data (K) (Actual output voltage level / Base voltage level) DV: 0 - 700 DV: 395
OTHER TN/TC TN HUD AREA Toner density correction humidity area 1 - 14 9
TN HUD DATA Toner density correction humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
TC TMP AREA Transfer voltage correction temperature area 1-9 4
TC TMP DATA Transfer voltage correction temperature AD value 0 - 1023 0
TC HUD AREA Transfer voltage correction humidity area 1-9 4
TC HUD DATA Transfer voltage correction humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
MD HUD AREA OPC drum membrane decrease correction humidity area 1 - 14 9
MD HUD DATA OPC drum membrane decrease correction humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
DRUM MD K STEP OPC drum membrane decrease correction STEP number display 0-4 0
(K)
MD K DRUM COUNTER OPC drum membrane decrease correction counter (rotation 0 - 20 0
distance)
VG MD K REVISE(VG) Display of MC correction voltage for OPC drum membrane 0 - 255 0
L*** M*** decrease
LD MD K REVISE(LD) OPC drum membrane decrease laser power correction display 0 - 255 0
L*** M***
LD EV MD K REVISE(LD EV) Display of drum membrane decrease environment laser power -128 - 128 0
L*** M*** correction
LD HV MD K REVISE(LD HV) Display of high-density process control laser power correction -128 - 128 0
L*** M***
LD ALL MD K REVISE(LD ALL) Display of laser power total correction amount -128 - 128 0
L*** M***
HV MD K REVISE(HV) OPC drum membrane environment MC correction voltage display 0 - 255 0
L*** M***
CP MD K REVISE(CP) OPC drum membrane / Environment MC correction voltage 0 - 255 0
L*** M*** display
CRUM DESTINATION CRUM destination data stored in the PCU PWB of the machine
MODEL TYPE Model type of the machine 0-1 0
CRUM DEST_K Crum destination data
CNT PROCON COUNT HV High density process control execution number 0 - 99999999 0
PROCON COUNT HT Half-tone process control execution umber 0 - 99999999 0
44-12 44-16
Purpose Operation data display Purpose Operation data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner density control
high density process control and the image data.
density sensor. Section
Section Process (Photo-conductor/Developing) Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) The toner density control data are displayed.
Select a display mode with [TARGET] [PATCH] keys.
Display
Item/ Display Default range
Mode Content
Display range value TONER DEN_LT Current toner density sensor output value 1 - 255
TARGET ADK_SL Development characteristics -9.99 - 0 (final value)
(K) gradient coefficient 9.99 TONER DEN_ST Current toner density control reference
(High density process value display (the value including all the
control operation) correction values)
ADK_INT Development characteristics -999.9 - 0
(K) intercept level 999.9
Display
(High density process Item/Display Content
range
control operation 0V)
AUTO DEVE Toner density sensor output value when 1 - 255
TARGET High density process control 0.00 - 0
SIM25-02 is executed and completed.
(K) target density level (K) 255.00
ALL Actual toner density control value
PATCH n-1 High density process control 0 - 255 0
(including all the correction factors)
1-5 nth time patch density level
AREA Toner density control correction value for -127 -
1 (n=1-5)
the temperature and the humidity 127
n-2 Patch data nth time patch 2 0 - 255 0
HUD Toner density control correction value for
(n=1-5)
a change in the humidity
PRINT RATE Toner density control correction value for
(n=1-5)
the document print ratio
PROCON Toner density control correction value for
(n=1-5)
the result of the high density process
PATCH n-1 Patch data nth time patch 1 0 - 255 0
control
6-10 (n=6-10)
LIFE Toner density control correction value for
the developer life
(n=6-10)
(n=6-10) Display
n-4 Patch data nth time patch 4 0 - 255 0 range
(n=6-10) AUTO DEVE VO Toner density sensor control voltage 1 - 255
value when SIM25-02 is executed and
completed.
ALL VO Actual toner density sensor control
44-14 voltage value (including all the correction
factors)
Purpose Operation data display AREA VO Toner density sensor control voltage -127 -
Function (Purpose) Used to display the output level of the tem- correction value for the temperature and 127
perature and humidity sensor. the humidity
HUD VO Toner density sensor control voltage
Section Process (Photo-conductor/Developing)/
correction value for a change in the
Fusing temperature and the humidity
Operation/Procedure PRINT RATE VO Toner density sensor control voltage
The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine correction value for the document print
temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed. ratio
PROCON VO Toner density sensor control voltage
Item/Display Content Display range correction value for the high density
TH_RA A/D value and temperature of Temperature: 0 - 255.0C process control result
the ambient air sensor A/D value: 0 - 255 LIFE VO Toner density sensor control voltage
correction value for the developer life
TH_CL A/D value and temperature Temperature: 0 - 255.0C
around the process unit ENV VO Toner density sensor control voltage
A/D value: 0 - 255
correction value for the environment with
TH_DV A/D value and temperature Temperature: 0 - 255.0C
a high humidity
around the developing unit A/D value: 0 - 255
PROFIT_RETURN Control voltage correction value for the
HUD_RA A/D value and humidity of the Humidity: 0 - 100.0% _VO difference between the reference value
ambient humidity sensor A/D value: 0 - 255 and the sensor value
HUD_DV A/D value and humidity Humidity: 0 - 100.0%
around the developing unit A/D value: 0 - 255
Display
TH_UM A/D value and temperature of Temperature: 0 - 255C Item/Display Content
range
the heat roller center A/D value: 0 - 1023
AUTO DEVE Area in the auto Display of the humidity 1 - 14
temperature sensor
AREA development area when SIM25-2 is
TH_US A/D value and temperature of Temperature: 0 - 255C
adjustment executed
the heat roller edge A/D value: 0 - 1023
AREA Current area Current humidity area
temperature sensor
display
44-21 44-25
Purpose Adjustment/Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to register the target value of the half- Function (Purpose) Used to set the calculating conditions of the
tone process control. correction value for the half tone process
Section Process control.
Operation/Procedure Section Process
Press [EXECUTE] key. Operation/Procedure
The half tone process control target is set and the operation data 1) Select a target adjustment density level with [] [] key on the
are displayed. touch panel.
Display Content
3) Press [OK] key.
COMPLETE Normal complete
ERROR BLACK SENSOR Image density sensor sensitivity adjustment NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
ADJUSTMENT error individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
[K] High density process control error ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
OTHER Other errors trouble may be occur.
Setting Default
range value
44-22 A HIGHTLIGHT Correction point in the 1 - 17 7
POINT low density area
Purpose Operation data display B MID FIELD POINT Correction point in the 1 - 17 12
Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner patch density medium density area
level in the half tone process control opera- C LOW FIELD Input dither difference in 0 - 255 10
tion. DITHER DEF the low density area
D MID FIELD DITHER Input dither difference in 0 - 255 10
Section Process
DEF the medium density area
Operation/Procedure E LOW POINT COEF Correction amount low 0 - 100 100
1) The toner patch density level made in the half tone process density point correction
control operation is displayed. coefficient
F MID POINT COEF Correction amount 0 - 100 100
Item/Display Content medium density point
BASE_n Belt substrate data (n = 1 - 6) correction coefficient
ID_n Patch data display (n = 1 - 6)
44-26
44-24 Purpose Adjustment/Setting
Purpose Operation data display Function (Purpose) Used to execute the half tone process con-
Function (Purpose) Used to display the correction target and trol compulsory.
the correction level in the half tone process Section Process
control operation. Operation/Procedure
Section Process Press [EXECUTE] key.
Operation/Procedure The half tone process control is performed and the operation data
1) Select the display category with [NEXT] key. are displayed.
Category Item/Display Content COMPLETE Normal complete

Coefficient [LOW FIELD] Coefficient value of the ERROR BLACK SENSOR Image density sensor sensitivity adjustment
approximate equation in the ADJUSTMENT error
low density area [K] High density process control error
[MID FIELD] Coefficient value of the OTHER Other errors
approximate equation in the
medium density area
Reference [SENSOR_TARGET] Half tone process control
value reference value 44-27
Correction [S_VALUE] Half tone process control
value correction value Purpose Data clear
For printer [PRINTER_S_VALUE] Printer half tone process Function (Purpose) Used to clear the correction data of the half
control correction value tone process control.
[PRINTER_BASE_ Printer half tone process
Section Process
DITHER_VALUE] control reference dither value
[PRINTER_AUTO_ Printer auto density Operation/Procedure
HT_VALUE] adjustment correction value 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Previous [BEFORE S_VALUE] Previous half tone process 2) Press [YES] key.
correction value control value
The correction data of the half tone process control are
cleared.
44-28
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
conditions.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of setting with [] [] key on the touch NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
panel. individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) trouble may be occur.
Default
Mode Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Process control A INITIAL YES When warm-up after clearing the Enable 0-1 0 0
Enable/Disable NO counter of the OPC drum and the Disable 1
setting developer unit
B SW ON When supplying the power (when Process control Disable 1-3 1 3
clearing shut-off.) BK process control Enable 2
Pixel count judgment 3
(Judgement is based on the
setting value of item K, L.)
C TIME After passing the specified time from Process control Disable 1-3 1 3
leaving READY continuously (Time can BK process control Enable 2
be changed by INTERVAL TIME) Pixel count judgment 3
(Judgement is based on the
setting value of item I.)
D HUM_LIMIT HUM judgment is made when turning Process control Disable 1-2 1 2
ON the power and after passing TIME. BK process control Enable 2
Process control E HUM The temperature and humidity in side Process control Disable 1-2 1 2
Enable/Disable the machine are monitored only during a BK process control Enable 2
setting job for every 2 hours (set by item L).
When the changes in the temperature
and the humidity are greater than the
specified level (the set value of item L) in
comparison with the previous process
control.
F REV1 YES The accumulated traveling distance of Enable 0-1 0 0
NO the photo-conductor unit reaches a Inhibit 1
certain level after supplying the power.
G REV2_BK YES The accumulated traveling distance of Enable 0-1 0 0
NO the photo-conductor unit reaches a Inhibit 1
certain level after previous execution of
density correction
H REFRESH YES YES/NO setting of the display of the Key operation display YES 0-1 0 1
MODE NO manual process control key by key Key operation display NO 1
operations
Process control I DAY When the next warm-up if there is no job 0: Disable of the specified 0 - 999 0 1
conditions after a job after passing the specified days judgment
setting days from execution of the previous 1 - 999: 1 - 999 days 1 - 999
process control passing
J PIX_RATIO_BK Magnification ratio setting (%) of the BK toner count specified value 1 - 999 10
entry of 100 corresponds to 1k of A4 5% print.
K INTERVAL TIME Passing time setting of "TIME" (h: hour) 1-255 12
(1-255: 1-255h passed)
L HUM HOUR Interval setting of the temperature and humidity monitoring time of 1 - 24 2
"HUM" (h: hour)
M HUM_DIF Area difference specified value when compared with the execution of 1-9 2
the previous process control of "HUM”
N BK_RATIO Setting of [REV2_BK] OPC drum traveling distance, specified value of 1 - 999 40
print quantity (Entry of 20 corresponds
to 100,000mm.)
O HT_DIF Bias variation difference value used for HT process control execution 1-255 60
judgment
44-29
46
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the
46-2
process control during a job.
Purpose Adjustment
Section Process
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in each
Operation/Procedure
monochrome copy mode.
panel. Section
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key. 1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch
panel.
Default 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Item/Display Content Setting range
value * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
A COPY During copy job 0-2 0: No execution 2 item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
B PRINTER During print job 1: HV only 2
2: HV  HT 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
C FAX During FAX print 2
job To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW"
D SELF PRINT During self print 2 mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density
in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the
HV: High density process control adjustment value.
HT: Half tone process control When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den-
sity is decreased.
44-37
Setting Default
Purpose Adjustment/Setting Item/Display Content
range value
Function (Purpose) Used to set the development bias correc- A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
tion level in the continuous printing opera- HIGH 1 - 99 50
tion. B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
Section
C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure HIGH 1 - 99 50
1) Select a set target color with the touch panel. D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
2) Select a target item with [] [] buttons. PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. E TEXT/PHOTO Text/ LOW 1 - 99 50
Photograph HIGH 1 - 99 50
F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
NOTE: HIGH 1 - 99 50
When the print density is varied in the continuous printing opera- G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
tion, this simulation is used. HIGH 1 - 99 50
H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
Item/ Default Variable
Display value range HIGH 1 - 99 50
Current DV less than 300[v] A 0 0-5
Bias voltage 300[v] or more, less B 0 (*1)
than 450[v]
450[v] or more C 0
46-4
Time (T) from Less than 10 [sec] & D 0 0-12 Purpose Adjustment (color scanner mode)
termination of after process control (*2) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image
continuous JOB
send mode.
outputs to start 10 [sec] or more, less E 0
of the next than 60 [sec] Section
output 60 [sec] or more, less F 0 Operation/Procedure
operation than 240 [sec] 1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch
240 [sec] or more G 0 panel.
<Use example> 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
(*1) The default of A/B/C is "0" and this function is set to OFF.
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
When 10 sheets are printed in the multi copy and the 10th output is
lighter than the first sheet, set the values of 1 - 5. 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
The greater the value is, the darker the density of the 10th sheet or When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
later. increased, and vice versa.
(*2) The correction amount is adjusted by the length of the leaving time.
When (*1) is 1 - 5, the greater the value of (*2) is, the greater the Setting Default
density of printing is. Item/Display Content
range value
A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
46-5
This adjustment result affects the image send mode, the copy
Purpose Adjustment (monochrome scanner mode) mode, and the fax mode.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
send mode. increased, and vice versa.
Section
Setting Default
Operation/Procedure Item Button Display Content
range value
1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
panel. SIDEA: LOW exposure
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. adjustment
(Low density side)
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
B SCAN DSPF scanner 1 - 99 47
SIDEA: LOW mode exposure
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) adjustment
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is (Low density side)
increased, and vice versa. C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
LOW exposure
Setting Default adjustment
Item/Display Content (Low density side)
range value
A AUTO TEXT Automatic/Text 1 - 99 50 D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 52
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50 SIDEA: HIGH exposure
adjustment
C TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
(High density side)
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
E SCAN DSPF scanner 1 - 99 52
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
SIDEA: HIGH mode exposure
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50 adjustment
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50 (High density side)
F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 52
HIGH exposure
adjustment
46-8 (High density)
Purpose Adjustment (color scanner mode) A DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
SIDEB: LOW exposure
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image send mode color adjustment
balance RGB. (Low density side)
Section B SCAN DSPF scanner 1 - 99 47
SIDEB: LOW mode exposure
Operation/Procedure
adjustment
1) Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch (Low density side)
panel. C FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
2) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch LOW exposure
panel. adjustment
(Low density side)
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 50
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) SIDEB: HIGH exposure
The color balance can be adjusted separately for the low density adjustment
area and the high density area. (High density side)
E SCAN DSPF scanner 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the
SIDEB: HIGH mode exposure
target color is increased, and vice versa. adjustment
(High density side)
Default
Item/Display Content F FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 50
value
HIGH exposure
A LOW DENSITY POINT Low density correction amount 50
adjustment
B HIGH DENSITY POINT High density correction amount 50 (High density)
G BALANCE DSPF color 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: R balance R
H BALANCE DSPF color 1 - 99 50
46-9 SIDEB: G balance G
Purpose Adjustment (DSPF mode) I BALANCE DSPF color 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: B balance B
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the SPF mode scan image
density (copy, image send mode)
Section
1) Select an adjustment target mode with [OC] and [DSPF] keys Purpose Adjustment
on the touch panel. (DSPF-installed model only) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density (in each
2) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch copy mode).
panel. Section
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each 1) Select an adjustment target mode with the touch panel key.
panel.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. Item/Display Density level (Point) Setting range Default value
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500
L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500
increased, and vice versa.
N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500
5) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the self print image is
O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500
printed.
P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper is selected by priority. If there is no Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected.
Item Content
AUTO1 Automatic 1 46-19
AUTO2 Automatic 2
Purpose Setting
TEXT Text
TEXT/PRT PHOTO Text/Printed Photo Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of doc-
TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph ument density scanning (copy, image send
PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo mode).
PHOTO Photograph Section
MAP Map Operation/Procedure
Select an item to be set with touch panel.
Item/Display Density level (Point) Setting range Default value
When an item is selected, it is highlighted and the setting change is
A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500 saved.
B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500
C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500 Item/Display Content Set value Default value
D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500 AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE2
E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500 MODE2
F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500 AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500 Stop (for copy) STOP/
H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500 PRESCAN
I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500 AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON/OFF ON
J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500 Stop (for FAX)
K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500 AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500 Stop (for scanner) STOP/
PRESCAN
M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500
AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500
setting NORMAL
O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500
SHARP
P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL/PART FULL
Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500
NOTE:
MODE 1 High gamma (high contrast images)

46-16 MODE 2 Normal gamma
Purpose Adjustment STOP The image density in 3 - 7mm area at the lead edge is
scanned, and the output image density is determined
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density manually.
according to the scanned density. (The output image density
Section is even for all the surface.)
Operation/Procedure REALTIME The densities of the document width are scanned
sequentially, and the output image density is determined
according to the density in each area of document. (The
panel. output image density may not be even for all the surface.)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome auto
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each FULL mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x the document
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. width. This is not related to the PRESCAN mode.
AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome auto
PART mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x 100mm width.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is This is not related to the PRESCAN mode.
4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the self print image is
printed.
46-23
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected. Purpose Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction of copy
Item/Display Density level (Point) Setting range Default value
high density section (High density tone gap
A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500
supported).
B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500
C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500
Section
D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500 Operation/Procedure
E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500 1) Select a target item of setting with [] [] keys on the touch
F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500 panel.
G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500
Setting Default
Setting Default Item Display Content
Item/Display Content range value
range value
C COPY: DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF back 1 - 250 196
A K 0 K engine highest density 0-1 1
(SIDE2) surface)
(0: ENABLE correction mode: Enable
1: DISABLE) D SCAN: OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
1 K engine highest density
correction mode: Disable E SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF 1 - 250 196
(SIDE1) front surface)
B BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET correction of the maximum F SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF 1 - 250 196
density (SIDE2) back surface)
G FAX: OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
* When tone gap is generated in the high density area, set item A H FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196
to "0". (SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface)
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone I FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196
(SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface)
gap is better.
* To increase the density in the high density area further, set item
A to "1".
The tone gap may occur in high density part. 46-37
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproducibility of the
46-24 scan image color document (copy, image
Purpose Adjustment send mode).
Function (Purpose) Copy density adjustment (Auto adjustment) Section
Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target item with [] [] keys on the touch panel.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The adjustment pattern is printed out. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 4) Press [YES] key.
The automatic adjustment of copy density is executed, and This simulation is used to adjust the reproducibility of red and yel-
then the adjustment result pattern of the copy mode is printed. low images when copy a color document of red and yellow images
3) Press [OK] key. in the monochrome mode.
The half tone correction target registration is processed. Item/Display Content Setting range Default value
4) The half-tone correction execution menu is displayed. Press A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 172
[EXECUTE] key. B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 828
Half-tone correction is executed. When [RESULT] button is
* B-Ratio: The value of gray making setting (B) is obtained from
pressed after completion of correction, the data of the half-tone
the formula below.
correction can be checked.
1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio
Display Content When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, the values are set to the initial
COMPLETE Normal completion values (default).
ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black sensor abnormality When the adjustment values of items A and B are decreased, the
ADJUSTMENT
copy density of yellow images is increased. When the adjustment
[K] Half-tone correction [K] abnormality
values are increased, the density is decreased.
OTHER Other errors
When the adjustment value of item A is decreased and the adjust-
ment value of item B is increased, the copy density of red images is
increased. When the adjustment value of item A is increased and
46-32 the adjustment value of item B is decreased, the copy density is
decreased.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproducibility of the
document background density in the auto-
46-39
matic copy mode.
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send
Operation/Procedure
images.
panel. Section
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 1) Select a target item with [] [] keys on the touch panel.
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
background and the low density image is increased. When the 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background Input large numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input small
and the low density image is decreased. numeric value to decrease moire.
Setting Default Setting Default

Item Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
A COPY: OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 A 200 x 100 [DPI] OFF 200 x 100 [DPI] 0-2 1
B COPY: DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF front 1 - 250 196 half tone OFF
(SIDE1) surface) B 200 x 200 [DPI] OFF 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
half tone OFF
Setting Default
range value
C 200 x 200 [DPI] ON 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1 Purpose Adjustment/Setting
half tone ON Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
D 200 x 400 [DPI] OFF 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1 (Fine)
half tone OFF
Section
E 200 x 400 [DPI] ON 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
half tone ON Operation/Procedure
F 400 x 400 [DPI] OFF 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1 1) Set the original on the original table.
half tone OFF 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
G 400 x 400 [DPI] ON 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1
half tone ON
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
H 600 x 600 [DPI] OFF 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
half tone OFF and the scanned document image is outputted.
I 600 x 600 [DPI] ON 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
half tone ON Setting Default
range value
A AUTO Fine/Automatic 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
46-40 C EXPOSURE2 Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
Purpose Adjustment/Setting D EXPOSURE3 Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
F EXPOSURE5 Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
(Collective adjustment of all the modes)
G AUTO H_TONE Fine/Automatic/ 1 - 99 50
Section Half tone
Operation/Procedure H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50
Half tone
1) Set the original on the original table.
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Half tone
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set Half tone
and the scanned document image is outputted. K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50
Half tone
Setting Default L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50
Item/Display Content Half tone
range value
A EXPOSURE Used to adjust the FAX send 1 - 99 50 M EXECUTE AUTO Print Fine/Auto 1- 1 1
LEVEL(ALL) image density. (Collective MODE EXP1 mode Fine/ 12 2 (AUTO)
adjustment of all the modes) Exposure 1
EXP2 Fine/ 3
Exposure 2
EXP3 Fine/ 4
46-41 Exposure 3
EXP4 Fine/ 5
Exposure 4
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. EXP5 Fine/ 6
(Normal) Exposure 5
Section AUTO Fine/ 7
H_TONE Automatic/
Operation/Procedure halftone
1) Set the original on the original table. EXP1 Fine/ 8
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. H_TONE Exposure 1
/Half tone
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
EXP2 Fine/ 9
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set H_TONE Exposure 2
and the scanned document image is outputted. /Half tone
EXP3 Fine/ 10
Setting Default H_TONE Exposure 3
range value /Half tone
A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50 EXP4 Fine/ 11
B EXPOSURE1 Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 H_ONE Exposure 4
C EXPOSURE2 Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 /Half tone
D EXPOSURE3 Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 EXP5 Fine/ 12
E EXPOSURE4 Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 5
F EXPOSURE5 Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 /Half tone
G EXECUTE AUTO Print Auto 1-6 1 1
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-
MODE EXP1 mode Exposure 1 2 (AUTO)
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
EXP2 Exposure 2 3
and press [EXECUTE] key.
EXP3 Exposure 3 4
EXP4 Exposure 4 5
EXP5 Exposure 5 6
To check the adjustment density level of items A - F, set the docu-

ment and set the setting value of item G according to items A - F,
46-43 46-44
Purpose Adjustment/Setting Purpose Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(Super Fine) (Ultra fine)
Section Section
1) Set the original on the original table. 1) Set the original on the original table.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
and the scanned document image is outputted. and the scanned document image is outputted.
Setting Default Setting Default

Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
A AUTO Super Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50 A AUTO Ultra Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 B EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 1
D EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 C EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 2
F EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 D EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE Super Fine 1 - 99 50 3
/Auto/Half tone E EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
H EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 4
H_TONE /Half tone F EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
I EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 5
H_TONE /Half tone G AUTO H_TONE Ultra Fine/Auto/Half 1 - 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 tone
H_TONE /Half tone H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
K EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 1/Half tone
H_TONE /Half tone I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 2/Half tone
H_TONE /Half tone J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Super Fine 1- 1 1 3/Half tone
MODE mode /Auto 12 (AUTO) K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
EXP1 Super Fine 2 4/Half tone
/Exposure 1 L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
EXP2 Super Fine 3 5/Half tone
/Exposure 2 M EXECUTE AUTO Print Ultra Fine/ 1- 1 1
EXP3 Super Fine 4 MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO)
/Exposure 3 EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 2
EXP4 Super Fine 5 Exposure 1
EXP5 Super Fine 6 Exposure 2
AUTO Super Fine 7 Exposure 3
H_TONE /Auto EXP4 Ultra Fine/ 5
/Half tone Exposure 4
EXP1 Super Fine 8 EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 6
H_TONE /Exposure 1 Exposure 5
/Half tone AUTO Ultra Fine/ 7
EXP2 Super Fine 9 H_TONE Auto/Half
H_TONE /Exposure 2 tone
/Half tone EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 8
EXP3 Super Fine 10 H_TONE Exposure
H_TONE /Exposure 3 1/Half tone
EXP4 Super Fine 11 H_TONE Exposure 2
H_TONE /Exposure 4 /Half tone
EXP5 Super Fine 12 H_TONE Exposure 3
H_TONE /Exposure 5 /Half tone
H_TONE Exposure 4
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu- /Half tone
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L, EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 12
and press [EXECUTE] key. H_TONE Exposure 5
/Half tone

46-45 46-47
Purpose Adjustment/Setting Purpose Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. Function (Purpose) Used to set the compression rate of copy
(600dpi). and scan images (JPEG).
Section Section
1) Set the original on the original table. 1) Select a target item with [] [] keys on the touch panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 3) Press [OK] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set The set value is saved.
and the scanned document image is outputted.
Operation Setting Default
Setting Default mode range value
range value (COLOR) A COPY LOW Low com- 0 0 (LOW)
A AUTO 600dpi/Auto 1 1 - 99 50 (Document (C) pression
B EXPOSURE1 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 filing (COLOR (Color)
C EXPOSURE2 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 mode)) MIDDLE Medium 1
D EXPOSURE3 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 com-
pression
E EXPOSURE4 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
(Color)
F EXPOSURE5 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
HIGH High 2
G AUTO H_TONE 600dpi/Auto 1 - 99 50
com-
/Half tone 1
pression
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 (Color)
/Half tone
LOWER Super 3
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 low com-
/Half tone pression
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 (Color)
/Half tone COPY B COPY LOW Low com- 0 0 (LOW)
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 (GRAY) (G) pression
/Half tone (Copy/ (Gray)
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 Document MIDDLE Medium 1
/Half tone filing com-
M EXECUTE AUTO Print 600dpi/Auto 1- 1 1 (Monochrome pression
MODE EXP1 mode 600dpi/ 12 2 (AUTO) half-tone (Gray)
Exposure 1 mode)) HIGH High 2
EXP2 600dpi/ 3 com-
Exposure 2 pression
EXP3 600dpi/ 4 (Gray)
Exposure 3 LOWER Super 3
EXP4 600dpi/ 5 low com-
Exposure 4 pression
EXP5 600dpi/ 6 (Gray)
Exposure 5 PUSH SCAN C SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 0
AUTO 600dpi/Auto/ 7 (COLOR) (C) 1 com- (MIDDLE
H_TONE Half tone (Scanner (*1) pression 1)
EXP1 600dpi/ 8 (Color mode)) mode 1
H_TONE Exposure 1 Low com-
/Half tone pression
EXP2 600dpi/ 9 MIDDLE Medium 1
H_TONE Exposure 2 2 com-
/Half tone pression
mode 2
EXP3 600dpi/ 10
Medium
H_TONE Exposure 3
com-
/Half tone
pression
EXP4 600dpi/ 11
MIDDLE Medium 2
H_TONE Exposure 4
3 com-
/Half tone
pression
EXP5 600dpi/ 12
mode 3
H_TONE Exposure 5
High
/Half tone
com-
pression
Operation Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
mode range value
HEAVY Heavy paper
PUSH SCAN D SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 0
ED1 Multivalued error diffusion
(GRAY) (G) 1 com- (MIDDLE
(Scanner (*1) pression 1)
(Monochrome mode 1 Density level Setting Default value
half-tone Low com- Item/Display
(Point) range HEAVY ED1
mode)) pression A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500 467
MIDDLE Medium 1 B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500 466
2 com-
C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500 469
pression
D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500 470
mode 2
Medium E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500 474
com- F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500 478
pression G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500 496
MIDDLE Medium 2 H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500 507
3 com- I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500 504
pression J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500 473
mode 3 K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500 448
High L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500 397
com-
M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500 382
pression
N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500 385
*1: Setting of compression rate for images when the image com- O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500 483
pression rate is set to "Medium" in the user mode. P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500 500
NOTE: When the compression rate is increased, the HDD capacity Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500 500
in the document filing mode is decreased. On the other hand, how-
ever, the image quality of some documents may be remarkably
reduced.
46-52
46-51 Function (Purpose) Used to set the gamma default for the copy
mode heavy paper and the image process
mode. (The set values of SIM46-51 are set
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma for the copy to the default values.)
mode heavy paper mode and the image
Section
process mode (manual adjustment).
Operation/Procedure
Section
1) Select an item to be set to the default with the touch panel key.
Operation/Procedure
To reset the adjustment values of all the items, select [ALL].
1) Select a target adjustment mode with the touch panel key
[PAPER/DITHER].
3) Press [YES] key.
2) Select a target adjustment density level with [] [] key on the
touch panel. 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key.
46-60
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the self print image is out-
putted. Purpose Adjustment/Setting
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper is selected by priority. If there is no Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the automatic copy mode
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected. sharpness.
When the image density is insufficient or a background copy is Section
made in heavy paper copy, change this adjustment value to adjust Operation/Procedure
the image density.
1) Select a target item of the adjustment with [] and [] keys on
the touch panel.
2) Enter the value corresponding to the sharpness level (filter
process mode) with 10 key.
3) Press [OK] key.
Item Display Content Setting range Default value Remark

A SCREEN FILTER H Sharpness (filter) adjustment for the High enhancement 1 3 Applied only to
LEVEL L automatic copy mode and dot-pattern Low enhancement 2 (Auto) the automatic
AUTO images Auto 3 copy mode.
B AUTOMODE SOFT Sharpness (filter) adjustment for the SOFT 1 2 (CENTER) Applied only to
FILTER LEVEL CENTER automatic copy mode CENTER 2 the automatic
HIGH HIGH 3 copy mode.
C B/W COPY OFF Soft filter application ON/OFF setting for OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON monochrome copy mode images ON 1
D COLOR OFF Soft filter application ON/OFF setting for OFF 0 1 (ON)
PUSH:RGB ON push-scan color mode images ON 1
E B/W PUSH OFF Soft filter application ON/OFF setting for OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON push-scan monochrome mode images ON 1
46-61 Setting Default
range value
A SW_ACS ACS judgment 0-1 1
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the area separation recogni- reference area
tion level in the image send mode (color, adjustment
gray, auto exposure mode). B TEXT_IMAGE SIM display item: Text/ 0-6 3
Section Image judgment
priority level select
Operation/Procedure
C TEXT_BLANK SIM display item: Text/ 0-6 4
1) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch Blank judgment
panel. priority level select
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. D HT_LV Dot area judgment 0-6 1
threshold value
3) Press [OK] key.
adjustment
NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an E AE_AREA_LV SIM display item: 0-6 3
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how- Color AE judgment
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a target area adjustment
trouble may be occur. value
F AE_LV_CC AE background 0-8 4
When the adjustment value is changed greatly from the ini-
detection division
tial value, an image quality trouble may occur. result adjustment: For
color copy
Setting Default
Item/Display Content G AE_LV_MC AE background 0-8 4
range value
detection division
A SEGMENT: Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0 result adjustment: For
SWITCH [TXT ON Text on dot monochrome copy
SCR]
H AE_LV_CS AE background 0-8 4
B SEGMENT: Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0 detection division
SWITCH [LINE SCR] line screen result adjustment: For
C SEGMENT: Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0 color scan
SWITCH [SMALL SCR] Dot in a small area I AE_LV_MS AE background 0-8 4
D SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3 detection division
ADJUST [BK TXT 1] adjustment: result adjustment: For
Black text 1 monochrome scan
E SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3 J AE_JUDGE_LV_L Color AE background 0-4 0
ADJUST [CL TXT 1] adjustment: _U density threshold
Color text 1 adjustment value
F SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3 (lower limit)
ADJUST [BK TXT 2, CL adjustment: K AE_JUDGE_LV_L Color AE background 0 - 10 0
TXT 2] Black text 2, Color _O density threshold
text 2 adjustment value
G SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3 (upper limit)
ADJUST [BK/CL] adjustment: L AE_JUDGE_LV_C Color AE background 0 - 10 5
Chroma/Achroma detection level
judgment adjustment (chroma)
H SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3 M AE_ONOFF ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON)
ADJUST [TXT ON BG] adjustment: _CC OFF OFF select: For OFF 1
Text on background color copy
I SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3 N AE_ONOFF ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON)
ADJUST [SCR] adjustment: _MC OFF OFF select: For OFF 1
Dot monochrome
copy
O AE_ONOFF ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON)
_CS OFF OFF select: For OFF 1
46-62 color scan
Purpose Adjustment/Setting P AE_ONOFF ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON)
_MS OFF OFF select: For OFF 1
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the monochrome
ACS, the area separation, the background scan
image process, and the automatic expo- Q BLANK_JUDGE Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0
sure mode. _LV_L adjustment
Section (brightness)
R BLANK_JUDGE Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0
Operation/Procedure _LV_C adjustment (chroma)
1) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch S MODE0_UNDER Mode 0 photographic 0-6 0
panel. paper system mode
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. select threshold value
T MODE1_UNDER Mode 1 photographic 0-6 0
3) Press [OK] key.
paper system mode
NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an select threshold value
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how- U MODE5_UNDER Mode 5 photographic 0-6 0
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a paper system mode
trouble may be occur. select threshold value
V MODE6_UNDER Mode 6 photographic 0-6 0
When the adjustment value is changed greatly from the ini-
paper system mode
tial value, an image quality trouble may occur. select threshold value
46-63 46-90
Purpose Adjustment/Setting Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the low den- Function (Purpose) Used to set the process operation of high-
sity area of a scan image. compression PDF images.
Section Scan mode Section
1) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch 1) Select a target adjustment mode with [TEXT], [COLOR] and
panel. [BG LAYER] keys.
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. 2) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key.
3) Press [OK] key. 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the 4) Press [OK] key.
background and the low density image is increased. When the The set value is saved.
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
and the low density image is decreased. Setting Default
Item Button Display Content
range value
Setting Default A TEXT GLYPH Text handling 0-2 0
range value SENSITIVITY selection
A COLOR PUSH: TEXT/ Text print 1-9 3 B BG SW FOR Line handling 0-1 0
PRINTED PHOTO (Color PUSH) FINDLINES selection
B COLOR PUSH: TEXT Text (Color PUSH) 1-9 3 C HOR Line detection 0-2 0
C COLOR PUSH: Printed photo 1-9 5 FINDLINES SW SW (H)
PRINTED PHOTO (Color PUSH) D VERT Line detection 0-2 0
D COLOR PUSH: Photograph 1-9 5 FINDLINES SW SW (V)
PHOTOGRAPH (Color PUSH) E FGCOLOR Text color 0-3 0
E COLOR PUSH: TEXT/ Text photograph 1-9 3 INDEXING SEL number
PHOTO (Color PUSH) adjustment SW
F COLOR PUSH: MAP Map (Color PUSH) 1-9 5 F FGCOLOR Text color 0-4 2
INDEXING ADJ adjustment
A COLOR LUMINANCE Luminance 0-4 2
ADJUSTMENT adjustment
46-74 B CHROMA Chroma 0-2 1
INTENT selection
Purpose Adjustment
C NEUTRAL Neutral 0-2 0
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density and the ADJUSTMENT adjustment
printer density. (Automatic adjustment) D R-RATIO Gray scale 0- 299
Section ADJUSTMENT adjustment (R) 1000
E G-RATIO Gray scale 0- 587
Operation/Procedure
ADJUSTMENT adjustment (G) 1000
In this simulation, SIM46-24 and SIM67-24 are continuously per- A BG BG LAYER Speed priority 0-2 1
formed. LAYER INTENT 1 setting
To execute both the copy density adjustment (automatic adjust- B BG LAYER Image quality 0-2 1
ment) and the printer density adjustment (automatic adjustment), it INTENT 2 priority setting
is advisable to use this simulation for effective operation.
The high density process control is performed, and then the
copy density adjustment pattern is printed.
48
2) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table,
48-1
The copy density automatic adjustment is performed, and then
the adjustment result pattern is printed. Purpose Adjustment
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image magnifica-
The printer density adjustment pattern is printed. tion ratio (in the main scanning direction
and the sub scanning direction).
4) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table,
and press [EXECUTE] key. Section
The print density automatic adjustment is performed, and then Operation/Procedure
the adjustment result pattern is printed. 1) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch
5) Press [OK] key. panel.
The half-tone correction target registration is executed. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
NOTE: The adjustment result will not become valid until the both 3) Press [OK] key.
adjustment procedures are executed completely. The set value is saved.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification
ratio is increased.
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item A, C or E corre-
sponds to a change of about 0.02% in the copy magnification ratio.
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item B or D corresponds
to a change of about 0.1% in the copy magnification ratio.
Setting Default 48-6
range value
Purpose Adjustment
A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the rotation speed of each
(CCD) motor.
B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50 Section
Operation/Procedure
(CCD)
C SPF(MAIN) DSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50 1) Select the adjustment target speed with [MONO] and [HEAVY]
magnification ratio adjustment keys on the touch panel.
(Main scan) 2) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch
D SPF(SUB) DSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50 panel.
(Sub scan)
E SPFB(MAIN) DSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50 4) Press [OK] key.
magnification ratio adjustment The set value is saved.
(Main scan)
When the adjustment value is increased, the speed is increased,
and vice versa. A change of 1 in the adjustment value corresponds
to a change of about 0.1% in the speed.
48-5 Default value
Purpose Adjustment Setting 62 75
Mode Item Display Content
range CPM CPM
Function (Purpose) Used to correction the scan image magnifi-
model model
cation ratio (in the sub scanning direction).
MONO A RRM Resist motor 1 - 99 50 50
Section correction
Operation/Procedure value
B DM Drum motor 1 - 99 50 50
1) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch
correction
panel.
value
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. C DVM Developing 1 - 99 50 50
3) Press [OK] key. motor
correction
The set value is saved.
value
When the image magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is D TRM Resist front 1 - 99 50 50
adjusted with SIM48-1, and a different magnification ratio is speci- motor
fied, and the image magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform correction
this adjustment. value
When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in reduction, E VPM Vertical 1 - 99 50 50
change the adjustment value in the high speed mode. When there transport motor
correction
is an error in the image magnification ratio in enlargement, change
value
the adjustment value in the low speed mode.
F POM1 Paper exit 1 - 99 50 50
motor 1
Setting Default
Item/Display Content correction
range value
value
A MR (HI) Scanner motor (High speed) 1 - 99 50
G POM2 Paper exit 1 - 99 50 50
B MR(MID) Scanner motor (Reference speed) 1 - 99 50
motor 2
C MR(LO) Scanner motor (Low speed) 1 - 99 50 correction
D SPF(HI) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50 value
(High speed) H FSM Fusing motor 1 - 99 50 50
E SPF(MID) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50 correction
(Reference speed) value
I FUSER Fusing speed 1 - 99 53 55
Scan speed
SETTING select timing
HEAVY A RRM Resist motor 1 - 99 50 50
Reference speed
Unit correction
HI MID LO
value
OC 372.0mm/s 186.0mm/s 93.0mm/s
B DM Drum motor 1 - 99 50 50
DSPF 372.0mm/s 186.0mm/s – correction
value
C DVM Developing 1 - 99 50 50
motor
correction
value
D TRM Resist front 1 - 99 50 50
motor
correction
value
E VPM Vertical 1 - 99 50 50
transport motor
correction
value
F POM1 Paper exit 1 - 99 50 50
motor 1
correction
value
Default value Item/Display Content
Setting 62 75 ESCP_FONT ESC/P font
Mode Item Display Content
range CPM CPM PDL_FONT PDL font
model model ANIMATION Animation data
HEAVY G POM2 Paper exit 1 - 99 50 50 IMAGE_DATA MFP ASIC data
motor 2 WEB HELP WEB help
correction
UNICODE UNICODE table
value
ACRE (BOOT) ACRE Boot section
H FSM Fusing motor 1 - 99 50 50
ACRE (MAIN) ACRE Main section
correction
value ACRE_DATA ACRE table
I FUSER Fusing speed 1 - 99 45 30 List of error displays in case of abnormal end
SETTING select timing
J RRM RRM 0 - 255 50 50 Item/Display Content
START acceleration CONF Configuration data
start timing
ICUM ICU Main section former half
K RRM RRM 0 - 255 40 35
ICUBM ICU Boot section main
END acceleration
ICUCN ICU Boot section CN
end timing
LANG Language support data program (General term)
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe- GRAPH Graphic data for L-LCD
cially required. SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly differ- PCUB PCU Boot section
ent from the default value, a jam, paper wrinkle, or image PCUM PCU Main section
quality trouble may occur. LCC4B Side LCC (A4) Boot section
LCC4M Side LCC (A4) Main section
LCC3B Side LCC (A3) Boot section
LCC3M Side LCC (A3) Main section
FINHB 100 sheets staple finisher Boot section
49 FINHM 100 sheets staple finisher Main section
SCUB SCU Boot section
49-1 SCUM SCU Main section
DSPFB DSPF Boot section
Purpose
DSPFM DSPF Main section
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the firmware update. FAXB FAX1 Boot section
Section FAXM FAX1 Main section
Operation/Procedure ESCP ESC/P font
PDL PDL font
1) Save the firmware to the USB memory.
ANIME Animation data
2) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. (Use USB I/F of the IMGDT Image ASIC data
operation panel section.) WEBHP WEB help
3) Select a target firmware file for update with the touch panel. UNICD UNICODE table
4) Select a target firmware. ACREB ACRE Boot section
Press [ALL] key to select all the Firmware collectively. ACREM ACRE Main section
ACRED ACRE table
6) Press [YES] key.
The selected firmware is updated.
When the operation is normally completed, "COMPLETE" is 49-3
displayed. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is dis- Purpose
played. Function (Purpose) Used to install and update the Operation
Manual data stored in the HDD.
CONFIG Configuration data Section
ICU (MAIN) ICU Main section former half Operation/Procedure
ICU (BOOTM) ICU Boot section main 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
ICU (BOOTCN) ICU Boot section CN
* When the USB is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGE E-
LANGUAGE Language support data program (General term)
MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] key is
GRAPHIC Graphic data for L-LCD
pressed, the display is shifted to the folder select menu 1.
SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD
PCU (BOOT) PCU Boot section
2) Press the folder button of the operation manual data. (The dis-
PCU (MAIN) PCU Main section
play is shifted to the operation manual update menu.)
A4LCC (BOOT) Side LCC (A4) Boot section The current version and the update version are displayed.
A4LCC (MAIN) Side LCC (A4) Main section 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
A3LCC (BOOT) Side LCC (A3) Boot section [EXECUTE] key is highlighted, and [YES] [NO] keys becomes
A3LCC (MAIN) Side LCC (A3) Main section active from gray out.
FIN100 (BOOT) 100 sheets staple finisher Boot section
4) When [YES] key is pressed, the selected operation manual is
FIN100 (MAIN) 100 sheets staple finisher Main section
updated.
SCU (BOOT) SCU Boot section
SCU (MAIN) SCU Main section
When update is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis-
DSPF (BOOT) DSPF Boot section
played. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed.
DSPF (MAIN) DSPF Main section
FAX (BOOT) FAX1 Boot section
FAX(MAIN) FAX1 Main section
Setting Default
range value
Purpose Install N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to install and update the watermark scanning correction value
data stored in the HDD. O direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
print area value
Section correction
P DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure value value
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
2) Select the button of the folder to perform the watermark value
R DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
update.
value
3) The current version and the update version are displayed. S DENB-LCC LCC correction 1 - 99 50
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. value
5) Press [YES] key. T DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 50
value
The selected watermark is updated.
A. (RRC-A) Timing from starting document scanning to specifying
the image lead edge reference is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
* When the value is decreased, the timing is advanced. When
50 the value is increased, the timing is delayed.
B - F. (RRC-B) Timing of paper (resist roller ON) for the image posi-
tion on the transfer belt is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
50-1
* When the value is decreased, the timing is delayed. When the
Purpose Adjustment
value is increased, the timing is advanced.
Function (Purpose) Copy image position, image loss adjust- G. (LEAD) The lead edge image loss amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
ment step)
Section * When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.
Operation/Procedure H. (SIDE) The side image loss amount is adjusted.
1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch * When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.
panel. (0.1mm/step)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. I. (DEN-A) The paper lead edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
Set the items other than RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the step)
default. * When the value is increased, the void is increased.
RRCA: Image lead edge reference position adjustment J. (DEN-B) The paper rear edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
LEAD: Lead edge image loss adjustment step)
SIDE: Side image loss adjustment * When the value is increased, the void is increased.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) K. (FRONT/REAR) The void amount on the right and left edges of
paper is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
Setting Default
range value
A Lead edge RRCA Document lead 0 - 99 50
adjustment edge reference 50-2
value position (OC) Purpose Adjustment
B RRCB-CS12 Resist Standard 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and
C RRCB-CS34 motor Tray 1 - 99 50
ON the image loss (simple adjustment).
D RRCB-LCC LCC 1 - 99 50
E RRCB-MFT timing Manual 1 - 99 50 Section
adjust- paper
Operation/Procedure
ment feed
1) Set item A (L1) and item B (L2) to 0.
2) Place a rule on the left edge of the document table, and make
G Image loss LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 30
area loss area setting
a copy at a magnification ratio of 400%.
H setting SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20 3) Measure the length of L1 and L2 on the copied image in the
value area adjustment unit of 0.1mm (referring to the figure below). Enter the adjust-
I Void area DENA Lead edge void 1 - 99 30 ment values of L1 x 10 and L2 x 10. Be sure to enter the both
adjustment area adjustment adjustment values of L1 and L2.
J DENB Rear edge void 1 - 99 30 L1: Distance from the lead edge of the copied image to 10mm
area adjustment
scale.
K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 30
REAR area adjustment L2: Distance from the paper lead edge to the copy image lead
L Off-center OFFSET OC document off- 1 - 99 50
edge.
adjustment _OC center adjustment
M Magnifi- SCAN SCAN sub 1 - 99 50
cation ratio _SPEED scanning
correction _OC magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
Setting Default
L1 Item/Display Description
range value
E Void area DENA Lead edge void 1 - 99 30
Paper lead adjustment area adjustment
edge (When the
adjustment value is
increased, the void
is increased.)
F DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjustment (When
the adjustment
value is increased,
the void is
L2 increased.)
400% enlargement copy G FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 30
REAR amount adjustment
(When the
Fig. 1 adjustment value is
increased, the void
is increased.)
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
5) Make a copy at the magnification ratio of 100%, and adjust the Same as the adjusted items of SIM50-01 except for A and B.
rear edge void. The values adjusted with A and B are reflected to the document
lead edge reference position (RRC-A) of SIM50-01 and all the
Item/Display Description
Setting Default paper lead edge positions (RRCB-**).
range value
All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
A Actual L1 Distance from the 0 - 999 -
measurement image lead edge to
value the scale of 10mm.
(Platen 400%, 50-5
0.1mm increment)
Purpose Adjustment
B L2 Distance from the 0 - 999 0
paper lead edge to Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print lead edge image
the image lead edge position. (PRINTER MODE)
(0.1mm increment)
Section
C Image loss LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 30
area setting loss amount setting Operation/Procedure
value (When the 1) Select a target adjustment item (DEN-C) with [] [] key on the
adjustment value is touch panel.
increased, the
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
image loss is
increased.) 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
D SIDE Side edge image 0 - 99 20 The set value is saved, and the adjustment check pattern is
loss amount setting printed.
(When the
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
adjustment value is
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
increased, the
image loss is in the standard adjustment value range.
increased.) Standard reference value: 3.02.0mm
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by
about 0.1mm.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
A DEN-C Used to adjust the print lead 1 - 99 30 Adjustment value too align the print lead edge for the printer. When the
edge image position. adjustment value of this item is decreased by 1, the printer print start position
(PRINTER MODE) in the paper transport direction is shifted to the lead edge by 0.1mm.
B DEN-B Rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 30 Void amount generated at the paper rear edge. When the adjustment value
of item B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1, the print area adjustment value in the
sub scanning direction for the paper transport direction is decreased by
0.1mm.
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area 1 - 99 30 Adjustment of the void amount generated on the left and right edges of
adjustment paper. When the adjustment value is increased, the void amount is
increased.
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge void 1 - 99 50 Fine adjustment value of each paper feed source for the adjustment value of
area adjustment correction DEN-B
value
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
Setting Default
Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
J DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
K MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 Adjustment pattern print conditions setting
L PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
feed
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
M DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO selection No 1
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the adjustment
value is decreased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by about 0.1mm.
Setting Default
range value
Purpose Adjustment K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and front surface
the image loss (DSPF mode). magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub
Section Automatic document feeder scan)
Operation/Procedure
Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing
is delayed.
panel.
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
is increased.
Item E - H: When a shadow image appears on the rear edge,
increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
range value
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
position
50-7
adjustment (CCD)
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50 Purpose Adjustment
document scan Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and
position
the image loss (DSPF mode) (simple
adjustment (CCD)
adjustment).
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
loss (SIDE1) edge image loss Section Automatic document feeder
amount amount setting Operation/Procedure
D setting FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20
panel.
setting
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 30 2) Set item A (L4) and item B (L5) to 0.
(SIDE1) edge image loss 3) Set the magnification ratio to 200%, and make a copy in the
amount setting DSPF duplex mode.
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 30
loss (SIDE2) edge image loss
G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
setting
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 20
amount setting
I OFFSET_SPF1 DSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
document off-
center adjustment
J OFFSET_SPF2 DSPF back 1 - 99 50
surface document
off-center
adjustment
4) Measure the size of the printed image. Enter the actual mea-
Setting Default
surement value of distance a (DSPF) to L4 and L5 in the unit of Item/Display Content
range value
0.1mm.
A BK-MAG Main scan print 60 - 140 100
(Adjustment value "1" for 0.1mm) magnification ratio BK
L4: Distance a (DSPF front surface: 200%) (unit: 0.1mm) B MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
L5: Distance a (DSPF back surface: 200%) (unit: 0.1mm) value (Manual paper feed)
C MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value (Tray 1)
D MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value (Tray 2)
E MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value (Tray 3)
F MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value (Tray 4)
G MAIN-LCC Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value (Large capacity tray)
H MAIN-ADU Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value (Duplex)
(NOTE) If the adjustment
items A - G are not properly
adjusted, this adjustment
cannot be executed
properly.
Distance "a" I SUB-MFT Resist motor Manual 1 - 99 50
ON timing paper feed
J SUB-CS12 adjustment Standard 1 - 99 50
K SUB-CS34 cassette 1 - 99 50
L SUB-LCC LCC 1 - 99 50
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.) M SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
N MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
Setting Default O PAPER MFT Tray Manual 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
range value selection paper feed
A L4 Distance (SPF 200%, 0.1mm 0 - 999 - CS1 Tray 1 2
unit) from the front surface
CS2 Tray 2 3
image lead edge to the scale
CS3 Tray 3 4
of 10mm.
CS4 Tray 4 5
B L5 Distance (SPF 200%, 0.1mm 0 - 999 -
unit) from the back surface LCC LCC 6
image lead edge to the scale P DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
of 10mm. NO selection No 1
C LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead edge 0 - 99 20
(SIDE1) image loss amount setting Item A: When the set value is increased, the BK image magnifica-
D FRONT_REAR Front surface side image 0 - 99 20 tion ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set
(SIDE1) loss amount setting value is decreased, the image magnification ratio is decreased.
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear edge 0 - 99 30 Item B - H: When the adjustment value is increased, it is shifted to
(SIDE1) image loss amount setting the front frame side. When the adjustment value is decreased, it is
F LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead edge 0 - 99 30 shifted to the rear frame side.
(SIDE2) image loss amount setting
All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
G FRONT_REAR Back surface side image 0 - 99 20
(SIDE2) loss amount setting
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear edge 0 - 99 20
(SIDE2) image loss amount setting 50-12
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss Purpose Adjustment
is increased. Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scan image off-center
All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change position adjustment. (The adjustment is
made separately for each scan mode.)
Items C - H are linked with items C - H of SIM50-06.
Section
Operation/Procedure
50-10 1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch
panel.
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image off-center posi-
tion. (The adjustment is made separately 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
for each paper feed section.) When the adjustment value is increased, the image position is
shifted to the rear frame side. When the adjustment value is
Section
decreased, it is shifted to the front frame side.
Operation/Procedure
1step = 0.1mm
panel.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
range value
Purpose Adjustment
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image loss adjustment
B SPF(SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50 of scanned images in the FAX or image
center adjustment send mode.
C SPF(SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50 Section
center adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment mode with [FAX] or [SCANNER]
key.
panel.
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value

FAX send A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
B amount setting FRONT_REAR (OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
C OC TRAIL_EDGE (OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
E amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
F SPF SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
H amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
I SPF SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
When image A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
send mode B amount setting FRONT_REAR(OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
(Except for C OC TRAIL_EDGE(OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
FAX and D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
copy) amount setting
E FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
F SPF SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
H amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
I SPF SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
A-I: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased.
1step = 0.1mm
50-28
(1) Image loss off-center sub scan direction image
Purpose Adjustment magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to automatically adjust the image 1) Select [OC ADJ] on the touch panel.
loss, void area, image off-center, and image
2) Select the paper tray to be used for the adjustment pattern
magnification ratio.
print.
Section 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed.
Operation/Procedure 4) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with 5) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned.
SIM50-28.
6) Press [OK] key.
* Print image magnification ratio adjustment
(2) Main scan direction image magnification ration adjustment
(Main scanning direction) (Print engine section)
1) Select [BK-MAG ADJ] on the touch panel.
* Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section)
2) Select the paper tray to be used for the adjustment pattern
* Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
print.
* Scan image off-center adjustment
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed.
* Print area (void area) adjustment (Print engine section)
4) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
* Copy image position, image loss adjustment
5) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned.
Item/Display Content 6) Press [OK] key.
OC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image (3) Image loss off-center sub scan direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (Document table magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF mode)
mode)
1) Select [SPF ADJ] on the touch panel.
BK-MAG ADJ Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
adjustment 2) Select the adjustment mode; SIDE 1 (Front surface) or SIDE 2
SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image (Back surface) or ALL (Both modes).
magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF mode) 3) Select the paper tray to be used for the adjustment pattern
SETUP/PRINT ADJ Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each print.
paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
RESULT Adjustment result display
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the DSPF.
DATA Adjustment operation data display
When ALL is selected in the procedure 2), perform procedures 51
5) and 6) for both of the front surface and the back surface.
7) Press [OK] key. 51-2
(4) Print lead edge adjustment image off-center Purpose Setting
(Each paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflec-
1) Select [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] on the touch panel.
tion amount) on paper by the main unit and
2) Select the adjustment mode; LEAD (print lead edge adjust- the DSPF resist roller.
ment) or OFF SET (image off-center) or ALL (both modes).
Section
3) Select the paper feed tray for the adjustment pattern print.
Operation/Procedure
(Two or more trays can be selected.)
1) Select a target adjustment mode with [REGI1] or [REGI2] or
[ENGINE] keys.
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
(When RSPF model)
Select a target adjustment mode with [SIDE1] or [SIDE2] or
When two or more paper feed trays are selected in the proce- [ENGINE] keys.
dure 3), perform procedures 5) and 6) for the adjustment pat-
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] buttons.
tern printed with each paper.
7) Press [OK] key.
RESCAN: The adjustment pattern is scanned.
REPRINT: The adjustment pattern is printed again.
RETRY: Shifts to the top menu.
Setting Default
Display/Item Content
range value
A REGI1 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN _HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN _LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/HIGH)
F RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/LOW)
G RANDOM_THIN _ HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/HIGH)
H RANDOM_THIN _LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/LOW)
A REGI2 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/HIGH)
F RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/LOW)
G RANDOM_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/HIGH)
H RANDOM_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/LOW)
A ENGINE TRAY1(S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 55
(Plain paper/Small size)
B TRAY1(L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 55
(Plain paper/Large size)
C TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER(S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 55
(Heavy paper/Small size)
D TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER(L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 55
(Heavy paper/Large size)
E TRAY2(S) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 55
F TRAY2(L) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 55
G TRAY2 HEAVY PAPER(S) Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 55
Setting Default
Display/Item Content
range value
H ENGINE TRAY2 HEAVY PAPER(L) Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 55
I TRAY3 PLAIN PAPER(S) Main unit cassette 3 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 55
J TRAY3 PLAIN PAPER(L) Main unit cassette 3 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 55
K TRAY3 HEAVY PAPER1(S) Main unit cassette 3 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 55
L TRAY3 HEAVY PAPER1(L) Main unit cassette 3 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 55
M TRAY4 PLAIN PAPER(S) Main unit cassette 4 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 55
N TRAY4 PLAIN PAPER(L) Main unit cassette 4 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 55
O TRAY4 HEAVY PAPER1(S) Main unit cassette 4 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 55
P TRAY4 HEAVY PAPER1(L) Main unit cassette 4 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 55
Q MANUAL PLAIN PAPER(S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 55
R MANUAL PLAIN PAPER(L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 55
S MANUAL HEAVY PAPER(S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 55
T MANUAL HEAVY PAPER(L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 55
U MANUAL OHP Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (OHP) - 1 - 99 55
V ADU PLAIN PAPER(S) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 55
W ADU PLAIN PAPER(L) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 55
X ADU HEAVY PAPER(S) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 55
Y ADU HEAVY PAPER(L) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 55
Z A4LCC A4LCC/deflection adjustment value - 1 - 99 55
AA A3LCC(S) A3LCC/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 55
AB A3LCC(L) A3LCC/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 55
AC A3LCC HEAVY PAPER(S) A3LCC/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 55
AD A3LCC HEAVY PAPER(L) A3LCC/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 55
<Small size, Large size>

Small size: The paper length in the transport direction is shorter than the LT size (216mm).
Large size: The paper length in the transport direction is longer than the LT size (216mm).
When the adjustment value is increased, the warp amount is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp amount is
decreased.
(When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the stop timing is changed by 0.1mm.)
53 When the above operation is nor performed normally, "ERROR" is

displayed and. When the above operation is completed normally,
"COMPLETE" is displayed.
53-6
Purpose Adjustment 1 TRAYVOLMAX Tray size volume maximum value
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the detection level of the 2 TRAYVOLA4R Tray volume A4R size adjustment value
DSPF document width. 3 TRAYVOLA5R Tray volume A5R size adjustment value
4 TRAYVOLMIN Tray size volume minimum value
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width.
The maximum width detection level is recognized. Purpose Adjustment
3) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the A4R width. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the DSPF document size
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. width sensor.
The A4R width detection level is recognized. Section Automatic document feeder
5) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the A5R width. Operation/Procedure
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch
The A5R width detection level is recognized. panel.
7) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
8) Press [EXECUTE] key. 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Item/Display
range value
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
A AD_MAX Max. width position 0 - 1023 66
required.)
B AD_P1 A4R width position 0 - 1023 438
C AD_P2 A5R width position 0 - 1023 699 Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the scan-
D AD_MIN Min. width position 0 - 1023 893
ner control operation. (SOFT SW)
Section
Operation/Procedure
53-8
55-3
Purpose Adjustment
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document lead edge ref- required.)
erence and the DSPF mode document
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the control-
scan position.
ler operation. (SOFT SW)
Section Automatic document feeder
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
Select an adjustment item with [AUTO] [MANUAL] key.
<AUTO: Document lead edge reference (RRCA) adjustment> 55-10
(Auto adjustment)
Purpose Setting
1) Set a sheet of black paper of A4 or 11"x 8.5" on the document
table. Function (Purpose) Used to set the stamp text.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment is performed and the Section
adjustment value is saved.) Operation/Procedure
1) Select an set target item with [] and [] keys on the touch
Setting Default panel.
range value
MEASUREMENT Document lead edge 0-255 -
DISTANCE measurement distance (0.1mm unit) 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
reference position Setting Default
range value
NOTE: The AUTO mode must not be used. A 1ST DIGIT 1st digit (Left edge) * Refer 1
B 2ND DIGIT 2nd digit to the
C 3RD DIGIT 3rd digit input
<MANUAL: DSPF mode document scan position adjustment>
D 4TH DIGIT 4th digit values
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. below.
E 5TH DIGIT 5th digit
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) F 6TH DIGIT 6th digit (Right edge)
G TYPE PATTERN Print Edging 0-2 0 1
Setting Default
Item/Display Content 1 com- type
range value
PATTERN posing OR 1
A ADJUST DSPF mode document scan 1 - 99 5 method
2 process
VALUE position adjustment (Scanner
type
stop position adjustment)
PATTERN Non- 2
• When the adjustment value is increased, the scanner stop posi- 3 delete-
composing
tion in the DSPF mode is shifted to the right.
type
• When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the position is
shifted by 0.1mm.
Print Empty A B C D E F G H I J K L M
Input 32 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77
55 Print
Input
N
78
O
79
P
80
Q
81
R
82
S
83
T
84
U
85
V
86
W
87
X
88
Y
89
Z
90
55-1 Print 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially Input 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57
required.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the engine
control operations. (SOFT SW)
Section
Operation/Procedure
5) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
56 Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
56-1 displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Purpose Backup <Data list outside the backup targets>
(EEPROM/SRAM)
Function (Purpose) Used to transport data between HDD - MFP
PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the
PWB Type Content NOTE
PWB.)
Controller Machine serial No.
Section Product key information
Operation/Procedure Various counter Copy counter/FAX
send counter etc.
1) Select a target content of data transfer.
Trouble history
2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
PCU Machine serial No.
Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1) is executed. Various counter Maintenance counter
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is Machine adjustment execute
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. history
Trouble history
ALL  HDD All the memory contents are transferred to the HDD. SCU Various counter Maintenance counter
HDD  ALL The HDD contents are transferred to all the Trouble history
memories.
EEPROM  HDD Transfer from EEPROM to HDD (HDD)
HDD  EEPROM Transfer from HDD to EEPROM
SRAM  HDD Data transfer from SRAM to HDD. Classification Content NOTE
(Including the FAX memory) Japanese FEP User dictionary
When the FAX memory or an option memory Job end list Job end list display data
(memory for FAX) is installed, the contents in the (The image send series
memory for FAX are also transferred to HDD. include the preserved job list.)
HDD  SRAM Transfer from HDD to SRAM Log Job log Read from WEB is
(including the FAX memory) enable.
When the FAX memory or an option memory New N/A • Print history information
(memory for FAX) is installed, the contents of the • JAM history information
FAX memory are also transferred to HDD. • Trouble history information
• Same position continuous
NOTE: The backup data must not be installed to another machine. jam count value
If installed, the adjustment data will be overwritten and a • Charging information
trouble may be generated. • Life information
Operation manual E-manual
Document filing Document filing data
56-2 NOTE: The backup data must not be installed to another machine.
Purpose Data backup If installed, the adjustment data will be overwritten and a
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. trouble may be generated.
SRAM, and HDD (including user authenti-
cation data and address data) to the USB
memory. 56-3
Section Purpose Data backup
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to backup the document filing data to
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. the USB memory.
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel. Section
<IMPORT> Operation/Procedure
From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, SRAM, HDD 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
<EXPORT> 2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
From EEPROM, ESRAM, HDD To USB MEMORY <IMPORT>
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, SRAM, HDD
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed <EXPORT>
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is From EEPROM, SRAM, HDD To USB MEMORY DEVICE
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
(Machine with the DSK installed) Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel. displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
<IMPORT>
From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SRAM, HDD
<EXPORT>
From EEPROM, SRAM, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE
3) Enter the password with 10-key.
4) Press [SET] key.
Setting Default
range value
Purpose Data backup C NUMBER 8BIT COLUMN address 0-4 0 2
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the JOB log data to the OF 9BIT width 1
USB memory. COLUMN 10BIT 2
Section 11BIT 3
12BIT 4
Operation/Procedure
D TWR 2CLOCK TWR set value 0-3 0 1
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. SETTING 3CLOCK 1
2) Press [JOB LOG EXPORT] key. VALUE 4CLOCK 2
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. 5CLOCK 3
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed. E TRAS 4CLOCK TRAS set value 0-3 0 2
SETTING 5CLOCK 1
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is VALUE 6CLOCK 2
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
7CLOCK 3
F TRC 6CLOCK TRC set value 0-4 0 3
SETTING 7CLOCK 1
VALUE 8CLOCK 2
60 9CLOCK 3
10CLOCK 4
G TRCD 2CLOCK TRCD set value 0-3 0 1
60-1 SETTING 3CLOCK 1
Purpose Operation test/check VALUE 4CLOCK 2
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations (read/write) 5CLOCK 3
of the MFP PWB memory. H TRP 2CLOCK TRP set value 0-3 0 1
SETTING 3CLOCK 1
Section VALUE 4CLOCK 2
Operation/Procedure 5CLOCK 3
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. I TFRC 7CLOCK TFRC set value 0- 0 3
Start the test. SETTING 8CLOCK 13 1
VALUE - -
Result display Description 20CLOCK 1
OK Success 3
NG Fail J CAS CL=2 CAS latency 0-2 0 1
NONE Not installed (Including DIMM trouble) LATENC CL=2.5 1
INVALID Execution disable Y CL=3 2
K TOTAL NONE On-board DDR 0-2 0 1
NUMBER 128M total capacity 1
SLOT Description
OF BYTE
SLOT1 System memory (expansion) DIMM1
MBYTES 256M 2
SLOT2 System memory (standard) DIMM2 ON BYTE
SLOT3 Local memory (MFP expansion) DIMM4 BOARD
SLOT4 Local memory (MFP standard) DIMM3 DDR
L NUMBER NONE On-board DDR 0-2 0 1
OF ON 1CHIP bunk number 1
BOARD- SELECT
60-2 DDR 2CHIP 2
CS-BANK SELECT
Purpose (Do not use in the market.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the MFP
PWB on-board SDRAM.
Section
Operation/Procedure 61
panel. 61-1
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Purpose Operation test/check
3) Press [OK] key. Function (Purpose) Used to check the LSU polygon motor rota-
NOTE: Set to the default value. tion and laser detection.
Section LSU
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Operation/Procedure
range value
A SETTING DISABLE SDRAM DDR 0-1 0 0 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
ENABLE setting setting When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed.
change of On- In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed.
flag board
SPD Display Content
ENABLE DDR 1 LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG Polygon mirror rotation abnormality
setting
LSU TESTRESULT NG: K Laser abnormality (K)
of B or
later
B NUMBER 11BIT ROW address 0-2 0 2
OF ROW 12BIT width 1
13BIT 2
Default value
61-3
Setting 62 75
Purpose Adjustment/Setting Item/Display Content
range CPM CPM
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power model model
PR1200 A LASER Laser power 100 - 148 175
Section
POWER setting 213
Operation/Procedure MIDDLE middle
1) Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY], [PR600/ (BW1) speed /
FAX] and [PR1200] on the touch panel. BW1
B LASER Laser power
POWER setting
panel. MIDDLE middle
3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. (BW2) speed /
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) BW2
C LASER Laser power 148 148
When the laser power and the DUTY adjustment value are
POWER setting low
increased, the print density is increased and the line width of LOW (BW1) speed /
line images are increased. BW1
D LASER Laser power
Default value POWER setting low
Setting 62 75 LOW (BW2) speed /
range CPM CPM BW2
model model E LASER DUTY Laser duty 0 - 255 0
COPY A LASER Laser power 100 - 148 175 MIDDLE select
POWER setting 213 (BW) middle
MIDDLE middle speed / BW
(BW1) speed / F LASER DUTY Laser duty 0 - 255 0
BW1 LOW (BW) select low
B LASER Laser power speed / BW
POWER setting
MIDDLE middle
(BW2) speed /
BW2
C LASER
POWER
Laser power
setting low
148 148
62
LOW (BW1) speed /
BW1 62-1
D LASER Laser power
POWER setting low Purpose
LOW (BW2) speed / Function (Purpose) Used to execute the hard disk format
BW2 (except operation manual area).
E LASER DUTY Laser duty 0 - 255 0 0 * If no HDD is installed, the MFP Flash
MIDDLE select memory is formatted.
(BW) middle
speed / BW Section
F LASER DUTY Laser duty 0 - 255 Operation/Procedure
LOW (BW) select low 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
speed / BW
PR600/ A LASER Laser power 100 - 148 175
2) Press [YES] key.
FAX POWER setting 213 Used to execute the hard disk format. Used to execute the
MIDDLE middle MFP PWB flash memory format.
(BW1) speed /
BW1
B LASER Laser power
POWER setting low 62-2
MIDDLE speed / Purpose Operation test/check
(BW2) BW2
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
C LASER Laser power 148 148
(partial).
POWER setting low
LOW (BW1) speed / Section
BW1 Operation/Procedure
D LASER Laser power
POWER setting low
LOW (BW2) speed / 2) Press [YES] key.
BW2
E LASER DUTY Laser duty 0 - 255 40 40
MIDDLE select
62-3
(BW) middle
speed / BW Purpose Operation test/check
F LASER DUTY Laser duty 0 - 255 Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
LOW (BW) select low
(all areas).
speed / BW
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
Read/write operations are performed.
62-6 62-10
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self diagnostics of the Function (Purpose) Used to delete the job log data.
hard disk. Section
1) Select the self diag area. 2) Press [YES] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Used to delete the job log data.
The self diag operation is performed. When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
* E7-03 error occurs. If there may be a trouble in the HDD, use this normal display.
simulation to cheek the HDD.
SHORT S.T Partial area diag

62-11
EXTENDED S.T All area diag
Purpose Data clear
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing data.
normal display.
Section
Normal completion  "OK(RESULT:0)" is displayed.
Abnormal end  "NG(RESULT: Other than 0)" is displayed. Operation/Procedure
* If the simulation cannot be executed or terminated abnormally for 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
some reason, "ERROR" is displayed on the corresponding sec- 2) Press [YES] key.
tion. Used to delete the document filing data.
normal display.
62-7
Function (Purpose) Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics 62-12
error log. Purpose Setting
Section Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format
Operation/Procedure in a hard disk trouble.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Section
ERROR LOG SECTOR of the SMART function is executed, and Operation/Procedure
the result is printed. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the 2) Press [OK] key.
normal display. The set value is saved.
When it is set to Enable, if a read error of HDD occurs in the system
data storage area (FAX/device cloning data, etc.), only the system
62-8 data storage area is cleared.
Purpose
A 0 Enable
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding
1 Disable (Default)
the system area and the operation manual
area)
Section
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Purpose Data clear
2) Press [YES] key. Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (only the
Used to execute the hard disk format. operation manual and watermark area)
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the Section
normal display. Operation/Procedure
* When the HDD formatting (except for the system area) is not 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
completed normally, "HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA) 2) Press [YES] key.
NG" is displayed.
The operation manual data are deleted.
normal display.
63-2
63
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform shading.
63-1
Section
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data display
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to display the shading correction
result. 1) Select [OC SHADING] key or [DSPF SHADING] key, and
press [EXECUTE] key.
Section Scanner
Used to perform shading.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a mode. normal display.
2) Select a target color to display with [R] [G] [B] key on the touch
panel.
Item/Display Content NOTE 63-3

GAIN ODD Gain adjustment value Purpose Adjustment
(odd number)
Function (Purpose) Used to perform scanner (CCD/CIS) color
GAIN EVEN Gain adjustment value
balance and gamma auto adjustment.
(Even number)
OFFSET Offset value Section Scanner
ODD (odd number) Operation/Procedure
OFFSET Offset value 1) Place the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1)
EVEN (even number)
on the reference position of the left rear frame side of the doc-
SMP AVE Reference plate
ument table. For the DSPF mode, put the SIT chart backside
ODD sampling average
up on the DSPF tray.
value (ODD)
SMP AVE Reference plate 2) Select [OC] key or [DSPF] key.
EVEN sampling average 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
value (EVEN)
The scanner (CCD/CIS) color balance automatic adjustment is
TARGET Target value
performed.
VALUE
BLACK Black output level When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
LEVEL normal display.
ERROR Error code (0, 1 - 14) 0 No error After completion of the operation, press [RESULT] key, and the
CODE (for debug) 1 STAGE1: Loop number adjustment data are displayed. At that time, the target color of data
over display can be selected with [R] [G] [B] key.
2 STAGE2: The target value
is under the specified value.
3 STAGE3: The gain set
value is negative. 63-4
4 END is not asserted. Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
(Gain adjustment)
Function (Purpose) Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
5 (reserve)
6 STAGE2: Underflow Section
7 Black shading error Operation/Procedure
8 Other error 1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to
9 END is not asserted. the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu-
(White shading) ment table. For the DSPF mode, put the SIT chart backside up
10 END is not asserted. on the DSPF tray.
(Black shading)
2) Select [OC] key or [DSPF] key.
11 END is not asserted.
(Light quantity correction) 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
12 END is not asserted. (Scan) The patch of the SIT chart is scanned.
13 Register check error. When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to
(When booting/Gain) the normal display.
14 Register check error.
4) Select a data display mode.
(Before light quantity
correction)
THROUGH GAMMA SIT chart scan data
DSPF FACE First scan DSPF front —
COPY GAMMA Copy mode gamma process data of the
WHITE surface white
SIT chart scan data
LEVEL 1ST reference level
SCANNER GAMMA Image send mode gamma process data of
DSPF FACE DSPF front surface
the SIT chart scan data
WHITE white reference level
LEVEL 2ND of the second or later
Select an target display color with [R] [G] [B] keys.
scanning
DSPF BACK First scan DSPF back when DSPF
WHITE surface white
LEVEL 1ST reference level
DSPF BACK DSPF back surface
WHITE white reference level
LEVEL 2ND of the second or later
scanning
63-5
64
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner (CCD/CIS)
64-2
color balance and gamma default setting.
Section
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select [SIDE A(OC)] key or [SIDE B(DSPF)] key. Section
2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [OK] key Operation/Procedure
The scanner (CCD/CIS) color balance and gamma are set to 1) Set the print conditions.
the default. Select an item to be print condition with [] [] keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
The test print (self print) is performed.

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1 - 58 1
(1,2,9 - 11,15 - 19, 21, 22, 29) (* For details, refer to the description below.) (1, 2, 9 - 11, 15 - 19, 21, 22, 29)
B DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A:2,11) Setting of print dot number (M parameter) 1-255 1
(Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern 2,11: 2-255 except above: 1-255)
C DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A:2,11) Setting of blank dot number 0-255 254
(N parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern2,11: 2-255 except above: 0-255)
D DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9) Used to specify the print gradation. 1-255 255
(Pattern 9: 255 Fixed except above:1-255)
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
F EXPOSURE THROUGH Exposure mode No process (through) (Pattern 15 - 19, 2 - 8) 1 8
(2 - 8 IF A: 15 - 19) CHAR/PIC specification Text/Printed Photo Other pattern: 1 - 8 2 (STANDARD
CHAR/PRPIC Text/ Photograph 3 DITHER)
CHAR Text 4
PRINT PIC Printed Photo 5
PRINT PAPER Photograph 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD DITHER Dither without correction 8
G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO selection No 1
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 1-3 1 1 (PLAIN)
HEAVY Heavy paper 2
OHP OHP 3
<Print pattern of Item A>
Pattern
Content Pattern generating section NOTE
No.
1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC
2 Dot print -
9 10% area (A4/A4R) density print
10 Belt print
11 Dot print (sub scan)
15 16 gradations + M by N (center gradations only): Sub scan) MFP ASIC • 16 gradations print
16 16 gradations + M by N (center gradations only): Main scan) • The gradation is changed for every 256 dots.
17 Halftone pattern (all over the page) Controller (Memory) -
18 256 gradations pattern (Other dither) -
19 256 gradations pattern (straight) -
20 - - -
21 4-point dot print (main scan) LSU-ASIC
22 Slant line
29 Dot print 1200dpi
64-4
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (256 gradation)
* This simulation functions only for the
machines which are provided with the
printer function.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Select an item to be print condition with [] [] keys. 3) The test print (self print) is performed.
Set the print conditions with 10-key. * If paper which does not satisfy the paper feed conditions is
selected, printing cannot be performed.

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1-3 3
(* For details, refer to the description below.)
B DENSITY Used to specify the print gradation. 1 - 255 128
C MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1-6 1 3 (CS2)
CS1 selection Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E QUALITY STANDARD Image quality setting Standard 0-1 0 0 (STANDARD)
FINE Ultra fine text 1
F DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither Straight 1-2 1 2 (CALIB)
CALIB correction Calibration 2
G PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0-1 0 0
HEAVY Heavy paper 1
<Print pattern of Item A>

Pattern No. Content
1 256 gradations pattern (B/W)
2 Half tone pattern (B/W)
3 Dot, background (BW)
64-5
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Select an item to be print condition with [] [] keys. The test print (self print) is performed.

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1 1
B DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither Straight 1-2 1 2
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2
CS1 selection Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E QUALITY STANDARD Image quality setting Standard (600dpi, 1bit) 0-1 0 0 (STANDARD)
FINE Ultra Fine (1200dpi, 1bit) 1
F TONER SAVE MODE ON Toner save mode set. 0-1 0 1 (OFF)
OFF not set. 1
G PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0-1 0 0 (PLAIN)
HEAVY Heavy paper 1
64-6
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
Section
1) Set the print conditions. The test print (self print) is performed.
Select an item to be print condition with [] [] keys.

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1 1
B DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither Straight 1-2 1 2
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 selection Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E QUALITY STANDARD Image quality setting Standard (600dpi, 1bit) 0-1 0 0 (STANDARD)
FINE Ultra Fine (1200dpi, 1bit) 1
F TONER SAVE MODE ON Toner save mode set. 0-1 0 1 (OFF)
OFF not set. 1
G PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0-1 0 0 (PLAIN)
HEAVY Heavy paper 1
64-7
65
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Used to print the
65-1
adjustment pattern of SIM46-16.)
Purpose Adjustment
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD dis-
Operation/Procedure
play section) detection coordinates.
1) Set the print conditions.
Section Operation panel section
Select an item to be print condition with [] [] keys.
Operation/Procedure
Touch the center of the cross mark at the four corners of the
screen.
The adjustment pattern of SIM46-16 is printed.
When the adjustment is completed normally, the screen shifts to
Setting Default
the simulation sub number entry menu.
range value In case of an error, the screen returns to the adjustment menu.
A COPIES Print quantity 1 - 999 1
B PROC YES 0 The half-tone process 0-1 1
ADJ control correction is
65-2
reflected.
NO 1 The half-tone process Purpose Operation test/check
control correction is not Function (Purpose) Used to display the touch panel (LCD dis-
reflected. play section) detection coordinates.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Touch the touch panel.
The coordinates X (horizontal direction) and Y (vertical direction) of
the touched position is displayed in real time.
65-5 67-25
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key Function (Purpose) Printer density adjustment (manual adjust-
input. ment) (this simulation functions only for the
Section machines which are provided with the
printer function).
Operation/Procedure
Section Printer
Press the keys sequentially according to the guidance displayed on
the screen. Operation/Procedure
If the key entry is effective, the guidance for pressing the next key 1) Select a target adjustment density level with [] [] key on the
is displayed. When all the key entries are completed, "COMPLETE" touch panel.
is displayed. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
<Check target key> * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
Operation panel Operation panel
JOB STATUS 8
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
SYSTEM SETTINGS 9
HOME AUDIT CLEAR
1 0 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
2 PROGRAM the density corresponding to the adjustment value.
3 CLEAR A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper is selected by priority. If there is no A4R
4 STOP (11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected.
5 CLEAR ALL/RESET
6 START (MONO) Setting Default
Item/Display
7 range value
A POINT1 1 - 99 50
B POINT2 1 - 99 50
C POINT3 1 - 99 50
D POINT4 1 - 99 50
67 E
F
POINT5
POINT6
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
G POINT7 1 - 99 50
67-17 H POINT8 1 - 99 50
Purpose I POINT9 1 - 99 50
J POINT10 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Printer controller reset
K POINT11 1 - 99 50
Section Printer L POINT12 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure M POINT13 1 - 99 50
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. N POINT14 1 - 99 50
2) Press [YES] key. O POINT15 1 - 99 50
The set data related to the printer are initialized. (Including the P POINT16 1 - 99 50
NIC setting.) Q POINT17 1 - 99 50

normal display.
67-31
Purpose Data clear
67-24
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the printer calibration data
Purpose Adjustment/Setting (this simulation functions only for the
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the printer density. (Auto- machines which are provided with the
matic adjustment) printer function).
Section Printer Section Printer
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The adjustment pattern is printed. 2) Press [YES] key.
2) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, The printer calibration data (Half tone correction data) are
and press [EXECUTE] key. cleared.
The printer density automatic adjustment is performed, and the (The printer density correction is canceled.)
adjustment result pattern is printed.
3) Press [OK] key.
The half-tone correction target registration is performed.
67-33 Setting Default
range value
A K 0 Maximum density 0-1 1
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma and the density (0: ENABLE correction mode
in each printer screen (this simulation func- 1: DISABLE) ENABLE
tions only for the machines which are pro- 1 Maximum density
vided with the printer function). correction mode
DISABLE
Section Printer
B BLACK MAX BLACK maximum density 0 - 999 500
Operation/Procedure TARGET correction scanner target
1) Select a target screen with [SCREEN] key. value
2) Select a target adjustment density level with [] [] key.
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 67-70
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in Purpose
the density corresponding to the adjustment value.
Function (Purpose) MFP PWB SRAM data clear
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper is selected by priority. If there is no A4R
(11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected. Section MFP PWB
Operation/Procedure
Screen Content
HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper mode
2) Press [YES] key.
SCREEN1 600dpi 1bit screen
SCREEN2 1200dpi 1 bit screen MFP PWB SRAM data is cleared.
SCREEN3 Toner Save mode When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to
the normal display.
Setting Default NOTE: When the MFP PWB is replaced, execute this simulation.
range value
A POINT1 Point 1 0 - 255 128
B POINT2 Point 2 0 - 255 130
C POINT3 Point 3 0 - 255 130
D POINT4 Point 4 0 - 255 130
E POINT5 Point 5 0 - 255 131
F POINT6 Point 6 0 - 255 130
G POINT7 Point 7 0 - 255 130
H POINT8 Point 8 0 - 255 133
I POINT9 Point 9 0 - 255 138
J POINT10 Point 10 0 - 255 136
K POINT11 Point 11 0 - 255 142
L POINT12 Point 12 0 - 255 138
M POINT13 Point 13 0 - 255 135
N POINT14 Point 14 0 - 255 135
O POINT15 Point 15 0 - 255 132
P POINT16 Point 16 0 - 255 128
Q POINT17 Point 17 0 - 255 128
67-34
Purpose Setting/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction in the
printer high density section. (Support for
the high density section tone gap)
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
• When tone gap is generated in the high density section, set to
"0".
The density in the high density section is decreased, but tone
gap is reduced.
• To increase the density in the high density section further, set to
"1".
The tone gap may occur in high density part.
[7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE
MX-M753N C. Self diag
Service operation
Manual
(1) Self diag operation and related work flow
CODE The machine always monitors its own state.
When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and
1. Self diag displays the trouble message.
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consum- A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is
able part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine nearly expired or is expired.
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or
and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble, may not be stopped.
this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
machine to minimize the damage. the LCD and lamp.
A. Function and purpose Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trou-
ble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simula-
1) Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a
tion.
trouble.)
Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically
2) The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is
cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning mes-
stopped on detection of a trouble.)
sages must be cleared by a simulation.
3) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair,
improving the repair efficiency.) Monitors the machine
conditions.
4) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows
to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This
avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a con- Detects/analyzes
sumable part.) the content.
B. Self diag message classifications

The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below.
Warning
࠙࣬
Class 1 User Warning of troubles which can be recovered by the
Trouble/Warning
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
user. (Paper jam, consumable part life expiration,
etc.) Trouble
Πρήσ
Service Warning of troubles which can be recovered only by
a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance, etc.)
Others - ൲ै೪গ
The machine is stopped.
Class 2 Warning Warning to the user, not a machine trouble
(Preliminary warning of life expiration of a
consumable part, etc.)
ඤယͬນা
The content is displayed.
Trouble Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is
stopped.
Others -
Warning
࠙࣬ A consumable No
OP
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
Trouble/Warning part has reached
its lifetime
Trouble
Πρήσ ZFT
YES
Replace or supply
Troubleshoot
ະၻࡔ֦ͬ಺औ the cause. ક࿍ΩȜΜ࢐۟¦༞‫ݯ‬
the consumable part.
ਘၑ
Repair
Cancel the self-diagnostic

ΘͼͺΈȪΞΑΠ΋ζϋΡȫ
message with the
൝ͤ͢ͅুࡨ૷౯ιΛΓȜΐ
diagnostic (test
ٜੰcommands).
Reset
໘‫ܦ‬
Standby
ఞ‫ેܥ‬ఠ state
MX-M753N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 1

D. Breakdown sequence
(1) Breakdown mode processing
Operatable mode
Judgment Copy scan
Kind of trouble Trouble code Scan Scan Scan- List FAX FAX
block (including Print
(Push) (Pull) To HDD print Send print
interruption)
FAX board trouble MFP F6 (00, 01, 04, 21, 30, 97,       ✕ ✕
98)
HDD trouble E7 (03) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
HDD-ASIC trouble E7 (04) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
SCU communication trouble E7 (80) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
A0 (02)
PCU communication trouble E7 (90) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
A0 (01)
ACU communication trouble A0 (04) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Backup battery voltage fall U1 (01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Controller fan motor trouble L4 (30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
External communication disable U7 (50, 51) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(RIC)
Memory error (included not installed U2 (00, 05, 10, 11, 12, 22, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
the expansion RAM) 23, 24)
Connection trouble E7 (60, 61, 62, 65) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(MFP detection) A0 (10, 11, 12, 15, 20)
Serial number discrepancy U2 (30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
HDD registration data sum error U2 (50) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
If the HDD is not installed, data check
sum error of the Flash memory for
setting and registration.
Image memory trouble, decode error E7 (01, 05, 06, 08, 09) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Image memory trouble, decode error E7 (42, 46, 48) ✕  10 ✕ ✕ ✕   
(ACRE-related 1)
Image memory trouble, decode error E7 (49) ✕  ✕ ✕ ✕   
(ACRE-related 2)
Personal counter installation trouble PC (00) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Power controller trouble L8 (20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Special function error U2 (60)        
Laser trouble PCU E7 (20, 21, 28, 29) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
L6 (10) 7
Connection trouble E7 (50, 55) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(PCU detection) A0 (21)
F1 (50)
PCU section troubles C1 (10) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(motor, fusing, etc.) F2 (40, 64, 68, 70, 74) 7
F4 (38)
H2 (00, 01)
H3 (00, 01)
H4 (00, 01)
H5 (01)
H7 (10, 11)
L4 (01, 02, 03, 04, 06, 08,
31, 32, 35, 38, 40, 43, 46,
50, 56, 58)
L8 (01, 02)
U2 (90, 91),
Paper feed tray 1 trouble F3 (12) 2    2  2/7  2
Paper feed tray 5 trouble U6 (20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 51) 2    2  2/7  2
Staple trouble F1 (08, 10) 3 3 3 3 3  3/7 3 3
Saddle stitch section trouble F1 (31, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 3 3 3 3 3  3/7 3 3
46, 51)
After-process trouble F1 (00, 02, 03, 09, 11, 14, 3 3 3 3 3  3/7 3 3
15, 18, 19, 20, 21, 23, 25,
28, 30, 33, 34, 37, 38, 52,
60, 80, 81, 83, 84, 86)
Inserter trouble F1 (61, 62) 3    3 3 3 
Other troubles EE (EC, EL, EU)        
Process control trouble F2 (31, 39, 46, 48)        
(PCU detection) 9

Operatable mode
Judgment Copy scan
Kind of trouble Trouble code Scan Scan Scan- List FAX FAX
block (including Print
(Push) (Pull) To HDD print Send print
interruption)
Connection trouble SCU A0 (22) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(SCU detection) E7 (70, 75)
SCU color system troubles UC (02) 6 6 6 6   6 
(SCU detection)
Anti copy system UC (20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
EEPROM faction U2 (80, 81) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
Scanner section troubles L1 (00) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
(mirror motor, lens, copy lamp) L3 (00)
CCD troubles (shading, etc.) E7 (10, 11, 14) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
DSPF trouble U5 (00, 16, 30, 31, 40) 4 4 4 4   4 
General troubles in the DSPF back E6 (10, 11, 14) 5 5 5 5   5 
surface scanning section
 : Operation enabled, ✕ : Operation disabled

 2 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray.
 3 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section.
* However, it is valid only when the escape tray setting has been made.
 4 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the OC mode.
 5 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the OC mode and the simplex scanning mode.
 6 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the black and white mode.
 7 : Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred.
 8 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in other than the DESK.
 9 : Trouble display is message of 2 lines. (Example: Ready to copy. F2 trouble)
 10 : Execution of a job is enabled only for the format other than the high-compression PDF related ones.
(2) Power ON trouble detection sequence.
MFP event
manager Each block
(Power ON sequence)
F3, H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, U6 trouble check When the power is turned
Trouble check is made in each block when on, check is made in each
initializing and data are sent to the MFP PWB. block.
Communication of trouble status
[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
F3-12, F3-22 Saved in the PCU
H3, H4, H5 Saved in the PCU
U1 Saved in the MFP
U2 Saved in each block
U6-09 Saved in the PCU
(Trouble cancel sequence) sim task
When executing SIM 13, 14, 15, 16

(To the corre-
SIM 13: U1 trouble cancel sponding block)
SIM 14: H3, H4, H5 cancel Trouble cancel
SIM 15: F3-12, F3-22, LCC (U6) trouble cancel Trouble cancel command (The trouble memory
SIM 16: U2 trouble cancel is initialized.)
Trouble cancel status
is communicated.

2. Trouble code list
Trouble code
Trouble Mecha-
Main Sub Trouble code content Option Electricity FAX Supply
detection nism
code code
C1 10 Main charger trouble PCU 
E6 10 DSPF shading error (Black correction) SCU 
11 DSPF shading error (White correction) SCU 
14 CCD-ASIC error SCU 
E7 01 MFP image data error MFP 
03 HDD trouble MFP 
04 HDD-ASIC error MFP 
05 Standard/Extension memory R/W error (MFP PWB) (Local memory) MFP 
06 Image data decode error MFP 
08 MFP memory compatibility error (MFP PWB) (Local memory) MFP 
09 Standard/Extension memory size (MFP PWB) (Local memory) MFP 
10 Shading error (Black correction) SCU 
11 Shading error (White correction) SCU 
14 CCD-ASIC error SCU 
20 LSU laser detection error PCU 
21 LSU laser deterioration trouble PCU 
28 LSU-PCU connection error PCU 
29 LSU ASIC frequency error PCU 
42 Data error (ACRE ASIC) MFP 
46 Decode error (ACRE ASIC) MFP 
48 Memory error (ACRE ASIC) MFP 
49 Water Mark data error MFP 
50 Engine connection trouble PCU 
55 PWB information sum error (Engine detection) PCU 
60 Combination error between the MFP PWB and other PWB, firmware MFP 
61 Combination error between the MFP PWB and the PCU PWB MFP 
62 Combination error between the MFP PWB and the SCU PWB MFP 
65 MFP EEPROM sum check error MFP 
70 Combination error between the SCU PWB and the other PWB SCU 
75 SCU EEPROM sum check error SCU 
80 MFP-SCU PWB communication error MFP 
90 MFP - PCU PWB communication error MFP 
EE EC Automatic toner density adjustment error (Sampling level 67-94/106-154) PCU 
EL Automatic toner density adjustment error (Over toner) PCU 
EU Automatic toner density adjustment error (Under toner) PCU 
F1 00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication error PCU 
02 Finisher paper transport motor trouble PCU 
03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting operation trouble PCU 
08 Stapler shift trouble PCU 
09 Finisher load quantity sensor trouble PCU 
10 Staple operation trouble PCU 
11 Finisher grip operation trouble PCU 
14 Finisher paper tail push down motor trouble PCU 
15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation trouble PCU 
18 Finisher paper tail holding motor trouble PCU 
19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F PCU 
20 Finisher alignment operation trouble R PCU 
21 Finisher paper delivery unit cooling fan trouble PCU 
23 Finisher shutter trouble PCU 
25 Finisher paper transport roller lift motor trouble PCU 
28 Finisher paper alignment roller lift motor trouble PCU 
30 Finisher - Saddle unit communication trouble PCU 
31 Saddle paper folding trouble PCU 
33 Punch unit shift operation trouble PCU 
34 Punch operation trouble PCU 
37 Finisher data backup RAM error PCU 
38 Punch data backup RAM error PCU 
41 Saddle paper positioning operation trouble PCU 
42 Saddle guide motor trouble PCU 
43 Saddle alignment operation trouble PCU 
44 Saddle staple motor R trouble PCU 
45 Saddle staple motor F trouble PCU 
46 Saddle motor trouble PCU 
50 Main unit - Finisher combination error PCU 

Trouble code
Trouble Mecha-
detection nism
code code
F1 51 Saddle sensor connection trouble PCU 
52 Finisher micro switch trouble PCU 
60 Finisher - Inserter communication trouble PCU 
61 Inserter EEPROM trouble PCU 
62 Inserter reverse sensor trouble PCU 
80 Finisher power cooling fan motor trouble PCU 
81 Finisher paper delivery unit paper transport motor trouble PCU 
83 Finisher paper guide motor trouble PCU 
84 Finisher grip trouble PCU 
86 Finisher delivery paper holding motor trouble PCU 
F2 31 Image density sensor trouble (OPC drum surface reflection ratio abnormality) PCU 
39 Process thermistor trouble PCU 
40 Toner density sensor trouble PCU 
46 Developing thermistor trouble PCU 
47 Room temperature thermistor trouble PCU 
48 Developing humidity sensor trouble PCU 
59 Room humidity sensor trouble PCU 
64 Toner supply operation trouble PCU 
68 Waste toner full sensor trouble PCU 
69 Waste toner full detection PCU 
70 Improper toner cartridge detection PCU 
74 Toner cartridge CRUM error PCU 
F3 12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble PCU 
22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble PCU 
F4 38 Voltage trouble PCU 
F6 00 MFP-FAX communication trouble MFP 
01 FAX board EEPROM read/write error FAX 
04 FAX MODEM operation trouble FAX 
21 Combination error between the TEL/LIU PWB and the FAX soft switch FAX 
30 Access error to 1-chip microprocessor on the FAX board (FAX detection) FAX 
97 The FAX PWB does not match with the machine model. FAX 
98 Combination error between the FAX-BOX destination information and the FAX 
machine destination information.
H2 00 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM) PCU 
01 Thermistor open trouble (TH_US) PCU 
H3 00 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM) PCU 
01 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU 
H4 00 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_UM) PCU 
01 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU 
H5 01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach jam PCU 
H7 10 Recovery error from low fuser temp. (TH_UM) PCU 
11 Recovery error from low fuser temp. (TH_US) PCU 
L1 00 Scanner feed trouble SCU 
L3 00 Scanner return trouble SCU 
L4 01 Main motor trouble PCU 
02 Drum motor trouble PCU 
03 Fusing motor trouble PCU 
04 Developing motor trouble PCU 
06 Transfer separation motor trouble PCU 
08 Waste toner transport trouble PCU 
30 MFP fan motor trouble MFP 
31 Fusing section cooling fan (CFM-U1/3) trouble PCU 
32 Power supply cooling fan (CFM-DC1/DC2) trouble PCU 
35 Fusing exhaust fan (VFM-BKR) trouble PCU 
38 Fusing section cooling fan (CFM-U4) trouble PCU 
40 Process exhaust fan (VFM-EX1/2/3) trouble PCU 
43 Fusing exhaust fan (VFM-BKU) trouble PCU 
46 Developing section cooling fan (CFM-DV) trouble PCU 
50 Process cooling fan (CFM-R1/2/3) trouble PCU 
56 Fusing section cooling fan (CFM-U2) trouble PCU 
58 Process exhaust fan (VFM-BKL) trouble PCU 
L6 10 Polygon motor trouble PCU 
L8 01 Full wave signal detection error PCU 
02 Full wave signal error PCU 
20 Communication error of MFP PWB/Mother board MFP 
PC - Personal counter not detected MFP 
U1 01 Battery trouble MFP 

Trouble code
Trouble Mecha-
detection nism
code code
U2 00 MFP EEPROM read/write error MFP 
05 HDD/MFP PWB SRAM contents inconsistency MFP 
10 MFP PWB SRAM user authentication index check sum error MFP 
11 MFP PWB EEPROM counter check sum error MFP 
12 FAX SRAM check sum error MFP 
22 MFP PWB SRAM memory check sum error MFP 
23 MFP PWB SRAM memory individual data check sum error MFP 
24 MFP PWB SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum error MFP 
30 MFP PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency MFP 
50 HDD/Flash memory registration data check sum error MFP 
60 Water Mark check error MFP 
80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error SCU 
81 SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error SCU 
90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error PCU 
91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error PCU 
U5 00 Document feed unit communication error SCU 
16 Document feed unit fan motor trouble SCU 
30 Document feed unit tray lift up trouble SCU 
31 Document feed unit tray lift down trouble SCU 
40 Document feed unit installation trouble SCU 
U6 09 LCC lift trouble PCU 
20 PCU PWB - LCC communication error PCU 
21 LCC paper transport motor trouble PCU 
22 LCC 24V power trouble PCU 
23 A3LCC tray descending trouble PCU 
24 A3LCC tray lock trouble PCU 
51 LCC - Main unit combination trouble PCU 
U7 50 MFP PWB - Vendor machine communication error MFP 
51 Vendor machine error MFP 
UC 02 IPD/DOCC ASIC IPD section error SCU 
20 IPD/DOCC ASIC DOCC section error SCU 
A0 01 PCU PWB ROM error MFP 
02 SCU PWB ROM error MFP 
04 ACU PWB ROM error (when scanner expansion kit is installed) MFP 
10 MFP PWB ROM error MFP 
11 Firmware version inconsistency (MFP - PCU) MFP 
12 Firmware version inconsistency (MFP - SCU) MFP 
15 DSK BOOT version disagreement MFP 
20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP) MFP 
21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (PCU) PCU 
22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (SCU) SCU 
3. Details of trouble code
C1-10 Main charger trouble E6-10 DSPF shading error (Black correction)
Trouble content Trouble content

Detail PCU Detail SCU
Cause The main charger unit is not installed properly. Cause Installation error of the CCD unit harness.
There is an abnormality in the main charger unit. CCD unit trouble.
Disconnection of the high voltage PWB connector. DSPF PWB trouble.
MC/DV high voltage PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Check the installing state of the harness to the CCD
PCU PWB trouble unit.
Check & Remedy Check the output of the main charger with SIM8-2. Check the CCD unit.
Check disconnection of the main charger./Replace. Check the DSPF PWB.
Check disconnection of the high voltage PWB
connector./Replace.
Replace the MC/DV high voltage PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB.

E6-11 DSPF shading error (White correction) E7-05 Standard/Extension memory R/W
error (MFP PWB) (Local memory)
Trouble content
Detail SCU Trouble content Memory access is disabled.
Cause Installation error of the CCD unit harness. Detail MFP
Copy lamp lighting trouble.
Cause Improper insertion of the memory.
Dirt on the reference white plate.
Garbled memory data.
CCD unit trouble.
The memory capacity is not the specified level.
DSPF PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check insertion of the memory.
Shading adjustment error
Use SIM60-1 to check the read/write operations of the
Check & Remedy Check the installing state of the harness the CCD unit.
memory.
Clean the reference white plate.
Replace the expansion memory.
Check the CCD unit.
Replace the MFP PWB.
Check the DSPF PWB.
E7-06 Image data decode error

E6-14 CCD-ASIC error
Trouble content
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Detail SCU
Cause Compressed image data abnormality.
Cause DSPF PWB trouble.
HDD connection trouble when HDD is installed.
Check & Remedy Replace the DSPF PWB. Image data compression/transfer data garble.
MFP PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy If the job at an occurrence of an error is a FAX job,
E7-01 MFP image data error check the FAX PWB.
Check connection of the MFPC PWB and the HDD.
Trouble content Replace the MFPC PWB.
Detail MFP
Cause Image data transfer error in the MFP PWB.
MFP PWB trouble.
E7-08 MFP memory compatibility error
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness of (MFP PWB) (Local memory)
the MFP PWB.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause A DIMM of different specifications is installed to the
E7-03 HDD trouble MFP memory slot.
DIMM trouble.
Trouble content Check & Remedy Check the installed DIMM.
Detail MFP Replace the DIMM.
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble in the MFP
PWB and HDD.
HDD error file management area data abnormality E7-09 Standard/Extension memory size
(FAT breakage). (MFP PWB) (Local memory)
MFP PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness of
the MFP PWB and HDD. Trouble content
Use SIM62-2,3 to check read/write operations of the Detail MFP
HDD. Cause A DIMM which is not 512MB is inserted.
Replace the HDD. DIMM trouble.
Replace the MFP PWB. Insufficient memory size.
Check & Remedy Replace the DIMM.
E7-04 HDD-ASIC error

E7-10 Shading error (Black correction)
Trouble content
Detail MFP Trouble content
Cause HDD-ASIC trouble. Detail SCU
An error occurs in the HDD-ASIC self test when Cause Abnormality in the CCD black scan level when the
booting. scanner lamp is turned OFF.
Check & Remedy Replace the MFP PWB. Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
CCD unit abnormality.
SCU PWB abnormality.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.
Check the CCD unit.
Check the SCU PWB.

E7-11 Shading error (White correction) E7-28 LSU-PCU connection error

Detail SCU Detail PCU
Cause Abnormality in the CCD white reference plate scan Cause Communication error between the CPU in the PCU
level when the scanner lamp is turned ON. PWB and the LSU control ASIC.
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit. Improper connection of the communication connector
Dirt on the mirror, lens, and the reference white plate. between the PCU PWB and the LSU control PWB
Scanner lamp lighting trouble. (interface PWB).
CCD unit abnormality. Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the LSU
SCU PWB abnormality. control PWB (interface PWB)
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit. PCU PWB or LSU control PWB (interface PWB)
Check connection of the harness to the scanner lamp trouble
unit. Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
Clean the mirror, the lens, and the reference white between the PCU PWB and the LSU control PWB
plate. (interface PWB).
Check the CCD unit. Replace the LSU control PWB.
Check the SCU PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
E7-14 CCD-ASIC error E7-29 LSU ASIC frequency error

Detail SCU Detail PCU
Cause SCU PWB trouble. Cause Oscillation abnormality of the external oscillator and
Check & Remedy Check the SCU PWB. the internal oscillating circuit used in the LSU ASIC.
Replace the SCU PWB. LSU ASIC abnormality on the LSU ASIC PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the LSU control PWB.
E7-20 LSU laser detection error

E7-42 Data error (ACRE ASIC)
Trouble content
Detail PCU Trouble content
Cause Optical axis shift. Detail MFP
Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode Cause Image transfer trouble.
trouble. Check & Remedy Check the connection state of the ACRE ASIC PWB
Harness and connector trouble between the LD/BD connector.
PWB and the LSU control PWB. Replace the ACRE ASIC PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Check the PWB and connection of the harness in the
LSU. E7-46 Decode error (ACRE ASIC)
Replace the LSU.
Trouble content
E7-21 LSU laser deterioration trouble Detail MFP
Cause Compression data abnormality.
Garbled data are produced in image compression/
Trouble content transmission.
Detail PCU ACRE ASIC PWB trouble.
Cause Power reduction due to laser deterioration. Check & Remedy Check the installation state of the PWB.
Harness and connector disconnection/insertion Check connection of the ACRE ASIC PWB.
trouble between the LD PWB and the LSU control Replace the ACRE ASIC PWB.
PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Check the PWB and connection of the harness in the E7-48 Memory error (ACRE ASIC)
LSU.
Replace the LSU.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause DIMM trouble, memory slot trouble.
DIMM insertion trouble, different DIMM inserted.
Check & Remedy DIMM trouble.
Replace the PWB.
E7-49 Water Mark data error
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause Watermark data trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-5 to upload the watermark data.
Replace the HDD.

E7-50 Engine connection trouble E7-65 MFP EEPROM sum check error

Detail PCU Detail MFP
Cause A PWB, or firmware, or LSU which is not supported by Cause MFP PWB EEPROM device breakdown.
the machine specifications is detected in the PCU Contact trouble of the MFP EEPROM device.
PWB. Malfunction due to noises.
PCU PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the MFP PWB.
LSU trouble. Replace the MFP PWB EEPROM.
Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Check the LSU, and replace it if necessary.
Check the PCU PWB, and replace it if necessary. E7-70 Combination error between the SCU
PWB and the other PWB
E7-55 PWB information sum error
Trouble content
(Engine detection)
Detail SCU
Cause A SUC PWB /firmware which does not comply with the
Trouble content PCU EEPROM PWB information sum error machine specifications is detected.
Detail PCU SCU PWB trouble.
Cause PCU EEPROM sum check error. A PWB/firmware which does not comply with the
PCU EEPROM trouble. machine specifications is connected.
PCU EEPROM contact trouble. Check & Remedy Check the firmware kind/version.
Malfunction due to noises Check and replace the SCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the PCU EEPROM.
E7-75 SCU EEPROM sum check error
E7-60 Combination error between the MFP Trouble content
PWB and other PWB, firmware Detail SCU
Cause SCU PWB EEPROM device breakdown.
Trouble content Contact trouble of the SCU EEPROM device.
Detail MFP Malfunction due to noises.
Cause A PWB or firmware which is not supported by the Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB.
machine specifications is detected in the MFP PWB. Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
MFP PWB trouble.
The PWB/firmware which is not supported by the
machine specifications is connected. E7-80 MFP-SCU PWB communication error
Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Check the MFP PWB, and replace it if necessary. Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause SCU PWB connector connection trouble.
E7-61 Combination error between the MFP SCU PWB - MFP PWB connection trouble.
PWB and the PCU PWB SCU PWB mother board connection trouble.
SCU PWB trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
Trouble content
Mother board trouble.
Detail MFP
Check & Remedy Check connection of the SCU PWB, the MFP PWB,
Cause Combination error between the MFP PWB and the and the mother board.
PCU PWB. Check the ground.
MFP PWB trouble. Replace the SCU PWB.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the MFP PWB.
Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFP PWB and Replace the mother board.
the PCU PWB.
E7-90 MFP - PCU PWB communication error
E7-62 Combination error between the MFP Trouble content

Detail MFP
PWB and the SCU PWB
Cause PCU PWB connector connection trouble.
PCU PWB - MFP PWB connection trouble.
Trouble content PCU PWB trouble.
Detail MFP MFP PWB trouble.
Cause Combination error between the MFP PWB and the Mother board trouble.
SCU PWB. Check & Remedy Check connection of the PCU PWB, the MFP PWB,
MFP PWB trouble. and the mother board.
SCU PWB trouble. Check the ground.
Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFP PWB and Replace the PCU PWB.
the SCU PWB. Replace the MFP PWB.
Replace the MFP PWB. Replace the mother board.
Replace the SCU PWB.

EE-EC Automatic toner density adjustment F1-02 Finisher paper transport motor trouble
error (Sampling level 26-102/114-200)
Trouble content
Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density Detail PCU
adjustment is outside of 1085. Cause Finisher paper transport motor trouble.
Detail PCU Harness and connector connection trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
Developing unit trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
PCU PWB trouble. transport motor.
Replace the paper transport motor.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the developing unit.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
EE-EL Automatic toner density adjustment F1-03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting
error (Over toner) operation trouble
Trouble content
Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density
adjustment is less than 26 or the control voltage is Detail PCU
over 197. Cause Finisher paper exit roller lift motor trouble.
Detail PCU Harness and connector connection trouble.
Home position sensor trouble.
Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
Charging voltage/ developing voltage trouble, toner
density trouble, or developing unit trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
PCU PWB trouble. roller lift motor.
Replace the paper exit roller lift motor.
Replace the home position sensor.
EE-EU Automatic toner density adjustment

F1-08 Stapler shift trouble
error (Under toner)
Trouble content
Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density Detail PCU
adjustment is over 200 or the control voltage is less
Cause Stapler shift motor trouble.
than 49.
Detail PCU Home position sensor trouble.
Cause Toner density sensor trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the stapler shift
Charging voltage/ developing voltage trouble, toner motor.
density trouble, or developing unit trouble. Replace the stapler shift motor.
PCU PWB trouble. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor. Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the developing unit. Replace the finisher control PWB.
F1-09 Finisher load quantity sensor trouble

F1-00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication
error Trouble content
Detail PCU
Trouble content Cause Punch paper edge sensor trouble.
Detail PCU Harness disconnection.
Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness Finisher control PWB trouble.
between the finisher and the PCU PWB. Punch control PWB trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the sensor.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the punch paper edge sensor.
Strong external noises. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the Replace the punch control PWB.
finisher and the PCU PWB.

F1-10 Staple operation trouble F1-19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F

Detail PCU Detail PCU
Cause Staple motor trouble. Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Motor speed abnormality.
Home position sensor trouble. Over-current to the motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple Home position sensor trouble.
motor. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Replace the staple motor. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
Check connection of the connector and the harness. alignment motor.
Replace the home position sensor. Replace the paper alignment motor (FPAM-F).
Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the home position sensor.
F1-11 Finisher grip operation trouble

F1-20 Finisher alignment operation trouble
Trouble content R
Detail PCU
Cause Gripper arm motor trouble. Trouble content
Finisher control PWB trouble. Detail PCU
Grip arm trouble.
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock.
Motor speed abnormality.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the gripper arm Over-current to the motor.
motor. Home position sensor trouble.
Replace the gripper arm motor (FGAM). Finisher control PWB trouble.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
Replace the grip arm. alignment motor.
Replace the home position sensor. Replace the paper alignment motor (FPAM-F).
F1-14 Finisher paper tail push down motor
trouble
F1-21 Finisher paper delivery unit cooling
Trouble content fan trouble
Detail PCU
Cause Paper tail push down motor trouble. Trouble content
Home position sensor trouble. Cause Finisher paper delivery unit cooling fan motor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper tail Finisher control PWB trouble.
push down motor. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Replace the paper tail push down motor (FPTPDM). Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
Replace the finisher control PWB. delivery unit cooling fan motor.
Replace the home position sensor. Replace the paper delivery unit cooling fan motor
(PDCF).
F1-15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation Check connection of the connector and the harness.
trouble
Trouble content Lift motor trouble.

F1-23 Finisher shutter trouble
Detail PCU
Cause Paper exit tray lift motor trouble. Trouble content
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit Cause Motor lock trouble.
tray lift motor. Control PWB trouble.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Home position sensor trouble.
Replace the paper exit tray lift motor (FTLM). Connection harness/connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the operation of the rear edge assist motor with
SIM3-3.
F1-18 Finisher paper tail holding motor Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Replace the control PWB.
trouble Replace the sensor.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Finisher paper tail holding motor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper tail
holding motor.
Replace the paper tail holding motor (FPTHM).

F1-25 Finisher paper transport roller lift F1-33 Punch unit shift operation trouble
motor trouble
Trouble content
Trouble content Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Punch shift motor trouble.
Cause Finisher paper transport roller lift motor lock trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
shifting.
transport roller lift motor.
Replace the punch shift motor.
Replace the paper transport roller lift motor
(FPTRLM).
Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
F1-28 Finisher paper alignment roller lift F1-34 Punch operation trouble
motor trouble
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Trouble content
Cause Punch motor trouble.
Detail PCU Finisher control PWB trouble.
Cause Finisher paper alignment roller lift motor lock trouble. Home position sensor trouble.
Home position sensor trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Check the punch operation.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper Replace the punch motor.
alignment roller lift motor. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the paper alignment roller lift motor (FARLM). Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the home position sensor. Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
F1-37 Finisher data backup RAM error

F1-30 Finisher - Saddle unit communication
trouble Trouble content
Detail PCU
Trouble content Cause Finisher control PWB trouble.
Detail PCU Malfunction due to noises
Cause Connector and harness connection trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the finisher control PWB.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Readjust the finisher. (Use SIM3-10,Finisher control
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness. PWB DIP SW adjustment.)
Turn OFF/ON the power.
F1-38 Punch data backup RAM error
F1-31 Saddle paper folding trouble Trouble content
Detail PCU
Trouble content Cause Punch control PWB trouble.
Detail PCU Malfunction due to noises
Cause Saddle paper transport motor trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the punch control PWB.
Saddle paper folding mechanism trouble. Set the punch unit specifications, and adjust the
Finisher control PWB trouble. sensor. (Punch unit control PWB DIP SW adjustment.)
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
paper folding. F1-41 Saddle paper positioning operation
Replace the saddle paper transport motor (FSPTM).
trouble
Check and repair the saddle paper folding
mechanism.
Replace the finisher control PWB Trouble content Abnormality in the folding positioning guide motor in
Replace the home position sensor. the saddle section.
Detail PCU
Cause Saddle positioning motor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
positioning motor.
Replace the saddle positioning motor (FSPM).
Check connection of the harness and the connector.

F1-42 Saddle guide motor trouble F1-46 Saddle motor trouble

Cause Saddle roller guide motor trouble. Cause Saddle motor trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Home position sensor trouble. Home position sensor trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle roller Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
guide motor. motor.
Replace the saddle roller guide motor (FSRGM). Replace the saddle motor (FSDM).
Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the home position sensor. Replace the home position sensor.
Check connection of the harness and the connector. Check connection of the harness and the connector.
F1-43 Saddle alignment operation trouble F1-50 Main unit - Finisher combination error

Cause Saddle alignment motor trouble. Cause The finisher which is not supported by the main unit
Finisher control PWB trouble. model is installed.
Home position sensor trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Check & Remedy Install a proper finisher.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle Replace the finisher control PWB.
alignment motor.
Replace the saddle alignment motor (FSPAM).
Replace the finisher control PWB. F1-51 Saddle sensor connection trouble
Trouble content
Detail PCU
F1-44 Saddle staple motor R trouble Cause Finisher control PWB trouble.
Trouble content Check & Remedy Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the guide home
Detail PCU position sensor and the saddle plate position sensor.
Cause Saddle staple motor R trouble. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Check connection of the harness and the connector.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle F1-52 Finisher micro switch trouble
staple motor R.
Replace the saddle staple motor R (FSDSMR).
Replace the finisher control PWB. Trouble content
Replace the home position sensor. Detail PCU
Check connection of the harness and the connector. Cause Finisher control PWB trouble.
Each micro switch trouble.
F1-45 Saddle staple motor F trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the safety
switch 1 and the delivery roller lift down sensor.
Trouble content Abnormality of the staple unit drive motor in the saddle Check connection of the harness and the connector.
section.
Detail PCU
Cause Saddle staple motor F trouble. F1-60 Finisher - Inserter communication
Home position sensor trouble. trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle Trouble content
staple motor F. Detail PCU
Replace the saddle staple motor F (FSDSMF). Cause Connector and harness connection trouble.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Turn OFF/ON the power.
F1-61 Inserter EEPROM trouble
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause EEPROM trouble.
Inserter PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the installing state of the EEPROM.
Replace the inserter control PWB.

F1-62 Inserter reverse sensor trouble F1-86 Finisher delivery paper holding motor
trouble
Trouble content
Cause Sensor breakage. Detail PCU
Harness disconnection.
Cause Delivery paper holding motor trouble.
Inserter PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the sensor. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Replace the inserter control PWB. Home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the delivery
paper holding motor.
F1-80 Finisher power cooling fan motor Replace the delivery paper holding motor (FDPHM).
trouble Replace the finisher control PWB.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Power cooling fan motor trouble. F2-31 Image density sensor trouble
(OPC drum surface reflection ratio
Check & Remedy Replace the power cooling fan motor. abnormality)
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Before execution of the process control, a document
F1-81 Finisher paper delivery unit paper is scanned by the image density sensor and the
transport motor trouble sensor gain is adjusted so that the output is at a fixed
level. Though, however, the sensor gain is changed,
the output does not become a fixed level.
Trouble content
Image density sensor trouble
Detail PCU
Connection trouble of the harness between the PCU
Cause Paper delivery unit paper transport motor trouble. PWB and the image density sensor
Finisher control PWB trouble. Image density sensor dirt
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-2 to execute the gain adjustment of the
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper process control sensor.
delivery unit paper transport motor. When there are some troubles, "Error" is displayed.
Replace the paper delivery unit paper transport motor Check the sensor and the harness at that time.
(PDPTM).
F2-39 Process thermistor trouble
F1-83 Finisher paper guide motor trouble Trouble content

Detail PCU
Cause Process thermistor trouble.
Trouble content
Process thermistor harness connection trouble.
Detail PCU
PCU PWB trouble
Cause Paper guide motor trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the process thermistor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper guide
motor.
Replace the paper guide motor (FPGM).
F2-40 Toner density sensor trouble
Check connection of the harness and the connector. Trouble content
Replace the home position sensor. Detail PCU
Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality (Sample
level less than 26, or over 200)
F1-84 Finisher grip trouble Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Developing unit trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Trouble content Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Detail PCU
Cause Gripper motor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the gripper
motor.
Replace the gripper motor (FGM).

F2-46 Developing thermistor trouble F2-68 Waste toner full sensor trouble

Cause Developing thermistor harness connection trouble. Cause Waste toner full sensor trouble
Developing thermistor harness trouble. Connector/harness trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Waste toner pipe clogging
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and connector of the Check & Remedy Replace the waste toner full sensor.
developing thermistor. Connector/harness trouble.
Replace the developing thermistor harness. Remove clogging in the waste toner pipe.
F2-69 Waste toner full detection

F2-47 Room temperature thermistor trouble
Trouble content
Detail PCU Cause Waste toner full detection
Cause Room temperature thermistor trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Room temperature thermistor harness trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and connector of the F2-70 Improper toner cartridge detection
room temperature thermistor.
Replace the room temperature thermistor harness.
Replace the PCU PWB. Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main unit
F2-48 Developing humidity sensor trouble detects a toner cartridge of a different specification.)
Toner cartridge trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Trouble content Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Detail PCU Replace the PCU PWB.
Cause Developing humidity sensor harness connection
trouble.
Developing humidity sensor trouble. F2-74 Toner cartridge CRUM error
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and connector of the
developing humidity sensor. Trouble content
Replace the developing humidity sensor. Detail PCU
Replace the PCU PWB. Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Connector/harness trouble.
F2-59 Room humidity sensor trouble Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Connector and harness check.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Room humidity sensor harness connection trouble. F3-12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble
Room humidity sensor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and connector of the Trouble content
room humidity sensor. Detail PCU
Replace the room humidity sensor. Cause T1LUD is not turned ON within the specified time.
Replace the PCU PWB. T1LUD sensor trouble
Paper feed tray 1 lift unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
F2-64 Toner supply operation trouble Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector of
T1LUD.
Trouble content Replace the lift up unit.
Detail PCU Replace the PCU PWB.
Cause Toner density sensor trouble. Use SIM15 to cancel the trouble.
Connector/harness trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Toner cartridge trouble. F3-22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble
Developing unit trouble.
Connector and harness check. Trouble content
Replace the PCU PWB. Detail PCU
Replace the toner cartridge. Cause T2LUD does not turn ON within the specified time.
Replace the developing unit. T2LUD sensor trouble.
Paper feed tray 2 lift unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of T2LUD.
Replace the lift up unit.
Use SIM15 to cancel the trouble.

F3-32 Paper feed tray 3 lift operation trouble F6-01 FAX board EEPROM read/write error
Trouble content Trouble content EEPROM access error (read/write)

Detail PCU Section FAX
Cause M1LUD does not turn ON within the specified time. Case 1 Cause EEPROM trouble
M1LUD sensor trouble. Check Check that no trouble occurs after replacement of
Paper feed tray 3 lift unit trouble. and EEPROM. Execute the memory check of SIM66-3 to
PCU PWB trouble. remedy insure that EEPROM can be accessed.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Case 2 Cause FAX PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of M1LUD. Check Replace the PWB. In this case, not need to execute
Replace the lift up unit. and the simulation.
Replace the PCU PWB. remedy
F3-42 Paper feed tray 4 lift operation trouble F6-04 FAX MODEM operation trouble
Trouble content Trouble content FAX PWB MODEM chip operation trouble
Detail PCU Section FAX
Cause M2LUD does not turn ON within the specified time. Case 1 Cause FAX PWB MODEM chip operation trouble
M2LUD sensor trouble. Check Replace the FAX PWB MODEM chip.
Paper feed tray 4 lift unit trouble. and
PCU PWB trouble. remedy
Case 2 Cause The FAX PWB MODEM chip cannot be accessed.
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of M2LUD.
Check Replace the FAX PWB.
Replace the lift up unit.
and
remedy
F4-38 Voltage trouble F6-21 Combination error between the

TEL/LIU PWB and the FAX soft switch
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Connector/harness connection trouble or Trouble content Combination error between the TEL/LIU PWB and the
FAX PWB information (soft switch)
disconnection
PCU PWB trouble. Section FAX
Power unit trouble. Case 1 Cause The destination of the installed TEL/LIU PWB differs.
AC PWB trouble. Check Check the destination of the installed TEL/LIU PWB.
Check & Remedy Check the connector and harness of the power line. and
Replace the PCU PWB. remedy
Replace the power unit. Case 2 Cause TEL/LIU PWB trouble
Replace the AC PWB. Check Replace the TEL/LIU PWB.
and
remedy
F6-00 MFP-FAX communication trouble
Trouble content Communication establishment error/Framing/Parity/

F6-30 Access error to 1-chip microproces-
Protocol error sor on the FAX board (FAX detection)
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause FAX unit PWB connector connection error Trouble content Access error (read/write) to 1-chip microprocessor on
Check Check the connector connection between the FAX unit the FAX board
and PWB and the MFPcnt PWB. Section FAX
remedy Case 1 Cause Program writing error (or no writing) to the 1-chip
Case 2 Cause FAX unit PWB - MFPcnt PWB harness trouble microprocessor
Check Check the connector harness between the FAX unit Check Use SIM66-42 to rewrite the 1-chip microprocessor
and PWB and the MFPcnt PWB. and program.
remedy remedy
Case 3 Cause FAX unit PWB mother board connector pin breakage Case 2 Cause 1-chip microprocessor trouble
Check Check the machine grounding. Check Replace the 1-chip microprocessor chip. When
and and replacing, use SIM66-42 to rewrite the 1-chip
remedy remedy microprocessor program.
Case 4 Cause FAX unit ROM trouble/ROM pin breakage Case 3 Cause FAX PWB 1-chip microprocessor access circuit
Check Check the FAX unit PWB ROM. trouble
and Check Replace the FAX PWB.
remedy and
remedy

F6-97 The FAX PWB does not match with the H3-00 Fusing section high temperature
machine model. trouble (TH_UM)
Trouble content The FAX PWB identification model does not match Trouble content
with the machine model. Detail PCU
Section FAX Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Case 1 Cause An improper type of FAX PWB is installed to the Thermistor trouble.
machine. PCU PWB trouble
Check Replace the FAX PWB with a proper one. Connection trouble of the fusing section connector
and and the harness.
remedy HL PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.
F6-98 Combination error between the FAX- Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Replace the thermistor.
BOX destination information and the Replace the PCU PWB.
machine destination information. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the HL PWB.
Trouble content Combination error between the FAX PWB destination
information and the machine destination information.
Section FAX
H3-01 Fusing section high temperature
Case 1 Cause Combination error between the destination trouble (TH_US)
information written in EEPROM on the FAX PWB and
the destination information of the machine (set with
Trouble content
SIM26-6).
Detail PCU
Check 1) Check the destination of the FAX PWB.
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
and 2) Check the destination of the machine. (SIM26-6)
Thermistor trouble.
remedy 3) Use a proper combination of the machine and
PCU PWB trouble.
the FAX PWB.
HL PWB trouble. Fusing section connector connection
trouble.
HL PWB trouble.
H2-00 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM) Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.
Trouble content Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Detail PCU Check connection of the thermistor and the harness.
Cause Thermistor trouble. Check the PCU PWB thermistor input circuit section.
PCU PWB trouble (When the lamp is ON:) Check the HL PWB and the
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. PCU PWB lamp circuit.
Fusing unit not installed. Replace the thermistor, the HL PWB, and the PCU
PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
H4-00 Fusing section low temperature
trouble (TH_UM)
H2-01 Thermistor open trouble (TH_US)
Trouble content
Detail PCU Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
Cause Thermistor trouble. level within the specified time from turning ON the
PCU PWB trouble. power relay.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Thermistor trouble.
Fusing unit not installed. Heater lamp trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor. PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Thermostat trouble.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Connector, harness connection trouble.
HL PWB trouble.
Interlock switch trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
Replace the heater lamp.
Replace the thermostat.
Replace the HL PWB.
Replace the interlock switch.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.

H4-01 Fusing section low temperature H7-11 Recovery error from low fuser temp.
trouble (TH_US) (TH_US)

Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the specified Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
level within the specified time from turning ON the level within the specified time from stopping a job due
power relay. to fall in the fusing temperature.
Thermistor trouble. Thermistor trouble.
Heater lamp trouble. Heater lamp trouble.
PCU PWB trouble PCU PWB trouble
Thermostat trouble. Thermostat trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble.
HL PWB trouble. HL PWB trouble.
Interlock switch trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor. Replace the heater lamp.
Replace the heater lamp. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the thermostat.
Replace the thermostat. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the HL PWB.
Replace the HL PWB. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
Replace the interlock switch. heater lamp.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. L1-00 Scanner feed trouble
Trouble content
H5-01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach
Detail SCU
jam Cause Scanner feed is not completed within the specified
time.
Trouble content Scanner unit trouble.
Detail PCU SCU PWB trouble
Cause A fusing jam is not canceled completely. (A jam paper Scanner control PWB trouble.
remains.) Harness and connector connection trouble.
POD1 sensor trouble. Scanner home position sensor trouble.
Fusing unit installation trouble. Scanner motor trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation.
PCU PWB trouble Replace the scanner unit.
Check & Remedy Replace the POD1 sensor. Replace the SCU PWB.
Check the installing position of the fusing unit. Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Replace the fusing unit. Replace the scanner home position sensor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the scanner motor.
L3-00 Scanner return trouble
H7-10 Recovery error from low fuser temp. Trouble content

(TH_UM) Detail SCU
Cause Scanner return is not completed within the specified
time.
Trouble content
Scanner unit trouble.
Detail PCU SCU PWB trouble
Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the specified Scanner control PWB trouble.
level within the specified time from stopping a job due Harness and connector connection trouble.
to fall in the fusing temperature. Scanner home position sensor trouble.
Thermistor trouble. Scanner motor trouble.
Heater lamp trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation.
PCU PWB trouble Replace the scanner unit.
Thermostat trouble. Replace the SCU PWB.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
HL PWB trouble. Replace the scanner home position sensor.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor. Replace the scanner motor.
Replace the heater lamp.
Replace the thermostat. L4-01 Main motor trouble
Replace the HL PWB.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Trouble content
heater lamp. Detail PCU
Cause Main motor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the main motor.

L4-02 Drum motor trouble L4-08 Waste toner transport trouble

Cause The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the Cause Drum motor trouble.
drum motor. Waste toner transport pipe clogging.
Drum motor trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Waste toner lock sensor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the drum motor.
Developing unit trouble. Replace the drum motor.
Drum unit trouble. Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the drum Check the waste toner transport pipe for clogging.
motor. Replace the waste toner lock sensor.
Replace the drum motor. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the developing unit. L4-30 MFP fan motor trouble
Replace the drum unit.
Trouble content
L4-03 Fusing motor trouble Detail MFP
Cause Fan motor trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.Harness and connector connection
Trouble content trouble.
Detail PCU PCU PWB trouble
Cause The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
fusing motor. Replace the fan motor.
Fusing motor trouble. Replace the MFP PWB.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the fusing
motor.
Replace the Fusing motor. L4-31 Fusing section cooling fan (CFM-U1/3)
trouble
Trouble content
L4-04 Developing motor trouble Detail PCU
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
specified time in the fusing section cooling fan
Trouble content
operation.
Detail PCU
Fusing section cooling fan trouble.
Cause The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the PCU PWB trouble.
developing motor. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Developing motor trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the fan.
PCU PWB trouble
Replace the fusing section cooling fan.
Developing unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the developing
motor.
Replace the developing motor.
L4-32 Power supply cooling fan
Replace the PCU PWB. (CFM-DC1/DC2) trouble
Trouble content
Detail PCU
L4-06 Transfer separation motor trouble Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
specified time in the power cooling fan operation.
Trouble content Power cooling fan trouble.
Detail PCU PCU PWB trouble.
Cause Transfer separation motor trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the power cooling fan.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-3 to check the operation of the transfer Replace the PCU PWB.
separation motor. Check/replace the connector or the harness.
Replace the transfer separation motor.

L4-35 Fusing exhaust fan (VFM-BKR) trouble L4-46 Developing section cooling fan
(CFM-DV) trouble
Trouble content
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the Detail PCU
specified time in the fusing exhaust fan operation.
Fusing exhaust fan trouble.
specified time in the developing section cooling fan
PCU PWB trouble.
operation.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Developing section cooling fan trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the harness. PCU PWB trouble.
Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Replace the fusing exhaust.
Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Replace the developing section cooling fan.
L4-38 Fusing section cooling fan (CFM-U4)
trouble
L4-50 Process cooling fan (CFM-R1/2/3)
Trouble content trouble
Detail PCU
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the Trouble content
specified time in the fusing section cooling fan Detail PCU
operation.
specified time in the process cooling fan operation.
PCU PWB trouble.
Process cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Replace the process cooling fan.
L4-40 Process exhaust fan (VFM-EX1/2/3)

trouble L4-56 Fusing section cooling fan (CFM-U2)
trouble
Trouble content
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the Detail PCU
specified time in the process exhaust fan operation.
Process exhaust fan trouble.
specified time in the fusing section cooling fan
PCU PWB trouble.
operation.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the harness. PCU PWB trouble.
Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Replace the process exhaust fan.
L4-43 Paper cooling fan trouble
Trouble content L4-58 Process exhaust fan (VFM-BKL)

Detail PCU trouble
specified time in the paper cooling fan operation.
Trouble content
Paper cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Detail PCU
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness. specified time in the process exhaust fan operation.
Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor. Process exhaust fan trouble.
Replace the paper cooling fan. PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Replace the process exhaust fan.

L6-10 Polygon motor trouble U1-01 Battery trouble
Trouble content Trouble content Backup SRAM battery voltage fall.

Detail PCU Detail MFP
Cause The motor does not reach the specified rpm in 8 sec Cause Battery life
after starting rotation of the polygon motor. Battery circuit abnormality
Polygon motor trouble. Check & Remedy Check to confirm that the battery voltage is about 2.0V
LSU control PWB trouble. or above.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon
motor. U2-00 MFP EEPROM read/write error
Replace the polygon motor.
Replace the LSU. Trouble content
Replace the LSU control PWB. Detail MFP
Cause MFP PWB EEPROM trouble.
EEPROM socket contact trouble.
L8-01 Full wave signal detection error MFP PWB trouble.
Strong external noises.
Check & Remedy Replace the MFP PWB EEPROM.
Trouble content Replace the MFP PWB.
Detail PCU Check the power environment.
Cause No full wave signal is detected.
PCU PWB trouble
Power unit trouble. U2-05 HDD/MFP PWB SRAM contents
inconsistency
Replace the power unit.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause The HDD or the MFP PWB which differs from that
L8-02 Full wave signal error before turning OFF the power is installed.
HDD trouble.
Trouble content MFP PWB trouble.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
If there is backup data (export data by device cloning),
Cause An abnormality in the full wave signal frequency is
import it.
detected. (The frequency is detected as 65Hz or
above, or 45Hz or less.)
PCU PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble. U2-10 MFP PWB SRAM user authentication
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. index check sum error
Power frequency, waveform abnormality.
Trouble content
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Detail MFP
Check the power waveform. Cause SRAM user index information (user authentication
basic data) check sum error.
MFP PWB SRAM trouble.
L8-20 Communication error of MFP PWB/
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
Mother board Transfer the user index information data in the HDD to
the SRAM.
Trouble content Replace the MFP PWB.
Detail MFP
Cause Mother board PWB - MFP PWB connection trouble.
MFP PWB trouble. U2-11 MFP PWB EEPROM counter check
Mother trouble. sum error
Check & Remedy Check connection between the mother board and the
MFP PWB.
Trouble content
Check the ground of the main unit.
Replace the MFPC PWB. Detail MFP
Replace the mother board. Cause MFP PWB EEPROM trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
PC-- Personal counter not detected
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause The personal counter is not installed.
The personal counter is not detected.

U2-12 FAX SRAM check sum error U2-30 MFP PWB and PCU PWB
manufacturing No. data inconsistency
Trouble content
Cause Check sum error of the user index information (user Detail MFP
authentication basic data) in the SRAM.
Cause Inconsistency between the manufacturing No. saved
in the PCU PWB and that in the MFP PWB.
When replacing the PCU PWB or the MFP PWB, the
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error. EEPROM which was mounted on the PWB before
Transfer the user index information data in the HDD to replacement is not mounted on the new PWB.
the SRAM. MFP PWB trouble.
Replace the MFP PWB. PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
Check to confirm that the EEPROM which was
U2-22 MFP PWB SRAM memory check sum mounted on the PWB before replacement is mounted
error on the new PWB.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause The identifier which controls the communication U2-50 HDD/Flash memory registration data
management table stored in the SRAM and the FAX
soft switch is not detected correctly.
check sum error
MFP PWB trouble. Trouble content HDD/MFP Flash data check sum error (MFP PWB
Strong external noises. detection)
Check & Remedy Since the data of the communication management Detail MFP
table and the FAX soft switch stored in the SRAM are Cause HDD/MFP PWB Flash memory data check sum error
initialized when an error occurs, register the deleted (when HDD is not installed)
data again individually. • Address book
Use SIM16 to cancel the error. • Image send series registration data (Sender record,
Replace the MFP PWB. meta data, etc.)
• Job end list (FAX/Internet FAX/scanner job only),
etc.
U2-23 MFP PWB SRAM memory individual Error in write/read circuit to HDD or MFP Flash
data check sum error memory
Malfunctions caused by noises
MFP PWB HSS access circuit error
Trouble content MFP PWB SRAM memory individual data check sum Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble.
error. Check the following data for any abnormality. If there
Detail MFP is any abnormality, reset and register the content.
Cause The check sum value for individual data of the • Address book
communication table and the sender registration does • Image send series registration data (Sender record,
not match. meta data, etc.)
MFP PWB SRAM trouble. • Job end list (FAX/Internet FAX/scanner job only),
MFP PWB trouble. etc.
Strong external noises. Replace the HDD.
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power to initialize the data related to Replace the MFP PWB.
the content of check sum error.
Since the registered contents are deleted, register the
deleted contents again. U2-60 Water Mark check error
Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
U2-24 MFP PWB SRAM memory user Cause Watermark data trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-5 to upload the watermark data.
authentication counter check sum
error
U2-80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
Trouble content
Cause MFP PWB SRAM trouble. Detail SCU
MFP PWB trouble. Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
Strong external noises. SCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error. EEPROM socket contact trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Put down the counter/adjustment values in the
simulation to prevent against loss of the counter data
and the adjustment values.

U2-81 SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error U5-30 Document feed unit tray lift up trouble

Detail SCU Detail SCU
Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble. Cause STUD does not turn ON 5 times continuously within
Installation of non-initialized EEPROM. the specified time.
SCU PWB trouble. STUD/STLD sensor trouble.
EEPROM socket contact trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM. DSPF PWB trouble.
Replace the SCU PWB. Check & Remedy Replace the STUD/STLD sensor.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Put down the counter/adjustment values in the Replace the DSPF PWB.
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. U5-31 Document feed unit tray lift down
trouble
U2-90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
Trouble content
Detail SCU
Trouble content
Cause STLD does not turn OFF within the specified time.
Detail PCU
STUD/STLD sensor trouble.
Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.
DSPF PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the STUD/STLD sensor.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.
Replace the STUD/STLD.
Replace the DSPF PWB.
Put down the counter/adjustment values in the
U5-40 Document feed unit installation
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. trouble
Trouble content
U2-91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error Detail SCU
Cause When two or more document feed units are detected.
Trouble content Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Detail PCU Document feeder trouble.
Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble. Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.
PCU PWB trouble
EEPROM socket contact trouble. U6-09 LCC lift trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.
Trouble content
Put down the counter/adjustment values in the Detail PCU
simulation to prevent against loss of the counter data Cause No change in the lift motor rotation sensor signal is
and the adjustment values. detected within the specified time after outputting the
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. lift motor ON signal.
The lift motor rotation sensor signal varies though the
lift motor is stopped.
Lift motor rotation sensor trouble.
U5-00 Document feed unit communication LCC control PWB trouble
error Lift mechanism trouble.
Lift motor trouble.
Trouble content
Check & Remedy Use SIM4-2 and 4-3 to check the operation of the
Detail SCU
sensor and the lift motor.
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble.
Replace the lift motor rotation sensor.
SCU PWB trouble.
Replace the LCC control PWB.
DSPF PWB trouble.
Replace the lift mechanism.
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power. Replace the lift motor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the SCU PWB. Use SIM15 to cancel the trouble.
Replace the DSPF PWB.
U5-16 Document feed unit fan motor trouble
Trouble content
Detail SCU
Cause Fan motor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM2-3 to check the operation.
Check the DSPF PWB and the driver PWB connection
of the connector and the harness.

U6-20 PCU PWB - LCC communication error U6-24 A3LCC tray lock trouble

Cause Error when testing the communication line after Cause Tray lock mechanism breakdown.
turning ON the power or canceling the simulation. Tray lock sensor trouble.
LCC control PWB trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. LCC control PWB trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Check & Remedy Check the tray lock mechanism.
Strong external noises. Replace the tray lock sensor and the LCC control
Improper combination between the main unit and the PWB.
LCC. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power.
Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line. U6-51 LCC - Main unit combination trouble
Trouble content
Detail PCU
U6-21 LCC paper transport motor trouble Cause Improper combination between the main unit and the
LCC.
LCC control PWB trouble.
Trouble content Check & Remedy Install a LCC which is proper for the main unit mode.
Detail PCU Replace the LCC control PWB.
Cause No change in the paper transport motor rotation
sensor signal is detected within the specified time
after outputting the paper transport motor ON signal. U7-50 MFP PWB - Vendor machine
The paper transport motor rotation sensor signal
varies though the paper transport motor is stopped. communication error
Paper transport motor rotation sensor trouble.
LCC control PWB trouble. Trouble content Communication error between the MFP and the serial
Mechanism trouble. vendor.
Paper transport motor trouble. Detail MFP
Cause Improper setting of the vendor machine specifications
Check & Remedy Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the paper (SIMI26-3).
transport motor. Vendor machine trouble.
Replace the paper transport motor. MFP PWB trouble.
Replace the LCC control PWB. Connector, harness connection trouble.
Replace the mechanism. Strong external noises.
Replace the paper transport motor.
Check & Remedy Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power.
communication line. Change the specifications of the
vendor machine (SIM26-3).
U6-22 LCC 24V power trouble Replace the MFP PWB.
Trouble content
Detail PCU U7-51 Vendor machine error
Cause The DC24V power is not supplied from the main unit
to the LCC. Trouble content
Connector, harness connection trouble. Detail MFP (Notification of a trouble from the serial vendor)
Cause Serial vendor machine trouble.
Power source unit trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness in the power
Check & Remedy "Err.XX" is displayed on the operation panel of the
line.
vendor. (XX is the detail code.)
Repair the vendor machine referring to the detail
code.
communication line.
U6-23 A3LCC tray descending trouble
Trouble content UC-02 IPD/DOCC ASIC IPD section error

Detail PCU
Cause Reverse-winding detection SW-ON. Trouble content
The wire is wound reversely. Detail SCU
Reverse-winding detection SW trouble.
Cause SCU PWB trouble (IPD/DOCC ASIC trouble).
Connector, harness connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Check the wire.
Replace the reverse-winding SW and the LCC control
PWB.
UC-20 IPD/DOCC ASIC DOCC section error
Trouble content
Detail SCU
Cause SCU PWB trouble (IPD/DOCC ASIC trouble).
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB.

A0-01 PCU PWB ROM error A0-12 Firmware version inconsistency
(MFP - SCU)
Trouble content
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by Detail MFP
interruption of the power during the version-up
Cause Firmware combination error between the MFP and the
operation, etc.
SCU.
ROM trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFP and the
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the version-up procedure
SCU.
again.
Replace the ROM.
A0-15 DSK BOOT version disagreement

A0-02 SCU PWB ROM error
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Trouble content
Cause Firmware combination error between the DSK and the
Detail MFP
BOOT.
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by
Check & Remedy Check the combination between the DSK and the
interruption of the power during the version-up
BOOT.
operation, etc.
ROM trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the version-up procedure
again.
A0-20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
Replace the ROM. version (MFP)
Trouble content
A0-04 ACU PWB ROM error (when scanner Detail MFP
expansion kit is installed) Cause Inconsistency between the MFP firmware version and
the EEPROM data version.
Trouble content Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
Detail MFP
Cause The firmware update is failed because of turning OFF
the power during the firmware update operation, etc. A0-21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
ROM trouble. version (PCU)
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to execute update of the firmware.
Replace the ROM.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Inconsistency between the PCU firmware version and
A0-10 MFP PWB ROM error the EEPROM data version.
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause Firmware combination error between the MFP and the A0-22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
image ROM (color correction ROM).
version (SCU)
Check & Remedy Upgrade the firmware versions of the MFP and the
image ROM (color correction ROM).
Trouble content
Detail SCU
A0-11 Firmware version inconsistency Cause Inconsistency between the SCU firmware version and
the EEPROM data version.
(MFP - PCU)
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause Firmware combination error between the MFP and the
PCU.
Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFP and the
PCU.

4. Paper JAM code
A. JAM cause code list
(1) Main unit
JAM detection method JAM margin JAM detection

Basic distance
JAM code JAM content JAM detection JAM judgment distance (B) distance (A+B)
(A) [mm]
start trigger condition [mm] [mm]
TRAY1 Tandem tray 1 paper feed JAM T1PFC On T1PPD On 61.1mm 65.0mm + 1sec 126.1mm + 1sec
(T1PPD not-reached)
T1PPD_S T1PPD remaining JAM T1PFC Off T1PPD Off 72.3mm 65.0mm 137.3mm
PFD2_NT1 PFD2 not-reached JAM T1PPD On PFD2 On 78.6mm 65.0mm 143.6mm
(Tandem tray 1 feed paper)
PFD2_ST1 PFD2 remaining JAM T1PPD Off PFD2 Off 78.6mm 65.0mm 143.6mm
PFD2_NM1 PFD2 not-reached JAM M1PFD On PFD2 On 210.7mm 65.0mm 275.7mm
(Multi-stage tray 1 feed paper)
PFD2_NM2 PFD2 not-reached JAM M1PFD On PFD2 On 210.7mm 65.0mm 275.7mm
PFD2_NAD PFD2 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper) APPD2 On PFD2 On 176.8mm 65.0mm 241.8mm
PFD2_SM1 PFD2 remaining JAM M1PFD Off PFD2 Off 210.7mm 65.0mm 275.7mm
PFD2_SM2 PFD2 remaining JAM M1PFD Off PFD2 Off 210.7mm 65.0mm 275.7mm
PFD2_SAD PFD2 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper) APPD2 On PFD2 On 176.8mm 65.0mm 241.8mm
TRAY2 Tandem tray 2 paper feed JAM T2PFC On MPRD1 On 109.6mm 65.0mm + 1sec 174.6mm + 1sec
(MPRD1 not-reached)
MPRD1_S2 MPRD1 remaining JAM T2PFC Off MPRD1 Off 120.8mm 65.0mm 185.8mm
MPRD1_NM MPRD1 not-reached JAM MPFD2 On MPRD1 On 124.6mm 65.0mm 189.6mm
(Manual feed tray feed paper)
MPRD1_NL MPRD1 not-reached JAM (LCC feed paper) MPFD2 On MPRD1 On 124.6mm 65.0mm 189.6mm
MPRD1_SM MPRD1 remaining JAM MPFD2 Off MPRD1 Off 124.6mm 65.0mm 189.6mm
MPRD1_SL MPRD1 remaining JAM (LCC feed paper) MPFD2 Off MPRD1 Off 124.6mm 65.0mm 189.6mm
MPRD2_N2 MPRD2 not-reached JAM MPRD1 On MPRD2 On 154.4mm 65.0mm 219.4mm
MPRD2_NM MPRD2 not-reached JAM MPRD1 On MPRD2 On 154.4mm 65.0mm 219.4mm
MPRD2_NL MPRD2 not-reached JAM (LCC feed paper) MPRD1 On MPRD2 On 154.4mm 65.0mm 219.4mm
MPRD2_S2 MPRD2 remaining JAM MPRD1 Off MPRD2 Off 154.4mm 65.0mm 219.4mm
MPRD2_SM MPRD2 remaining JAM MPRD1 Off MPRD2 Off 154.4mm 65.0mm 219.4mm
MPRD2_SL MPRD2 remaining JAM (LCC feed paper) MPRD1 Off MPRD2 Off 154.4mm 65.0mm 219.4mm
MPFD2_NM MPFD2 not-reached JAM MPFD1 On MPFD2 On 126.0mm 65.0mm 191.0mm
MPFD2_NL MPFD2 not-reached JAM (LCC feed paper) LPPD On MPFD2 On 162.6mm 65.0mm 227.6mm
MPFD2_SM MPFD2 remaining JAM MPFD1 Off MPFD2 Off 126.0mm 65.0mm 191.0mm
MPFD2_SL MPFD2 remaining JAM (LCC feed paper) LPPD Off MPFD2 Off 162.6mm 65.0mm 227.6mm
PPD_NT1 PPD not-reached JAM PFD2 On PPD On 53.2mm 65.0mm 118.2mm
PPD_NT2 PPD not-reached JAM MPRD2 On PPD On 79.0mm 65.0mm 144.0mm
PPD_NM1 PPD not-reached JAM PFD2 On PPD On 53.2mm 65.0mm 118.2mm
PPD_NM2 PPD not-reached JAM PFD2 On PPD On 53.2mm 65.0mm 118.2mm
PPD_NMF PPD not-reached JAM MPRD2 On PPD On 79.0mm 65.0mm 144.0mm
PPD_NLC PPD not-reached JAM (LCC feed paper) MPRD2 On PPD On 79.0mm 65.0mm 144.0mm
PPD_NAD PPD not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper) PFD2 On PPD On 53.2mm 65.0mm 118.2mm
PPD_ST1 PPD remaining JAM PFD2 Off PPD Off 53.2mm 65.0mm 118.2mm
PPD_ST2 PPD remaining JAM MPRD2 Off PPD Off 79.0mm 65.0mm 144.0mm
PPD_SM1 PPD remaining JAM PFD2 Off PPD Off 53.2mm 65.0mm 118.2mm
PPD_SM2 PPD remaining JAM PFD2 Off PPD Off 53.2mm 65.0mm 118.2mm
PPD_SMF PPD remaining JAM MPRD2 Off PPD Off 79.0mm 65.0mm 144.0mm
PPD_SLC PPD remaining JAM (LCC feed paper) MPRD2 Off PPD Off 79.0mm 65.0mm 144.0mm
PPD_SAD PPD remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper) PFD2 Off PPD Off 53.2mm 65.0mm 118.2mm

JAM detection method JAM margin JAM detection
Basic distance
JAM code JAM content JAM detection JAM judgment distance (B) distance (A+B)
(A) [mm]
start trigger condition [mm] [mm]
PPD_PRI PPD JAM The IMAGE_ The – – –
(The IMAGE_PREPARE request is not sent PREPARE END_IMAGE_
from the ICU.) command is sent PREPARE
from the PCU to command is
the ICU. received from the
ICU. (50 sec)
POD1_N POD1 not-reached JAM PPDOn POD1 On 313.5mm 65.0mm 378.5mm
POD1_S POD1 remaining JAM PPDOff POD1 Off 313.5mm 65.0mm 378.5mm
POD1_FUS POD1 JAM Warm-up Fusing thermistor – – –
(Detection of winding around the fusing unit) temperature
abnormality
POD2_N POD2 not-reached JAM POD1 On POD2 On 69.3mm 65.0mm 134.3mm
POD2_SR POD2 remaining JAM POD1 Off POD2 Off 60.0mm 65.0mm 125.0mm
(When discharging to the right side of the
machine)
POD2_SL POD2 remaining JAM Reversing start POD2 Off Paper transport 65.0mm Paper transport
(When discharging to the left side of the direction length - direction length -
machine) 14.4 14.4 + 65.0
AINPD_N ADU paper entry sensor not-reached JAM Reversing start AINPDOn 71.1mm 65.0mm 136.1mm
AINPD_S ADU paper entry sensor remaining JAM POD2 Off AINPDOff 85.5mm 65.0mm 150.5mm
APPD1_N ADU transport sensor 1 not-reached JAM AINPD On APPD1 On 169.7mm 65.0mm 234.7mm
APPD1_S ADU transport sensor 1 remaining JAM AINPD Off APPD1 Off 169.7mm 65.0mm 234.7mm
APPD2_N ADU transport sensor 2 not-reached JAM APPD1 On APPD2 On 175.0mm 65.0mm 240.0mm
APPD2_S ADU transport sensor 2 remaining JAM APPD1 Off APPD2 Off 175.0mm 65.0mm 240.0mm
DESK1 Multi-stage tray 1 paper feed JAM M1PFC On M1PFD On 113.5mm 65.0mm + 1sec 178.5mm + 1sec
(M1PFD not-reached)
M1PFD_N2 M1PFD not-reached JAM M2PFD On M1PFD On 107.0mm 65.0mm 172.0mm
M1PFD_S1 M1PFD remaining JAM M1PFC Off M1PFD Off 118.7mm 65.0mm 183.7mm
M1PFD_S2 M1PFD remaining JAM M2PFD Off M1PFD Off 107.0mm 65.0mm 172.0mm
DESK2 Multi-stage tray 2 paper feed JAM M2PFC On M2PFD On 113.5mm 65.0mm + 1sec 178.5mm + 1sec
(M2PFD not-reached)
M2PFD_S M2PFD remaining JAM M2PFC Off M2PFD Off 118.7mm 65.0mm 183.7mm
BPT Manual feed tray paper feed JAM MPFPFC On MPFD1 On 58.4mm 65.0mm + 1sec 123.4 + 1sec
(MPFD1 not-reached)
MPFD1_S MPFD1 remaining JAM MPFPFC Off MPFD1 Off 68.4mm 65.0mm 133.4mm
LPPD_N LPPD not-reached JAM Reception of the LPPD On 85.0mm 65.0mm 150.0mm
paper feed start
command from
the LCC.
LPPD_S LPPD remaining JAM Reception of the LPPD Off 85.0mm 65.0mm 150.0mm
paper feed
complete
command from
the LCC.
*1: The distance (length) divided by the process speed is the time.
Process speed 62 PPM Model 335mm/sec
75 PPM Model 395mm/sec

(2) DSPF
JAM detection method

JAM code JAM content
JAM detection start trigger JAM judgment condition
SPPD1_N SPPD1 not-reached JAM Paper feed start SPPD1 ON
(When the document width is more than B5 size.)
SPPD2_N SPPD2 not-reached JAM Paper feed start SPPD2 ON
(When the document width is less than B5 size.)
SPPD1 ON SPPD2 ON
SPPD3_N SPPD3 not-reached JAM Restart at the temporal stop position SPPD3 ON
SPPD5_N SPPD5 not-reached JAM SPPD3 ON SPPD5 ON
SPOD_N SPOD not-reached JAM SPPD5 ON SPOD ON
SPPD1_S SPPD1 remaining JAM SPPD1 ON SPPD1 OFF
SPPD2_S SPPD2 remaining JAM SPPD2 ON SPPD2 OFF
(When the document width is less than B5 size.)
SPPD1 OFF SPPD2 OFF
SPPD3_S SPPD3 remaining JAM SPPD2 OFF SPPD3 OFF
SPPD5_S SPPD5 remaining JAM SPPD3 OFF SPPD5 OFF
SPOD_S SPOD remaining JAM SPPD5 OFF SPOD OFF
SPSD_SCN Exposure start notification Arrival at temporal stop position Exposure start command from ICU to SCU
timer end no reception time-out (120 sec)
P_SHORT Short size JAM SPPD3 ON When the document length is less than 120.0mm.
ICU_REQ ICU factor stop JAM — Stop by a job stop request commend from ICU to SCU
STOP_JAM Emergency stop JAM — Trouble mode transition request from ICU to SCU
Emergency stop by a command
(3) Option

JAM code Content JAM detection timer start
JAM judge detector
trigger
FIN FPED_N Inlet port not-reached JAM FPED ON FPED does not turn ON within the specified time.
FPED_S Inlet port remaining JAM FPED OFF FPED does not turn OFF within the specified time.
FSPPD_N Saddle not-reached JAM FSPPD ON FSPPD does not turn ON within the specified time.
FSPPD_S Saddle remaining JAM FSPPD OFF FSPPD does not turn OFF within the specified time.
FATPD_S Bundle discharge remaining JAM FATPD OFF FATPD does not turn OFF within the specified time.
FSMJ Staple motor JAM Staple operation start FSHS does not turn ON within the specified time.
FPMJ Punch motor JAM Punching operation start FPCHPS does not turn ON within the specified time.
FIN_TIME Finisher paper early reaching JAM POD2 ON (front paper) POD2 turns ON earlier than the specified timing.
(detection paper)
FIN_PAOF Paper attribute data reception — Reception of paper attribute data exceeds the allowable
overflow buffer limit.
FPJD_T_N Interface not-reached JAM FPJD_T ON FPJD_T does not turn ON within the specified time.
FPJD_T_S Interface remaining JAM FPJD_T OFF FPJD_T does not turn OFF within the specified time.
FPJD_N Paper exit not-reached JAM FPJD ON FPJD does not turn ON within the specified time.
FPJD_S Paper exit remaining JAM FPJD OFF FPJD does not turn OFF within the specified time.
PPD_FIN PPD JAM —
(Finisher communication abnormality)
FDRLMJ Delivery roller lift motor JAM — Delivery roller lift motor trouble detection (during JOB)
FGMJ Gripper motor JAM — Gripper motor trouble detection (during JOB)
FGAMJ Gripper arm motor JAM — Gripper arm motor trouble detection (during JOB)
FARLMJ Paper alignment roller lift motor JAM — Paper alignment roller lift motor trouble detection
(during JOB)
FPTPDMJ Paper tail push down motor JAM — Paper tail push down motor trouble detection
(during JOB)
FDPHMJ Delivery paper holding motor JAM — Delivery paper holding motor trouble detection
(during JOB)
FPTHMJ Paper tail holding motor JAM — Paper tail holding motor trouble detection (during JOB)

JAM code Content JAM detection timer start
JAM judge detector
trigger
INSERTER REG_SEN_N Registration sensor not-reached JAM REG_SEN ON REG_SEN does not turn ON within the specified time.
REG_SEN_S Registration sensor remaining JAM REG_SEN OFF REG_SEN does not turn OFF within the specified time.
TIM_SEN_N Timing sensor not-reached JAM TIM_SEN ON TIM_SEN does not turn ON within the specified time.
TIM_SEN_S Timing sensor remaining JAM TIM_SEN OFF TIM_SEN does not turn OFF within the specified time.
HI_SEN_NI Paper exit not-reached JAM (When HI_SEN ON HI_SEN does not turn ON within the specified time from
feeding paper from the inserter.) the paper feed motor ON.
HI_SEN_NP Paper exit not-reached JAM (When HI_SEN_ON HI_SEN does not turn ON within the specified time after
feeding paper from the machine.) reception of the machine paper exit command.
HI_SEN_S Paper exit remaining JAM HI_SEN OFF HI_SEN does not turn OFF within the specified time
from TIM_SEN OFF.
H_SEN_NF Reverse sensor not-reaching JAM H_SEN ON HI_SEN does not turn ON within the specified time from
(When entering the reverse path) H_MOT ON.
H_SEN_NB Reverse sensor not-reaching JAM H_SEN ON HI_SEN does not turn ON within the specified time from
(When discharging from the reverse H_MOT ON.
path)
H_SEN_SF Reverse sensor remaining JAM H_SEN OFF HI_SEN does not turn OFF within the specified time
(When entering the reverse path) from TIM_SEN OFF.
H_SEN_SB Reverse sensor remaining JAM H_SEN OFF H_SEN does not turn OFF within the specified time from
(When discharging from the reverse H_SEN ON.
path)
LCC LCC Side LCC paper feed JAM LPFC ON (paper feed start) LPFD does not turn ON within the specified time.
(LPFD not-reached)
LPFD_SL LPFD remaining JAM LPFD ON LPFD does not turn OFF within the specified time.
(Side LCC feed paper)

5. Necessary works when replacing the PWB and the HDD
A. MFP substrate replacement procedure (work flow)
㩿㪥㫆㫋㪼䋩㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉㪼㪻㩷㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㫀㫅㪽㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫎㫀㫃㫃㩷㫅㫆㫋㩷㪹㪼㩷㫉㪼㪺㫆㫍㪼㫉㪼㪻㩷㫀㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㫀㫊㩷㪸㪽㪽㪼㪺㫋㪼㪻㩷㪹㫐㩷㪬㪉㪄㪇㪌㩷㫋㫉㫆㫌㪹㫃㪼㪅㩷㩿㪁㪈㪀
㪠㫊㩷㫀㫋㩷㫅㪼㪺㪼㫊㫊㪸㫉㫐㩷㫋㫆㩷
㫉㪼㫇㫃㪸㪺㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㪖
㪰㪜㪪
㪠㫊㩷㫀㫋㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪥㪦
㪟㪛㪛㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㫌㫇㩷㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷
㪧㪮㪙㩷㩿㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪈㪀㪖
㪠㫊㩷㫀㫋㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷
㪹㪸㪺㫂㫌㫇㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪬㪪㪙㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㩷㪥㪦
㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㩿㫊㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪉㪀㪖
㪰㪜㪪
㪰㪜㪪
㪈㪉㪊
㪓㪚㪸㫊㪼㩷㪈㩷㩽㩷㪉㪕㪓㪚㪸㫊㪼㩷㪊㪕
㪠㫋㩷㫀㫊㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㩷㫌㫇㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉㪼㪻㩷㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㪠㫋㩷㫀㫊㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㫂㪼㪼㫇㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㪃㩷㪹㫌㫋㩷
㫀㫅㪽㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪹㫐㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㪽㪼㫉㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉㪼㪻㩷㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷
㪸㫅㪻㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㪅㫀㫅㪽㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪺㪸㫅㫅㫆㫋㩷㪹㪼㩷㫉㪼㪺㫆㫍㪼㫉㪼㪻㪅㩷㩿㪁㪈㪀㩷
㩿㪥㫆㫋㪼㪀㩷㪥㪼㫍㪼㫉㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪪㫀㫄㪈㪍㩷㪼㫍㪼㫅㩷㫀㪽㩷㩹㪬㪉㪄㪇㪌㩹㩷㫋㫉㫆㫌㪹㫃㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㫀㫅㪻㫀㪺㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㪸㪽㫋㪼㫉㩷㫋㫌㫉㫅㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫇㫆㫎㪼㫉㪅
㪫㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉㪼㪻㩷㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㫀㫅㪽㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫎㫀㫃㫃㩷㪹㪼㩷㪻㪼㫃㪼㫋㪼㪻㪅
㪈㪅㩷㪜㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪇㪈㩷㩿㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㫄㫀㫊㫊㫀㫆㫅㪀㩷㪹㪼㪽㫆㫉㪼㩷㫉㪼㫇㫃㪸㪺㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㪃㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㩹㪘㪣㪣㸢㪟㪛㪛㪃㩹㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㪽㪼㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤
㩷㩷㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫋㫆㩷㪟㪛㪛㪅
㪉㪅㩷㪘㫋㫋㪸㪺㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㫃㪸㫊㪿㩷㪩㪦㪤㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㪼㫋㪺㪅㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫉㫍㫀㪺㪼㩷㫇㪸㫉㫋㫊㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㩷㫀㫋
㪈㩷㩷㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㫀㫅㫌㫅㫀㫋㪅
㪥㫆㫋㪼㪑㩷㪞㫉㫆㫌㫅㪻㩷㫐㫆㫌㫉㩷㪹㫆㪻㫐㩷㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㪾㫉㫆㫌㫅㪻㫀㫅㪾㩷㪹㪸㫅㪻㩷㪻㫌㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫎㫆㫉㫂㪅
㪘㫋㩷㫋㪿㫀㫊㩷㫋㫀㫄㫀㫅㪾㪃㩷㪝㪍㪄㪉㪈㩷㫄㪸㫐㩷㫆㪺㪺㫌㫉㪅㩷㪮㪿㪼㫋㪿㪼㫉㩷㫀㫋㩷㫄㪸㫐㩷㫆㪺㪺㫌㫉㩷㫆㫉㩷㫅㫆㫋㪃㩷㪾㫆㩷㫋㫆㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㫇㫉㫆㪺㪼㪻㫌㫉㪼㩷㪊㪅
㪊㪅㩷㪜㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㩹㪟㪛㪛㸢㪘㪣㪣㩹㩷㪹㫐㩷㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪇㪈㩷㩷㩿㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㫄㫀㫊㫊㫀㫆㫅㪀㩷㫋㫆㩷㫉㪼㫋㫌㫉㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㫀㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪟㪛㪛㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼
㩷㩷㩷㫅㪼㫎㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㪅
㪁㩷㪧㫃㪼㪸㫊㪼㩷㪹㪼㩷㪸㫎㪸㫉㪼㩷㫋㪿㪸㫋㩷㫀㪽㩷㩹㪘㪣㪣㸢㪟㪛㪛㩹㩷㫀㫊㩷㫅㫆㫋㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㪻㩷㪹㫐㩷㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪇㪈㩷㩿㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㫄㫀㫊㫊㫀㫆㫅㪀㪃㩷㪹㫃㪸㫅㫂㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫎㫀㫃㫃㩷㪹㪼㩷㪼㫏㫇㫆㫉㫋㪼㪻㩷㫋㫆
㩷㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㫎㪿㪼㫅㩷㩹㪟㪛㪛㸢㪘㪣㪣㩹㩷㫀㫊㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㪻㪅
㩿㪥㫆㫋㪼㪀㩷㪥㪼㫍㪼㫉㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪪㫀㫄㪈㪍㩷㪼㫍㪼㫅㩷㫀㪽㩷㩹㪬㪉㪄㪇㪌㩹㩷㫋㫉㫆㫌㪹㫃㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㫀㫅㪻㫀㪺㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㪸㪽㫋㪼㫉㩷㫋㫌㫉㫅㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫇㫆㫎㪼㫉㪅
㪫㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉㪼㪻㩷㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㫀㫅㪽㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫎㫀㫃㫃㩷㪹㪼㩷㪻㪼㫃㪼㫋㪼㪻㪅
㪈㪅㩷㪜㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㩹㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩽㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪜㪯㪧㪦㪩㪫㩹㩷㪹㫐㩷㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪇㪉㩷㩿㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㩷㪟㪛㪛㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㫌㫇㪀㩷㪹㪼㪽㫆㫉㪼㩷㫉㪼㫇㫃㪸㪺㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㫋㫆
㩷㩷㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㪽㪼㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㫋㫆㩷㪬㪪㪙㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㪅
㪉㪅㩷㪘㫋㫋㪸㪺㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㫃㪸㫊㪿㩷㪩㪦㪤㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㪼㫋㪺㪅㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫉㫍㫀㪺㪼㩷㫇㪸㫉㫋㫊㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㩷㫀㫋㩷㫋㫆
㪉㩷㩷㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㫀㫅㫌㫅㫀㫋㪅
㪘㫋㩷㫋㪿㫀㫊㩷㫋㫀㫄㫀㫅㪾㪃㩷㪝㪍㪄㪉㪈㩷㫄㪸㫐㩷㫆㪺㪺㫌㫉㪅㩷㪮㪿㪼㫋㪿㪼㫉㩷㫀㫋㩷㫄㪸㫐㩷㫆㪺㪺㫌㫉㩷㫆㫉㩷㫅㫆㫋㪃㩷㪾㫆㩷㫋㫆㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㫇㫉㫆㪺㪼㪻㫌㫉㪼㩷㪊㪅
㪊㪅㩷㪜㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪪㪠㪤㪍㪉㪄㪇㪈㪅㩷㩿㪝㫆㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪬㩷㫄㫆㪻㪼㫃㪃㩷㫆㫅㫃㫐㩷㫎㪿㪼㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪟㪛㪛㩷㫀㫊㩷㫅㫆㫋㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪼㪻㪅㪀
㪋㪅㩷㪜㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㩹㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩽㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪠㪤㪧㪦㪩㪫㩹㩷㪹㫐㩷㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪇㪉㩷㩿㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㩷㪟㪛㪛㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㫌㫇㪀㩷㫋㫆㩷㫉㪼㫋㫌㫉㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤
㩷㩷㩷㫀㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪬㪪㪙㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫅㪼㫎㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㪅
㪈㪅㩷㪘㫋㫋㪸㪺㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㫃㪸㫊㪿㩷㪩㪦㪤㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㪼㫋㪺㪅㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫉㫍㫀㪺㪼㩷㫇㪸㫉㫋㫊㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㩷㫀㫋㩷㫋㫆
㩷㩷㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㫀㫅㫌㫅㫀㫋㪅
㪉㪅㩷㪜㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪪㪠㪤㪍㪉㪄㪇㪈㪅㩷㩿㪝㫆㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪬㩷㫄㫆㪻㪼㫃㪃㩷㫆㫅㫃㫐㩷㫎㪿㪼㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪟㪛㪛㩷㫀㫊㩷㫅㫆㫋㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪼㪻㪅㪀
㪊㪅㩷㪫㫌㫉㫅㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫇㫆㫎㪼㫉㪃㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪪㫀㫄㪈㪍㩷㫋㫆㩷㪺㫃㪼㪸㫉㩷㪬㪉㪄㪇㪌㩷㫋㫉㫆㫌㪹㫃㪼㪅
㪋㪅㩷㪪㪼㫋㩷㪸㫊㩷㪽㫆㫃㫃㫆㫎㫊㩷㪸㪽㫋㪼㫉㩷㫉㪼㫊㫋㪸㫉㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㫀㫅㩷㫌㫅㫀㫋㪅
㪊㪘㫋㩷㫋㪿㫀㫊㩷㫋㫀㫄㫀㫅㪾㪃㩷㪝㪍㪄㪉㪈㩷㫄㪸㫐㩷㫆㪺㪺㫌㫉㪅㩷㪮㪿㪼㫋㪿㪼㫉㩷㫀㫋㩷㫄㪸㫐㩷㫆㪺㪺㫌㫉㩷㫆㫉㩷㫅㫆㫋㪃㩷㪾㫆㩷㫋㫆㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㫇㫉㫆㪺㪼㪻㫌㫉㪼㩷㪈㪅
㩿㪈㪀㩷㪬㫊㪼㩷㪪㪠㪤㪍㪎㪄㪎㪇㩷㫋㫆㩷㪺㫃㪼㪸㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪺㫆㫅㫋㪼㫅㫋㫊㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㪪㪛㪩㪘㪤㪅
㩿㪉㪀㩷㪪㪼㫋㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪸㫇㫇㫉㫆㫇㫉㫀㪸㫋㪼㩷㪺㫆㫌㫅㫋㫉㫐㩷㪺㫆㪻㪼㩷㪹㫐㩷㪪㫀㫄㪍㪍㪄㪇㪉㩷㩿㪺㫃㪼㪸㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㫆㪽㫋㫎㪸㫉㪼㩷㫊㫎㫀㫋㪺㪿㪼㫊㩷㫉㪼㫃㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㫋㫆㩷㪝㪘㪯㪀㪅
㩿㪥㫆㫋㪼㪀㩷㪤㪸㫂㪼㩷㫊㫌㫉㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪼㫍㪼㫅㩷㫀㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㪸㫏㩷㫆㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫀㫊㩷㫅㫆㫋㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪼㪻㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㪺㪿㫀㫅㪼㪅
㩿㪊㪀㩷㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㩷㩹㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㪼㫉㩷㪼㫅㫍㫀㫉㫆㫅㫄㪼㫅㫋㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩹㩷㪸㫋㩷㪪㫐㫊㫋㪼㫄㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㪃㩷㫊㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㩷㩹㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㪼㫉㩷㫀㫅㫀㫋㫀㪸㫃㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㪃㩹㩷㫆㫇㪼㫅㩷㩹㩷㩷㪪㫋㪸㫅㪻㪸㫉㪻㩷㫇㪸㫇㪼㫉
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪽㪼㪼㪻㩷㫇㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㫊㫀㫑㪼㩹㫊㪺㫉㪼㪼㫅㪃㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫊㪼㫋㩷㪘㪋㩷㫊㫀㫑㪼㩷㫀㪽㩷㫐㫆㫌㩷㫌㫊㪼㩷㪸㫅㩷㪘㪙㪄㫋㫐㫇㪼㩷㫄㪸㪺㪿㫀㫅㪼㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫃㪼㫋㫋㪼㫉㩷㫊㫀㫑㪼㩷㫀㪽㩷㫐㫆㫌㩷㫌㫊㪼㩷㪸㫅㩷㫀㫅㪺㪿㪄㫋㫐㫇㪼
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㫄㪸㪺㪿㫀㫅㪼㪅
㩿㪁㪈㪀㩷㪠㪽㩷㫐㫆㫌㩷㪿㪸㫍㪼㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㪼㪻㩷㫌㫇㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㪹㫐㩷㫊㫋㫆㫉㪸㪾㪼㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㫌㫇㩷㩿㪮㪜㪙㪀㩷㫆㫉㩷㪻㪼㫍㫀㪺㪼㩷㪺㫃㫆㫅㫀㫅㪾㩷㩿㪮㪜㪙㩷㪽㫆㫉㩷㫊㪼㫉㫍㫀㪺㪼㪀㩷㪻㫌㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㫅㫆㫉㫄㪸㫃㩷㫌㫊㪼㩷㪹㪼㪽㫆㫉㪼㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷
㪽㪸㫀㫃㫌㫉㪼㩷㫆㪽㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㪃㩷㫀㫋㩷㫀㫊㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㫉㪼㫋㫌㫉㫅㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㫋㪸㫋㪼㩷㫎㪿㪼㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫎㪸㫊㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㪼㪻㩷㫌㫇㩷㪼㫍㪼㫅㩷㫀㪽㩷㪪㫀㫄㪈㪍㩷㫀㫊㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㪻㪅
NOTE: The backup data must not be installed to another machine. If installed, the adjustment data will be overwritten and a trouble may be
generated.

B. Works and procedures necessary for HDD replacement
Note for HDD replacement
• Data of the following list are saved in the HDD of the complex machine. If the HDD operates normally and data backup is possible before
replacement, perform data backup and then replace the HDD.
• If the HDD does not operate normally, data cannot be backed up.
• The HDD replacement procedures with a broken HDD differs from that with a normal HDD.
Contents of this chapter
1) HDD storage data and backup
2) Replacement procedures when HDD storage data can be backed up
3) Replacement procedures when HDD storage data cannot be backed up due to breakdown of HDD
4) Reinstall and update procedures of Operation Manual data saved in HDD
5) Reinstall and update procedures of watermark data.
(1) HDD storage data and backup
Some HDD storage data can be backed up, and some other cannot. Some HDD storage data can be reinstalled, and some other cannot.
If the HDD operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the HDD referring to the
HDD storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the HDD.
a. HDD storage data list
Before installation After installation Enable/ Enable/

Data reinstall Reinstall
No. Data kind (When shipping (After use by Disable of Backup means Disable of
procedures operator
from the factory) users) data backup data reinstall
1 e-Manual Available Available Disable *1 Enable Sim49-3 Service
2 Address book Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
Device cloning / Device cloning /
Storage backup Storage backup
3 Image send series Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
registration data (Sender’s Device cloning / Device cloning /
information, meta data, etc.) Storage backup Storage backup
4 User authentication Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
Device cloning / Device cloning /
5 Japanese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
(Learning)
6 Chinese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
(Learning)
7 JOB LOG Not available Available Enable Perform with Disable —
WEB PAGE.
8 JOB completion list Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
9 New N/A (FSS) information Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
10 User font (Added) Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with Service
WEB PAGE. or User
11 User macro Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with
WEB PAGE.
12 Document filing Not available Available Enable Perform with Enable Perform with
WEB PAGE. WEB PAGE.
13 Some of system setting Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
data Device cloning / Device cloning /
14 Watermark Available Available Disable *2 Enable Sim49-5 Service
*1: The e-Manual cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-3 and USB memory.
*2: Watermark data cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-5 and USB memory.

(2) Replacement procedures when HDD data can be b. Work contents and procedures
backed up
When a new HDD
a. Work contents and procedures (blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
Procedures used, or when a HDD which (used in the same
When a new HDD is normal but a program model) is used *
(blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD error occurs in it is used.
Procedures used, or when a HDD which (used in the same Step 1 Install a HDD to the machine, Install a HDD to the
is normal but a program model) is used * and boot the complex machine. machine, and boot the
error occurs in it is used.  Formatting is automatically complex machine.
Step 1 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. performed.
(Servicing) Step 2 The trouble code, U2-05,
Use SIM56-2 or the device cloning, or the storage backup is displayed.  Cancel
function to backup the data. (Back up the data to the USB with SIM16.
memory.)
Step 3 Since a blank HDD is Use Sim62-1 to format
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4
automatically formatted, there the HDD.
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
is no need to perform
authentication data))
formatting procedure with SIM.
Step 2 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. (User
Step 4 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The
or servicing)
memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between
Back up the data to PC with Web page.
the HDD data and the image related memory and to
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 7, 10, 14
prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not
(Document filing data, JOB LOG data))
only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet
Step 3 Replace the HDD. Fax models.)
Step 4 Boot the complex machine. Boot the complex Step 5 Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD.
 Formatting is automatically machine.
Step 6 The trouble code, U2-60, is displayed.  Use SIM49-5 to
performed.
install the watermark data to the HDD.  After booting the
Step 5 The trouble code, U2-05, machine, use SIM16 to cancel the "U2-60" trouble.
is displayed.  Cancel
with SIM16. With the above procedures, the HDD is reset to the state of factory
Step 6 Since a blank HDD is Use SIM62-1 to format shipping.
automatically formatted, there the HDD.
is no need to perform (4) Reinstall and update procedures of the HDD
formatting procedure with SIM. storage Operation Manual data
Step 7 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The 1) Obtain the Operation Manual data.
memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between
the HDD data and the image related memory and to
Download the Operation Manual data from the utility menu on
prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not the web site (Tech-DS home page).
only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet Copy the downloaded files to the USB device without changing
Fax models.) the file hierarchy.
Step 8 Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD. (To upload to the complex machine, files of "**_pdf_fax.idx"
Step 9 The trouble code, U2-60, is displayed.  Use SIM49-5 to and "**_pdf.idx" and "version.txt" as well as the Operation
install the watermark data to the HDD.  After booting the
Manual data (**.pdf) are required. When the downloaded files
machine, use SIM16 to cancel the "U2-60" trouble.
are copied without changing the file hierarchy, these files also
Step 10 Import the data backed up in Step 1.
Use SIM56-2, or the device cloning, or the storage backup
are copied.)
to import. NOTE:
(Import enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4 When data are uploaded from the USB memory to the HDD, if
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User there are some data in the HDD, the files in the memory are
authentication data))
compared with the files in the HDD and only the files which
Step 11 Import the data backed up with the Web page function in
satisfy the following conditions are written into the HDD.
Step 2.
Import enable data: Document filing data, User font, Use • The file size is different.
macro • The time stamp is different.
(The JOB LOG data can be backed up but cannot be
• The file exists only in the USB memory.
imported.)
(3) Replacement procedures when the HDD storage
data cannot be backed up due to breakdown ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21 12

7(67 &/26(
a. Display when HDD breakdown (0$18$/83'$7(>XVEEG@

',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
When a trouble occurs in the HDD, the error code display of E7-03 ),/( ',5!)2/'(5
is popped up. ',5!0$18$/
In this case, the main power must be turned OFF and the HDD
must be replaced.


3) Insert the USB memory into the machine.
• When the USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STOR-
ANGEE-MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK]
button is pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu
1.
4) Select the folder of the Operation Manual data. (The screen
shifts to the Operation Manual data install menu.)
The current version and the update version are displayed.
5) Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
are changed from gray-out to active display.
6) When [YES] button is pressed, the selected Operation Manual
is installed.
When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case
of an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed.
(5) Watermark data reinstall and update procedures
1) Obtain the watermark data.
Download the watermark data from the utility menu on the web
site (Tech-DS home page).
Copy the downloaded files to the USB device without changing
the file hierarchy. Or copy the watermark data from the acces-
sory CD-ROM to the USB device.
NOTE:
When data are uploaded from the USB memory to the HDD, if
there are some data in the HDD, the files in the memory are
compared with the files in the HDD and only the files which
satisfy the following conditions are written into the HDD.
• The file size is different.
• The time stamp is different.
• The file exists only in the USB memory.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
:$7(50$5.83'$7(>XVEEG@
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
),/( ',5!)2/'(5
',5!:0

3) Insert the USB memory into the machine.

• When the USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STOR-
ANGEE-MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK]
button is pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu
1.
4) Select the folder of the watermark data. (The screen shifts to
the watermark data install menu.)
The current version and the update version are displayed.
5) Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
are changed from gray-out to active display.
6) When [YES] button is pressed, the selected watermark data
are installed.
When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case
of an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed.

ORS PD PWB
6 GND
CN2 5 PD
GND2 29 4 5V_EXT
PWB
PD 28 1 PDSEL0
5V_EXT 27 2 PDSEL1
MX-M753N
3 PDSEL2
ORS PD PWB
PDSEL0 26
PDSEL1 25 B6P-PH-K-S
SCN-CNT
CN11 CN6 PDSEL2 24
GND2 1 3 GND2 GND2 46 (NC) CN1
+24V3 2 1 +24V3 GND2 50 1 GND2
+12V 3 2 +12V GND2 49 (NC) 2 GND2
+5VN 4 4 +5VN 5V_EXT 48 (NC) 17 5V_EXT
+3.3V 5 5 +3.3V GND2 47 20 GND2
GND2 6 6 GND2 3.3V_EXT 39 18 3.3V_EXT
B6P-VH B6P-VH nBZR 38 16 nBZR
nKEYIN 37 19 nKEYIN
CN7 CN10 SEG0LEDBPR 36 15 SEG0LEDBPR
LCD
SCANDATA0- 1 WH WH 1 SCANDATA0- SEG1LEDCRR 35 13 SEG1LEDCRR
SCANDATA0+ 2 PK PK 2 SCANDATA0+ SEG2D0 34 11 SEG2D0
TOUCH PANEL
2
GY GY
BACK LIGHT
GND2 3 3 GND2 nF0D1 33 9 nF0D1
SCANDATA1- 4 WH WH 4 SCANDATA1- nF1D2 32 7 nF1D2
SCANDATA1+ 5 PK PK 6 SCANDATA1+ nF2G0 31 5 nF2G0
GND2 6 GY GY 5 GND2 nF3G1 30 3 nF3G1
MOTHER PWB
SCANDATA2- 7 WH WH 8 SCANDATA2- GND2 40 (NC) 4 +5VO
LCD
1. Operation panel
PWB
MFP OPE PWB

SCANDATA2+ 8 PK PK 10 SCANDATA2+ GND2 41 (NC) 6 GND2
GND2 9 GY GY 7 GND2 GND2 42 (NC) 12 nINFO_LED
SCANCLKOUT- 10 WH WH 12 SCANCLKOUT- GND2 43 (NC) 8 WU_LED
SCANCLKOUT+ 11 PK PK 14 SCANCLKOUT+ GND2 44 (NC) 10 POW_LED
INVERTER
GND2 12 GY GY 11 GND2 GND2 45 (NC) 14 nWU_KEY
WH WH
+CCFT 1
SCANDATA3- 13 16 SCANDATA3- GND2 23 501190-2029
PK PK
/CCFT 2
SCANDATA3+ 14 15 SCANDATA3+ GND2 22
GY GY
S02(8.0)B-BHS
GND2 15 13 GND2 GND2 21 CN4
B15B-PH-K-S (NC) 9 3.3VPD GND2 20 GND2 5 5 GND2
B16B-PHDSS-B GND2 19 CCFT 4 4 CCFT
GND2 18 +24V3 3 3 +24V3
CN5 CN3 3.3V 17 +24V3 2 2 +24V3
GND2 1 1 GND2 3.3V_EXT 16 GND2 1 1 GND2
+5VO 2 (NC) (NC) 2 (NC) 5V_EXT 15 BM05B-GHS-TBT B5B-PASK-1
nRES_MFPC_SCN 3 (NC) (NC) 3 nRES_MFPC_SCN(NC) 24V_EXT 14 CN3
nLCD_DISP 4 4 nLCD_DISP 24V_EXT 13 /YL(Y1) 4
nRES_SCN 5 5 nRES_SCN nYL(Y1) 12 XH(X1) 3
LVDS PWB
LCD_SEL2 6 6 LCD_SEL2 XH(X1) 11 YH(Y2) 2
nRTS_SCN 7 7 nRTS_SCN YH(Y2) 10 CN1 /XL(X2) 1
5
LCD_SEL0 8 8 LCD_SEL0 nXL(X2) 9 1 GND2 52271-0469
TXD_SCN 9 9 TXD_SCN SC_TEMP 8 2 GND2
LCD_SEL1 10 10 LCD_SEL1 VCONT 7 7 GND2 CN2
nCTS_SCN 11 11 nCTS_SCN nCCFT 6 29 GND2 GND2 1 1 GND2
LCD_SEL3 12 12 LCD_SEL3 PNL_SEL0 5 39 GND2 GND2 2 2 GND2
RXD_SCN 13 13 RXD_SCN PNL_SEL1 4 40 GND2 CK 3 3 CK
nPOF_SCN 14 14 nPOF_SCN PNL_SEL2 3 25 3.3V GND2 4 4 GND2
nSPED 15 (NC) B14B-PHDSS-B PNL_SEL3 2 19 3.3V_EXT GND2 5 5 GND2
nOCSW 16 (NC) DISP 1 23 5V_EXT NC 6 6 NC
B16B-PHDSS-B 501190-5017 3 24V_EXT R0 7 7 R0
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram
1
5 24V_EXT R1 8 8 R1
CN6 DF1B-26DES-2.5RC/DF1B-26DEP-2.5RC 37 nYL(Y1) R2 9 9 R2
+5VO 1 1 +5VO 1 35 XH(X1) GND2 10 10 GND2
GND2 2 2 GND2 2 33 YH(Y2) R3 11 11 R3
nINFO_LED 4 3 nINFO_LED 3 31 nXL(X2) R4 12 12 R4
[8] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
nWU_LED 5 4 nWU_LED 4 27 SC_TEMP R5 13 13 R5

nPOW_LED 6 5 nPOW_LED 5 21 VCONT GND2 14 14 GND2
nWU_KEY 7 6 nWU_KEY 6 POWER SW PWB 17 nCCFT G0 15 15 G0
6
GND2 3 7 GND2 7 1 GND2 15 PNL_SEL0 G1 16 16 G1
nPWR_SW 8 9 nPWR_SW 9 3 nPWR_SW 11 PNL_SEL2 GND2 18 18 GND2
PHR-3 9 PNL_SEL3 G3 19 19 G3
3
36 DISP G4 20 20 G4
GND2 10 SD 10 GND2 10 SD 10 GND2 G5 21 21 G5
LCD_DATA3+ 11 PK 11 LCD_DATA3+ 11 PK 6 LCD_DATA3+ GND2 22 22 GND2
LCD_DATA3- 12 WH 12 LCD_DATA3- 12 WH 8 LCD_DATA3- B0 23 23 B0
GND2 15 SD 13 GND2 13 SD 16 GND2 B1 24 24 B1
LCD_CLK+ 13 PK 14 LCD_CLK+ 14 PK 12 LCD_CLK+ B2 25 25 B2
8.5inch LCD UN
LCD_CLK- 14 WH 15 LCD_CLK- 15 WH 14 LCD_CLK- GND2 26 26 GND2
LCD_DATA2+ 17 PK 17 LCD_DATA2+ 17 PK 18 LCD_DATA2+ B4 28 28 B4
GND2 21 SD 19 GND2 19 SD 28 GND2 GND2 30 30 GND2
LCD_DATA1+ 19 PK 20 LCD_DATA1+ 20 PK 24 LCD_DATA1+ Hsync 31 31 Hsync
LCD_DATA1- 20 WH 21 LCD_DATA1- 21 WH 26 LCD_DATA1- GND2 32 32 GND2
GND2 22 SD 22 GND2 22 SD 34 GND2 Vsync 33 33 Vsync
LCD_DATA0+ 23 PK 23 LCD_DATA0+ 23 PK 30 LCD_DATA0+ F-GND 34 34 F-GND
LCD_DATA0- 24 WH 24 LCD_DATA0- 24 WH 32 LCD_DATA0- ENAB 35 35 ENAB
+5V_EXT 25 25 +5V_EXT 25 501571-4029 (NC) 36 36 (NC)
GND2 26 26 GND2 26 +3.3V 37 37 +3.3V
PWRSW
B26B-PHDSS-B +3.3V 38 38 +3.3V

NC 39 39 NC
FG +3.3V 40 40 +3.3V
SRA-01T-3.2 FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55) FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55)
MX-M753N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 8 – 1

Service Manual
EHR-3
4
CN5 OCSW
OCSW
+5VN 1 1 +5VN
GND2 2 2 GND2
/OCSW 3 3 /OCSW
+24V3 4
/SIZE_LED1 5
/SIZE_LED2 6
B6B-PH-SM4-TB +24V3
/SIZE_LED1
ORS
/SIZE_LED2
F-GND
LED PWB
FG
SRA-21T-4
SRA-01T-3.2
KEY PWB
FG
SRA-51T-4 SRA-51T-4 SRA-01T-3.2
PAP-07V-S/PALR-07V USB PWB

CN16 (NC) 1 (NC) 1 (NC) CN CN
VBUS2 10 2 VBUS2 2 5 VBUS2 VBUS2 1
D2- 9 3 D2- 3 4 D2- D2- 2
D2+ 8 4 D2+ 4 3 D2+ D2+ 3
GND2 7 5 GND2 5 2 GND2 GND2 4
SHIELD2 6 6 SHIELD2 6 1 SHIELD2 SHIELD2 5
VBUS3 5 (NC) 7 (NC) 7 (NC) BM05B-GHS-TBT
D3- 4
D3+ 3
GND3 2
SHIELD3 1
BM10B-GHS-TBT
Signal name Name Function/Operation
OCSW Original cover SW Document size detection timing switch
PWRSW Operation panel power supply switch Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power source.

1 MFP OPE PWB Detects the pressed key on the operation panel.
2 LVDS PWB Converts the display signal and outputs to the LCD.
3 Document detection light receiving PWB Receives light from the document detection light emitting PWB to detect the document size.
4 Document detection light emitting PWB Emits light for detection of the document size.
5 LCD INV PWB Emits the document size detection LED lights.
6 USB connector PWB For USB connecting
B. Outline
The operation panel is composed of the 8.5 MFP OPE PWB, the
LCD INV PWB, the LVDS PWB, the USB CN PWB, the LCD unit,
and the operation key, and is used to operation the machine, to set
and to display the status.
They are connected with the document detection light receiving
PWB for detection of the document size. They receive light from the
document detection light emitting PWB attached to the rear frame
side, detecting the document size.
The power switch of the operation panel outputs the ON/OFF con-
trol signal of the DC power.
The USB connector can be connected with the USB memory, the
USB keyboard, the IC card writer, the IC card reader, and the USB
hub, sending the electronic data to the mother PWB.
Use of the keyboard in the lower section of the operation panel
facilitates text inputs.

2. Scanner section
MHPS
6 9
3
MIM
7
CLI
3
1
2
2
1
8
CL INVERTOR
D-GND
P-GND
P-GND
24VPD
24VPD
MHPS
5597-05APB
CL
5V
EHR-3
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
2
B3B-PH-K-S
B4P-PH-SM4-TB
5597-05CPB7F
SCN-CNT PWB
1
2
3
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
CN9
D-GND
P-GND
P-GND
24VPD
24VPD
MiM_/A
MiM_/B
MHPS
MiM_A
MiM_B
6 /RES_CCDAD
40 AFE_CSTG
AFE_WRD
AFE_SCLK
CL
5V
AFE_RDD
AFE_CS
CLK+
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
RC+
RD+
CLK-
FI-RE41S-VF
RA+
RB+
RE+
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
10V
10V
RC-
RD-
RA-
RB-
RE-
5V
5V
5V
CN14 CN7 CN1

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
FI-RE41S-VF
41
40
39
38
AFE_CS 37
/RES_CCDAD 36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
AFE_CSTG
AFE_WRD
AFE_SCLK
CLK+
AFE_RDD
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
RC+
RD+
CLK-
RA+
RB+
RE+
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
10V
10V
RC-
RD-
GND
RA-
RB-
RE-
5V
5V
5V
CCD PWB

CLI Scanner lamp Illuminates the document. (Xenon lamp)
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the home position of the copy lamp unit.
MIM Scanner motor Drives the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.

1 Pulley belt Transmits the scanner motor power to the pulley.
2 Pulley Drives the scanner drive wire.
3 Scanner drive wire Transmits the scanner motor drive to the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.
4 Reflector Reflects the copy lamp light.
5 No. 2 mirror Reflects the document image into the No. 3 mirror.
6 No. 3 mirror Reflects the document image into the lens.
7 Lens Shrinking the image (light) of the document, and project it on CCD.
8 CCD PWB Reads the document image (optical signal) and converts it into the electric signal.
9 Idle gear Transmits the scanner motor drive power to the belt.

B. Outline
This section performs the following functions.
B
1) Light is radiated to the document by the scanner lamp, and the
G
contrast of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of
R
three lines of RGB to be converted into the image signal (ana-
log).
2) The image signals (analog) are converted into 10bit digital sig-
nals by the A/D converter.
3) The image signals (digital) are sent to the image process sec-
tion (scanner control PWB).
C. Detail description
(1) Optical section drive R
The optical section drive power is transmitted from the scanner G
motor (MIM) to the drive pulley and the wire through the belt, to B
drive the copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are attached by
the drive wires. (Image data for 1 line)
The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled by the drive signal sent from
the scanner control PWB.
(2) Scanner lamp drive
R G B
The scanner lamp (CLI) is driven by the scanner lamp drive voltage
Red component Green component Blue component
generated in the CL inverter PWB according to the control signal image data image data image data
sent from the scanner control PWB.
(3) Image scan/color separation (4) Image signal A/D conversion
Light is radiated to the document by the scanner lamp, and the con- 1) The image signal (analog) for each of R, G, and B is converted
trast of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of three into 10bit digital signal by the A/D converter.
lines of RGB to be converted into the image signal (analog).
Each color pixel has 10bit information.
The color components of document images are extracted to R, G,
2) The 10bit digital image signals of R, G, B are sent to the image
and B separately by the three kinds of CCD elements (R,G,B).
process section.
The red CCD extracts the red component of document images, the
green CCD green the components, and the blue CCD the blue CCD PWB
components. This operation is called the color separation. Analog IC
The CCD unit looks like one unit, but it includes three kinds of CCD CCD
AFE ADC LVDS
elements, R, G, and B. (3 Lines) R
The document scan in the main scanning direction is performed by G
the CCD element. The document scan in the sub scanning direc- B
tion is performed by shifting the scanner unit with the scanner Buffer TG
motor. Document images are optically reduced by the lens and
reflected to the CCD.
The scan resolution is 600 dpi.
Timing
Generator
(5) Zooming operation

Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by combined
use of a change in the scanning speed in the sub scanning direc-
tion and the image process technology (software).
Zooming in the main scanning direction is not performed optically,
but performed with the image process technology (by the software).

3. Manual paper feed section
MM
MPFC
MFPUS
MPFD1 4
MTOP2
MPED MTOP1
DSW-R MPFPWS
MPLD2
MPLD1
MPFGS
123
PHNR-09-H+BU09P-TR-P-H
1 GND 9 1 GND
PS-187 2 MPLD1 8 2 MPLD1
3 5VN 7 3 5VN
4 MPLD2 6 DF3-3S-2C
5 MTOP1 5
6 MTOP2 4
7 GND 3
8 MPFPWS 2 1 GND
PCU PWB QR/P4-24S-C(01)/QR/P4-24P-C(01)
1 DSW-F(R) 1
9 Vref 1 2
3
MPLD2
5VN
CN16
2 GND 2 DF3-3S-2C
GND 1 9 GND
3 MPLD1 3 GND 1
5VN 2 11 5VN
4 5VN 4 GND 2
/MM 3 13 /MM_D
5 MPLD2 5 GND 3
MMCLK 4 15 MMCLK
6 MTOP1 6 GND 4 1 MTOP1
MM-T 5 17 MM_LD
7 MTOP2 7 GND 5 2 GND
S05B-PASK-2 B30B-PHDSS-B
8 GND 8 GND 6 (NC) 179228-2
CN12 9 MPFPWS 9 DF11-6DS-2C
DSW-F(R) 1 10 Vref 10 +
GND 2 (NC) 11 /MPFC 11 DF11-6DP-SP1(05)
GND 3 (NC) 12 24V1 12
GND 4 13 24V1 13 5VN 1 1 MTOP2
24V1 5 14 /MFPUS 14 5VN 2 2 GND
/MPLD1 6 15 GND 15 5VN 3 179228-2
/MFPUS 7 16 MPED 16 5VN 4
5VN 8 17 5VN 17 DF11-4DS-2C
GND 9 18 24V1 18 +
/MPLD2 10 19 /MPFGS 19 DF11-4DP-SP1(05) 1 GND
/MPED 11 20 5V_MPFD1 20 2 MPFPWS
/MTOP1 12 21 GND 21 3 Vref
5VN 13 22 MPFD1 22 PHR-3
/MTOP2 14 23 (NC) 23
24V1 15 24 DSW-R 24 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
MPFPWS 16 3 24V1 1
/MPFGS 17 2 (NC) 2
Vref 18 1 /MPFC 3
5V_MPFD1 19
/MPFC 20 SMR-02V-N/SMP-02V-NC
/MPFD1 21 1 24V1 1
24V1 22 2 /MFPUS 2
GND 23
GND 24
GND 25 (NC) 1 GND
DSW-R 26 2 MPED
B26B-PHDSS-B 3 5VN
DF3-3S-2C
SMR-02V-N/SMP-02V-NC
1 24V1 1
2 /MPFGS 2
1 5V_MPFD1
2 GND
3 MPFD1
PHR-3

DSW-R Manual feed unit open/close Switch Manual paper feed unit open/close detection, Main Micro switch
charger power source, Developing bias power line
open/close.
MFPUS Paper pickup solenoid Presses the paper pickup roller onto paper. Electromagnetic
(Manual paper feed) solenoid
MPED Manual feed paper empty detector Manual paper feed tray paper empty detection Transmission type Manual paper feed
unit
MPFC Paper feed clutch Controls the manual paper feed section paper feed Electromagnetic
(Manual paper feed) roller ON/OFF. clutch
MPFD1 Manual feed paper pass detector 1 Manual tray paper pass detection Transmission type Paper transport
system sensor
MPFGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Manual feed gate solenoid open/close control. Electromagnetic
solenoid
MPFPWS Manual feed paper width detector Manual feed paper width detection Volume resistor Analog detector
MPLD1 Manual feed paper length detector 1 Manual paper feed tray paper length detection Transmission type Manual paper feed
(Paper feed side) unit
MPLD2 Manual feed paper length detector 2 Manual paper feed tray paper length detection Transmission type Manual paper feed
(Outside) unit
MTOP1 Manual tray pull-out position detector 1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detection Contact type Manual paper feed
(Storing position) unit
MTOP2 Manual tray pull-out position detector 2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detection Contact type Manual paper feed
(Pull-out position) unit

1 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent against double feed.
2 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
3 Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray) Sends paper to the paper feed roller.
4 Torque limiter A fixed level of resistance is applied to the paper separation roller to prevent against double feed.
B. Outline
The paper feed tray 1 holds 900 sheets, the paper feed tray 2 holds
1,300 sheets, the multi-purpose paper feed tray 3 holds 500
sheets, the paper feed tray 4 holds 500 sheets, and the manual
paper feed tray holds 100 sheets. Those paper feed units are stan-
dard provisions.

4. Tray paper feed section
(1) Paper feed tray 1, 2 section
CN11
3 24V1 1
24V1 1
(NC) 2 (NC) 2 (NC)
/T2PFC 3
1 /T2PFC 3
B30B-PHDSS-B
1 T1LUM
2 GND
PHR-2
1 24V1 1
CN13 2 /T1PUS 2
T1LUM 1
T2LUM 2 1 T2LUM
GND 3 2 GND
GND 4 PHR-2
24V1 5 SMR-02V-N/SMP-02V-NC
24V1 6 1 24V1 1
/T1PUS 7 2 /T2PUS 2
/T2PUS 8
5VN
24V1
9
10 (NC)
MM
GND 11 SMR-04V-N/SMP-04V-NC
(/DSKLS) 12 (NC) 1 5VN 1 1 5VN
/T1LUD 13 2 GND 2 2 GND
GND 14 3 T1LUD 3 3 T1LUD
/T1PED 15 4 T1PED 4 4 T1PED
/T1SPD 16 PHR-4
5VN 17
5VN 18
GND 19 SMP-10V-NC/SMR-10V-N
GND 20 1 5VN 1 1 5VN
/T2LUD 21 2 GND 2 2 GND
/T2SPD 22 3 T2LUD 3 3 T2LUD
/T2PED 23 4 T2PED 4 4 T2PED
5VN 24 5 GND 5 PHR-4
B24B-PHDSS-B 6 T1SPD 6 3 GND
7 5VN 7 2 T1SPD
8 GND 8 1 5VN T1PUS
PCU 9
10
T2SPD
5VN
9
10
179228-3
3 GND
PWB 2
1
T2SPD
5VN
CN16 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
179228-3
T1PFC
24V1 2 3 24V1 1
2 (NC) 2 (NC)
/T1PFC 4
GND
5VN
9
11
1 /T1PFC 3
T1S PWB
1 GND
/MM_D 13
2 5VN
MMCLK 15
3 /MM
MM_LD 17
4 MMCLK
GND 22
5 MM-T
/TANSET 24
S05B-PASK-2
5VN 26
B30B-PHDSS-B 3 GND
2 TANSET
1
179228-3
5VN T1LUM T2PFC
8
TANSET
T1SPD
5 8
7 T2LUM
6 T2S PWB T2SPD
T2PUS
1
4
1
3
7
6
5 2
3
4 1
2

MM Main motor Drives the paper feed trays 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the manual paper DC brushless Paper pass
feed section. motor
T1LUM Paper feed tray lift-up motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray. DC brush Selection of
(Paper feed tray 1) motor Rotation mode/
Brake mode
T1PFC Paper feed clutch Paper freed tray 1 section roller ON/OFF control Electromagneti
(Paper feed tray 1) c clutch
T1PUS Paper pickup solenoid Presses the paper pickup roller onto paper. Electromagneti
(Paper feed tray 1) c solenoid
T1S PWB Detector PWB Paper tray upper limit detection and paper empty detection
(Paper feed tray 1, 2 paper feed unit)
(Paper feed tray 1)
T1SPD Paper remaining quantity detector Paper remaining detection (Paper feed tray 1) Transmission Paper feed tray
(Paper feed tray 1) type remaining
quantity sensor
T2LUM Paper feed tray lift-up motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray. DC brush Selection of
(Paper feed tray 2) motor Rotation mode/
Brake mode
T2PFC Paper feed clutch Paper feed tray 2 section roller ON/OFF control Electromagneti
(Paper feed tray 2) c clutch
T2PUS Paper pickup solenoid Presses the paper pickup roller onto paper. Electromagneti
(Paper feed tray 2) c solenoid
T2S PWB Detector PWB Paper tray upper limit detection and paper empty detection
(Paper feed tray 1, 2 paper feed unit)
(Paper feed tray2)
T2SPD Paper remaining quantity detector Paper remaining detection (Paper feed tray 2) Transmission Paper feed tray
(Paper feed tray 2) type remaining
quantity sensor
TANSET Paper feed tray1, 2 (1, 2 tray unit) Paper feed tray1, 2 (1, 2 tray unit) insertion detection Transmission Paper feed tray
detection signal type system sensor

1 Lift wire Transmits the paper tray lift motor to power the paper feed tray.
2 Paper feed table Paper is put on this table.
3 Paper feed tray unit 1, 2 regulation plates L/R Regulates the paper width to restrict skew to the minimum.
4 Pulley Transmits the paper tray lift-up motor power to the paper feed tray.
5 Paper pickup roller Sends paper to the paper feed roller.
6 Separation roller Separates paper to prevent against double feed.
8 Torque limiter Provides a certain level of resistance power for the paper separation roller rotation to prevent against
double feed.

11
10 9 7
11 8 9 8 MM
PHR-2
M2LUM 1 CN16
GND 2 5 M2LUM
6 24V1
1 24V1 2 7 GND
2 /M2PFC 1 8 /M2PFC
7
GND 1 9 GND
10
5VN 2 11 5VN
/MM 3 13 /MM_D
MMCLK 4 15 MMCLK
MM-T 5 17 MM_LD
PCU PWB
M1LUM
DSKPFC1
M1PFC
12
M1LUD M2LUM
11 M1PFD
PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H CN15
1 24V1 2 23 24V1
M1PUS M2PFC
2 /M1PFC 1 24
25
26
24V1
/M1PFC
/DSKPFC1
M1LUM 1 27 M1LUM
GND 2 28 Vref
PHR-2 29 GND
PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H 30 GND
9 M1SPD
1
2
24V1
/DSKPFC1
2
1
(NC) 31
32
(nc)
M1PWS
8 2 Vref
GND
3
1
1
2
Vref
GND
1
2
7 M1PED 1 M1PWS 2
Soldering
3 M1PWS 3
M1SS PWB
1
M1PWS
3
SMP-02V-NC/SMR-02V-N
1 24V1 1 SMR-11V-N/SMP-11V-NC
2 /M1PUS 2 1 24V1 1
2 /M1PUS 2
GND 1 3 GND 3
/M1PED 2 4 /M1PED 4
5VN 3 5 5VN 5
4 PHR-3 6 GND 6
5 6 GND
/M1LUD
5VN
1
2
3
7
8
9
10
/M1LUD
5VN
5V_M1PFD
GND
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
24V1
24V1
/M1PUS
PHR-3(RED)
11 /M1PFD 11 4 /M2PUS
5V_M1PFD 1
5 GND
GND 2
6 GND
/M1PFD 3
M2LUD 12 PHR-3
7
8
9
10
/M1PED
/M2PED
5VN
5VN
11 M2PFD 11
12
13
GND
GND
/M1LUD
14 /M2LUD
15 5VN
SMP-02V-NC/SMR-02V-N 16 5VN
1 24V1 1 17 5V_M1PFD
10 2 /M2PUS 2 1
2
24V1
/M2PUS
1
2
18
19
20
5V_M2PFD
GND
GND
M2PUS GND
/M2PED
5VN
1
2
3
3
4
5
GND
/M2PED
5VN
3
4
5
21
22
/M1PFD
/M2PFD
B32B-PHDSS-B
PHR-3 6 GND 6
GND 1 7 /M2LUD 7
/M2LUD 2 8 5VN 8
5VN 3 9 5V_M2PFD 9
9 M2SPD PHR-3(RED)
5V_M2PFD 1
10
11
GND
/M2PFD
10
11
GND 2
8 2 1
/M2PFD 3
PHR-3
7 M2PED
CN14
19 GND
20 GND
M2SS PWB (NC)

GND
1
2
(NC)
21
22
23
M1SS1
M2SS1
M1SS2
M1SS1 3
SMP-18V-NC/SMR-18V-N 24 M2SS2
M1SS2 4
1 GND 1 25 M1SS3
M1SS3 5
2 M1SS1 2 26 M2SS3
M1SS4 6
3 M1SS2 3 27 M1SS4
PHR-6
4 M1SS3 4 28 M2SS4
GND 3 5 M1SS4 5 29 GND
/M1SPD 2 6 GND 6 30 GND
5VN 1 7 /M1SPD 7 31 /M1SPD
179228-3 8 5VN 8 32 /M2SPD
(NC) 1 (NC) (NC) 9 (NC) 9 (NC) 33 5VN
GND 2 10 GND 10 34 5VN
M2SS1 3 11 M2SS1 11 B34B-PHDSS-B
M2SS2 4 12 M2SS2 12
M2SS3 5 13 M2SS3 13
M2SS4 6 14 M2SS4 14
PHR-6 15 GND 15
GND 3 16 /M2SPD 16
/M2SPD 2 17 5VN 17
5VN 1 (NC) 18 (NC) 18 (NC)
179228-3
5 6 4 3

DSKPFC1 Paper feed tray 3, 4 paper transport Paper feed tray 3, 4 section paper transport roller ON/OFF Electromagnetic
clutch 1 control clutch
M1LUD Paper feed tray upper limit detector Paper tray upper limit detection Transmission type Paper feed tray
(Paper feed tray 3) (Paper feed tray 3) system sensor
M1PED Paper empty detector Paper empty detection Transmission type Paper feed tray
M1PFC Paper feed clutch Paper freed tray 3 section roller ON/OFF control Electromagnetic
(Paper feed tray 3) clutch
M1PFD Paper pass detector Paper feed tray 3 paper pass detection Transmission type Paper transport
(Multi Paper feed tray 3) system sensor
M1PUS Paper pickup solenoid Presses the paper pickup roller onto paper. Electromagnetic
(Paper feed tray 3) solenoid
M1PWS Paper feed tray paper width detector Paper width detection of multi Paper feed tray Slide resistor Analog detector
(Paper feed tray 3) (Paper feed tray 3)
M1SPD Paper remaining quantity detector Paper remaining detection Transmission type Paper feed tray
(Paper feed tray 3) (Multi Paper feed tray 3) remaining
quantity sensor
M2LUD Paper feed tray upper limit detector Paper tray upper limit detection Transmission type Paper feed tray
M2PED Paper empty detector Paper empty detection Transmission type Paper feed tray
M2PFC Paper feed clutch Paper freed tray 4 section roller ON/OFF control Electromagnetic
(Paper feed tray 4) clutch
M2PFD Paper pass detector Paper feed tray 4 paper pass detection Transmission type Paper transport
(Multi Paper feed tray 4) system sensor
M2PUS Paper pickup solenoid Presses the paper pickup roller onto paper. Electromagnetic
(Paper feed tray 4) solenoid
M2SPD Paper remaining quantity detector Paper remaining quantity detection Transmission type Paper feed tray
(Paper feed tray 4) (Paper feed tray 4) remaining
quantity sensor
M2SS Paper size detection PWB Paper remaining detection
MM Main motor Drive the paper feed tray 1, 2, 3 and 4, and the manual DC brush-less Paper pass
paper feed section. motor

1 Paper size detection plate Changes its own position in conjunction with the paper size (length) adjustment lever. By this
operation, the paper size detector detects the paper size.
2 Paper width guide R Suppresses skew to the minimum by restricting the paper width.
3 Paper size detection rotation plate Changes its own position in conjunction with the paper size (length) adjustment lever. By this
operation, the paper size detection plate position is changed and the paper size detector detects the
paper size.
4 Paper size (length) guide plate Regulates the paper size (length).
5 Paper width guide L By restricting the paper width, skew is restricted to the minimum.
6 Lift plate Lifts the paper to maintain the paper feed position at the fixed position.
8 Separation roller Separate paper to prevent against double feed
10 Transport roller 8 (Paper feed tray 3) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 3 to the transport rollers 9 and 10.
Transport roller 5 (Paper feed tray 4) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 4 to the transport rollers 6 and 7.
11 Transport roller 10 (Paper feed tray 3) Transports paper from the transport rollers 7 and 8 to the transport roller 11.
Transport roller 7 (Paper feed tray 4) Transports paper from the transport roller 5 to the transport roller 10.
12 Torque limiter Provides a certain level of resistance power for the paper separation roller rotation to prevent against
double feed.

B. Outline
Paper feed tray 1 holds 900 sheets, paper feed tray 2 holds 1,300 sheets.
The multi-purpose paper feed tray 3 holds 550 sheets, the paper feed tray 4 holds 550 sheets, and the manual paper feed tray holds 100
sheets. Those paper feed units are standard provisions.
C. Paper feed tray 1, 2 section

(1) Paper feed operation
a. Preliminary operation before paper feed
1) Set paper in the tray, and insert the tray into the machine. The tray sensor turns on.
2) The lift-up motor operates to lift the tray.
3) The paper upper limit sensor turns on to stop the tray at the specified position.
b. Paper feed operation

1) When copy/print operation is started, the motors (MM, FUM, VPM, and TRM) and the clutch (TRC) are turned on to turn on the solenoid
(T1PUS) at the timing of paper pickup. This rotates and falls the take-up roller to pick up paper.
2) At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to feed paper to the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates to prevent
against double feed of paper.
500mS
MM
500mS
FUM 870mS
T1PFC
79mS
T1PUS
50mS 79mS
VPM
50mS 74mS
TRM
164mS
RRC
439mS 500mS
POM1
120mS 500mS
POM2
PFD2
PPD
POD1
POD2
D. Paper size of paper feed trays detection method

(1) Paper size of paper feed trays detection method
a. Paper feed tray1, 2 paper feed unit (Paper feed tray 1, 2)
The paper feed tray 1 is used exclusively for A4 (11 x 8.5) paper size. The paper feed tray 2 is used for A4, 11 x 8.5, or B5 paper size. To
change the paper size, change the paper guide and change the set value of SIM 26-2.

(2) Paper size of paper feed trays detection method
a. Multi-purpose paper feed tray (Paper feed tray 3), 500 sheets paper feed tray (Paper feed tray 4)
1) Paper width detection
The paper width is calculated with the VR voltage value (A/D conversion value) linked with the side guide plate.
Paper width and paper size (set in the range of standard value  6 [mm]).
Width size
Standard
Detection Paper size Range [mm]
[mm]
pattern
A A3/A4 297.0 303.0 to 291.0
B WLT/LT 279.4 285.4 to 273.4
C B4/B5 257.0 263.0 to 251.0
D LG/LTR/Foolscap 215.9 221.9 to 209.9
E A4R 210.0 216.0 to 204.0
F Executive-R 184.1 190.1 to 178.1
G B5R 182.0 188.0 to 176.0
2) Paper size detection

The paper size detection is made by the combination of the cassette paper size detector 1 to 4.
CSS1
CSS2
CSS4
CSS3
Relationship between each paper size detector detection and paper size
Vertical size Detection SW state

Width of detection
detection AB size Inch size
CSS1 CSS2 CSS3 CSS4 range
Pattern
1 ON ON OFF ON B5 Extra 147.0 to 198.0
2 OFF ON OFF ON A4 LT 198.0 to 237.0
3 OFF ON ON ON B5R EX-R 237.0 to 274.0
4 OFF OFF ON ON A4R LTR 274.0 to 314.0
5 ON OFF ON ON Foolscap Extra 314.0 to 347.0
6 ON OFF ON OFF B4 LGL 347.0 to 389.0
7 ON ON ON OFF A3 WLT 389.0 to 432.8
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF Paper feed tray not attached
3) Size detection combinations
Paper size Width detection pattern Vertical detection

pattern
B5 C 1
A4 A 2
B5R G 3
A4R E 4
Foolscap D 5
B4 B 6
A3 A 7
LT B 2
EX-R F 3
LTR D 4
LGL D 6
WLT B 7

E. Paper remaining detection
(1) Paper remaining detection
Remaining paper detection is performed according to four stages, i.e. three stages with paper and one stage with no paper, and the result is
displayed.
(2) Detection method

The number of remaining sheets is determined according to the number of times the remaining paper sensor changes from the time the paper
feed tray starts lifting up to the time when the upper detection sensor comes ON.
(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and
changes in status according to the number of remaining sheets)
The no-paper detection sensor MCPED

detects the state of no remaining paper. (paper sensor)
Turn plate
Remaining Paper
During no-paper detection
Detection Actuator
MCSPD
1/3 Field (remaining paper detection sensor)
Sensor logic: Low
Remaining paper 1/3 position
2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi
3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low

5. Paper transport section, Duplex section
(1) Vertical paper transport section 1
Driver1
CN9 CN16 PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H
CN5 (NC) 1 GND 24V1 1 2 24V1 1
GND1 1 2 GND /DSKPFC2 3 1 /DSKPFC2 2
POM1CNT 16 3 POM1CNT GND 9
POM2CNT 6 4 POM2CNT 5VN 11 1 GND
POM1XA 20 5 POM1XA /MM_D 13 2 5VN
POM2XA 2 6 POM2XA MMCLK 15 3 /MM
POM1A 18 7 POM1A MM_LD 17 4 MMCLK
POM2A 4 8 POM2A B30B-PHDSS-B 5 MM-T
POM1B 14 9 POM1B S05B-PASK-2
POM2B 8 10 POM2B
POM1XB 12 11 POM1XB
POM2XB 10 12 POM2XB
ADM1CNT 7 13 ADM1CNT
ADM1XA 3 15 ADM1XA
ADM2XA 21 16 ADM2XA
ADM1A 5 17 ADM1A
ADM2A 19 18 ADM2A
ADM1B 9 19 ADM1B
ADM2B 15 20 ADM2B
ADM1XB 11 21 ADM1XB
ADM2XB 13 22 ADM2XB
RRMCNT 36 (NC) 23 (nc)
TRMCNT 27 (NC) 24 (nc)
RRMXA 33 B24B-PHDSS-B
TRMXA 31
RRMA 35 Driver2 PCU PWB
TRMA 29 CN10
RRMB 34 (NC) 1 GND
TRMB 25 (NC) 2 GND
RRMXB 32 3 RRMCNT
TRMXB 23 4 TRMCNT
VPMCNT 26 5 RRMXA
VPMB 24 6 TRMXA
VPMXA 30 7 RRMA
VPMXB 22 8 TRMA
VPMA 28 9 RRMB
B36B-PUDSS-1 10 TRMB
11 RRMXB
12 TRMXB
(NC) 13 (nc)
14 VPMCNT
15 VPMB
DRIVER PWB 16
17
VPMXA
VPMXB MM
18 VPMA
(NC) 19 (nc)
(NC) 20 (nc)
B20B-PHDSS-B
CN4 SMP-06V-NC/SMR-06V-N SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC

VPM_24V 1 6 VPM_24V 6 6 VPM_24V 6
VPM_24V 2 5 VPM_24V 5 5 VPM_24V 5
VPMB/ 3 4 VPMB/ 4 4 VPMB/ 4
VPMB// 4 3 VPMB// 3 3 VPMB// 3
VPMA// 5 2 VPMA// 2 2 VPMA// 2
VPMA/ 6 1 VPMA/ 1 1 VPMA/ 1
B06B-PASK-1
DSKPFC2
VPM

DSKPFC2 Paper feed tray 3/4 paper transport clutch 2 Paper transport roller 11 ON/OFF control. Electromagnetic
clutch
MM Main motor Drives the paper feed trays 1, 2, 3, and 4, and DC brush-less Paper pass
the manual paper feed section. motor
VPM Vertical paper transport motor Drives the paper transport rollers 4 and 13. Stepping motor 65 CPM model: One speed
75 CPM model: Two speed

(2) Vertical paper transport section 2
RRM
1 2
TRM
3
VPM
PPD
MPRD2
MPRD1
Driver1
CN9
CN5 (NC) 1 GND
GND1 1 2 GND
POM1CNT 16 3 POM1CNT
POM2CNT 6 4 POM2CNT
POM1XA 20 5 POM1XA
POM2XA 2 6 POM2XA
POM1A 18 7 POM1A
POM2A 4 8 POM2A
POM1B 14 9 POM1B
POM2B 8 10 POM2B
POM1XB 12 11 POM1XB
POM2XB
ADM1CNT
10
7
12
13
POM2XB
ADM1CNT
PCU PWB
ADM1XA 3 15 ADM1XA
ADM2XA 21 16 ADM2XA
ADM1A 5 17 ADM1A
ADM2A 19 18 ADM2A
ADM1B 9 19 ADM1B
ADM2B 15 20 ADM2B
ADM1XB 11 21 ADM1XB
ADM2XB 13 22 ADM2XB PHNR-06-H+BU06P-TR-P-H
RRMCNT 36 (NC) 23 (nc) CN11 SMR-18V-N/SMP-18V-NC 3 5VN 4 1 5VN
TRMCNT 27 (NC) 24 (nc) 5VN 13 3 5VN 3 4 /PPD 3 2 /PPD
RRMXA 33 B24B-PHDSS-B /PPD 15 4 /PPD 4 5 GND 2 3 GND
TRMXA 31 GND 17 5 GND 5 SMR-08V-N/SMP-08V-NC 179228-3
RRMA 35 Driver2 5V_MPRD1 19 6 5V_MPRD1 6 1 5V_MPRD1 1 1 5V_MPRD1
TRMA 29 CN10 GND 21 7 GND 7 2 GND 2 2 GND
RRMB 34 (NC) 1 GND /MPRD1 23 8 /MPRD1 8 3 /MPRD1 3 3 /MPRD1
TRMB 25 (NC) 2 GND 5V_MPRD2 25 9 5V_MPRD2 9 4 5V_MPRD2 4 PHR-3(RED)
RRMXB 32 3 RRMCNT GND 27 10 GND 10 5 GND 5 1 5V_MPRD2
TRMXB 23 4 TRMCNT /MPRD2 29 11 /MPRD2 11 6 /MPRD2 6 2 GND
VPMCNT 26 5 RRMXA B30B-PHDSS-B 3 /MPRD2
VPMB 24 6 TRMXA PHR-3
VPMXA 30 7 RRMA
VPMXB 22 8 TRMA CN3 SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC
VPMA 28 9 RRMB TRM_24V 1 6 TRM_24V 6
B36B-PUDSS-1 10 TRMB TRM_24V 2 5 TRM_24V 5
11 RRMXB TRMB/ 3 4 TRMB/ 4
12 TRMXB TRMB// 4 3 TRMB// 3
(NC) 13 (nc) TRMA// 5 2 TRMA// 2
14 VPMCNT TRMA/ 6 1 TRMA/ 1
15 VPMB RRM_24V 7 SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC
DRIVER 16 VPMXA RRM_24V 8 6 RRM_24V 6
17 VPMXB RRMB/ 9 5 RRM_24V 5
PWB 18 VPMA RRMB//
RRMA//
10
11
4
3
RRMB/
RRMB//
4
3
(NC) 19 (nc)
(NC) 20 (nc) RRMA/ 12 2 RRMA// 2
B20B-PHDSS-B B12B-PASK-1 1 RRMA/ 1
CN4 SMP-06V-NC/SMR-06V-N SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC

VPM_24V 1 6 VPM_24V 6 6 VPM_24V 6
VPM_24V 2 5 VPM_24V 5 5 VPM_24V 5
VPMB/ 3 4 VPMB/ 4 4 VPMB/ 4
VPMB// 4 3 VPMB// 3 3 VPMB// 3
VPMA// 5 2 VPMA// 2 2 VPMA// 2
VPMA/ 6 1 VPMA/ 1 1 VPMA/ 1
B06B-PASK-1

MPRD1 Paper feed tray 2 paper pass Manual feed/paper feed tray 2/LCC paper pass Transmission type Paper transport system
detector 1 detection sensor
MPRD2 Paper feed tray 2 paper pass Manual feed/paper feed tray 2/LCC paper pass Transmission type Paper transport system
detector 2 detection sensor
PPD Resist roller front paper pass Paper pass detection in front of resist roller Reflection type Paper transport system
detector sensor
RRM Resist roller drive motor Drives the resist roller. Electromagnetic
clutch
TRM Resist roller front drive motor Drives the paper transport roller 15. Stepping motor Normal speed mode/
Resist roller front paper
transport timing control
(Warp amount control)
VPM Vertical paper transport motor Drives the paper transport rollers 4 and 13. Stepping motor Normal speed mode

1 Resist roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. /
Controls the transport timing of paper to adjust the relationship between images and paper.
2 Resist roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to provide transport power of the transport roller to paper.
3 Transport roller 15 Transports paper to the transport resist roller.

(3) Horizontal paper transport section
MM
T1PPD
2 3 4
HPFC
6
MPRD2
5 MPRD1
MPFD2
LPPD
PCU PWB
SMP-03V-NC/SMR-03V-N SMP-06V-NC/SMR-06V-N CN16
5V_T1PPD 1 1 5V_T1PPD 1 1 5V_T1PPD 1 30 5VN
GND 3 2 GND 2 2 GND 2 21 GND
T1PPD 2 3 T1PPD 3 3 T1PPD 3 27 /T1PPD
179228-3 B30B-PHDSS-B
CN16
GND 1 9 GND
5VN 2 11 5VN
/MM 3 13 /MM_D
MMCLK 4 15 MMCLK
MM-T 5 17 MM_LD
S05B-PASK-2 B30B-PHDSS-B PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H
CN11 2 24V1 1
24V1 5 1 /HPFC 2
/HPFC 7 SMR-18V-N/SMP-18V-NC SMR-08V-N/SMP-08V-NC
5V_MPRD1 19 6 5V_MPRD1 6 1 5V_MPRD1 1 1 5V_MPRD1
/MPRD1 23 8 /MPRD1 8 3 /MPRD1 3 3 /MPRD1
5V_MPRD2 25 9 5V_MPRD2 9 4 5V_MPRD2 4 PHR-3(RED)
GND 27 10 GND 10 5 GND 5 1 5V_MPRD2
/MPRD2 29 11 /MPRD2 11 6 /MPRD2 6 2 GND
B30B-PHDSS-B 3 /MPRD2
CN17 SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC SMP-06V-NC/SMR-06V-N PHR-3
5V_MPFD2 2 1 5V_MPFD2 1 1 5V_MPFD2 1 1 5V_MPFD2
/MPFD2 6 3 MPFD2 3 3 MPFD2 3 3 MPFD2
5V_LPPD 8 4 5V_LPPD 4 4 5V_LPPD 4 PHR-3
GND 10 5 GND 5 5 GND 5 1 5V_LPPD
/LPPD 12 6 LPPD 6 6 LPPD 6 2 GND
B16B-PHDSS-B 3 LPPD
PHR-3

HPFC Horizontal paper transport clutch Manual paper feed, paper feed tray 2 section, Electromagnetic
LCC paper transport roller ON/OFF control clutch
MM Main motor Drives the paper feed trays 1, 2, 3, and 4, DC brushless Paper pass
and the manual paper feed section. motor
MPFD2 Manual feed paper pass detector 2 Manual tray and LCC unit paper pass detection Transmission Paper transport
type system sensor
MPRD1 Paper feed tray 2 paper pass detector 1 Manual feed/paper feed tray 2, LCC paper pass detection Transmission Paper transport
type system sensor
MPRD2 Paper feed tray 2 paper pass detector 2 Manual feed/paper feed tray 2/LCC paper pass detection Transmission Paper transport
type system sensor
T1PPD Paper pass detector (Paper feed tray 1) Paper pass detection from paper feed tray 1 Reflection type Paper transport
system sensor

1 Transport roller 15 Transports the paper to resist roller.
2 Transport roller 4 Transports paper from the transport roller 3 to the transport roller 15.
3 Transport roller 3 Transports paper from the paper feed tray 2 and the transport roller 2 to the transport roller 3.
4 Transport roller 2 Transports paper from the manual paper feed and transport roller 2 to the transport roller 3.
5 Transport roller 13 Transports to the transport roller 15.
6 Paper guide lock solenoid Lock the horizontal transport paper guide.

(4) Duplex section
ADM1
DSW-ADU
3 DGS
AINPD DSW-L
APPD1
ADM2
TURM
APPD2
THPS2
PFD2
2 1
PS-187
1 5V_APPD1
2 GND
3 /APPD1
PHR-3
1 5V_APPD2
2 GND
3 /APPD2
PHR-3
1 5V_PFD2 1 1 5V_PFD2
2 /PFD2 2 2 GND
3 5V_THPS2 3 3 PFD2
DRIVER 4 /THPS2 4 PHR-3
CN2 SMP-10V-NC/SMR-10V-N 5 /TCBPWM 5
ADM1_24V 1 1 ADM1_24V 1 6 /TCBIAS 6 1 THPS2
ADM1B/ 3 2 ADM1B/ 2 7 DSW-L 7 2 GND
ADM1B// 4 3 ADM1B// 3 8 DSW-L 8 3 5V_THPS2
ADM1A// 5 4 ADM1A// 4 9 GND 9 179228-3
ADM1A/ 6 5 ADM1A/ 5 10 TURM 10 1 TURM
ADM2_24V 7 6 ADM2B/ 6 DRAWER 2 GND
ADM2B/ 9 7 ADM2B// 7 QR/P4-32S-C(01)/QR/P4-32P-C(01) PHR-2
ADM2B// 10 8 ADM2A// 8 1 DSW-L 1 1 GND
ADM2A// 11 9 ADM2A/ 9 2 ADM2A/ 2 2 GND
ADM2A/ 12 10 ADM2_24V 10 3 ADM2A// 3 (NC) 3 GND DF11-6DS-2C
B13B-PASK-1 4 ADM2B// 4 4 GND +
5 ADM2B/ 5 5 GND DF11-6DP-SP1(05)
6 5V_APPD1 6 6 GND
7 5V_APPD2 7
8 5V_PFD2 8 CN6
9 5V_DSW-ADU 9 1 DSW-L Bias
10 5V_AINPD 10 2 DSW-L FPS-187
11 24V1 11 3 /TCBIAS
12 ADM1A/ 12 4 /TCB-PWM
13 ADM1A// 13 5 GND TB PWB SRA-21T-4
14 ADM1B// 14 6 F-GND
15 ADM1B/ 15 PHR-6
16 ADM2_24V 16
SRA-21T-4
17 24V1 17
18 /PFD2 18
20 /THPS2 20
21 TURM 21
22 /TCBPWM 22
23 /TCBIAS 23
24 5V_THPS2 24
25 GND 25
PCU PWB 26
27
GND
/APPD1
26
27
CN4 28 /APPD2 28
24V1 1 29 /AINPD 29
24V1 5 30 /DSW-ADU 30
/DGS 7 31 /DGS 31
TURM 9 32 ADM1_24V 32
/TCBPWM 11 DF11-4DS-2C SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC
/TCBIAS 16 + 1 ADM2A/ 1
5V_APPD1 18 DF11-4DP-SP1(05) 2 ADM2A// 2
5V_APPD2 19 ADM2_24V 1 3 ADM2B// 3
/APPD1 20 ADM2_24V 2 (NC) 4 ADM2B/ 4
/APPD2 21 ADM2_24V 3 5 ADM2_24V 5
5V_PFD2 23 ADM2_24V 4 6 ADM2_24V 6
5V_THPS2 24
/PFD2 25 DF11-4DS-2C SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC
/THPS2 26 + 1 ADM1A/ 1
/DSW-ADU 28 DF11-4DP-SP1(05) 2 ADM1A// 2
5V_AINPD 29 ADM1_24V 1 3 ADM1B// 3
5V_DSW-ADU 30 ADM1_24V 2 (NC) 4 ADM1B/ 4
/AINPD 31 ADM1_24V 3 5 ADM1_24V 5
GND 32 ADM1_24V 4 6 ADM1_24V 6
GND 33
DSW-L 34 GND 1
PHDR-34VS-1 GND 2 (NC)
GND 3
GND 4 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
GND 5 3 /AINPD 1 1 /AINPD
GND 6 2 GND 2 2 GND
DF11-6DS-2C 1 5V_AINPD 3 3 5V_AINPD
+ 179228-3
DF11-6DP-SP1(05) 1 /DSW-ADU
2 GND
3 5V_DSW-ADU
179228-3
2 24V1 1
1 /DGS 2

ADM1 Duplex (ADU) motor 1 Drives the paper transport roller 2 and the paper Stepping motor High speed only
transport roller 19
ADM2 Duplex (ADU) motor 2 Drives the paper transport roller 20 and 21 Stepping motor Selection of Normal
speed/High speed
AINPD Duplex (ADU) paper entry detector Duplex (ADU) paper entry detection, Transmission Paper transport system
detection of paper exit to finisher type sensor
APPD1 Duplex (ADU) paper pass detector 1 Duplex (ADU) upstream paper pass detection Transmission Paper transport system
type sensor
APPD2 Duplex (ADU) paper pass detector 2 Duplex (ADU) midstream paper pass detection Transmission Paper transport system
type sensor
DGS Paper exit gate solenoid Drives the paper exit gate Electromagnetic
solenoid
DSW-ADU Duplex (ADU) cover open/close Duplex (ADU) cover open/close detection Transmission Door switch
detector type
DSW-L Left door open/close detector Left door open/close detection Micro switch Door switch
PFD2 Paper pass detector 2 Paper pass detection (Left door unit) from duplex Transmission Paper transport system
(ADU)/Paper feed tray 1, 3, 4 type sensor
THPS2 Transfer belt contact/separation home Transfer belt separation home position detection 2 Transmission Other sensor, switch
position sensor 2 type
TURM Transfer separation motor Drives and separates the transfer belt DC brush motor The transfer belt is
pressed on the OPC
drum only during printing.

1 Transport roller 21 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 20 to the transport roller 15
4 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Discharges paper. / Transports paper to the duplex (ADU) section
B. Outline
(1) Paper transport section (2) Duplex section
The paper transport section serves the function of transferring When duplex print is selected, the first side is printed then switched
paper from each paper feed port to the registration roller section. back to feed to the duplex section to make duplex print.
Paper from manual feed, paper feed tray units 1 and 2 (optional),
and the right paper feed tray of the paper feed tray units 1 and 2 is
transported horizontally, whereas paper from the left paper feed
tray of the paper feed tray units 1 and 2, paper feed tray 3 and
paper feed tray 4 is transported vertically to the registration roller
section.
After the leading edge of the paper is synchronized with the leading
edge of the drum image in the registration roller section, the paper
that is transfer printed with the image in the transfer section passes
through the fusing section and is discharged either face-down or
face-up.

C. Paper transport operation in duplex print 4) When the specified time has passed from reverse rotation of
POM2, DGS (paper exit guide) turns on for a certain time and
(1) Switchback operation and transport to the reverse paper is sent to the reverse section.
section
1) The paper transported from the fusing section is sent to the ADM1
paper exit roller 1 (which is driven by the paper exit motor 2
(POM2)) with the transport roller 16 (which is driven by the DGS
paper exit motor 1 (POM1)).
At this time, paper is passed under the paper exit guide. After
paper passing, the paper exit gate guide falls down by its own
weight.
POM1 POM2
POM2
POD1
5) POM2 stops after passing the specified time from detection the
paper lead edge by AINPD (duplex paper entry detection). It
rotation is changed from reverse direction to normal direction
to transport the next paper.
RRC 439mS
POM1
120mS 166mS
POM2 485mS
572mS 25mS
DGS 37mS
102mS
ADUM1
50mS 168mS
ADUM2
2) When the specified time has passed from detection of the
POD1
paper lead edge by POD1 (paper exit detection from fusing),
POM2 rotates in the normal direction, then rotates in the POD2
reverse direction in the specified time. (The rotation time dif- AINPD
fers depending on the paper size.)
APPD1
3) When POM2 rotates reversely, paper is transported to the
reverse section. APPD2
At that time, paper is passed over the paper exit gate guide
which fell down by it own weight. (2) Paper transport speed in duplex print
The transport speed in duplex print is changed to the high speed
POM1 (800mm/sec) to increase the job speed in some positions of paper.
The transport speed is changed to the high speed in the Following
positions:
1) From when the paper rear edge passes the fusing section to
when switchback operation is started.
2) From when switchback operation is started to when a certain
POM2 amount of paper is transported after passing APPD1 (Paper
pass detection sensor in upstream of duplex).
3) After that, paper is stopped at the duplex paper feed position
and fed to the machine again. (The paper feed speed to the
machine is 335mm/sec)

6. LSU section
PCU PWB MOTHER PWB LSU PWB

CN7 CN3 CN2 CN2 CN5 CN1
GND 1 1 GND2 GND2 3 1 GND2 +5V_LD 23 BL BL 2 +5VLD
GND 2 2 GND2 +3.3V 1 3 +3.3V GND2 24 GY GY 1 GND2
5VLD 3 3 INT5V GND1 4 2 GND1 GND2 18 GY GY 3 GND2
5VLD 4 4 INT5V +24V3 2 4 +24V3 nSH_K1 15 BR BR 15 nSH_K1
GND 5 5 GND2 +5VN 5 5 +5VN GND2 1 GY GY 12 GND2
GND 6 6 GND2 GND2 6 6 GND2 nSH_K2 13 BR BR 13 nSH_K2
PCU_RES 7 7 PCU_RES S06B-XASK-1(LF)(SN) DT_K1- 14 WH WH 14 DT1-
/POF 9 9 nPOF CN3 DT_K1+ 16 PK PK 16 DT1+ 2BEAM
PCU_DTR 11 11 PCU_DTR INT5V 22 1 +5V_LD GND2 12 SD SD 20 GND2
PCU_TXD 12 12 TXD_PCU GND2 10 2 GND2 GND2 2 SD SD 6 GND2 LD PWB
PCU_DSR 13 13 PCU_DSR nSCK_LSU 12 4 nSCK_LSU DT_K2- 8 WH WH 8 DT2-
PCU_RXD 14 14 RXD_PCU GND2 11 3 GND2 DT_K2+ 10 PK PK 10 DT2+
GND 15 15 GND2 nTRANS_DAT 9 5 nTRANS_DAT nLDERR_K 11 11 nLDERR
GND 16 16 GND2 nRSV_DAT 14 6 nRST_DAT VREF_K1 9 9 VREF_K1
LSU_RST 17 17 LSU_RST JOBEND_INT 13 8 JOBEND_INT VREF_K2 7 7 VREF_K2
TRANS_DAT 18 18 TRANS_DAT LSUASIC_RST 8 7 LSUASIC_RST nENB_K 5 5 nENB_K
TRANS_RST 19 19 TRANS_RST nTRANS_RST 7 9 nTRANS_RST LD_CHK_2 6 17 LDCHK2
RSV_DAT 20 20 RSV_DAT VSYNC_K_N 18 11 VSYNC_K_N LD_CHK_1 3 18 LDCHK1
GND 21 21 GND2 VSYNC_K_P 17 12 VSYNC_K_P LD_CHK_3 17 19 LDCHK3
GND 22 22 GND2 GND2 19 16 GND2 S20B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
JOBEND_INT 23 23 JOBEND_INT nPCU_TRG 15 10 nPCU_TRG
SCK 24 24 SCK B24B-PHDSS S16B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) CN1
/PCU_TRG 25 25 nPCU_TRG CN4 CN4 GND2 21 4 GND2
GND 27 27 GND2 CH0_N 21 WH WH 1 CH0_N nBD 19 3 BD
B28B-PHDSS-B B28B-PHDSS-B CH0_P 22 PK PK 2 CH0_P GND2 22 2 GND2
GND2 20 SD SD 3 GND2 +5VN 20 1 +5VN
GND2 19 SD SD 4 GND2 B24B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) S4B-PH-K-S
CH1_N 17 WH WH 5 CH1_N
CH1_P 18 PK PK 6 CH1_P CN1 CN1
CH2_N 15 WH WH 7 CH2_N nPOLY_CK 1 1 POLYCLK
CH2_P 16 PK PK 8 CH2_P nPOLY_LOCK 2 2 /LOCK
GND2 14 SD SD 9 GND2 nPOLY_START 3 3 /START
GND2 13 SD SD 10 GND2 GND1 4 4 GND1
CLK_N 11 WH WH 11 CLCLK_N +24V3 5 5 +24V3
CLK_P 12 PK PK 12 CLCLK_P B5B-PH-K-S 292172-5(AMP)
CH3_N 9 WH WH 13 CH3_N
CH3_P 10 PK PK 14 CH3_P
GND2 8 SD SD 15 GND2
GND2 7 16 GND2
ECLK_LSU_N 5 WH WH 17 ECLK_LSU_N
ECLK_LSU_P 6 PK PK 18 ECLK_LSU_P
9
HSYNC_LSU_P 2 PK PK 21 HSYNC_LSU_P
HSYNC_LSU_N 1 WH WH 22 HSYNC_LSU_N
3 B22B-PHDSS S22B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
BD
1
5 2
6
PGM
7 4

BD BD PWB Detects the laser scan start timing
This device is used to detect a laser trouble
PGM Polygon mirror (motor) Reflects laser beams at the constant rotation speed

1 Laser control PWB Controls laser beam flashing and the output value
2 Cylindrical lens Converges laser beams to focus
3 No. 1 mirror Assures the optical path for laser beams
4 f  lens 1 Deflects laser beams so that the laser scan speeds on the both ends of the drum and that at the center of the drum are
5 f  lens 2 the same
6 BD mirror Assures the optical path for laser beams to the BD PWB
7 No. 2 mirror Assures the optical path for laser beams
8 Plane lens Converges laser beams to focus
9 Collective lens for BD Converges laser beams on to the BD PWB
No. Signal name Function/Operation

1 +5VLD 5V power for laser diode
2 /READY Polygon mirror motor READY signal ("L" in the constant speed rotation)
3 /PMCLK Clock signal for driving the polygon mirror motor
4 /START Polygon mirror motor drive start signal
5 /VIDEO VIDEO (Image signal)
6 /SYNC Sync signal (SYNC) from BD, sync signal for 1 line

B. Outline
This section performs the following operations.
Image data sent from the MFP (image process circuit) through the
mother board and PCU are converted into laser beams to radiate
onto the drum surface.
[Laser optical path]
* This unit must not be disassembled in the market.
C. Polygon mirror motor

Number of Rotating
Model Bearing Remarks
mirror surface speed
MX-M623U 14 surfaces 33914.5 rpm Oil bearing
MX-M623N 14 surfaces 33914.5 rpm Oil bearing
MX-M753U 14 surfaces 39988.8 rpm Oil bearing
MX-M753N 14 surfaces 39988.8 rpm Oil bearing
The number of mirror surfaces and the motor RPM are reduced to
reduce noises and increase reliability.
D. Outline of LSU specifications

Effective scan width 302 mm
Resolution 1200 dpi
Beam diameter Main scan = 50 to 75 mm
Sub scan = 50 to 90 mm
Laser power 0.088 - 0.238mW per 1 beam
(2 beam Lasers are used in this model.)
LD wavelength 790  10 nm

7. Photo-conductor section
A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
(1) OPC drum section
AC PWB
+38VO 2
GND 6
B8P-VH 1 +38V
2 GND1
CN6 B2PS-VH
GND 3 1 GND
5VN 1 2 5VN
/DM_D 5 3 /DM_D
DMCLK
DM_LD
7
9
4
5
DMCLK
DM_LD SMR-03V-B/SMP-03V-BC
DM
B20B-PHDSS-B S05B-PASK-2 3 PCS_LED 3
2 PCS 2
1 12V1 1
PCU PWB 1
TSDR-20V-K/TSDP-20V-K
PCS_LED 1
CN5 2 PCS 2 1 DL_P(24V)
12V1 1 3 12V1 3 2 (NC)
PCS_LED 3 7 DL_P(24V) 7 3 /DL
DL_P(24V) 4 8 /DL 8 PHR-3
PCS 5 12 24V1 12 1 24V1 1
/DL 6 13 /PSPS 13 2 /PSPS 2
24V1 8 14 TH_CL 14 SMP-02V-BC/SMR-02V-B
GND 9 15 GND 15 1 (NC)
/PSPS 10 20 GND2 20 2 (NC)
TH_CL 11 3 TH_CL
B18B-PHDSS-B 4 GND
PHR-4
SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2
7 PSPS
TH-CL
DL
PCS
6
4
3 5
2
9
1

DL Discharge lamp Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum Lamp
DM OPC drum motor Drives the OPC drum and the transfer section DC brushless motor
PCS Image density sensor Detection of density of toner patch on the OPC drum Reflection type Analog detector
PSPS Drum separation pawl solenoid Drives the OPC drum separation pawl Solenoid
TH-CL OPC drum cleaner temperature sensor OPC drum cleaner peripheral temperature detection Thermistor Analog detector

1 OPC drum Forms electrostatic latent images by laser beams
2 Cleaning blade Cleans remaining toner on the OPC drum
3 CL brush roller Cleans remaining toner on the OPC drum
4 Sub blade (Cleaning seal) Prevent against toner leakage from the cleaner section
5 Side seal F/R Prevents against toner dispersion
6 Drum separation pawl Separates paper from the drum
7 Separation pawl oscillation shaft Moves in the front and rear frame direction to install the separation pawl
8 Waste toner transport screw Transports toner from the cleaner unit to the waste toner transport pipe
9 Waste toner transport pipe Transports toner from the cleaner unit to the waste toner box in the toner cartridge front section

(2) Main charger section
PCU PWB HV PWB

CN14 CN1
DSW-F 1 1 DSW-F MHV
GND 3 2 GND PS-187(RD)
GND 4 3 GND
/GBPWM 5 4 /GBPWM GB 1
/MHVREM 6 5 /MHVREM B2P-VH
MHV-T 7 6 MHV-T
/THV+PWM 8 7 /THV+PWM
/THV+REM 9 8 /THV+REM
/CHV-PWM 10 9 /CHV-PWM
/CHV-REM 11 10 /CHV-REM
/CHVACPWM 12 11 /CHVACPWM
/CHVACREM 13 12 /CHVACREM
/DVPWM 14 13 /DVPWM
/DVREM 15 14 /DVREM
HVREMout 16 15 HVREMout
24V1 17 16 24V1
B34B-PHDSS-B B16B-PASK
1
1

1 Screen grid Charges the OPC drum evenly / Charges the OPC drum
2 Sawtooth plate Charges the OPC drum
B. Outline 2) LED lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser
In this section, laser beams are radiated to the OPC drum surface unit to form latent electrostatic images.
which was negatively charged, making electrostatic latent images.
LED lights
C. Description
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger.
The laser beam images are radiated to the OPC drum surface by
the laser unit to form latent electrostatic images.
1) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main
charger.
OPC drum
OPC drum
CTL
Main corona unit
CGL
layer
High voltage unit Aluminum
When laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative
and positive charges are generated.
Screen grid
Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the nega-
tive charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand,
negative charges are attracted to the positive charges in the
OPC drum aluminum layer.
CTL Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are bal-
CGL anced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reduc-
ing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum
Aluminum
surface voltage.
layer OPC drum
Electric charges remain at a position where LED lights are not
radiated.
The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC
OPC drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the volt- drum surface.
age applied to the screen grid.

3) After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the
cleaning blade.
Drum
Toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to

the waste toner section in the toner cartridge by the waste
toner transport screw.
4) The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged.
Lamp
CLT CLT
CGL CGL
layer layer
Auminum Auminum
By radiating the discharge lamp light to the discharge lens,

light is radiated through the lens to the OPC drum surface.
When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the OPC drum
CGL, positive and negative charges are generated.
Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the nega-
tive charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand,
negative charges are attracted to the positive charges in the
aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive and negative charges are balanced out on
the OPC drum surface and in the aluminum layer, reducing
positive and negative charged to decrease the surface voltage
of the OPC drum.
Drum

8. Toner supply section
TM1X
6
5 1
TM2X
TFSD
TNFS 2
PHR-4
24V1 1
4 CRUM
/TFSD
(NC)
2
3 1
TSDP-20V-K/TSDR-20V-K
24V1 1
GND 4 2 /TFSD 2
DRAWER 3 GND 3
CRUM_DATA 1 7 CRUM_DATA 7
CRUM_CLK 2
3 5VN
GND
3
4
8
9
CRUM_CLK
5VN
8
9 PCU PWB
10 GND 10 CN8
TSHR-04V-K 12 24V1_TM 12 1 24V1_TM
1 24V1_TM 1 (NC) 13 24V1_TM 13 2 24V1_TM
2 (NC) 2 14 /TM1SXA 14 3 /TM1SXA
3 /TM1SA 3 15 /TM1SA 15 4 /TM1SA
4 /TM1SXA 4 16 /TM1SXB 16 5 /TM1SXB
5 /TM1SB 5 17 /TM1SB 17 6 /TM1SB
6 /TM1SXB 6 20 F-GND 20 8 TM2Aout
PAP-06V-S/PALR-06V 9 5VN
10 TM2Bout
11 CRUM_CLK
SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2 12 24V1
SMR-02V-N/SMP-02V-NC 13 CRUM_DATA
2 TM2Bout 2 14 /TFSD
1 TM2Aout 1 15 GND
16 GND
6 5 2 TFSD 1 SMP-03V-NC/SMR-03V-N TSDR-20V-K/TSDP-20V-K
B16B-PHDSS-B
CN5
5VN 1 1 5VN 1 16 5VN 16 12 5VN
/TNFS 2 2 /TNFS 2 17 /TNFS 17 14 /TNFS
PHR-4 B18B-PHDSS-B

CRUM CRUM lap Stores the toner bottle information
TFSD Toner remaining quantity sensor Toner hopper remaining quantity detection Magnetic sensor
TM1X Toner motor 1 Transports toner in the toner hopper to the developing unit/ Stepping motor
Transports waste toner to the waste toner section
TM2X Toner motor 2 Transports toner in the toner bottle to the toner hopper Synchronous motor
TNFS Waste toner full sensor Waste toner full detection Magnetic sensor

1 TH shutter Serves as a shutter to supply toner from the toner bottle unit to the toner hopper. When a toner bottle unit is
installed, the shutter opens.
2 TH transport roller Mixes toner in the toner hopper.
3 Waste toner transport plate Remains toner evenly in the waste toner box.
4 Waste toner shutter Serves as a shutter to receive waste toner from the process unit.
5 TH screw Toner supply roller to the toner unit section.
6 TH supply roller Toner supply roller to the developing unit section.

B. Outline D. Operation
Adoption of the rotating toner bottle enables large capacity with a
compact toner bottle size.
When the remaining toner detection sensor in the toner hopper unit
detects no toner, the toner bottle turns to supply toner to the toner
hopper. Following supply, since the sensor detects full or empty
status inside the toner hopper based on a standard quantity of
approximately 150 g of toner, even if the toner cartridge becomes
empty, copying is not immediately suspended because toner inside
the toner hopper is used (approximately 5K/6% print duty docu-
ments).
Toner filling amount Life with 6% print duty documents

1,700g 83,000 sheets
The toner remaining quantity sensor in the toner hopper detects the
C. Composition toner remaining quantity by the toner transport roller rotation. When
there is little toner, the toner bottle rotating motor of the machine is
rotated.
TB shutter The toner bottle rotates at 4.2rpm. Toner of about 5g is supplied to
TB holder upper the toner hopper for every rotation. When toner full is not detected
after detecting the state with little toner for a certain period (4min),
Toner bottle the toner cartridge is judged as empty, and the display to urge toner
cartridge replace is shown on the operation panel.
NOTE: When the power is turned on for toner hopper replacement
or cleaning, the toner cartridge replacement display is
shown though toner is not accumulated enough in the toner
hopper. In such a case, turn off/on the power again.
Shutter lock pawl
CRUM TB holder lower
The toner cartridge is composed of the toner bottle with toner filled
in it, the TB holder lower which holds the toner bottle and to which
the CRUM and the waste toner box assembly are attached, and the
TG holder upper.
The TB holder lower is attached to the TB shutter. When inserting it
to the machine, the toner hopper rib releases the shutter lock pawl,
and opens in linkage with the TH shutter. When removing the toner
cartridge from the machine, the TB shutter closes.
NOTE: The toner discharge port of the toner bottle is sealed by the
heat seal. Do not rotate the toner bottle manually, or the
heat seal is dismantled and toner is discharged from the
TB shutter port.

9. Developing section
1 2 3 3 5
AC PWB
3 +38VO
7 GND
B8P-VH
DVM
+38V 1
GND1 2 PCU PWB
B2PS-VH CN6
GND 1 4 GND
5VN 2 2 5VN
/DVM_D 3 6 /DVM_D
DVMCLK 4 8 DVMCLK
DVM_LD 5 10 DVM_LD
3
2
HV PWB
41NC CN1
DSW-F 1 1 DSW-F
1 GND
GND
3
4
2
3
GND
GND
/GBPWM 5 4 /GBPWM
/MHVREM 6 5 /MHVREM
MHV-T 7 6 MHV-T
/THV+PWM 8 7 /THV+PWM
/THV+REM 9 8 /THV+REM
/CHV-PWM 10 9 /CHV-PWM
/CHV-REM 11 10 /CHV-REM
/CHVACPWM 12 11 /CHVACPWM
/CHVACREM 13 12 /CHVACREM
/DVPWM 14 13 /DVPWM
HUD-DV /DVREM 15 14 /DVREM
HVREMout 16 15 HVREMout
TH-DV 24V1 17
B-SSDHP-B43B
16
B16B-PASK
24V1
DRAWER Bias 1
4 QR/P8-20S-C(01)/QR/P8-20P-C(01)
(NC) 1
2
DVCH1
DVCH2
1
2
CN11
6
8
DVCH1
DVCH2
B2P-VH
(NC) 3 DVCH3 3 10 DVCH3

TSGOUT 1 (NC) 4 DVCH4 4 12 DVCH4
24V1 2 5 24V1 5 14 24V1
TCS 3 6 TCS 6 16 TCS
GND 4 7 GND 7 18 GND
51021-0400 8 TSGOUT 8 20 TSGOUT
TCS 3.3V 1
10
12
GND
3.3V
10
12
22
30
GND
3.3V
HUD_DV 2 13 HUD_DV 13 26 HUD_DV
GND 3 14 GND 14 24 GND
TH_DV 4 15 TH_DV 15 28 TH_DV
PHR-4 20 DV-Bias 20 B30B-PHDSS-B
SPS-01T-110

Bias Developing bias Developing bias
DVM Developing motor Drives the developing section. DC brush-less motor
HUD-DV Developing humidity sensor Developing section peripheral humidity detection Humidity sensor Analog detector
TCS Toner density sensor Toner density detection Magnetic sensor Analog detector
TH-DV Developing humidity sensor Developing section humidity detection Thermistor Analog detector

1 Developing roller Forms magnetic brush with developer and put toner on the OPC drum.
2 DV doctor Keeps the height of the magnetic brush on the developing roller at a fixed level.
3 Mixing roller Mixes developer (carrier and toner) and charges toner negatively.
4 DV earth plate Earth plate for DV unit
5 AG roller Mixes toner supplied from the toner hopper, and supplies toner to the DV box evenly.

B. Outline
In this section, toner is attached to electrostatic latent images
formed by laser beams on the OPC drum, making visible images.
C. Description
Electrostatic latent images formed on the OPC drum by the LED
(writing) unit (LED image light) are converted into visible images by
toner.
layer
Aluminum CGL
CTL
Drum
Developing mode
-400v
Toner in the developing unit is stirred by the mixing roller.

When toner is stirred, it is negatively charged by mechanical fric-
tion.
The developing bias voltage (negative) is applied to the developing
roller.
Negatively charged toner is attracted and attached to the area on
the OPC drum where negative voltage is reduced by exposure.
On the other hand, the negative voltage at an area where exposure
is not made is higher than the developing bias voltage, and toner is
not attached.

10. Transfer section
DM
1
2
4
TURM
THPS2
7
6
3 5V_THPS2 3
4 /THPS2 4 1 THPS2
PCU PWB DRAWER
QR/P4-32S-C(01)/QR/P4-32P-C(01)
5
6
/TCBPWM
/TCBIAS
5
6
2
3
GND
5V_THPS2
CN4 20 /THPS2 20 9 GND 9 179228-3
TURM 9 21 TURM 21 10 TURM 10 1 TURM
/TCBPWM 11 22 /TCBPWM 22 2 GND
1 3 5 /TCBIAS
5V_THPS2
16
24
23
24
/TCBIAS
5V_THPS2
23
24
PHR-2
1 GND
HV PWB /THPS2
GND
26
32
25 GND 25 2 GND
(NC) 3 GND DF11-6DS-2C
THV PHDR-34VS-1 4 GND +
FPS-187(WH) CN14 5 GND DF11-6DP-SP1(05)
CN1
2 DSW-F
GND
GND
1
2
3
1
3
4
DSW-F
GND
GND
6 GND
CN6
/GBPWM 4 5 /GBPWM 1 DSW-L Bias
/MHVREM 5 6 /MHVREM 2 DSW-L FPS-187
4 MHV-T
/THV+PWM
/THV+REM
6
7
8
7
8
9
MHV-T
/THV+PWM
/THV+REM
3
4
5
/TCBIAS
/TCB-PWM
GND TB PWB
/CHV-PWM 9 10 /CHV-PWM 6 F-GND
8 6
/CHV-REM
/CHVACPWM
/CHVACREM
10
11
12
11
12
13
/CHV-REM
/CHVACPWM
/CHVACREM
PHR-6
SRA-21T-4
/DVPWM 13 14 /DVPWM
15 /DVREM
/DVREM
HVREMout
14
15 16 HVREMout AC PWB
24V1 16 17 24V1 +38VO 2 1 +38V
GND 6 2 GND1
7 B16B-PASK B34B-PHDSS-B
GND
CN6
3
B8P-VH B2PS-VH
1 GND
5VN 1 2 5VN
/DM_D 5 3 /DM_D
DMCLK 7 4 DMCLK
DM_LD 9 5 DM_LD
B20B-PHDSS-B S05B-PASK-2

DM OPC drum motor Drives the OPC drum and the transfer section. DC brushless
motor
THPS2 Transfer belt contact/ Transfer belt separation home position detection 2 Transmission Other sensor, switch
separation home position sensor 2 type
THV Transfer high voltage High voltage for transfer
TURM Transfer separation motor Drives and separates the transfer belt. DC brush The transfer belt is pressed on the
motor OPC drum only during printing.

1 Transfer drive roller (Drive) Drives the transfer belt.
2 Transfer cleaning roller Cleans the transfer belt.
3 Transfer belt Transfers toner images from the OPC drum to paper.
4 Transfer tension roller Applies a proper tension to the transfer belt.
5 Transfer belt discharge brush Connects the transfer belt to the chassis ground.
6 Transfer roller Applies a transfer voltage to the transfer belt.
7 Transfer auxiliary roller (Idle) Helps to stretch the transfer belt.
8 Transfer (TCCL) bias high voltage PWB Generates a bias voltage for the transfer cleaning roller in cleaning or in the print mode.

B. Outline After completion of the job, the applied voltage to the transfer
In this section, toner images on the OPC drum are transferred to cleaning roller is switched to negative, and toner is returned
from the transfer cleaning roller to the transfer belt, and toner
paper.
on the transfer belt is attracted to the drum and cleaned by the
C. Description cleaning blade.
1) Toner image transfer
Toner images formed on the drum by the developing roller are
transferred to paper by the transfer belt. -2.0kv 2.0kv
Toner on the drum is negatively charged by stirring in the
developing unit. By applying a positive voltage to the transfer
roller, the transfer belt and paper on the transfer belt are posi-
tively charged to transfer negatively charged toner images to
paper.
Cleaning roller Transfer belt

cleaning mode cleaning mode
-2.0kv 2.0kv
AC4.5kv
1.0~1.5kv 2.0~2.5kv
-100v (35μA) (40μA)
8
10 Ω
62ppm 75ppm
Cleaning roller Cleaning timing:

cleaning mode Transfer mode
After completion of the job, When warming-up, After canceling
AC4.5kv
1.0 - 1.5kv 2.0 - 2.5kv a jam, After execution of process control
-100v (35μA) (40μA)
8
(62ppm) (75ppm) 10 Ω
3) Transfer belt separation/contact
Transfer belt is separated by the transfer separation motor.
2) Transfer belt cleaning The transfer belt is in contact with the drum except for the fol-
During the job, a positive voltage is applied to the transfer lowing cases.
cleaning roller so that negatively charged toner on the transfer The case that the transfer belt is separated from the drum
belt is attracted to the cleaning roller. except:
(The brush on the back of the transfer belt is provided for * When executing process control (to prevent against break-
increasing the cleaning effect.) age of toner patch on the drum)
* When a jam occurs (Protection of the drum, left door open/
close)
* When shipping (Protection of the drum. Separate with the
simulation 6-1 (7).)
-2.0kv 2.0kv

11. Fusing section
FUM
4 WEBM2
3
1
8
2
HLTS_S
WEBM1
HLTS_M
TH_UM
7
WEBEND2 TH_US 2
HL AC PWB
4 +38VO
8 GND
B8P-VH
+38V 1
GND1 2 PCU PWB
B2PS-VH CN6
6 5 GND
5VN
1
2
17
19
GND
5VN
WEBEND1 /FUM_D
FUMCLK
3
4
15
13
/FUM_D
FUMCLK
FUM_LD 5 11 FUM_LD
CN1
1 GND
2 INT24V
3 HLout_UM
5 HLout_US
6 /HLPR
7 HLout_UA
DRAWER 8 5VN
19LP-RWZV-K4GG-P6/19LR-RWZV-K2GG-R6 10 /WEBEND1
PHNR-05-H+BU05P-TR-P-H RCZR-10V-PS 11 TH_UM_IN
5VN 1 5 5VN 1 10 5VN 1 12 GND
WEBEND1 2 4 WEBEND1 2 9 WEBEND1 2 13 TH_US_IN
GND 3 3 GND 3 8 GND 3 14 5VN
179228-3 2 WEBM1A 4 7 WEBM1A 4 16 /WEBEND2
SMR-02V-N/SMP-02V-NC 1 WEBM1B 5 6 WEBM1B 5 18 GND
1 WEBM1A 1 5 WEBM2A 6 19 WEBM1Aout
2 WEBM1B 2 4 WEBM2B 7 20 WEBM2Aout
SLP-02V/SLR-02VF PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H 21 WEBM1Bout
1 WEBM2A 1 2 WEBM2A 1 22 WEBM2Bout
2 WEBM2B 2 1 WEBM2B 2 30 GND
PHNR-04-H+BU04P-TR-P-H 31 GND
RCZR-09V-PS
4 TH_UM_IN 1 7 TH_UM_IN 3 B34B-PHDSS-B
3 GND 2 2 GND 8
2 TH_US_IN 3 3 TH_US_IN 7
1 GND 4 4 GND 6
1 GND 9
GND 3 8 WEBEND2 2
WEBEND2 2 9 5VN 1
5VN 1
179228-3
1 L-HL(MAIN) 1 CN2
HL PWB CN4
2 N-HL(MAIN) 2 1 N-HL(MAIN) /HLPR 1
YLP-02V / YLR-02VF 3 N-HL(SUB) 3 (NC) 2 L-HL(AS) HLout_UM 2
1 N-HL(AS) 1 4 N-HL(AS) 4 3 L-HL(SUB) HLout_UA 3
2 N-HL(SUB) 2 6 L-HL(SUB) 6 B03P-VL-BK HLout_US 4
VLR-03V / VLP-03V CN3 GND 5
2 L-HL(MAIN) 2 VLP-01V/VLR-01VF 1 L-HL(MAIN) INT24V 6
1 L-HL(MAIN) 1 1 N-HL(MAIN) 1 2 N-HL(AS) B6B-PH-K-S
3 L-HL(SUB) 3 3 N-HL(SUB)
YLP-02V / YLR-02VF B03P-VL-R
1 N-HL(AS) 1
2 N-HL(SUB) 2
Signal name Name Type Function/Operation Active condition NOTE

FUM Fusing motor Drives the fusing unit.
HL1 Heater lamp (1) Heats the heat roller.
HLTS_M Thermostat (1) Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the
temperature rises abnormally. [For the heat roller]
HLTS_S Thermostat (2) Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the
temperature rises abnormally. [For the heat roller]
TH_UM Fusing temperature sensor (1) Thermistor Detects the surface temperature of the heat roller. Analog input
(Center section)
TH_US Fusing temperature sensor (2) Thermistor Detects the surface temperature of the heat roller. Analog input
(Edge section)
WEBEND1 Web end sensor Transmission type Detects the upper web paper end (replacement) End detection
WEBEND2 Web end sensor Transmission type Detects the lower web paper end (replacement) End detection
WEBM1 Web motor Synchronous motor Drives the upper web roller
WEBM2 Web motor Synchronous motor Drives the lower web roller

No. Name Function/Operation Active condition NOTE
1 Heat roller Heats and presses toner on paper and fuses it on paper.
2 Separation pawl Mechanically separates paper which was not separated naturally from
the heat roller.
3 Pressure roller Heats and presses toner on paper and fuses it on paper.
4 Separation pawl Mechanically separates paper which was not separated naturally from
the pressure roller.
5 Web roller Clean the heat roller.
6 Pressure roller Applies a pressure to web paper to connect the heat roller.
7 Lower web roller Clean the pressure roller.
8 Lower pressure roller Applies a pressure to web paper to connect the pressure roller.
B. General E. Fusing operation

This section performs the following functions and operations. Toner on paper is heated and pressed to be fused by the heat
1) Toner attached to paper in the transfer section are heated and roller.
pressed by the fusing roller onto paper to fuse.
Paper Fusing
Copy
exit
Heat roller Pressure

roller
Paper exit Fusing Heater lamps

roller motor (3 pcs.)
Sub power PWB
C. Fusing unit drive

To drive the fusing unit, the drive power is transmitted from the
drive motor (FUM) through the connection gear to the upper heat
roller gear.
The drive motor (stepping motor) is driven according to the control
signal sent from the PCU.
Heat roller
PCU FUM
ĮĮĮĮĮĮĮĮĮ ɛɛɛɛɛɛ
D. Heater lamp drive Paper exit
The surface temperature of the heat roller detected by the ther-

mistor is sent to the PCU.
Pressure roller
When the temperature is lower than the specified level, the heater
lamp lighting signal is sent from the PCU to the heater lamp drive
circuit in the sub power PWB. Three heater lamps are provided for the heat roller lamp is provided
for the pressure roller to sub heat paper from above.
The power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned on, and the
AC power is supplied to the heater lamp, lighting the lamp and This is because toner on paper must be heated from above to be
heating the heat roller. fused on paper.
To prepare for an abnormally high temperature of the heat roller, Pressure roller are of silicon rubber because of the following rea-
the thermostat is provided for safety. sons and purpose. This is the following reason, objective.
When the thermostat is opened, power supply (AC line) to the 1) Paper is separated upward. (Since the heat roller is of higher
heater lamp is cut off. hardness, the pressure roller is deformed to separate paper
upward.)
2) The nip quantity is increased to increase heat capacity for
paper.
3) By pressing paper with the flexible roller, toner is fused without
deformation. (The flatness, however, is not so high.)

F. Fusing temperature control
The temperature sensor is provided at the center of the heat roller.
The roller temperature is detected by the installed temperature sen-
sor, and the heater lamp is controlled so that the temperature is
maintained at the specified level.
In addition, the fusing temperature is switched according to the kind
of paper.
G. Cleaning operation
The fusing roller removes toner and dusts from the heat roller and
the pressure roller surfaces by the following methods.
• Pressure roller: Mechanical cleaning by the web roller.
• Heat roller: Mechanical cleaning by the web roller.
No. Name
1 Heat roller
2 Pressure roller
3 Upper web roller
4 Lower web roller

12. Paper exit section
POM1
POD2
POM2
CFM-U3
POD3
CFM-U4 POD1
2 CFM-U1
2 3 1
3
1
Driver1
CN9
CN5 (NC) 1 GND
GND1 1 2 GND
POM1CNT 16 3 POM1CNT
1 GND 1 1 GND
POM2CNT 6 4 POM2CNT
2 POD1 2 2 POD1
POM1XA 20 5 POM1XA
3 5VN 3 3 5VN
POM2XA 2 6 POM2XA
POM1A 18 7 POM1A PCU PWB 4
5
POD2
POD3
4
5
PHR-3
1 GND
POM2A 4 8 POM2A
6 CFM-UP1_V 6 2 POD2
POM1B 14 9 POM1B
7 /CFM-UP1_PWM 7 3 5VN
POM2B 8 10 POM2B
8 GND 8 PHR-3-R
POM1XB 12 11 POM1XB
9 CFM-UP1LD 9
POM2XB 10 12 POM2XB SMP-03V-BC/SMR-03V-B
10 CFM-UP3_V 10
ADM1CNT 7 13 ADM1CNT /CFM-UP3_PWM 11 1 GND 1 1 GND
B26B-PHDSS-B CN3 11
ADM2CNT 17 14 ADM2CNT 2 POD3 2 2 POD3
CFM-UP1_V 1 12 GND 12
ADM1XA 3 15 ADM1XA 3 5VN 3 3 5VN
CFM-UP3_V 2 13 CFM-UP3LD 13
ADM2XA 21 16 ADM2XA /CFM-UP1_PWM 3 SMR-04V-N/SMP-04V-NC PHR-3
14 CFM-UP4_V 14
ADM1A 5 17 ADM1A /CFM-UP3_PWM 4 1 CFM-UP1_V 1
15 /CFM-UP4_PWM 15
ADM2A 19 18 ADM2A 2 /CFM-UP1_PWM 2
GND 5 16 GND 16
ADM1B 9 19 ADM1B 3 GND 3
GND 6 17 CFM-UP4LD 17
ADM2B 15 20 ADM2B 4 CFM-UP1LD 4
CFM-UP1LD 7
ADM1XB 11 21 ADM1XB SMR-04V-N/SMP-04V-NC
CFM-UP3LD 8
ADM2XB 13 22 ADM2XB 1 CFM-UP3_V 1
5VN 10
RRMCNT 36 B24B-PHDSS-B 2 /CFM-UP3_PWM 2
POD2 11
TRMCNT 27 Driver2 3 GND 3
POD1 12
RRMXA 33 CN10 4 CFM-UP3LD 4
GND 14
TRMXA 31 3 RRMCNT PHNR-04-H+BU04P-TR-P-H
CFM-UP4LD 16
RRMA 35 4 TRMCNT 4 CFM-UP4_V 1
POD3 17
TRMA 29 5 RRMXA 3 /CFM-UP4_PWM 2
GND 18
RRMB 34 6 TRMXA /CFM-UP4_PWM 20 2 GND 3
TRMB 25 7 RRMA 1 CFM-UP4LD 4
CFM-UP4_V 22
RRMXB 32 8 TRMA
TRMXB 23 9 RRMB
VPMCNT 26 10 TRMB
VPMB 24 11 RRMXB
VPMXA 30 12 TRMXB
VPMXB 22 14 VPMCNT
VPMA 28 15 VPMB
B36B-PUDSS-1 16 VPMXA
17 VPMXB
DRIVER 18 VPMA
B20B-PHDSS-B
PWB CN1 SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC
POM1_24V 1 6 POM1_24V 6
POM1_24V 2 5 POM1_24V 5
POM1B/ 3 4 POM1B/ 4
POM1B// 4 3 POM1B// 3
POM1A// 5 2 POM1A// 2
POM1A/ 6 1 POM1A/ 1
POM2_24V 7 SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC
POM2_24V 8 6 POM2_24V 6
POM2B/ 9 5 POM2_24V 5
POM2B// 10 4 POM2B/ 4
POM2A// 11 3 POM2B// 3
POM2A/ 12 2 POM2A// 2
B14B-PASK-1 1 POM2A/ 1

CFM-U1 Fusing cooling fan motor 1 Exhaust heat from the fusing section. DC brush-less motor PWM control
(Paper exit, duplex (ADU) section)
(Front surface)
CFM-U3 Fusing cooling fan motor 3 Exhaust heat from the fusing section. DC brush-less motor PWM control
(Front surface)
CFM-U4 Fusing cooling fan motor 4 Cools paper which is discharged to the inner tray. DC brush-less motor PWM control
(Paper exit section rear side)
POD1 Paper exit detector 1 Paper exit detection from fusing Transmission type Paper transport system
sensor
POD2 Paper exit detector 2 Paper pass detection from paper exit Transmission type Paper transport system
sensor
POD3 Paper exit detector 3 Paper exit detection to upper section Transmission type Paper transport system
sensor
POM1 Paper exit motor 1 Drives the paper transport roller 16. Stepping motor Selection of Normal speed/
High speed
POM2 Paper exit motor 2 Drives the paper exit roller 1. Stepping motor Selection of Normal speed/
High speed

1 Transport roller 16 Transports paper from the fusing roller to the paper exit roller 1.
2 Paper exit roller 1 Discharges paper to the paper exit tray. / Switches back paper.
3 Paper exit roller 3 Discharges paper.
B. Outline
The paper exit and turning section discharges paper which is trans-
ported from the fusing section, and detects paper full. It also turns
paper to transport it to the duplex or the finisher.

D_SPED2
SGND
1
2 㪚N2
(1)
5V(sensor) 3 4 D_SPED2
175487-3 1 SGND
3 5V(sensor)
D_STLD 1 6 D_STLD
SGND 2 2 SGND
5V(sensor) 3 5 5V(sensor)
175487-3 8 D_SPOD
9 SGND
7 5V(sensor)
10 NC( SGND )
B10B-PHDSS-B
DRIVER PWB
Document feed section
3
SPRDMD
2
2 /D_SPFC 1
1 24V_TR 2
1
PHNR-03-H
㪚N4
5V(sensor) 3 18 SGND
SPPD1
D_SPPD1 2 16 /D_SPFC
SGND 1 15 24V_TR
PHR-3 13 5V(sensor)
13. Automatic document feeder
5V(sensor) 3 14 D_SPPD1
2 17 SGND
D_RANDOM
1 11 5V(sensor)
SGND
12 D_RANDOM
PHR-3
4 SGND
5V(sensor) 3 9 5V(sensor) CN6 CN1
STUD
SGND 2 3 SGND 5V 1 1 5V
D_STUD 1 10 D_STUD SGND 2 2 SGND
7 5V(sensor) D_SPFFAN 3 3 D_SPFFAN

175487-3
2 SGND SGND 4 4 SGND
STLD
5V(sensor) 8 D_SPED1 D_SPPD1 5 5 D_SPPD1
SCOV
3
5 5V(sensor) D_RANDOM 6 6 D_RANDOM
SGND 2
1 SGND D_SCOV 7 7 D_SCOV
SPWS
D_SPED1 1
6 D_SCOV D_SPOD 8 8 D_SPOD
175487-3
D_SPUM_INA 9 9 D_SPU M_INA
B18B-PHDSS-B
SPED2
4
D_SPUM_IN/A 10 10 D_SPU M_IN/A
5V(sensor) 3 D_SPUM_INB 11
DSPF CNT PWB
11 D_SPU M_INB
SGND 2 D_SPUM_IN/B 12 12 D_SPU M_IN/B
D_SCOV 1 D_SLUMA 13 13 D_SLUMA
SPFC
175487-3 D_SULM/A 14 14 D_SULM/A
SPED1
D_SLUMB 15 15 D_SLUMB
SPLS1
D_SLUM/B 16 16 D_SLUM/B
CN7 D_SPOM_ENA 17 17 D_SPOM_ENA
1 D_SPUM/B D_SPOM_STEP 18 18 D_SPOM_STEP
2 D_SPUM/A D_SPOM_MODE 19 19 D_SPOM_MODE
3 D_SPUMB D_SPOM_DIR 20 20 D_SPOM_DIR
4 D_SPUMA 24V 21 21 24V
5 24V_SPUM PGND 22 22 PGND
6 24V_SPUM 24V 23 23 24V
PGND 24 24 PGND
SPLS2
㪙6B-PH-K-S
24V 25 25 24V

PGND 26 26 PGND
SPUM
CN5 B26B-PHDSS-B B 26B-PHDSS-B

1 D_SLUM/B C N3 CN3
2 D_SLUM/A D_SPUM_VREF 1 1 D_SPUM_VREF
3 D_SLUMB D_SPFM_VREF 2 2 D_SPFM_VREF
4 D_SLUMA D_SPOM_VREF1 3 3 D_SPOM_VREF1
5 24V_TR D_SPOM_VREF2 4 4 D_SPOM_VREF2
SLUM
㪙5B-PH-K-S D_SELA 5 5 D_SELA

D_SELB 6 6 D_SELB
D_SELC 7 7 D_SELC
D_SELOUT 8 8 D_SELOUT
VAREF 9 9 VAREF
D_SPWS 10 10 D_SPWS
AGND 11 11 AGND
D_SPLS1 1 D_SPFC 12 12 D_SPFC
SGND 2 D_SRRC 13 13 D_SRRC
5V(sensor) 3 D_SRRBC 14 14 D_SRRBC
175487-3 CN1 D_SPFM_M1 15 15 D_SPFM_M1
2 D_SPLS1 D_SPFM_M2 16 16 D_SPFM_M2
D_SPLS2 1
1 SGND D_SPFM_CLK 17 17 D_SPFM_CLK
SGND 2
3 5V(sensor) D_SPFM_DIREC 18 18 D_SPFM_DIREC
5V(sensor) 3
8 D_SPLS2 D_STRRC 19 19 D_STRRC
175487-3
9 SGND D_STRRBC 20 20 D_STRRBC
PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H 7 5V(sensor) D_STMPS 21 21 D_STMPS
VAREF 1 VAREF 3 4 VAREF /D_STRC 22 22 /D_STRC
D_SPWS 2 D_SPWS 2 5 D_SPWS 5V 23 23 5V
AGND 3 AGND 1 6 AGND SGND 24 24 SGND
㪧HNR-03-H B9B-PH-K-S B 24B-PHDSS-B B 24B-PHDSS-B
SCOV DSPF upper door open/close sensor Detects open/close of the upper door.
SLUM DSPF lift-up motor Lifts up or moves down the document feed tray.
SPED1 DSPF document upper limit sensor Detects the upper limit of the DSPF document.
SPED2 DSPF document empty sensor Detects document empty in the document feed tray.
SPFC DSPF document feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the rollers in the document feed section.
SPLS1 DSPF document length detection short sensor Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper.
SPLS2 DSPF document length detection long sensor Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper.
SPPD1 DSPF document pass sensor 1 Detects pass of the document.
SPRDMD DSPF document random sensor Detects the document size in random document feed.
SPUM DSPF document feed motor Drives the rollers and transport rollers in the document feed section.
SPWS DSPF document width sensor Detects the document width of the document feed tray upper.
STLD DSPF document feed tray lower limit sensor Detects the lower limit of the document feed tray.
STUD DSPF document feed tray upper limit sensor Detects the upper limit of the document feed tray.

1 Pickup roller Picks up a document and feeds it to the document feed roller.
2 Document feed roller Performs the document feed operation of documents.
3 Separation roller Separate a document to prevent against double-feed.
4 Torque limiter A fixed level of resistance is always provided for rotation of the separation roller to prevent
double feed.

CN6 CN1
(2)
5V 1 1 5V
SGND 2 2 SGND
STRC
SPUM
2
1
D_SPFFAN 3 3 D_SPFFAN
SPPD2
STRRC
No.
STRRBC
SGND 4 4 SGND
D_SPPD1 5 5 D_SPPD1
Signal name
D_RANDOM 6 6 D_RANDOM
D_SCOV 7 7 D_SCOV
D_SPOD 8 8 D_SPOD
D_SPUM_INA 9 9 D_SPU M_INA
D_SPUM_IN/A 10 10 D_SPU M_IN/A
D_SPUM_INB 11 11 D_SPU M_INB
DRIVER PWB
D_SPUM_IN/B 12 12 D_SPU M_IN/B
D_SLUMA 13 13 D_SLUMA
D_SULM/A 14 14 D_SULM/A
CN9 D_SPOM_ENA 17 17 D_SPO M_ENA
22 NC D_SPOM_ STEP 18 18 D_SPOM_ STEP
Upper transport section
21 NC D_SPO M_ MODE 19 19 D_SPO M_ MODE
No. 1 resist roller (Drive)

Transport roller 1 (Drive)
16 NC D_SPOM_DIR 20 20 D_SPO M_ DIR
SMR-02V-N 15 NC 24V 21 21 24V
DSPF transport roller clutch

DSPF document feed motor
1 24V_TR 1 18 /D_STRC PGND 22 22 PGND
DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch
Name
Name
2 /D_STRC 2 14 24V_TR
DSPF document pass sensor 2

24V 23 23 24V
SMP-0㪉㪭㪄㪥㪚 27 FANCOM PGND 24 24 PGND
25 PGND 24V 25 25 24V
DSPF No. 1 resist roller brake clutch

28 FAN_LOCK PGND 26 26 PGND
26 NC( FAN_PWM) B26B-PHDSS-B B 26B-PHDSS-B
12 24V_TR
20 /D_SRRC C N3 CN3
10 24V_TR D_SPUM_VREF 1 1 D_SPUM_VREF
9 /D_SRRBC D_SPFM_VREF 2 2 D_SPFM_VREF
24 24V_SPF 㪤 D_SPOM_VREF1 3 3 D_SPOM_VREF1
23 24V_SPF 㪤 D_SPOM_VREF2 4 4 D_SPOM_VREF2
17 D_SPFMA D_SELA 5 5 D_SELA
PHNR-02-H 11 D_SPFM/B D_SELB 6 6 D_SELB
2 24V_TR 1 19 D_SPFM 㪙 D_SELC 7 7 D_SELC
1 /D_STRRC 2 13 D_SPFM/A D_SELOUT 8 8 D_SELOUT
PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H 8 24V_TR VAREF 9 9 VAREF
7 /D_STRRC D_SPWS 10 10 D_SPWS
6 24V_TR AGND 11 11 AGND
PHNR-03-H
5 /D_STRRBC
3 24V_TR 1 D_SPFC 12 12 D_SPFC
2 4 24V_TR D_SRRC 13 13 D_SRRC
2
3 /D_STMP
1 /D_STRRBC 3 D_SRRBC 14 14 D_SRRBC
2 D_STSET
PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H D_SPFM_M1 15 15 D_SPFM_M1
1 SGND
D_SPFM_M2 16 16 D_SPFM_M2
2
B28B-PHDSS-B
D_SPFM_CLK 17 17 D_SPFM_CLK
D_SPFM_DIREC 18 18 D_SPFM_DIREC
CN7
D_STRRC 19 19 D_STRRC
1 D_SPUM/B
D_STRRBC 20 20 D_STRRBC
2 D_SPUM/A
D_STMPS 21 21 D_STMPS
3 D_SPUMB
/D_STRC 22 22 /D_STRC
4 D_SPUMA
Detects pass of the document.

5V 23 23 5V
5 24V_SPUM
SGND 24 24 SGND
6 24V_SPUM
B 24B-PHDSS-B B 24B-PHDSS-B
1
B6B-PH-K-S

Controls ON/OFF of No. 1 resist roller.
Performs resist of document transport.

No. 1 resist roller braking is performed.
Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller 1.
STRC
SPPD2
Function/Operation
Function/ Operation
5V
5V
5V
5V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
DSPF CNT PWB
D_SOCD
D_ROCD
D_SPPD5
D_SPPD4
D_SPPD3
D_SPPD2
5V䋨䍜䍻䍙䍎䋩
5V䋨䍜䍻䍙䍎䋩
STRRC
Transports document from No. 1 resist roller to No. 2 resist roller.

CN608
6
5
4
2
3
9
1
8
7
12
15
10
14
11
17
18
16
13
㪙㪈㪏㪙㪄㪧㪟㪛㪪㪪㪄㪙
3
2
1
5V
STRRBC
SGND
B3B-PH-K-S
D_SPPD2
Drives the rollers, transport rollers and transport rollers in the document feed section.
SPUM
Make synchronization between the lead edge of a document and the scan start position.
C N9
SPFM
SGND 1
D_STSET 2
/D_STMP 3
24V_TR 4
/D_STRRBC 5
Transports document from the transport roller 2 to the document exit roller.
24V_TR 6
SPPD5
/D_STRRC 7
A pressure is applied to document to prevent fluctuations of document.

24V_TR 8 SMP-0 6 V-N C
D_SPF M/A 13 1 D_SPF M/B 1
Transports document from the platen roller to the transport roller 3.

D_SPFM B 19 2 D_SPF M/A 2
4
D_SPF M/B 11 3 D_SPFM B 3

D_SPF MA 17 4 D_SPF MA 4
24V_SPF M 23 5 24V_SPF M 5
SRRBC
24V_SPF M 24 6 24V_SPF M 6
/D_SRRBC 9 SMR-0 6V-N
24V_TR 10 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
Function/ Operation
Function/Operation
/D_SRRC 20 3 /D_SRRBC 1
24V_TR 12 2 2
SRRC
NC( FAN _PWM) 26 1 24V_TR 3

FAN_LOCK 28 PHNR-03-H
PGND 25
SPPD3
FANCOM 27
24V_TR 14
/D_STRC 18

NC 15
No. 2 resist roller braking is performed.

Controls ON/OFF of No. 2 resist roller.
NC 16
NC 21
NC 22
B28B-PHDSS-B
SPPD4

CN6 CN1
5V 1 1 5V
Drives the transport roller.

3
SGND 2 2 SGND
2
SGND 4 4 SGND
D_SPPD1 5 5 D_SPPD1
DRIVER PWB
DSPF CNT PWB
D_SCOV 7 7 D_SCOV
1
D_SPOD 8 8 D_SPOD
D_ SPU M_INA 9 9 D_SPU M_INA
D_ SPU M_IN/A 10 10 D_SPU M_IN/A
D_ SPU M_INB 11 11 D_SPU M_INB
D_ SPU M_IN/B 12 12 D_SPU M_IN/B
D_ SPO M_ENA 17 17 D_SPO M_ENA
D_ SPO M_STEP 18 18 D_SPO M_ STEP
D_SPOM_MODE 19 19 D_SPO M_ MODE
D_ SPO M_ DIR 20 20 D_SPO M_ DIR
24V 21 21 24V
PGND 22 22 PGND
24V 23 23 24V
PGND 24 24 P GND
24V 25 25 24V
DSPF No. 2 resist roller brake clutch

P GND 26 26 PGND
CN2
B 26 B-PHDSS-B B26 B-PHDSS-B
D_SOCD 13
GND 16

C N3 CN3
5V䋨䍜䍻䍙䍎䋩 7

Name
Name
D_SPUM_VREF 1 1 D_SPUM_VREF
D_ROCD 18
D_SPFM_VREF 2 2 D_SPFM_VREF
GND 17
D_SPOM_VREF1 3 3 D_SPOM_VREF1
5V䋨䍜䍻䍙䍎䋩 8

No. 2 resist roller (Drive)
GND 1 1 SGND
Lower transport section
DSPF transport motor

D_SELA 5 5 D_SELA
D_SPPD2 9 2 D_SPPD3
D_SELB 6 6 D_SELB
5V 3 3 5V
D_SELC 7 7 D_SELC
GND 2 B3B-PH-K-S
D_SPPD3 11
VAREF 9 9 VAREF
5V 4
D_SPWS 10 10 D_SPWS
GND 14 1 SGND
Platen roller
AGND 11 11 AGND
D_SPPD4 10 2 D_SPPD4
D_SPFC 12 12 D_SPFC
5V 5 3 5V
D_SRRC 13 13 D_SRRC
GND 15 B3B-PH-K-S
D_SRRBC 14 14 D_SRRBC
D_SPPD5 12
D_SPFM_M1 15 15 D_SPFM_M1 PHNR-03-H
5V 6
B18B-PHDSS-B 1 SGND 3 1 SGND
2 D_SPPD5 2 2 D_SPPD5
D_SPFM_DIREC 18 18 D_SPFM_DIREC 3 5V 1 3 5V
Signal name
PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H B3B-PH-K-S
No.
SRRBC
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPPD5
1
2
3
4
SRRC
SPFM
5V 23 23 5V
SGND 24 24 SGND
(3)
B 24B-PHDSS-B B 24 B-PHDSS-B
(4) Optical section
DSPF COPY LAMP
2 PGND
DSPF CNT 1 PGND
1 PWB
CL-INV-R
CN5
24V 1 5 24V
24V 2 4 24V
LAMP 3 3 LAMP
PGND 4 2 PGND
PGND 5 1 PGND
5597-05CPB7F

DSPF COPY LAMP DSPF copy lamp Radiates light onto a document to allow the CCD to scan document images.

1 Reflector Converges lights from the copy lamp.
2 Mirror Sends the document image to the lens.
3 Lens Reduces the document image (light) and reflects it onto the CCD.
4 DSPF CCD PWB Scans the document image (optical signals) and converts it into electrical signals.

(5) Paper exit section
DSPF CNT PWB

CN6 CN1
5V 1 1 5V
SGND 2 2 SGND
SGND 4 4 SGND
D_SPPD1 5 5 D_SPPD1
D_SCOV 7 7 D_SCOV
D_SPOD 8 8 D_SPOD
D_SPU M_INA 9 9 D_SPU M_INA
D_SPU M_IN/A 10 10 D_SPU M_IN/A
D_SPU M_INB 11 11 D_SPU M_INB
D_SPU M_IN/B 12 12 D_SPU M_IN/B
D_SPO M_ENA 17 17 D_SPO M_ENA
D_SPO M_ STEP 18 18 D_SPO M_STEP
CN8 D_SPO M_ MODE 19 19 D_SPO M_MODE

1 D_SPOM/B D_SPO M_ DIR 20 20 D_SPO M_DIR
SPOM 2 D_SPOM/A 24V

PGND
21
22
21
22
24V
PGND
3 D_SPOMB
4 D_SPOMA 24V 23 23 24V
㪙4B-PH-K-S PGND 24 24 PGND
24V 25 25 24V
PGND 26 26 PGND
B 26 B-PHDSS-B B26 B-PHDSS-B
DRIVER
CN3 CN3
PWB D_SPUM_VREF 1 1 D_SPUM_VREF
D_SPFM_VREF 2 2 D_SPFM_VREF
CN2 D_SPOM_VREF1 3 3 D_SPOM_VREF1
4 D_SPED2 D_SPOM_VREF2 4 4 D_SPOM_VREF2
1 SGND D_SELA 5 5 D_SELA
D_SELB 6 6 D_SELB
1 3
6
5V(䍜䍻䍙䍎)
D_STLD D_SELC 7 7 D_SELC
2 SGND D_SELOUT 8 8 D_SELOUT
5 5V(䍜䍻䍙䍎) VAREF 9 9 VAREF
SPOD D_SPOD 1 8 D_SPOD D_SPWS 10 10 D_SPWS

SGND 2 9 SGND AGND 11 11 AGND
5V(䍜䍻䍙䍎) 3 7 5V(䍜䍻䍙䍎) D_SPFC 12 12 D_SPFC
175487-3 10 N C( SGND ) D_SRRC 13 13 D_SRRC
B10B-PHDSS-B D_SRRBC 14 14 D_SRRBC

D_SPFM_DIREC 18 18 D_SPFM_DIREC
5V 23 23 5V
SGND 24 24 SGND
B24 B-PHDSS-B B 24 B-PHDSS-B

SPOD DSPF document exit sensor Detects document exit of the document.
SPOM DSPF document exit motor Drives the document exit roller.

1 Document exit roller (Drive) Discharges document.

B. Document size detection
Size detection on the document tray
The document size is detected by the DSPF document width sen-
sor (SPWS), and the document length is detected by the DSPF DSPF unit
document length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is
judged from the document width and the document length as
shown in the table below.
When, however, documents of different sizes are mixed and set on
the document tray, the largest size is detected.
Document length sensor SPWS

Document size
SPLS1 SPLS2
AB series A5 OFF OFF SPLS1
B5 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF SPLS2
A4 OFF OFF
B5R ON OFF
A4R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
B4 ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
Inch series 8.5" x 5.5" OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5"R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
C. Timing chart
To increase the document replacement speed, pre-feed of the second and the later documents is performed for documents of A4/Letter or
smaller sizes. Therefore, a clutch is provided for each transport roller to perform individual control.
Transport speed 386mm/s Letter single-surface transport

Copy key ON
SPFFAN ON simultaneously with print start of each motor
DSPF cooling fan motor OFF at 500ms after SPCD OFF of the last paper
SPUM
DSPF paper feed motor
SPFM
DSPF transport motor Timer from ON
SPFC
DSPF paper feed clutch Timer from ON
SPFC
DSPF paper feed clutch
STRRC
SPRDMD
DSPF random sensor 1
SPPD1
DSPF paper pass sensor 1
SPPD2
STRC ON simultaneously with SPPD2_ON

DSPF transport roller clutch OFF at 69ms after SPPD2_OFF
SPPD3
DSPF paper pass sensor 3 10.4mm
12.3mm
ON at 12.3mm - 10ms (23ms) after SPPD3 ON
SRRC
(SIM adjustment)
OFF at 10.4mm (28ms) after SPPD3 OFF
SPPD4
SPPD5
32.1mm
Scanning start at 32.1mm (86ms) from
OC scanner scanning
SPPD4 ON (SIM adjustment)
36.5mm
Scanning start at 36.5mm (98ms) from
Built-in scanner scanning
SPPD5 ON (SIM adjustment)
SPOD
DSPF paper exit sensor
Reduces the speed simultaneously with SPOD OFF,
SPOM
reduces the speed up to 2362PPS in 18.9mm
DSPF paper exit motor
Drives for 15mm and returns to 4394PPS in 18.9mm.
(Common to each paper size)

[9] MAINTENANCE
MX-M753N
Service Manual
1. Necessary execution items (Before and after maintenance)

A. Execution items before maintenance and servicing
To perform the procedures safely, refer to "NOTE FOR SERVICING" on the first page of this service manual.
Item Simulation
Check the developer counter value. 22 13
Check the OPC drum counter value. 22 13
Check the print counter value of each section in each operation mode. 22 1
Check the number of times of paper jams and troubles. 22 2
Check the paper jam positions and contents. 22 3
Check the paper jam positions and contents. (DSPF section) 22 12
Check the trouble contents. 22 4
Print the list of set values and adjustment values. 22 6
Check the number of use of the DSPF, the scanner, the finisher, the stapler, and the punch. 22 8
Check the number of use of each paper feed section. 22 9
Check the ROM version. 22 5
B. Necessary execution items in maintenance and servicing

* Perform the work items listed in the maintenance list (parts) and details of works as well as the items described below.
(The necessary execution items are marked with "*" depending on each situation.)
When repairing (with replacement of consumable parts)/checking

When repairing
After
When When (without
JOB When cleaning
No. JOB item Simulation When replacing replacing At periodic replacement of
No. replacing the scanner
installing the OPC the fusing maintenance consumable
developer (reading)
drum web roller parts)/checking
section
1 – Toner density reference 25-2 *
control level setting
2 – The OPC drum counter 24-7 *
is cleared.
3 – The fusing web cleaning 24-4 *
feed counter is cleared.
4 ADJ10 Copy/Printer picture 46-74 * * * * *
quality check and
adjustment
C. Execution items after maintenance and servicing

Item Simulation
Clear the paper jam/trouble data. 24 1
Clear the use quantity counter of each paper feed section. 24 2
Clear the number of use of the DSPF, the scanner, the finisher, the stapler, and the punch unit. 24 3
Clear the maintenance counter. (Select MAINTENANCE ALL.) 24 4
Print the list of setting values and adjustment values. 22 6
MX-M753N MAINTENANCE 9 – 1
2. Contents of the maintenance codes and countermeasures (Relationship between
various counter values and display messages)
The message of maintenance execution timing and consumable part replacement timing is displayed when each counter reaches the specified
value or when each sensor detects the condition for replacement.
The relationships between the kinds of messages and the life conditions are as shown below.
A. Maintenance conditions and messages

Message at End Over
Sim.26-38B Sim.26-38B
Message at Near End Over Counter name End condition
"0" "1"
Near end Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
Counter name Print Enable Print Disable
condition "0" "1"
Print Enable Print Disable Fusing upper heat 300,000 [sheet]
roller print counter
Maintenance 90% of SIM21-1 Message (1)
counter (Total) set value Fusing lower heat 300,000 [sheet]
roller print counter
Number of use days – – –
Message at End Over of the fusing upper
Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A heat roller
Counter name End condition
"0" "1" Number of use days –
Print Enable Print Disable of the fusing lower
Maintenance Sim.21-1 set value Message (1) Message (2) heat roller
counter (Total) Fusing upper web 300,000 [sheet]
print counter
Message Print job Fusing lower web 300,000 [sheet]
Message print counter
No. Enable/Disable
(1) Maintenance timing has come. Code: TA Enable Fusing upper web Judged by the Message (5) Message (6)
(2) Maintenance timing has come. Code: TA Disable cleaning feed end detection
(Displayed with parentheses.) counter signal.
Fusing lower web Judged by the Message (7) Message (8)
• After completion of maintenance, use SIM24-4 to clear the main- cleaning feed end detection
tenance counter. counter signal.
B. Waste toner full (toner cartridge replacement) of the fusing upper
conditions and messages web
Message at End Over of the fusing lower
Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A web
Counter name End condition
"0" "1"
Print Enable Print Disable Message Print job
Waste toner Full detection Message (3) Message (3) Message
No. Enable/Disable
sensor ON (5) Maintenance timing has come. Code: FK3 Enable
(6) Maintenance timing has come. Code: FK3 Disable
Message Print job (Displayed with parentheses.)
Message
No. Enable/Disable (4) Set the frame fusing unit properly. Disable
(3) Replace the toner cartridge. Disable (7) Maintenance timing has come. Code: FK4 Enable
(Displayed with parentheses.) (8) Maintenance timing has come. Code: FK4 Disable
(Displayed with parentheses.)
C. Fusing unit maintenance conditions and
After completion of maintenance, use SIM24-4 to clear the fusing
messages
counter and the web counter.
Message at Near End Over D. OPC drum unit maintenance conditions and
Near end Sim.26-38B Sim.26-38B
Counter name
condition "0" "1"
messages
Print Enable Print Disable
Message at Near End Over
Fusing unit print No criteria
counter Near End Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
Counter name
condition "0" "1"
Number of use No criteria – –
days of the fusing
unit Drum cartridge print No criteria
counter (K)
Drum cartridge No criteria – –
Message when not installed accumulated
Sim.26-38B Sim.26-38B traveling distance (K)
Unit name Not installed
"0" "1" Drum cartridge use No criteria – –
Print Enable Print Disable days (K)
Fusing unit Judged by the (4) (4)
fusing thermistor
value.
Fusing web unit No criteria
Message at End Over Message at Near End
Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A detection
Counter name End condition Sensor
"0" "1" Near end condition Sim.26-69B Sim.26-69B
name
Print Enable Print Disable "0" "1"
Drum cartridge print 300,000 [sheet]* Message (9) Message (9) Displayed Not displayed
counter (K) Intermediate The intermediate toner Message (12)
Accumulated rotation 840K rotations Message (9) Message (9) hopper hopper remaining
number of drum (K) inside quantity sensor repeats
Toner ON/OFF operations
Judged by the earlier timing of the OPC drum print counter or the remaining and the toner remaining
drum rotation accumulated counter. quantity quantity in the toner
sensor (K) cartridge is 2.5% or less
Message Print job (calculated with the
Message
No. Enable/Disable accumulated rotation
(9) Maintenance timing has come. Code: DK Enable time of the toner motor).
• After completion of maintenance, use SIM24-7 to clear the OPC

Message at End Over
drum counter. Counter Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
End condition
name "0" "1"
E. Developer life conditions and messages
Message at Near End Over In the Condition 1 or 2 below: Message (13) Message (13)
Near End developing
Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
Counter name tank Condition 1: The toner
condition "0" "1"
Toner hopper motor rotation
remaining time passes a lapse of
Developer cartridge No criteria
quantity 280sec from the near
print counter (K)
sensor (K) end state.
Developer cartridge No criteria – –
accumulated Condition 2: AND
traveling distance (K) condition of status A
Developer cartridge No criteria – – and status C, or AND
use days (K) condition of status B
and status C.
Message at End Over
Status A: The toner
Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
Counter name End condition remaining quantity in
"0" "1"
the toner cartridge is
2.5% or less (calculated
Developer cartridge 300,000 [sheet]* Message (10) Message (10)
with the accumulated
print counter (K)
rotation time of the
Developer rotation 840K rotations Message (10) Message (10) toner motor).
accumulate count (K)
Status B: Toner near
Judged by the earlier timing of the developer print counter or the
end (The intermediate
developer rotation accumulated counter. toner hopper remaining
The developer rotation number is synchronized with the drum sensor repeats ON/
motor rotation number. OFF operations and the
toner remaining
Message Print job quantity in the toner
Message
No. Enable/Disable cartridge is 2.5% or less
(10) (Maintenance timing has come. Code: VK) Enable (calculated with the
accumulated rotation
• After replacement of developer, use SIM25-2 to set the reference time of the toner motor).
toner density control level.
Status C: Toner
• When the above operation is executed, the developer counter
concentration sensor
(developer print counter and developer accumulated traveling output (Reference
distance) is cleared. value: 0.14V or above)
F. Toner cartridge life conditions and messages

Message Print job
Message
Toner preparation Message No. Enable/Disable
Sensor Sim.26-69A Sim.26-69A (11) Toner is decreasing. Enable
Near end condition
name "0" "1" (12) Replace the toner cartridge. Enable
Displayed Not displayed (13) Replace the toner cartridge. (Displayed Disable
Toner remaining Message (11) with parentheses.)
quantity 25% or less
(calculated with the
accumulated rotation
time of the toner motor.)
3. Maintenance system table
Sequence of the maintenance works
The work sequence numbers are marked to the maintenance works on the maintenance list in the following three divisions.
• Large division
• Middle division
• Small division
Follow the above work sequence for efficient maintenance.
Work sequence number Division Description

*1 Work sequence for a section/unit Large division Indicates a section/unit to be worked.
*2 Work sequence for a sub unit Medium division Indicates the work sequence of the sub units in a section/unit.
*3 Work sequence of parts Small division Indicates the work sequence of the parts in a section/unit.
[Main unit]
✕: Check (Clean, replace, adjust, or grease as needed.) : Clean ▲: Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shift position
Work Work Work

Section/
sequence Section/ sequence sequence When 300 600 900
Sub unit Part name NOTE Process / Material
(Section/ Unit name (Sub unit) (Parts) calling K K K
name
Unit) (*1) (*2) (*3)
1 DSPF Paper 1 Paper feed roller     [Note 1] Wipe with
feed/ 2 Pickup roller     cloth
Transport/ 3 Separation roller     immersed in
Paper exit water to
section clean.
4 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 1]
(For separation) [Note 7]
5 No.1 resist roller     Wipe with
6 Transport roller 3     cloth
7 Transport roller 1     immersed in
8 No.2 resist roller/     water to
Platen roller clean.
9 Transport roller 2    
10 Paper exit roller    
11 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Optical 12 Scanner lamp/     [Note 11] Wipe with
section Reflector dry cloth or
13 Lens/CCD     ethyl alcohol
14 Mirror     to clean.
15 No. 1 scanning     Wipe with
plate dry cloth or
16 No. 2 scanning     ethyl alcohol
section to clean.
(Scanning glass)
17 No. 2 scanning    
section (White
reference glass)
Drive 18 Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ (Specified HANARL UKOG-
section position) FL-955R 0299FCZZ
19 Belts ✕ ✕ ✕
Finish 20 Stamp solenoid Option
stamp Replace at
section 2400K.
Other 21 OC mat    
2 Scanner section (Optical section) 1 Table glass/     Wipe with
SPF glass dry cloth or
2 Scanner lamp/     ethyl alcohol
Reflector to clean.
3 Lens/CCD/    
Mirrors
4 Drive belt/ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Drive wire/Pulley
5 Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ (Specified
position)
3 MC unit 1 Screen grid ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Sawtooth  ▲ ▲ ▲
3 MC cleaner ▲ ▲ ▲
Work Work Work
Section/
name
Unit) (*1) (*2) (*3)
4 OPC drum peripheral section 1 Drum ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ Stearic acid UKOG-
0312FCZZ
2 Drum separation ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
pawl
3 Cleaning blade ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ It is desirable
to replace
after one
year from
installation or
replacement.
4 Toner reception ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
seal
5 CL side seal F ▲ ▲ ▲ Stearic acid UKOG-
6 CL side seal R ▲ ▲ ▲ 0309FCZZ
7 Cleaning brush ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
roller
8 Image density ✕    Ethyl alcohol
sensor
9 Discharge lamp ✕   
10 Paper guide    
5 Transfer unit 1 Transfer CL roller ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Transfer belt  ▲ ▲ ▲
3 Transfer roller ▲ ▲ ▲
collar
5 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕
6 Transfer drive ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
gear
7 Shaft ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Lubricate as FLOIL GE- UKOG-
(Conductive needed when 676 0012QSZZ
grease) checking.
6 Developing 1 1 Developer ▲ ▲ ▲ Supply when
unit installing
2 Doctor cover unit ▲ ▲ ▲
(with DV seal)
3 DV side seal F ▲ ▲ ▲ Ethyl alcohol
4 DV side seal R ▲ ▲ ▲
5 MG holder    
F/R
2 Toner cartridge Assembly
when
installing/
Replacement
by user when
empty
7 Paper 1 Manual 1 Pickup roller ✕    [Note 1] Wipe with
feed/ paper feed 2 Paper feed roller ✕    cloth
Paper section 3 Separation roller ✕    immersed in
transport/ water to
Paper exit clean.
section 4 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 1]
[Note 7]
5 Shaft ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ [Note 8] FLOIL GE- UKOG-
(Conductive 676 0012QSZZ
grease)
6 Transport roller 1 ✕    Wipe with
cloth
immersed in
water to
clean.
7 Paper guides ✕    Ethyl alcohol
2 Paper feed 1 Pickup roller ✕    [Note 1] Wipe with
tray 1, 2 2 Paper feed roller ✕    cloth
section 3 Separation roller ✕    immersed in
water to
clean.
[Note 7]
Work Work Work
Section/
name
Unit) (*1) (*2) (*3)
7 Paper 3 Paper feed 1 Pickup roller ✕    [Note 1] Wipe with
feed/ tray 3, 4 2 Paper feed roller ✕    cloth
transport/ water to
Paper exit clean.
[Note 7]
5 Transport roller ✕    Wipe with
8, 9, 10 cloth
6 Transport roller ✕    immersed in
5, 6, 7 water to
clean.
4 Transport 1 Transport roller 2 ✕    Wipe with
section 2 Transport roller ✕    cloth
(Horizontal 3, 4 immersed in
transport water to
section) clean.
5 Transport 1 Transport roller ✕    Wipe with
section 19, 20, 21 cloth
(Duplex) 2 Paper exit roller 2 ✕    immersed in
water to
clean.
6 Transport 1 PS roller ✕    Wipe with
section 2 Transport roller ✕    cloth
(Vertical 15 immersed in
transport water to
2) clean.
4 Paper dust clean ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
unit
5 Reflection sensor   
(PPD)
section 11, 12, 13 cloth
(Vertical immersed in
transport water to
1) clean.
2 Transport roller ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ [Note 8] FLOIL GE- UKOG-
11 shaft 676 0012QSZZ
(Conductive
grease)
(T1PPD)
section 16 cloth
(Paper exit 2 Paper exit roller ✕    immersed in
reverse 1, 3 water to
section) clean.
3 Paper guide     Ethyl alcohol
5 Transport roller ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ [Note 8] FLOIL GE- UKOG-
16 shaft 676 0012QSZZ
(Conductive
grease)
6 Paper exit roller 3 ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩
shaft (Conductive
grease)
8 Drive section 1 Drum shaft ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ FLOIL GE- UKOG-
(Conductive 676 0012QSZZ
grease)
2 Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 8] FLOIL UKOG-
3 Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 9] G-313S 0307FCZZ
Work Work Work
Section/
name
Unit) (*1) (*2) (*3)
9 Fusing unit 1 Upper web 1 Web roller ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
unit 2 Pressure roller ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
3 Pressure bearing ▲ ▲ ▲
4 Web bearing ▲ ▲ ▲
5 Web guide ✕   
2 Lower web 1 Lower web roller ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
unit 2 Lower pressure ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
roller
3 Lower pressure ▲ ▲ ▲
bearing
4 Web shaft ✕   
3 Fusing unit 1 Heat roller ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
body 2 Heat roller ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
insulation bush
3 Insulation spacer ▲ ▲ ▲
(4 pieces)
4 Heat roller gear ✕ ✕ ✕ Lubricate as JFE552 UKOG-
needed when 0235FCZZ
checking.
5 Pressure roller ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
6 Upper separation ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
pawl
7 Lower separation ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
pawl
8 Thermistor ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Paper dust
(upper/lower) removal is
required.
9 Paper entry    
guide
10 Paper exit guide    
10 Filters 1 Ozone filter ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Toner filter ▲ ▲ ▲
11 Other Sensors, ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 10]
detectors
12 Image quality check, adjustment SIM46-74 ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
[Note 1] Replacement reference: For replacement, refer to each paper feed counter value.
• Paper feed tray 1 and 2 section: 200K or 1 year
• Manual paper feed/paper feed tray 3 and 4 section: 100K or 1 year
• DSPF section: 100K or 1 year
• Torque limiter: 800K (400K for manual paper feed section)
[Note 7] Check when jams occur frequently.
[Note 8] Grease when noises are generated.
[Note 9] Check when noises are generated.
[Note 10] Check when a trouble or a jam is generated due to a sensor or a detector.
[Note 11] Clean when white or black streaks are generated on a copy.
* (NOTE) Paper feed section roller life

The lifetime of each roller is 100K or 200K.
When, therefore, a particular paper feed unit is intensively used, the life of the unit will expire before the maintenance timing.
In actual cases, however, the paper feed trays are switched and used according to different paper sizes, it is quire rare that replacement of
the roller is required b before the maintenance timing.
When it is needed to use a particular size paper intensively, it is advisable to use two or more paper feed trays for the particular paper size as
far as possible. That must be deliberately explained to the user.
When servicing, check the use frequency of each paper feed tray and replace the roller as needed.
For cleaning the roller, it is advisable to use cloth immersed in water.
Since the paper feed trays 3 and 4 are more frequently used for larger sizes of paper than the paper feed trays 1 and 2, their lifetimes are
shorter than those of the paper feed roller.
The degree of ware is greater in the sequence of the paper pickup roller, the paper feed roller, and the separation roller.
[Option]
Work Work
Section/
sequence sequence When 300 600 900
Unit name Sub unit Part name NOTE Process / Material
(Sub unit) (Parts) calling K K K
name
(*2) (*3)
Large Paper feed 1 Pickup roller/ ✕    [Note 2] Wipe with cloth
capacity separation Paper feed immersed in
tray (A4) section rollers water to clean.
Transport 2 Transport rollers ✕    Wipe with cloth
section immersed in
water to clean.
3 Transport paper     Ethyl alcohol
guides
Drive 4 Gears ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ (Specified Lift drive Lift drive
section position) section section
[Note 8] Gear: White UKOG-
grease 0158FCZZ
Shaft: UKOG-
MOLYKOTE 0062FCZZ
BR2 Plus Drive section
UKOG-
Drive section 0158FCZZ
Shaft: White UKOG-
grease 0299FCZZ
Gear: HANARL
(FL-955R) Paper feed
transport drive
Paper feed section
transport drive UKOG-
section 0299FCZZ
HANARL
(FL-955R)
5 Belt ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 9]
Other 6 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 10]
Paper feed 7 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 2]
separation [Note 7]
section
Large Paper feed 1 Pickup roller/ ✕    [Note 6] Wipe with cloth
capacity separation Paper feed immersed in
tray (A3) section rollers water to clean.
Transport 2 Transport rollers ✕   
section 3 Transport paper    
guides
Drive 4 Gears ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ (Specified Lift drive Lift drive
section position) section section
[Note 8] Plastic gear: UKOG-
FLOIL 0307FCZZ
(G-313S) UKOG-
Metal gear: 0062FCZZ
MOLYKOTE
BR2 Plus
Paper feed Paper feed

transport drive transport drive
section section
Shaft: FLOIL UKOG-
(G-313S) 0307FCZZ
5 Belt ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 9]
Paper feed 7 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 6]
separation [Note 7]
section
Work Work
Section/
name
(*2) (*3)
Finisher/ Other 1 Punch unit Replacement
Saddle reference:
finisher/ Replace the
Punch unit unit at 1000K.
Drive 2 Gears ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ (Specified MOLYKOTE UKOG-
section position) EM50L 0327FCZZ
[Note 8]
Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 9]
Transport 3 Transport rollers ✕    Wipe with cloth
section immersed in
water to clean.
Transport paper ✕    Ethyl alcohol
guides
Staple 4 Knurling belt ✕    [Note 3] Wipe with cloth
process Paddle ✕    immersed in
section water to clean.
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
6 Stapler unit Replacement
reference:
Replace the
unit at 500K
staple.
7 Staple cartridge User
replacement
at every 5000
pcs.
8 Stitcher unit Replacement
(stapler unit for reference:
saddle) Replace the
unit at 200K
staple.
9 Stitcher staple User
cartridge (staple replacement
cartridge for at every 2000
saddle) pcs.
Inserter 1 Transport 1 Transport rollers ✕    Wipe with cloth
section immersed in
water to clean.
2 Transport paper     Ethyl alcohol
guides
2 Paper feed 3 Pickup roller/ ✕    [Note 4] Wipe with cloth
separation Paper feed immersed in
section rollers water to clean.
[Note 7]
3 Other 5 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 10]
4 Drive 6 Gears ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ (Specified FLOIL G5000H
section position)
[Note 8]
7 Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 9]
Finisher Transport Transport rollers ✕    Wipe with cloth
(100 sheets section immersed in
binding)/ water to clean.
Punch unit Transport paper ✕    Ethyl alcohol
guides
Curl correction ✕    [Note 5] Wipe with cloth
roller 1000K immersed in
water to clean.
Drive Gears ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ [Note 8] MOLYKOTE UKOG-
section EM50L 0327FCZZ
Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 9]
Work Work
Section/
name
(*2) (*3)
Finisher Staple Paper holding ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 5]
(100 sheets process rubber roller 1000K
binding)/ section Scratch roller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 5]
Punch unit (Rear) 1000K
Scratch roller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 5]
(Front) 1000K
Discharge roller ✕    Wipe with cloth
upper (Front/ immersed in
Rear) water to clean.
Discharge roller ✕    Wipe with cloth
upper (Center) immersed in
water to clean.
Shutter clutch ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 5]
1000K
Paper holding ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 5]
torque limiter 1000K
Shutter torque ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 5]
limiter 1000K
Sub guide ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 5]
torque limiter 1000K
Other Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 10]
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Load tray Load tray torque ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 5] 200K
(Upper/ limiter [Note 7]
Lower) Load tray one- ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 5]
way clutch 1000K
[Note 7]
Paper holding ✕    Wipe with cloth
lever rubber immersed in
water to clean.
Stapler unit Replacement
reference:
Replace the
unit at 500K
staple.
Oscillation guide Replacement
solenoid reference:
Replace the
unit at 1000K
staple.
Punch unit Replacement
reference:
Replace the
unit at 1000K.
Staple cartridge User
replacement
at every 5000
pcs.
[Note 2] Replacement reference: For replacement, refer to each [Note 6] Replacement reference: For replacement, refer to each
paper feed counter value. paper feed counter value.
• Paper feed roller related section: 200K or 1 year • Paper feed roller related section: 100K or 1 year
• Torque limiter: 800K • Torque limiter: 800K
[Note 3] Replacement reference: For replacement, refer to the fin- [Note 7] Check when jams occur frequently.
isher paper exit counter value. [Note 8] Grease when noises are generated.
• Knurling belt: 1000K [Note 9] Check when noises are generated.
• Paddle: 1000K [Note 10] Check when a trouble or a jam is generated due to a sen-
[Note 4] Replacement reference: For replacement, refer to the sor or a detector.
inserter paper feed port counter value.
• Paper feed roller related section: 150K or 1 year
• Torque limiter: 400K
[Note 5] Replacement reference: For replacement, refer to the fin-
isher paper exit counter value.
5 sheets of paper is considered as one cycle.
A. DSPF
Work Work Work

Section/
name
Unit) (*1) (*2) (*3)
1 DSPF Paper 1 Paper feed roller     [Note 1] Wipe with
feed/ 2 Pickup roller     cloth
Transport/ 3 Separation roller     immersed in
Paper exit water to
section clean.
(For separation) [Note 7]
5 No.1 resist roller     Wipe with
6 Transport roller 3     cloth
7 Transport roller 1     immersed in
8 No.2 resist roller/     water to
Platen roller clean.
9 Transport roller 2    
10 Paper exit roller    
Optical 12 Scanner lamp/     [Note 11] Wipe with
section Reflector dry cloth or
13 Lens/CCD     ethyl alcohol
14 Mirror     to clean.
15 No. 1 scanning     Wipe with
plate dry cloth or
16 No. 2 scanning     ethyl alcohol
section to clean.
(Scanning glass)
17 No. 2 scanning    
section (White
reference glass)
Drive 18 Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ (Specified HANARL UKOG-
section position) FL-955R 0299FCZZ
19 Belts ✕ ✕ ✕
Finish 20 Stamp solenoid Option
stamp Replace at
section 2400K.
Other 21 OC mat    
[Note 11] Clean when white or black streaks are generated on a copy.
5
1
4
7 2
3
8
20
15
9 21
6
10
11
13
19
13 12
12 19
16
14 18
19
17
B. Scanner section (Optical section)
Work Work Work

Section/
name
Unit) (*1) (*2) (*3)
2 Scanner section (Optical section) 1 Table glass/     Wipe with
SPF glass dry cloth or
2 Scanner lamp/     ethyl alcohol
Reflector to clean.
3 Lens/CCD/    
Mirrors
4 Drive belt/ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Drive wire/Pulley
5 Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ (Specified
position)
5
1
4
1
5
4
4
3
3
2
3 2
5
C. MC unit
Work Work Work

Section/
name
Unit) (*1) (*2) (*3)
3 MC unit 1 Screen grid ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Sawtooth  ▲ ▲ ▲
3 MC cleaner ▲ ▲ ▲
2
3
D. OPC drum peripheral section
Work Work Work

Section/
name
Unit) (*1) (*2) (*3)
4 OPC drum peripheral section 1 Drum ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ Stearic acid UKOG-
0312FCZZ
2 Drum separation ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
pawl
3 Cleaning blade ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ It is desirable
to replace
after one
year from
installation or
replacement.
4 Toner reception ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
seal
5 CL side seal F ▲ ▲ ▲ Stearic acid UKOG-
6 CL side seal R ▲ ▲ ▲ 0309FCZZ
7 Cleaning brush ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
roller
8 Image density ✕    Ethyl alcohol
sensor
9 Discharge lamp ✕   
10 Paper guide    
6
7
4
2
3
2
9
5
1
10
E. Transfer unit
Work Work Work

Section/
name
Unit) (*1) (*2) (*3)
5 Transfer unit 1 Transfer CL roller ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Transfer belt  ▲ ▲ ▲
collar
5 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕
6 Transfer drive ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
gear
7 Shaft ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Lubricate as FLOIL UKOG-
(Conductive needed when GE-676 0012QSZZ
grease) checking.
3 6
5
3 4
F. Developing unit
Work Work Work

Section/
name
Unit) (*1) (*2) (*3)
6 Developing 1 1 Developer ▲ ▲ ▲ Supply when
unit installing
2 Doctor cover unit ▲ ▲ ▲
(with DV seal)
3 DV side seal F ▲ ▲ ▲ Ethyl alcohol
4 DV side seal R ▲ ▲ ▲
5 MG holder    
F/R
2 Toner cartridge Assembly
when
installing/
Replacement
by user when
empty
5
2
G. Paper feed/Paper transport/ Paper exit section
(1) Manual paper feed section
Work Work Work

Section/
name
Unit) (*1) (*2) (*3)
7 Paper 1 Manual 1 Pickup roller ✕    [Note 1] Wipe with
feed/ paper feed 2 Paper feed roller ✕    cloth
transport/ water to
Paper exit clean.
[Note 7]
5 Shaft ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ [Note 8] FLOIL UKOG-
(Conductive GE-676 0012QSZZ
grease)
6 Transport roller 1 ✕    Wipe with
cloth
immersed in
water to
clean.
2
6 5
5
3 1 4
Work Work Work

Section/
name
Unit) (*1) (*2) (*3)
transport/ water to
Paper exit clean.
[Note 7]
4 3 2
1 1
2 4
3
Work Work Work

Section/
name
Unit) (*1) (*2) (*3)
transport/ water to
Paper exit clean.
[Note 7]
5 Transport roller ✕    Wipe with
8, 9, 10 cloth
6 Transport roller ✕    immersed in
5, 6, 7 water to
clean.
5
5
2 3 1
6
6
2 3 1
(4) Transport section (Horizontal transport section)
Work Work Work

Section/
name
Unit) (*1) (*2) (*3)
7 Paper 4 Transport 1 Transport roller 2 ✕    Wipe with
feed/ section 2 Transport roller ✕    cloth
Paper (Horizontal 3, 4 immersed in
transport/ transport water to
Paper exit section) clean.
section 3 Paper guides ✕    Ethyl alcohol
(5) Transport section (Duplex)
Work Work Work

Section/
name
Unit) (*1) (*2) (*3)
7 Paper 5 Transport 1 Transport roller ✕    Wipe with
feed/ section 19, 20, 21 cloth
Paper (Duplex) 2 Paper exit roller 2 ✕    immersed in
transport/ water to
Paper exit clean.
section 3 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(6) Transport section (Vertical transport 2)
Work Work Work

Section/
name
Unit) (*1) (*2) (*3)
7 Paper 6 Transport 1 PS roller ✕    Wipe with
feed/ section 2 Transport roller ✕    cloth
Paper (Vertical 15 immersed in
Paper exit 2) clean.
section 3 Paper guides ✕    Ethyl alcohol
4 Paper dust clean ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
unit
(PPD)
4 5
2
(7) Transport section (Vertical transport 1)
Work Work Work

Section/
name
Unit) (*1) (*2) (*3)
feed/ section 11, 12, 13 cloth
Paper (Vertical immersed in
Paper exit 1) clean.
section 2 Transport roller ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ [Note 8] FLOIL UKOG-
11 shaft GE-676 0012QSZZ
(Conductive
grease)
(T1PPD)
1
4
1
(8) Transport section (Paper exit reverse section)
Work Work Work

Section/
name
Unit) (*1) (*2) (*3)
feed/ section 16 cloth
Paper (Paper exit 2 Paper exit roller ✕    immersed in
transport/ reverse 1, 3 water to
Paper exit section) clean.
section 3 Paper guide     Ethyl alcohol
5 Transport roller ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ [Note 8] FLOIL UKOG-
16 shaft GE-676 0012QSZZ
(Conductive
grease)
6 Paper exit roller 3 ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩
shaft (Conductive
grease)
5
4
H. Drive section
Work Work Work

Section/
name
Unit) (*1) (*2) (*3)
8 Drive section 1 Drum shaft ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ FLOIL UKOG-
(Conductive GE-676 0012QSZZ
grease)
2 Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 8] FLOIL UKOG-
3 Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 9] G-313S 0307FCZZ

[Note 9] Check when noises are generated.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2 2
2 2
2 1
2
2
2
2 2
3
2
I. Fusing unit
(1) Upper web unit
Work Work Work

Section/
name
Unit) (*1) (*2) (*3)
9 Fusing unit 1 Upper web 1 Web roller ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
unit 2 Pressure roller ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
3 Pressure bearing ▲ ▲ ▲
4 Web bearing ▲ ▲ ▲
5 Web guide ✕   
2
4
5
3
(2) Lower web unit

Work Work Work

Section/
name
Unit) (*1) (*2) (*3)
9 Fusing unit 2 Lower web 1 Lower web roller ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
unit 2 Lower pressure ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
roller
3 Lower pressure ▲ ▲ ▲
bearing
4 Web shaft ✕   
(3) Fusing unit body
Work Work Work

Section/
name
Unit) (*1) (*2) (*3)
9 Fusing unit 3 Fusing unit 1 Heat roller ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
body 2 Heat roller ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
insulation bush
3 Insulation spacer ▲ ▲ ▲
(4 pieces)
4 Heat roller gear ✕ ✕ ✕ Lubricate as JFE552 UKOG-
needed when 0235FCZZ
checking.
5 Pressure roller ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
6 Upper separation ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
pawl
7 Lower separation ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲
pawl
8 Thermistor ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Paper dust
(upper/lower) removal is
required.
9 Paper entry    
guide
10 Paper exit guide    
2 4
7
6 10
8
3 2 8 6
J. Filters
Work Work Work

Section/
name
Unit) (*1) (*2) (*3)
10 Filters 1 Ozone filter ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Toner filter ▲ ▲ ▲
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
MX-M753N
Service Manual
1. Exterior
Disassembly of each external outfit part refer to each section.
No. Parts
a Front cabinet
b Rear cabinet upper
c Rear cabinet
d Right side cabinet upper
e Right side cabinet lower
f Left top cabinet
g Left lower cabinet
h Right cabinet center
i Front cabinet upper
j Paper exit tray cabinet
k Left cabinet upper
l Right cabinet upper
m Left front cabinet
f
a
i
k
g
m
d b
j
e
h
c
l
MX-M753N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 1

2. Operation panel section 3) Remove the screw, and remove the front cabinet upper.
A. Operation panel unit
g
f c
a
b
Parts 4) Remove the screw, and remove the operation base plate unit.
a LCD INV PWB
b POWER SW PWB
c 8.5 MFP OPE PWB
d USB connector PWB
e LVDS PWB
f LCD module
g Touch panel
1) Remove the screw, and remove the left cover cabinet.
5) Disconnect the connector from the operation panel unit.
2) Open the left door.
*1
2 *4
1 *3
*1 *2
*1
*1: Since the lead wire is provided with the lock, do not pull the
lead wire.
Hold the connector and pull it out.
*2: Note that the lock is on the back surface.
*3: When disconnecting the connector, pull the lead wire
slowly.
*4: Disconnect the connector from the Mylar.

6) Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the opera- (3) LVDS PWB
tion panel unit. 1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the LVDS
shield sheet.
(1) LCD INV PWB/POWER SW PWB/8.5 MFP OPE PWB 3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw and the earth
wire. Remove the LVDS PWB.
1) Remove the operation panel unit.
* When the LVDS PWB is removed, the earth plate for the
2) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Remove the LCD is also removed. Be careful not to lose it.
LCD INV PWB and the POWER SW PWB.
3) Remove the screw and the earth wire. Peel off the Mylar, and
remove the 8.5 MFP OPE PWB.
(4) LCD module

2) Remove the LVDS shield sheet.
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Remove the
Mylar.
(2) USB connector PWB

2) Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the USB
connector PWB.

4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the LCD holder. 4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
the LCD unit.
5) Remove the LCD module.

5) Remove the touch panel.
(5) Touch panel

2) Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the LVDS
shield sheet.
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Remove the

Mylar.

3. Scanner section 4) Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet left.
A. Scanner unit
a b
i 5) Remove the screw, and remove the left cover cabinet.

c
g
d
e
f
h
Parts
a SPF glass
b Table glass
c Mirror
d Scanner lamp 6) Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet right.
e CL inverter PWB
f CCD unit
g Scanner motor
h Document detection light receiving PWB
i Document detection light emitting PWB

(See "2. Operation panel section")
2) Remove the DSPF unit.
(See "18. Automatic document feeder")
3) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.

7) Disconnect the connector. Remove the snap band, and (1) SPF glass/Table glass/Mirror
remove the harness from the edge saddle. 1) Remove the screw, and remove the SPF glass. Remove the
table glass.
2) Clean the mirror.
8) Remove the screw, and remove the supporting plate.
(2) Scanner lamp/CL inverter PWB

1) Remove the screw, and remove the SPF glass. Remove the
table glass. Remove the screw, and remove the glass support-
ing plate.
9) Remove the screw, and remove the scanner unit.

2) Shift the lamp unit to the right end. Loosen the screw, and (3) CCD unit
remove the wire. 1) Remove the dark box cover. Disconnect the connector, and
remove the CCD unit.
2
3
3) While rotating the lamp unit, lift it. Remove the harness holder
and the flat cable, and remove the lamp unit.
(4) Scanner motor

3
2 2) Remove the upper cabinet rear unit.
3) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
1
scanner motor.
4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the lamp.
1
(5) Document detection light receiving PWB
1) Remove the operation base plate.
5) Remove the CL inverter PWB. 2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
document detection light receiving PWB.

(6) Document detection light emitting PWB
2) Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet rear unit.
Remove the screw, and remove the earth wire. Disconnect the
connector.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the light emitting unit.
4) Remove the document detection light emitting PWB.

4. Manual paper feed section (1) Manual paper feed unit open/close switch
1) Pull out the multi manual paper feed tray unit.
No. Parts Maintenance (See "A. Multi manual paper feed tray unit")
a Manual paper feed unit open/close switch 2) Remove the manual feed upper cover.
b Manual feed empty detector
c Pickup roller ✕
d Paper feed roller ✕
e Separation roller ✕
f Torque limiter ✕
g Manual feed gate solenoid
h Manual feed paper pass detector 1
i Paper feed clutch
j Paper pickup solenoid
k Manual feed paper width size detection PWB
l Manual feed paper length detector 1
m Manual feed paper length detector 2
n Manual feed tray pull-out position detector 1
o Manual feed tray pull-out position detector 2
f j i
n o
h b
3) Remove the manual feed front cover.
a g d k l m
e c
A. Multi manual paper feed tray unit

4) Remove the manual paper feed unit open/close switch.
2) Remove the multi manual paper feed tray unit from the left and
right accuride.

(2) Manual feed empty detector (3) Pickup roller
1) Pull out the multi manual paper feed tray unit. (4) Paper feed roller
(See "A. Multi manual paper feed tray unit")
2) Remove the manual feed upper cover.
(5) Separation roller
(See "A-(1) Manual paper feed unit open/close switch") 1) Pull out the multi manual paper feed tray unit.
3) Remove the pickup cover.
2) Remove the actuator unit.
(See "A-(2) Manual feed empty detector")
3) Unhook the claw to remove the pickup roller.
4) Remove the actuator unit.
4) Unhook the claw to remove the paper feed roller.
5) Remove the manual feed empty detector.
5) Remove the separation roller cover.
6) Remove the separation roller.

(6) Torque limiter 4) Remove the manual gate solenoid.
1) Pull out the multi paper feed tray unit.
2) Remove the bottom cover.
* When assembling, tighten the screw so that the lever tip is at

13  0.5mm from the frame edge with the solenoid plunger
pulled.
3) Remove the separation roller.

13 5mm
(8) Manual feed paper pass detector 1

1) Remove the multi manual paper feed tray unit.
2) Remove the bottom cover. (See "A-(6) Torque limiter")
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the manual feed paper
pass detector 1.
4) Remove the separation roller shaft, and remove the torque lim-
iter.
(9) Paper feed clutch

2) Remove the manual feed upper cover.
(See "A-(3) Pickup roller")
(7) Manual feed gate solenoid 3) Remove the front cover.
2) Remove the bottom cover. (See "A-(6) Torque limiter")
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the manual feed gate
solenoid unit.

4) Remove the interface pass earth plate, the E-ring, and the 5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper pickup sole-
bearing, and remove the manual feed mounting plate. noid unit.
6) Remove the paper pickup solenoid.
5) Remove the connector and E-ring, and remove the paper feed
clutch.
[Note installing]
Check that there is a clearance when the solenoid plunger is
pulled.
[Note installing] 4.2mm

• When assembling, fit the rotation stopper of the paper feed
clutch with the clutch fixing screw.
(11) Manual feed paper width size detection PWB

2) Remove the multi tray 250 lower.
(10) Paper pickup solenoid

2) Remove the manual feed upper cover and the pickup upper
cover. (See "A-(3) Pickup roller")
3) Remove the front cover, and remove the manual feed mount-
ing plate. (See "A-(9) Paper feed clutch")
4) Remove the spring.

3) Remove the width detection mounting plate. 5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the manual feed tray
pull-out position detector 1 (A) and the manual feed tray pull-
out position detector 2 (B).
4) Disengage the pawl and the connector, and remove the man-
ual feed VR PWB.
[Note installing]
• Slide the harness holder in the direction of Y and install it. The
band must be in the range of A. Pull section B in the arrow direc-
tion to give a slack to the harness.
X
Band
(12) Manual feed paper length detector 1

(13) Manual feed paper length detector 2
A
(14) Manual feed tray pull-out position detector 1
(15) Manual feed tray pull-out position detector 2
Y
2) Remove the multi tray 250 lower.
(See "A-(11) Manual feed paper width size detection PWB")
• Fold the harness with your fingers and check that the harness
3) Remove the manual feed tray lower. keeps the folded shape along the holder when it is released. Rib
4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the manual feed paper C must be separated from the harness.
length detector 1 (A) and manual feed paper length detector 2
(B).
B A

5. Tray paper feed section a. Pickup roller
1) Pull up the paper feed tray 1, 2.
A. Paper feed tray 1, 2 section
2) Unhook the claws to remove the paper guide.
No. Parts Maintenance
a Pickup roller ✕
b Paper feed roller ✕
c Separation roller ✕
d Torque limiter ✕
e Lift wire (Rear)
f Lift wire (Front)
g Paper remaining quantity sensor PWB
h Paper remaining quantity detector
i Paper feed tray 1, 2 detection sensor
j Dry heater
g
i e
d
b g 3) Unhook the claw to lift up the first paper feed tray feed section,
b
d e and then remove the pickup roller.
f
h
c
a
f j h
c a
b. Paper feed roller

(1) Paper feed unit (Paper feed tray 1, 2) 1) Pull up the paper feed tray 1, 2.
1) Pull up the paper feed tray 1, 2. 2) Remove the paper guide.
3) Unhook the claw to lift up the first paper feed tray feed section,
and then remove the paper feed roller.
2) Remove the fixing screws from the left and right rails.
3) Hold the grips of the position indicated in the figure with both
hands, and remove it.

c. Separation roller e. Lift wire (Rear)
1) Pull up the paper feed tray 1, 2. 1) Remove the paper feed tray 1, 2.
2) Remove the paper guide. 2) Remove the E-ring, slide the winding pulley, and loosen the
3) Remove the lower paper guide. wire.
4) Unhook the claws to remove the separation roller.

3) Disengage the pawl, and remove the wire.
d. Torque limiter
1) Pull up the paper feed tray 1, 2.
2) Remove the lower paper guide. 4) Remove the resin E-ring.
3) Remove the separation roller unit.
5) Remove the wire.
4) Remove the torque limiter.

* Pass the nylon clamp. 5) Remove the resin E-ring.
* Attach so that the red wire is on the outside.
* Turn it clockwise to fit with the T-shape pin position and insert.
6) Remove the wire.
f. Lift wire (Front)

1) Remove the paper feed tray 1, 2.
2) Push down the tray and remove the screw, and remove the
paper feed tray 1, 2 front cabinet.
* Pass the nylon clamp.

* Attach so that the red wire is on the outside.
* Turn it counterclockwise and fit with the T-shape pin position
and insert.
3) Remove the E-ring, slide the winding pulley, and loosen the
wire.
(2) Paper remaining quantity sensor PWB

2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper remaining
4) Disengage the pawl, and remove the wire. quantity sensor PWB.

(3) Paper remaining quantity detector (5) Dry heater
1) Remove the paper feed tray 1, 2. 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper feed tray lock 2) Disconnect the connector from dehumidifier heater relay PWB.
arm unit.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper remaining 3) Remove the band, and remove the dry heater unit.
quantity detector.
4) Remove the dry heater.
(4) Paper feed tray 1, 2 detection sensor

1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper feed trays 1,

2 detection sensor.

B. Paper feed tray 3, 4 section 3) Open the bottom left cabinet.

a Pickup roller ✕
b Paper feed roller ✕
c Separation roller ✕
d Torque limiter ✕
e Paper pickup solenoid
f Paper feed tray upper limit detector
g Paper feed tray empty detector
h Transport roller 8, 10 ✕
I Transport roller 5, 7 ✕
j Paper pass detector
k Paper size detection PWB
l Paper remaining quantity detector
m Paper feed tray paper width detector
n Dry heater
i d
j e
h l
4) Remove the connector cover.

k
b c n m g f
a
(1) Paper feed tray 3, 4

1) Pull out gently the paper feed tray it stops.
5) Disconnect the connector.
2) Lifting up the paper feed tray unit slightly, remove it at an angle

from the right side. 6) Remove the paper feed tray 3, 4 from the lower shelf.

a. Pickup roller c. Separation roller
1) Remove the paper feed tray 3, 4. 1) Remove the paper feed tray 3, 4.
2) Remove the paper guide. 2) Remove the paper guide.
3) Disengage the pawl, and remove the separation roller.
d. Torque limiter
3) Unhook the claws to remove the pickup roller.
2) Remove the E-ring, and remove the gear and the pin.
3) Remove the E-ring and the bearing.
b. Paper feed roller

4) Remove the separation roller unit.
5) Remove the E-ring, and one-way clutch.
2) Remove the paper guide.
3) Release the pawl, and remove the paper feed roller.
6) Remove the E-ring, and move the separation roller shaft.

7) Remove the shaft unit.

8) Remove the torque limiter. 4) Remove the paper pickup solenoid.
e. Paper pickup solenoid

2) Remove the cover.
f. Paper feed tray upper limit detector/

Paper feed tray empty detector
3) Remove the paper feed tray upper detector unit (a) and the
paper feed tray empty detector unit (b).
b a
3) Remove the solenoid unit.
4) Remove the detector.

g. transport roller 8, 10 i. Paper pass detector
1) Remove the paper feed tray 3, 4. 1) Remove the paper feed tray 3, 4.
2) Remove the cover. 2) Remove the cover.
3) Remove the E-ring and remove the pulley and the bearing. 3) Remove the paper pass detector unit.
4) Remove the transport roller 8, 10. 4) Remove the paper pass detector.
(2) Paper size detection PWB

1) Remove the paper feed tray.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper size detec-
tion PWB unit.
h. Transport roller 5, 7
3) Remove the E-ring and remove the pulley and the bearing.
4) Remove the transport roller 5, 7.
3) Release the pawl, and remove the paper size detection PWB.
(3) Paper remaining quantity detector

1) Remove the paper feed tray.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper remaining
quantity detector unit.

3) Remove the paper remaining quantity detector cover. Remove 3) Remove the rear cabinet.
the paper remaining quantity detector.
(4) Paper feed tray paper width detector

1) Remove the paper feed tray 3, 4 unit lower.
2) Disconnect the connector, and release the pawl, and remove 4) Disconnect the connector from the dehumidifying heater relay
the width detection unit. PWB.
5) Remove the snap band.
3) Remove the spring, and remove the paper width mounting

base. Remove the width detection arm and remove the paper
feed tray paper width detector.
6) Remove the dry heater unit.
(5) Dry heater

1) Remove the paper feed tray 3, 4 unit lower. 7) Remove the dry heater.
2) Remove the paper feed lower cover.

6. Paper transport and duplex section 3) Remove the left vertical transport PG stopper plate.
4) Open the left door, and remove the left lower cabinet unit.
A. Vertical paper transport section 1
a Transport roller 11 (Drive) ✕
b Transport roller 13 (Drive) ✕
c Transport sensor
c
b
5) Remove the left vertical transport PG stopper plate.

6) Open the left vertical transport unit, and remove it.
(1) Paper feed tray 1 and 2 left PG unit

1) Open the left lower cabinet.
2) Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the pressure fulcrum
shaft.
7) Remove the paper feed tray 1 and 2 left PG unit.

a. Transport roller 11 (Drive) a. Transport roller 13 (Drive)
1) Remove the paper feed tray 1 and 2 left PG unit. 1) Remove the vertical transport upper unit.
2) Remove the E-ring, the drive collar, and the one-way gear. 2) Remove the upper transport fulcrum plate holder, and remove
the vertical transport upper open/close PG.
* Be careful of the installing direction.

3) Remove the E-ring and the bearing, and remove the transport
roller 11 (Drive).
3) Remove the open/close PG earth, and remove the drive con-

nection stopper screw and the bearing.
(2) Vertical transport upper unit 4) Remove the upper PG holding plate.
1) Remove the resist roller unit.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the vertical transport
upper unit.
5) Remove the vertical transport upper PG.

6) Remove the transport roller 13 (Drive). B. Vertical paper transport section 2
a Resist roller (Idle) ✕
b Transport roller 15 ✕
c Resist roller (Drive) ✕
d Resist roller front paper pass detector
e Paper dust cleaner ✕▲
b. Transport sensor
1) Remove the vertical transport upper unit.
2) Check each sensors.
(1) Resist roller unit

1) Remove the process unit. (See “8. Photo-conductor section”)
2) Remove the paper dust removing unit.

3) Remove the rear frame side cover, and disconnect the connec- 3) Remove the follower roller tension spring.
tor. 4) Remove the resist roller (Idle) unit.
5) Remove the bearing, and remove the E-ring, the gear, and
the pin.
b. Transport roller 15
2) Remove the front side cover.
3) Remove the E-ring, the gear, and the bearing.
4) Remove the coupling bearing on the rear side.
5) Remove the transport roller 15.
a. Resist roller (Idle)


c. Resist roller (Drive) d. Resist roller front paper pass detector
1) Remove the resist roller unit. 1) Remove the resist roller unit.
2) Remove the follower roller and the tension spring. 2) Remove the cover.
3) Remove the cover on the front side. 3) Remove the resist roller front paper pass detector.
(2) Paper dust cleaner

1) Open the front cabinet. Open the process DV cover.
6) Remove the E-ring, the gear, and the bearing.

7) Remove the coupling on the rear side.
8) Remove the resist roller (Drive).
2) Remove the paper dust cleaner.

C. Horizontal paper transport section 4) Remove the paper feed reverse guide.
Disconnect the connector, and remove the relay pass unit.
a Paper guide lock solenoid
b Paper guides 
c Transport roller 3 (drive) ✕
d Transport roller 4 (Drive) ✕
e Transport roller 2 (Drive) ✕
f Paper feed tray 2 paper pass detector 1
g Paper feed tray 2 paper pass detector 2
h Manual paper pass detector 2
i No. 5 paper feed paper pass detector
d f
g e
a
b
c
h i
(1) Relay pass unit

a. Paper guide lock solenoid

1) Remove the relay pass unit.
2) Remove the connector, and remove the paper guide lock sole-
noid unit.
2) Remove the paper feed tray units 1 and 2.

(See “5. Tray paper feed section”)
3) Remove the toner cartridge, the OPC drum, and the toner hop-
per, and remove the front door.
3) Remove the paper guide lock solenoid.

b. Paper guides 4) Remove the bearing, the belt, and the relay pass drive shaft
1) Remove the relay pass unit. unit.
2) Remove the metal fixture.
5) Remove the transport roller 3 and 4 (Drive).
3) Remove the lower paper guide unit.
6) Remove the E-ring from transport roller 3 and 4 (Drive), and

remove the belt pulley.
4) Clean each paper guides.
d. Transport roller 2 (Drive)

c. Transport roller 3/4 (Drive)
2) Remove lower paper guide unit.
3) Remove the paper feed PG of the paper feed tray 1/2.
2) Remove lower paper guide unit.
4) Remove the paper entry side upper plate.
3) Remove the rear positioning plate, and remove the paper feed
port PG of the paper feed tray 1 and 2.

5) Remove the E-ring, and remove the gear and the belt pulley. (2) No. 5 paper feed relay unit
1) Remove the multi manual paper feed unit.
(See “4. Manual paper feed section”)
2) Remove the manual relay paper guide upper.
3) Remove the No. 5 paper feed relay paper guide.

6) Remove the transport roller 2 (Drive) unit.
7) Remove the E-ring from the transport roller 2 (Drive).
4) Lift the No. 5 paper feed relay unit, and remove the connector.
5) Remove the No. 5 paper feed relay unit.
e. Paper feed tray 2 paper pass detector 1/2

2) Check the paper feed tray 2 paper pass detector 1 (A) and the
paper feed tray 2 paper pass detector 2 (B).
A a. Manual paper pass detector 2/

No. 5 paper feed relay detector
1) Remove the multi manual paper feed unit.
(See “4. Manual paper feed section”)
2) Remove the No. 5 paper feed relay unit.
3) Check the manual paper pass detector 2 (A) and the No. 5
paper feed relay detector (B).

D. Duplex section (1) Left door unit
1) Pull out the left door.
a ADU opening/closing door
b Paper exit roller 2 ✕
c Transport roller 19 ✕
d Transport roller 20 ✕
e Transport roller 21 ✕
f Duplex motor 1
g Duplex motor 2
h Paper exit gate solenoid
i Duplex paper entry detector
j Duplex paper pass detector 1 2
k Left door transport paper guide R unit 1
l Duplex paper pass detector 2
m Paper pass detector 2
n Transfer high voltage transformer
o Transfer separation motor
p Transfer belt separation home position sensor 2) Remove the front cabinet.
q Switchback gate
r Paper exit gate
s Left door open/close detector
t Duplex cover open/close detector
u Fusing discharge brush ✕
v Reversing discharge brush ✕
f
t
v h
q s
i
j
b
r
u
v
c
3) Remove the fixing screw.
o 4) Remove the left door unit.

k
m
l
p
a d e
n

a. ADU opening/closing door c. Transport roller 19/20/21
1) Pull out the left door. 1) Pull out the left door.
2) Remove the stopper section plastic E-ring. 2) Remove the ADU opening/closing door.
3) Remove the left door cabinet F.
4) Remove the left door cabinet R.
3) Remove the stopper from the fulcrum shaft to remove the ADU
opening/closing door unit in the arrowed direction.
5) Remove the front belt collar.
b. Paper exit roller 2

2) Remove the ADU opening/closing door. 6) Remove the E-ring to remove the transport roller 19 assembly.
3) Remove the ADU paper exit upper paper guide.
4) Remove the ADU brake collar.
5) Remove the E-ring to remove the transport roller 2 assembly.
7) Remove the bearing, pulley, gear and pin from the transport
roller 19.
6) Remove the E-ring to remove the bearing, pulley, gear and pin
from the paper exit roller.

8) Remove the rear belt collar. 15) Remove the bearing, pulley, gear and pin from the transport
9) Remove the ground plate. roller 21.
10) Remove the belt.
d. Duplex motor 1
11) Remove the E-ring and lift up the switching lever to remove the
transport roller 20 assembly.
3) Remove the duplex motor 1.
12) Remove the bearing, pulley, gear and pin from the transport
roller 20.
e. Duplex motor 2
13) Remove the U-turn paper guide.
14) Apply the bearing attachment plate to remove transport roller

21.
3) Remove the duplex motor 2.

f. Paper exit gate solenoid 4) Remove the duplex paper entry detector.
h. Duplex paper pass detector 1

3) Remove the paper exit gate solenoid.
g. Duplex paper entry detector

2) Remove the paper guide unit.
3) Remove the duplex paper pass detector 1.
3) Remove the follower roller unit.

i. Left door transport paper guide R unit. k. Paper pass detector 2
1) Pull out the left door. 1) Pull out the left door.
2) Remove the transfer unit. 2) Remove the left door transport paper guide R unit.
3) Remove the paper pass detector 2.
3) Remove the cover, and remove the connector, the snap band,
and the earth terminal. l. Transfer high voltage transformer
2) Remove the left door transport paper guide R unit.
3) Remove the transfer high voltage transformer.
m. Transfer separation motor

3) Remove the transfer high voltage transformer.
j. Duplex paper pass detector 2

3) Remove the duplex paper pass detector 2.

4) Remove the PWB holder. o. Switchback gate
2) Remove the paper guide unit.
5) Remove the transfer separation unit.
3) Remove the switchback gate.
6) Remove the transfer separation motor.
p. Paper exit gate

2) Remove the paper guide unit. Open the door, and remove the
cabinets.
n. Transfer belt separation home position sensor

3) Remove the transfer belt separation home position sensor.

3) Remove the paper exit gate. r. Duplex cover open/close detector
2) Open the door, and remove the cover.
q. Left door open/close detector

3) Remove the duplex cover open/close detector.
s. Fusing discharge brush

2) Remove the fusing discharge brush.
4) Remove the left door open/close detector.
* Attach the fusing discharge brush so that it is fit with the rear
end.

t. Reversing discharge brush
2) Remove the switchback gate.
3) Remove the reversing discharge brush.
* Attach the reverse discharge brush so that it is fit with the rib
inside and the parting line.

7. LSU section 4) Disconnect the connector, remove the snap band, and remove
the LSU.
No. Unit
a LSU
A. LSU
* Do not disassemble the LSU unit.
1) Pull out the multi paper feed tray, and remove the manual
paper feed cover F.
2) Pushing the lower part, remove the right cabinet center.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the process cooling fan

unit.

8. Photo-conductor section 5) Disconnect the connector. Remove the blue screw.
A. OPC drum Section

a OPC drum ✕▲
b Drum separation ✕▲
c Cleaning blade ✕▲
d Toner reception seal ✕▲
e CL side seal F/R ✕▲
f Cleaning brush roller ▲
g Drum separation pawl solenoid
h OPC drum cleaner temperature sensor
i Image density sensor ✕
j Discharge lamp ✕
f g
j e
* When connecting the connector, lift the connector cover and

connect it.
e i
a
c 6) Unfix the OPC drum to remove the bearing.
(1) Process unit

1) Remove the toner cartridge and tone hopper unit.
(See “9. Toner supply section”)
2) Remove the developing unit. (See “10. Developing section”)
3) Remove the MC charger unit.
7) Pull out the process unit by clasping the bolt head.

* When disassembling the process unit, be careful not to
catch the waste toner detection connector.
2
1

a. OPC drum NOTE: When applying stearic acid to the CL side seal, deliberately
1) Remove the blue screw to open the lower frame. spread it over the area shown in the photo. At that time, be
careful not to apply it to the other areas.
2) Gently remove the drum, guide and all.
Note that the application quantity of stearic acid differs
3) Remove the guide.
depending on the right and the left side.
• CL side seal F: 3 spoons of micro-spatel (21 - 24mg)
1
• CL side seal R: 2 spoons of micro-spatel (14 - 16mg)
One spoon of micro-spatel corresponds to 7 - 8mg.
4 3
R F
* When installing the OPC drum, apply stearic acid (UKOG-
* The OPC layer of a certain area of the OPC drum may break 0312FCZZ) to the whole surface of the drum.
off due to rotational friction. The OPC layer break-off gener-
b. Drum separation
ated in the area shown below will not affect print images.
Therefore, the drum can be used without replacement. 1) Remove the OPC drum.
2) Remove the resin E-ring.
3) Remove the drum separation pawl.
* Be careful not to deform the tip of the separation pawl.
12mm
14mm
* When replacing the OPC drum, apply friction-reducing pow-

der (UKOG-0309FCZZ) evenly to all over the CL side seals
(F and R) in order to reduce friction and membrane
decrease of the OPC layer on both sides of the OPC drum. c. Cleaning blade
(Use PARTEL (UKOG-0311FCZZ).) 1) Remove the OPC drum.
3) Remove the cleaning blade.
One spoon of micro-spatel

(7 - 8mg)

d. Toner reception seal NOTE: When applying stearic acid to the CL side seal, deliberately
1) Remove the OPC drum. spread it over the area shown in the photo. At that time, be
careful not to apply it to the other areas.
2) Remove the toner receiving seal.
Note that the application quantity of stearic acid differs
depending on the right and the left side.
• CL side seal F: 3 spoons of micro-spatel (21 - 24mg)
• CL side seal R: 2 spoons of micro-spatel (14 - 16mg)
One spoon of micro-spatel corresponds to 7 - 8mg.
e. CL side seal F/R

1) Remove the OPC drum.
2) Remove the CL side seal F and R base sheet.
* Clean the attachment section with alcohol to remove toner,
dust, or foreign material.
* Attach according to the attachment reference.
R F
Bump reference Bump reference
0 to +0.5mm 0 to +0.5mm f. Cleaning brush roller
1) Remove the OPC drum.
Bump reference Bump reference
0 to +0.5mm 0 to +0.5mm 2) Remove the toner receiving seal.
3) Remove the blue screw to remove the lever.
4) Remove the cleaning brush roller.
* When replacing the OPC drum, apply friction-reducing powder

(UKOG-0309FCZZ) evenly to all over the CL side seals (F and
R) in order to reduce friction and membrane decrease of the
OPC layer on both sides of the OPC drum. (Use PARTEL
(UKOG-0311FCZZ).)
One spoon of micro-spatel

(7 - 8mg)
g. Drum separation pawl solenoid
1) Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness guide unit.

2) Remove the drum separation pawl solenoid. 3) Remove the OPC drum.
4) Remove the image density sensor.
h. OPC drum cleaner temperature sensor

j. Discharge lamp
1) Remove the upper cover.
2) Remove the discharge lamp.
* Be careful not to break the pawl when fixing (A).
2) Remove the OPC drum cleaner temperature sensor.
B. Main charger section

a Screen grid ✕▲
b Sawtooth ▲
c MC cleaner ▲
i. Image density sensor c

2) Remove the connector.
a

(1) Main charger unit 2) Remove the screen grid from the claw.
1) Open the front cabinet and the process cover.
b. Sawtooth plate
1) Remove the blue screw.
2) Loosen the blue screw.
2) Lifting one end up, slide off the saw blade holder.
3) Remove the main charger unit.
c. MC cleaner
1) Remove the screen grid.
a. Screen grid 2) Remove the MC cleaner.
1) Loosen the screw.

9. Toner supply section B. Toner hopper unit
1) Remove the toner cartridge.
No. Parts 2) Open the process cover.
a Toner cartridge
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
b Toner hopper unit
the toner hopper unit.
c Waste toner full sensor
d Toner sensor * When pulling out the toner hopper unit, be careful not to
e Toner motor 1 catch the harness.
f Toner motor 2
d
3
b
e
c
1
5
a
2
4
A. Toner cartridge
1) Open the front door.
* When connecting the connector, lift the connector cover and

connect it.
(1) Waste toner full sensor

1) Disconnect the waste toner full sensor connector, and pull out
the toner hopper unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the waste toner full sensor.
Disconnect the connector.
* When attaching the sensor, do not tighten the screw exces-
sively. If the screw is tighten too strongly, the screw hole
may be broken.

(2) Toner sensor 3) Remove the toner motor 1.
1) Remove the toner hopper unit.
C. Toner motor 2
3) Remove the toner sensor. 3) While pressing the bottle coupling, turn it 90 degrees to the left
and remove it. Remove the spring.
4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the toner motor unit.

(3) Toner motor 1
5) Remove the toner motor 2.

10. Developing section (1) Developer
1) Take out the developing unit.
No. Parts Maintenance 2) Remove the DV cover.
a Developer ▲
b Doctor cover unit (with DV seal) ▲
c MG holder 
d DV side seal F and R ▲
e Toner density sensor
b c
e
3) Turning the MG roller, take out the old developer.
a
c
A. Developing unit
* Be careful not to put a fingerprint or a foreign material on the DV
roller surface. If a fingerprints or a foreign material is put on the
surface, the picture quality may be degraded.
1) Take out the developing tank.
4) Insert the new developer.
(2) Doctor cover unit (with DV seal)/MG holder/

DV side seal F and R
2) Remove the DV cover.
3) Remove the doctor cover unit (with DV seal).

4) Remove the DV side seal F and R.
5) Clean the MG holder and the DV side seal attachment surface.
6) Attach new side DV seal F and R according to the attachment

reference.
0.3mm 0.3mm
Edge reference Edge reference

0mm 0mm
0mm 0.3mm 0.3mm 0mm

Bump reference Marking reference
(3) Toner density sensor

2) Remove the toner concentration sensor.

11. Transfer section 3) Loosen the blue screw and open the holder to remove the
transfer unit.
a Transfer drum gear ✕▲
b Transfer belt ▲
c Transfer roller ▲
d Transfer roller collar ▲
e Transfer CL roller ▲
f Discharge brush ✕
f
(1) Transfer drum gear
1) Remove the transfer unit.
2) Loosen the blue screw and unhook the hook lever in order to
open the transfer belt unit in the arrowed direction.
3) Remove the spring.
e d
a
4) Remove the transfer belt unit in the arrowed direction.

d
A. Transfer unit
1) Before disassembling the transfer unit, execute SIM6-3
(Transfer pressing operation) so that the transfer unit can be
disassembled.
2) Open the left door unit.
5) Remove the blue screw to remove the roller fixing members.
2
1

6) Pull out the upper transfer roller unit from the transfer belt. 5) Remove the E-ring to remove the transfer roller collar.
7) Remove the E-ring and screw to remove the transfer drum

gear.
(4) Transfer CL roller

2) Remove the transfer belt unit.
3) Remove the E-ring to remove the transfer CL roller.
(2) Transfer belt

2) Remove the transfer belt unit.
3) Pull out the transfer belt.
(5) Discharge brush

2) Remove the upper transfer roller unit.
3) Remove the transfer belt.
4) Remove the discharge brush.
(3) Transfer roller/Transfer roller collar

2) Remove the upper transfer roller unit.
3) Remove the transfer belt.
4) Remove the transfer tension roller bearing to remove the
transfer roller.

12. Fusing section 2) Remove the blue fixing screw on the front side.
Parts Maintenance
a Pressure bearing ▲
b Pressure roller ✕▲
c Web guide ✕
d Web roller ✕▲
e Web bearing ▲
f Web shaft ✕
g Lower pressure roller bearing ✕▲
h Lower pressure roller ✕▲
i Lower web roller ✕▲
j Upper separation pawl ✕▲
k Lower separation pawl ✕▲
l Crimping roller ✕▲
m Heat roller gear ✕ 3) Release the fixing members on the rear frame side.
n Heat roller insulation bush ✕▲
o Insulation spacer ▲
p Heat roller ✕▲
q Thermistor ✕
g a
i e
4) Release the right and left lock levers of the fusing unit to
g remove the fusing unit.
* Since the fusing unit is heated to a high temperature, use
enough care not to drop or scratch it. Be sure to hold the
d both edges of the fusing unit with both hands when handling.
Also be careful not to scratch the OPC drum.
f nm
j * When removing the fusing unit, be careful not to tilt it, and
a b c
remove slowly. (This is because the fusing unit includes
l paper dust scraped by the scraper.)
j
q
on q pk
A. Fusing unit
2
1

(1) Upper web unit 5) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screws, and remove
1) Remove the fusing unit. the web drive unit. Remove the bearings.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove only the 4 pin connec-
tor harness.
* When disconnecting the connector, carefully treat it so as
not to break it. When connecting the connector, insert it
securely to the full end.
6) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screws, and remove

the cover.
3) Remove the screw.
7) Remove the screws, and remove the web end sensor unit.
Black
Silver
Silver
4) Remove the web unit. * When installing, put the boss of actuator in the inside of a
websheet.
8) Remove the screws of backup plate.

9) Remove the web roller (wind-up side). 12) Remove the web roller.
* When installing, rotate the web roller until the red line
(approx. 30cm) is hidden after installing the web roller. (rotate
the gear)
* Be careful not to slack or warp web paper.
13) Remove the E-rings and the gears.

* When installing the one way gear, direct the metal surface
side to outside.
10) Remove the spring, and remove the pressure bearing.
Remove the pressure roller.
14) Remove the pins and E-rings, and remove the winding shaft
and the transport shaft.
* When installing, install the winding shaft (two pin holes) in an
11) Remove the web tension bearing and the web guide. attachment hole (A) of the “” mark side, and install trans-
port shaft (one pin hole) in an attachment hole (B) of the “”
mark side.

15) Remove the web bearings. 4) Remove the lower web roller (on the transmission side).
(2) Lower web unit 5) Remove the E-ring, and remove the web tension shaft.
1) Remove the fusing unit.
2) Remove the step screws, and remove the lower web unit.
6) Remove the spring and the lower pressure bearing, and

remove the lower pressure roller.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the web roller shaft. Remove
the web shaft.

7) Remove the lower web roller (on the winding side). (3) Upper separation pawl
* When installing the lower web roller, install so that the actua- 1) Remove the fusing unit.
tor is outside of the web paper. 2) Remove the screws, and remove the upper separation pawl
holder. Remove the step screws, and remove the paper guide.
* After assembling the lower web roller, rotate and wind the
3) Remove the screws, and remove the upper separation pawl
lower web roller until the green line (about 30cm) disap-
unit. Remove the E-ring and the shaft, and remove the upper
pears. At that time, the lower web roller must be released
separation pawl.
from the lock.
* When installing the upper separation pawl, check to confirm
that the spring is engaged.
* Be careful not to deform the tip of the upper separation pawl.
* Be careful not to slack or warp web paper.
(4) Lower separation pawl

2) Open the lower separation pawl unit.

3) Remove the lower separation pawl. 4) Remove the screws and open the fusing unit.
5) Remove the crimping roller unit.
(5) Crimping roller

2) Alternately tighten the screws to release pressure.
* When releasing the pressure, do not apply any force to the
shaded area. (Otherwise, the paper guide on the paper entry
side may be deformed.)
6) Remove the bearings from the crimping roller.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness from the

harness guide.
* Deliberately handle the harness not to damage the coating.
(6) Heat roller gear/Heat roller insulation bush/

Insulation spacer/Heat roller
2) Open the fusing unit.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the mounting plate.
Remove the heater lamp.

4) Remove the spring, and remove the heat roller unit. 4) Remove the screws, and remove the thermistor.
5) Remove the stopper from the heat roller, and remove the heat
roller gear, the spacer, the insulation spacer, the heat roller
insulation bush and the bearing.
* Since the stopper on the front side differ in shape from that
on the rear side, be careful not to mix them up.
Rear side Front side

stopper stopper
Narrow Wide
width width
(7) Thermistor
2) Remove the web unit.
3) Remove the screws, and remove the mounting plate.

13. Paper exit section 3) Remove the screw, and remove the front cabinet upper.

a Transport roller 16 ✕
b Paper exit roller 1 ✕
c Fusing cooling fan motor 1
d Fusing cooling fan motor 3
e Fusing cooling fan motor 4
f Paper exit detector 1
g Paper exit detector 2
h Discharge brush ✕
i Paper exit detector 3
j Paper exit roller 3 ✕
g
e
d 4) Remove the screw, and remove the operation base plate unit.
i
f
h
j
h
a b
A. Paper exit unit 5) Remove the paper exit port cabinet.

front fixing bracket. Remove the paper exit unit in the arrowed
direction.
2
1

(1) Transport roller 16 (2) Paper exit roller 1
1) Remove the paper exit unit. 1) Remove the paper exit unit.
2) Remove the ground plate. Remove the E-ring to remove the 2) Remove the upper unit.
pulley.
3) Remove the stopper. Remove the E-ring to remove the bear-

ing.
3) Remove the stopper. Remove the E-ring to remove the bear-

ing.
4) Remove the E-ring to remove the gear.
4) Remove the supporting plate. Remove the connection plate,

and remove the gears.

5) Remove the E-ring to remove the gear. 3) Remove the fusing cooling fan motor 1 (A), 3 (B), and 4 (C).
B
A
6) Remove the paper exit roller 1. Air blowing direction
[Caution when attaching]

• When assembling, be careful of the direction of the fan.
(Fit the fan with the mark rotating direction)
(4) Paper exit detector 1
1) Remove the paper exit unit.
2) Remove the follower roller unit.
(3) Fusing cooling fan motor 1/

Fusing cooling fan motor 3/
Fusing cooling fan motor 4
3) Remove the paper exit detector 1.

(5) Paper exit detector 2 (7) Paper exit detector 3
1) Remove the paper exit unit. 1) Remove the paper exit unit.
2) Remove the upper cover. 2) Remove the upper cover.
3) Remove the paper exit detection 2 detector. 3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness protect
sheet. Remove the paper guide.
(6) Discharge brush

2) Remove the discharge brush.
* When attaching, attach it to the reference.
4) Remove the cover, and the remove the paper exit detector 3.

(8) Paper exit roller 2
4) Remove the ground plate. Remove the E-ring to remove the
bearing.
5) Remove the E-ring, and the gear. Remove the spring pin and
the bearing.
6) Remove the paper exit roller 3.

14. Drive section a. Paper exit motor 1/Paper exit motor 2
1) Remove the fusing unit. (See “12. Fusing section”)
A. Fusing drive section
2) Remove the fusing drive unit.
No. Parts 3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the fusing drive frame.
a Paper exit motor 1
b Paper exit motor 2
c Fusing motor
b
c
4) Remove the paper exit motor 1 (A) and the paper exit motor 2
(B).
B
(1) Fusing drive unit
1) Remove the fusing unit. (See “12. Fusing section”)
2) Remove the fusing motor.
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the harness clamp.
A
(2) Fusing motor

4) Remove the fusing drive unit. 1) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.
* Remove the screw which was indicated with the arrow mark.

2) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet upper. B. OPC drum drive section
No. Parts
a Waste toner pipe lock detector
b OPC drum motor
c Developing system
c
(1) Drum drive unit

3) Remove the OPC drum motor and the developing motor.
4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness from the
harness holder.
4) Disconnect the connector and remove the fusing motor.
5) Disconnect the connector and remove the harness clamp, and

remove the drum drive unit.

a. Waste toner pipe lock detector C. Paper feed/paper transport drive section
No. Parts
a Resist roller front drive motor
3) Remove the OPC drum motor and the developing motor.
b Resist roller motor
4) Remove the drum drive unit. c Main motor
5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the waste toner pipe
lock detector.
(2) OPC drum motor/Developing motor

1) Remove the rear cabinet. (1) Main drive unit
(See “6. Paper transport and duplex section”)
2) Remove the main motor.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the eternal outfit
mounting plate.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the OPC drum motor

(A) and the developing motor (B).
4) Remove the plastic E-ring, the belt holding sheet, the belt, and
the pulley. Remove the joint plate.
* When installing, be careful of the direction of the belt holding
sheet.
A

5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the main drive unit. 2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the main motor.
D. Manual paper feed drive section
a. Resist roller front drive motor/Resist roller motor No. Unit

a Manual paper feed drive unit
(See “6. Paper transport and duplex section”)
2) Remove the main motor.
3) Remove the main drive unit.
4) Remove the resist roller front drive motor (A) and the resist
roller motor (B).
B
A
(1) Manual paper feed drive unit

(2) Main motor

2) Disconnect the connector, the harness clamp, and the earth

wire. Remove the high voltage PWB unit.

3) Remove the plastic E-ring, the belt holding sheet, the belt, and (1) 1/2 paper feed drive unit
the pulley. 1) Remove the main motor.
2) Remove the high voltage PWB unit.
2
1
sheet.
remove the manual paper feed drive unit.

Remove the DV fan unit.
E. Paper feed tray 1/2 paper feed drive section

No. Parts 5) Disconnect the connector and remove the harness holder.
a Vertical paper transport motor
b Paper feed tray 3/4 paper transport clutch 2
c Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
d Horizontal paper transport clutch
e Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2)
f Paper pickup solenoid (Paper feed tray 1)
g Remove the paper tray lift up motor (paper feed tray 1)
h Paper tray lift up motor (Paper feed tray 2)
i Paper pickup solenoid (Paper feed tray 2)
f
c
d
b 6) Disconnect the connector, remove the snap band, and remove
the harness from the wire saddle.
e
g
i a

7) Remove the screw, and remove the driver DC SUB PWB unit. a. Vertical paper transport motor
1) Remove the 1/2 paper feed drive unit.
2) Loosen the screw to release the tension, and remove the belt.
3) Remove the parts.

8) Remove the plastic E-ring, the belt holding sheet, the belt, and
the pulley. Remove the joint plate.
Belt length 297
* Attach the spring to the longer shaft.

Belt length 399 Belt length 300
4) Remove the 1/2 paper feed drive frame lower. Remove the
* When installing, be careful of the belt length and the belt harness clamp.
holding sheet direction.
9) Remove the harness, and remove the drive joint plate.
* When installing, temporarily fix the 1/2 paper feed drive unit
to the main unit, and install the drive joint plate. Then tighten
the screw of the drive unit securely. 5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the vertical paper
10) Disconnect the connector and remove the harness clamp. transport motor.
Remove the 1/2 paper feed drive unit.
* If the left door is completely pulled out, the unit may drop off.
Be careful to avoid it.

b. Paper feed tray 3/4 paper transport clutch 2 4) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed clutch (paper
1) Remove the 1/2 paper feed drive unit. feed tray 1).
2) Remove the 1/2 paper feed drive frame lower.
remove the paper feed tray 3/4 paper transport clutch 2.
d. Horizontal paper transport clutch

4) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed tray 3/4 paper remove the horizontal paper transport clutch.
transport clutch 2.
c. Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)

1) Remove the 1/2 paper feed drive unit. 4) Remove the E-ring, and remove the horizontal paper transport
clutch.
remove the paper feed clutch (paper feed tray 1) unit.

e. Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2) (2) Remove the paper tray lift up motor
1) Remove the 1/2 paper feed drive unit. (paper feed tray 1)
2) Remove the 1/2 paper feed drive frame lower. 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
remove the paper feed clutch (paper feed tray 2).
2) Disconnect the connector, remove the snap band, and remove

4) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed clutch (paper
feed tray 2).
f. Paper pickup solenoid (Paper feed tray 2)

1) Remove the 1/2 paper feed drive unit. 3) Remove the screw, and remove the driver DC SUB PWB unit.
3) Remove the paper pickup solenoid unit.
4) Remove the paper pickup solenoid. 4) Remove the plastic E-ring, the belt holding sheet, the belt, and
the pulley.
* When installing, check that the solenoid plunger is inserted * When installing, be careful of the direction of the belt holding
in the arm. sheet.

5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the lift up motor unit. (4) Paper pickup solenoid (Paper feed tray 2)
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper pickup sole-
noid unit.
6) Release the pawl, and remove the lift up coupling. Remove the
lift up spring from the paper tray lift up motor.
3) Remove the paper pickup solenoid.
(3) Paper tray lift up motor (Paper feed tray 2)

2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the lift up motor unit.
* When installing, check that the solenoid plunger is inserted
in the arm.
F. Paper feed tray 3/4 paper feed drive section

No. Parts
a Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 3)
b Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 4)
c Paper feed tray 3/4 paper transport clutch 1
d Paper tray lift up motor (Paper feed tray 3)
e Paper tray lift up motor (Paper feed tray 4)
lift up spring from the lift up motor. a
c
d
b

(1) 3/4 paper feed drive unit a. Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 3)
1) Remove the paper tray lift up motor. 1) Remove the 3/4 paper feed drive unit.
2) Remove the parts and remove the drive joint plate. 2) Remove the E-ring and remove the parts.

sheet.
* When installing, temporarily fix the 1/2 paper feed drive unit 3) Remove the 3/4 drive frame lower.
to the main unit, and install the drive joint plate. Then tighten
the screw of the drive unit securely.
3) Remove the external outfit mounting plate.

Remove the 3/4 paper feed drive unit. 4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper feed clutch
* Remove the screw which was indicated with the arrow mark. unit.
5) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed clutch.

b. Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 4) 3) Remove the 3/4 drive frame lower.
1) Remove the 3/4 paper feed drive unit. 4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper feed tray 3/4
2) Remove the 3/4 drive frame lower. paper transport clutch 1 unit.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper feed clutch
unit.
5) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed tray 3/4 paper
transport clutch 1.
4) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed clutch.
(2) Paper tray lift up motor (Paper feed tray 3)/

Paper tray lift up motor (Paper feed tray 4)
c. Paper feed tray 3/4 paper transport clutch 1

2) Remove the parts, and remove the belt.
2) Disconnect the connector, remove the snap band, and remove


3) Remove the screw, and remove the driver DC SUB PWB unit.
4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper tray lift up

motor (paper feed tray 3) (A) and the paper tray lift up motor
(Paper feed tray 4) (B).
lift up spring from the lift up motor.

15. PWB section 2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
PCU PWB.
A. Control PWB section
No. Parts
a PCU FLASH PWB
b PCU PWB
c Driver PWB
d Mother PWB
e Controller cooling fan motor
f HDD
g MFP controller PWB
d
e
f a
b
g c
(3) Driver PWB
driver PWB.
(1) PCU FLASH PWB

1) Remove the ROM cover. Release the lock and remove the
PCU FLASH PWB.
(4) Mother PWB

2) Remove the MFP PWB unit.
mother PWB.
(2) PCU PWB


(5) Controller cooling fan motor (6) HDD
1) Remove the rear cabinet. 1) Remove the screw, and remove the right cabinet upper.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet upper.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the controller PWB unit.

duct.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the HDD unit.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the controller cooling fan

motor.
Air blowing direction
4) Remove the HDD mounting plate from the HDD.
* Fit the notch in the fan cover with the pull-out position of the fan
harness. Also be careful not to mistake the installing direction of
the fan.

(7) MFP controller PWB (1) AC power PWB
1) Remove the controller PWB unit. 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the MFP controller PWB.
2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw and the sup-

porter, and remove the AC power PWB.
B. Power PWB section

No. Parts
a AC power PWB
b DC main power PWB
c Power cooling fan motor 1
d Power cooling fan motor 2
e Dehumidifier heater relay PWB
f HL PWB
g High voltage PWB (MC/DV/TC)
h DC sub power PWB
(2) DC main power PWB

(Method 1)
f Remove the AC power PWB unit.
g h
b a
c
e d

3) Disconnect the connector and remove the DC main power 5) Remove the DC power PWB unit.
PWB.
(Method 2)
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (3) Power cooling fan motor 1/2
2) Remove the connector. 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the AC power PWB
unit.
Remove the power cooling fan motors 1/2.
3) Remove the AC/DC power unit.
* Install the fan so that the label attached on the fan faces the
front, and that the concave section of the fan is fit with the
convex section of the frame fan mounting surface without
clearance.
(4) Dehumidifier heater relay PWB
4) Remove the AC power PWB unit. 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Disconnect the connector and remove the supporter. Remove
the dehumidifier heater relay PWB.

(5) HL PWB (7) DC sub power PWB
1) Remove the paper exit tray cabinet. 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
DC sub power PWB.

HL PWB.
(6) High voltage PWB (MC/DV/TC)

2) Disconnect the connector and remove the earth terminal.
Remove the high voltage PWB.

16. Fan section 3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the DV fan.
No. Parts
a Developing section cooling fan motor
b Paper cooling fan motor
c Fusing cooling fan motor 2
d Fusing exhaust fan motor
e Process exhaust fan motor 4
f Process exhaust fan motor 1
g Process exhaust fan motor 2
h Process exhaust fan motor 3
i Process cooling fan 1
j Process cooling fan 2
k Process cooling fan 3
Fan blowing direction
b B. Paper cooling fan motor

f
c 1) Remove the toner cartridge and the tone hopper unit.
g
h (See "9. Toner supply section")
d
2) Remove the developing unit. (See "10. Developing section")
i 3) Remove the process unit. (See "8. Photo-conductor section")
j e
k 4) Remove the paper exit unit. (See "13. Paper exit section")
a 5) Remove the right cabinet upper.
A. Developing section cooling fan motor

6) Remove the front cabinet band, and remove the front cabinet.

Remove the DV fan unit.
7) Raise the process DV cover diagonally, and remove the front

cover right.

8) Remove the paper exit tray cabinet unit. C. Fusing cooling fan motor 2
2) Remove the left cover cabinet.
9) Remove the paper exit port cabinet, and remove the paper exit
tray cabinet C.
10) Disconnect the connector. Remove the snap band. Remove

the screw, and remove the duct.
2
1
4) Remove the left cabinet upper.
11) Disengage the pawl, and remove the cover. Disconnect the
connector. Remove the screw, and remove the paper cooling
fan motor.
5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper exit rear duct
unit.

6) Disconnect the connector, and remove the fusing cooling fan E. Process exhaust fan motor 4
motor.
2) Remove the sub duct unit.
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the process exhaust fan
motor 4.
* When installing, be careful of the fan direction and be careful

* Install the fan so that the label attached on the fan faces out- not to cover the boss.
side.
F. Process exhaust fan motor 1/2/3
D. Fusing exhaust fan motor 1) Remove the DSPF unit.
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (See “18. Automatic document feeder”)
2) Disconnect the connector and remove the harness clamp. 2) Remove the scanner unit. (See “3. Scanner section”)
Remove the sub duct unit. 3) Remove the right cabinet upper.
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the fusing exhaust fan

motor.
4) Remove the front cabinet band, and remove the front cabinet.
* Be careful of the direction of the fan.

5) Remove the toner cartridge and the tone hopper unit. 12) Remove the paper exit port cabinet, and remove the paper exit
(See “9. Toner supply section”) tray cabinet C.
8) Remove the front cabinet upper.
13) Disconnect the connector, and remove the main duct unit.
9) Remove the screw, and remove the operation base plate unit.
14) Remove the fan unit.
cover right.
15) Disconnect the connector, and remove the process exhaust

fan motors 1 (A), 2 (B), and 3 (C).
11) Remove the paper exit tray cabinet unit. Air blowing direction
Boss
Boss
B
A

not to cover the boss.

G. Process cooling fan motor 1/2/3
paper feed cover F.
2) Pushing the lower part, remove the right cabinet center.

unit.

motors 1 (A), 2 (B), and 3 (C).
Boss
Boss
Boss
C

not to cover the boss.

17. Filter section B. DV ozone filter/Toner filter
1) Remove the screw, and remove the filter cover. Remove the
No. Parts Maintenance screw, and remove the DV filter box.
a Ozone filter ▲
b DV ozone filter ▲
c Toner filter ▲
2) Remove the DV ozone filer (A) and the toner filter (B).
b
A
c
A. Ozone filter
1) Remove the screw, and remove the filter cover. Remove the
ozone filter.

18. Automatic document feeder 2) Remove the screw (A) and the snap band, and remove the
earth wire (C). Disconnect the connector (D). Remove the
Section screw (E), and remove the cable holder (F).
A Exterior section
B Paper feed section
C Upper transport section C B
D Lower transport section
E Optical section D
F Paper exit section
G Drive section
H Others A
A. Exterior section
Unit Parts E
1 DSPF unit a Front cabinet
b Rear cabinet
c Paper feed cover F
d Upper door
3) Loosen the screws (I), and lower the angle adjustment plate
d b (J).
c I
I
(1) DSPF unit 4) Open the DSPF unit (A) to put it straight up, and remove the
1) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet upper. screws (B).
B B

5) Slide the DSPF unit (A) to the rear side, and fit the step screw b. Rear cabinet
(B) with the key hole (C) of the hinge, and lift it up to remove. 1) Open the upper door (A).
2) Remove the screws (B). Disengage the pawls (C, D), and
B remove the rear cabinet (E).
C
D
B
a. Front cabinet
C
1) Open the upper door (A), and remove the screw (B).
A B
B
E
B
c. Paper feed cover
1) Open the upper door (A).
A
2) Disengage the pawls (C, D, E, F), and remove the front cabinet
(G).
D
F
C
2) Remove the screw (B), and remove the paper feed cover (C).
E

d. Upper door B. Paper feed section
1) Remove the front cabinet. (See "a. Front cabinet".)
Unit Parts Maintenance
2) Remove the spring (A). Disengage the pawl (B), and remove
1 Paper feed DSPF document length
the pressure release axis holder (C). Remove the screw (D), a –
tray unit detection short sensor
and remove the pressure release link lever (E).
DSPF document length
b –
detection long sensor
C c DSPF document width sensor –
2 Paper feed a Pickup roller 
E unit b Paper feed roller 
DSPF paper feed tray upper
c –
limit sensor
DSPF document upper limit
d –
A sensor
DSPF upper door open/close
e –
sensor
B f DSPF paper pass sensor 1 –
D DSPF document random
g –
sensor
h DSPF paper feed clutch –
Parts Maintenance
a Separation roller 
3) Remove the resin E-ring (F), and remove the upper door (G). b Torque limiter ✕
c DSPF paper feed tray lower limit sensor –
d DSPF document empty sensor –
G
2-e
2-c 2-h
2-f 2-d
2-b
2-g
F
b
d
a 1-b
2-a 1-a
c 1-c
(1) Paper feed tray unit

1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet.
(See "A. Exterior section".)
2) Disconnect the connector (A). Remove the screws (B), and
remove the paper feed tray unit (C).
B
C
B
B

a. DSPF document length detection short sensor, DSPF 4) Remove the screw (D), and remove the rotation tray shaft (E).
document length detection long sensor Remove the paper feed rotation tray (F).
F
2) Remove the paper feed tray unit.
(See "(1) Paper feed tray unit".)
3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the paper feed tray lower
(B).
E
A D
B 5) Disconnect the connector (G). Disengage the pawl (H), and

remove the DSPF document width sensor (I).
4) Disconnect the connectors (C), and remove the DSPF docu-

ment length detection short sensor (D) and the DSPF docu-
ment length detection long sensor (E).
I
D H
C
(2) Paper feed unit
1) Remove the front cabinet, the rear cabinet, and the paper feed
C cover. (See "A. Exterior section".)
2) Disconnect the connector (A). Open the wire saddle (B).
Remove the snap band (C).
b. DSPF document width sensor
(See "A. Exterior section".) B
(See "(1) Paper feed tray unit".)
3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the paper feed tray lower
(B). Disconnect the connector (C).
C A A C

3) Remove the screws (D), and remove the paper feed unit (E). b. DSPF paper feed tray upper limit sensor, DSPF document
upper limit sensor, DSPF upper door open/close sensor,
DSPF paper pass sensor 1, DSPF document random
D sensor
1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet and the paper
feed cover. (See "A. Exterior section".)
2) Remove the paper feed unit. (See "(2) Paper feed unit".)
remove the paper feed PG upper supporting plate (C).
D A
B
E
B B
a. Pickup roller, paper feed roller

1) Remove the paper feed cover. (See "A. Exterior section".) C
2) Disengage the pawl (A), and remove the paper feed PG upper
cover (B).
4) Disconnect the connectors (D), and remove the DSPF paper
B feed tray upper limit sensor (E), the DSPF document upper
limit sensor (F), the DSPF upper door open/close sensor (G),
the DSPF paper pass sensor 1 (H), and the DSPF document
random sensor (I).
D G
H
D
D
I F
E
A
3) Disengage the pawl (C), and remove the pickup roller holder
(D). Remove the pickup roller (E) from the pickup roller holder
(D). c. DSPF paper feed clutch
1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet and the paper
feed cover. (See "A. Exterior section".)
D 3) Disengage the pawl (A), and remove the paper feed PG upper
cover (B).
C B
4) Remove the paper feed roller (F).

4) Disconnect the connector (C). Remove the screws (D), and 4) Disengage the pawl (E), and remove the reverse pressure
remove the paper feed PG upper supporting plate (E). release lever (F). Remove the separation roller (G).
C
G
D
F
D D E
5) Remove the E-ring (F) and the bearing (G). Lift the paper feed
roller shaft (H) diagonally, and remove the DSPF paper feed
clutch (I).
(4) Torque limiter
* When installing, check to insure that the clutch rotation stop-
per is engaged with the plate. 1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet.
H 3) Remove the DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch, and remove
the DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch. (See "C. Upper transport
section")
I
4) Remove the drive unit. (See "G. Drive section.")
5) Remove the resin E-ring (A), and remove the No.1 resist roller
(idle) (B).
G
F
B
(3) Separation roller

1) Remove the paper feed cover. (See "A. Exterior section".)
2) Disengage the pawl (A), and remove the paper feed PG upper
cover (B).
B
A
6) Remove the screws (C). Lift the paper feed rotation tray (D),
and remove the paper feed PG lower (E).
C
A E
3) Remove the screw (C), and remove the paper feed PG lower
cover (D).
C
D

7) Remove the screws (F), and remove the separation roller sup- (1) DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch, DSPF No.1
porting plate (G) and the bearing (H). Remove the roller shaft resist roller clutch
(I), and remove the torque limiter (J).
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (See "A. Exterior section".)
2) Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the resin E-ring (B),
I and remove the DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch (C) and
H the DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch (D).
G * When installing, check to insure that the clutch rotation stopper is
engaged with the plate.
D B
C
F
J
(5) DSPF paper feed tray lower limit sensor, DSPF

document empty sensor
1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet. A
2) Remove the paper feed tray unit. (See "(1) Paper feed tray (2) DSPF transport roller clutch
unit".)
3) Disconnect the connectors (A), and remove the DSPF paper
2) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the snap band (B).
feed tray lower limit sensor (B) and the DSPF document empty
Remove the resin E-ring (C), and remove the DSPF transport
sensor (C).
roller clutch (D).
* When installing, check to insure that the clutch rotation stopper is
A engaged with the plate.
C
D
A
B B
A C
C. Upper transport section

Parts Maintenance
a DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch –
b DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch – (3) No.1 resist roller (Drive)
c DSPF transport roller clutch – 1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet.
d No.1 resist roller (Drive)  (See "A. Exterior section".)
e DSPF paper pass sensor 2 – 2) Remove the paper feed unit. (See "B. Paper feed section".)
f Transport roller 1 (Drive)  3) Remove the DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch, and remove
the DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch. (See "(1) DSPF No.1 resist
d roller brake clutch, DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch".)
b 4) Remove the resin E-ring (A), and remove the No.1 resist roller
c (idle) (B).
a
e
f
B

5) Remove the screws (C), lift the paper feed rotation tray (D), 3) Disconnect the connector (C), and remove the DSPF paper
and remove the paper feed PG lower (E). pass sensor 2 (D).
C
E D
C
D
4) Remove the DSPF transport roller clutch.
(See "(2) DSPF transport roller clutch".)
6) Remove the resin E-ring (F) and the bearing (G), and remove
the No.1 resist roller (drive) (H). 5) Remove the E-ring (E), the washer (F), the spring (G), the col-
lar (H), the polyslider (I), and the bearing (J). Remove the belt
(K), the pulley (L), and the bearing (M), and remove the trans-
port roller 1 (drive) (N).
H
M
L
K
G
N
F
7) Remove the E-ring (I) and the bearing (J) from the No.1 resist
roller (drive) (H). J E
I
H
G
F
H
6) Remove the E-ring (O) and the bearing (P) from the transport
roller 1 (drive) (N).
J
I
N f
(4) DSPF paper pass sensor 2, Transport roller 1

(drive) P
O
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the transport PG upper
(B).

D. Lower transport section (2) DSPF No.2 resist roller brake clutch,
Parts Maintenance
a Platen roller 
2) Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the resin E-ring (B)
b No. 1 scanning plate 
and remove the DSPF No.2 resist roller brake clutch (C) and
c DSPF No.2 resist roller brake clutch –
the DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch (D).
d DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch –
e DSPF paper pass sensor 3 – * When installing, check to insure that the clutch rotation stop-
f DSPF paper pass sensor 4 – per is engaged with the plate.
g No.2 resist roller (Drive) 
h DSPF paper pass sensor 5 –
i Transport roller 2 (Drive) 
j Transport roller 3 (Drive) 
g f e d D
C
c
h A
B
b
i
j
(3) DSPF paper pass sensor 3, DSPF paper pass
sensor 4, No.2 resist roller (Drive)
1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet and the upper
(1) Platen roller, No.1 scanning plate door. (See "A. Exterior section".)
1) Open the DSPF unit (A). 2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the transport PG upper
(B).
A
2) Clean the platen rollers (B) and the No.1 scanning plate (C). 3) Loosen the screws (C), and lower the angle adjustment plate
(D). Open the DSPF unit (E).
B
C C
C
D
B

4) Remove the screw (F), and remove the left rear lower cabinet 8) Remove the screw (N), and disconnect the connector (O), and
(G). remove the DSPF paper pass sensor 3 (P).
N
G P
5) Remove the resin E-ring (H), and remove the PS knob (I).
9) Remove the screws (Q), and remove the lift up PG (R).
I
H
Q
R
6) Remove the screws (J), and remove the PS outer PG (K).

Q
10) Remove the screw (S), and remove the spring (T). Remove
K the belt (U), and disengage the pawls (V), and remove the
platen roller (W).
V
J
W
7) Remove the screws (L), and remove the PS front PG (M).
T S
U
M
L V
11) Disconnect the connector (X) and remove the screw (Y).
Remove the DSPF paper pass sensor 4 (Z).
L
X

12) Remove the DSPF No.2 resist roller brake clutch and the 4) Remove the screws (D), and remove the lift up PG (E).
DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch. (See "(2) DSPF No.2 resist
roller brake clutch, DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch".)
13) Remove the DSPF cooling fan motor. (See "G. Drive section".)
14) Remove the E-ring (a), the washer (b), the spring (c), the collar
(d), the polyslider (e), the bearing (f), and the bearing (g). D
E
g
f
e
d
c
a b D
5) Remove the screw (F), and remove the intersecting point plate
(G). Remove the lower door (H).
15) Loosen the screw (h). Loosen the belt (i) tension. Tighten the
screw (h). Slide the No.2 resist roller (drive) (j). Remove the
pulley (k), the E-ring (l), the bearing (m), and the bearing (n). F
Remove the No.2 resist roller (drive) (j).
G
i
H
h
j
l
n 6) Remove the screws (I). Remove the transport PG lower (J).
m Disconnect the connector (K).
k
m
(4) DSPF paper pass sensor 5, Transport roller 2

(Drive)
1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet. J
2) Remove the OC mat. (See "H. Others”.) I
3) Loosen the screw (A), and lower the angle adjustment plate
(B). Open the DSPF unit (C). K
C
I
A A 7) Disconnect the connector (L), and remove the DSPF paper

pass sensor 5 (M).
B
L
M

8) Remove the DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch and remove (5) Transport roller 3 (drive)
the DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch. (See "C. Upper transport 1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet.
section".) (See "A. Exterior section".)
9) Remove the drive unit. (See "G. Drive section".) 2) Remove the paper feed unit. (See "B. Paper feed section".)
10) Disconnect the connectors (N). Remove the screws (O), and 3) Remove the DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch and remove
remove the control PWB unit (P). the DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch. (See "C. Upper transport
section".)
4) Remove the drive unit. (See "G. Drive section".)
5) Remove the resin E-ring (A), and remove the No.1 resist roller
1 (idle) (B).
N N B
P
O
11) Loosen the screw (Q), and loosen the belt (R) tension. Tighten
the screw (Q). Remove the belt (R). Remove the E-ring (S) A
and the pulley (T).
6) Remove the screws (C). Lift the paper feed rotation tray (D),
Q and remove the paper feed PG lower (E).
C
R
C
T E
S
C
D
12) Remove the E-ring (U). Slide the bearing (V). Remove the
transport roller 2 (drive) (W). Remove the bearing (X), the resin
E-ring (Y), and the spring pin (Z) from the transport roller 2
7) Disconnect the connector (F). Remove the screws (G), and
(drive) (W).
remove the control PWB unit (H).
X
1
F
W
F F
Z
V Y
G
X
H
U
G

8) Loosen the screw (I), and loosen the belt (J) tension. Tighten (1) Lamp unit
the screw (I). Remove the belt (J). 1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet.
2) Remove the OC mat. (See "H. Others".)
I
3) Disconnect the connector (B) from DSPF CL inverter PWB (A).
J
9) Remove the resin E-ring (K) and the bearing (L). Remove the
transport roller 3 (drive) (M). Remove the E-ring (N), the pulley
(O), the spring pin (P), and the bearing (Q) from the transport
roller 3 (drive) (M).
4) Remove the screw (C), and remove the intersecting point plate
(D). Remove the lower door (E).
C
M
D
L K
E
N Q
O
5) Remove the screw (F), and remove the intersecting point plate
(G). Remove the white reference plate (H).
E. Optical section
Unit Parts Maintenance
1 Lamp unit a Scanning glass 
F
b DSPF copy lamp 
c Reflector  G
2 Optical unit a Lens 
b CCD 
H
c CCD unit –
d Mirror ✕
Parts Maintenance
a DSPF CL inverter PWB –
b White reference glass 
2-c 2-b 2-a 2-d

6) Remove the screw (I), and remove the scanning section cover
(J). Remove the screws (K), and remove the lamp unit (L).
a
L
1-b 1 K
1-c
1-a J I
b

a. Scanning glass, DSPF copy lamp, Reflector 5) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet.
1) Open the DSPF unit (A). (See "A. Exterior section".)
A 7) Remove the lamp unit. (See "(1) Lamp unit".)
8) Remove the screw (E), and remove the DSPF copy lamp (F).
2) Open the lower door (B).
9) Clean the scanning glass (back surface) (G).
G
B
3) Remove the cleaner (C).

10) Remove the screws (H), and remove the reflector (I).
H
C
I
H
4) Use the cleaner (C) to clean the scanning glass (surface) (D).

(2) Optical unit a. Lens, CCD
1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet and the upper 1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet and the upper
door. (See "A. Exterior section".) door. (See "A. Exterior section".)
2) Remove the OC mat. (See "H. Others".) 2) Remove the OC mat. (See "H. Others".)
3) Remove the lamp unit. (See "(1) Lamp unit".) 3) Remove the lamp unit. (See "(1) Lamp unit".)
4) Remove the screws (A), and remove the transport PG upper 4) Remove the optical unit. (See "(2) Optical unit".)
(B). 5) Remove the screws (A). Disengage the pawls (B). Remove the
dust-proof cover (C). Remove the screw (D), and remove the
dark box (E).
B
D A
A E
A
A C
B
5) Remove the screw (C), and remove the harness cover (D).
Disconnect the connectors (E).
6) Disengage the pawls (F), and remove the lens cover (G).
* When installing, arrange the harness (F) so that it is placed
in the lower position than the rib height.
C
D
G
E F
F
E
6) Remove the step screw (G), and remove the screws (H), and 7) Clean the lens (H) and the CCD (I).
remove the optical fixing plate (I). Remove the optical unit (J).
I H
G
H

b. CCD unit 6) Clean the mirrors (C).
door. (See "A. Exterior section".)
C
3) Remove the lamp unit. (See "(1) Lamp unit".)
4) Remove the optical unit. (See "(2) Optical unit".)
5) Remove the screws (A). Disengage the pawls (B), and remove
the dust-proof cover (C). Remove the screw (D), and remove
the dark box (E).
C
D A
E
A
(3) DSPF CL inverter PWB

B 1) Remove the rear cabinet. (See "A. Exterior section".)
2) Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the screws (B), and
remove the control PWB unit (C).
C
B
A
6) Remove the screws (F), and remove the CCD unit (G).
A A
C
F B
G
3) Disconnect the connector (D), and remove the screws (E).
Remove the inverter PWB guide (F).
F
E
D
F E
c. Mirror
door. (See "A. Exterior section".)
3) Remove the lamp unit. (See "(1) Lamp unit".)
4) Remove the optical unit. (See "(2) Optical unit".)
5) Remove the screws (A), and remove the mirror base cover (B). 4) Remove the screws (G), and remove the DSPF CL inverter
PWB (H).
A G
G
A A B

(4) White reference glass F. Paper exit section
1) Open the DSPF unit (A).
Parts Maintenance
A a Discharge brush ✕
b DSPF paper exit sensor –
c Paper exit roller (drive) 
b a
2) Open the lower door (B).
(1) Discharge brush

(See "B. Paper feed section".)
3) Remove the discharge brush (A).
B
* When attaching the discharge brush, attach it to the attach-
ment reference.
3) Remove the cleaner (C).

A
(2) DSPF paper exit sensor

(See "B. Paper feed section".)
3) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the DSPF paper
4) Use the cleaner (C) to clean the white reference glass (D). exit sensor (B).
B
D
C
A

(3) Paper exit roller (drive) (1) Drive unit
1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet. 1) Remove the rear cabinet. (See "A. Exterior section".)
(See "A. Exterior section".) 2) Remove the DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch and remove
2) Remove the paper feed tray unit. the DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch. (See "C. Upper transport
(See "B. Paper feed section".) section".)
3) Remove the DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch, and remove 3) Disconnect the connectors (A), and open the edge saddle (B).
the DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch. (See "C. Upper transport Remove the snap band (C).
section".)
4) Remove the drive unit. (See "G. Drive section".)
B
5) Remove the resin E-rings (A), the gear (B), the bearing (C),
and the paper exit roller (drive) (D).
B
A C
A D
C
C 4) Remove the screw (D), and remove the drive unit (E).
D
D
A
E
G. Drive section
Unit Parts
1 Drive unit a DSPF paper feed motor D
b DSPF paper exit motor
c DSPF lift up motor
2 Drive transport unit a DSPF transport motor
D
Parts
a DSPF cooling fan motor
1 2 2-a a
a. DSPF paper feed motor

2) Disconnect the connector (A), and open the edge saddle (B).
Remove the screws (C), and remove the DSPF paper feed
motor (D).
B
1-c 1-b 1-a
D

b. DSPF paper exit motor 1) Remove the rear cabinet. (See "A. Exterior section".)
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (See "A. Exterior section".) 2) Remove the DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch and the
2) Disconnect the connector (A), and open the edge saddle (B). DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch and the DSPF transport roller
Remove the screws (C), and remove the DSPF paper exit clutch. (See "C. Upper transport section".)
motor (D). 3) Remove the DSPF cooling fan motor. (See "(3) DSPF cooling
fan motor".)
4) Loosen the screws (A), and loosen the belts tension (B).
Tighten the screws (A).
D
C
B
B
A
A
C
A
B
5) Disconnect the connector (C). Remove the screws (D), and

remove the drive transport unit (E).
D D
C
E
c. DSPF lift up motor
remove the DSPF lift up motor (C).
D
C
A a. DSPF transport motor
B 2) Loosen the screws (A), and loosen the belts (B) tension.
Tighten the screw (A).
(2) Drive transport unit B

B
Unit
2 Drive transport unit
A
2
A
3) Disconnect the connector (C), and remove the screws (D).

Remove the DSPF transport motor (E).

(3) DSPF cooling fan motor 2) Remove the OC mat (A) from the left edge.
2) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the screws (B), and
remove the DSPF cooling fan motor (C).
C
A
A
* When installing, place the OC mat (B) on the document table to

H. Others fit with the reference and close the DSPF unit (A).
Parts Maintenance
a OC mat 
b DSPF open/close sensor –
c DSPF lower door open/close sensor – B
d DSPF driver PWB –
e DSPF flash PWB –
f DSPF control PWB –
f e d
(2) DSPF open/close sensor

2) Disconnect the connector (A) and remove the screw (B).
Remove the open/close sensor holder (C). Remove the DSPF
open/close sensor (D) from the open/close sensor holder (C).
b c a C
(1) OC mat D
1) Open the DSPF unit (A). A
A
B

(3) DSPF lower door open/close sensor 2) Release the lock (C), and remove the DSPF flash PWB (D).
2) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the screw (B).
Remove the lower door open/close sensor holder (C). Remove
the DSPF lower door open/close sensor (D) from the lower
door open/close sensor holder (C).
C
D
D
C
B
A
(6) DSPF control PWB
2) Remove the DSPF flash PWB. (See "(5) DSPF flash PWB".)
(4) DSPF driver PWB remove the control PWB unit (C).
remove the DSPF driver PWB (C).
1
B
A A
A B
A A
A
B
C
B B
C 4) Disconnect the connector (D), and remove the screws (E).

Remove the control PWB unit (F).
(5) DSPF flash PWB E

1) Remove the screw (A), and remove the ROM cover (B).
E
E
D

19. Other 6) Disconnect the connector, and remove the main power switch
unit.
No. Parts
a Main power switch
b Front door open/close detector
c Left door open/close detector
d Dry heater switch
e Machine temperature sensor
a
e
b
* When installing, be careful of the connection position of the
c connector and the installing direction. Insert the connector
securely to the end until it clicks.
d
[Connector connecting position]
Connector color Line color
A. Main power switch/Front door open/close 1 White Black
detector 2 Black Black
1) Remove the front cabinet band, and remove the front cabinet. 3 White White
4 Black White
1 3
2 4
Main power switch

(Connector surface)
7) Remove the main power switch.
2) Remove the toner cartridge and the toner hopper unit.

(See “9. Toner supply section”)
cover right.
8) Remove the counter mounting plate.
9) Disconnect the connector and remove the front door open/

close switch unit.

B. Left door open/close detector 2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the dry heater switch.
D. Room temperature sensor

paper feed cover F.
2) Remove the left front cabinet.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the left door open/close 2) Pushing the lower part, remove the right cabinet center.
detector unit. Remove the left door open/close detector.
C. Dry heater switch

3) Disconnect the connector, release the pawl, and remove the
machine temperature sensor.

[11] FIRMWARE UPDATE
MX-M753N
Service Manual
*Firmware types
1. Outline
A. Cases where update is required MAIN BODY CONFIG Configuration data
ROM update is required in the following cases: ICU (MAIN) ICU Main section former half
ICU (BOOTM) ICU Boot section main
1) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance.
ICU (BOOTCN) ICU Boot section CN
2) When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the LANGUAGE Language support data program
machine. (General term)
3) When installing a new spare parts PWB unit (with ROM) for GRAPHIC Graphic data for L-LCD
repair to the machine. SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD
4) When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be PCU (BOOT) PCU Boot section
repaired. PCU (MAIN) PCU Main section
SCU (BOOT) SCU Boot section
B. Notes for update SCU (MAIN) SCU Main section
(1) Relationship between each ROM and update DSPF (BOOT) DSPF Boot section
DSPF (MAIN) DSPF Main section
Before execution of ROM update, check combinations with ROM’s
FAX (BOOT) FAX1 Boot section
installed in the other PWB’s including options. Some combinations
FAX (MAIN) FAX1 Main section
of each ROM’s versions may cause malfunctions of the machine.
PDL_FONT PDL font
C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware ANIMATION Animation data
IMAGE_DATA MFP ASIC data
There are following methods of update of the firmware.
WEB HELP WEB help
1) Update method using SIM 49-1 UNICODE UNICODE table
2) Update method using FTP OPTION A4LCC (BOOT) Side LCC (A4) Boot section
3) Update method using the Web page A4LCC (MAIN) Side LCC (A4) Main section
4) Update method using the CN update function (There are three A3LCC (BOOT) Side LCC (A3) Boot section
methods.) A3LCC (MAIN) Side LCC (A3) Main section
FIN100 (BOOT) 100 sheets staple finisher Boot section
Normally, one of 1) - 3) is used to update the firmware.
FIN100 (MAIN) 100 sheets staple finisher Main section
When any one of 1) - 3) is interrupted by an error such as ACRE (MAIN) ACRE Main section
power-off during updating, etc., and when retries of these ACRE_DATA ACRE table
methods are failed, the method 4) is employed. ACRE (BOOT) ACRE Boot section
2. Update procedure
A. Update method using SIM 49-1
For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port
that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the
media or USB memory by simulation screen in the main unit.
Media
Firmware.sfu Adapter
USB Host
Firmware.sfu +
Firmware.sfu USB memory
Firmware.sfu The machine detects the media

and executes the program automatically.
*1:
• Store the firmware data (xxx .sfu) to the media or USB memory
beforehand.
• The media used for the update must have an enouch capacity for
storing the firmware data.
• The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function
cannot be used.
MX-M753N FIRMWARE UPDATE 11 – 1

The firmware update executes by SIM49-01. 5) Press [EXECUTE] key. “ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO]”
1) Insert the media or USB memory which stores the firmware becomes clear. Press [YES] to start the update of selected
into the main unit. firemware.
2) Enter the SIM49-01.

Press the key of the file to be updated. The screen transfers to ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
the update screen. ),50:$5(83'$7(>XVEEG @
&21),* ˖&855(1783'$7('72
,&80$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2270 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ,&8%227&1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
),50:$5(83'$7(>XVEEG@
/$1*8$*( ˖&855(1783'$7('72
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
*5$3+,& ˖&855(1783'$7('72
),/( ',5!)2/'(5
6/,67 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
3&8%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
3&80$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
$/&&%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
$/&&0$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
$/&&%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
$// $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
The progress is displayed on right side of "FIRMWARE

UPDATE" title by 20 steps.

* The number of key changes according to the number of the ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
sfu file in the media or USB memory inserted. ),50:$5(83'$7(
6 (
* If the media or USB memory was not inserted when entry to 5(0$,16)25 0,187(6
the SIM49-01 screen, "INSERT A USB MEMORY DEVICE &$87,21'212732:(52))7+(0)3),50:$5(83'$7(,1352*5(66
CONTAINING MFP FIRMWARE [OK]" is displayed on the

screen. Insert the media or USB memory and push the [OK]
key to open the file. If the media have not been inserted and
[OK] key is pushed, the next screen does not appear and the
screen waits the entry. Conversely, if the media or USB
memory is pulled out on the file list screen, the error is
detected by the [FILE] key pressing, and the first screen
appears.
3) Current version number and the version number to be updated
will be shown for each firmware respectively. At this time, only the progress gauge is displayed on the
screen, and the version and the firmware selection key are not
displayed.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6) If the update is normal completion, following screen is dis-
),50:$5(83'$7(>XVEEG @
&21),* ˖&855(1783'$7('72
played.
,&80$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2270 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
,&8%227&1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
/$1*8$*( ˖&855(1783'$7('72 ),50:$5(83'$7(
*5$3+,& ˖&855(1783'$7('72 &203/(7(3/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+
6/,67 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
3&8%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
3&80$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
$/&&%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
$/&&0$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
$/&&%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
$// $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
4) Select the key of the firmware to be updated. The key will be

highlighted. (In this screen, [CONFIG] and [ICU(BOOTM)] are
2.
selected.) At the same time, [EXECUTE] key appears.
If firmware's key is not selected, [EXECUTE] is gray out and Exit the simulation mode and turn off the power.
cannot be pressed. Go to SIM22-05 and confirm the firmware has upgraded suc-
cessfully.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7) If the update is not normal completion, following screen is dis-
),50:$5(83'$7(>XVEEG @ played.
&21),* ˖&855(1783'$7('72
,&80$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2270

˖&855(1783'$7('72 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
,&8%227&1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
),50:$5(83'$7(
/$1*8$*( ˖&855(1783'$7('72 (55253/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+
*5$3+,& ,&803&806&8%
˖&855(1783'$7('72
6/,67 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
3&8%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
3&80$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
$/&&%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
$/&&0$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
$/&&%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
$// $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
* Press the selected key again to release the selection.

* Press [ALL] key to select all items.
2.

B. Firmware update using FTP
FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension ".sfu") from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identi-
fier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.
Machine 1 Machine 3
10.36.112.83 10.36.112.84
Firmware.sfu
Machine 2 Machine 4
FTP Client
10.36.101.52 10.36.101.53
C. Firmware update using the Web page 4) When the firmware update is finished, "Firmware Update com-
pleted. Please reboot the MFP." appears. Pressing the
An Web browser (service technician’s Web page) is used to update
the firmware. [Reboot] key, the machine will restart to complete the update.
The browser will shift to the following screen.
1) Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A
special firmware upgrade page appears.
2) Click the "Update of Firmware" key in the Web page. Click the
[Browse] key and select the firmware for the update.
MX-M753N
"Close the browser and open again to display latest informa-
tion." will be displayed.
5) Check the firmware version of machine again.
D. Firmware update using the CN update function

(There are three methods.)
(1) Outline
3) After selecting the file, click the [Submit] key to send the firm- The firmware update method using the MFP PWB ROM slot of the
ware to the machine. Update processing begins. While pro- MFP PWB is called "CN update."
cessing takes place, "Firmware Update, now processing..." a. Function
appears. There are the following five functions in the CN update mode.
1) ROM copy function 1
(This is not used in the market, and therefore, not described in
details in this manual.)
2) Firmware update function
This function is used to update the firmware by transferring
data from the PC which is connected to the MFP PWB, the
SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX PWB, and various options
by means of a USB memory or USB cable.
This is basically the same as SIM49-01, but differs in the fol-
lowing points:
When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a
section other than the boot program for some reasons during
firmware update operation of other method than the CN
update, this method can be used to update the firmware.

If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the d. DIP-SW used in the CN update mode
Program ROM 1 must be replaced with a new one having the To enter the CN update mode, set DIP-SW1 and DIP-SW2 on the
normal boot program. MFP PWB as shown below:
If the boot animation is not displayed, there is an abnormality DIP-SW1 ON: CN update mode
in the boot program (Program ROM 1).
DIP-SW2 OFF: OFF in the normal mode
If the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is
not displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormal- NOTE: Keep DIP-SW2 at OFF. DIP-SW2 is used to enable the
ity in the main program (Program ROM 2). USB port on the front side or the USB port on the rear side.
When it is set to OFF, the USB port on the front side is
3) ROM copy function 2
enabled. When it is set to ON, the USB port on the rear
(This is not used in the market, and therefore, not described in side is enabled.
details in this manual.)
When the keyboard is installed to the machine, an exclu-
4) Firmware version check function sive connection is enabled. (Simultaneous connection is
(The method to check the firmware version by using SIM22-5 disabled.)
is easier than this method. Therefore, it is not described in this When terminating the CN update mode, reset DIP-SW1 to
manual.) OFF (normal mode).
5) ROM making function
NOTE: When using the USB port, be careful of the total current
(This function is not used in the market, and not described in consumption not to exceed 500mA.
this manual.)
b. Purpose
This function is used in the following cases:
1) When an error occurs during firmware update operation other
than the CN update.
When the power is shut down or an error occurs in a section
other than the boot program for some reasons during firmware
update operation of other method than the CN update, this
Upper: DIP-SW1
method can be used to update the firmware. Lower: DIP-SW2
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the When tilted forward, OFF.
Program ROM 1 must be replaced with a new one having the When tilted toward the PWB, ON.
normal boot program.
If an error occurs in the boot program, this method cannot be
used. In such a case, the Program ROM 1 must be replaced
with a new one having the normal boot program.
c. ROM slot used in the CN update mode
The following ROM slots are used in the CN update mode.
e. Keys used in the CN update mode
The following five keys are used for operations in the CN update
mode. Be careful that the functions of the keys differ those in the
ROM slot numbers normal mode.
used in the CN
update mode
UP key DOWN key
CN10 slot
CN11 slot
CN12 slot
CN14 slot
MENU key BACK key OK key
Key name Functions in the CN update mode

[OK] key Executes the selected function or item.
[MENU] key Selects a menu.
[BACK] key Selects a menu.
(Serves as a cancel key in the execution check screen.)
[UP] key Selects an item.
[DOWN] key Selects an item.

f. Kinds of Flash ROM a-2. Procedures
There are following kinds of Flash ROM used in this machine. 1) Turn OFF the power, and remove the rear cabinet and the
Take care that a different model number of Flash ROM cannot be MFP PWB cover.
used. 2) Set the MFP PWB DIP-SW1 to ON. (Tilt it to the PWB side.)
The Flash ROM model number is marked on the semiconductor 3) Install the USB memory into the USB port.
chip on the Flash ROM.
The number of semiconductor chips differs depending on the Flash
ROM model number: 1 and 2.
This also helps identifying the model number of Flash ROM.
Kinds of Flash ROM
Normal Number of
Flash ROM
Kinds installing semiconductor
model number
position chips
MFP (PROGRAM1) MFP PWB M29LV640EBTI- 2
ROM CN10 slot 70G
MFP (PROGRAM2) MFP PWB M29LV640EBTI- 2
ROM CN11 slot 70G
PCU ROM PCU PWB LHF00L28 1
SCU ROM SCU PWB LH28F800BJE - 1
PTTL90 USB port
DSPF ROM DSPF PWB LH28F800BJE - 1
USB memory installing position
PTTL90
(2) Operating procedures 4) Turn ON the power.

5) Check to confirm that the machine starts booting. (It takes
a. Firmware update function
more than ten seconds to display the menu.)
This function is used to copy the firmware data from a USB mem-
ory or the PC which is connected with a USB cable to the MFP
PWB, the SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX PWB, or various Update Program Init
options to update the firmware.
Please wait
It is basically same as SIM 49-01, but differs in the following points.
1) The update target ROM is automatically selected.
2) When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a
section other than the boot program for some reasons during Version Check
firmware update operation of other method than the CN Conf : 00050000
update.
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, this
Display when booting is completed
method cannot be used. On that case, the Program ROM 1
must be replaced with a new one having the normal boot pro- 6) Select the firmware update mode.
gram.
Select the update mode with [MENU] key and [BACK] key.
When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a section
other than the boot program for some reasons during firmware
update operation of other method than the CN update, this method Firm Update
can be used to update the firmware. If, however, an abnormality
occurs in the boot program, the Program ROM 1 must be replaced
From USB Memory
with a new one having the normal boot program.
When the boot animation is not displayed, there is an abnormality Display of the firmware update mode
in the boot program (Program ROM 1).
7) Press [OK] key.
When the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is
The firmware file saved in the USB memory is retrieved, and
not displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormality in
the file selection menu is displayed.
the main program (Program ROM 2).
a-1. Necessary items
1) Machine (Insert the MFP (PROGRAM1) ROM into CN10 slot, Firm Update
and insert the MFP (PROGRAM2) ROM into CN11.) > F 0100P000.sfu
2) USB memory with the firmware file (SFU) saved in it. (Save the
firmware file in the main directory or in a one-level lower direc- Display of file selection
tory.)
8) Select the firmware file (SFU).
Select the target firmware file (SFU) with [UP] key and
[DOWN] key.
When [OK] key is pressed with a directory name (the head: ">
D") displayed, the menu goes to the one-stage lower directory.
When [BACK] key is pressed in the lower-stage directory, the
menu returns to the original upper directory.

9) Press [OK] key.
The selected firmware file (SFU) is read. It takes about one
minute.
Firm Update
Reading Data
Display of file reading
10) After completion of reading, the firmware update process is

continued.
Firm Update IcuM

Writing Data
Display of the firmware update process
* The abbreviated name of the firmware which is under

update process is indicated on the right upper corner of the
display.
* During the update process, the display may flash instanta-
neously. It is a normal operation.
11) Check the update result.
Use [UP] key and [DOWN] key to display the results of all the
firmware programs.
Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM

Result : OK Result : Not Update Result : NG
Display of the firmware update result
OK: Update is completed successfully.

NG: Update is failed.
Not Update: Update is not executed.
12) Turn OFF the power.
13) Set the MFP PWB DIP-SW1 to OFF. (Set the DIP-SW to the
normal mode.)
14) Turn ON the power, and check to confirm that the machine
boots up normally.
Check to confirm that the boot animation is displayed.
Check to confirm that "Copying is enabled" is displayed on the
copier basic menu.
15) Check to confirm the version of each firmware with SIM22-5.
16) Attach the MFP PWB cover and the rear cabinet.
NOTE: If the CN update function does not work normally, refer to
"Check items when the CN update function does not work
normally" and fix the abnormal points.

&52( 70+6 527/ 564% 52(% 521& 5%18
MX-M753N
5644% 544% 567& 52'& 522& 522&

5.7/
52((#0 56.& 52'& 522& 51%&
52(/
5295 522& 52.5 522& 41%&
%.
521/ 524#0&1/ 52.5
%. +08 29$
126+10
1. Block diagram
&52( &4+8'4 &52( %06 %%&

56/25
29$ 29$ 29$
A. System block diagram
OPTION (JAPAN only) 5%#00'4 70+6

PF (#: +( %%&
(#: 5%0
29$ 29$
29$
&'.+8'4; 70+6
20%
21& %(/7 %(/4 %(/4 #7&+614
126+10 126+10 %. +08 29$ /+/
21& %(/7 %(/4 6**7&A4# 126+10
20% %1+0 8'0&14 %. 145A.'&
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION
21& 29$
241%'55 70+6
%(/7 %(/7 8(/': 8(/$-. 1%59
2%5
/16*'4
64/ 29$ /*25
21/ 6*A%. &. 8(/$-4 8(/': &59(
12'4#6+10 70+6
82/ 2525 60(5 8(/$-7 8(/': (7/
21/ 617%*
2#0'.
(75+0) 70+6 2%7 +08'46'4
29$ .8&5 29$ .%&
126+10 29$
6*A7/ *.A7/
9'$/ 9'$'0& 75$ *7$
Driver PWB 6*A75 *.A75 *. 29$ 29$
12' 29$ 145A2&
9'$/ 9'$'0& 6*A./ *.A7# 219'4 59 29$
29$
&'8'.12'4 70+6 *122'4 70+6 OPTION (North America (N model): STD)
126+10
#&/ 44/ &8%* &/ *8 WP
6/ 75$
+05464 %108 -'; $1#4&
6**7&A&8 &8/ 6/
#&/ %(/&8 6(5& (+0 75$ +(
6%5 // QT
25 70+6 %47/ 29$ 6.5
MX-M753N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 1

5(+0
&59. 22& QT .57 70+6
75$ *156
- (+0 .57 %06 .& 29$
Service Manual
6$KCU
29$ .%% 29$ $& 29$
/24& 622& /55 /55 65 29$ 6#05'6 %(/&% 9*A.%%
2(& 2)/
/24& /2(& /52& /52& 652& &59&5- %(/&%
6*25 126+10
.22& /295 62(% &5-2(%
57$ 2%+
#22& &%25
*2.5 *2(% /2(% /2(% 6275 &5-2(% &%25 126+10 /(2% %1+0 8'0&14
#22& Japan 29$
9*59 STD
/.7/ /.7/ 6.7/ 126+10
#+02& &594 /2(&
(#:
&59#&7 /2(295 /2'& /.7& /.7& 65 29$ #% 9*A&5-
/59 9* &'5- *&&
29$ Japan
&)5 /2.& /612 /2'& /2'& 652& 29$ 9*A&5- STD .#0
Japan /(2%(#0 75$
/2.& /612 /2(& /2(& 62(% 9*A5%0 STD
674/ Japan
STD
5%00'4 75$ *156
/2(% /275 /275 6275 #% +0
2#2'4 (''& 2#2'4 (''&
/2()5 /(275 70+6 70+6 6.7/
.'(6 &114 70+6
/#07#. 2#2'4 (''& 70+6
USB HOST
SATA2 Keyborad TYPE-A CN SCANNER Control
HDD (FRONT) LCD Pannel
System
LVDS
(SCU)
SATA
CN
USB Device
TYPE-B CN
USB HOST
TYPE-A CN
(REAR)
SYSTEM Memory USB HUB
DDR2 DIMM USB2.0
DIP Controller
SPD SATA SATA
SLOT Device Interface Interface USB2.0
SWITCH or
B. MFP control PWB
Controller 0 1 Host SW
Controller
DDR/ SDRAM SDRAM

DDR2 HDD ASIC Controller 64Mbx2
Giga IF
LAN JACK RTC
BitEther GMII RTC
Controller
PCU
RJ45 GbE
PHY
MAC PCI-Express UART
PCI-Express Interface Interface
Interface (4Lane) (x10)
SOC (4lane)
Local-Bus
I2C 1
I2C 2
LCDC
Controller
Controller
PCI-Express Interface
D-SUB9 RS232C Interface
RS232C LEVEL CON.
MPC8533E
(4lane)
800MHz
PCI-Express
Interface FAX (2nd)
Interrupt
Controller
(1lane)
Programable
256Kb
Local Bus
EEPROM
I2C1
I2C2
UART Controller
Controller
Controller
LSU Controller
(LSUC)
PCI
Boad to Board Connector
Express
FPDLINK FPDLINK FPDLINK LVDS
Transmitter Receiver Transmitter Receiver
CPLD SW
PCI-
Express SCAN LSU
Interface
PCI Express ACRE

Clock ROM FLASH
MFP ASIC
Generater
Local
Bus
DDR/DDR2
Video In Memory
Out Controlller
SRAM
4Mbit
SPD
FAX
Local Memory

(1st) PROGRAM & OPT PIC
DDR2 DIMM
CN Micon.
FLASH DIMM SLOT
Mother PWB
Video In
Out
SMIC
HCSL
Clock Codec ASIC
79MHz
ACRE-DSP OPTION Local Memory

DDR2 DIMM
Connecter SLOT
MFPC PWB
C. PCU PWB
PCU HV
Reset IC
Fuser Unit
CLK FAN Motor control
Xtal
14.7456MHz Sensor Input
PMC ASIC1
Syncronous Motor
Spread
Spectrum Load control Output
(CLUCH, SOLENOID)
Not Mount
PMC
DC Power FW DC Motor control
Supply
CPU
H8S/2373
MPFC
Stepping Motor
UART
MOTHER
CLK PMC
UART
LSU
PMC ASIC2 Sensor Input
Address (A0-A20)
Option
Data (D0-D15)
UART Load contorl Output
LCC (CLUCH, SOLENOID)
UART
Finisher
I2C Bus
CRUM
Option
CPLD
I2C Bus Coin Vender
I2C Bus EEPROM

(64kbit)
FLASH ROM
(16Mbit)
SRAM
(1Mbit)

D. Scanner control PWB, DSPF
3.3V
DSPFcnt
1.8V Page Memory
CCD-R RGB 256MBYTE (256Mbit x 8)
(DSPF side) Tr Rx FPD Link
10V Tr 35bit
Tr AFE SCN
3line color CCD Tr ASIC
LVDS IC Tx
TCD2716ADG Tr 28bit
(Medusa)
Tr AFE_CS 10V/5V/3V
BUFFER Two serial systems

BUFFER AD_CLK
AFE_CSTG
CPU
SH, φ1, others Timing motor DRIVER H8S/2373
5V/3.3V (74VHCT
generator sensors 244)
F-ROM
Oscillator SRAM
(DIMM)
DRIVER
PWB
F-ROM
(for Shading DATA storage)
CL 24V
12V
5V Communication,
3.3V others
Power supply
3.3V
1.8V To CPU
CCD-F
(Machine side) Tr RGB DATA
10V Tr
Tr Image data
AFE
3line color CCD Tr
TCD2716ADG Tr SCNcnt line buf
Tr AFE_CS Oscillator 16 (8Mx16bit)
line buf
BUFFER 16 (8Mx16bit)
AD_CLK clk SS LVDS IC Rx
BUFFER Rx FPD Link
RGB 28bit
35bit
AFE_CSTG 32bit bus mother
SH, φ1, others Timing 10V/5V/3V

5V/.33V SCN
generator
ASIC BUS
Oscillator
3.3VPD SW
LVDS IC Tx
Two serial systems 1.5V Image data 28bit
CS3
12 10V CTRL_A10V IPD/DOCC

12 5V CTRL_A5V
5 3.3V CTRL_A3.3V CS4
1.2V
Mirror
.Motor 3.3VPD
MOTOR
DRIVER
Copy Lamp BUSBUF

powdown
MHP sensor
CPU CS2 CS0
H8S/2373 F-ROM
SRAM
(DIMM)
E2PROM
uart, others
CS5
ORS LED
Touch panel
IO ASIC
LVDS PWB (8.5 inch TFT)
CCFT_CPU
INV PWB /CCFT
nLCD_DISP
Vcc REG ( ON/OFF )
8.5 inch Rx
LCD 28bit
KEY PWB
KEY CON
/KEYIN
PDSEL0
PDSEL1
Original size sensor PDSEL2
PD
5V
NINFO_LED
NPWRSW
POW_LED
WU_LED
NWU_KEY
5V
Buzzer /BZR
LED drive
LED matrix
circuit

TxD0 RxD[4]
/PCU_RxD HTXD4_PCU
O.C Schmit Inv.
RxD0 TxD[4]
/PCU_TxD HRXD4_PCU
Schmit Inv.
O.C
I/O port CTS[4]

/PCU_DSR HRTS4_PCU
O.C Schmit Inv.
I/O port RTS[4]
/PCU_DTR HCTS4_SCN
Schmit Inv.
O.C
TxD1 RxD
RxD TxD[3]
TRANS_DAT HTXD3_SCN
Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. O.C
E. Serial communication
LSU Schmit Inv.

RxD1 TxD TxD
ASIC CPU RxD[3]
RSV_DAT HRXD3_SCN
Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. O.C Inv.
SCL1 SCK H8S/2373 RTS[3]
SCK LSU I/O ASIC HRTS3_SCN
Schmit Inv.
CPU O.C A[0:4] Schmit Inv. O.C
TxD2 RxD
μPD65892GC
CTS[3]
H8S/2373 /TXD_FIN D[15:8] HCTS3_SCN
O.C Schmit Inv. O.C Inv.
TxD
RxD
RxD2 TxD CPU
/RxD_FIN RTS_DSPF
O.C
O.C
I/O CTS_DSPF SCN Cnt
DTR_FIN
TxD_DSPF
RxD_DSPF
O.C Schmit Inv. FINISHER
I/O
DSR_FIN (Optional)
O.C
O.C
O.C
O.C
Schimit Inv.
Schimit Inv.
TxD3 RxD TxD0[0]
/TxD_LCC STXD1_PIC
Schmit Inv. O.C
O.C O.C
O.C
O.C
RxD3 TxD RxD0[0]
SRXD1_PIC
Schimit Inv.
Schimit Inv.
/RxD_LCC
O.C O.C PIC O.C Inv.
CPU
I/O
I/O
I/O I/O port
TxD
H8S/3687
RxD
/DTR_LCC CLR_PIC
O.C O.C O.C O.C
LCC
I/O CPU I/O port
/DSR_LCC (Optional) H8S/2373 REQPIC
O.C Inv.
SOC
O.C O.C
D[15:8]
PMC ASIC
A[9:0]
DSPF Cnt HDD ASIC
UPD65946GN-178
TxD[1]
TxD_FAX(D)+ Buffer HTXD1_FAX1D
TxD_FAX(D)- RxD[1]
CPLD RxD_FAX(D)+ Buffer HRXD1_FAX1D
RxD_FAX(D)- LVDS TxD[2]
TxD_FAX(CS)+ Buffer HTXD2_FAX1CS
EPM240T100C5N TxD_FAX(CS)- TxD[2]

RxD_FAX(CS)+ Buffer HRXD2_FAX1CS
PCU New RxD_FAX(CS)-
SUB_TxD ASIC
Schmit Inv. O.C RTS[1]
SUB_RxD Schmit Inv.
HRTS1_FAX1D
O.C O.C Inv. CTS[1]
O.C Schmit Inv. CPU
PIC HCTS1_FAX1D
SUB_RTS SH7706 Schmit Inv. O.C Buffer RTS[2]
Schmit Inv. O.C HRTS2_FAX1CS
O.C Schmit Inv. O.C Inv. CTS[2]
SUB_CTS
O.C Schmit Inv. HCTS2_FAX1CS
Schmit Inv. O.C Buffer
MX-FXX2/2nd FAX for F-model 2nd FAX I/F PWB Mother
TxD[9]
TxD_FAX(D)+ HTXD9_FAX2D
TxD_FAX(D)- RxD[9]
RxD_FAX(D)+ HRXD9_FAX2D
RxD_FAX(D)- LVDS TxD[10]
TxD_FAX(CS)+ HTXD10_FAX2CS
TxD_FAX(CS)- RxD[10]
RxD_FAX(CS)+ HRXD10_FAX2CS
New RxD_FAX(CS)-
SUB_TxD ASIC
Schmit Inv. O.C RTS[9]
SUB_RxD HRTS9_FAX2D
CPU O.C Schmit Inv. O.C Inv. CTS[9]
O.C Schmit Inv.
PIC HCTS9_FAX2D
SUB_RTS SH7706 Schmit Inv. O.C Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. RTS[10]
Schmit Inv. O.C HRTS10_FAX1CS
O.C Schmit Inv. O.C Inv. CTS[10]
SUB_CTS
O.C Schmit Inv. HCTS10_FAX1CS
O.C Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv.
Schmit Inv.
F-model Internal FAX
MFPC
AC PWB SUB DC POWER SUPPLY F201
RC101 Voltage + 5Vo
T2AH250V Conversion
+
F101 + 5Vo
+ 5VL
~
~
+ 5VL
T5AH250V
-
N/F DCCNT2
RL101
RELAY FW
NR102 Generating
F103 Circuit
+5VL
T2AH250V
MSW DCCNT1
AC IN F1
L
20AH250V
A2 VR2
MAIN DC POWER SUPPLY

F2
F. AC power line diagram (100V)
Voltage
N F1 Conversion
+ 38V
North America no-mounting 15A/250V + 24V1
F3 + 24V2
T2AH250V NR1 N/F N/F + 24V3
+ 24V4
no-mounting + 24V5
+ 24V6
WH-L WH -N + 12V
+ 5VN
+ 3.3V
WARM HEATER SET : OPTION

L1
RY1
no-mounting INT24V1
WH-SW L2
HL PWB
/HL_PR
WH PWB
SCN unit
WH-N 7W
WH-L RY2 WH1_SCN
NC
+24V TD2 TD1 TD3
NO
T1 G T1 G T1 G
WHPR2/ 4 SSR2 4 SSR1 4 SSR3

T2 T2 T2
1 1 HLOUT_UM 1 HLOUT_US
DESK HLOUT_UW
2 GND 2 GND 2 GND
10W
6 6 6
WH1_DESK
10W
WH2_DESK
drawer
LCC
HL Assist HL Main HL Sub
10W THERMOSTAT TS_S
WH_LCC
THERMOSTAT TS_M
FUSING UNIT
AC PWB SUB DC POWER SUPPLY F201
RC101 Voltage + 5Vo
T2AH250V Conversion
+
F101 + 5Vo
+ 5VL
~
~
+ 5VL
T3.15AH250V
-
N/F DCCNT2
RL101
RELAY FW
NR102 Generating
F103 Circuit
+5VL
T2AH250V
MSW DCCNT1
INLET
AC IN F1
L
T10AH250V
A2 VR2
MAIN DC POWER SUPPLY

F2
G. AC power line diagram (200V)
F1 Voltage
N Conversion
T10AH250V
+ 38V
T8AH250V + 24V1
F3 F4 + 24V2
T2AH250V T2AH250V NR1 N/F N/F + 24V3
+ 24V4
no-mounting + 24V5
+ 24V6
WH-L WH-N + 12V
+ 5VN
+ 3.3V
WARM HEATER SET : OPTION

L1
RY1
INT24V1
WH-SW L2
HL PWB
/HL_PR
WH PWB
SCN unit
WH-N 7W
WH-L RY2 WH1_SCN
NC
+24V TD2 TD1 TD3
NO
T1 G T1 G T1 G
WHPR2/ 4 SSR2 4 SSR1 4 SSR3

T2 T2 T2
1 HLOUT_UW 1 HLOUT_UM 1 HLOUT_US
DESK
2 GND 2 GND 2 GND
10W
6 6 6
WH1_DESK
10W
WH2_DESK
drawer
LCC
HL Assist HL Main HL Sub
10W THERMOSTAT TS_S
WH_LCC
THERMOSTAT TS_M
FUSING UNIT
GND1
AC PWB 24VPR
GND1 RELAY
MM DM DVM FUM
F208 38V
38V
T6.3AH250V
INTPR2 MOTHER
PWB
5VO
RELAY 2nd FAX IF PWB

5VO 5VO
24V 24V FAX2
5VL 5VL
3.3V 3.3V
INTPR1 3.3V
P-GND P-GND USB CONVERSION
D-GND D-GND
D-GND PWB
Option (Japan Only)
D-GND D-GND D-GND
OPE
F203
24V3 24V3 24V 24V A10V
CCD
A10V USB I/F
T6.3AH250V PWB D-GND
12V 12V 12V 12V A5V
A5V PWB
5VN 5VN 5VN 5VN A3.3V
A3.3V
MFP OPE
H. DC power line diagram
5VO
3.3V 3.3V PWB
5VN 5VN
D-GND D-GND
ORS PD
3.3V 3.3V 5VN 5VN 5VN PWB
D-GND D-GND D-GND
P-GND P-GND
D-GND D-GND D-GND
5VN 5VN
LVDS LCD UN
3.3V 3.3V PWB 3.3V
DC 24V 24V
Power 3.3V 3.3V FAX SCN CNT 24VPD 24V 24V
SUB 5VO 5VO 5VO 5VO P-GND P-GND P-GND INVERTOR
Supply DC 5VL 5VL 5VL 5V PWB D-GND D-GND PWB
D-GND D-GND
UN Power P-GND
Supply MFPC PWB Option FET CL
UN INVERTOR
12V 24VPD PWB
5VN P-GND P-GND CL
D-GND
HDD
FW
24V
ORS LED
FW PWB
24V 24V 24V_PD
5VN P-GND PM 5VN
3.3V 3.3V 3.3V DSPF
LSU 5VN 3.3V
P-GND D-GND BD D-GND
D-GND PWB P-GND
PCU 5V_LD 5V_LD 5V_LD
D-GND
LD
PWB
5V
GND1 12V
GND2 DSW-L_HV TRANS

FET 24VPR +/-BS
5VN DSW-R
DSW-F_HV TRANS TRANS
MHV
12V TRANS
GB
DSW-F TRANS Transfer Bias PWB

THV
F201
24V1 24VDSW
T6.3AH250V DSW-L
24V1 24V1 TRANS

DVBS
Main HVU
F202
24V2 24V2
T6.3AH250V 5VN
GND1
GND2 DRIVER POM1POM2 ADM1 ADM2 TRM VPM RRM
PWB GND1
F204
24V4
T6.3AH250V GND1
5VN LCC
GND2
Option INLET
AC IN
24V
F205 NF DCPS
24V5 24V5 24V5 24V5 24V5 24V5 GND
T6.3AH250V GND1 GND1 GND1 GND1
2 3 5V 2 3 5V
I O I O
G
G
1
1
F206 REGULATER REGULATER

24V6
T6.3AH250V GND1
5VN
GND2 INSERTER FIN FIN
100 SHEET-STAPLE FINISHER
Option Option(FIN only) Option
Main unit DSPF CNT PWB DSPF CCD PWB (1)
A. DSPF unit
SCN cnt PWB

CN13 CN6
GND 1 1 GND
GND 2 2 GND
3.3V 3 3 3.3V
3.3V 4 4 3.3V
5V 5 5 5V
12V 6 6 12V
24V 7 7 24V
24V 8 8 24V CN4 CN1
2. Actual wiring chart
24V 9 9 24V GND 1 41 GND

DSPF CNT PWB section 1/2
GND 10 10 GND AFE_RDD 2 40 AFE_RDD

B10B-PH-K-S B10B-PH-K-S AFE_WRD 3 39 AFE_WRD
AFE_SCLK 4 38 AFE_SCLK
AFE_CS 5 37 AFE_CS
/RES_CCDAD 6 36 /RES_CCDAD
GND 7 35 GND
A3.3V 8 34 A3.3V
A3.3V 9 33 A3.3V
A3.3V 10 32 A3.3V
A3.3V 11 31 A3.3V
A3.3V 12 30 A3.3V
A3.3V 13 29 A3.3V
CN11 CN8 GND 14 28 GND
GND 1 1 GND A5V 15 27 A5V
nPOF_SCN 3 3 POF_DSPF A5V 16 26 A5V
GND 5 5 GND A5V 17 25 A5V
/LVDS_STBY 7 7 /LVDS_STBY GND 18 24 GND
/STANDBY 9 9 /STANDBY A10V 19 23 A10V
nFWP_SCN 11 11 /FWP_SCN A10V 20 22 A10V
SCANUP 13 13 SCANUP GND 21 21 GND
RES_EXT/ 15 15 nRES_EXT/ RA- 22 20 RA-
GND 17 17 GND RA+ 23 19 RA+
FROM_DSPFCPU_INT/ 19 19 TO_SCANCPU_INT/ GND 24 18 GND
GND 21 21 GND RB- 25 17 RB-
_RXD_DSPF 23 23 nRXD_SCAN RB+ 26 16 RB+
_TXD_DSPF 25 25 nTXD_SCAN GND 27 15 GND
_CTS_DSPF 29 27 nRTS_SCAN RC- 28 14 RC-
_RTS_DSPF 27 29 nCTS_SCAN RC+ 29 13 RC+
DSCANDATA0- 2 2 SCANDATA0- GND 30 12 GND

DSCANDATA0+ 4 4 SCANDATA0+ CLK- 31 11 CLK-
GND 6 6 GND CLK+ 32 10 CLK+
DSCANDATA1+ 10 10 SCANDATA1+ RD- 34 8 RD-
GND 12 12 GND RD+ 35 7 RD+
DSCANDATA2+ 16 16 SCANDATA2+ RE- 37 5 RE-
GND 18 18 GND RE+ 38 4 RE+
DSCANCLKOUT- 20 20 SCANCLKOUT- GND 39 3 GND
DSCANCLKOUT+ 22 22 SCANCLKOUT+ AFE_CSTG 40 2 AFE_CSTG
GND 24 24 GND GND 41 1 GND
DSCANDATA3- 26 26 SCANDATA3- FI-RE41S-VF
DSCANDATA3+ 28 28 SCANDATA3+
GND 30 30 GND
501190-3017 501190-3017
(2)
1 SGND
2 D_SPPD2 SPPD2
DSPF CNT PWB 3 5V
B3B-PH-K-S
CN2
GND 1 1 SGND
D_SPPD2 9 2 D_SPPD3 SPPD3
5V 3 3 5V
DRIVER PWB GND 2 B3B-PH-K-S
D_SPPD3 11
CN6 CN1 5V 4
5V 1 1 5V GND 14 1 SGND
SGND 2 2 SGND D_SPPD4 10 2 D_SPPD4 SPPD4
D_SPFFAN 3 3 D_SPFFAN 5V 5 3 5V
SGND 4 4 SGND GND 15 1 SGND 3 B3B-PH-K-S
DSPF CNT PWB section 2/2
D_SPPD1 5 5 D_SPPD1 D_SPPD5 12 2 D_SPPD5 2

D_RANDOM 6 6 D_RANDOM 5V 6 3 5V 1
D_SOCV 7 7 D_SOCV 5V (Sensor) 8 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
D_SPOD 8 8 D_SPOD D_ROCD 18 1 SGND
D_SPUM_INA 9 9 D_SPUM_INA GND 17 2 D_SPPD5 SPPD5
D_SPUM_IN/A 10 10 D_SPUM_IN/A D_SOCD 13 3 5V
D_SPUM_INB 11 11 D_SPUM_INB GND 16 B3B-PH-K-S
D_SPUM_IN/B 12 12 D_SPUM_IN/B 5V (Sensor) 7
D_SLUMA 13 13 D_SLUMA B18B-PHDSS-B
D_SULM/A 14 14 D_SULM/A 1 D_ROCD
D_SLUMB 15 15 D_SLUMB 2 SGND ROCD
D_SLUM/B 16 16 D_SLUM/B 292161-2
D_SPOM_ENA 17 17 D_SPOM_ENA
D_SPOM_STEP 18 18 D_SPOM_STEP
D_SPOM_MODE 19 19 D_SPOM_MODE 1 D_SOCD
D_SPOM_DIR 20 20 D_SPOM_DIR 2 SGND SOCD
24V 21 21 24V 3 5V (Sensor)
PGND 22 22 PGND 175487-3
24V 23 23 24V
PGND 24 24 PGND
24V 25 25 24V
PGND 26 26 PGND CN5
B26B-PHDSS-B B26B-PHDSS-B 24V 1 5 24V
24V 2 4 24V
CN3 CN3 LAMP 3 3 LAMP CL-INV-R
D_SPUM_VREF 1 1 D_SPUM_VREF PGND 4 2 PGND
D_SPFM_VREF 2 2 D_SPFM_VREF PGND 5 1 PGND
D_SPOM_VREF1 3 3 D_SPOM_VREF1 5597-05CPB7F

D_SELA 5 5 D_SELA 2 PGND
D_SELB 6 6 D_SELB 1 PGND
D_SELC 7 7 D_SELC
VAREF 9 9 VAREF
D_SPWS 10 10 D_SPWS
AGND 11 11 AGND
CL
D_SPFC 12 12 D_SPFC
D_SRRC 13 13 D_SRRC
D_SRRBC 14 14 D_SRRBC
D_SPFM_CLK 17 17 D_SPFM_CLK CN7
D_SPFM_DIREC 18 18 D_SPFM_DIREC 3.3V 1
D_STRRC 19 19 D_STRRC GND 2
D_STRRBC 20 20 D_STRRBC CPU_RXD 3
D_STMPS 21 21 D_STMPS CPU_TXD 4
/D_STRC 22 22 /D_STRC NC 5
5V 23 23 5V NC 6
SGND 24 24 SGND BM06B-GHS-TBT
B24B-PHDSS-B B24B-PHDSS-B
1 D_SOCV
(3)
2 SGND SCOV
D_SPLS1 1
3 5V (Sensor)
SPLS1 SGND 2 DRIVER PWB 175487-3
5V (Sensor) 3 CN1
175487-3 2 D_SPLS1
CN4
1 SGND
D_SOCV 6 1 D_SPED1
3 5V (Sensor)
SGND 1 2 SGND SPED1
D_SPLS2 1 8 D_SPLS2
5V (Sensor) 5 3 5V (Sensor)
SPLS2 SGND 2 9 SGND
D_SPED1 8 175487-3
SGND 2
DRIVER PWB
175487-3 4 VAREF
5V (Sensor) 7
5 D_SPWS
D_STUD 10 1 D_STUD
PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H 6 AGND
SGND 3 2 SGND STUD
VAREF 1 VAREF 3 B9B-PH-K-S
SPWS D_SPWS 2 D_SPWS 2
SGND 4 175487-3
AGND 3 AGND 1
D_RANDOM 12
PHNR-03-H
5V 11
1 SGND
SGND 17
2 D_RANDOM SPRD
D_SPPD1 14
3 5V
5V 13
PHR-3
24V_TR 15
D_SPED2 1
/D_SPFC 16
SPED2 SGND 2
SGND 18 1 SGND
5V (Sensor) 3 CN2
B18B-PHDSS-B 2 D_SPPD1 SPPD1
175487-3 4 D_SPED2
3 5V
1 SGND
PHR-3
3 5V (Sensor)
D_STLD 1 6 D_STLD SMP-02V-BC
STLD SGND 2 2 SGND 1 24V_TR 1
5V (Sensor) 3 5 5V (Sensor) 2 /D_SPFC 2
SPFC
175487-3 8 D_SPOD SMR-02V-B
9 SGND
7 5V (Sensor) F-GND F-GND
D_SPOD 1 10 NC(SGND) 179228-4+292254-4
SPOD SGND 2 B10B-PHDSS-B 1 SGND 4
5V (Sensor) 3 2 D_STSET 3
175487-3 3 /D_STMP 2
STMPS
4 24V_TR 1
179228-4
CN5 CN9
1 D_SLUM/B SGND 1
2 D_SLUM/A D_STSET 2
SULM 3 D_SLUMB /D_STMP 3
4 D_SLUMA 24V_TR 4 PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H
5 24V_TR /D_STRRBC 5 2 /D_STRRC 1
B5B-PH-K-S 24V_TR 6 1 24V_TR 2
STRRC
/D_STRRC 7 PHNR-02-H
24V_TR 8 SMP-06V-NC

D_SPFM/B 11 1 D_SPFM/B 1
CN8
D_SPFM/A 13 2 D_SPFM/A 2
1 D_SPOM/B
D_SPFMB 19 3 D_SPFMB 3
2 D_SPOM/A SPFM
SPOM D_SPFMA 17 4 D_SPFMA 4
3 D_SPOMB
24V_SPFM 23 5 24V_SPFM 5
4 D_SPOMA
24V_SPFM 24 6 24V_SPFM 6
B4B-PH-K-S
/D_SRRBC 9 SMR-06V-N
24V_TR 10
/D_SRRC 20
CN7 24V_TR 12
1 D_SPUM/B NC(FAN_PWM) 26
2 D_SPUM/A FAN_LOCK 28
3 D_SPUMB PGND 25 PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H
SPUM 4 D_SPUMA 24V_TR 27 2 /D_SRRC 1
5 24V_SPUM 24V_TR 14 1 24V_TR 2
SRRC
6 24V_SPUM /D_STRC 18 PHNR-02-H
B6B-PH-K-S NC 15 PHNR-04-H+BU04P-TR-P-H
NC 16 1 NC(FAN_PWM) 4
NC 21 2 FAN_LOCK 3
NC 22 3 PGND 2
FAN
B28B-PHDSS-B 4 24V_TR 1
PHNR-04-H
SMP-02V-NC
2 /D_STRC 2
1 24V_TR 1
STRC
SMR-02V-N
PHR-13
CCD PWB SCN-CNT PWB EHR-3 CN8
SCN-CNT PWB
CN1 CN9 CN5 PHR-6 OCSW (NC) 1 nA_PNC
GND2 1 41 GND2 +5VN 1 1 +5VN (NC) 2 nA_COPY
AFE_CSTG 2 40 AFE_CSTG GND2 2 2 GND2 (NC) 3 nA_CA
GND2 3 39 GND2 /OCSW 3 3 /OCSW (NC) 4 nA_READY
RE+ 4 38 RE+ +24V3 4 (NC) 5 nA_AUD
RE- 5 37 RE- /SIZE_LED1 5 (NC) 6 +5VN
GND2 6 36 GND2 /SIZE_LED2 6 Soldering (LF) ORS LED PWB (NC) 7 GND2
RD+ 7 35 RD+ B6B-PH-SM4-TB +24V3
TO (NC) 8 +24V3
RD- 8 34 RD- /SIZE_LED1 AUDITER (NC) 9 (NC)
GND2 9 33 GND2 /SIZE_LED2 (NC) 10 nA_TC
CLK+ 10 32 CLK+ F-GND (NC) 11 +24V3
CLK- 11 31 CLK- FG 12 PNC-a
GND2 12 30 GND2 SRA-21T-4 13 GND2
RC+ 13 29 RC+ B13B-PH-K-S
RC- 14 28 RC-
GND2 15 27 GND2
RB+ 16 26 RB+ PHR-4
RB- 17 25 RB- CN1
GND2 18 24 GND2 MIM_A 1
RA+ 19 23 RA+ MIM_B 2 MIRROR
RA- 20 22 RA- MIM_XA 3
GND2 21 21 GND2 MIM_XB 4
MOTOR
A10V 22 20 A10V B4B-PH-SM4-TB
A10V 23 19 A10V
GND2 24 18 GND2
A5V 25 17 A5V
A5V 26 16 A5V
A5V 27 15 A5V GHR-03V-S EHR-3
GND2 28 14 GND2 CN14 MHPS
A3.3V 29 13 A3.3V MHPS 1 3 MHPS
A3.3V 30 12 A3.3V GND2 2 2 GND2
A3.3V 31 11 A3.3V +5VN 3 1 +5VN
A3.3V 32 10 A3.3V B3B-PH-K-S INVERTER PWB
A3.3V 33 9 A3.3V
A3.3V 34 8 A3.3V
GND2 35 7 GND2
/RES_CCDAD 36 6 /RES_CCDAD CN7 CN
AFE_CS 37 5 AFE_CS GND1 5 1 GND1 CN
AFE_SCLK 38 4 AFE_SCLK GND1 4 2 GND1 1 CL
AFE_WRD 39 3 AFE_WRD CL_ON 3 3 CL 2
AFE_RDD 40 2 AFE_RDD +24VPD 2 4 +24V
GND2 41 1 GND2 +24VPD 1 5 +24V
FI-RE41S-VF FI-RE41S-VF 5597-05CPB7F 5597-05APB
ORS PD PWB
6 GND
CN2 501189-5030 5 PD
GND2 29 4 5V_EXT
PD 28 1 PDSEL0
5V_EXT 27 2 PDSEL1
PDSEL0 26 3 PDSEL2
B. Scanner section and Operation section
MOTHER PWB PDSEL1 25 PHR-6 B6P-PH-K-S 501189-2030

CN11 VHR-6N VHR-6N CN6 PDSEL2 24 MFP OPE PWB
GND2 1 3 GND2 GND2 46 (NC) CN1
+24V3 2 1 +24V3 GND2 50 1 GND2
+12V 3 2 +12V GND2 49 (NC) Interface connector 2 GND2
+5VN 4 4 +5VN 5V_EXT 48 (NC) (MOTHER PWB) 17 5V_EXT
+3.3V 5 5 +3.3V GND2 47 20 GND2
GND2 6 6 GND2 3.3V_EXT 39 18 3.3V_EXT
B6P-VH B6P-VH nBZR 38 16 nBZR
nKEYIN 37 19 nKEYIN
CN7 PHR-15 PHDR-16VS-2 CN10 SEG0LEDBPR 36 15 SEG0LEDBPR
SCANDATA0- 1 WH WH1 SCANDATA0- SEG1LEDCRR 35 13 SEG1LEDCRR
SCANDATA0+ 2 PK PK2 SCANDATA0+ SEG2D0 34 11 SEG2D0
GND2 3 GY GY3 GND2 nF0D1 33 9 nF0D1
SCANDATA1- 4 WH WH 4 SCANDATA1- nF1D2 32 7 nF1D2 LCD INVERTER PWB
SCANDATA1+ 5 PK PK 6 SCANDATA1+ nF2G0 31 5 nF2G0
GND2 6 GY GY 5 GND2 nF3G1 30 3 nF3G1
SCANDATA2- 7 WH WH 8 SCANDATA2- GND2 40 (NC) 4 +5VO 1 +CCFT
BACK LIGHT
SCANDATA2+ 8 PK PK 10 SCANDATA2+ GND2 41 (NC) 6 GND2 2 /CCFT
GND2 9 GY GY 7 GND2 GND2 42 (NC) 12 nINFO_LED S02(8.0)B-BHS
SCANCLKOUT- 10 WH WH 12 SCANCLKOUT- GND2 43 (NC) 8 WU_LED
SCANCLKOUT+ 11 PK PK 14 SCANCLKOUT+ GND2 44 (NC) 10 POW_LED
GND2 12 GY GY 11 GND2 GND2 45 (NC) 14 nWU_KEY
SCANDATA3- 13 WH WH 16 SCANDATA3- GND2 23 501190-2029
SCANDATA3+ 14 PK PK 15 SCANDATA3+ GND2 22
GND2 15 GY GY 13 GND2 GND2 21 CN4
B15B-PH-K-S (NC) 9 3.3VPD GND2 20 GND2 5 5 GND2
B16B-PHDSS-B GND2 19 CCFT 4 4 CCFT
GND2 18 +24V3 3 3 +24V3
CN5 PHDR-16VS-2 PHDR-14VS-2 CN3 3.3V 17 LVDS PWB +24V3 2 2 +24V3
GND2 1 1 GND2 3.3V_EXT 16 GND2 1 1 GND2
+5VO 2 (NC) (NC) 2 (NC) 5V_EXT 15 BM05B-GHS-TBT GHR-05V-S PAP-05V-S B5B-PASK-1
nRES_MFPC_SCN 3 (NC) (NC) 3 nRES_MFPC_SCN(NC) 24V_EXT 14 CN3
nLCD_DISP 4 4 nLCD_DISP 24V_EXT 13 /YL(Y1) 4
nRES_SCN 5 5 nRES_SCN nYL(Y1) 12 XH(X1) 3 TOUCH

LCD_SEL2 6 6 LCD_SEL2 XH(X1) 11 501189-4030 YH(Y2) 2 PANEL
nRTS_SCN 7 7 nRTS_SCN YH(Y2) 10 CN1 /XL(X2) 1
LCD_SEL0 8 8 LCD_SEL0 nXL(X2) 9 1 GND2 52271-0469
TXD_SCN 9 9 TXD_SCN SC_TEMP 8 2 GND2 8.5inch LCD UN
LCD_SEL1 10 10 LCD_SEL1 VCONT 7 7 GND2 CN2
nCTS_SCN 11 11 nCTS_SCN nCCFT 6 29 GND2 GND2 1 1 GND2
LCD_SEL3 12 12 LCD_SEL3 PNL_SEL0 5 39 GND2 GND2 2 2 GND2
RXD_SCN 13 13 RXD_SCN PNL_SEL1 4 40 GND2 CK 3 3 CK
nPOF_SCN 14 14 nPOF_SCN PNL_SEL2 3 25 3.3V GND2 4 4 GND2
nSPED 15 (NC) B14B-PHDSS-B PNL_SEL3 2 19 3.3V_EXT GND2 5 5 GND2
nOCSW 16 (NC) DISP 1 23 5V_EXT NC 6 6 NC
B16B-PHDSS-B 501190-5017 3 24V_EXT R0 7 7 R0
5 24V_EXT R1 8 8 R1
CN6 PHDR-26VS-1 DF1B-26DES-2.5RC/DF1B-26DEP-2.5RC 37 nYL(Y1) R2 9 9 R2
+5VO 1 1 +5VO 1 35 XH(X1) GND2 10 10 GND2
GND2 2 2 GND2 2 33 YH(Y2) R3 11 11 R3
nINFO_LED 4 3 nINFO_LED 3 31 nXL(X2) R4 12 12 R4
nWU_LED 5 4 nWU_LED 4 27 SC_TEMP R5 13 13 R5
nPOW_LED 6 5 nPOW_LED 5 21 VCONT GND2 14 14 GND2
nWU_KEY 7 6 nWU_KEY 6 17 nCCFT G0 15 15 G0
GND2 3 7 GND2 7 POWER SW PWB 15 PNL_SEL0 G1 16 16 G1
nPWR_SW 8 9 nPWR_SW 9 2 GND2 11 PNL_SEL2 GND2 18 18 GND2
3 nPWR_SW 9 PNL_SEL3 G3 19 19 G3
PHR-3 36 DISP G4 20 20 G4
GND2 10 SD 10 GND2 10 SD 10 GND2 G5 21 21 G5
LCD_DATA3+ 11 PK 11 LCD_DATA3+ 11 PK 6 LCD_DATA3+ GND2 22 22 GND2
LCD_CLK+ 13 PK 14 LCD_CLK+ 14 PK 12 LCD_CLK+ B2 25 25 B2
LCD_CLK- 14 WH 15 LCD_CLK- 15 WH 14 LCD_CLK- GND2 26 26 GND2
LCD_DATA2+ 17 PK 17 LCD_DATA2+ 17 PK 18 LCD_DATA2+ B4 28 28 B4
GND2 21 SD 19 GND2 19 SD 28 GND2 GND2 30 30 GND2
LCD_DATA1+ 19 PK 20 LCD_DATA1+ 20 PK 24 LCD_DATA1+ Hsync 31 31 Hsync
LCD_DATA1- 20 WH 21 LCD_DATA1- 21 WH 26 LCD_DATA1- GND2 32 32 GND2
GND2 22 SD 22 GND2 22 SD 34 GND2 Vsync 33 33 Vsync
LCD_DATA0+ 23 PK 23 LCD_DATA0+ 23 PK 30 LCD_DATA0+ F-GND 34 34 F-GND
LCD_DATA0- 24 WH 24 LCD_DATA0- 24 WH 32 LCD_DATA0- ENAB 35 35 ENAB
+5V_EXT 25 25 +5V_EXT 25 MFP OPE PWB CN1 501571-4029 (NC) 36 36 (NC)
GND2 26 26 GND2 26 +3.3V 37 37 +3.3V
B26B-PHDSS-B +3.3V 38 38 +3.3V
NC 39 39 NC
FG +3.3V 40 40 +3.3V
SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2 FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55) FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55)
SRA-01T-3.2
KEYBOARD
North America N model: STANDARD
Other than North America N model: OPTION
USB CONVERSION KEY PWB
1
2 PWB FG
3 SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-51T-4 SRA-51T-4 MOTHER PWB
4
5 USB PWB PAP-07V-S/PALR-07V
6 CN CN (NC) 1 (NC) 1 (NC) GHR-10V-S CN16
7 1 VBUS2 VBUS2 5 2 VBUS2 2 10 VBUS2
8 2 D2- D2- 4 3 D2- 3 9 D2-
9 3 D2+ D2+ 3 4 D2+ 4 8 D2+
10 4 GND2 GND2 2 5 GND2 5 7 GND2
11 5 SHIELD2 SHIELD2 1 6 SHIELD2 6 6 SHIELD2
12 BM05B-GHS-TBT GHR-05V-S (NC) 7 (NC) 7 (NC) 5 VBUS3
TO KEYBOARD 13 4 D3-
14
TO USB I/F 3 D3+
15 2 GND3
16 1 SHIELD3
17 BM10B-GHS-TBT
18
19
20
21 CN PAP-06V-S / PALR-06VF PALR-05VF / PAP-05V-S PAP-06V-S/PALR-06V
22 VBUS3 BLUE 1 VBUS3 1 1 VBUS3 1 1 VBUS3 1
23 D3- BROWN 2 D3- 2 2 D3- 2 2 D3- 2 MFPC PWB
24 D3+ LIGHTBLUE 3 D3+ 3 3 D3+ 3 3 D3+ 3 CN1 CN19
25 GND3 GRAY 4 GND3 4 4 GND3 4 4 GND3 4 1 LCD_DATA0- LCD_DATA0- 1
26 SHIELD3 GRAY 5 SHIELD3 5 5 SHIELD3 5 5 SHIELD3 5 2 LCD_DATA0+ LCD_DATA0+ 2
27 Soldering 6 FG 6 (NC) 6 (NC) 6 (NC) 3 LCD_DATA1- LCD_DATA1- 3
4 LCD_DATA1+ LCD_DATA1+ 4
28
5 LCD_DATA2- LCD_DATA2- 5
FG FG 6 LCD_DATA2+ LCD_DATA2+ 6
7 LCD_CLK- LCD_CLK- 7
SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3 8 LCD_CLK+ LCD_CLK+ 8
9 LCD_DATA3- LCD_DATA3- 9
10 LCD_DATA3+ LCD_DATA3+ 10
11 nLCD_DISP nLCD_DISP 11
12 LCD_REFCLKIN LCD_REFCLKIN 12
13 SCANDATA3+ SCANDATA3+ 13
C. FAX section and USB section
14 SCANDATA3- SCANDATA3- 14
15 SCANCLKOUT+ SCANCLKOUT+ 15
16 SCANCLKOUT- SCANCLKOUT- 16
USB HUB PWB 18 SCANDATA2- SCANDATA2- 18
CN3 19 SCANDATA1+ SCANDATA1+ 19
20 SCANDATA1- SCANDATA1- 20
VBUS2 10
D1- 9 22 SCANDATA0- SCANDATA0- 22
D1+ 8 23 CH0_N CH0_N 23
GND2 7 24 CH0_P CH0_P 24
SHIELD1 6 25 CH1_N CH1_N 25
26 CH1_P CH1_P 26
VBUS3 5 27 CH2_N CH2_N 27
D2- 4 28 CH2_P CH2_P 28 CN5
D2+ 3 29 CLK_N CLK_N 29 +5V 1
GND3 2 30 CLK_P CLK_P 30 D- 2 USB2.0
31 CH3_N CH3_N 31
SHIELD2 1 D+ 3
32 CH3_P CH3_P 32 (TYPE-A)
BM10B-GHS-TBT 33 CH4_N CH4_N 33 GND2 4
CN4 GHR-04V-S PHR-11 CN17 34 (NC) CH4_P 34 UAR27-4K5J00
VBUS 4 1 VBUS 35 ECLK_LSU_N ECLK_LSU_N 35
GND2 1 2 GND2 36 ECLK_LSU_P ECLK_LSU_P 36
37 HSYNC_LSU_P HSYNC_LSU_P 37
RE_D+ 2 6 RE_D+ 38 HSYNC_LSU_N HSYNC_LSU_N 38
CN6
RE_D- 3 7 RE_D- 39 VSYNC_K_N VSYNC_K_N 39 +5V 1
BM04B-GHS-TBT 3 FP_D+ 40 VSYNC_K_P VSYNC_K_P 40 D- 2 USB2.0
CN5 CN2 GHR-05V-S 4 FP_D- 41 (NC) VSYNC_C_P 41 D+ 3
42 (NC) VSYNC_C_N 42 (TYPE-B)
(NC) 6 VBUS VBUS 5 (NC) 5 GND2 GND2 4
43 (NC) VSYNC_M_N 43
(NC) 5 D- FP_D+ 3 8 GND2 44 (NC) VSYNC_M_P 44 UBR23-4K2200
(NC) 4 D+ FP_D- 4 9 GND2 45 (NC) VSYNC_Y_P 45
(NC) 3 GND2 GND2 2 10 +5VL 46 (NC) VSYNC_Y_N 46
(NC) 2 SHIELD GND2 1 11 +5VL 47 LCDSEL0 LCDSEL0 47 CN9
48 DSR_Debug LCDSEL1 48
(NC) 1 SHIELD BM05B-GHS-TBT B11B-PH-K-S 49 5V_IN 5V_IN 49
TRP1+ 1
BM06B-GHS-TBT CN1 PHR-3 50 5V_IN 5V_IN 50 TRP1- 2
GND2 3 51 5V_IN 5V_IN 51 TRP2+ 3
+5VL 2 52 5V_IN 5V_IN 52 TRP2- 4
53 5V_IN 5V_IN 53 LAN
+5VL 1 TRP3+ 5
54 5V_IN 5V_IN 54
B3B-PH-SM4-TB 55 5V_IN 5V_IN 55 TRP3- 6
56 5V_IN 5V_IN 56 TRP4+ 7
57 5V_IN 5V_IN 57 TRP4- 8
58 5V_IN 5V_IN 58 SI-51005-F
59 TXD_Debug TXD_LCDsub 59
60 RXD_Debug TXD_LCDsub 60
61 PNL_USB_DN PNL_USB_DN 61
62 PNL_USB_DP PNL_USB_DP 62 CN17
2nd FAX I/F PWB 63 USB_VBUS 11 USB_VBUS 11 63 CD 1
64 MT_USB_RTN_P MT_USB_RTN_P 64
PHDR-32VS-1 PHDR-32VS-1 RXD 2
65 MT_USB_RTN_N MT_USB_RTN_N 65
CN15 66 GPO_PIC12VON GPO_PIC12VON 66 TXD 3
1 GND1 GND1 1 1 GND1 67 RXD_SCN RXD_SCN 67 DTR 4
2 GND2 GND2 2 2 GND2 68 nCTS_SCN nCTS_SCN 68 GND2 5
3 +3.3V +5V_OFF 3 3 +5V_OFF 69 TXD_SCN TXD_SCN 69 DSR 6
RS232C
70 nRTS_SCN nRTS_SCN 70

4 +3.3V +5V_OFF 4 4 +5V_OFF 71 nRES_SCN nRES_SCN 71
RTS 7
6 +24V3 +24V3 5 5 +24V3 72 nRES_PCU nRES_PCU 72 CTS 8
5 nFAXCS_CTS nFAXCS_CTS 6 6 nFAXCS_CTS 73 RXD_PCU RXD_PCU 73 RI 9
8 +5V_A +5V_A 7 7 +5V_A 74 nCTS_PCU nCTS_PCU 74 DBR30-091F100
75 TXD_PCU TXD_PCU 75
7 nFAXCS_RTS nFAXCS_RTS 8 8 nFAXCS_RTS
76 nRTS_PCU nRTS_PCU 76
10 FLVPP FLVPP 9 9 FLVPP 77 nPOF_MFPC nPOF_MFPC 77
9 nFAXD_CTS nFAXD_CTS 10 10 nFAXD_CTS 78 nREQ_PIC nREQ_PIC 78
12 GND2 GND2 11 11 GND2 79 nCLR_PIC nCLR_PIC 79
11 nFAXD_RTS nFAXD_RTS 12 12 nFAXD_RTS 80 TXD_PIC TXD_PIC 80 CN18
BOARD TO BOARD Connector
81 RXD_PIC RXD_PIC 81
14 GND2 GND2 13 13 GND2 82 PWM0 PWM0 82 GND2 1
2nd FAX 16 +5V_OFF +5V_OFF 14 14 +5V_OFF 83 nFAN_CNCT nFAN_CNCT 83 GND2 2
13 FAXCS_RXD_N FAXCS_RXD_N 15 15 FAXCS_RXD_N 84 nRST_PIC nRST_PIC 84 +3.3V 3
UN 15 FAXCS_RXD_P FAXCS_RXD_P 16 16 FAXCS_RXD_P 85 RES_MFP_MT RES_MFP_MT 85 +3.3V 4
86 PWM1 PWM1 86
18 nFAX_WUP nFAX_WUP 17 17 nFAX_WUP nCNCT_FAX 5
87 nREQ_PIC_INT nREQ_PIC_INT 87
17 FAXD_RXD_P FAXD_RXD_P 18 18 FAXD_RXD_P 88 TXD_FAX1_D TXD_FAX1_D 88 FAXD_TXD_N 6
19 FAXD_RXD_N FAXD_RXD_N 19 19 FAXD_RXD_N 89 RXD_FAX1_D RXD_FAX1_D 89 FAXD_TXD_P 7
20 GND2 GND2 20 20 GND2 90 RTS_FAX1_D RTS_FAX1_D 90 +5VL 8
21 FAXCS_TXD_N FAXCS_TXD_N 21 21 FAXCS_TXD_N 91 CTS_FAX1_D CTS_FAX1_D 91 nRES_FAX 9
92 TXD_FAX1_CS TXD_FAX1_CS 92
23 FAXCS_TXD_P FAXCS_TXD_P 22 22 FAXCS_TXD_P 93 RXD_FAX1_CS RXD_FAX1_CS 93 FAXCS_TXD_P 10
22 nRES_FAX nRES_FAX 23 23 nRES_FAX 94 RTS_FAX1_CS RTS_FAX1_CS 94 FAXCS_TXD_N 11
24 +5V_OFF +5V_OFF 24 24 +5V_OFF 95 CTS_FAX1_CS CTS_FAX1_CS 95 GND2 12
25 FAXD_TXD_P FAXD_TXD_P 25 25 FAXD_TXD_P 96 nRST_FAX1 nRST_FAX1 96 FAXD_RXD_N 13
97 nCNCT_FAX1 nCNCT_FAX1 97
27 FAXD_TXD_N FAXD_TXD_N 26 26 FAXD_TXD_N FAXD_RXD_P 14
98 nFAX2_WU_OC nFAX2_WU_OC 98
26 nCNCT_FAX nCNCT_FAX 27 27 nCNCT_FAX 99 3R3V_ECO 3R3V_ECO 99 nFAX_WUP 15 1st FAX
28 +3.3V +5V_OFF 28 28 +5V_OFF 100 RTS_Debug RTS_LCDsub 100 FAXCS_RXD_P 16
29 +3.3V +5V_OFF 29 29 +5V_OFF 101 3R3V_FAX 3R3V_FAX 101 FAXCS_RXD_N 17 UN
30 GND2 GND2 30 30 GND2 102 3R3V_FAX 3R3V_FAX 102 +5VL 18
103 3R3V_FAX 3R3V_FAX 103
GND2 31 31 GND2 104 CTS_Debug CTS_LCDsub 104 GND2 19
3.3V 32 32 3.3V 105 5V0_FAX 5V0_FAX 105 nFAXD_RTS 20
B32B-PHDSS-B B32B-PHDSS-B 106 USB_SEL_SW USB_SEL_SW 106 GND2 21
107 DTR_Debug LCDSEL2 107 nFAXD_CTS 22
108 LCDSEL3 LCDSEL3 108
109 GND2 GND2 109
FLVPP 23
110 GND2 GND2 110 nFAXCS_RTS 24
111 GND2 GND2 111 +5V0 25
112 GND2 GND2 112 nFAXCS_CTS 26
113 GND2 GND2 113
+24V3 27
114 GND2 GND2 114
115 GND2 GND2 115 +3.3V 28
116 GND2 GND2 116 +3.3V 29
117 GND2 GND2 117 GND2 30
118 GND1 GND1 118 GND1 31
119 (NC) (NC) 119
120 24V_FAX 24V_FAX 120
B31B-CSRK
TX25-120P-LT-H1E TX24-120R-LT-H1E
PCU PWB
CN20
CFM-R1_V 1
CFM-R2_V 2 (NC)
/CFM-R1_PWM 3
/CFM-R2_PWM 4
GND 5
GND 6 (NC)
CFM-R1LD 7 SMP-12V-NC/SMR-12V-N SMR-04V-N/SMP-04V-NC
CFM-R2LD 8 1 CFM-R1_V 1 1 CFM-R1_V 1
3.3V 9 2 /CFM-R1_PWM 2 2 /CFM-R1_PWM 2
CFM-R3LD 10 3 GND 3 3 GND 3 CFM-R1
HUD_RA 11 4 CFM-R1LD 4 4 CFM-R1LD 4
GND 12 5 /CFM-R2_PWM 5 SMR-04V-N/SMP-04V-NC
TH_RA 13 6 CFM-R2LD 6 1 CFM-R1_V 1
/CFM-R3_PWM 14 7 /CFM-R3_PWM 7 2 /CFM-R2_PWM 2
GND 15 8 CFM-R3LD 8 3 GND 3 CFM-R2
CFM-R3_V 16 (NC) 9 3.3V 9 4 CFM-R2LD 4
B16B-PHDSS-B 10 HUD_RA 10 SMR-04V-N/SMP-04V-NC
11 TH_RA 11 1 CFM-R1_V 1
12 GND 12 2 /CFM-R3_PWM 2
3 GND 3 CFM-R3
4 CFM-R3LD 4
D. Image process section
1 3.3V
2 HUD_RA Temperature/
3 GND humidity sensor
4 TH_RA
PHR-4
MOTHER PWB
LSU PWB
PHDR-28VS-1 PHDR-28VS-1
CN7 CN3 CN2 ˴PHDR-24VS-2 XAP-06V-1 CN2 CN5 PHDR-24VS-2 PHDR-20VS-2 CN1
GND 1 1 GND2 GND2 3 1 GND2 +5V_LD 23 BL BL 2 +5VLD
GND 2 2 GND2 +3.3V 1 3 +3.3V GND2 24 GY GY 1 GND2
5VLD 3 3 INT5V GND1 4 2 GND1 GND2 18 GY GY 3 GND2
5VLD 4 4 INT5V +24V3 2 4 +24V3 nSH_K1 15 BR BR 15 nSH_K1
GND 5 5 GND2 +5VN 5 5 +5VN GND2 1 GY GY 12 GND2
GND 6 6 GND2 GND2 6 6 GND2 nSH_K2 13 BR BR 13 nSH_K2
PCU_RES 7 7 PCU_RES GND2 21 S06B-XASK-1(LF)(SN) DT_K1- 14 WH WH 14 DT1-
/FAX_LED 8 (NC) (NC) 8 FAX_LED GND2 23 DT_K1+ 16 PK PK 16 DT1+ 2BEAM
/POF 9 9 nPOF GND2 24 ˴PHDR-16VS-2 CN3 GND2 12 SD SD 20 GND2
FWS 10 (NC) (NC) 10 FWS INT5V 22 1 +5V_LD GND2 2 SD SD 6 GND2 LD PWB
PCU_DTR 11 11 PCU_DTR GND2 10 2 GND2 DT_K2- 8 WH WH 8 DT2-
PCU_TXD 12 12 TXD_PCU nSCK_LSU 12 4 nSCK_LSU DT_K2+ 10 PK PK 10 DT2+
PCU_DSR 13 13 PCU_DSR GND2 11 3 GND2 nLDERR_K 11 11 nLDERR
PCU_RXD 14 14 RXD_PCU nTRANS_DAT 9 5 nTRANS_DAT VREF_K1 9 9 VREF_K1
GND 15 15 GND2 nRSV_DAT 14 6 nRST_DAT VREF_K2 7 7 VREF_K2
GND 16 16 GND2 JOBEND_INT 13 8 JOBEND_INT nENB_K 5 5 nENB_K
LSU_RST 17 17 LSU_RST LSUASIC_RST 8 7 LSUASIC_RST LD_CHK_2 6 17 LDCHK2
TRANS_DAT 18 18 TRANS_DAT nTRANS_RST 7 9 nTRANS_RST LD_CHK_1 3 18 LDCHK1
TRANS_RST 19 19 TRANS_RST VSYNC_K_N 18 11 VSYNC_K_N LD_CHK_3 17 19 LDCHK3
RSV_DAT 20 20 RSV_DAT VSYNC_K_P 17 12 VSYNC_K_P nLDERR_K2 4 (NC) (NC) 4 GND2
GND 21 21 GND2 NC 16 (NC) (NC) 13 VSYNC_K2_P S20B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
GND 22 22 GND2 NC 20 (NC) (NC) 14 VSYNC_K2_N
JOBEND_INT 23 23 JOBEND_INT GND2 19 16 GND2
SCK 24 24 SCK nPCU_TRG 15 10 nPCU_TRG
/PCU_TRG 25 25 nPCU_TRG B24B-PHDSS (NC) (NC) 15 GND2 PHR-4 CN1
(/POED) 26 (NC) (NC) 26 POED (NC) S16B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) GND2 21 4 GND2
GND 27 27 GND2 nBD 19 3 BD
5VL 28 (NC) (NC) 28 +5VL CN4 ˴PHDR-22VS-2 ˴PHDR-22VS-2 CN4 GND2 22 2 GND2 BD PWB
B28B-PHDSS-B B28B-PHDSS-B CH0_N 21 WH WH 1 CH0_N +5VN 20 1 +5VN
CH0_P 22 PK PK 2 CH0_P B24B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) S4B-PH-K-S
SMR-04V-N / SMP-04V-NC PHDR-10VS-2 CN13 GND2 19 SD SD 4 GND2
1 PWR_CPUFAN 1 1 PWR_CPUFAN CH1_N 17 WH WH 5 CH1_N
2 PWM_CPUFAN 2 3 PWM_CPUFAN CH1_P 18 PK PK 6 CH1_P
CFM-ICU 3 GND1 3 5 GND1 CH2_N 15 WH WH 7 CH2_N
4 LOCK_CPUFAN 4 7 LOCK_CPUFAN CH2_P 16 PK PK 8 CH2_P
(NC) 9 +24V3 GND2 14 SD SD 9 GND2
(NC) 2 PWR_HDDFAN GND2 13 SD SD 10 GND2
(NC) 4 PWM_HDDFAN CLK_N 11 WH WH 11 CLCLK_N

6 GND1 CLK_P 12 PK PK 12 CLCLK_P
HDD(SATA) 8 LOCK_HDDFAN CH3_N 9 WH WH 13 CH3_N
(NC) 10 +24V3 CH3_P 10 PK PK 14 CH3_P
B10B-PHDSS-B GND2 8 SD SD 15 GND2 CN1 PHR-5 179228-5 CN1
SATA POWER QR/P4-8P-C(01) / QR/P4-8S-C(01) CN12 GND2 7 16 GND2 nPOLY_CK 1 1 POLYCLK
+12V 15 1 +12V 1 1 +12V ECLK_LSU_N 5 WH WH 17 ECLK_LSU_N nPOLY_LOCK 2 2 /LOCK POLYGON
+12V 14 5 GND2 5 3 GND2 ECLK_LSU_P 6 PK PK 18 ECLK_LSU_P nPOLY_START 3 3 /START
+12V 13 4 5VN 4 2 5VN GND2 4 SD SD 19 GND2 GND1 4 4 GND1
GND2 12 8 GND2 8 4 GND2 GND2 3 SD SD 20 GND2 +24V3 5 5 +24V3
MOTOR
GND2 11 (NC) 7 PWR_CPUFAN 7 (NC) VHR-4N B4P-VH HSYNC_LSU_P 2 PK PK 21 HSYNC_LSU_P B5B-PH-K-S 292172-5(AMP)
GND2 10 (NC) 6 PWM_CPUFAN 6 (NC) HSYNC_LSU_N 1 WH WH 22 HSYNC_LSU_N
5VN 9 (NC) 3 GND1 3 (NC) B22B-PHDSS S22B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
5VN 8 (NC) 2 LOCK_CPUFAN 2 (NC)
5VN 7
GND2 6
GND2 5
GND2 4
+3.3V 3 (NC)
+3.3V 2 (NC)
+3.3V 1 (NC)
MFP CONTROL PWB

SATA SIGNAL CN4
GND2 1 1 GND2
SATA_TXP 2 2 SATA0_TX_P
SATA_TXN 3 3 SATA0_TX_N
GND2 4 4 GND2
SATA_RXN 5 5 SATA0_RX_N
SATA_RXP 6 6 SATA0_RX_P
GND2 7 7 GND2
6SAT07P-328B-B5
SATA 7pin
SMP-18V-NC/SMR-18V-N SSJC6-4 1 2
1 GND 1 1 GND
2 POD1 2 7 8
2 POD1 POD1
DRIVER PWB PCU PWB 3 5VN 3 3 5VN
4 POD2 4 PHR-3
5 POD3 5
6 CFM-UP1_V 6 3
7 /CFM-UP1_PWM 7 1 GND
8 GND 8 9 2 POD2
9 CFM-UP1LD 9 3 5VN
POD2
Driver1 10 CFM-UP3_V 10 PHR-3-R
PHDR-24VS-1 CN9 B26B-PHDSS-B CN3 11 /CFM-UP3_PWM 11
CN5 PUDP-36V-S (NC) 1 GND CFM-UP1_V 1 12 GND 12 4
SMP-03V-BC/SMR-03V-B
GND1 1 2 GND CFM-UP3_V 2 13 CFM-UP3LD 13 1 GND 1 1 GND
POM1CNT 16 3 POM1CNT /CFM-UP1_PWM 3 14 CFM-UP4_V 14 10
2 POD3 2 2 POD3
POM2CNT 6 4 POM2CNT /CFM-UP3_PWM 4 15 /CFM-UP4_PWM 15 3 5VN 3 3 5VN
POD3
POM1XA 20 5 POM1XA GND 5 16 GND 16 PHR-3
POM2XA 2 6 POM2XA GND 6 17 CFM-UP4LD 17
POM1A 18 7 POM1A CFM-UP1LD 7 (NC) 18 TH_EX 18 (NC) SMR-04V-N/SMP-04V-NC
POM2A 4 8 POM2A CFM-UP3LD 8 1 CFM-UP1_V 1
POM1B 14 9 POM1B 5VN 9 (NC) 2 /CFM-UP1_PWM 2
POM2B 8 10 POM2B 5VN 10 3 GND 3 FM-U1
POM1XB 12 11 POM1XB POD2 11 4 CFM-UP1LD 4
POM2XB 10 12 POM2XB POD1 12 SMR-04V-N/SMP-04V-NC
ADM1CNT 7 13 ADM1CNT GND 13 (NC) 1 CFM-UP3_V 1
ADM2CNT 17 14 ADM2CNT GND 14 2 /CFM-UP3_PWM 2
ADM1XA 3 15 ADM1XA 5VN 15 (NC) 3 GND 3 FM-U3
ADM2XA 21 16 ADM2XA CFM-UP4LD 16 4 CFM-UP3LD 4
ADM1A 5 17 ADM1A POD3 17 PHNR-04-H+BU04P-TR-P-H
ADM2A 19 18 ADM2A GND 18 4 CFM-UP4_V 1
ADM1B 9 19 ADM1B GND 19 (NC) 3 /CFM-UP4_PWM 2
ADM2B 15 20 ADM2B /CFM-UP4_PWM 20 2 GND 3 FM-U4
ADM1XB 11 21 ADM1XB GND 21 (NC) 1 CFM-UP4LD 4
E. Paper transport section (1/2)
ADM2XB 13 22 ADM2XB CFM-UP4_V 22

RRMCNT 36 (NC) 23 (nc) (/POED) 23 (NC)
TRMCNT 27 (NC) 24 (nc) TH_EX 24 (NC)
RRMXA 33 B24B-PHDSS-B 5VN or 5VL 25 (NC)
TRMXA 31 GND 26 (NC) PHDR-26VS-1
RRMA 35 Driver2 CN2
TRMA 29 CN10 VFM-EX3_V 1 (NC)
RRMB 34 (NC) 1 GND (nc) 2 (NC)
TRMB 25 (NC) 2 GND /VFM-EX3_PWM 3
RRMXB 32 3 RRMCNT VFM-BKL_V 4
TRMXB 23 4 TRMCNT GND 5 (NC)
VPMCNT 26 5 RRMXA /VFM-BKL_PWM 6 SMP-12V-NC/SMR-12V-N SSJC6-4 1 2
VPMB 24 6 TRMXA VFM-EX3LD 7 1 VFM-EX1_V 1 4 VFM-EX1_V 1
VPMXA 30 7 RRMA GND 8 2 /VFM-EX1_PWM 2 3 /VFM-EX1_PWM 2
7 8 VFM-EX1
VPMXB 22 8 TRMA VFM-EX1_V 9 3 GND 3 2 GND 3
VPMA 28 9 RRMB VFM-BKLLD 10 4 VFM-EX1LD 4 1 VFM-EX1LD 4
B36B-PUDSS-1 10 TRMB /VFM-EX1_PWM 11 5 /VFM-EX2_PWM 5 SSJC6-4
11 RRMXB VFM-BKU_V 12 6 VFM-EX2LD 6 3 PHNR-04-H+BU04P-TR-P-H
12 TRMXB GND 13 7 /VFM-EX3_PWM 7 4 VFM-EX1_V 1
(NC) 13 (nc) /VFM-BKU_PWM 14 8 VFM-EX3LD 8 3 /VFM-EX2_PWM 2
14 VPMCNT VFM-EX1LD 15 9 VFM-BKL_V 9 9 2 GND 3 VFM-EX2
15 VPMB GND 16 10 /VFM-BKL_PWM 10 1 VFM-EX2LD 4
16 VPMXA VFM-EX2_V 17 (NC) 11 GND 11
17 VPMXB VFM-BKULD 18 12 VFM-BKLLD 12 4 PHNR-04-H+BU04P-TR-P-H
18 VPMA /VFM-EX2_PWM 19 4 VFM-EX1_V 1
(NC) 19 (nc) CFM-UP2LD 20 3 /VFM-EX3_PWM 2
(NC) 20 (nc) GND 21 (NC) 10 2 GND 3 VFM-EX3
PHDR-20VS-1 B20B-PHDSS-B GND 22 1 VFM-EX3LD 4
VFM-EX2LD 23
/CFM-UP2_PWM 24 PHNR-04-H+BU04P-TR-P-H
5VN 25 (NC) 4 VFM-BKL_V 1
CFM-UP2_V 26 3 /VFM-BKL_PWM 2
GND 27 (NC) 2 GND 3 VFM-BKL
reserve1_in 28 (NC) 1 VFM-BKLLD 4
GND 29 (NC)
reserve1_out 30 (NC) PHDR-30VS-1 SMR-04V-B/SMP-04V-BC SMR-04V-B/SMP-04V-BC
B30B-PHDSS-B 1 VFM-BKU_V 1 1 VFM-BKU_V 1
CN6 2 /VFM-BKU_PWM 2 2 /VFM-BKU_PWM 2
5VN 1 3 GND 3 3 GND 3
VFM-BKU
5VN 2 4 VFM-BKULD 4 4 VFM-BKULD 4
GND 3
GND 4
/DM_D 5 PHNR-04-H+BU04P-TR-P-H
CN1 PAP-14V-S SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC /DVM_D 6 4 CFM-UP2_V 1
POM1_24V 1 6 POM1_24V 6 DMCLK 7 3 /CFM-UP2PWM 2
POM1_24V 2 5 POM1_24V 5 DVMCLK 8 2 GND 3 FM-U2
POM1B/ 3 4 POM1B/ 4 DM_LD 9 1 CFM-UP2LD 4

POM1B// 4 3 POM1B// 3 POM1 DVM_LD 10
POM1A// 5 2 POM1A// 2 FUM_LD 11 VHR-2N
POM1A/ 6 1 POM1A/ 1 (nc) 12 (NC) 1 +38V
SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC FUMCLK 13 2 GND1
POM2_24V 7 6 POM2_24V 6 VFM-BKRLD 14 PAP-05V-S B2PS-VH
POM2_24V 8 5 POM2_24V 5 /FUM_D 15 1 GND
POM2B/ 9 4 POM2B/ 4 GND 16 2 5VN DM
POM2B// 10 3 POM2B// 3 POM2 GND 17 3 /DM_D
POM2A// 11 2 POM2A// 2 /VFM-BKR_PWM 18 4 DMCLK
POM2A/ 12 1 POM2A/ 1 5VN 19 5 DM_LD
(nc) 13 (NC) VFM-BKR_V 20 S05B-PASK-2
(nc) 14 (NC) B20B-PHDSS-B
B14B-PASK-1 PHDR-20VS-2 VHR-2N
1 +38V
CN3 PAP-12V-S SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC 2 GND1
TRM_24V 1 6 TRM_24V 6 PAP-05V-S B2PS-VH
TRM_24V 2 5 TRM_24V 5 1 GND
TRMB/ 3 4 TRMB/ 4 2 5VN DVM
TRMB// 4 3 TRMB// 3 TRM 3 /DVM_D
TRMA// 5 2 TRMA// 2 4 DVMCLK
TRMA/ 6 1 TRMA/ 1 CN9 5 DVM_LD
RRM_24V 7 SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC +38VO 2 S05B-PASK-2
RRM_24V 8 6 RRM_24V 6 +38VO 3
RRMB/ 9 5 RRM_24V 5 AC PWB +38VO 4 VHR-2N
RRMB// 10 4 RRMB/ 4 GND 6 1 +38V
RRMA// 11 3 RRMB// 3 RRM GND 7 2 GND1
RRMA/ 12 2 RRMA// 2 GND 8 PAP-05V-S B2PS-VH
B12B-PASK-1 1 RRMA/ 1 B8P-VH 1 GND
VHR-8N 2 5VN FUM
CN4 PAP-06V-S SMP-06V-NC/SMR-06V-N SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC 3 /FUM_D
VPM_24V 1 6 VPM_24V 6 6 VPM_24V 6 4 FUMCLK
VPM_24V 2 5 VPM_24V 5 5 VPM_24V 5 5 FUM_LD
VPMB/ 3 4 VPMB/ 4 4 VPMB/ 4 S05B-PASK-2
VPMB// 4 3 VPMB// 3 3 VPMB// 3 VPM
VPMA// 5 2 VPMA// 2 2 VPMA// 2 SMR-04V-N/SMP-04V-NC
VPMA/ 6 1 VPMA/ 1 1 VPMA/ 1 1 VFM-BKR_V 1
B06B-PASK-1 2 /VFM-BKR_PWM 2
3 GND 3 VFM-BKR
4 VFM-BKRLD 4
PAPER FEED UNIT 1
1 24V1 1
M1PUS 2 /M1PUS 2
1 24V1 1
2 /M1PUS 2
GND 1 3 GND 3
M1PED /M1PED 2 4 /M1PED 4
5VN 3 5 5VN 5
PHR-3 6 GND 6
7 /M1LUD 7
8 5VN 8
9 5V_M1PFD 9 1 T1LUM
GND 1 10 GND 10 2 GND T1LUM
M1LUD /M1LUD 2 11 /M1PFD 11 PHR-2
5VN 3
PHR-3(RED) SMR-02V-N/SMP-02V-NC
1 24V1 1
2 /T1PUS 2 T1PUS
F. Paper transport section (2/2)
5V_M1PFD 1
M1PFD GND 2
/M1PFD 3 PCU PWB 1 T2LUM
PHR-3 2 GND
T2LUM
PHR-2
1 24V1 1
CN15 CN13 2 /T2PUS 2 T2PUS
1 24V1 T1LUM 1
2 24V1 T2LUM 2
3 /M1PUS GND 3
4 /M2PUS GND 4
5 GND 24V1 5
PAPER FEED UNIT 2 6 GND 24V1 6
7 /M1PED /T1PUS 7
8 /M2PED /T2PUS 8
SMP-02V-NC/SMR-02V-N 9 5VN 5VN 9
1 24V1 1 10 5VN 24V1 10 (NC)
M2PUS 2 /M2PUS 2 11 GND GND 11
12 GND (/DSKLS) 12 (NC)
13 /M1LUD /T1LUD 13 SMR-04V-N/SMP-04V-NC
14 /M2LUD GND 14 1 5VN 1 1 5VN
SMR-11V-N/SMP-11V-NC 15 5VN /T1PED 15 2 GND 2 2 GND
1 24V1 1 16 5VN /T1SPD 16 3 T1LUD 3 3 T1LUD T1S PWB
2 /M2PUS 2 17 5V_M1PFD 5VN 17 4 T1PED 4 4 T1PED
GND 1 3 GND 3 18 5V_M2PFD 5VN 18 PHR-4
M2PED /M2PED 2 4 /M2PED 4 19 GND GND 19
5VN 3 5 5VN 5 20 GND GND 20
PHR-3 6 GND 6 21 /M1PFD /T2LUD 21
7 /M2LUD 7 22 /M2PFD /T2SPD 22
8 5VN 8 23 24V1 /T2PED 23 SMP-10V-NC/SMR-10V-N
9 5V_M2PFD 9 24 24V1 5VN 24 1 5VN 1 1 5VN
GND 1 10 GND 10 25 /M1PFC B24B-PHDSS-B 2 GND 2 2 GND
M2LUD /M2LUD 2 11 /M2PFD 11 26 /DSKPFC1 3 T2LUD 3 3 T2LUD T2S PWB
5VN 3 27 M1LUM 4 T2PED 4 4 T2PED
PHR-3(RED) 28 Vref 5 GND 5 PHR-4
29 GND 6 T1SPD 6
30 GND 7 5VN 7
(NC) 31 (nc) 8 GND 8
5V_M2PFD 1 32 M1PWS 9 T2SPD 9
M2PFD GND 2 B32B-PHDSS-B 10 5VN 10 3 GND
/M2PFD 3 2 T1SPD T1SPD
PHR-3 1 5VN
179228-3

3 GND
2 T2SPD T2SPD
1 5VN
179228-3
1 24V1 2
M1PFC 2 /M1PFC 1
M1LUM 1
M1LUM GND 2
PHR-2
1 24V1 2
DSKPFC1 2 /DSKPFC1 1
Vref 3 1 Vref 1
M1PWS GND 1 2 GND 2
M1PWS 2 3 M1PWS 3
Soldering
1 24V1 3
T1PFC (NC) 2 (NC) 2
3 /T1PFC 1
Standard:JPN
PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H OPTION:EX100/EX200
1 24V1 2
DSKPFC2 2 /DSKPFC2 1
CN5
WH-L 3
WH PWB WH-N 1
B2P3-VH-BK
M2LUM 1 SRA-21T-4
M2LUM GND 2
PHR-2
CN6 VHR-10N
PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H 5VN 7 OPTION
1 24V1 2 B10P-VH
M2PFC 2 /M2PFC 1 CN3 ELR-12V/ELP-12V
DC/PS +24V4 7 4 WH-L 4
GND1 8 12 WH-N 12
OPTION B9P-VH VHR-9N 5 F-GND 5
1 TXD-FIN 1
2 RXD-FIN 2
3 /DTR-FIN 3 ELR-15V/ELP-15V
4 /DSR-FIN 4 (NC) 1 (NC) 1
5 RES-FIN 5 (NC) 2 (NC) 2
FIN 6 +24V5 6 3 TXD_LCC 3 LCC
7 5VN 7 4 RXD_LCC 4
8 GND2 8 5 /DTR_LCC 5
9 GND1 9 PCU PWB 6 /DSR_LCC 6
10 F-GND 10 7 RES_LCC 7
11 +24V6 11 8 F-GND 8
12 GND1 12 CN16 CN17 9 5VN 9
1 24V1 GND 1 10 GND 10
2 24V1 5V_MPFD2 2 11 +24V4 11
OPTION 3 /DSKPFC2 TXD_LCC 3 12 GND1 12
4 /T1PFC GND 4 13 /TRC_LCC 13
5 M2LUM RXD_LCC 5 (NC) 14 (+3.3V) 14
6 24V1 /MPFD2 6 (NC) 15 (GND1) 15
7 GND /DTR_LCC 7
8 /M2PFC 5V_LPPD 8
9 GND /DSR_LCC 9
10 GND GND 10
FIN 11 5VN RES_LCC 11 SRA-21T-4
12 TXD_FIN /LPPD 12
G. Transport section and Option section
13 /MM_D /TRC_LCC 13
14 RXD_FIN Reserve4_in 14 (NC) SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC SMP-06V-NC/SMR-06V-N
15 MMCLK GND 15 (NC) 1 5V_MPFD2 1 1 5V_MPFD2 1 1 5V_MPFD2
1 GND 1 16 /DTR_FIN 5VN 16 (NC) 2 GND 2 2 GND 2 2 GND MPFD2
2 TXD_FIN 2 17 MM_LD B16B-PHDSS-B 3 MPFD2 3 3 MPFD2 3 3 MPFD2
3 RXD_FIN 3 18 /DSR_FIN 4 5V_LPPD 4 4 5V_LPPD 4 PHR-3
TXD-FIN 1 4 /DTR_FIN 4 19 GND 5 GND 5 5 GND 5
RXD-FIN 2 5 /DSR_FIN 5 20 RES_FIN 6 LPPD 6 6 LPPD 6
/DTR-FIN 3 6 RES_FIN 6 21 GND
/DSR-FIN 4 SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC 22 GND
RES-FIN 5 23 /DSW-DSK 1 5V_LPPD
+24V5 6 24 /TANSET 2 GND LPPD
5VN 7 25 5VN 3 LPPD
GND2 8 26 5VN PHR-3
GND1 9 27 /T1PPD
F-GND 10 28 GND
MANUAL PAPER FEED UNIT
+24V6 11 29 (nc)
GND1 12 30 5VN PS-187
ELP-12V B30B-PHDSS-B
ELP-12V/ELR-12V
TXD-FIN 1 TXD_FIN 1 DSW-R
RXD-FIN 2 RXD_FIN 2
/DTR-FIN 3 /DTR_FIN 3
/DSR-FIN 4 /DSR_FIN 4 PHNR-09-H+BU09P-TR-P-H
RES-FIN 5 RES_FIN 5 1 GND 9 1 GND
IST +24V5 6 +24V5 6 2 MPLD1 8 2 MPLD1 MPLD1
5VN 7 5VN 7 3 5VN 7 3 5VN
GND2 8 GND2 8 4 MPLD2 6 DF3-3S-2C
GND1 9 GND1 9 5 MTOP1 5
F-GND 10 F-GND 10 6 MTOP2 4
+24V6 11 +24V6 11 7 GND 3
GND1 12 GND1 12 SRA-21T-4 8 MPFPWS 2 1 GND
QR/P4-24S-C(01)/QR/P4-24P-C(01) 9 Vref 1 2 MPLD2 MPLD2
1 DSW-F(R) 1 3 5VN
2 GND 2 DF3-3S-2C
3 MPLD1 3 GND 1
4 5VN 4 GND 2
CN6 SMP-02V-NC/SMR-02V-N 5 MPLD2 5 GND 3

5VN 9 1 5VN 1 6 MTOP1 6 GND 4 1 MTOP1
B10P-VH VHR-10N (NC) 2 (NC) 2 (NC) 7 MTOP2 7 GND 5 2 GND MTOP1
CN4 8 GND 8 GND 6 (NC) 179228-2
DC/PS +24V5 1 CN12 9 MPFPWS 9 DF11-6DS-2C
GND1 2 DSW-F(R) 1 10 Vref 10 +
+24V6 3 GND 2 (NC) 11 /MPFC 11 DF11-6DP-SP1(05)
GND1 4 GND 3 (NC) 12 24V1 12
B7P-VH GND 4 13 24V1 13 5VN 1 1 MTOP2
VHR-7N 24V1 5 14 /MFPUS 14 5VN 2 2 GND MTOP2
/MPLD1 6 15 GND 15 5VN 3 179228-2
/MFPUS 7 16 MPED 16 5VN 4
CN5 5VN 8 17 5VN 17 DF11-4DS-2C
GND1 5 GND 9 18 24V1 18 +
AC PWB +38VO 1 /MPLD2 10 19 /MPFGS 19 DF11-4DP-SP1(05) 1 GND
VHR8-N /MPED 11 20 5V_MPFD1 20 2 MPFPWS MPFPWS
/MTOP1 12 21 GND 21 3 Vref
5VN 13 22 MPFD1 22 PHR-3
VHR-2N /MTOP2 14 23 (NC) 23
+38V 1 24V1 15 24 DSW-R 24 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
GND1 2 MPFPWS 16 3 24V1 1
B2PS-VH PAP-05V-S /MPFGS 17 2 (NC) 2 MPFC
GND 1 Vref 18 1 /MPFC 3
MM 5VN 2 5V_MPFD1 19
/MM 3 /MPFC 20 SMR-02V-N/SMP-02V-NC
MMCLK 4 /MPFD1 21 1 24V1 1 MFPUS
MM-T 5 24V1 22 2 /MFPUS 2
S05B-PASK-2 GND 23
GND 24
GND 25 (NC) 1 GND
GND 3 DSW-R 26 2 MPED MPED
TANSET TANSET 2 B26B-PHDSS-B 3 5VN
5VN 1 DF3-3S-2C
179228-3
SMP-03V-NC/SMR-03V-N SMP-06V-NC/SMR-06V-N 1 24V1 1 MPFGS
5V_T1PPD 1 1 5V_T1PPD 1 1 5V_T1PPD 1 2 /MPFGS 2
T1PPD GND 3 2 GND 2 2 GND 2
T1PPD 2 3 T1PPD 3 3 T1PPD 3
179228-3 4 GND 4 1 5V_MPFD1
5 DSW-DSK 5 2 GND MPFD1
6 5VN 6 3 MPFD1
GND 3 PHR-3
DSWDSK DSW-DSK 2
5VN 1
179228-3
LEFT DOOR UNIT
PS-187
DSW-L
1 5V_APPD1
2 GND APPD1
3 /APPD1
PHR-3
DRIVER
1 5V_APPD2
2 GND APPD2
3 /APPD2
CN2 PHR-3
ADM1_24V 1
ADM1_24V 2 (NC) SMR-12V-N/SMP-12V-NC
ADM1B/ 3 1 5V_PFD2 1 1 5V_PFD2
ADM1B// 4 SMP-10V-NC/SMR-10V-N 2 /PFD2 2 2 GND PFD2
ADM1A// 5 1 ADM1_24V 1 3 5V_THPS2 3 3 PFD2
ADM1A/ 6 2 ADM1B/ 2 4 /THPS2 4 PHR-3
ADM2_24V 7 3 ADM1B// 3 5 /TCBPWM 5
ADM2_24V 8 (NC) 4 ADM1A// 4 6 /TCBIAS 6
H. Left door transport section
ADM2B/ 9 5 ADM1A/ 5 7 DSW-L 7

ADM2B// 10 6 ADM2B/ 6 8 DSW-L 8 1 THPS2
ADM2A// 11 7 ADM2B// 7 9 GND 9 2 GND THPS2
ADM2A/ 12 8 ADM2A// 8 DRAWER 10 TURM 10 3 5V_THPS2
(NC) 13 9 ADM2A/ 9 (NC) 11 24V1 11 (NC) 179228-3
B13B-PASK-1 10 ADM2_24V 10 QR/P4-32S-C(01)/QR/P4-32P-C(01) (NC) 12 /CFM-ADU 12 (NC)
1 DSW-L 1
2 ADM2A/ 2
3 ADM2A// 3 1 TURM
4 ADM2B// 4 2 GND TURM
5 ADM2B/ 5 PHR-2
6 5V_APPD1 6 1 GND
7 5V_APPD2 7 2 GND
8 5V_PFD2 8 (NC) 3 GND DF11-6DS-2C
9 5V_DSW-ADU 9 4 GND +
10 5V_AINPD 10 5 GND DF11-6DP-SP1(05)
11 24V1 11 6 GND
12 ADM1A/ 12
13 ADM1A// 13
14 ADM1B// 14
15 ADM1B/ 15
PCU PWB 16 ADM2_24V 16
17 24V1 17
18 /PFD2 18
(NC) 19 (NC) 19 (NC)
20 /THPS2 20
21 TURM 21
22 /TCBPWM 22 CN6
23 /TCBIAS 23 1 DSW-L Bias
CN4 24 5V_THPS2 24 2 DSW-L FPS-187
24V1 1 25 GND 25 3 /TCBIAS
GND 2 (NC) 26 GND 26 4 /TCB-PWM
GND 3 (NC) 27 /APPD1 27 SRA-21T-4 5 GND TB PWB
24V1 4 (NC) 28 /APPD2 28 6 F-GND
24V1 5 29 /AINPD 29 PHR-6
(/RRC) 6 (NC) 30 /DSW-ADU 30
/DGS 7 31 /DGS 31
CFM-DV_V 8 32 ADM1_24V 32 SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
TURM 9 SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
/CFM-DV_PWM 10
/TCBPWM 11
GND 12
5VN 13 (NC)
CFM-DVLD 14 DF11-4DS-2C SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC
(/THPS1) 15 (NC) + 1 ADM2A/ 1
/TCBIAS 16 DF11-4DP-SP1(05) 2 ADM2A// 2
GND 17 (NC) ADM2_24V 1 3 ADM2B// 3
5V_APPD1 18 ADM2_24V 2 (NC) 4 ADM2B/ 4
ADM2
5V_APPD2 19 ADM2_24V 3 5 ADM2_24V 5

/APPD1 20 ADM2_24V 4 6 ADM2_24V 6
/APPD2 21
GND 22 (NC) DF11-4DS-2C SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC
5V_PFD2 23 + 1 ADM1A/ 1
5V_THPS2 24 DF11-4DP-SP1(05) 2 ADM1A// 2
/PFD2 25 ADM1_24V 1 3 ADM1B// 3
/THPS2 26 ADM1_24V 2 (NC) 4 ADM1B/ 4
ADM1
GND 27 (NC) ADM1_24V 3 5 ADM1_24V 5
/DSW-ADU 28 ADM1_24V 4 6 ADM1_24V 6
5V_AINPD 29
5V_DSW-ADU 30
/AINPD 31 GND 1
GND 32 GND 2 (NC) PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
GND 33 GND 3 3 /AINPD 1 1 /AINPD
DSW-L 34 GND 4 2 GND 2 2 GND AINPD
PHDR-34VS-1 GND 5 1 5V_AINPD 3 3 5V_AINPD
GND 6 179228-3
DF11-6DS-2C
+
DF11-6DP-SP1(05)
1 /DSW-ADU
2 GND DSW-ADU
3 5V_DSW-ADU
179228-3
2 24V1 1
1 /DGS 2 DGS
SMR-04V-B/SMP-04V-BC
1 CFM-DV_V 1
2 /CFM-DV_PWM 2
3 GND 3 CFM-DV
4 CFM-DVLD 4
PROCESS UNIT
TONER HOPPER SMR-03V-B/SMP-03V-BC
1 12V1 1
TSDP-20V-K/TSDR-20V-K 2 PCS 2 PCS
24V1 1 1 24V1 1 3 PCS_LED 3
/TFSD 2 2 /TFSD 2
TFSD (NC) 3 (NC) 3 GND 3 TSDR-20V-K/TSDP-20V-K
GND 4 (NC) 4 (NC) 4 (NC) 1 PCS_LED 1
PHR-4 (NC) 5 (NC) 5 (NC) 2 PCS 2
(NC) 6 (NC) 6 (NC) 3 12V1 3
7 CRUM_DATA 7 (NC) 4 (NC) 4 (NC)
DRAWER 8 CRUM_CLK 8 (NC) 5 (NC) 5 (NC)
CRUM_DATA 1 9 5VN 9 PCU PWB (NC) 6 (NC) 6 (NC)
CRUM_CLK 2 10 GND 10 7 DL_P(24V) 7 1 DL_P(24V)
CRUM 5VN 3 (NC) 11 (NC) 11 (NC) 8 /DL 8 (NC) 2 (NC) DL
GND 4 12 24V1_TM 12 (NC) 9 (NC) 9 (NC) 3 /DL
TSHR-04V-K (NC) 13 24V1_TM 13 CN8 CN5 (NC) 10 (NC) 10 (NC) PHR-3
14 /TM1SXA 14 1 24V1_TM 12V1 1 (NC) 11 (NC) 11 (NC) SMP-02V-BC/SMR-02V-B
15 /TM1SA 15 2 24V1_TM GND 2 (NC) 12 24V1 12 1 24V1 1
PAP-06V-S/PALR-06V 16 /TM1SXB 16 3 /TM1SXA PCS_LED 3 13 /PSPS 13 2 /PSPS 2 PSPS
1 24V1_TM 1 17 /TM1SB 17 4 /TM1SA DL_P(24V) 4 14 TH_CL 14
I. Process section
2 (NC) 2 (NC) (NC) 18 (NC) 18 (NC) 5 /TM1SXB PCS 5 15 GND 15

3 /TM1SA 3 (NC) 19 (NC) 19 (NC) 6 /TM1SB /DL 6 16 5VN 16 (NC) 1 (NC)
TM1 4 /TM1SXA 4 20 F-GND 20 (NC) 7 TNCRU(NC) GND 7 (NC) 17 /TNFS 17 (NC) 2 (NC)
5 /TM1SB 5 8 TM2Aout 24V1 8 18 GND 18 3 TH_CL INT PWB
6 /TM1SXB 6 9 5VN GND 9 (NC) 19 (NC) 19 (NC) 4 GND
SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2 10 TM2Bout /PSPS 10 20 GND2 20 PHR-4
11 CRUM_CLK TH_CL 11
12 24V1 5VN 12 SMP-03V-NC/SMR-03V-N
13 CRUM_DATA /TLS 13 SRA-01T-3.2 1 5VN 1 1 5VN
SMR-02V-N/SMP-02V-NC 14 /TFSD /TNFS 14 2 /TNFS 2 2 /TNFS TNFS
2 TM2Bout 2 15 GND GND 15 (NC) SRA-01T-3.2 3 GND 3 4 GND
TM2 1 TM2Aout 1 16 GND GND 16 3 (NC)
B16B-PHDSS-B 5VN 17 (NC) PHR-4
GND 18
B18B-PHDSS-B
(NC) 1 (NC) 5 (NC)
(NC) 2 (NC) 4 (NC)
(NC) 3 (NC) 3 (NC)
4 /TLS 2 1 /TLS
5 GND 1 2 GND TLS
179228-2
3 24V1 1
(NC) 2 (NC) 2 (NC) T2PFC
1 /T2PFC 3
HV PWB PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H
CN1 CN14 CN11 2 24V1 1
MHV DSW-F 1 1 DSW-F 24V1 1 1 /HPFC 2 HPFC
PS-187(RD) GND 2 (NC) 2 GND 24V1 2
SAA-21T-4L GND 3 3 GND /T2PFC 3
/GBPWM 4 4 GND /HPLS 4
VHR-2N /MHVREM 5 5 /GBPWM 24V1 5
1 GB MHV-T 6 6 /MHVREM DVCH1 6
(NC) 2 GB /THV+PWM 7 7 MHV-T /HPFC 7
SAA-21T-4L B2P-VH /THV+REM 8 8 /THV+PWM DVCH2 8
/CHV-PWM 9 9 /THV+REM 24V1 9 (NC)
/CHV-REM 10 10 /CHV-PWM DVCH3 10 PS UNIT
THV /CHVACPWM 11 11 /CHV-REM /PSBC 11 (NC)
FPS-187(WH) /CHVACREM 12 12 /CHVACPWM DVCH4 12
SRA-21T-3 /DVPWM 13 13 /CHVACREM 5VN 13 PHNR-06-H+BU06P-TR-P-H
/DVREM 14 14 /DVPWM 24V1 14 (NC) 1 (NC) 6 (NC)
VHR-2N-M HVREMout 15 15 /DVREM /PPD 15 (NC) 2 (NC) 5 (NC)
1 Bias 24V1 16 16 HVREMout TCS 16 3 5VN 4
(NC) 2 Bias B16B-PASK 17 24V1 GND 17 4 /PPD 3
B2P-VH 18 (nc) GND 18 5 GND 2 1 5VN
19 GND 5V_MPRD1 19 (NC) 6 (NC) 1 (NC) 2 /PPD PPD
20 GND TSGOUT 20 3 GND
21 M1SS1 GND 21 SMR-18V-N/SMP-18V-NC 179228-3
22 M2SS1 GND 22 (NC) 1 (NC) 1 (NC)
23 M1SS2 /MPRD1 23 (NC) 2 (NC) 2 (NC)
24 M2SS2 GND 24 3 5VN 3
25 M1SS3 5V_MPRD2 25 4 /PPD 4
26 M2SS3 HUD_DV 26 5 GND 5 SMR-08V-N/SMP-08V-NC
27 M1SS4 GND 27 6 5V_MPRD1 6 1 5V_MPRD1 1 1 5V_MPRD1
28 M2SS4 TH_DV 28 7 GND 7 2 GND 2 2 GND MPRD1
29 GND /MPRD2 29 8 /MPRD1 8 3 /MPRD1 3 3 /MPRD1
30 GND 3.3V 30 9 5V_MPRD2 9 4 5V_MPRD2 4 PHR-3(RED)
31 /M1SPD B30B-PHDSS-B 10 GND 10 5 GND 5

32 /M2SPD 11 /MPRD2 11 6 /MPRD2 6
33 5VN 12 24V1 12 7 24V1 7 1 5V_MPRD2
34 5VN 13 /HPLS 13 8 /HPLS 8 2 GND MPRD2
B34B-PHDSS-B (NC) 14 (NC) 14 (NC) 3 /MPRD2
(NC) 1 (NC) SMP-18V-NC/SMR-18V-N (NC) 15 (NC) 15 (NC) PHR-3
GND 2 1 GND 1 (NC) 16 (NC) 16 (NC)
M1SS1 3 2 M1SS1 2 (NC) 17 (NC) 17 (NC) SMP-02V-NC/SMR-02V-N
M1SS PWB M1SS2 4 3 M1SS2 3 (NC) 18 (NC) 18 (NC) 1 24V1 1
M1SS3 5 4 M1SS3 4 2 /HPLS 2 HPLS
M1SS4 6 5 M1SS4 5
PHR-6 6 GND 6
7 /M1SPD 7
8 5VN 8
(NC) 9 (NC) 9 (NC)
GND 3 10 GND 10 DEVELOPER UNIT
M1SPD /M1SPD 2 11 M2SS1 11
5VN 1 12 M2SS2 12
179228-3 13 M2SS3 13 DRAWER
14 M2SS4 14 QR/P8-20S-C(01)/QR/P8-20P-C(01)
15 GND 15 1 DVCH1 1 (NC)
16 /M2SPD 16 2 DVCH2 2
17 5VN 17 3 DVCH3 3 (NC)
(NC) 1 (NC) (NC) 18 (NC) 18 (NC) 4 DVCH4 4 (NC) 1 TSGOUT
GND 2 5 24V1 5 2 24V1
M2SS1 3 6 TCS 6 3 TCS TCS
M2SS PWB M2SS2 4 7 GND 7 4 GND
M2SS3 5 8 TSGOUT 8 51021-0400
M2SS4 6 (NC) 9 (NC) 9 (NC)
PHR-6 10 GND 10
(NC) 11 (NC) 11 (NC)
12 3.3V 12 1 3.3V
13 HUD_DV 13 2 HUD_DV
GND 3 14 GND 14 3 GND HUS-DV
M2SPD /M2SPD 2 15 TH_DV 15 4 TH_DV
5VN 1 (NC) 16 (NC) 16 (NC) PHR-4
179228-3 (NC) 17 (NC) 17 (NC)
(NC) 18 (NC) 18 (NC)
(NC) 19 (NC) 19 (NC)
20 DV-Bias 20
SPS-01T-110
PS-187-2V PHDR-34VS-1
DSW-F SMR-08V-N/SMP-08V-NC
1 DSW-L(F) 1
(NC) 2 (NC) 2 (NC)
OPTION 3 DSW-F 3 PCU PWB
(NC) 4 (NC) 4 (NC)
(NC) 5 (NC) 5 (NC) COIN VENDOR
(NC) 6 (NC) 6 (NC) CN1 CN21
24V1 1 7 24V1 7 1 GND 24V1 1
PNC /PNC 2 8 /PNC 8 2 INT24V GND2 2
179228-2 3 HLout_UM /CV_COPY 3
(NC) 4 GND /CV_COUNT 4
5 HLout_US /CV_START 5
6 /HLPR /CV_CA 6
7 HLout_UA /CV_CLCOPY 7
FUSING UNIT 8 5VN /CV_COLOR1 8
DRAWER (NC) 9 HLout_UW /CV_STAPLE 9
19LP-RWZV-K4GG-P6/19LR-RWZV-K2GG-R6 10 /WEBEND1 /CV_COLOR0 10
PHNR-05-H+BU05P-TR-P-H RCZR-10V-PS 11 TH_UM_IN /CV_DUPLEX 11
5VN 1 5 5VN 1 10 5VN 1 12 GND 5VN 12
WEBEND1 WEBEND1 2 4 WEBEND1 2 9 WEBEND1 2 13 TH_US_IN /CV_SIZE0 13
GND 3 3 GND 3 8 GND 3 14 5VN /CV_SIZE1 14
179228-3 2 WEBM1A 4 7 WEBM1A 4 (NC) 15 TH_LM_IN /CV_SIZE2 15
1 WEBM1B 5 6 WEBM1B 5 16 /WEBEND2 /CV_SIZE3 16
SMR-02V-N/SMP-02V-NC 5 WEBM2A 6 (NC) 17 GND B16B-PNDZS-1
1 WEBM1A 1 4 WEBM2B 7 18 GND
WEBM1 2 WEBM1B 2 (NC) 3 (NC) 8 (NC) 19 WEBM1Aout
(NC) 2 (NC) 9 (NC) 20 WEBM2Aout
(NC) 1 (NC) 10 (NC) 21 WEBM1Bout
SLP-02V/SLR-02VF PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H 22 WEBM2Bout
1 WEBM2A 1 2 WEBM2A 1 23 24V1
WEBM2 2 WEBM2B 2 1 WEBM2B 2 (NC) 24 24V1
25 /PNC
RCZR-09V-PS (NC) 26 /FRS
7 TH_UM_IN 3 (NC) 27 GND
2 GND 8 (NC) 28 GND
PHNR-04-H+BU04P-TR-P-H 3 TH_US_IN 7 29 DSW-L(F)
4 TH_UM_IN 1 4 GND 6 30 GND
RTH1 3 GND 2 (NC) 5 (NC) 5 (NC) 31 GND
2 TH_US_IN 3 (NC) 6 (NC) 4 (NC) (NC) 32 GND
1 GND 4 1 GND 9 (NC) 33 GND
8 WEBEND2 2 34 DSW-F
RTH2 9 5VN 1 B34B-PHDSS-B
J. Power source peripheral section
SUB DC P/S PWB

VLP-03V-BK
HL PWB CN1
CN2 CN4 1 L_DC CN3 MOTHER PWB
1 N-HL(MAIN) /HLPR 1 (NC) 2 (NC) +5VL 1 CN14
5VN 1 (NC) 2 L-HL(AS) HLout_UM 2 3 N_DC +5VL 2 1 GND2
WEBEND2 WEBEND2 2 1 L-HL(MAIN) 1 3 L-HL(SUB) HLout_UA 3 B2P3-VH GND2 3 2 nDCCNT1
GND 3 2 N-HL(MAIN) 2 B03P-VL-BK HLout_US 4 GND2 4 3 nDCCNT2
179228-3 3 N-HL(SUB) 3 GND 5 +5VO 5 B03B-PH-K
D1.25-M3(Ni) 4 N-HL(AS) 4 INT24V 6 CN2 GND2 6 CN10
(NC) 5 (NC) 5 (NC) B6B-PH-K-S 1 L_RY FW 7 (NC) 1 GND2
6 L-HL(SUB) 6 CN3 (NC) 2 (NC) FW 8 2 GND2
D1.25-M3(Ni) 1 L-HL(MAIN) (NC) 3 (NC) RY_CNT 9 3 5VL
D1.25-M3(Ni) THERMOSTAT(MAIN) 2 N-HL(AS) PHR-6 4 N_RY OFF_CNT 10 4 5VL
YLP-02V / YLR-02VF 3 N-HL(SUB) B2P4-VH B10P-VH 5 5VO
HL3 (AS) 1 N-HL(AS) 1 VLP-03V-R B03P-VL-R LCC 6 3.3V
2 N-HL(SUB) 2 7 5VN
VLR-03V / VLP-03V 8 12V
2 L-HL(MAIN) 2 VLP-01V/VLR-01VF DC P/S PWB 9 24V3
1 L-HL(MAIN) 1 HL1 (MAIN) 1 N-HL(MAIN) 1 CN-Acin CN3 VHR-9N 10 GND1
3 L-HL(SUB) 3 1 L(DC) +24V1 1 B10P-VH
YLP-02V / YLR-02VF (NC) 2 (NC) GND1 2 VHR-10N
1 N-HL(AS) 1 3 N(DC) +24V2 3
HL2 (SUB) 2 N-HL(SUB) 2 B2P3-VH GND1 4
+24V3 5
GND1 6
AC PWB +24V4 7
GND1 8
CN4 VHR-4N-B FW 9 (NC)
D1.25-M3(Ni) THERMOSTAT(SUB) D1.25-M3(Ni) L_DC 1 B9P-VH DRIVER PWB
NC 2 (NC) CN5 VHR-4N CN6
NC 3 (NC) +12V2 1 1 +24V
N_DC 4 GND2 2 2 GND1
THERMOSTAT(EX) B2P4-VH-B +12V2 3 3 5VN
VLR-03V-R/VLP-03V-R VLP-03V-K CN2 GND2 4 (NC) B3P-VH-R
1 MSW-Nout 1 MSW-Nout 1 1 MSW-Nout CN8 B4P-VH
MSW PS-250(BK) (NC) 2 NC 2 (NC) (NC) 2 NC 1 +38V1 CN6 VHR-10N
1 MSW-Lout 3 MSW-Lout 3 3 MSW-Lout 2 GND1 5VN 1
PS-250(BK) B03P-VL-K 3 +38V1 GND2 2
4 GND1 5VN 3 PCU PWB
VLR-03V/VLP-03V CN3 5 +38V1 GND2 4 (NC) POWER
1 MSW-Lin 1 MSW-Lin 1 1 MSW-Lin CN8 VHR-6N 6 GND1 5VN 5 CN19
PS-250(WH) (NC) 2 NC 2 (NC) (NC) 2 NC +38V1 1 B6P-VH GND2 6 (NC) 1 24V1
1 MSW-Nin 3 MSW-Nin 3 3 MSW-Nin +38V1 2 5VN 7 2 12V

PS-250(WH) VLP-03V-R B03P-VL-R +38V1 3 GND2 8 (NC) 3 5VN
GND 4 5VN 9 4 3.3V
CN1 VLP-03V VLR-02V/VLP-02V VLP-03V-E CN5 GND 5 GND2 10 (NC) 5 3.3V
L_HL 1 1 L_HL 1 1 L_HL GND 6 B10P-VH 6 GND
NC 2 (NC) 2 N_HL 2 (NC) 2 NC B6P-VH CN7 VHR-2N 7 GND
HL PWB N_HL 3 3 N_HL CN9 VHR-8N +3. 3V 1 8 GND
B03P-VL(WH) B03P-VL-E +38VO 1 GND2 2 9 GND
+38VO 2 B2P-VH SMP-02V-NC/SMR-02V-N 10 FW
+38VO 3 MM 1 5VN 1 VHR-10N B10P-VH
VLP-03V +38VO 4 DM CN4 VHR-7N (NC) 2 (NC) 2 (NC)
CN1 GND 5 DVM +24V5 1
<100V series> (AC CORD) 1 L_IN GND 6 FUM GND1 2 INSERTER & FIN
(NC) 2 NC GND 7 +24V6 3
3 N_IN GND 8 GND1 4
B03P-VL B8P-VH +24V7 5 (NC) AC
or VLP-03V or GND1 6 (NC) CN18
CN1 (NC) 7 (NC) 1 CFM-DC1_V
<200V series> (AC CORD) L_IN L_IN 1 L_IN B7P-VH 2 CFM-DC2_V
Standard:JPN FG FG (NC) 2 NC 3 /CFM-DC1_PWM
OPTION:EX100/EX200 N_IN N_IN 3 N_IN CN7 PHR-6 SMP-04V-NC/SMR-04V-N SMP-08V-NC/SMR-08V-N 4 /CFM-DC2_PWM
ELP-02V/ELR-02V ELP-02V/ELR-02V Inlet connecotor B03P-VL +38V-MON 1 1 CFM-DC1_V 1 1 CFM-DC1_V 1 5 GND
2 WH-N(SCN) 2 2 WH-N(SCN) 2 F-GND INTPR2 2 2 /CFM-DC1_PWM 2 2 /CFM-DC1_PWM 2 6 GND
WH-SCN 1 WH-L(SCN) 1 1 WH-L(SCN) 1 GND2 3 CFM-DC1 3 GND 3 3 GND 3 7 CFM-DC1LD
SRA-51T-4 INTPR 4 4 CFM-DC1LD 4 4 CFM-DC1LD 4 8 CFM-DC2LD
GND2 5 SMP-04V-NC/SMR-04V-N 5 CFM-DC2_V 5 (NC) 9 ReserveAN2in
+24VPR 6 1 CFM-DC2_V 1 6 /CFM-DC2_PWM 6 (NC) 10 5VN
WH PWB B6B-PH-K-S 2 /CFM-DC2_PWM 2 7 GND 7 11 38V_MON
ELR-02V/ELP-02V CN2 B2P3-VH-BL CN1 VHR-3N-R VHR-3N-R CN6 CFM-DC2 3 GND 3 8 CFM-DC2LD 8 (NC) 12 reserve3_in
2 WH-N(SCN) 2 1 WH-N(SCN) WH-N 1 1 N_WH 4 CFM-DC2LD 4 (NC) 13 GND
1 WH-L(SCN) 1 (NC) 2 (NC) (NC) 2 (NC) (NC) 2 NC (NC) 14 GND
3 WH-L(SCN) WH-L 3 3 L_WH 15 24V1
ELP-12V/ELR-12V CN5 B2P3-VH-BK B2P3-VH-R B2P3-VH-R 16 /WHPR
12 WH-N(LCC) 12 1 WH-N(LCC) WH-SW (NC) 17 /reserve2_out
5 F-GND 5 (NC) 2 (NC) (NC) 18 (nc)
4 WH-L(LCC) 4 3 WH-L(LCC) PS-250(WH) 19 INTPR1
Standard:JPN L_WH 1 20 INTPR2
OPTION:EX100/EX200 SRA-21T-4 CN6 PHR-3 PS-250(WH) 21 GND
CN3 B2P3-VH /WHPR 1 L_WH 1 22 GND
1 WH-N(DSK1) (NC) 2 (NC) 23 INT24V
WH-DSK1 (NC) 2 (NC) 24V1 3 (NC) 24 GND
3 WH-L(DSK1) B3B-PH-K-S B24B-PHDSS-B
CN4 B2P3-VH
1 WH-N(DSK2)
WH-DSK2 (NC) 2 (NC)
3 WH-L(DSK2)
3. Signal list
Connector level Connector Pin PWB
Signal name Name [Type] Function/Operation NOTE
"L" "H" No. No. name
38V_MON 38V monitor signal Detection of 38V for interlock OFF ON CN18 11 PCU
ADM1A ADU motor 1 control signal ADU motor 1 ON/OFF control – – CN9 17 PCU
ADM1B ADU motor 1 control signal ADU motor 1 ON/OFF control – – CN9 19 PCU
ADM1CNT ADU motor 1 current set signal ADU motor 1 current select Current Current CN9 13 PCU
Large Small
ADM1XA ADU motor 1 control signal ADU motor 1 ON/OFF control – – CN9 15 PCU
ADM1XB ADU motor 1 control signal ADU motor 1 ON/OFF control – – CN9 21 PCU
ADM2A ADU motor 2 control signal ADU motor 2 ON/OFF control – – CN9 18 PCU
ADM2B ADU motor 2 control signal ADU motor 2 ON/OFF control – – CN9 20 PCU
ADM2CNT ADU motor 2 current set signal ADU motor 2 current select Current Current CN9 14 PCU
Large Small
ADM2XA ADU motor 2 control signal ADU motor 2 ON/OFF control – – CN9 16 PCU
ADM2XB ADU motor 2 control signal ADU motor 2 ON/OFF control – – CN9 22 PCU
/AINPD ADU paper entry sensor ADU paper entry detection Paper – CN4 31 PCU
detection signal presence
/APPD1 ADU paper pass sensor 1 ADU upstream section paper Paper – CN4 20 PCU
detection signal pass detection presence
/APPD2 ADU paper pass sensor 2 ADU midstream section paper Paper – CN4 21 PCU
detection signal pass detection presence
CCFT LCD backlight Backlight for LCD ON OFF CN2 6 SCU
[CCFT cold-cathode tube]
/CFM-DC1_PWM Discharge fan motor PWM Discharge fan motor PWM Operating Stop CN18 3 PCU
control signal control
(Power cooling fan motor 1) (Power cooling fan motor 1)
CFM-DC1_V Discharge fan motor control Discharge fan motor control Stop Conduction CN18 1 PCU
signal (Power cooling fan motor 1)
(Power cooling fan motor 1)
/CFM-DC2_PWM Discharge fan motor PWM Discharge fan motor PWM Operating Stop CN18 4 PCU
CFM-DC2_V Discharge fan motor control Discharge fan motor control Stop Conduction CN18 2 PCU
signal (Power cooling fan motor 2)
(Power cooling fan motor 2)
CFM-DC2LD Discharge fan motor lock Discharge fan motor lock Normal Abnormal CN18 8 PCU
detection signal detection
CFM-DC1LD Discharge fan motor lock Discharge fan motor lock Normal Abnormal CN18 7 PCU
/CFM-DV_PWM Discharge fan motor PWM Discharge fan motor PWM Operating Stop CN4 10 PCU
(Developing cooling fan motor) (Developing cooling fan motor)
CFM-DV_V Discharge fan motor control Discharge fan motor control Stop Conduction CN4 8 PCU
signal (Developing cooling fan motor)
(Developing cooling fan motor)
CFM-DVLD Discharge fan motor lock Discharge fan motor lock Normal Abnormal CN4 14 PCU
(Developing cooling fan motor) (Developing cooling fan motor)
/CFM-R1_PWM Discharge fan motor PWM Discharge fan motor PWM Operating Stop CM20 3 PCU
(Process cooling fan motor 1) (Process cooling fan motor 1)
CFM-R1_V Discharge fan motor control Discharge fan motor control Stop Conduction CN20 1 PCU
signal (Process cooling fan (Process cooling fan motor
motor 1, 2, 3) 1, 2, 3)
CFM-R1LD Discharge fan motor lock Discharge fan motor lock Normal Abnormal CN20 7 PCU
/CFM-R2_PWM Discharge fan motor PWM Discharge fan motor PWM Operating Stop CN20 4 PCU
/CFM-R3_PWM Discharge fan motor PWM Discharge fan motor PWM Operating Stop CN20 14 PCU
/CFM-UP1_PWM Discharge fan motor PWM Discharge fan motor PWM Operating Stop CN3 3 PCU
(Fusing cooling fan motor 1) (Fusing cooling fan motor 1)

CFM-UP1_V Discharge fan motor control Discharge fan motor control Stop Conduction CN3 1 PCU
signal (Fusing cooling fan motor 1)
(Fusing cooling fan motor 1)
CFM-UP1LD Discharge fan motor lock Discharge fan motor lock Normal Abnormal PCU
control signal control signal
CFM-UP2LD Discharge fan motor lock Discharge fan motor lock Normal Abnormal CN2 20 PCU
/CHVACPWM High voltage control output Separation charger AC – – CN14 12 PCU
(Separation charger) (CHV) component PWM control
/CHVACREM High voltage control output Separation charger AC ON OFF CN14 13 PCU
(Separation charger) (CHV) component ON/OFF control
/CHV-PWM High voltage control output Separation charger DC – – CN14 10 PCU
(Separation charger) (CHV) component PWM control
/CHV-REM High voltage control output Separation charger DC ON OFF CN14 11 PCU
(Separation charger) (CHV) component ON/OFF control
CL_ON Scanner lamp Light is radiated on the ON OFF CN7 3 SCU
document for the CCD to scan
document images.
CLR_PIC Communication start timing Communication start signal Communi- – CN1 79 MOTHER
from MFPC cation start
CNCT_FAN Controller cooling fan stop Controller cooling fan stop Drive Stop CN1 83 MOTHER
control
CRU_CLK CLK for communication CLK for CRUM communication – – CN8 11 PCU
CRU_DATA Communication data address CRUM communication data – – CN8 13 PCU
signal address signal
/CV_CA Clear all signal (Coin vendor) Clear all (Coin vendor) Clear CN21 6 PCU
/CV_COUNT Clear all signal (Coin vendor) Count up (Coin vendor) Count UP CN21 4 PCU
/CV_DUPLEX Print count identification signal Print count identification signal DUPLEX CN21 11
(Duplex mode) (Duplex mode) mode
(For Coin vendor) (For Coin vendor)
(Single count or double count is
identified.)
/CV_SIZE0 Paper size signal 0 Paper size 0 (Coin vendor) CN21 13 PCU
(Coin vendor)
(Coin vendor)
(Coin vendor)
(Coin vendor)
/CV_STAPLE Staple mode signal Staple mode identification STAPLE CN21 9 PCU
(Coin vendor) (Coin vendor) mode
/CV_START Copy start signal Copy start status Copy start CN21 5 PCU
(Coin vendor) (Coin vendor)
DCCNT1 Main power control The main power is turned OFF. OFF ON CN14 2 MOTHER
DCCNT2 Sub power control The sub power is turned OFF. OFF ON CN14 3 MOTHER
/DGS Paper exit gate solenoid control Paper exit gate operation DUPLEX Single face CN4 7 PCU
signal mode

/DL Discharge lamp control signal Discharge lamp control Lighting OFF CN5 6 PCU
/DM_D Drum motor control signal DRUM motor ON/OFF ON OFF CN6 5 PCU
DM_LD Drum motor lock detection Drum motor lock detection – Lock CN6 9 PCU
signal
DMCLK Drum motor rotation speed Drum motor rotation speed – – CN6 7 PCU
/DSKPFC1 Paper feed tray 3, 4 paper Paper feed tray 3, 4 paper Paper – CN15 26 PCU
transport clutch control signal 1 transport control transport
/DSKPFC2 Paper feed tray 3, 4 paper Paper feed tray 3, 4 paper Paper – CN16 3 PCU
transport clutch control signal 2 transport control transport
/DSR_FIN Serial communication control Reception control – – CN16 18 PCU
signal
/DSR_LCC Serial communication control Reception control – – CN17 9 PCU
signal
/DSW-ADU ADU cover open/close Duplex (ADU) cover open/close Door open Door close CN4 28 PCU
/DSW-DSK Left door open/close detection Left door open/close detection Desk Desk CN16 23 PCU
signal (Desk section) (Desk section) Left door Left door
open close
DSW-F Front door open/close Front door open/close Left door Left door CN1 34 PCU
detection signal detection Open or Close or
Front door Front door
Open Close
DSW-F Front door open/close Front door open/close Left door Left door CN14 1 PCU
Open Close
DSW-L Left door open/close detection Left door open/close detection Left door Left door CN4 34 PCU
signal Open Close
DSW-R Manual feed open/close Manual feed open/close Left door Left door CN12 26 PCU
Open or Close or
Manual unit Manual unit
Pull-out Store
/DTR_FIN Serial communication control Transmission control – – CN16 16 PCU
signal
/DTR_LCC Serial communication control Transmission control – – CN17 7 PCU
signal
/DVCH2 DV unit identification signal 1 Installation is recognized. - - CN11 6 PCU
/DVM_D Developing motor control signal Developing motor ON/OFF ON OFF CN6 6 PCU
DVM_LD Developing motor lock Developing motor lock – Lock CN6 10 PCU
DVMCLK Developing motor rotation Developing motor rotation – – CN6 8 PCU
speed control signal speed control
/DVPWM Developing bias voltage control Developing bias PWM control – – CN14 14 PCU
signal (PWM)
/DVREM Developing bias control Developing bias ON/OFF ON OFF CN14 15 PCU
(ON/OFF) signal
/FUM_D Fusing motor control signal Fusing motor ON/OFF ON OFF CN6 15 PCU
FUM_LD Fusing motor lock detection Fusing motor lock detection – Lock CN6 11 PCU
signal
FUMCLK Fusing motor rotation speed Fusing motor rotation speed – – CN6 13 PCU
FW AC power full wave signal Power monitor – – CN19 10 PCU
/GBPWM Main charger grid bias voltage Main charger grid bias voltage – – CN14 5 PCU
(PWM) control signal (PWM) control
HLout_UA Heater lamp heating control Heater lamp heating control OFF Lighting CN1 7 PCU
signal (Upper assist) (Upper assist)
HLout_UM Heater lamp heating control Heater lamp heating control OFF Lighting CN1 3 PCU
signal (Upper main) (Upper main)
HLout_US Heater lamp heating control Heater lamp heating control OFF Lighting CN1 5 PCU
signal (Upper sub) (Upper sub)
/HLPR Fusing heater lamp power relay Fusing heater lamp power relay ON OFF CN1 6 PCU
/HPFC Horizontal paper transport Horizontal paper transport Paper – CN11 7 PCU
clutch control signal clutch control transport
/HPLS Paper guide lock solenoid Paper guide lock solenoid Lock – CN11 4 PCU
HUD_DV Developing humidity sensor Developing section humidity – – CN11 26 PCU
detection
HUD_RA Room humidity detection signal Room humidity detection – – CN20 11 PCU
HVREMout High voltage output control High voltage ON/OFF control OFF ON CN14 16 PCU
signal (MC/DV/TC) signal (MC/DV/TC)

INFO_LED FAX reception lamp [LED] FAX reception lamp lighting Lighting Off CN6 4 MOTHER
INTPR1 Interlock power relay control +38V interlock power relay OFF ON CN18 19 PCU
signal control
INTPR2 Interlock power relay control Interlock power relay control OFF ON CN18 20 PCU
signal
JOBEND_INT LSU job end signal The LSU notifies job end. – Job End CN7 23 PCU
LOCK_CPUFAN Controller cooling fan lock Controller cooling fan lock – Lock CN13 7 MOTHER
detection detection detection
/LPPD LCC paper pass detection Detection of paper entry from Paper pass – CN17 12 PCU
signal LCC
LSU_RST LSU reset signal The PCU resets the LSU. Operation Reset CN7 17 PCU
Enable
/M1LUD Paper tray upper limit detection Paper tray upper limit detection – Upper limit CN15 13 PCU
signal (Paper feed tray 3) (Paper feed tray 3)
M1LUM Lift-up motor control signal Lift-up motor control Stop Lifting CN15 27 PCU
/M1PED Paper empty detection signal Paper empty detection Paper empty Paper CN15 7 PCU
(Paper feed tray 3) (Paper feed tray 3) presence
/M1PFC Paper feed clutch (M1) control Paper feed tray 3 paper feed Paper – CN15 25 PCU
signal (Paper feed tray 3) control transport
/M1PFD Paper pass detection signal Detection of paper pass from Paper pass – CN15 21 PCU
(Multi paper feed tray 3) paper feed tray 3
/M1PUS Paper pickup solenoid control Paper pickup roller control Roller lifting Paper feed CN15 3 PCU
M1PWS Paper feed tray paper width Multi paper feed tray paper – – CN15 32 PCU
detection signal width detection
/M1SPD Paper remaining quantity . – Paper CN14 31 PCU
detection signal remaining
(Paper feed tray 3) quantity
66% or less
M1SS1 Paper size detection signal Paper size detection CN14 21 PCU
/M2LUD Paper tray upper limit detection Paper tray upper limit detection – Upper limit CN15 14 PCU
signal (Paper feed tray 4) (Paper feed tray 4) detection
M2LUM Lift-up motor control signal Lift-up motor control Stop Lifting CN16 5 PCU
/M2PED Paper empty detection signal Paper empty detection Paper empty Paper CN15 8 PCU
/M2PFC Paper feed clutch (M1) control Paper feed tray 4 paper feed Paper – CN16 8 PCU
signal (Paper feed tray 4) control transport
/M2PFD Paper pass detection signal Detection of paper pass from Paper pass – CN15 22 PCU
(Multi paper feed tray 4) paper feed tray 4
/M2PUS Paper pickup solenoid control Paper pickup roller control Roller lifting Paper feed CN15 4 PCU
/M2SPD Paper remaining quantity Paper remaining quantity – Paper CN14 32 PCU
detection (Paper feed tray 4) detection (Paper feed tray 4) remaining
signal quantity
66% or less
/MFPUS Paper pickup solenoid control Paper pickup solenoid control Roller – CN12 7 PCU
signal (Manual paper feed) (Manual paper feed) descending
Paper feed
MHPS Scanner home positions sensor Scanner home position – Home CN14 1 SCU
[Transmission type] detection position
/MHVREM Main charger control signal Main charger ON/OFF ON OFF CN14 6 PCU
MHV-T Main charger trouble detection Main charger trouble detection Trouble/ Normal CN14 7 PCU
signal without MHV
MIM_* Scanner motor Scanner (reading) section – – CN1 1, 2, SCU
[Stepping motor] 3, 4
/MM_D Main motor control signal Main motor ON/OFF control ON OFF CN16 13 PCU

MM_LD Main motor lock detection Main motor lock detection Rotation Stop/Lock CN16 17 PCU
signal
MMCLK Main motor rotation speed Main motor rotation speed – – CN16 15 PCU
control (CLK) signal control
/MPED Manual feed paper empty Manual paper feed tray paper Paper Paper empty CN12 11 PCU
detection signal empty detection presence
/MPFC Paper feed clutch control signal Manual paper feed tray paper Paper feed – CN12 20 PCU
(Manual feed) feed roller control
/MPFD1 Manual feed paper pass Detection of paper pass from Paper pass – CN12 21 PCU
detection signal 1 manual paper feed tray
/MPFD2 Manual feed paper pass Detection of paper pass from Paper pass – CN17 6 PCU
detection signal 2 manual paper feed tray and
LCC
/MPFGS Manual feed gate solenoid Manual feed gate control Paper pass Stopper CN12 17 PCU
control signal Enable
MPFPWS Manual feed paper width Manual feed paper width – – CN12 16 PCU
/MPLD1 Manual feed paper length Manual paper feed tray paper – Paper CN12 6 PCU
detection signal 1 length detection (Short) presence
/MPLD2 Manual feed paper length Manual paper feed tray paper – Paper CN12 10 PCU
detection signal 2 length detection (Long) presence
/MPRD1 Paper feed tray 2paper pass Detection of paper pass from Paper pass – CN11 23 PCU
detection signal 1 manual/paper feed tray 2/LCC
/MPRD2 Paper feed tray 2paper pass Detection of paper pass from Paper pass – CN11 29 PCU
detection signal 2 manual/paper feed tray 2/LCC
/MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out Manual paper feed tray pull-out – Store CN12 12 PCU
position detection signal 1 position detection (Store
position)
/MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out Manual paper feed tray pull-out – Pull-out CN12 14 PCU
position detection signal 2 position detection (Pull-out
position)
OCSW Original cover SW Document cover open/close Close Open CN5 3 SCU
[Transmission type] detection (Document size
detection trigger)
PCS Image density sensor signal Toner patch density detection – – CN5 5 PCU
on the OPC drum
PCS_LED Image density sensor LED Image density sensor LED light – – CN5 3 PCU
current control signal quantity control
PCU_DSR Serial communication control Transmission control signal – – CN7 13 PCU
signal (Serial communication)
PCU_DTR Serial communication control Reception control signal – – CN7 11 PCU
signal (Serial communication)
PCU_RES PCU reset signal The controller resets the PCU. Operation Reset CN7 7 PCU
Enable
PCU_RXD Serial communication reception Reception data from the – – CN7 14 PCU
data signal controller
/PCU_TRG LSU trigger signal The PCU detects the trigger Trigger – CN7 25 PCU
signal.
PCU_TXD Serial communication Transmission data to the – – CN7 12 PCU
transmission data signal controller
/PFD2 Paper feed section paper pass Detection of paper pass from Paper – CN4 25 PCU
sensor detection signal ADU/LCC/Desk section presence
/PNC Count-up signal Count-up (Personal counter) - – CN1 25 PCU
(Personal counter)
/POD1 Paper exit sensor 1 detection Detection of paper exit from the Paper – CN3 12 PCU
signal fusing section presence
/POD2 Paper exit sensor 2 detection Paper exit paper pass detection Paper pass – CN3 11 PCU
signal
/POD3 Paper exit sensor 3 detection Detection of paper delivery to – Paper CN3 17 PCU
signal the upper paper exit tray presence
/POF Power OFF status signal Power OFF status Power OFF Power ON CN7 9 PCU
POF_MFPC Power OFF signal transmission Main power OFF status signal Power OFF – CN1 77 MOTHER
transmission to MFPC
POF_PCU Power OFF signal reception Main power OFF status signal Power OFF – CN3 9 MOTHER
reception from PCU
POF_SCN Power OFF signal transmission Main power OFF status signal Power OFF – CN5 14 MOTHER
transmission to SCN
POM1A Paper exit motor 1 control Paper exit motor 1 ON/OFF – – CN9 7 PCU
signal control
POM1B Paper exit motor 1 control Paper exit motor 1 ON/OFF – – CN9 9 PCU
signal control
POM1CNT Paper exit motor 1 current set Paper exit motor 1 current Current Current CN9 3 PCU
signal select Large Small

POM1XA Paper exit motor 1 control Paper exit motor 1 ON/OFF – – CN9 5 PCU
signal control
POM1XB Paper exit motor 1 control Paper exit motor 1 ON/OFF – – CN9 11 PCU
signal control
POM2A Paper exit motor 2 control Paper exit motor 2 ON/OFF – – CN9 8 PCU
signal control
POM2B Paper exit motor 2 control Paper exit motor 2 ON/OFF – – CN9 10 PCU
signal control
POM2CNT Paper exit motor 2 current set Paper exit motor 2 current Current Current CN9 4 PCU
signal select Large Small
POM2XA Paper exit motor 2 control Paper exit motor 2 ON/OFF – – CN9 6 PCU
signal control
POM2XB Paper exit motor 2 control Paper exit motor 2 ON/OFF – – CN9 12 PCU
signal control
POW_LED Power lamp [LED] Power lamp lighting Lighting Off CN6 6 MOTHER
/PPD Resist roller front paper pass Paper pass detection in front of Paper pass – CN11 15 PCU
detection signal the resist roller
/PSPS Separation solenoid control Separation solenoid control Separation – CN5 10 PCU
signal
PWM_CPUFAN Controller cooling fan control Controller cooling fan control OFF ON (PWM CN13 3 MOTHER
control)
PWR_SW Operation panel power switch Operation panel power switch Pressing – CN6 8 MOTHER
[Push switch] pressing detection
REQ_PIC Communication request Communication request signal Communi- – CN1 78 MOTHER
to MFPC cation start
RES_FIN Finisher reset signal Finisher reset Operation Reset CN16 20 PCU
Enable
RES_LCC LCC reset signal LCC reset Operation Reset CN17 11 PCU
Enable
RRMA PS motor control signal PS motor ON/OFF control – – CN10 7 PCU
RRMB PS motor control signal PS motor ON/OFF control – – CN10 9 PCU
RRMCNT PS motor current set signal PS motor current select Current Current CN10 3 PCU
Large Small
RRMXA PS motor control signal PS motor ON/OFF control – – CN10 5 PCU
RRMXB PS motor control signal PS motor ON/OFF control – – CN10 11 PCU
/RSV_DAT Serial communication reception Data reception from the LSU – – CN7 20 PCU
data signal
RXD_FIN Serial I/F data (FINSHER) Serial I/F data – – CN16 14 PCU
(PCU PWB - FINSHER)
RXD_LCC Serial I/F data (LCC) Serial I/F data – – CN17 5 PCU
(PCU PWB - LCC)
RXD_PIC Serial communication Transmission data to MFPC – – CN1 81 MOTHER
transmission data signal
/SCK Serial communication clock LSU serial communication – – CN7 24 PCU
clock
/T1LUD Paper feed tray upper limit Paper feed tray upper limit Upper limit – CN13 13 PCU
detection signal detection (Paper feed tray 1)
(Paper feed tray 1)
T1LUM Paper tray lift-up motor control Paper tray lift-up control Stop Lifting CN13 1 PCU
/T1PED Paper empty detection signal Paper empty detection (Paper Paper empty Paper CN13 15 PCU
(Paper feed tray 1) feed tray 1) presence
/T1PFC Paper feed clutch control signal Paper feed clutch control Paper – CN16 4 PCU
(Paper feed tray 1) (Paper feed tray 1) transport
/T1PPD Paper pass detection signal Detection of paper pass from Paper pass – CN16 27 PCU
(Paper feed tray 1) Paper feed tray 1
/T1PUS Paper pickup solenoid control Paper pickup solenoid control Roller lifting Paper feed CN13 7 PCU
signal 1 (Paper feed tray 1)
/T1SPD Paper remaining quantity Paper remaining quantity – Paper CN13 16 PCU
detection signal detection (Tray 1) remaining
66% or less
/T2LUD Paper feed tray upper limit Paper feed tray upper limit Upper limit – CN13 21 PCU
detection signal detection (Paper feed tray 2)
(Paper feed tray 2)
T2LUM Paper tray lift-up motor control Paper tray lift-up control Stop Lifting CN13 2 PCU
/T2PED Paper empty detection signal Paper empty detection Paper empty Paper CN13 23 PCU
/T2PFC Paper feed clutch control signal Tandem tray 2 paper feed roller Paper – CN11 3 PCU
(Tandem tray 2) drive transport
/T2PUS Paper pickup solenoid control Paper pickup solenoid control Roller lifting Paper feed CN13 8 PCU
signal 2 (Paper feed tray 2)

/T2SPD Paper remaining quantity Paper remaining quantity – Paper CN13 22 PCU
detection signal detection (Tray 2) remaining
66% or less
/TANSET Paper feed tray 1, 2 Paper feed tray 1, 2 Pull-out Insert CN16 24 PCU
(Tandem tray) detection signal (Tandem tray) insertion
detection
/TCBias Transfer bias control signal Transfer belt cleaning output ON OFF CN4 16 PCU
control
/TCBPWM Transfer bias PWM control Transfer belt cleaning output ON OFF CN4 11 PCU
signal voltage PWM control
TCS Toner density detection signal Toner density detection – – CN11 16 PCU
/TFSD Toner remaining quantity Toner hopper remaining Remaining Remaining CN8 14 PCU
detection signal quantity detection quantity quantity
Large Small
TH_CL Process section peripheral Process section peripheral – – CN5 11 PCU
temperature sensor signal temperature detection
TH_DV Developing temperature Developing section peripheral – – CN11 28 PCU
detection signal temperature detection
TH_RA Room temperature detection Room temperature detection – – CN20 13 PCU
signal
TH_UM_IN Heater lamp (upper main) Heater lamp (upper main) – – CN1 11 PCU
temperature detection signal temperature detection
TH_US_IN Heater lamp (upper sub) Heater lamp (upper sub) – – CN1 13 PCU
temperature detection signal temperature detection
/THPS2 Transfer belt separation HP Transfer belt separation HP Separation Contact CN4 26 PCU
sensor 2 detection signal detection 2
/THV+PWM Transfer charger output control Transfer charger output control – – CN14 8 PCU
signal (THV) (PWM control)
/THV+REM Transfer charger control signal Transfer charger ON/OFF ON OFF CN14 9 PCU
(THV) control
/TLS Waste toner pipe lock detection Waste toner pipe lock detection – Lock CN5 13 PCU
signal
/TM1SA Toner motor 1 control signal Toner motor 1 ON/OFF control – – CN8 4 PCU
/TM1SB Toner motor 1 control signal Toner motor 1 ON/OFF control – – CN8 6 PCU
/TM1SXA Toner motor 1 control signal Toner motor 1 ON/OFF control – – CN8 3 PCU
/TM1SXB Toner motor 1 control signal Toner motor 1 ON/OFF control – – CN8 5 PCU
TM2Aout Toner motor 2 control signal Toner motor 2 ON/OFF control – – CN8 8 PCU
TM2Bout Toner motor 2 control signal Toner motor 2 ON/OFF control – – CN8 10 PCU
/TNFS Waste toner box full detection Waste toner box full detection Toner empty Toner CN5 14 PCU
signal presence
/TRANS_DAT Serial communication Transmission data to LSU – – CN7 18 PCU
transmission data signal
/TRANS_RST LSU communication reset The PCU resets LSU Reset Operation CN7 19 PCU
signal communication. Enable
/TRC_LCC LCC paper feed timing signal LCC paper feed timing control – – CN17 13 PCU
(PCU output)
TRMA PS front motor control signal PS front motor ON/OFF control – – CN10 8 PCU
TRMB PS front motor control signal PS front motor ON/OFF control – – CN10 10 PCU
TRMCNT PS front motor current set PS front motor current select Current Current CN10 4 PCU
signal Large Small
TRMXA PS front motor control signal PS front motor ON/OFF control – – CN10 6 PCU
TRMXB PS front motor control signal PS front motor ON/OFF control – – CN10 12 PCU
TSGout Toner density sensor gain Toner density sensor gain – – CN11 20 PCU
TURM Separation motor control signal Transfer unit separation Stop Transfer CN4 9 PCU
operation separation
TXD_FIN Serial I/F data (FINSHER) Serial I/F data – – CN16 12 PCU
(PCU PWB - FINSHER)
TXD_LCC Serial I/F data (LCC) Serial I/F data – – CN17 3 PCU
(PCU PWB - LCC)
TXD_PIC Serial communication reception Reception data from MFPC – – CN1 80 MOTHER
data signal
/VFM-BKL_PWM Discharge fan motor PWM Discharge fan motor PWM Operating Stop CN2 6 PCU
VFM-BKL_V Discharge fan motor control Discharge fan motor control Stop Conduction CN2 4 PCU
signal (Process cooling fan motor 4)
(Process cooling fan motor 4)
VFMBKLLD Discharge fan motor lock Discharge fan motor lock Normal Abnormal CN2 10 PCU

/VFM-BKR_PWM Discharge fan motor PWM Discharge fan motor PWM Operating Stop CN6 18 PCU
(Fusing discharge fan motor) (Fusing discharge fan motor)
VFM-BKR_V Discharge fan motor control Discharge fan motor control Stop Conduction CN6 20 PCU
signal (Fusing discharge fan motor)
(Fusing discharge fan motor)
VFM-BKRLD Discharge fan motor lock Discharge fan motor lock Normal Abnormal CN6 14 PCU
(Fusing discharge fan motor) (Fusing discharge fan motor)
/VFM-BKU_PWM Discharge fan motor PWM Discharge fan motor PWM Operating Stop CN2 14 PCU
(Paper cooling fan motor) (Paper cooling fan motor)
VFM-BKU_V Discharge fan motor control Discharge fan motor control Stop Conduction CN2 12 PCU
signal (Paper cooling fan motor)
(Paper cooling fan motor)
VFMBKULD Discharge fan motor lock Discharge fan motor lock Normal Abnormal CN2 18 PCU
(Paper cooling fan motor) (Paper cooling fan motor)
VFM-EX1_PWM Discharge fan motor PWM Discharge fan motor PWM Operating Stop CN2 11 PCU
VFM-EX1_V Discharge fan motor control Discharge fan motor control Stop Conduction CN2 9 PCU
signal (Process cooling fan (Process cooling fan motor
motor 1, 2, 3) 1, 2, 3)
VFM-EX1LD Discharge fan motor lock Discharge fan motor lock Normal Abnormal CN2 15 PCU
/VFM-EX2_PWM Discharge fan motor PWM Discharge fan motor PWM Operating Stop CN2 19 PCU
/VFM-EX3_PWM Discharge fan motor PWM Discharge fan motor PWM Operating Stop CN2 3 PCU
VPMA Vertical transport motor control Vertical transport motor – – CN10 18 PCU
signal ON/OFF control
VPMB Vertical transport motor control Vertical transport motor – – CN10 15 PCU
VPMCNT Vertical transport motor current Vertical transport motor current Current Current CN10 14 PCU
set signal select Large Small
VPMXA Vertical transport motor control Vertical transport motor – – CN10 16 PCU
VPMXB Vertical transport motor control Vertical transport motor – – CN10 17 PCU
/WEBEND1 Web end detection signal Web end detection – End CN1 10 PCU
(Upper side) (Upper side)
/WEBEND2 Web end detection signal Web end detection – End CN1 16 PCU
(Lower side) (Lower side)
WEBM1Aout Web motor 1 control signal Motor ON/OFF control – – CN1 19 PCU
WEBM1Bout Web motor 1 control signal Motor ON/OFF control – – CN1 21 PCU
WEBM2Aout Web motor 2 control signal Motor ON/OFF control – – CN1 20 PCU
WEBM2Bout Web motor 2 control signal Motor ON/OFF control – – CN1 22 PCU
/WHPR Dehumidifier heater power Dehumidifier heater control ON OFF CN18 16 PCU
relay control signal
WU_FAX FAX call-in detection Call-in signal from the second Call – CN15 17 MOTHER
[2nd I/F FAX] FAX line (Japan option) detection
WU_FAX2 FAX call-in detection [MFPC] Call-in signal from the first FAX Call – CN1 98 MOTHER
line (FAX option) detection
WU_KEY Power saving key detection Power saving key pressing Pressing – CN6 7 MOTHER
[Push switch] detection
WU_LED Power saving lamp [LED] Power saving lamp lighting Lighting Off CN6 5 MOTHER

[13] SERVICE WEB PAGE
MX-M753N 2. Details
Service and operation procedures
Manual
A. Procedures to enter the Hidden Web page
1. General exclusively used for the serviceman
The following functions are available on the Hidden Web Page 1) Boot a browser program.
exclusively used for the serviceman. 2) Enter the specified
URL (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/service_login.html) and enter the
Menu/Item Function and content servicing page menu.
Password Setting Used to set the password to enter the Hidden Default password: "service"
Web Page exclusively used for the serviceman.
Output of Test Page Used to print out the test page (system setting
contents).
Font/Form Download Used to download Font/Form.
Font/Form of PCL and PostScript, macro, and
other resources are downloaded to the HDD MX-M753N
and controlled. (PS, PCL5 only)

Device Cloning Used to import/export the system setting
information in XML format. By importing the
export file to the other device, the setting values
and setting contents of the device can be
copied to another device. This function is useful
to set the same setting to two or more machines
efficiently.
Filing Data Backup Used to import/export the document filing data
in the unit of folder.
User Control Used to shift to the user mode. After log in, the
screen is shifted to the setting screen of user
management.
User Control 2 Used to set the Pages Limit Group and the
Favorite Operation Group by authority of the
serviceman. (Select among preset items.)
Job Save Job Log Used to save the Job Log. NOTE: The password can be optionally changed in the Password
Log View Job Log Used to display the Job Log. Setting menu.
Update of Firmware Used to update the firmware version.
If the password is changed and forgotten, use SIM24-31 to
Syslog Administration Used to set the Log Type. (Set to the default.)
reset the password to the default.
*1 Settings
Storage/Send Keep all the items selected.
Settings
Save/ Delete Used to save or delete the log data.
B. Password Setting
Syslog
View Syslog Used to display the log data.
*1: This may be useful for troubleshooting when a trouble occurs.

When submission of the log data file is requested in order to MX-M753N
troubleshoot, use the log file save mode to export the log data
file to the client PC.
* The password can be optionally changed in the following proce-

dures.
1) Enter a new password.
2) Enter the new password again to make confirmation.
3) Click "Submit" (registration) button.
MX-M753N SERVICE WEB PAGE 13 – 1

C. Output of Test Page (3) Procedures to initialise and delete all files at a file
1) Click "Initialize" button.
2) Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press
OK key.
MX-M753N
NOTE: By the Write-Protect Setting function, the downloaded files
can be set to write protect.
E. Device Cloning
MX-M753N
1) Click "Print" button of an item or report to be printed.

When there is a list of items for selection, select one of the
items in the pull-down menu list, and click "Print" button.
The list is printed out.
D. Font/Form Download
MX-M753N
(1) Export
1) Select an item to be backed up.
2) Click "Execute" button.
Specify the save position of the file, and save the file.
(File name: *****.bin)
When the password is set, the set password must be entered
when importing.
(2) Import
1) Import from a file: Click "Refer" button to select the back-up
file. (File name: *****.bin)
2) Click "Execute" button to execute import.
If the password is set when exporting, the password must be
entered.
(1) Download of Font, Form, and Macro
3) Reboot the machine.
1) Select "Resource Type" from the pull-down menu list.
(Example: PCL/PostScript Font/Form or Macro)
2) Click "Refer" button to select a target file.
3) Click "Download" button.
The file is downloaded to the HDD.
The list of the downloaded files and the use percentage of the
HDD are displayed.
(2) Delete of downloaded font
(Procedures to delete a file separately)
1) Select a file to be deleted from the list of the downloaded files,
and click "Delete" button.
2) Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press
Yes key.
The file in the HDD is deleted.

F. Filing Data Backup H. User Control 2
MX-M753N MX-M753N
(1) Export Select the Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group.
1) Select the folder to be backed up. (The Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group must be
set in advance.)
The list display conditions can be specified by changing the
index and the number of display items on the pull-down menu. (Example of use)
2) Click "Execute" button. The use sets the conditions for servicing work by using the Pages
Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group functions in
Specify the save position of the file, and save the file. (File
advance, and the serviceman selects the set conditions in this
name: *****.bin)
mode for servicing work.
3) Click "Update" button.
(2) Import
I. Job Log
1) Click "Refer" button to select a target file. (File name: *****.bin)
2) Click "Execute" button. (1) Save Job Log
The target file is imported.
3) Click "Update" button.
G. User Control MX-M753N
MX-M753N
1) Click "Save" button, and specify the save position of the Job
Log to save it.
1) Enter the password to log in.

Default Password: admin
The screen is shifted to the setting menu of user management.

(2) View Job Log K. Syslog
There are following functions in the Syslog mode.
This function is provided to acquire the detailed Syslog to trouble-
shoot when a trouble occurs.
When submission of the log data file is requested for troubleshoot-
MX-M753N
ing, use the log file save mode to export the log data file to the cli-
ent PC.
Syslog Administration Settings Log Type Setting (Set to the default.)

Storage/Send Settings Set all the items selected.
Save/ Delete Syslog Log data save, delete
View Syslog Log data display
MX-M753N
(1) Administration Settings/ Log Type Setting

Set to the default.
1) Select a Jog Log item to be displayed. (In the default setting,

all the items are selected. Remove check marks of the items
which are not to be displayed.)
2) Click "Show" (display) button. MX-M753N
The Jog Log is displayed.
J. Update of Firmware
MX-M753N
1) Click "Refer" button to select a firmware file.

2) After selecting a firmware file, click "Execute" button.
The firmware data are sent to the machine, and update of the
firmware is processed.
During the process, the message of "Firmware Update, now
processing..." is displayed.

(2) Storage/Send Settings (4) View Syslog
Keep all the items selected.
MX-M753N
MX-M753N
1) Select a Syslog item to be displayed.

2) Click "Show" button.
The Syslog is displayed.
(3) Save/ Delete Syslog
MX-M753N
When saving the Syslog, click "Save" button and specify the save
position and save it.
When deleting, click "Delete" button.
Check to confirm that the confirmation message is displayed, and
press OK key.

Memo
Memo
Memo
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>
Solder composition Solder composition Solder composition code

code (Refer to the Sn-Ag-Cu a
Lead-Free table at the right.)
Sn-Ag-Bi
b
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
a
Sn-Zn-Bi z
5mm Sn-In-Ag-Bi i
Sn-Cu-Ni n
Sn-Ag-Sb s
Bi-Sn-Ag-P p
Bi-Sn-Ag
(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting-point of lead-free solder thread is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the
exclusive-use soldering iron is recommended.
(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting-point of lead-freeCOPYRIGHT ©
solder is about 220°C, which
XXXX is about 40°C higher
BYSHARP than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering
CORPORATION
capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land
separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature ALLofRIGHTS
components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when
RESERVED.
completion of soldering is confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron
tip after completion of soldering work. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of the publisher.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish) ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)
“BATTERY DISPOSAL”
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.
“TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES”

CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MÉMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANÈSE)
QUI DOIT ÊTRE TRAITÉE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MÉTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
COPYRIGHT © 2010 BY SHARP CORPORATION
All rights reserved.
Produced in Japan for electronic Distribution
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.
Trademark acknowledgements
• Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows NT® 4.0,
Windows® 2000, Windows® XP, Windows® Vista, Windows® 7,
Windows® Server 2003 and Internet Explorer® are registered trademarks
or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
• PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, Laser Writer, and Safari are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
• IBM, PC/AT, and Power PC are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
• Acrobat® Reader Copyright® 1987- 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights
reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
• Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATION
Business Solutions Group
CS Promotion Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2010 February Produced in Japan for electronic Distribution

Sharp mx-m623 mx-m753 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sharp mx-m623 mx-m753 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TopPage

NOTE FOR SERVICING

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

[6] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

[7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

[8] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

[9] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

[11] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

[13] SERVICE WEB PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

This document has been published to be used

NOTE FOR SERVICING [9] MAINTENANCE

2. Warning for servicing

MX-M753N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

5) Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

2) When and after removing the parts from an anti-static bag

6) Place of much dust

7) Place near a wall

8) Unstable or slant surface

MX-M753N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

MX-M753N NOTE FOR SERVICING - iii

STD: Standard provision. OPT: Option

MX-M753N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

MX-M753N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 2

Resolution Writing 100V series 200V series

CPU Power QUICC III-MPC8533E (800MHz) Size/resolution 8.5inch WVGA

(2) Document table

Type Document table fixed system (Flat bed)

(3) Automatic document feeder

Type DSPF (Duplex single pass feeder)

E. Paper feed section

• IBM PC/AT Scanner • Scan to e-mail

Setting item General

Item No. of registration items Each folder in the

* During the above setting on the operation panel, web access is

User’s selection section

Functional Basic function Number of copies, finishing, selecting

User’s selection section

Functional Basic Format, resolution, image quality, transmission

1. Supply system table

2. Maintenance parts list

MX-M753N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 1

B. Europe/Australia/New Zealand/Asia/Middle East/Agency

MX-M753N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 2

The lot number is of 10 digits. Each digit indicates the content as

Standard environmental Temperature 20 – 25 °C

MX-M753N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 3

1. Identification of each section and functions

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(14) (13) (12) (11)

No. Name Function/Operation

MX-M753N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 1

No. Name Function/Operation NOTE

MX-M753N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 2

No. Name Function/Operation

No. Name Function/Operation

MX-M753N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 3

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (9)

$872'992/ 0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7&+($9<%:63;

%˖ ˖7&&/($1,1*'&